Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2025-124 - 5/6/2025 - Approved
CONTRACT DOW ME NTS �s ES FOR CONSTRUCTION OF O . N . Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements 19032A O 1852 Plummer Associates, Inc. 500 N. Shoreline Blvd., Suite 710 / Corpus Christi, Texas 361-356-8412 TBPE Firm No. 13 Bid Set July 2024 Record Drawing Number WTR-494 CONFORMED DIVISION 00 PREFACE DOCUMENTS 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 00 01 00 Table of Contents 00 01 01 Seals Page 00 01 02 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 30 01 Bid Form 00 52 23 Agreement(Rev12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev 6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions (Rev 3-2024) Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work(Revco-201s) 01 12 16 Sequence of Construction 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment(Rev5-2020) 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-toss) 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 43 33 Manufacturer's Field Services 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Revs-2019) 01 53 30 Temporary Bypass Pumping 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev 8-2019) 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 70 00 Execution Requirements 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 75 25 Equipment Testing and Startup 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Table of Contents 00 0100-1 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements 19032A Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 36 Warranties 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training Division 02 Site Construction 02 41 00 Demolition 02 41 19 Selective Demolition Division 03 Concrete 03 00 20 Portland Cement Concrete 03 20 20 Reinforcing Steel 03 80 00 Concrete Structures Division 05 Metals 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 50 10 Anchor Bolts, Expansion Anchors,and Concrete Inserts 05 53 00 Metal Gratings Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 21 63 Fluid-Applied Condensation Migration Coating Division 08 Openings 089100 Louvers 3 Division 09 Finishes 099100 Painting and Protective Coatings Division 10 Specialties 10 14 19 Safety Signs 10 90 00 Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging Table of Contents 00 0100-2 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements 19032A Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section Division 23 Heating,Ventilating,and Air Conditioning 23 05 93 Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing 23 07 00 Thermal Insulation 23 31 00 Ductwork and Accessories 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 3 23 84 00 Humidification Control Equipment Division 26 Electrical 26 00 00 Electrical General Provisions 26 0S 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 0S 05 Selective Demolition for Electrical 26 0S 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 0S 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 28 16 Disconnects 3 Division 31 Earthwork 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 20 00 Earthwork 31 23 00 Excavation,Trenching,and Backfilling for Utilities 31 23 16 Excavation Support and Protection 312319 Dewatering Division 32 Exterior Improvements 32 11 00 Base Courses 32 92 19 Hydromulch Seeding 32 92 23 Sodding Table of Contents 00 0100-3 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements 19032A Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section Division 33 Utilities 33 01 10.58 Disinfection of Potable Water Piping and Tanks Division 40 Process Interconnections 40 05 05 Piping Systems, Basic Materials and Methods 40 05 07 Hangers and Supports for Piping Systems 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 31.13 Polyvinyl Chloride and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Process Pipe 40 05 51 Common Requirements for Process Valves 40 05 52 Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances 40 05 56 Gates,Slide and Weir 40 05 57.23 Electric Motor Actuators 40 05 61 Gate Valves 40 05 62 Plug Valves 40 05 64 Butterly Valves 40 08 00 Field Testing for Process Interconnections 40 42 13 Process Piping Insulation 40 71 00 Flow Measurement 40 76 39 Carbon Dioxide Analyzer Division 46 Water and Wastewater Equipment 46 61 13 Gravity Filtration Media Replacement 46 61 23 Gravity Filtration System END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 0100-4 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements 19032A Rev 1/2022 00 01 01 SEALS PAGE William C. Causey,Jr., P.E. #f ' Project Manager .,,- Plummer Associates, Inc. vda A' -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- `ZE OF T��► fk4 fll� James E. Landgraf, P.E. .**` ............ Chief Electrical Engineer j JAMES E. LANDGRAF ..............................� Signature Automation, LLC /r. : 75428AL /19/2024 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ilk 0 r*co Sophi Feng, P.E. 'r •.`,., *+��g : .......:. President .............................XUEFEI FENG KWH Engineering, LLC e * ' � c�sE• -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Ken Hanks, P.E. , Senior Structural Engineer =" *�� �...i.............. Jose I. Guerra, Inc. r, . °N,K*S.i'o . ......... 01 • 97528 �r .,li O,a� �tIFSS E:^'•NGt , AL END OF SECTION 1 of 1 0001 01 O.N. Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements-19032A Rev 1/2022 SECTION 00 0102 LIST OF DRAWINGS Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE Plans O.N. Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 00 0102-PAGE 1 OF 2 BID SET 0537-055-01 LIST OF DRAWINGS JULY 2024 THIS PAGE IS LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY PLUMMER ASSOCIATES,INC. 00 0102-PAGE 2 OF 2 BID SET 0537-055-01 LIST OF DRAWINGS JULY 2024 REYTCON-01 SRHEAUME ACORO CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE as DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) GS 5/12/2025 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT Camille Vaughan NAME: American Global LLC PHONE FAX 10001 Woodloch Forest Dr (A/C,No,Ezt):(832)941-5242 (A/C,No): Ste 250 ADDRESS:camille.vaughan@americanglobal.com The Woodlands,TX 77380 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A:Charter Oak Fire Insurance Company 25615 INSURED INSURER B:Phoenix Insurance Company 25623 Reytec Construction Resources,Inc. INSURER C:Travelers Property Cas. Co. of America 25674 1901 Hollister INSURER D:Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 Houston,TX 77080 INSURER E INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSD WVD MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD/YYYY A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE F-%F-1 OCCUR VTC20-CO-8S997931-COF-24 9/30/2024 9/30/2025 DAMAGE TO RENTED 300,000 X X PREMISES Ea occurrence $ MED EXP(Any oneperson) $ 10,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 4,000,000 POLICY ] JECT1:1 LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 4,000,000 OTHER: ELECTRONIC DATA $ 1,000,000 B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT 2,000,000 Ea accident $ X ANY AUTO X X VTC2N-CAP-8S997943-PHX-24 9/30/2024 9/30/2025 BODILY INJURY Perperson) $ OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS ONLY AUTOS BODILY INJURY Per accident $ X HIRED )( NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident $ C UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 X EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE X X CUP-8S997967-24-25 9/30/2024 9/30/2025 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 DED RETENTION$ $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY STATUTE ER ANY 0001295501 9/30/2024 9/30/2025 1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER/EXCLUDED?ECUTIVE X N/A E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Re:RFB 6126 Project No.19032A O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation apply to the General Liability,Auto Liability,and Umbrella policies per the attached endorsements.Waiver of Subrogation applies to the Workers Compensation policy per the attached endorsement if permissible by law.The additional insured coverage provided under the General Liability,Auto Liability,and Umbrella policies is primary and non-contributory per the attached endorsement.Notice of Cancellation applies per the attached endorsement(s). CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE City of Corpus Christi-Finance&Procurement THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN Y p ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. 1201 Leopard St.,1st Floor Corpus Christi,TX 78401 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 25(2016/03) ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD NAMED INSUED: Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. POLICY NUMBER: VTC20-CO-8S997931-COF-24 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED - AUTOMATIC STATUS IF REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT (CONTRACTORS) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART The following is added to SECTION II — WHO IS AN (a) The Additional Insured — Owners, Les- INSURED: sees or Contractors — Scheduled Person Any person or organization that: or Organization endorsement CG 20 10 a. You agree in a written contract or agreement to 07 04 or CG 20 10 04 13, the Additional include as an additional insured on this Coverage Insured — Owners, Lessees or Contrac- Part; and tors — Completed Operations endorse- ment CG 20 37 07 04 or CG 20 3 7 04 13, b. Has not been added as an additional insured for or both of such endorsements with either the same project by attachment of an endorse- of those edition dates; or ment under this Coverage Part which includes such person or organization in the endorsement's (b) Either or both of the following: the Addi- schedule; tional Insured —Owners, Lessees or Con- tractors — Scheduled Person Or Organi- is an insured, but: zation endorsement CG 20 10, or the Ad- a. Only with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or ditional Insured — Owners, Lessees or "property damage" that occurs, or for "personal Contractors — Completed Operations en- injury" caused by an offense that is committed, dorsement CG 20 37, without an edition subsequent to the signing of that contract or date of such endorsement specified; agreement and while that part of the contract or the person or organization is an additional in- agreement is in effect; and sured only if the injury or damage is caused, b. Only as described in Paragraph (1), (2) or (3) be- in whole or in part, by acts or omissions of low, whichever applies: you or your subcontractor in the performance (1) If the written contract or agreement specifical- of "your work" to which the written contract or ly requires you to provide additional insured agreement applies; or coverage to that person or organization by (3) If neither Paragraph (1) nor(2) above applies: the use of: (a) The person or organization is an addi- (a) The Additional Insured — Owners, Les- tional insured only if, and to the extent sees or Contractors — (Form B) endorse- that, the injury or damage is caused by ment CG 20 10 11 85; or acts or omissions of you or your subcon- (b) Either or both of the following: the Addi- tractor in the performance of "your work" tional Insured —Owners, Lessees or Con- to which the written contract or agree- tractors — Scheduled Person Or Organi- ment applies; and zation endorsement CG 20 10 10 01, or (b) Such person or organization does not the Additional Insured —Owners, Lessees qualify as an additional insured with re- or Contractors — Completed Operations spect to the independent acts or omis- endorsement CG 20 37 10 01; sions of such person or organization. the person or organization is an additional in- The insurance provided to such additional insured is sured only if the injury or damage arises out subject to the following provisions: of"your work" to which the written contract or a. If the Limits of Insurance of this Coverage Part agreement applies; shown in the Declarations exceed the minimum (2) If the written contract or agreement specifical- limits required by the written contract or agree- ly requires you to provide additional insured ment, the insurance provided to the additional in- coverage to that person or organization by sured will be limited to such minimum required the use of: limits. For the purposes of determining whether CG D6 04 02 19 ©2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2 NAMED INSUED: Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY POLICY NUMBER: VTC2O-CO-8S997931-COF-24 this limitation applies, the minimum limits required result in a claim. To the extent possible, such by the written contract or agreement will be con- notice should include: sidered to include the minimum limits of any Um- (a) How, when and where the "occurrence" brella or Excess liability coverage required for the or offense took place; additional insured by that written contract or (b) The names and addresses of any injured agreement. This provision will not increase the persons and witnesses; and limits of insurance described in Section III — Limits Of Insurance. (c) The nature and location of any injury or b. The insurance provided to such additional insured damage arising out of the "occurrence" or does not apply to: offense. (1) Any "bodily injury", "property damage" or (2) If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against "personal injury" arising out of the providing, the additional insured: or failure to provide, any professional archi- (a) Immediately record the specifics of the tectural, engineering or surveying services, claim or"suit" and the date received; and including: (b) Notify us as soon as practicable and see (a) The preparing, approving, or failing to to it that we receive written notice of the prepare or approve, maps, shop draw- claim or"suit" as soon as practicable. ings, opinions, reports, surveys, field or- (3) Immediately send us copies of all legal pa- ders or change orders, or the preparing, pers received in connection with the claim or approving, or failing to prepare or ap- "suit", cooperate with us in the investigation prove, drawings and specifications; and or settlement of the claim or defense against (b) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or the "suit", and otherwise comply with all policy engineering activities. conditions. (2) Any "bodily injury" or "property damage" (4) Tender the defense and indemnity of any caused by "your work" and included in the claim or "suit' to any provider of other insur- "products-completed operations hazard" un- ance which would cover such additional fin- less the written contract or agreement specifi- sured for a loss we cover. However, this con- cally requires you to provide such coverage dition does not affect whether the insurance for that additional insured during the policy provided to such additional insured is primary period. to other insurance available to such additional c. The additional insured must comply with the fol- insured which covers that person or organiza- lowing duties: tion as a named insured as described in Par- (1) Give us written notice as soon as practicable agraph 4., Other Insurance, of Section IV — of an "occurrence" or an offense which may Commercial General Liability Conditions. Page 2 of 2 ©2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. CG D6 04 02 19 NAMED INSURED: Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. POLICY NUMBER:VTC20-CO-8S997931-COF-24 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. XTEND ENDORSEMENT FOR CONTRACTORS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COVERAGE — This endorsement broadens coverage. However, coverage for any injury, damage or medical expenses described in any of the provisions of this endorsement may be excluded or limited by another endorsement to this Coverage Part, and these coverage broadening provisions do not apply to the extent that coverage is excluded or limited by such an endorsement. The following listing is a general coverage description only. Read all the provisions of this endorsement and the rest of your policy carefully to determine rights, duties, and what is and is not covered. A. Who Is An Insured —Unnamed Subsidiaries C. Incidental Medical Malpractice B. Blanket Additional Insured — Governmental D. Blanket Waiver Of Subrogation Entities — Permits Or Authorizations Relating To E. Contractual Liability—Railroads Operations F. Damage To Premises Rented To You PROVISIONS a. An organization other than a partnership, joint A. WHO IS AN INSURED — UNNAMED venture or limited liability company; or SUBSIDIARIES b. A trust; The following is added to SECTION II —WHO IS as indicated in its name or the documents that AN INSURED: govern its structure. Any of your subsidiaries, other than a partnership, B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED — joint venture or limited liability company, that is GOVERNMENTAL ENTITIES — PERMITS OR not shown as a Named Insured in the AUTHORIZATIONS RELATING TO OPERATIONS Declarations is a Named Insured if: a. You are the sole owner of, or maintain an The following is added to SECTION II — WHO IS ownership interest of more than 50% in, such AN INSURED: subsidiary on the first day of the policy period; Any governmental entity that has issued a permit and or authorization with respect to operations b. Such subsidiary is not an insured under performed by you or on your behalf and that you similar other insurance. are required by any ordinance, law, building code or written contract or agreement to include as an No such subsidiary is an insured for"bodily injury" additional insured on this Coverage Part is an or "property damage" that occurred, or "personal insured, but only with respect to liabi lity for "bodily and advertising injury" caused by an offense injury", "property damage" or "personal and committed: advertising injury" arising out of such operations. a. Before you maintained an ownership interest The insurance provided to such governmental of more than 50% in such subsidiary; or entity does not apply to: b. After the date, if any, during the policy period a. Any "bodily injury", "property damage" or that you no longer maintain an ownership "personal and advertising injury" arising out of interest of more than 50% in such subsidiary. operations performed for the governmental For purposes of Paragraph 1. of Section II —Who entity; or Is An Insured, each such subsidiary will be b. Any "bodily injury" or "property damage" deemed to be designated in the Declarations as: included in the .1 deemed operations hazard". CG D3 16 02 19 ©2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 3 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.,with its permission. NAMED INSURED: Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY POLICY NUMBER:VTC20-CO-8S997931-COF-24 C. INCIDENTAL MEDICAL MALPRACTICE pharmaceuticals committed by, or with the 1. The following replaces Paragraph b. of the knowledge or consent of, the insured. definition of "occurrence" in the S. The following is added to the DEFINITIONS DEFINITIONS Section: Section: b. An act or omission committed in providing "Incidental medical services" means: or failing to provide "incidental medical services", first aid or "Good Samaritan a. Medical, surgical, dental, laboratory, x-ray services" to a person, unless you are in or nursing service or treatment, advice or the business or occupation of providing instruction, or the related furnishing of professional health care services. food or beverages;or 2. The following replaces the last paragraph of b. The furnishing or dispensing of drugs or Paragraph 2.a.(1) of SECTION II — WHO IS medical, dental, or surgical supplies or AN INSURED: appliances. Unless you are in the business or occupation 6. The following is added to Paragraph 4.b., of providing professional health care services, Excess Insurance, of SECTION IV — Paragraphs (1)(a), (b), (c) and (d) above do COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY not apply to "bodily injury" arising out of CONDITIONS: providing or failing to provide: This insurance is excess over any valid and (a) "Incidental medical services" by any of collectible other insurance, whether primary, your "employees" who is a nurse, nurse excess, contingent or on any other basis, that assistant, emergency medical technician is available to any of your "employees" for or paramedic; or "bodily injury" that arises out of providing or (b) First aid or "Good Samaritan services" by failing to provide "incidental medical services" any of your "employees" or "volunteer to any person to the extent not subject to workers", other than an employed or Paragraph 2.a.(1) of Section II — Who Is An volunteer doctor. Any such "employees" Insured. or "volunteer workers" providing or failing D. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION to provide first aid or "Good Samaritan services" during their work hours for you The following is added to Paragraph 8., Transfer will be deemed to be acting within the Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us, scope of their employment by you or of SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL performing duties related to the conduct LIABILITY CONDITIONS: of your business. If the insured has agreed in a contract or 3. The following replaces the last sentence of agreement to waive that insured's right of Paragraph S. of SECTION III — LIMITS OF recovery against any person or organization, we INSURANCE: waive our right of recovery against such person or For the purposes of determining the organization, but only for payments we make applicable Each Occurrence Limit, all related because of: acts or omissions committed in providing or a. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" that failing to provide "incidental medical occurs; or services", first aid or "Good Samaritan services"to any one person will be deemed to b. "Personal and advertising injury" caused by be one "occurrence". an offense that is committed; 4. The following exclusion is added to subsequent to the execution of the contract or Paragraph 2., Exclusions, of SECTION I — agreement. COVERAGES — COVERAGE A — BODILY E. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY— RAILROADS INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY: 1. The following replaces Paragraph c. of the Sale Of Pharmaceuticals definition of "insured contract" in the "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising DEFINITIONS Section: out of the violation of a penal statute or c. Any easement or license agreement; ordinance relating to the sale of Page 2 of 3 ©2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. CG D3 16 02 19 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.,with its permission. NAMED INSURED: Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. POLICY NUMBER:VTC20-CO-8S997931-COF-24 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 2. Paragraph f.(1) of the definition of "insured a. Any premises while rented to you or contract' in the DEFINITIONS Section is temporarily occupied by you with permission deleted. of the owner; or F. DAMAGE TO PREMISES RENTED TO YOU b. The contents of any premises while such The following replaces the definition of "premises premises is rented to you, if you rent such damage" in the DEFINITIONS Section: premises for a period of seven or fewer "Premises damage" means "property damage"to: consecutive days. CG D3 16 02 19 C 2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 3 of 3 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.,with its permission. Policy Number:CO—OP952334—COF-24 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Effective 9/30/2024 Exp 9/30/2025 c. Method Of Sharing a. The statements in the Declarations are If all of the other insurance permits contribution accurate and complete; by equal shares, we will follow this method also. b. Those statements are based upon Under this approach each insurer contributes representations you made to us; and equal amounts until it has paid its applicable c. We have issued this policy in reliance upon limit of insurance or none of the loss remains, your representations. whichever comes first. The unintentional omission of, or unintentional error If any of the other insurance does not permit in, any information provided by you which we relied contribution by equal shares, we will contribute upon in issuing this policy will not prejudice your by limits. Under this method, each insurer's rights under this insurance. However, this provision share is based on the ratio of its applicable limit does not affect our right to collect additional of insurance to the total applicable limits of premium or to exercise our rights of cancellation or insurance of all insurers. nonrenewal in accordance with applicable insurance d. Primary And Non-Contributory Insurance If laws or regulations. Required By Written Contract 7. Separation Of Insureds If you specifically agree in a written contract or Except with respect to the Limits of Insurance, and agreement that the insurance afforded to an any rights or duties specifically assigned in this insured under this Coverage Part must apply on Coverage Part to the first Named Insured, this a primary basis, or a primary and non- insurance applies: contributory basis, this insurance is primary to a. As if each Named Insured were the only other insurance that is available to such insured Named Insured; and which covers such insured as a named insured, and we will not share with that other insurance, b. Separately to each insured against whom claim provided that: is made or"suit" is brought. (1) The "bodily injury' or"property damage" for 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others which coverage is sought occurs; and To Us (2) The "personal and advertising injury" for If the insured has rights to recover all or part of any which coverage is sought is caused by an payment we have made under this Coverage Part, offense that is committed; those rights are transferred to us. The insured must subsequent to the signing of that contract or do nothing after loss to impair them. At our request, agreement by you. the insured will bring "suit" or transfer those rights to us and help us enforce them. S. Premium Audit 9, When We Do Not Renew a. We will compute all premiums for this Coverage If we decide not to renew this Coverage Part,we will Part in accordance with our rules and rates. mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in b. Premium shown in this Coverage Part as the Declarations written notice of the nonrenewal advance premium is a deposit premium only. At not less than 30 days before the expiration date. the close of each audit period we will compute If notice is mailed, proof of mailing will be sufficient the earned premium for that period and send notice to the first Named Insured.The due date proof of notice. for audit and retrospective premiums is the date SECTION V—DEFINITIONS shown as the due date on the bill. If the sum of 1. "Advertisement" means a notice that is broadcast or the advance and audit premiums paid for the published to the general public or specific market policy period is greater than the earned segments about your goods, products or services premium, we will return the excess to the first for the purpose of attracting customers or Named Insured. supporters. For the purposes of this definition: c. The first Named Insured must keep records of a. Notices that are published include material the information we need for premium placed on the Internet or on similar electronic computation, and send us copies at such times means of communication; and as we may request. b. Regarding websites, only that part of a website 6. Representations that is about your goods, products or services By accepting this policy,you agree: for the purposes of attracting customers or supporters is considered an advertisement. Page 16 of 21 ©2017 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. CG T1 00 02 19 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.with its permission. POLICY NUMBER: VTC20-CO-8S997931-COF-24 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION - NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: ALL COVERAGE PARTS INCLUDED IN THIS POLICY SCHEDULE CANCELLATION: Number of Days Notice: 30 PERSON OR ORGANIZATION: ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION CONTINUED ON IL T8 03 ADDRESS: THE ADDRESS FOR THAT PERSON CONTINUED ON IL T8 03 HOUSTON TX 77080 PROVISIONS If we cancel this policy for any legally permitted reason other than nonpayment of premium, and a number of days is shown for Cancellation in the Schedule above, we will mail notice of cancellation to the person or organization shown in such Schedule. We will mail such notice to the address shown in the Schedule above at least the number of days shown for Cancellation in such Schedule before the effective date of cancellation. IL T4 05 05 19 0 2019 The Travelers Indemnity Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1 POLICY NUMBER: VTC20-CO-8SW931-COF-24 GENERAL PURPOSE ENDORSEMENT THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED ENTITY NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US IL T4 05 05 19 THIS ENDORSEMENT MODIFIES INSURANCE PROVIDED UNDER THE FOLLOWING: ALL COVERAGE PARTS INCLUDED IN THIS POLICY CONTINUATION OF FORM IL T4 05, PERSON OR ORGANIZATION: ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION TO WHOM YOU HAVE AGREED IN A WRITTEN CONTRACT THAT NOTICE OF CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY WILL BE GIVEN, BUT ONLY IF: 1. YOU SEND US A WRITTEN REQUEST TO PROVIDE SUCH NOTICE, INCLUDING THE NAME AND ADDRESS OF SUCH PERSON OR ORGANIZATION, AFTER THE FIRST NAMED INSURED RECEIVES NOTICE FROM US OF THE CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY; AND 2. WE RECEIVE SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST AT LEAST 14 DAYS BEFORE THE BEGINNING OF THE APPLICABLE NUMBER OF DAYS SHOWN IN THIS ENDORSEMENT. ADDRESS: THE ADDRESS FOR THAT PERSON OR ORGANIZATION INCLUDED IN SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST FROM YOU TO US. IL T8 03 Page 1 NAMED INSURED:Reytec Construction Resources,Inc. POLICY NUMBER:VTC2N-CAP-8S997943-PHX-24 COMMERCIAL AUTO THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUSINESS AUTO EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF COVERAGE — This endorsement broadens coverage. However, coverage for any injury, damage or medical expenses described in any of the provisions of this endorsement may be excluded or limited by another endorsement to the Coverage Part, and these coverage broadening provisions do not apply to the extent that coverage is excluded or limited by such an endorsement. The following listing is a general cover- age description only. Limitations and exclusions may apply to these coverages. Read all the provisions of this en- dorsement and the rest of your policy carefully to determine rights, duties, and what is and is not covered. A. BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED H. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE — LOSS OF B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED USE — INCREASED LIMIT C. EMPLOYEE HIRED AUTO I. PHYSICAL DAMAGE — TRANSPORTATION EXPENSES— INCREASED LIMIT D. EMPLOYEES AS INSURED J. PERSONAL PROPERTY E. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — INCREASED K. AIRBAGS LIMITS L. NOTICE AND KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDENT OR F. HIRED AUTO — LIMITED WORLDWIDE COV- LOSS ERAGE— INDEMNITY BASIS M. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION G. WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE —GLASS N. UNINTENTIONAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS PROVISIONS A. BROAD FORM NAMED INSURED this insurance applies and only to the extent that The following is added to Paragraph A.1., Who Is person or organization qualifies as an "insured" An Insured, of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS under the Who Is An Insured provision contained in Section II. LIABILITY COVERAGE: Any organization you newly acquire or form dur- C. EMPLOYEE HIRED AUTO ing the policy period over which you maintain 1. The following is added to Paragraph A.1., 50% or more ownership interest and that is not Who Is An Insured, of SECTION II — COV- separately insured for Business Auto Coverage. ERED AUTOS LIABILITY COVERAGE: Coverage under this provision is afforded only un- An "employee" of yours is an "insured" while til the 180th day after you acquire or form the or- operating an "auto" hired or rented under a ganization or the end of the policy period, which- contract or agreement in an "employee's" ever is earlier. name, with your permission, while performing duties related to the conduct of your busi- B. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED ness. The following is added to Paragraph c. in A.1., 2. The following replaces Paragraph b. in B.S., Who Is An Insured, of SECTION II — COVERED Other Insurance, of SECTION IV — BUSI- AUTOS LIABILITY COVERAGE: NESS AUTO CONDITIONS: Any person or organization who is required under b. For Hired Auto Physical Damage Cover- a written contract or agreement between you and age, the following are deemed to be cov- that person or organization, that is signed and ered "autos"you own: executed by you before the "bodily injury" or (1) Any covered "auto" you lease, hire, "property damage" occurs and that is in effect rent or borrow; and during the policy period, to be named as an addi- (2) Any covered "auto" hired or rented by tional insured is an "insured" for Covered Autos your "employee" under a contract in Liability Coverage, but only for damages to which an "employee's" name, with your CA T3 53 02 15 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 4 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. NAMED INSURED:Reytec Construction Resources,Inc. COMMERCIAL AUTO POLICY NUMBER:VTC2N-CAP-8S997943-PHX-24 permission, while performing duties (a) With respect to any claim made or "suit" related to the conduct of your busi- brought outside the United States of ness. America, the territories and possessions However, any "auto" that is leased, hired, of the United States of America, Puerto rented or borrowed with a driver is not a Rico and Canada: covered "auto". (i) You must arrange to defend the "in- D. EMPLOYEES AS INSURED sured" against, and investigate or set- The following is added to Paragraph A.1., Who Is tle any such claim or "suit" and keep us advised of all proceedings and ac- An Insured, of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS tions. LIABILITY COVERAGE: Any "employee" of yours is an "insured" while us- (ii) Neither you nor any other involved ing a covered "auto" you don't own, hire or borrow "insured" will make any settlement in your business or your personal affairs. without our consent. E. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS — INCREASED (iii)We may, at our discretion, participate LIMITS in defending the "insured" against, or in the settlement of, any claim or 1. The following replaces Paragraph A.2.a.(2), "suit". of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS LIABIL- ITY COVERAGE: (iv) We will reimburse the "insured" for sums that the "insured" legally must (2) Up to $3,000 for cost of bail bonds (in- pay as damages because of "bodily cluding bonds for related traffic law viola- injury" or "property damage" to which tions) required because of an "accident" this insurance applies, that the "in- we cover. We do not have to furnish sured" pays with our consent, but these bonds. only up to the limit described in Para- graph C., Limits Of Insurance, of 2. The following replaces Paragraph A.2.a.(4), SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS of SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS LIABIL-ITY COVERAGE: LIABILITY COVERAGE. (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the (v) We will reimburse the "insured" for "insured" at our request, including actual the reasonable expenses incurred loss of earnings up to $500 a day be- with our consent for your investiga- cause of time off from work. tion of such claims and your defense of the "insured" against any such F. HIRED AUTO — LIMITED WORLDWIDE COV- "suit", but only up to and included ERAGE— INDEMNITY BASIS within the limit described in Para- The following replaces Subparagraph (5) in Para- graph C., Limits Of Insurance, of graph B.7., Policy Period, Coverage Territory, SECTION II — COVERED AUTOS of SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDI- LIABILITY COVERAGE, and not in TIONS: addition to such limit. Our duty to (5) Anywhere in the world, except any country or make such payments ends when we have used up the applicable limit of jurisdiction while any trade sanction, em- insurance in payments for damages, bargo, or similar regulation imposed by the settlements or defense expenses. United States of America applies to and pro- hibits the transaction of business with or (b) This insurance is excess over any valid within such country or jurisdiction, for Cov- and collectible other insurance available ered Autos Liability Coverage for any covered to the "insured" whether primary, excess, "auto" that you lease, hire, rent or borrow contingent or on any other basis. without a driver for a period of 30 days or less (c) This insurance is not a substitute for re- and that is not an "auto" you lease, hire, rent quired or compulsory insurance in any or borrow from any of your "employees", country outside the United States, its ter- partners (if you are a partnership), members ritories and possessions, Puerto Rico and (if you are a limited liability company) or Canada. members of their households. Page 2 of 4 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. CA T3 53 02 15 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. NAMED INSURED:Reytec Construction Resources,Inc. POLICY NUMBER:VTC2N-CAP-8S997943-PHX-24 COMMERCIAL AUTO You agree to maintain all required or (2) In or on your covered "auto". compulsory insurance in any such coun- This coverage applies only in the event of a total try up to the minimum limits required by theft of your covered "auto". local law. Your failure to comply with compulsory insurance requirements will No deductibles apply to this Personal Property not invalidate the coverage afforded by coverage. this policy, but we will only be liable to the K. AIRBAGS same extent we would have been liable The following is added to Paragraph B.3., Exclu- had you complied with the compulsory in- sions, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE surance requirements. COVERAGE: (d) It is understood that we are not an admit- Exclusion 3.a. does not apply to 'loss" to one or ted or authorized insurer outside the more airbags in a covered "auto" you own that in- United States of America, its territories flate due to a cause other than a cause of "loss" and possessions, Puerto Rico and Can- set forth in Paragraphs A.1.b. and A.1.c., but ada. We assume no responsibility for the only: furnishing of certificates of insurance, or a. If that "auto" is a covered "auto" for Compre- for compliance in any way with the laws hensive Coverage under this policy; of other countries relating to insurance. b. The airbags are not covered under any war- G. WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE—GLASS ranty; and The following is added to Paragraph D., Deducti- c. The airbags were not intentionally inflated. ble, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE We will pay up to a maximum of $1,000 for any COVERAGE: one"loss". No deductible for a covered "auto" will apply to L. NOTICE AND KNOWLEDGE OF ACCIDENT OR glass damage if the glass is repaired rather than LOSS replaced. The following is added to Paragraph A.2.a., of H. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE — LOSS OF SECTION IV—BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS: USE—INCREASED LIMIT Your duty to give us or our authorized representa- The following replaces the last sentence of Para- tive prompt notice of the "accident' or 'loss" ap- graph AA.b., Loss Of Use Expenses, of SEC- plies only when the "accident' or 'loss" is known TION III—PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE: to: However, the most we will pay for any expenses (a) You (if you are an individual); for loss of use is $65 per day, to a maximum of (b) A partner(if you are a partnership); $750 for any one "accident'. (c) A member (if you are a limited liability com- I. PHYSICAL DAMAGE — TRANSPORTATION pany); EXPENSES—INCREASED LIMIT (d) An executive officer, director or insurance The following replaces the first sentence in Para- manager (if you are a corporation or other or- graph A.4.a., Transportation Expenses, of ganization); or SECTION III — PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVER- (e) Any "employee" authorized by you to give no- AGE: tice of the "accident' or"loss". We will pay up to $50 per day to a maximum of M. BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION $1,500 for temporary transportation expense in- The following replaces Paragraph A.S., Transfer curred by you because of the total theft of a cov- Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us, ered "auto" of the private passenger type. of SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO CONDI- J. PERSONAL PROPERTY TIONS : The following is added to Paragraph AA., Cover- S. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against age Extensions, of SECTION III — PHYSICAL Others To Us DAMAGE COVERAGE: We waive any right of recovery we may have Personal Property against any person or organization to the ex- tent required of you by a written contract We will pay up to $400 for 'loss" to wearing ap- signed and executed prior to any "accident' parel and other personal property which is: or"loss", provided that the "accident' or"loss" (1) Owned by an "insured"; and arises out of operations contemplated by CA T3 53 02 15 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 3 of 4 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. NAMED INSURED:Reytec Construction Resources,Inc. COMMERCIAL AUTO POLICY NUMBER:VTC2N-CAP-8S997943-PHX-24 such contract. The waiver applies only to the The unintentional omission of, or unintentional person or organization designated in such error in, any information given by you shall not contract. prejudice your rights under this insurance. How- N. UNINTENTIONAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS ever this provision does not affect our right to col- The following is added to Paragraph B.2., Con- lect additional premium or exercise our right of cealment, Misrepresentation, Or Fraud, of cancellation or non-renewal. SECTION IV-BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS: Page 4 of 4 ©2015 The Travelers Indemnity Compa ny.All rights reserved. CA T3 53 02 15 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. Policy Number: VTC2N-CAP-8S997943-PHX-24 Expiration Date: 9/30/2025 Effective Date: 09/30/2024 COMMERCIAL AUTO THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED - PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY WITH OTHER INSURANCE - CONTRACTORS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM PROVISIONS 2. The following is added to Paragraph B.5., Other 1. The following is added to Paragraph c. in A.1., Insurance of SECTION IV — BUSINESS AUTO Who Is An Insured, of SECTION II — COVERED CONDITIONS: AUTOS LIABILITY COVERAGE: Regardless of the provisions of paragraph a. and This includes any person or organization who you paragraph d. of this part 5. Other Insurance, this are required under a written contract or insurance is primary to and non-contributory with agreement, that is signed by you before the applicable other insurance under which an "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurs and addnamitiodnainsured insured person on or written organiconzation is a that is in effect during the policy period, to name as an additional insured for Covered Autos agreement with you, that is signed by you before Liability Coverage, but only for damages to which the "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurs this insurance applies and only to the extent of and that is in effect during the policy period, that person's or organization's liability for the requires this insurance to be primary and non- conduct of another"insured". contributory. CA T4 99 02 16 ©2016 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc.with its permission. POLICY NUMBER: VTC2N-CAP-85997943-PHX-24 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION - NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: ALL COVERAGE PARTS INCLUDED IN THIS POLICY SCHEDULE CANCELLATION: Number of Days Notice: 30 PERSON OR ORGANIZATION: ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION TO WHOM YOU HAVE AGREED IN A WRITTEN CONTRACT THAT NOTICE OF CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY WILL BE GIVEN, BUT ONLY IF: 1. YOU SEND US A WRITTEN REQUEST TO PROVIDE SUCH NOTICE, INCLUDING THE NAME AND ADDRESS OF SUCH PERSON OR ORGANIZATION, AFTER THE FIRST NAMED INSURED RECEIVES NOTICE FROM US OF THE CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY; AND 2. WE RECEIVE SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST AT LEAST 14 DAYS BEFORE THE BEGINNING OF THE APPLICABLE NUMBER OF DAYS SHOWN IN THIS SCHEDULE. ADDRESS: THE ADDRESS FOR THAT PERSON OR ORGANIZ- ATION INCLUDED IN SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST FROM YOU TO US. PROVISIONS If we cancel this policy for any legally permitted reason other than nonpayment of premium, and a number of days is shown for Cancellation in the Schedule above, we will mail notice of cancellation to the person or organization shown in such Schedule. We will mail such notice to the address shown in the Schedule above at least the number of days shown for Cancellation in such Schedule before the effective date of cancellation. IL T4 05 05 19 ©2019 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1 UMBRELLA Policy No.:CUP-8S997967-23-25 d. That Extended Reporting Period the full policy period of this Excess Follow- endorsement is issued by us and made a Form And Umbrella Liability Insurance. This part of this policy. provision does not apply to the reduction or 3. Any Extended Reporting Period endorsement exhaustion of the aggregate limit or limits of for this insurance will not reinstate or increase such "underlying insurance" solely by the Limits of Insurance or extend the policy payments as permitted in Paragraphs 4.a.(1), period. (2) and (3) of COVERAGE A — EXCESS 4. Except with respect to any provisions to the FOLLOW-FORM LIABILITY of SECTION I — contrary contained in Paragraphs 1., 2. or 3. COVERAGES. As such policies expire, you above, all provisions of any option to purchase will renew them at limits and with coverage at an "extended reporting period" granted to you in least equal to the expiring limits of insurance. the "underlying insurance" apply to this If you fail to comply with the above insurance. requirements, Coverage A is not invalidated. However, in the event of a loss, we will pay J. INSPECTIONS AND SURVEYS only to the extent that we would have paid had 1. We have the right but are not obligated to: you complied with the above requirements. a. Make inspections and surveys at any time; 2. The first Named Insured shown in the b. Give you reports on the conditions we find; Declarations must give us written notice of and any change in the "underlying insurance" as c. Recommend changes. respects: 2. Any inspections, surveys, reports or a. Coverage; recommendations relate only to insurability and b. Limits of insurance; the premiums to be charged. We do not make c. Termination of any coverage; or safety inspections. We do not undertake to perform the duty of any person or organization d. Exhaustion of aggregate limits. to provide for the health or safety of workers or 3. If you are unable to recover from any the public. We do not warrant that conditions: "underlying insurer" because you fail to a. Are safe or healthful; or comply with any term or condition of the b. Comply with laws, regulations, codes or "underlying insurance", Coverage A is not standards. invalidated. However, we will pay for any loss only to the extent that we would have paid had K. LEGAL ACTION AGAINST US you complied with that term or condition in 1. No person or organization has a right under this that"underlying insurance". insurance: M. OTHER INSURANCE a. To join us as a party or otherwise bring us This insurance is excess over any valid and into a "suit" asking for damages from an collectible "other insurance" whether such "other insured; or insurance" is stated to be primary, contributing, b. To sue us on this insurance unless all of its excess, contingent or otherwise. This provision terms have been fully complied with. does not apply to a policy bought specifically to 2. A person or organization may sue us to recover apply as excess of this insurance. on an agreed settlement or on a final judgment However, if you specifically agree in a written against an insured. We will not be liable for contract or agreement that the insurance provided damages that: to any person or organization that qualifies as an a. Are not payable under the terms of this insured under this insurance must apply on a insurance; or primary basis, or a primary and non-contributory b. Are in excess of the applicable limit of basis, then insurance provided under Coverage A insurance. is subject to the following provisions: An agreed settlement means a settlement and release of liability signed by us, the insured and the claimant or the claimant's legal representative. L. MAINTENANCE OF UNDERLYING INSURANCE 1. The insurance afforded by each policy of "underlying insurance" will be maintained for Page 14 of 22 ©2016 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. EU 00 01 07 16 POLICY NUMBER: CUP-8S997967-23-25 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION - NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: ALL COVERAGE PARTS INCLUDED IN THIS POLICY SCHEDULE CANCELLATION: Number of Days Notice: 30 PERSON OR ORGANIZATION: ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION TO WHOM YOU HAVE AGREED IN A WRITTEN CONTRACT THAT NOTICE OF CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY WILL BE GIVEN, BUT ONLY IF: 1. YOU SEND US A WRITTEN REQUEST TO PROVIDE SUCH NOTICE, INCLUDING THE NAME AND ADDRESS OF SUCH PERSON OR ORGANIZATION, AFTER THE FIRST NAMED INSURED RECEIVES NOTICE FROM US OF THE CANCELLATION OF THIS POLICY; AND 2. WE RECEIVE SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST AT LEAST 14 DAYS BEFORE THE BEGINNING OF THE APPLICABLE NUMBER OF DAYS SHOWN IN THIS SCHEDULE. ADDRESS: THE ADDRESS FOR THAT PERSON OR ORGANIZ- ATION INCLUDED IN SUCH WRITTEN REQUEST FROM YOU TO US. PROVISIONS If we cancel this policy for any legally permitted reason other than nonpayment of premium, and a number of days is shown for Cancellation in the Schedule above, we will mail notice of cancellation to the person or organization shown in such Schedule. We will mail such notice to the address shown in the Schedule above at least the number of days shown for Cancellation in such Schedule before the effective date of cancellation. IL T4 05 05 19 ©2019 The Travelers Indemnity Company.All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1 Te"XasMutual WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 03 04 B EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Agent copy TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization (X)Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s)or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: Included, see Information Page This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 9/30/2024 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no. 0001295501 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 9/30/24 Issued to: REYTEC CONSTRUCTION RESOURCES, INC This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 PO Box 12058,Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 03 04 B Te"vasMutual n WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 06 01 EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Agent copy TEXAS NOTICE OF MATERIAL CHANGE ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. In the event of cancellation or other material change of the policy, we will mail advance notice to the person or organization named in the Schedule. The number of days advance notice is shown in the Schedule. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. Schedule 1. Number of days advance notice: 30 2. Notice will be mailed to: PER LIST ON FILE This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 9/30/2024 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no. 0001295501 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 9/30/2024 Issued to: REYTEC CONSTRUCTION RESOURCES INC This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 PO Box 12058,Austin, TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 06 01 POLLUTION AND CONTRACTORS PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY POLICY NUMBER: ZCE-911\183691 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. EARLIER NOTICE OF CANCELLATION PROVIDED BY US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: TRAVELERS ECP CUSTOMsm GENERAL PROVISIONS FORM SCHEDULE OF NUMBER OF DAYS FOR NOTICE OF CANCELLATION Number of Days Notice: 60 PROVISIONS (2) The Number of Days Notice shown in The following replaces Paragraph b. of the Schedule Of Number Of Days For Paragraph 2., Cancellation, of SECTION VIII - Notice Of Cancellation before the CONDITIONS: effective date of cancellation if the cancellation is for any other reason. b. We may cancel this policy by mailing or If no amount is shown for the delivering to the "First Named Insured" Number of Days Notice in the written notice of cancellation at least: Schedule Of Number Of Days For Notice Of Cancellation, the Number of (1) 10 days before the effective date of Days Notice will be deemed to be 60. cancellation if the cancellation is for nonpayment of premium; or RP 12 11 10 21 © 2021 The Travelers Indemnity Company_ All rights reserved_ Page 1 of 1 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO. 61BCSJ17178 sQ SCE Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. Name: Hartford Fire Insurance Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 1901 Hollister Street One Hartford Plaza,Hartford,Connecticut,06155 Houston,TX 77080 Physical address (principal place of business): Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas One Hartford Plaza,Hartford,Connecticut,06155 Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Connecticut Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond, Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements (860)547-5000 Proiect No. 19032A Telephone(for notice of claim): 1-800-451-6944 Local Agent for Surety Name: Alyson Carmichael Award Date of the Contract: May 7, 2025 Address: 10001 Woodloch Forest Dr.,Suite 250 The Woodlands,Texas 77380 Contract Price: $20,991,575.94 Telephone: (832)360-2131 Bond al son.carmichael american lobal.com Email Address: y @ s Date of Bond: May 20,2025 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date notice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form 00 6116-1 0NSWTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements, Project No.19032A 5/2024 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liatlff itaas an this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the saoi�e+�MrRFcs if"it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for ab lar�dl ocrii / Contractor as Princ' al R eytec Constru Pb sour Surety Hartford Fire7Psulaacoto • '• A Signature: T Signature: k n Name: Gr'egG ���. Name: Alyson Car�Ffdoh Title: Title: y ,(,� • � ` •'• f,'�� Attome-in-Fact G '• � ��t 9' Email Address: !Z Je Email Address: alyson.carmict,ae*s e^�^ o .�` (Attach Power of Attorney and place s10'"Pltedl"elow) m.11 pc C a4 v} 4Cr ti C. .r END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-2 0NSVV7P Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements,Project No.19032A 5/2024 Direct Inquiries/Claims to: THE HARTFORD POWER OF ATTORNEY BONnectic One Hartford Plaza Hartford,Connecticut 06155 Bond.ClaimsCdthehartford.com call.888-266-3488 orfax:860-757-5835 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: Agency Name: AMERICAN GLOBAL OF TEXAS LLC Agency Code: 61-616588 �X Hartford Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut �X Hartford Casualty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Twin City Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Insurance Company of the Southeast,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Florida having their home office in Hartford, Connecticut, (hereinafter collectively referred to as the"Companies")do hereby make, constitute and appoint, up to the amount of Unlimited : Alyson Carmichael, John Martinez, Paul M. Messenger, Holli Orr of SPRING, Texas their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety(ies)only as delineated above by ®, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof,on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof, and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on May 23, 2016 the Companies have caused these presents to be signed by its Assistant Vice President and its corporate seals to be hereto affixed, duly attested by its Assistant Secretary. Further, pursuant to Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies,the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are and will be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to this Power of Attorney. ��,.�1{ean%„ /�NAtt► l:� SD79 � �l979 j �4 19T1 Shelby Wiggins,Assistant Secretary Joelle L.LaPierre,Assistant Vice President STATE OF FLORIDA SS. Lake Mary COUNTY OF SEMINOLE On this 20th day of May,2021,before me personally came Joelle LaPierre,to me known,who being by me duly sworn,did depose and say:that (s)he resides in Seminole County,State of Florida; that (s)he is the Assistant Vice President of the Companies, the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument;that(s)he knows the seals of the said corporations; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that(s)he signed his/her name thereto by like authority. Mg •��ijj. ,► ,:�, ,�� '• �i� Jessica Ciccone My Commission HH 122280 Expires June 20,2025 1,the undersigned,Assistant Vice President of the Companies, DO HEREBY q6iv kRth�at tie'above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which is still in full force�tfe�t •¢¢" May 20,2025 Signed and sealed in Lake Mary, Florida. Ql� ., �Yuy,� ►+trs,� Le KeII D.Dozols,Assistant Vice President Have a complaint or need help? If you have a problem with a claim or your premium, call your insurance company or HMO first. If you can't work out the issue, the Texas Department of Insurance may be able to help. Even if you file a complaint with the Texas Department of Insurance, you should also file a complaint or appeal through your insurance company or HMO. If you don't, you may lose your right to appeal. The Hartford To get information or file a complaint with your insurance company or HMO: Call: Consumer Affairs at 1-800-451-6944 Toll-free: 1-800-451-6944 Email: bond.claims@thehartford.com Mail: The Hartford Financial Services One Hartford Plaza, T-14 Hartford, CT 06155 Attn: Bond Claims Department The Texas Department of Insurance To get help with an insurance question or file a complaint with the state: Call with a question: 1-800-252-3439 Email: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov File a complaint: www.tdi.texas.gov Mail: MC 111-1A, P.O. Box 149091, Austin, TX 78714-9091 00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO. 61BCSJ17178 sQ Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Reytec Construction Resources,Inc. Name: Hartford Fire Insurance Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address (principal place of business): 1901 Hollister St.,Houston,Texas,77080 One Hartford Plaza,Hartford,Connecticut,06155 Physical address (principal place of business): Owner One Hartford Plaza,Hartford,Connecticut,06155 Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street, 3'1 Floor under the laws of the state of: Connecticut Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and its license Contract to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone (main number): (860)547-5000 O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Filtration System Telephone(for notice of claim): Hydraulic Improvements Project No. 19032A 1-800-451-6944 Local Agent for Surety Name: Alyson Carmichael 10001 Woodloch Forest Dr.,Suite 250 Award Date of the Contract: May 7,2025 Address: The Woodlands,Texas 77380 Contract Price: $20,991,575.94 Telephone: (832)360-2131 Bond E-Mail Address: alyson.carmichael@americanglobal.com Date of Bond: May 20,2025 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of notice of claim should be sent may be obtained the Contract) from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll free number:1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond 00 61 13-1 Project Name and Number Rev 5/2025 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer,agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work through the Warranty Period required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. The Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor is incorporated by reference into this Statutory Performance Bond,pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter2269 of the Texas Government Code,as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Surety agrees to be bound by the mediation clause in Article 22 of the Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor, said Contract Documents are incorporated by reference in this Bond. 11!14111/ p yl Surety Hartford Fir:Insurance,V066 Contractor as Princi,, al/ RecConstruc eso c. 1i Signature: Signature: AIM '_ '•' •;��' Name: Name: Alysoncarrr� Title: c rC Title: nttomey4-15a t 7N. Email Address: c Email Address: alyson.cam,ic,ielen..nglebal. rrd�� r r, (Attach Power of Attorney and plt?ce 4rktJVsdaf belotvJ �r I..eC � •�, `��tlllll,l, ,1,.. I V• �. ' END OF SECTION Performance Bond 00 6113-2 figiect Name and Number Rev 5/2025 Direct Inquiries/Claims to: THE HARTFORD POWER OF ATTORNEY BONnectic One Hartford Plaza Hartford,Connecticut 06155 Bond.ClaimsCdthehartford.com call.888-266-3488 orfax:860-757-5835 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: Agency Name: AMERICAN GLOBAL OF TEXAS LLC Agency Code: 61-616588 �X Hartford Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut �X Hartford Casualty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Twin City Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Insurance Company of the Southeast,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Florida having their home office in Hartford, Connecticut, (hereinafter collectively referred to as the"Companies")do hereby make, constitute and appoint, up to the amount of Unlimited : Alyson Carmichael, John Martinez, Paul M. Messenger, Holli Orr of SPRING, Texas their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety(ies)only as delineated above by ®, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof,on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof, and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on May 23, 2016 the Companies have caused these presents to be signed by its Assistant Vice President and its corporate seals to be hereto affixed, duly attested by its Assistant Secretary. Further, pursuant to Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies,the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are and will be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to this Power of Attorney. ��,.�1{ean%„ /�NAtt► l:� SD79 � �l979 j �4 19T1 Shelby Wiggins,Assistant Secretary Joelle L.LaPierre,Assistant Vice President STATE OF FLORIDA SS. Lake Mary COUNTY OF SEMINOLE On this 20th day of May,2021,before me personally came Joelle LaPierre,to me known,who being by me duly sworn,did depose and say:that (s)he resides in Seminole County,State of Florida; that (s)he is the Assistant Vice President of the Companies, the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument;that(s)he knows the seals of the said corporations; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that(s)he signed his/her name thereto by like authority. Mg •��ijj. ,► ,:�, ,�� '• �i� Jessica Ciccone My Commission HH 122280 Expires June 20,2025 1,the undersigned,Assistant Vice President of the Companies, DO HEREBY q6iv kRth�at tie'above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which is still in full force�tfe�t •¢¢" May 20,2025 Signed and sealed in Lake Mary, Florida. Ql� ., �Yuy,� ►+trs,� Le KeII D.Dozols,Assistant Vice President Have a complaint or need help? If you have a problem with a claim or your premium, call your insurance company or HMO first. If you can't work out the issue, the Texas Department of Insurance may be able to help. Even if you file a complaint with the Texas Department of Insurance, you should also file a complaint or appeal through your insurance company or HMO. If you don't, you may lose your right to appeal. The Hartford To get information or file a complaint with your insurance company or HMO: Call: Consumer Affairs at 1-800-451-6944 Toll-free: 1-800-451-6944 Email: bond.claims@thehartford.com Mail: The Hartford Financial Services One Hartford Plaza, T-14 Hartford, CT 06155 Attn: Bond Claims Department The Texas Department of Insurance To get help with an insurance question or file a complaint with the state: Call with a question: 1-800-252-3439 Email: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov File a complaint: www.tdi.texas.gov Mail: MC 111-1A, P.O. Box 149091, Austin, TX 78714-9091 SC G� 0 H �NCORPOP PlE" 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement,for the Project awarded on May 6, 2025, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Reytec Construction Resources, Inc. (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Project Name: O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements Project Number: 19032A ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Plummer Associates, Inc. Erika "Rikki"Anderson, P.E., PMP, ENV SP 500 N. Shoreline Blvd.,Suite 710 Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 randerson@plummer.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Jiangang(Daniel) Deng 13101 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78410 jianeaned@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 450 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions Agreement 00 52 23-1 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 12/2021 within 540 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each,are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time.Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $990.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$990.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 20,991,575.94 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-2 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 12/2021 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5,the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; Agreement 00 52 23-3 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 12/2021 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site;and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability:The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee.The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. Agreement 00 52 23-4 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OFCONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW Agreement 00 52 23-5 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta (Jul 16,2025 14:27 CDT) Jeffr y Edmonds (Jul 8, 2025 13:21 CDT) Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services M2025-053 AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL 5/6/2025 RH/SB Janet Whitehead (Jul 8, 2025 12:06 CDT) Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) REYTEC CONSTRUCTION RESOURCES, INC. Gregg T. e es (Jul 7, 202 15:14 CDT) (Seal Below) By: Gregg T. Reyes Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: President&Chief Executive Officer person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 1901 Hollister Street Financial Officer Address Houston TX 77080 City State Zip (713) 957-4003 Phone Fax Breves@reytec.com EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 12/2021 00 30 01 BID FORM Project Name: O-N. Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements Project Number: 19032A Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Jiangang(Daniel) Deng Designer: Plummer y its signature below,Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement, f all Addenda to the Bid and agrees,if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the ark in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. idder: Reytec Construction Resources Inc. (full legal name of Bidder) ignature: (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) ame: GreM T. Reyes (printed name of person signing BldForm) itle: PreWent and C O (title of person signing Bid Form) ttest: (signature) tate of Residency: Texas ederalTx ID No. 76-0516513 ddress for Notices: [hone: 713-957-4003 Emaii: greyes@reytec.com Bid Form 00 30 01- Page 1 of 2 OX Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements— 19032A Rev 8/2019 CIVCAS, RFB 6126 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements Report Created On:2/18/2025 8:03:35 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Part A- General $545,000.00 Part F-Water Improvements $19,919,576.04 Total $20,464,576.04 ALTERNATE 1 Total Part I-Additive Alternate No. 1 $526,999.90 Total $526,999.90 Part A-General No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al Mobilization (Maximum 5%of Project LS 1 $420,000.00 $420,000.00 Total) A2 Bonds and Insurance(2% Maximum) AL 1 $70,000.00 $70,000.00 A3 Allowance for Unforeseen Items AL 1 $50,000.00 $50,000.00 A4 Stormwater Pollution Protection Plan LS 1 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 and Maintenance Subtotal: $545,000.00 Part F-Water Improvements No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price F1 ON Stevents Water Treatment Plant LS 1 $18,130,574.00 $18,130,574.00 Improvements(all work for the improvements included in the Contract Documents that are not specifically described in another Bid Item) F2 Bypass Pumping for Filters 1-12 while WK 12 $72,916.67 $875,000.04 isolated from combined influent channel. F3 Crack injection in Filters 1-12 Influent LF 200 $225.00 $45,000.00 Channels using SikaFix HH LV F4 Coat Filters 1-12 Concrete Influent LS 1 $766,000.00 $766,000.00 Channels per Section 09 91 00 F5 Drill 1.5-inch diameter cores for LF 600 $141.67 $85,002.00 RFB 6126 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements Report Created On:2/18/2025 8:03:35 PM electrical co dult F6 Drill 2.25-inch diameter cores for LF 60 $300.00 $18,000.00 electrical conduit Subtotal: $19,919,576.04 Part I-Additive Alternate No. 1 No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 11 Furnish and apply Tnemec Aerolon SF 10000 $47.20 $472,000.00 additional coating on Filer Gallery process piping at 150 ml thickness. 12 Furnish and install additional 316 EA 30 $100.00 $3,000.00 stainless steel bolts, nuts,and washer sets for 12-inch pipe flanges. 13 Furnish and install additional 316 EA 30 $166.67 $5,000.10 stainless steel bolts, nuts,and washer sets for 14-inch pipe flanges. 14 Furnish and install additional 316 EA 30 $233.33 $6,999.90 stainless steel bolts, nuts,and washer sets for 16-inch pipe flanges. 15 Furnish and install additional 316 EA 30 $400.00 $12,000.00 stainless steel bolts, nuts,and washer sets for 20-inch pipe flanges. 16 Furnish and install additional 316 EA 30 $933.33 $27,999.90 stainless steel bolts, nuts,and washer sets for 30-inch pipe flanges. Subtotal: $526,999.90 CIVCAS i RFB 6126 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements Report Created On:2/18/2025 8:03:35 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE Addedndum No. 1 02/18/2025 19:23:29 PM Addenda No.2 02/18/2025 19:23:30 PM RFB 6126 Addendum No.3 02/18/2025 19:23:31 PM RFB 6126 Addendum No.4 02/18/2025 19:23:32 PM 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology......................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology.................................................................................................................................15 Article 2—Preliminary Matters....................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents...................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System ......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction.......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives..................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse..................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards ...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies.......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents..................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents....................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work...............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed..............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule .......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress...................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions ...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands.....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas.........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions................................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site...............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance..................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment,and Other Bonds...................................................................................28 General Conditions 00 72 00-1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.02 Licensed Sureties.........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage.....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions ......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance ................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project.....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance...............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance ...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage................................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance.......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice......................................................... 36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities ......................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence...............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor;Working Hours..................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services,Materials,and Equipment............................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others.....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties............................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes............................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection..................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative..................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs...............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee...........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION.......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services.................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site ...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work..................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination................................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 00 72 00-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities............................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor...................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members.......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data.................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests....................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications...............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests,and Approvals................................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities ..........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition.......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program ................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction....................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives............................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments..........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work.....................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.......................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work......................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents........................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work.................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work.........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price.........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times........................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals ....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders....................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety.......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management...............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal.................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals ....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification ....................................................................55 General Conditions 00 72 00-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 12.04 Substitutions............................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements........................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates..........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense..........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work;Allowances; Unit Price Work.......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work......................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances...............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work........................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal,or Acceptance of Defective Work......................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals.............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work........................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work.................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work.....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work......................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work........................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor;Set-Offs;Completion;Correction Period..........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments ..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment..........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values...................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value.............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments...................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment........................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs............................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment ..........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative.............................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title.................................................................................................76 General Conditions 00 72 00-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.11 Substantial Completion ...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection........................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment..................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims......................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period.....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination ......................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work......................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause.............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience.................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management................................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included .........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance....................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal................................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits.....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site.....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site...........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities.........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations...............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations.........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements................................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points..........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage................................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction..................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways,and Access.......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control...............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires........................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements....................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources................................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies...........................................................................................88 General Conditions 00 72 00-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 20—Project Coordination ................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included .........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal................................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project................................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings .....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information.........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor.......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article21—Quality Management................................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ...................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT...................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports...................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation........................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards.................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage................................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects...............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports.............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work........................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory..........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan.................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan........................................................................ 100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes................................................................................................... 101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations...................................................................................................... 101 22.02 Mediation.............................................................................................................................. 101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy.................................................................................. 102 23.01 Policy..................................................................................................................................... 102 23.02 Definitions............................................................................................................................. 102 23.03 Goals...................................................................................................................................... 103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................ 104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................ 104 24.01 Work Included....................................................................................................................... 104 24.02 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................................. 104 General Conditions 00 72 00-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities................................................................................................. 104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................. 105 24.05 Document Numbering........................................................................................................... 105 24.06 Document Requirements....................................................................................................... 106 Article25—Shop Drawings........................................................................................................................ 107 25.01 Work Included....................................................................................................................... 107 25.02 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................................. 107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................. 107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements................................................................................................. 109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports......................................................................................... 109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees................................................................................................... 110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures..................................................................................... 110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures........................................................................... 112 2S.09 Equal Non Specified Products................................................................................................ 113 25.10 Requests for Deviation .......................................................................................................... 113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities....................................................................................................... 114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements................................................................................................. 116 Article26—Record Data............................................................................................................................ 117 26.01 Work Included ....................................................................................................................... 117 26.02 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................................. 117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................. 117 26.04 Record Data Requirements.................................................................................................... 118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports......................................................................................... 118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees................................................................................................... 119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures........................................................................................ 119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities..................................................................................................... 120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................. 121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................ 121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................. 121 27.03 Schedule Requirements......................................................................................................... 121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................ 123 27.05 Float Time.............................................................................................................................. 123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation................................................................................ 124 General Conditions 00 72 00-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.01 Work Included....................................................................................................................... 124 28.02 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................................. 124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................. 124 28.04 Photographs.......................................................................................................................... 125 28.05 Video Recording .................................................................................................................... 125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.......................................................................................................... 125 29.01 Substantial Completion ......................................................................................................... 125 29.02 Final Inspections.................................................................................................................... 126 29.03 Reinspection Fees.................................................................................................................. 126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal............................................................................................. 127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities................................................................................................................ 127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.......................................................................... 127 Article30-Miscellaneous......................................................................................................................... 128 30.01 Computation of Times........................................................................................................... 128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records........................................................................ 128 30.03 Independent Contractor........................................................................................................ 129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies............................................................................................................ 129 30.05 Limitation of Damages........................................................................................................... 129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................. 129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................ 129 30.08 Survival of Obligations........................................................................................................... 130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries.................................................................................................. 130 30.10 Assignment of Contract......................................................................................................... 130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity......................................................................................... 130 30.12 Controlling Law...................................................................................................................... 130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue.................................................................................... 130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury........................................................................................................... 130 30.15 Attorney Fees ........................................................................................................................ 130 30.16 Compliance with Laws........................................................................................................... 131 30.17 Enforcement.......................................................................................................................... 131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation ....................................................................................................... 131 30.19 Contract Sum......................................................................................................................... 131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy...................................................................... 131 General Conditions 00 72 00-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.21 Notices................................................................................................................................... 131 General Conditions 00 72 00-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due;or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer-The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act,42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act,49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act,33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act,42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.;or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous, toxic,or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents-Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work-The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or C. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern.The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner.These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies, agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00-12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; C. Field Order;or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed -A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner-The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents -A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions - The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or c. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00-14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive - A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition,deletion,or revision in the Work.The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to"at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense," or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day" mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials,or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services,materials,or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00-15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00-16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule,which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM)Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents;and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,REQUIREMENTS,REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications,Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall, therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications,manuals, reference standards,or codes;or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict,error,ambiguity,or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00-19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item,system,procedure,etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay:Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work,or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g.fires,floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying,disrupting,or interfering event.Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLES—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas;and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site,and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents;or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings,conclusions,and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations,investigations,explorations,tests,or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe;or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance,Payment,and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt,or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated;or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-VIII or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy.Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.OS Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage underthe Contractor's Installation Floaterthat includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage fortesting and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1;and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance,or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor,named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance by the OPT, named insureds, or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Attn:Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services' does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage forthe duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts,and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods,techniques,sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor;Working Hours A. Provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless othertimes are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent.The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services,Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing orfurnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work.The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use,or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT;or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests,or approvals by others;or General Conditions 00 72 00-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 00 72 00-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays,disrupts,or interferes with the execution of the Work;or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions, and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests,and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16.OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 10.OS Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS;CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings,Specifications, or otherwise;or 3) Other engineering,architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions,deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work;or 3. Involves other engineering,architectural ortechnical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due;or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels,and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list"or equal"or"or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that,in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address;or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path.Contractor shall bearthe entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise;or General Conditions 00 72 00-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part,this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex.Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors,if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b) — Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex.Gov't Code§2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or C. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES;UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew,and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits,which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers'compensation, S) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses,and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations,and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers' field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at 50% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work;and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee;or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 forthe Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractorto be incorporated into each Application for Payment.OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work;and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner.Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress.Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange,obtain,and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs,or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Pay claims,costs, losses,and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work,including: 1. Costs for correction,removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work.Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work,or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION;CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption,and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site,including but not limited to,workplace injuries, property damage,and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective,or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents,- General Conditions 00 72 00-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended;or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim,demand,or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand,or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providingthe Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up, training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 00 72 00-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses,including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration,field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees,legal fees,and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits,licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required bythe Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles,technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products,materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products,materials,and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage,and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products,materials,and equipment consumed duringthe construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties,extended or special warranties,or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials;and 29. Demobilization of all physical,temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion,show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.OS Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount, up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents,satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates forthe application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders.Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved.Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied.Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format(PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents;or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise,direct,or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials,or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 forthis part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete.OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs,and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17AS Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes;and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors,or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence;or General Conditions 00 72 00-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner.Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue,or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions,management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen, skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches,recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 19.OS Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports, including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees'vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles,guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work.Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price forthe pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines,control lines,grades,and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store lightweight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes,and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways,and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1- 800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. C. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems,or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer,or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use"Notification by Contractor"form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean,dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications bytype and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves,unions,traps,and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents,including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed)in red;and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; c. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection,and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations;and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan,and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals,list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials(ASTM),or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. Name of the laboratory,address,and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling,inspection,and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor,Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor;or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications(in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test,and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures fortracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task.A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested,submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment,and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager,the OAR,superintendent,other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site,or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff,on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity;or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties'senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other,then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00-101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit, either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00-102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy, women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual: Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident)of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example, a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00-103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation,by trade,which has been utilized on the Project. Alongwith the request forfinal payment on the Project,the Contractorwill indicate,in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi-weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00-104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer.Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for"Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix,a sequence number,and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CID Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00-105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. S. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00-106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Qua I ity Assu ra nce A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00-107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00-108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures,or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete,asphalt,or other materials proportioned for the Project;and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00-109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00-110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated,and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents.Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00-111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color,texture,or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color,texture,and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00-112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that,in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00-113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. C. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00-114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided.The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00-115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents.Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00-116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data.Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples,other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00-117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose;and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer.Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished,including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete,asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project;and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated,and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00-120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked"Rejected" and"Cancel - Not Required." No further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule forthe Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning,scheduling,and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00-121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location,and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; S. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path;and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00-122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.OS Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path,the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00-123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter,utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable forthe purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials,trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location,and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete perthe General Conditions. Include a list of the items remainingto be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00-126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data,and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties,bonds,and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal,address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond,or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00-127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to: accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements,sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00-128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner.This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees;or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00-129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation,all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 00 72 00-130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal,state and city laws,rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein, and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year, the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments,is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 00 72 00-131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00-132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINEDTERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Scheduleconstruction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of 65 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 65 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-1 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS;SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. Delete Paragraph 5.03 entirely and insert the following: "5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. No reports of explorations or tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site, or drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, are known to Owner." SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises—Completed Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard 4. Underground Hazard 5. Products/Completed Operations Hazard $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 6. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 7. Broad Form Property Damage 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal&Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers'Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-2 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental ❑ Required X Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation>3 ft Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Full Replacement Cost of Structure and Contents Required for vertical structures and bridges ❑ Required X Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment ❑ Required X Not Required ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.02 LABOR;WORKING HOURS B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of person or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between 7:00 a.m.and 5:00 p.m. Monday through Friday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor must perform at least[50] percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES "General Decision Number:TX2024002101/05/2024 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20230021 State: Texas Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-3 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 Construction Type: Heavy Counties: Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(1). If the contract is entered . Executive Order 14026 into on or after January 30, generally applies to the 2022, or the contract is contract. renewed or extended (e.g., an 1.The contractor must pay option is exercised)on or all covered workers at after January 30, 2022: least$17.20 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher)for all hours spent performing on the contract in 2024. If the contract was awarded on 1. Executive Order 13658 or between January 1, 2015 and I generally applies to the January 29, 2022, and the contract. contract is not renewed or .The contractor must pay all extended on or after January covered workers at least 130, 2022: 1 $12.90 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher)for all hours spent performing on that contract in 2024. The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-4 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/05/2024 SUTX1987-001 12/01/1987 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Excluding Form Setting)........................ $9.05 ** Concrete Finisher ...............$ 7.56 ** ELECTRICIAN......................$ 13.37 ** 2.58 Laborers: Common ..................... 7.25 ** Utility ....................$ 7.68 ** Power equipment operators: Backhoe ....................$9.21** Motor Grader................$ 8.72 ** ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS- Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026($17.20) or 13658 ($12.90). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Please also note that the minimum wage requirements of Executive Order 14026 are not Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-5 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 currently being enforced as to any contract or subcontract to which the states of Texas, Louisiana, or Mississippi, including their agencies, are a party. Note: Executive Order(EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-6 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination.07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA)governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014.SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-7 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination.08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter?This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour National Office because National Office has responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party(those affected by the action)can request Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-8 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerlythe Wage Appeals Board).Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISION" ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE SC-8.01 OTHER WORK Add the following to A.: ACITVE CONSTRUCTION PROJECT WITHIN THE ONSWTP INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: 1. 18131A Clearwell 3 2. 18130A Presedimentation Basin Dredging 3. E17047 ONS Raw Water Influent and Chemical Feed Improvements 4. E16417 Nueces River Raw Water Pump Station 54"Transmission Main EXPECT CONSTRUCTION PROJECT TO START IN 2025 AND 2026: 1. E10144 ONS Chlorine Storage and Handling Facilities Improvements 2. High Service 2 Valve Replacements Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-9 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES C. For the Contractor's convenience,the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Plummer Associates, Inc. 817-806-1700 William Causey 361-356-8412 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 Water/Wastewater/Stormwater 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div.for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste& Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centuryl-ink 361-208-0730 W i n d st rea m 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-10 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION SC-20.08 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Delete Paragraph 20.08 D 6 entirely and insert the following: "6. Progress Record documents (including the up-to-date Progress As-Built Drawings) will need to be submitted with each Payment Application. Submit the complete Record Documents for each Delivery Order to Designer for review and acceptance within 7 days of Substantial Completion of each Delivery Order. B. Delete Paragraph 20.08 E entirely and insert the following: "E. Progress Payments, Payments for Do Substantial Completion and Fina application for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents(including the up-to- date Progress and Final As-Built PDF Drawings) are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final Payment will not be recommended with incomplete Record Drawings.Additionally, failure to provide complete and approved Record Documents including As-built Drawings as required may result in Owner withholding new Delivery Orders." C. Delete Paragraph 20.08 D 6 entirely and insert the following: "6. Progress Record Documents (including the up-to-date Progress As-Built Drawings) will need to be submitted with each Payment Application. Submit the complete Record Documents for each Delivery Order to Designer for review and acceptance within 7 days of Substantial Completion of each Delivery Order." D. Delete Paragraph 20.08 E entirely and insert the following: "E. Progress Payments, Payments for DO Substantial Completion and Final Application for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents (including the up-to- date Progress and Final As-Built PDF Drawings) are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final Payment will not be recommended with incomplete Record Documents. Additionally, failure to provide complete and approved Record Documents including As-built Drawings as required may result in Owner withholding new Delivery Orders." ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Specification Section Shop Drawing Description SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-11 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Specification Section Record Data Description ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS SC-30.21 NOTICES. A. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. SC-30.23 CM/GC SCOPE FOR ASSET REGISTRY FOR CITYWORKS A. Add the following. 1.01 Asset Registry for Computerized Maintenance Management System A. The Contractor shall be responsible for compiling the following information in support of the Owner's Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS), Cityworks. 1. For each asset that meets the defined asset definition indicated herein, provide up to 20 fields of data (e.g., asset class, asset type, asset nameplate information, asset specification information, facility, area number). The Owner will provide a spreadsheet of the data required for each asset at Notice to Proceed. 2. Definitions a. Asset Class:similar equipment types(e.g.,structure,valves,instrumentation). b. Asset Type: designation for a specific type of equipment (e.g., a submersible pump, control panel, air release valve) 3. The program is expected to include up to 3,000 assets located above-ground. 4. Assets include structural, civil, pipeline, electrical, process mechanical, building mechanical (plumbing, HVAC, and fire protection), security, information technology(IT),and instrumentation and controls that meet the asset definition. 5. An asset is a physical item of a system or process that has value and performs a specific function to provide a service. It is the lowest level of detail that will be managed by the Owner's maintenance strategy to maintain the item as per its designed performance,to make repairs, rehabilitate and to assist in replacement decisions. 6. Further definition of a managed asset includes every operating utility asset that meets two or more of the following requirements: a) Asset has an expected useful life greater than 1 year. b) Asset requires recurring or preventive maintenance. c) Asset performs a critical function within the system. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-12 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 d) Asset would be repaired rather than replaced if it fails. e) There is a clear need to track preventative and predictive maintenance costs. f) Work order is typically written for preventative and/or corrective maintenance of the asset such as equipment requiring extensive calibration or items that, because of their regulatory nature, require proof of maintenance such as safety equipment. 7. Asset data shall be provided by the Contractor to the Owner's Representative as part of the shop drawing in a format that can be directly imported into a CSV format.The Engineer will review the asset data for data completeness and correctness during the shop drawings review. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-13 O.N.Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A Rev 3/2024 DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials,equipment,and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor,equipment,tools,and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the CONTRACTOR and coordinated with the OAR. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. Remove and replace filter influent and backwash waste gates and actuators as noted in the Drawings. 2. Remove and replace filter effluent,filter-to-waste,filter backwash,and air scour valves and actuators as noted in the Drawings. 3. Remove and replace filter effluent flow meters as noted in the Drawings. 4. Modify filter-to-waste piping in three locations to allow for an air gap in the yard. Demolishing existing weirs in junction box vaults where noted. 5. Install combined filter effluent sample piping from a combined filter effluent pipe to the existing Analyzer Shed. Install a sample pump and turbidity meter in the Analyzer Shed. 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. Construction of Clearwell 3 and associated yard piping improvements. B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents,the CONTRACTOR is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER A. The OWNER plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 01 1100-PAGE 1 OF 2 BID SET 0537-055-01 SUMMARYOF WORK JULY 2024 Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. Active Projects a. 18131A Clearwell 3 b. 18130A Presedimentation Basin Dredging C. E17047 ONS Raw Water Influent and Chemical Feed Improvements d. E16417 Nueces River Raw Water Pump Station 54"Transmission Main 2. Projects starting in the upcoming 1 to 2 years a. E10144 ONS Chlorine Storage and Handling Facilities Improvements b. High Service 2 Valve Replacements B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. OWNER will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.6 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. OWNER has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the CONTRACTOR of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the OWNER and general public. 1.7 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 1.8 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 011100-PAGE 2 OF 2 BID SET 0537-055-01 SUMMARYOF WORK JULY 2024 SECTION 0112 16 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL A. Certain aspects of construction of this Project may occur after the facility has been started up or while the facility is operating to meet specific treatment limits. The operations necessary to meet these requirements are of higher priority than construction activities. Schedules of connections, renovations and modifications required after startup shall be submitted to the OWNER for approval, and all such items shall be coordinated throughout the entire construction period. These schedules shall permit full and normal treatment and conveyance of water. B. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a project schedule within 15 days of the preconstruction meeting or within 7 days of notice to proceed, whichever comes first, outlining the schedule and time requirements for each item involving an existing treatment unit, piece of equipment, and conveyance system. No payment shall be made until these items are received. C. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER at least 14 days in advance and again 3 days prior to beginning work on a particular area, and coordinate with the OWNER the specific items to be isolated and duration for each. Obtain written approval from the OWNER prior to each shutdown. High flow conditions or equipment outages may require the rescheduling of an approved shutdown.Any cost associated with rescheduling will be subsidiary to Project. D. After startup and transfer of operation to the OWNER,the CONTRACTOR shall not operate any valves or equipment in the facility unless directed to do so by the OWNER. E. Prior to beginning work, the CONTRACTOR shall have on-site all materials, equipment, and personnel necessary to complete the work in the time scheduled. The CONTRACTOR shall also perform all possible tasks to the most complete state possible prior to shutdowns. All exposed bolts and nuts on valves or fittings which are to be disassembled shall be removed and replaced one at a time prior to shutdown to assure as timely progress as possible. F. Access to all components of the facility must be maintained at all times. G. In general, new and existing equipment cannot be offline longer than one hour while piping and electrical connections are being made. Longer shut downs for equipment may be possible. Coordinate with OWNER. H. Existing plugged pipelines, in which water has been standing,shall be cleaned of debris prior to connecting to a new pipeline. I. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate and schedule each task necessary to complete all work within the time allowed for the project. Specific connection coordination, shutdown, and out of service (downtime) limitations, are described, but not limited to,the specific items PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0112 16-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION JULY 2024 listed in PART 3. J. The sequencing may require the CONTRACTOR to perform work such as installing temporary or permanent plugs and/or diversion facilities in structures that are online. The specifics related to flow diversion and temporary plugging means and methods are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR; however,the CONTRACTOR'S proposed work operations and schedules shall be submitted to the OWNER for review. All costs for temporary piping and pumping, pipe connections, and all related work shall be included in the Base Bid of the project. K. Facility Piping Interconnections Requirements. All testing of pipes to be connected shall be completed and test reports furnished to the ENGINEER prior to making connections. 1. Drain system connections should generally not require prior notification to proceed unless the existing pipe must be temporarily plugged or blocked for the connection. 2. Plant water and potable water connections require advance notification and concurrence from the OWNER prior to isolating or shutting down the system for connection. Potable pipes should be flushed and pressure tested prior to connection and disinfected following the connection. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate these items. 3. Reduce the number of shutdowns required for piping systems by combining as many connections at the same time as feasible. 4. Facility process piping connections are critical and shall be fully coordinated, expedited, and done in a continuous manner upon initiation. These pipes generally do not have isolation valves or parallel pipes and require shutting down the treatment process for connection. 5. Time shall be allowed for shutting down the process and dewatering the existing pipe and/or basin in addition to the actual connection time. CONTRACTOR shall provide all equipment,tools, and labor to dewater the pipes for connections. This process water shall be contained in the facilities and not allowed to discharge over the ground or to the surface drainage systems. 6. All facility shutdowns must be coordinated with and approved by the OWNER. OWNER will not allow work to be performed in a series of shutdowns on back-to-back days. 7. Potable water piping shall be cleaned, disinfected, and tested prior to placing into service.CONTRACTOR shall provide taps,flushing, and blow-off connections to flush and disinfect each pipe section and treatment unit. PART 2-PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING: A. Throughout construction the plant will need to remain in operation. The CONTRACTOR is not prohibited from working on other areas of the plant unless that work requires interruption of treatment units, equipment, piping, electrical power and communications,or other ancillary items that would prevent operation of treatment units that must remain online. When performing work,CONTRACTOR shall minimize shutdowns for each filter. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0112 16-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION JULY 2024 B. Filter 1-12 Inlet Gates 1. Filters shall remain online while the inlet gates are being replaced. Inlet gates shall be replaced while the gate is submerged. CONTRACTOR shall adhere to epoxy system manufacturer instructions for anchoring the gate frames. C. Filter 13-22 Inlet Butterfly Valves 1. Filters shall remain online while the inlet butterfly valves are being replaced. Inlet valves shall be replaced while the valve is submerged. D. Filter 13-22 Backwash Waste Valves 1. Backwash waste valves shall be replaced in between Filter 13-22 backwashes. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the OWNER to schedule. E. Filter 1-12 Valves 1. The filter effluent butterfly valve, effluent flow meter, backwash supply butterfly valve, and filter-to-waste butterfly valve shall be replaced simultaneously during an overnight shutdown of a maximum of 12 hours.The valves shall be replaced for only one filter at a time. 2. Filter Effluent Butterfly Valves and Flow Meters a. CONTRACTOR shall replace the corresponding filter inlet gate prior to replacing the filter effluent butterfly valve and flow meter. Coordinate with OWNER to close the inlet gate and dewater the filter prior to replacement of the butterfly valve and flow meter. b. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to close the effluent butterfly valves of the 11 other filters during replacement. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to isolate Filter 1-12 combined effluent piping from Filter 13-22 combined effluent piping using downstream gates/valves in the yard. d. Only one filter effluent butterfly valve and flow meter may be removed at one time. 3. Backwash Supply Butterfly Valves a. Backwash supply butterfly valves shall not be replaced during Filter 1-12 backwashes. b. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to close Filter 1-12 filter effluent butterfly valves prior to replacement of the backwash supply butterfly valves. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to isolate Filter 1-12 backwash piping using upstream valves. d. Only one backwash supply valve may be removed at one time. 4. Filter-to-Waste Butterfly Valves a. Filter-to-Waste butterfly valves shall not be replaced during Filter 1-12 backwashes. b. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to close Filter 1-12 filter effluent butterfly valves prior to replacement of the filter-to-waste butterfly valves. C. New Filter-to-Waste piping and valve shall be in place prior to removing existing valves and installing blind flanges. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0112 16-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION JULY 2024 d. Only one filter-to-waste valve may be removed at one time. F. Filter 13-22 Valves 1. The filter effluent butterfly valve, effluent flow meter, backwash supply butterfly valve, and filter-to-waste butterfly valve shall be replaced simultaneously during an overnight shutdown of a maximum of 12 hours.The valves shall be replaced for only one filter at a time. 2. Filter Effluent Butterfly Valves and Flow Meters a. CONTRACTOR shall replace the corresponding filter inlet gate priorto replacing the filter effluent butterfly valve and flow meter. Coordinate with OWNER to close the inlet gate and dewater the filter prior to replacement of the butterfly valve and flow meter. b. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to close the effluent butterfly valves of the 11 other filters during replacement. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to isolate Filter 13-22 combined effluent piping from Filter 1-12 combined effluent piping using downstream gates/valves in the yard. d. Only one filter effluent butterfly valve and flow meter may be removed at one time. 3. Backwash Supply Butterfly Valves a. Backwash supply butterfly valves shall not be replaced during Filter 13-22 backwashes. b. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to close Filter 13-22 filter effluent butterfly valves prior to replacement of the backwash supply butterfly valves. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to isolate Filter 13-22 backwash piping using upstream valves. d. Only one backwash supplyvalve may be removed at one time. 4. Filter-to-Waste Butterfly Valves a. Filter-to-Waste butterfly valves shall not be replaced during Filter 13-22 backwashes. b. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER to close Filter 13-22 filter effluent butterfly valves prior to replacement of the filter-to-waste butterfly valves. C. New Filter-to-Waste piping and valve shall be in place prior to removing existing valves and installing blind flanges. d. Only one filter-to-waste valve may be removed at one time. G. Filter Influent Channel Modifications 1. Crack injection, concrete repairs, and concrete coating of Filters 1-12 influent channels must be completed during winter months. Filters 1-12 may not be offline at the same time. Each influent channel can be isolated using an upstream existing gate valve. CONTRACTOR shall minimize shutdown time as much as possible. H. Filter-to-Waste Piping Modifications a. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER for timing of filter-to-waste piping modifications.CONTRACTOR shall complete piping modifications in the winter PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0112 16-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION JULY 2024 months and shall assemble as much piping as possible prior to beginning work. CONTRACTOR shall not complete modifications during corresponding filter backwashes. I. Bypass Pumping Plan 1. CONTRACTOR to provide a bypass pumping plan for approval prior to any isolation of filters. 2. Maximum number of filters which may be isolated from the influent channels at any time is two. 3. Pumps shall provide a minimum of 5 MGD flow for each filter which is isolated from the influent channel. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0112 16-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION JULY 2024 a. b. C. d. e. f. 9. h. i. J• k. I. M. n. 0. P• q• r. S. t. U. V. W. X. PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0112 16-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION JULY 2024 SECTION 0123 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the OWNER. 5. OWNER may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. Allowances: 1. Include specified allowance amount in the Contract Price. 2. The amount of each allowance includes: a. The cost of the product to the CONTRACTOR less any applicable trade discounts. b. Delivery to the Site. C. Applicable taxes. 3. Include in the Contract Price all costs for: a. Handling at the Site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage per Article 19 of SECTION 0172 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. b. Cost for labor and equipment for installation and finishing. C. Cost for related products not specifically listed in the allowance required for installation, including consumable supplies and materials. d. All overhead, profit,and related costs. 4. Assist OWNER in the selection of products. a. Identify qualified Suppliers. b. Obtain bids from qualified Suppliers. C. Present available alternates to the Owner through the OAR. Notify OAR of: 1) Any objections to a particular Supplier or product. 2) Effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by the selection of each option. 3) Cost of each option. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0123 10-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES JULY 2024 5. Upon selection of the product: a. Purchase and install the product. b. CONTRACTOR's responsibilities for products shall be the same as for products selected by the CONTRACTOR. 6. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS to adjust Contract Price if the net cost of the product is more or less than the specified amount. a. Adjust the unit cost applied to the quantities installed per the method of payment described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for products specified as Unit Price Work. b. Do not perform Work until selection of alternate has been approved by the OWNER. C. Provide actual invoices for the materials. 1.2 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate 11—Aerolon Coating 1. Furnish and apply Tnemec Aerolon coating on filter effluent, filter-to-waste, and filter backwash piping in the Filter Galleries. Coating shall be applied as specified in Division 09. B. Alternate 12—Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets for 14-inch Pipe 1. Furnish and install 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and gaskets for 14-inch piping in the Filter Galleries. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with Owner for sets to be replaced. C. Alternate 13—Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets for 20-inch Pipe 1. Furnish and install 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and gaskets for 14-inch piping in the Filter Galleries. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with Owner for sets to be replaced. D. Alternate 14—Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets for 30-inch Pipe 1. Furnish and install 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and gaskets for 14-inch piping in the Filter Galleries. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with Owner for sets to be replaced. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance A2—Bonds and Insurance 1. A maximum of 2 percent of the bid price to be used for the purchase of bonds and insurance required for the Project. B. Allowance A3—Allowance for Unanticipated Work 1. Payment shall include any unanticipated work encountered during the work. Payment shall only be made after written authorization to complete the unanticipated work. 2. The Allowance Bid Item A3 shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder.This allocation may be used at the OAR's discretion should an unanticipated condition PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0123 10-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES JULY 2024 warrant the use of the allocated funds. Should the use of funds from Bid Item A3 become necessary,the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between the City and the CONTRACTOR. Payment shall be negotiated for each circumstance.There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used throughout the course of the work.Any unused funds in Bid Item A3 shall be returned to the Owner as a credit after completion of the work. C. Allowance A4—Allowance for Permits 1. Payment shall include all Permits required to construct the Project. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation of all permits and will be reimbursed for the cost. Documentation shall include receipts and other items the Owner deems necessary. 1.5 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 1.6 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0123 10-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0123 10-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES JULY 2024 SECTION 0129 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.2 MEASUREMENTAND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length,area,solid contents, number,and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste,overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A1—Mobilization(Maximum 5 percent): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices,sheds, and storage facilities; C. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5 percent of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75 percent of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 01 29 01-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT JULY 2024 retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25 percent of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A2—Bonds and Insurance (Maximum Allowance of 2 percent) 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on receipt of documentation of actual costs. CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. CONTRACTOR will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. CONTRACTOR will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the CONTRACTOR. C. Bid Item A3—Allowance for Unforeseen Items 1. Payment shall include an allowance for unforeseen items. 2. Measurement for payment will provide an allowance for one unit for unforeseen items. D. Bid Item A4—Storm Water Pollution Prevention 1. Payment shall include but not be limited to furnishing and submitting the SWPPP to TCEQ and OWNER and updating the Plan during the Project as needed. All permits and required fees related to the SWPPP will be included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50 percent of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage. The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50 percent completion has occurred, minus retainage. E. Bid Item F1: 1. Payment shall include construction of all work for the ON Stevens WTP Filter Improvements project, complete and placed in operation, as shown on the plans, and described in the specifications. Work shall include removal and replacement of filter influent and backwash waste gates and actuators, removal and replacement of filter effluent, filter-to-waste,filter backwash, and air scour valves and actuators, removal and replacement of filter effluent flow meters,modification of filter-to-waste piping in three locations to allow for an air gap in the yard, demolition of existing weirs in junction box vaults where noted, installation of combined filter effluent sample piping from a combined filter effluent pipe to the existing Analyzer Shed, and installation of a sample pump and turbidity meter in the Analyzer Shed. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum as a percentage of the work that has been performed, minus retainage. F. Bid Item F2: 1. Payment shall include bypass pumping for Filters 1-12 while isolated from combined influent channel. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 01 29 01-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT JULY 2024 2. Measurement for payment will be made per week as a percentage of the work that has been performed, minus retainage. G. Bid Item F3: 1. Payment shall include crack injection of existing cracks in the Filter 1-3 and 10-12 Influent Channels. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per linear feet as a percentage of the work that has been performed, minus retainage. H. Bid Item F4: 1. Payment shall include the coating of the walls and floors of the Influent Channels to Filters 1-3 and Filters 10-12. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum as a percentage of the work that has been performed, minus retainage. I. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections,Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. 1.4 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 1.5 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 01 29 01-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0129 01-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT JULY 2024 SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Engineer will utilize an Internet-Based Construction Management system specific for this project.The System will be managed by the Engineer. B. The project website will provide server space and secured access to staff members representingthe Owner, Engineer,and Contractor. Each user will have a separate log-in name and password to access the website. C. Contract management related documents will be submitted,tracked, responded to, and made available to the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor over the Internet. D. Section Includes Construction General Requirements not included in the General Conditions or Supplementary Conditions. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENT A. Division 1 sections including but not limited to Section 0170 00"Execution Requirements," Section 0177 00"Closeout Procedures," and Section 0178 39 "Project Record Documents." 1.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE AND WEBSITE A. REQUIREMENTS 1. The Contractor(s)will be required to make all submittals in electronic format. The required format will be discussed at the pre-construction meeting. The software product to be chosen will support multiple file formats and provide viewing and markup capability. 2. The website includes a secured document management system for storing and making available to the Project team the following: a. Ability to store files and correspondence. b. Latest drawings and specifications. C. Project progress photos. 3. The website will include the following database driven applications. The System is designed to inform team members regarding new or updated documents and automatic task assignment and overdue notifications. The Contractor,Owner and Engineer shall enter, submit,track, and respond to following items on-line: a. Meeting Notes b. Supplemental Instructions C. Field Reports d. RFIs(Requests For Information) e. Shop Drawings/Submittals f. PCMs(Proposed Contract Modifications) g. Site Water Control Requests h. Change Orders(subject to the procedures outlined in Section 0126 00 "Contract Modification Procedures") PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 013100-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION JULY 2024 i. Field Orders j. Contractor's Daily Reports k. Contractor's Storm Water Pollution Prevention Inspections I. Applications for Payment with Schedule of Values, Payment Forecast Schedules M. Construction Schedule n. Other forms as directed by the Engineer or specified by the Contract Documents. Submittal of hard-copy(paper) items specified in Contract Documents that are not listed in Paragraph 1.5 below may be submitted electronically if approved by the Engineer. B. ARCHIVES 1. The specified web-based project management application is capable of archiving all files on the website periodically. 2. All data from the website,such as RFls,Submittals,etc.will be available in the archive. 3. The Contractor shall maintain a paper copy of all materials uploaded to the website. Submittal copies shall be compiled and maintained by the Contractor. The indexed document shall be organized as specified in Section 0178 39 and forwarded to the Owner. The paper copies maintained by the Contractor are limited to the numbered submittals uploaded by the Contractor for review, constructions forms including but not limited to requests for information (RFI),field orders (FO), etc. need not be included. 4. The Contractor shall submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals final hard-copy (paper) and electronic form as required by Section 0178 23. 1.4 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Construction Operations: 1. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections,which depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. a. Schedule construction operations in sequence required obtaining the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. b. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance,service,and repair. C. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. d. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance,service,and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B. Administrative Procedures: 1. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 013100-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION JULY 2024 ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. b. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. C. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. d. Delivery and processing of submittals. e. Progress meetings. f. Project closeout activities. g. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Resident Project Representative 4. The Resident Project Representative(RPR)will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. a. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved,and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. b. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. C. Notes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting notes to everyone concerned within 7 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: 1. Engineer will schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction,at a time convenient to Owner, Engineer, and Contractor, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. a. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Engineer, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. b. Notes: Engineer will record and distribute meeting notes. C. Pre-installation Conferences: 1. Contractor will conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. a. Record significant conference discussions,agreements,and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. b. Reporting: Contractor shall distribute notes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present,as well as to the Owner and Engineer. D. Progress Meetings: 1. Unless otherwise specified,conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 013100-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION JULY 2024 a. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Engineer, each contractor,subcontractor,supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. b. Agenda: Review and correct or approve notes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 1) Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. C. Meeting Notes: Engineer will record and distribute to Contractor the meeting notes. d. Reporting:Contractor shall distribute meeting notes to each subcontractor present and to parties who should have been present. 1) Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Facility Startup Meetings: 1. Schedule a minimum of two facility startup meetings.The initial meeting will be held prior to submitting Facility Startup and Performance Demonstration Plan as specified in Division 1 Section 0175 25.The meeting shall initiate the preliminary discussions regarding the Plan. 2. Agenda items will include as a minimum;the objectives of the equipment testing and facility startup,what actions and work will be included,the coordination between the various parties, and potential problems associated with startup. 3. Attendees will include: a. Contractor. b. Contractor's designated quality control representative. C. Subcontractors and manufacturer's representatives designate by Contractor. d. Engineer's representatives. e. Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. f. Others as required by Contract Documents. g. Other Meetings:As requested by Owner, Engineer,and Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE AND WEBSITE A. General information on the software product to be used can be obtained by looking at the PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 013100-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION JULY 2024 following website: B. Procore:www.procore.com C. The specific site used by the Engineer will be sent to the Contractor via e-mail with instructions on accessing the site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE AND WEBSITE A. Training: Training by the Vendor is available, but not required. The Contractor may ask Engineer questions regarding the use of the system. Vendor training expenses will be borne by the Contractor. B. Support: Software support will be available by the software vendor to all users of the project. C. Operation: Contractor shall maintain a PC system on the jobsite including high-speed access to the Internet and ability to scan documents. D. Duration: The website will be active during construction and a minimum of 3 months past Final Completion. The Owner and Engineer will have the option to continue use of the website after completion of the project. E. Archives: All files on the website will be archived every quarter and at the end of the Project. These archives will be made available to the Contractor for download over the Internet. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 013100-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 01 3100-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION JULY 2024 SECTION 0132 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0133 00"Submittal Procedures"for submitting photographic documentation. 2. Section 02 4119"Selective Demolition"for photographic documentation before selective demolition operations commence. 3. Section 0177 00"Closeout Procedures"for submitting photographic negatives and digital media as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 4. Section 0179 00"Demonstration and Training"for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of OWNER'S personnel. 5. Section 02 4100"Demolition"for photographic documentation before building, structures, and facilities demolition operations commences. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or stage of construction of structure or area. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs. B. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view and two CD-ROMs or USB Flash drives each containing a complete set of digital image files within seven days of taking photographs. 1. Format: 8-by-10-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercial- grade photographic paper, enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder. 2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name of ENGINEER. C. Name of CONTRACTOR. d. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. e. Description of vantage point, indicating location,direction (by compass point), and elevation or stage of construction. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0132 33-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION JULY 2024 f. Stationing or northing and easting of major pipe,valves,or structures. g. Unique sequential identifier. 3. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal of prints as a Project Record Document on CD-ROM or USB Flash drive. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE(NOT USED) 1.5 COORDINATION A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit photographs without obscuring shadows. 1.6 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to OWNER for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 10.0 mega pixels, and at an image resolution of up to 3072 by 2304 pixels, capable of producing 8 x 10 photo reproductions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographer: A commercial photographer or a member of the CONTRACTOR'S staff may take the initial, monthly, and final progress photographs. B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus,to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. C. Film Images: 1. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated,date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph. 2. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of progress photographs in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs same as for those submitted to ENGINEER. D. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation,editing,or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM or USB Flash drive in the PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0132 33-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION JULY 2024 field office at Project site,available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to ENGINEER. E. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction,take color photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction,from different vantage points,as directed by ENGINEER. Preconstruction photographs must be submitted to OWNER prior to the first application for payment. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take a minimum of 10 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take photographs of existing facilities either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. F. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 2 color photographs of each structure or area under construction monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. As approved by Resident Project Representative,select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. G. Final Construction Photograph. Provide a minimum of20 color photographs. H. Aerial photographs: Prove a minimum of 2 color aerial photographs of the Project site at the following times. 1. Following construction completion. I. Additional Photographs: ENGINEER may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified. 1. Three days notice will be given,where feasible. 2. In emergency situations,take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. C. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit bid items. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f. OWNER's request for special publicity photographs. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0132 33-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0132 33-PAGE 4 OF 4 100%DESIGN SET 0537-055-01 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION MAY 2024 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0135 73"Delegated Design Procedures". 2. Section 017123, "Field Engineering". 3. Section 0177 00"Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties. 4. Section 0178 39"Project Record Documents"for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 5. Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data"for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 6. Section 0179 00"Demonstration and Training"for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of OWNER'S personnel. 7. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires ENGINEER'S responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require ENGINEER'S responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing,testing,delivery,other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. ENGINEER reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 sections and the General Conditions for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0133 00-PAGE 1 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2024 C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on ENGINEER'S receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. ENGINEER will advise CONTRACTOR when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 21 days for review of each resubmittal. D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately on label or beside title block to record CONTRACTOR'S review markings (Green in color). 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of ENGINEER. d. Name and address of CONTRACTOR. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number shall be by means of a specification number, a chronological order, and a letter suffices to indicate number of times submitted. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a hyponym and then a sequential number(e.g., 33 05 61-01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another hyponym (e.g., 33 05 61- 01-A). 2) Operational and Maintenance Manuals submitted shall be identified with the same number as it's corresponding equipment submittal. (e.g., 22 14 29-DRAFT), indicates preliminary O&M Manual for equipment submitted under Section 22 14 29. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate. k. Location(s)where product is to be installed,as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. E. Deviations from Contract Documents: CONTRACTOR shall highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations (Green in color)from the Contract Documents on submittals. Requests for deviation shall be by CONTRACTOR's Modification Request in accordance with the requirements of Section 0126 00. F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless ENGINEER observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0133 00-PAGE 2 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2024 submittal may serve as final submittal. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. ENGINEER will return submittals,without review, received from sources other than CONTRACTOR. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked"REVIEWED." 4. For resubmittals, CONTRACTOR shall provide the entire and complete submittal for project documentation. If the CONTRACTOR provides only the portions required by the previous shop drawing review,then the ENGINEER may elect to return the submittal without review. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers,subcontractors,suppliers, fabricators, installers, and authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating"REVIEWED"or "Furnish As Corrected." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. When pre-printed catalog information is submitted, clearly identified item to be submitted with arrow or other mark.Catalog information not marked clearly shall be returned. 4. Include the following information,as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0133 00-PAGE 3 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2024 C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information,drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of ENGINEER'S CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power,signal,and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. I. Seal and signature of professional ENGINEER if specified. M. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field- installed wiring. n. Electrical requirements. o. Limits of or range of operation. p. Performance curves. q. When multiple products or materials are allowed, CONTRACTOR shall clearly indicate which product or material is being used at each location throughout the project. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind,color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Original hard copies must be provided for color selection or items with various finishes. Electronic submittals for samples are not acceptable. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0133 00-PAGE 4 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2024 control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s)of available choices where color, pattern,texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. ENGINEER will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work,cured, and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to,the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color,texture,and pattern;color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. ENGINEER will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. ENGINEER will return two copies. F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Section 0129 00. G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 0129 00. H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. ENGINEER will return one copy. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. An officer shall sign certificates and certifications or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 2. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Section 0140 00. B. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names, and addresses of architects and OWNER's, and other information specified. C. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0133 00-PAGE 5 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2024 comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. D. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and,where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. E. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. F. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. J. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency,on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. L. Operational and Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Section 0178 23. M. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations,and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. N. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name,address,and telephone number of manufacturer. O. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0133 00-PAGE 6 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2024 1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed,whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. P. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. Q. Construction Photographs and Videotapes: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 33. R. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit information directly to OWNER; do not submit to ENGINEER. 1. ENGINEER will not review submittals that include MSDS and will return them for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of CONTRACTOR by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to ENGINEER. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit per Section 0135 73, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, licensed in the State of Texas,for each product and system specifically assigned to CONTRACTOR to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads,and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal and shall insure the values, material,equipment,or method of work shall be as described. B. CONTRACTOR shall insure there is no conflict with other submittals and shall notify ENGINEER of each case where a conflict may occur. C. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp (Green in color) before submitting to ENGINEER. D. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp(Green in color). PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0133 00-PAGE 7 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2024 Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of CONTRACTOR'S approval,and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION A. General: ENGINEER will not review submittals that do not bear CONTRACTOR'S approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: ENGINEER will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. ENGINEER will either stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, or use the Shop Drawing Review Comments form listed in Part 3 to indicate the action taken for each submittal as follows: 1. REVIEWED a. CONTRACTOR may incorporate product(s)or implement Work covered by submittal. 2. FURNISH AS CORRECTED a. CONTRACTOR may incorporate product(s)or implement Work covered by submittal, in accordance with ENGINEER'S notations. 3. REVISE AND RESUBMIT a. Make corrections or obtain missing portions and resubmit. 4. REJECTED a. CONTRACTOR may not incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal. C. Informational Submittals: ENGINEER will review each submittal and will not return it or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. ENGINEER will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable,will be considered nonresponsive,and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0133 00-PAGE 8 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JULY 2024 0133 01 Submittal Register Specification Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 0072 00 Schedule of Values Record Data 0072 00 Project Schedule Record Data 0072 00 Pre-construction Photos/Video Record Data 0072 00 Schedule of Documents Record Data 02 41 00 Demolition Record Data 0241 19 Selective Demolition Record Data 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete Shop Drawing 0550 10 Anchor bolts, Expansion Anchors, and Concrete Inserts Shop Drawing 07 21 63 Fluid-Applied Condensation Mitigation Coating Shop Drawing Sample 0991 00 Painting and Protective Coatings Shop Drawing Sample 1014 19 Safety Signs Shop Drawing 10 90 00 Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging Shop Drawing 23 07 00 Thermal Insulation Shop Drawing 23 31 00 HVAC Ductwork and Accessories Shop Drawing 23 84 00 Dehumidification Air Handling Unit Shop Drawing 0&M Manual 2605 33 1 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems Shop Drawing 2605 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Shop Drawing 26 05 73 Power Systems Studies Shop Drawing 3123 00 Excavation, Trenching, and Backfilling for Utiliies Record Data 3123 16 Excavation Support and Protection Record Data 32 11 00 Base Courses Shop Drawing 3292 19 Hydromulch Seeding Record Data 3301 10.58 Disinfection of Potable Water Piping and Tanks Record Data 40 01 05 Field Testing of Piping Systems Shop Drawing 40 05 05 Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods Shop Drawing 4005 07 Hangers and Supports for Process Piping Shop Drawing 4005 19 Ductile Iron Pipe Shop Drawing 40 05 31.13 Polyvinyl Chloride and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Shop Drawing Process Pipe 40 05 52 Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances Shop Drawing 0&M Manual 40 05 56 Gates Slide and Weir Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 05 57.23 Electric Motor Actuators Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 05 64 Butterfly Valves Shop Drawing O&M Manual 40 08 00 1 Field Testing of Process Interconnections Record Data 4042 13 Process Piping Insulation Shop Drawing 40 66 00 Process Control System Instruments Shop Drawing O&M Manual Drawing 01-M-01 Peristaltic Sample Pump Shop Drawing O&M Manual Drawing 12-M-06, Manhole Lid Shop Drawing 12-M-09 Submittal Register 01 33 01-1 O.N. Stevens WTP Filtration System Hydraulic Improvements—19032A 10/2018 SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services to not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit CONTRACTOR'S other quality-assurance and-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Provisions of this Section do not limit requirements for CONTRACTOR to provide quality-assurance and-control services required by ENGINEER,OWNER,or authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0133 00"Submittal Procedures." 2. All other Contract Document sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by ENGINEER. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination,testing,or operation;they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a Nationally Recognized PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0140 00-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 Testing Laboratory (NRTL), a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill,factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Independent Testing Agency: An entity engaged by separate contract with the OWNER to perform specific tests, inspections,or both. The terms Independent Testing Laboratory and Independent Testing Agency shall have equivalent meaning. I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged by the CONTRACTOR to perform specific tests, inspections,or both identified as the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility by the Contract Documents. Testing Laboratory shall mean the same as Testing Agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: CONTRACTOR or another entity engaged by CONTRACTOR as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as"carpenter", must perform certain construction activities. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to ENGINEER for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified,or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate,for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to ENGINEER for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Testing Agencies specified in Paragraph 1.6 to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0140 00-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: Afirm or individual experienced in installing, erecting,or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance,as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional ENGINEER Qualifications: A professional ENGINEER who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Laboratory facilities, including personnel, and equipment, utilized shall meet the criteria detailed in ASTM E329"Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing",ASTM D3666"Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials," and ASTM D3740 "Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction." 2. Testing Agency shall be accredited by the American Association of Laboratory Accreditation (AALA), National Institute of Standards and Technology(NIST), NVLAP, the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO)),or other nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 3. Comply with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities. G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. H. Mockups: If applicable, before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by ENGINEER. 2. Notify ENGINEER seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain ENGINEER'S approval of mockups before starting work,fabrication,or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0140 00-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. OWNER Responsibilities: The OWNER is required by law to provide quality-control services using an Independent Testing Agency.The OWNER will engage a qualified Independent Testing Agency to perform these services. 1. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to CONTRACTOR. A deductive Change Order will be used to adjust the Contract Sum. 2. The OWNER shall provide field and laboratory services in connection with verification surveying, geotechnical analysis and construction materials testing required by separate contract with an Independent Testing Agency or other consultant. Such work includes but is not limited to the following: a. Testing of concrete mix designs, design of asphalt mixtures, lime stabilization of subgrade,flowable mix design, and related design parameter determinations. b. Determination of soil test for classifications of on-site and off-site borrow materials, soil densities and moisture determination of subgrade and embankment materials,cement or lime stabilization of subgrade,and other related testing required during construction. C. Weld inspection,coating inspections,torque requirements for steel erection, and other non-destructive testing required by the Contract Documents. d. Vacuum and pressure testing of pipe lines, manholes, and related work, including disinfection testing of potable water lines and CCTV of lines directed by the Contract Documents. e. All inspection and testing work not specifically stated to be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. f. Verification surveys of final constructed grades, by a Registered Professional Land Surveyor(RPLS) licensed in the State of Texas, where required by the Contract Documents. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as OWNER'S responsibility,the independent testing agency or other consultant shall be required by contract with the OWNER to prepare certified written reports to be submitted in accordance with Section 0133 00 for each quality-control service. B. CONTRACTOR Responsibilities: Only such tests and inspections that are explicitly assigned to the CONTRACTOR shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, the OWNER shall provide both the quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform the following quality-control services. 1. Where services are specifically indicated as CONTRACTOR'S responsibility,engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. CONTRACTOR shall not employ same entity engaged by OWNER, unless agreed to in writing by OWNER. 2. Notify Testing Agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0140 00-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are specifically indicated as CONTRACTOR'S responsibility,the selected Testing Agency shall prepare certified written reports to be submitted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 0133 00 for each quality- control service. 4. Testing and inspecting desired by CONTRACTOR and not required by the Contract Documents are CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction. 6. The CONTRACTOR shall provide construction surveying required to construct the improvements as depicted on the plans. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation,including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 0133 00. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were CONTRACTOR'S responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction of replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. Should laboratory services provided by the OWNER under Paragraph 1.7 A of this Section indicate the work does not meet Contract Document requirements,the cost of additional testing or surveying shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR by deductive Change Order to the Contract Amount. The testing or surveying services required shall be performed by the Independent Testing Agency or other consultant under separate contract with the OWNER. E. Independent Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.The Independent Testing Agency shall: 1. Notify ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report,distribution as indicated,of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service in accordance with Section 0133 00 for each quality-control service. 5. Not release, revoke, alter,or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Not perform any duties of CONTRACTOR. F. Associated Services: CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with all agencies, whether under contract with the OWNER or CONTRACTOR, performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify all agencies,whether under contract with the OWNER or CONTRACTOR, sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0140 00-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies as applicable. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times fortests, inspections,obtaining samples,and similar activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to ENGINEER. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for ENGINEER'S reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are CONTRACTOR'S responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0140 00-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 SECTION 0142 00 REFERENCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey ENGINEER'S action on Contractor's submittals, applications,and requests,"approved" is limited to ENGINEER'S duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by ENGINEER. Other terms including"requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as"directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as"indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction,and rules,conventions,and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling,erecting, placing,anchoring,applying,working to dimension,finishing,curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install,complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. D. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity,obtain PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0142 00-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 REFERENCES JULY 2024 copies directly from publication source. E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) Architectural Barriers Act(ABA) CFR Code of Federal Regulations DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus(See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards TAS Texas Accessibility Standards TDLR Texas Department of Licensing and Regulations 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. AA Aluminum Association, Inc.(The) AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association ACI ACI International(American Concrete Institute) ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc.(The) AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America(The) Al Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects(The) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET-Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0142 00-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 REFERENCES JULY 2024 AMCA Air Movement&Control Association International, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute APA Architectural Precast Association API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air-Conditioning& Refrigeration Institute ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME ASME International ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association(The) CGA Compressed Gas Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CPA Composite Panel Association CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSI Cast Stone Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) DHI Door and Hardware Institute DMS Departmental Material Specifications, TxDOT EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. FMG FM Global (Formerly: FM -Factory Mutual System) FMRC Factory Mutual Research(Now FMG) HI Hydraulic Institute HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association(Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood&Veneer Association ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance ISO International Organization of Standardization LPI Lightning Protection Institute PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0142 00-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 REFERENCES JULY 2024 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association MHIA Material Handling Industry of America MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association NFPA NFPA(National Fire Protection Association) NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NSF NSF International(National Sanitation Foundation International) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association(Now WDMA) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDCA Painting&Decorating Contractors of America PDI Plumbing& Drainage Institute PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute PLANET Professional Landcare Network (Formerly: ACLA-AssociatedLandscapeContractorsofAmerica) PTI Post-Tensioning Institute RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections SAE SAE International SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association(Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings STI Steel Tank Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association WDMA Window&Door Manufacturers Association(Formerly: NWWDA- National Wood Window and Door Association) B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0142 00-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 REFERENCES JULY 2024 BOCA BOCA International, Inc.(See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICBO International Conference of Building Officials(See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. CE Army Corps of Engineers CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission DOC Department of Commerce DOD Department of Defense DOE Department of Energy EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAA Federal Aviation Administration FCC Federal Communications Commission FDA Food and Drug Administration GSA General Services Administration HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology OSHA Occupational Safety& Health Administration PBS Public Building Service(See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science RUS Rural Utilities Service(See USDA) SD State Department TRB Transportation Research Board USDA Department of Agriculture USPS Postal Service D. State Government and Regional Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality TWDB Texas Water Development Board TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0142 00-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 REFERENCES JULY 2024 PART 2 -PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0142 00-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 REFERENCES JULY 2024 SECTION 0143 33 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the requirements for the qualifications,services,training, installation assistance, and related Work required for manufacturers' services. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0175 25 "Equipment Testing and Startup." 2. Section 0178 23"Operation and Maintenance Data"for requirements for furnishing operation and maintenance information and materials. 3. Section 0179 00"Demonstration and Training" 4. All other Contract Documents for additional requirements. C. Definitions 1. Person-Day:One person for 8 hours within regular CONTRACTOR working hours. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Training Schedule: Submit not less than 21 days prior to start of equipment installation. B. Lesson Plan:Submit proposed lesson plan not less than 21 days prior to schedule training session. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Authorized representative of the manufacturer,factory trained, and experienced in the technical applications, operation, and maintenance of respective equipment, subsystem, or system,with full authority by the equipment manufacturer to issue the certifications require of equipment manufacturer.Additional qualifications may be specified in the individual Sections. B. Representative will be subject to acceptance by ENGINEER and OWNER. No substitute representative will be allowed unless prior written approval has been given. 1.5 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES A. Furnish minimum manufacturers'services,when required by the Contract Documents,to comply with the requirements of this Section. B. Where time is necessary in excess of that stated in the Section for manufacturers'services, or when a minimum time is not specified,the time required to perform the specified PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0143 33-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES JULY 2024 services shall be considered incidental. C. Schedule manufacturers'services to avoid conflict with other onsite testing or other manufacturers' onsite services. D. Determine, before scheduling manufacturers'services that all conditions necessary to allow successful completion of the services have been complied with. E. Only those days of service approved by ENGINEER will be credited to fulfill the specified minimum service. F. When specified by the Contract Documents,manufacturer's onsite services shall include: 1. Assistance during product(system,subsystem,or component) installation to include observation, guidance, and instruction of CONTRACTOR'S personnel during the assembly, erection, installation, or application Work. 2. Inspection,checking, and adjustments as required for product(system,subsystem,or component)to function as warranted by manufacturer and required to provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation. 3. Provide daily copies of manufacturer's representative field notes and data to ENGINEER. 4. Visiting site as required to correct problems and until installation and operation are acceptable to ENGINEER. 5. Resolution of assemble or installation problems attributable to,or associated with, respective manufacturer's products and systems. 6. Assistance during functional and performance testing,facility start-up,evaluation,and commissioning. 7. Training of OWNER'S personnel in the operation and maintenance of the product as required. 8. Additional requirements may be specified in applicable Section(s). 2.2 MANUFACTURER'S CERIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE A. When specified in the Contract Documents, provide a Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance,completed, and signed by the entity supplying the product, material,or service prior to shipment. A copy of this form is attached to this Section. B. ENGINEER may permit use of certain products, materials, or service prior to sampling and testing if accompanied by an accepted Certificate of Compliance. C. The Certificate shall certify the product, material, or service complies with the Contract Documents.Attach supporting documentation as appropriate.This information may reflect previous test results on the product, material, or services. 2.3 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION A. When specified in the Contract Documents, provide a Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, completed, and signed by the manufacturer's representative.A copy of this form is attached to this Section. B. The Certificate shall certify the signing party is a dully authorized representative of the manufacturer, is empowered by the manufacturer to inspect,approve the installation, PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0143 33-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES JULY 2024 operate their equipment,and make recommendations required to ensure the equipment installation is complete and operational. 2.4 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP A. Provide manufacturers' representative to assist CONTRACTOR for the specified product (system, subsystem, and component) in accordance with Section 0175 25. 2.5 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturers' representative for detailed classroom and hands-on training to OWNER'S personnel on the operation and maintenance of specified product (system, subsystem, and component). Refer to Section 0179 00 for additional requirements. B. Furnish trained, articulate personnel to coordinate and expedite training, to be present during training coordination meetings with OWNER and familiar with required operation and maintenance information submitted in accordance with Section 0178 23. C. Furnish training materials,which will be retained by the trainee. 2.6 SUPPLEMENTS A. The following forms located after"END OF SECTION"are part of this Section: 1. Form: Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance. 2. Form: Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0143 33-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES JULY 2024 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE OWNER: PRODUCT, MATERIAL OR SERVICE: PROJECT NAME: Comments: I hereby certify that the above-referenced product, material,or service called for by the Contract for the named Project has been furnished in accordance with all applicable requirements. I further certify that the product, material, or service is of the quality specified and conform in all respects with the Contract Documents, and of the quantity shown. Date of Execution: Manufacturer: Manufacturer's Authorized Agent (Print): (Authorized Signature) Attachments: Add comments on separate sheets as applicable. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0143 33-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES JULY 2024 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION Owner: Serial No.: Tag No.: System: Project No.: Spec. Section: I hereby certify the above referenced equipment/system has been: (Check Applicable) ❑ Installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. ❑ Inspected, checked, and adjusted. ❑ Serviced with proper lubricants. ❑ Electrical and mechanical connections meet quality and safety requirements. ❑ All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed. ❑ Functional test completed. ❑ System has been performance tested and meets or exceeds specified performance requirements. (When complete system furnished by single manufacturer) Date of Execution: Manufacturer: Manufacturer's Authorized Agent (Print): (Authorized Signature) Attachments: Add comments on separate sheets as applicable. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0143 33-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES JULY 2024 PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0143 33-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES JULY 2024 SECTION 0150 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT's field office and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT's field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation,loading,and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush,or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay forthe utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved bythe OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. 3. Prevent freezing of pipes,flooding,or the contamination of water. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0150 00-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JULY 2024 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.5 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT's field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.2 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.3 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. 2.5 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration,construction,testing,disinfection,and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0150 00-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JULY 2024 2. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. 3. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 4. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's and the OPT'S field office. 2.6 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the"Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor.The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.3 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.4 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0150 00-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JULY 2024 gates with padlocks. 3.6 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings,sheds,and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs,framing, supports,and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.7 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service(sweeping/mopping) for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat,clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary,the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 0150 00-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS JULY 2024 SECTION 0153 30 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This special specification governs bypass pumping of water within an influent filter channel. The work covered by this item consists of bypass pumping operations in order to temporarily isolate influent filter channels to perform necessary repairs, coat concrete in influent channels, and replace slide gates while the tasked scope of work is executed.This item includes all requirements for implementing a temporary pumping system for the purpose of diverting flows around any construction-related activity to an approved reintroduction point within the filters system.The CONTRACTOR shall minimize the health, safety, and regulatory risks by taking all reasonable measures to avoid an overflow. Therefore,the OWNER requires the CONTRACTOR to manage the flow of water in a planned and proactive manner. A portable centrifugal pump on a skid will be required as indicated within the plans (see sheet WTR-494) of the project area. B. The normal practice will be to setup bypass pumping to allow for the day's construction activities. Continuous bypass pumping for 24 hours will be necessary based on plant flows With normal practice,the preferred suction point will be located in the settling basin at the connection of the influent filter channel being repaired. Discharge of bypass must be into an operating filter channel. C. The required flow rate for each filter bypassed is 5 MGD. Maximum number of filter that may be taken off-line at an given time is TWO. D. All bypass pumping equipment will need to be disinfected and a Bac-T test taken for coliform detection. A successful Bac-T test is required prior to start-up of the bypass pumping system. Each setup will require disinfection and Bac-T testing. E. The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all labor, supervision,tools, equipment, appliances, and materials to perform all operations in connection with pumping of potable water and wet weather flows around pipe section(s).The purpose of bypass pumping is for the CONTRACTOR to provide a safe work environment free of flowing potable water,to prevent potable water overflows, and provide reliable potable water service at all times.The CONTRACTOR shall maintain potable water flow in the construction area in order to prevent back-up and/or overflow into surrounding filter channels,adjacent ditches,storm sewers, and waterways. F. The OWNER reserves the right to discontinue bypass pumping due to 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Bypass pumping is the installation and operation of bulkheads, plugs, hoses, piping, pumps, and reliable power for pumping to maintain potable water flow and prevent backup and overflow. 2. Bypass pumping provides continuous potable water service to the users while maintenance or construction operations are in progress by diverting flow when necessary around the construction location and pumping it to a supporting influence PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0153 30-PAGE 1 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING JULY 2024 filter channel. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Special Coordination Requirements 1. The CONTRACTOR shall report any bypass pumping activities not included in the submitted plan to the ENGINEER prior to proceeding with these activities. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall cease bypass pumping operations when directed bythe ENGINEER or OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall perform leakage and pressure tests of the bypass pumping discharge piping using clean water prior to actual operation.The OWNER will be given a 48-hour notice prior to testing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. For all projects requiring bypass pumping, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a bypass pumping plan (BPP). The BPP shall be submitted a minimum of two weeks prior to commencing any portion of the proposed scope of work. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a BPP which includes a written description and exhibit for implementation and sequencing of bypass pumping for review and approval by the ENGINEER and OWNER prior to installation of the bypass system.The plan shall include sufficient detail to show the location, number and size of pumps,the number, location, size, and type of hoses and/or rigid piping, and the location of the downstream discharge. Show any special features where pipes or hoses cross roadways, such as temporary trenches, support bridges, etc. A plan for each line segment(s),structure(s)or treatment unit(s) around which flows are being bypassed is required.The plan must be signed and sealed by a Professional ENGINEER licensed in the State of Texas, and shall include but not be limited to details of the following: a. A cover letter containing the following information: 1) The Project Name and location 2) The name and address of the CONTRACTOR 3) Contact information of the CONTRACTOR's project manager, superintendent,foreman/supervisor, safety professional, etc. 4) A description and location of the planned bypass pumping work to be performed S) Emergency"24/7" contact information for the bypass pumping subcontractor, if applicable. Make sure to include the name, phone number, and title of the person(s)onsite responsible for the bypass pumping operation. 6) The name, phone number,title,and signature of the person preparing the BPP. b. Staffing plan including name and qualifications for on-site operators. Trained bypass pumping personnel (pump operator)shall be present during the entire bypass operation. Logs shall be maintained by the bypass pumping personnel. Submit bypass pumping personnel qualifications for agency review and PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0153 30-PAGE 2 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING JULY 2024 approval. C. Staging areas for pumps including a schematic showing the arrangement and layout of the pumping and bypassing facilities at various stages in the work. d. Plug method and types of plugs. e. A description of how the maximum amount of potable water flows to be bypassed was obtained including calculations for selection of bypass pump and pipe size(s) based on potable water flows.The maximum velocity in the bypass pumping pipes shall be 8 feet/second. f. Length,size, material, location,and method of installation of suction piping. g. Length,size,material, location, method of installation and location of discharge piping. h. Pump manufacturer model and pump curve showing operating range. i. Calculations of static lift,friction losses,and flow velocity(pump curves showing pump operating range shall be submitted). j. Location of engine generator(one plus backup). k. Fuel tank storage with sufficient capacity to operate the engines for 4 days continuously. I. Containment pad for engine generators. M. Method of protecting discharge manholes or structures from erosion,damage, and unauthorized entry. n. Method of noise control for each pump and generator,and their expected decibel levels. o. Any temporary pipe supports and anchoring,if required. p. Any vehicular ramps for road crossing if required. q. Information on a secondary source of water for self-priming pumps. r. Schedule for installation and maintenance of bypass pumping lines. S. Valves and header to operate bypass pumping plus back-up pump when needed without removing primary pump before starting back-up pump(s). t. Clear photographs of the treatment units proposed to be used for suction and discharge. U. Wet weather event procedures. V. Emergency Plan detailing procedures to be followed in the event that any portion of the bypass operation fails and causes either surcharging or discharge. This plan must include the containment, notification, and equipment failure procedures. W. Schedule for bypass pumping operations, including dates and durations for each sequence. Indicate if bypass pumping will take place outside normal work hours. X. Protection method for existing utilities. Y. Date and time of BPP testing prior to pipeline work commencing at the peak flow time. B. Informational Submittals PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0153 30-PAGE 3 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING JULY 2024 1. Qualifications Statement a. CONTRACTOR shall submit a Certificate of Compliance signed and sealed by the CONTRACTOR's ENGINEER that the bypass pumping plan meets the requirements of this specification. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications:The CONTRACTOR or SUBCONTRACTOR performing the bypass pumping shall have a minimum of 5 projects with the maximum pumped flow of this project and equal in scope and complexity within the last 10 years. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. If the CONTRACTOR sees flows exceeding those provided,CONTRACTOR must immediately notify the ENGINEER. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary pumping equipment, piping, and all other necessary appurtenances in order to maintain adequate and reliable potable water flow in the filter system at all times during construction. All materials, equipment, etc., must be in good condition,and should not have visible damage such as cracks, holes,foreign material, blisters, etc. B. The pump and bypass pumping lines shall be of adequate capacity and size to handle flows as shown in this specification.All piping,joints, and accessories shall be designed to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure,or a minimum of 50 psi,whichever is greater. C. Internal and or external bypass pumping operations shall use 100 percent leak proof pipe such as PVC or HDPE. Pipe shall be restrained as necessary to prevent joint separation. In order to prevent accidental spillage of flows all discharge systems shall be temporarily constructed of AWWA certified rigid pipe with positive, restrained joints. Under no circumstances will aluminum "irrigation"type piping or glued PVC pipe be allowed. Discharge hose will only be allowed in short sections and by specific permission from the ENGINEER. D. Pumps shall be self-priming, in good working order, with a working pressure gauge on the discharge.A back-up pump of the same capacity as the primary pump shall be maintained on site at all times to be used in the event that the primary pump fails. Back-up pumps shall be on-line, isolated from the primary system by a valve. E. Any potable water back-ups and/or overflows as the result of inadequate equipment are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. F. The CONTRACTOR shall be required to have all materials, equipment,and labor necessary to complete the bypass pumping on the job site prior to isolating the potable water main, manhole, lift station, or treatment unit and beginning bypass pumping. G. Extra Materials: PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0153 30-PAGE 4 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING JULY 2024 1. Spare parts for pumps and piping shall be kept on site. 2. Adequate hoisting equipment for each pump and accessories shall be maintained on the site. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER A. Operate, maintain, and modify the system(s) as required to conform to this specification. Upon completion of the Construction, CONTRACTOR shall remove the system(s). B. Assume sole responsibility for bypass pumping systems and for all loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and any spills or resultant damage caused by his operation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The following options have been reviewed and discussed as viable options for performing the bypass pumping operation for the existing City of Corpus Christi Potable Water Treatment Plant.The CONTRACTOR may use one of these options,or submit a different plan for review and approval by the ENGINEER: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with the bypass pumping plan approved by ENGINEER and OWNER and the manufacturer-provided equipment installation guidelines and recommendations. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Maintain potable water flow to prevent backup of water in the filter system with the goal of preventing an overflow onto streets,yards, and unpaved areas or into buildings, adjacent ditches, storm sewers, and waterways.The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary steps to prevent flooding of public or private property. Maintaining flow inside the plant during construction is required. B. Plugs shall be redundantly tethered to ensure they are not lost within the filters system. When plugging or blocking is no longer needed for performance and acceptance of work, it is to be removed in a manner that permits the water flow to slowly return to normal without surge,to prevent surcharging or causing other major disturbances within the plant. C. Any time the bypass pump(s) are operating, an experienced operator shall be on site to monitor the operation:adjust pump speed,valves,etc.; maintain and make minor repairs to the system; and report problems. D. Where work requires bypassing beyond working hours,the CONTRACTOR shall operate bypass pumping and man the system for twenty-four hours per day. E. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that no damage will be caused to private property as a result of bypass pumping operations. Access to adjacent properties and treatment facilities shall be maintained at all times including driveways. Ramps, steel plates, or other methods shall be employed by the CONTRACTOR to facilitate traffic over surface piping and hose. High traffic areas may require alternate methods to maintain access. F. CONTRACTOR is responsible for retrieving any bypass pumping equipment,including PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0153 30-PAGE 5 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING JULY 2024 temporary plugs,that enter the system. G. CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work as quickly as possible and satisfactorily pass all tests, inspections, and repair all deficiencies prior to discontinuing bypass pumping operations and returning flow to the filter channel systems. H. During bypass pumping, do not allow potable water to be leaked, dumped, or spilled in or onto any area outside of the existing filter systems. I. In the event of accidental spill or overflow, immediately stop the discharge and take action to clean up the spill. Promptly notify the OWNER so that required reporting can be made to the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) by the OWNER. J. In the event of accidental spill or overflow,the CONTRACTOR shall compensate the OWNER for the cost of any fines levied as the result of a spill or unauthorized discharge.The CONTARCTOR is also responsible for damages that may have occurred to public or private property including cleaning, disinfection, and other corrections to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER at no cost to the OWNER. K. CONTRACTOR shall not intentionally damage, alter, or remove portions of the existing settling basin and filter system structures for the purpose of installing a bypass pumping system without specific approval from the ENGINEER.If a structure is damaged, it shall be reconstructed or replaced to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the OWNER. L. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damage that results directly or indirectly from the interference of storm water runoff to bypassing equipment, piping, and/or appurtenances. M. When bypass pumping operations are complete, piping shall be drained into the filter channel prior to disassembly. After the receipt of written permission from ENGINEER, remove piping, restore property to pre-construction condition and restore damaged pavement. 3.4 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall perform leakage and pressure tests of the bypass pumping discharge piping using clean water prior to actual operation. The ENGINEER will be given 24 hours' notice prior to testing. 2. For any bypass operations proposed to be conducted during normal business hours only(8 am to 5 pm), a test run of at least 2 hours must be satisfactorily performed, prior to commencing any construction work. For a bypass pumping operation that will be required to run continuously(24 hours) and over multiple days, a 24-hour test run must be satisfactorily performed prior to commencing any construction work. In both cases,the Inspector must provide acknowledgment first. 3. Any failure of equipment,or activities associated with the bypass pumping operations contributing to either a surcharge or overflow, shall be deemed a failed test.The test shall then be stopped and any necessary cleanup or reporting efforts performed.The BPP will need to be revised, resubmitted,and acknowledged prior to the test initiating again. Any effort by the OWNER or other third parties to mitigate damages resulting from any surcharging or overflows shall be the direct and sole responsibility of the PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0153 30-PAGE 6 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING JULY 2024 CONTRACTOR.This includes any related fines, penalties,or damages. B. Inspection: 1. CONTRACTOR shall inspect bypass pumping system every two hours to ensure that the system is working correctly. C. Maintenance Service: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the temporary pumping system is properly maintained and a responsible operator shall be on hand at all times when pumps are operating. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0153 30-PAGE 7 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 S3 30-PAGE 8 OF 8 BID SET 0S37-OS5-01 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING JULY 2024 SECTION 0157 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No.TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.3 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00. 1.4 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14,Article X-titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0157 00-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS JULY 2024 1.5 PERMITS A. As applicable,submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI,or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT)when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.6 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating,and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQto file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent, SWPPP, and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre-construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0157 00-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS JULY 2024 to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means,methods,techniques,sequences,and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.7 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil,water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose,or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.8 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials,and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0157 00-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS JULY 2024 soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.9 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS(NOT APPLICABLE) A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream,the Corpus Christi Bay. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor,at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0157 00-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS JULY 2024 Contractor's expense,a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant,the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 361826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. NOTE TO SPECIFIER: If well pointing is not anticipated for this Project,do not delete 1.12,but add"NOT APPLICABLE" next to the heading for 1.12. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER(NOT APPLICABLE) A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials,tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be US Ecology(USET) in Robstown,Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi,Texas. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering,which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0157 00-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS JULY 2024 current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Contractor shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc.to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0157 00-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 TEMPORARY CONTROLS JULY 2024 SECTION 0160 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0142 00"References"for applicable industry standards for products specified. 2. Section 0177 00"Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Section 0178 36 "Warranties." 4. All other Contract Documents for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Preselection Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Preselection Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Definitions 1. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. a. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, which is current as of date of the Contract Documents. b. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project orfacility,except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. C. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution,to have the indicated qualities related to type,function,dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. 2. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by CONTRACTOR. 3. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation,to establish the significant qualities related to type, PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 1 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS—NOTUSED 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material and Equipment List. Within 60 days after Notice to Proceed,submit a complete list of major products proposed for the Project,with the name of the manufacturer and the installing entity. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title; Drawing numbers and titles; sufficient information for review by ENGINEER; CONTRACTOR'S certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated; and CONTRACTOR'S waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at end of Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by OWNER and separate CONTRACTOR's, which will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples,where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects, ENGINEER's,and OWNER's. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. j. CONTRACTOR'S certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. k. CONTRACTOR'S waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 2 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. ENGINEER'S Action: If necessary, ENGINEER will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order or Field Order. b. Use product specified if ENGINEER cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. ENGINEER'S Action: If necessary, ENGINEER will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request,or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 0133 00. b. Use product specified if ENGINEER cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 0133 00. Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If CONTRACTOR is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. B. Design Requirements: Where CONTRACTOR design is specified; design of installation, systems, equipment, and components, including supports and anchorage, shall be in compliance with provisions of International Building Code by International Code Council. Refer to the drawings for required design load criteria. C. Environmental Requirements: Provide products suitable for installation and operation under rated conditions at 650 feet above sea level. Products installed outdoors or in unheated enclosures shall be capable of continuous operation within an ambient temperature range of 10 degrees F to 110 degrees F. D. Product installations are defined as equipment furnished for an individual facility installed as part of a single project. Multiple equipment items installed as part of the same project shall not be considered multiple installations. Multiple equipment items installed at the same facility at different times as part of different projects can be considered multiple installations. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 3 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 deterioration,and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight,except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature,humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Off-site storage of materials and equipment shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. The equipment,sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this section are based on recommendations by equipment suppliers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability.The PRESELECTED EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall be responsible for design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this section. B. Environmental Conditions: 1. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed to be installed forthis service and the environment encountered in this installation, unless noted otherwise. 2. The environment will be moist,and corrosive,exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. 3. All equipment shall be designed and capable of operation outdoors at ambient temperatures of 10 degrees F to 110 degrees F. 4. Equipment shall be compatible with heat tracing and insulation, which will be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR. Equipment SUPPLIER's shall design PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 4 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 piping systems with ample clearances and material compatibility to accept required heat tracing and insulation. If additional freeze protection beyond heat tracing and insulation is required, it shall be furnished by the Equipment SUPPLIER. Equipment SUPPLIERS and PRESELECECTED EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERs shall coordinate with the CONTRACTOR to provide direction on where heat tracing is required and shall verify that the CONTRACTOR has provided adequate heat tracing and insulation during startup activities. 1.8 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve CONTRACTOR of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturerto OWNER. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for OWNER. 3. Refer to Section 0178 36 for additional requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated,that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Like items of products furnished and installed shall be end products of one manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance, spare parts and replacement, manufacturer's services,and implement same or similar process instrumentation and control functions. 4. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer,for similar components, unless otherwise specified. 5. OWNER reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 6. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," ENGINEER will make selection. 7. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample,"sample to be matched PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 5 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 is ENGINEER'S. 8. Descriptive, performance,and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 9. Regulatory Requirements: Coating materials shall meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds and for worker exposure. 10. Safety Guards: a. Provide for all belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, or other moving or rotary parts. Cover rotating part on all sides. Design for easy installation and removal. b. Use 16-gauge or heavier; galvanized steel, aluminum, coated steel and%-inch mesh expanded steel. C. For outdoor installations prevent entrance of rain or dripping water. 11. Electrical Components: Provide Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical code, and be labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other agency acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 12. Equipment Finish: a. Provide manufacturer's standard finish and color,except where specific color is indicted. b. If manufacturer does not have a standard color, provide color as approved by ENGINEER. 13. Special Tools and Accessories: Provide to OWNER all special tools and accessories required placing equipment in operation.These include, but not limited to,adequate oil and grease (as required for first servicing of equipment after field testing), light bulbs, fuses, hydrant wrenches,valve keys, handwheels, chain operators, special tools, and other spare parts required for maintenance. 14. Lubricant: Provide initial lubricant recommended by manufacturer in sufficient quantity to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace consumption during testing,start- up, and operation until final acceptance by OWNER. B. Fabrication and Manufacture: 1. General Requirements: a. Manufacture parts to U.S.A.standard sizes and gauges. b. Two or more items of the same type shall be identical, by the same manufacturer, and interchangeable. C. Design structural members for anticipated shock and vibratory loads. d. Use 1/4-inch minimum thickness for steel that will be submerged,wholly or partially, during normal operation. e. Modify standard products as necessary to meet performance specifications. 2. Lubrication System Requirements: a. Require no more than weekly attention during continuous operation. b. Convenient and accessible. Oil drains, with bronze or stainless-steel valves, and fill-plugs easily accessible from normal operating area or platform. Locate drains to allow convenient collection of oil during changes without removing PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 6 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 equipment from its installed position. C. Provide constant-level oilers or oil level indicators for oil lubrication systems. d. For grease type bearings, which are not easily accessible, provide and install stainless steel tubing; protect and extend tubing to convenient location with suitable grease fitting. C. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that comply with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product,that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed,or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2"Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches ENGINEER'S sample. ENGINEER'S decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase"as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, and textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns,textures"or similar phrase, ENGINEER will select color, pattern, PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 7 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 density,ortexture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns,textures"or similar phrase, ENGINER will select color, pattern,density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: ENGINEER will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of ENGINEER. B. Conditions: ENGINEER will consider CONTRACTOR'S request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, ENGINEER will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers OWNER a substantial advantage in cost,time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities OWNER must assume. OWNER'S additional responsibilities may include compensation to ENGINEER for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by OWNER, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect CONTRACTOR'S Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: ENGINEER will consider CONTRACTOR'S request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, ENGINEER will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, which it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 8 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 weight,size,durability,visual effect,and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. 2.4 REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIAL A. Except as specifically indicated or specified, materials and equipment removed from existing facilities shall not be used in the completed Work. B. For materials and equipment designated for reuse in the Work: 1. Use special care in removal, handling, storage, and installation to ensure proper function in the completed Work. 2. Arrange for transportation, storage, and handling of the products when offsite storage, restoration, or renovation. All costs associated with this work are the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. 2.5 TOOLS,SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. See applicable sections for specific requirements. B. Schedule: 1. Ensure shipment and delivery occurs concurrent with shipment of product. 2. Transfer to OWNER upon acceptance by CONTRACTOR of shipment. C. Packaging and Shipment: 1. Package and ship items to avoid damage during long term storage in original cartons or in appropriately sized, hinged-cover, wood, plastic, or metal boxes. 2. Prominently display on each package: Part number, consistent with Operation and Maintenance Manual identification system;equipment description,quantity of parts; and equipment manufacturer. D. Deliver to designation location as directed by Resident Project Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When the specification Section requires the Work to be accomplished in accordance with "manufacturer's instructions", obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation. Provide two copies to the Resident Project Representative and maintain one set at the Project site. B. Handle, install, connect,clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in conformity with the Contract Documents. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedures. In case of conflict between job conditions or Contract Documents with manufacturer's instructions notify Resident Project Representative. C. Upon completion of installation,obtain Certificate of Installation from manufacturer's representative. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 9 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 3.2 INSPECTION A. Inspect products for signs of pitting, rust decay, or other deleterious effects of storage. Do not install products showing such effects. Remove damaged product from Project site and expedite delivery of identical new product. Delays to Work resulting from product damage, which necessitates procurement of new product,will be considered delays within CONTRACTOR'S control. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Drawings show general locations for product installation, unless specially dimensioned. B. No shimming between machined surfaces is allowed. C. Install Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise specified. D. Recoat finish surfaces that are damaged priorto final acceptance of Work. E. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval of ENGINEER. F. Handle, install,connect,clean,condition,and adjust product in accordance with Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions. G. Apply field coating in accordance with Contract Documents. H. Perform required adjustments,tests,operation checks,and other start-up activities. I. Fill lubricant reservoirs and replace consumption during testing,start-up,and operation prior to final acceptance of Work by OWNER. 3.4 SUPPLEMENTS A. Sample forms included after"End Of Section"are considered part of this Section: 1. Substitution Request. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 10 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 Advancement of Constructio Technology SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding Phase) Project: Substitution Request Number: From: To: Date: A/E Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone: History: ❑ New product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑5-10 yrs old❑ More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: ❑ Point-by-point comparative data attached-REQUIRED BY ENGINEER Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project: Engineer: Address: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑ No ❑ Yes;explain PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 11 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 12 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 13 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑ No ❑Yes [Add] [Deductl days. Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data samples I es s ❑ Reports ❑ Copyright 1996, Construction Page of September 1996 Specification Institute CSI Form 13.1A SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (Continued) The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design,including A/E design,detailing,and construction costs caused by the substitution. • Coordination, installation,and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted b; Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments! PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 14 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 15 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 ❑ Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 0133 00. ❑ Substitution approved as noted-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 0133 00. ❑ Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. ❑ Substitution Request received too late-Use specified materials. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 16 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: ❑ Contractor ❑ Subcontractor ❑Supplier ❑ Manufacturer ❑A/E ❑ PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 17 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 Copyright 1996, Construction 601 Madison Street,Alexandria,VA 22314-1791 Specification Institute, PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 18 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 Page of September 1996 CSI Form 13.1A PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 19 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0160 00-PAGE 20 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 SECTION 0170 00 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work. 8. Basin dewatering and cleaning. 9. Workmanship. 10. Firearms. 11. Handling materials not approved. 12. Salvaged material. 13. Archeological discoveries. 14. Endangered species. 15. Blasting and burning. 16. Pipe closure and buoyancy of structures. 17. OSHA Standards B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 0143 33"Manufacturers'Field Services"for information pertaining to the qualifications and requirements. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials,for hazardous waste disposal. C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. D. Final Property Survey: Submit two copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 017000-PAGE 1 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land- surveying services of the kind indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS—NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions and Utilities: When appropriate, the existence and location of site improvements, underground and other utilities,and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services. 2. Before construction,verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 3. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine rough-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls,floors,and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction,verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 017000-PAGE 2 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to ENGINEER. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work,verify layout information shown on Drawings,in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify ENGINEER promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb,of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify ENGINEER when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,grading,fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work.Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys,weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by ENGINEER. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations,with horizontal and vertical data,on Project Record Documents. C. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property)for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor,that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 017000-PAGE 3 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 the survey. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited,install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes,ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Complywith manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by ENGINEER. 2. Allow for building movement,including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,concrete inserts,anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products,cleaners,and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0170 00-PAGE 4 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean orvacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosingthe space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas:Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction completed or in progress is subject to harmful,dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation in accordance with Section 0175 25 and the following: 1. Remove malfunctioning components,replace with new components,and retest. 2. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. 3. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Manufacturer's Services: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Section 0143 33. 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 017000-PAGE 5 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces,touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped,scratched,and broken glass or reflective surfaces. 3.10 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENT/CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PLANS A. CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement Hazardous Environment/Confined Space Entry Plans for this Project. Plans shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for record purposes prior to the pre-construction conference. Plans shall include all local, state, and federal requirements for entrance to and working in hazardous environments and confined spaces and shall include a written safety plan for the Project. B. CONTRACTOR shall have a safety officer present at the jobsite whenever the CONTRACTOR'S activities require entering or working in a hazardous environment or confined space. 3.11 PLAN OF ACTION A. CONTRACTOR shall prepare a detailed, written plan of action covering all shutdowns, material deliveries,confined space/hazardous environment entries, plant protection system, construction sequence for major facilities and modifications to existing facilities, trench/excavation protection,for review and coordination with the OWNER and ENGINEER at the pre-construction conference. The pre-construction conference will be held prior to beginning construction activities. 3.12 BASIN DEWATERING AND CLEANING A. The CONTRACTOR shall clean basins, pipelines and equipment as specified and,when necessary, to complete the work. No additional payment will be made for such work. Washdown water shall be contained and disposed of properly. 3.13 WORKMANSHIP A. Specifications contain detailed instructions and descriptions of the major items of construction and workmanship necessary for building and completing the various elements of the Project. The Specifications are intended to be written so that only first-class workmanship and finish of the best grade and quality will result. The fact that these Specifications may fail to be so complete as to cover all details will not relieve the CONTRACTOR of full responsibility for providing a completed project of high-quality,first- PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 017000-PAGE 6 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 class finish and appearance and satisfactory for operation, all within the apparent intent of the Plans and Specifications. 3.14 FIREARMS A. Neither the Contractor nor any of his employees shall be allowed to carry firearms on the Project, either on their persons or within their automobiles. Any violation of this requirement will result in the permanent removal from the Project of the employee committing the violation. 3.15 HANDLING MATERIALS NOT APPROVED A. The CONTRACTOR shall remove from the site any materials found to be damaged, and any materials not meeting the specifications. These materials shall be removed promptly unless the ENGINEER will accept the materials after repairing. Materials found to be damaged, or not acceptable to the ENGINEER, will be removed. Examination before installation will not relieve the CONTRACTOR from any responsibility to furnish good quality materials. 3.16 SURPLUS AND SALVAGED MATERIAL A. Surplus equipment or material,which is removed by the CONTRACTOR as specified in the Drawings and Specifications, shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR.The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the disposal of salvage material offsite. B. Equipment and material designated to be salvage shall be transported by the CONTRACTOR to a location as directed by the Resident Project Representative. 3.17 ARCHEOLOGICAL DISCOVERIES A. No activity,which may affect a State Archeological Landmark,is authorized until the OWNER has complied with provisions of the Antiquities Code of Texas. The OWNER has previously coordinated with the appropriate agencies and impacts to known cultural or archeological deposits have been avoided or mitigated. However,the CONTRACTOR may encounter unanticipated cultural or archeological deposits during construction. B. In the event the Contractor discovers any artifacts, cultural materials,or suspected cultural remains during construction,the Contractor shall contact the Resident Project Representative and American Archaeology Group LLC(512-843-0135) immediately. Any construction in the immediate vicinity of the suspected cultural deposits shall cease until they can be examined. CONTRACTOR shall in no instance make contact with any parties other than those referenced above. Contractor shall only restart construction activities in the vicinity of the suspected cultural deposit upon receipt of written notice from ENGINEER or OWNER after the issues have been resolved. 3.18 ENDANGERED SPECIES A. No activity is authorized that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence,or a threatened, or endangered species as listed, or proposed for listing, under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA),and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. If a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately cease work in the area of the encounter and notify the PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 017000-PAGE 7 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 Resident Project Representative,who will immediately implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. These actions shall include reporting the encounter to the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service and the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department, obtaining any necessary approvals or permits to enable the continuation of work, or implement other mitigate actions. C. The CONTRACTOR shall not resume construction in the area of the encounter until authorized to do so by the Resident Project Representative. 3.19 BLASTING AND BURNING A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. B. Burning and Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. Trees and brush removed shall be shredded onsite with disposal off-site. 3.20 PIPE CLOSURE AND BUOYANCY OF STRUCTURES A. At the end of each working day,the CONTRACTOR shall plug the ends of all exposed pipeline to prevent any material or objects from entering the pipeline. B. The CONTRACTOR shall anchor all pipelines and structures to prevent their flotation should rain occur prior to the completion of backfilling to proposed final grade. 3.21 OSHA STANDARDS A. All work performed under this Contract shall meet the applicable requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to become familiar with the provisions of regulations published by OSHA in the Federal Register and to perform all of the responsibilities thereunder. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to see that the Project is constructed in accordance with OSHA regulations and to indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from any penalties resulting from the CONTRACTOR's failure to so perform. END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 017000-PAGE 8 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS JULY 2024 SECTION 0173 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 02 4119"Selective Demolition"for demolition of selected portions of the facilities. 2. Divisions 2 through 19 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching,show how they will be performed,and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: As applicable, list services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements,submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. ENGINEER'S Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0173 29-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 CUTTING AND PATCHING JULY 2024 increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity,which results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended,or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Complywith requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. The material selected must be approved by the ENGINEER before it can be used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall make his own investigations and determine the nature of work involved in making the connections and modifications to existing facilities in the manner intended by the Plans. B. Sequencing and coordination requirements are described elsewhere. C. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching,verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0173 29-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 CUTTING AND PATCHING JULY 2024 are required to be removed, relocated,or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas, if applicable. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction,and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping,grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine,such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap,valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color,texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair,or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0173 29-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 CUTTING AND PATCHING JULY 2024 a weathertight condition. D. The CONTRACTOR shall dewater and clean existing basins, pipelines and equipment as specified and, when necessary to complete the work, shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. No additional payment will be made for such work. E. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0173 29-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 CUTTING AND PATCHING JULY 2024 SECTION 0175 25 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. SUPPLIER'S scope of work to be performed under this specification shall be to support installation,testing and startup of all supplied equipment systems. 1.2 REFERENCES—NOT USED 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Service of SUPPLIER's/MANUFACTURER'S Representative 1. SUPPLIER's/MANUFACTURER'S contracted cost for the equipment shall include the cost of furnishing competent and experienced personnel who shall represent the manufacturers and shall assist the CONTRACTOR,when required,to renovate or install,adjust, and test the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the CONTRACTOR, SUPPLIER's/MANUFACTURER'S personnel shall make all adjustments and tests required to prove that such equipment is in proper and satisfactory operating condition and shall instruct the OWNER'S representatives in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment or system. Training must be adequate and acceptable to OWNER's representative. The preliminary Equipment O&M must be approved prior to start of training. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to ENGINEER,for review, start-up, and test schedule a minimum of 60 days prior to commencing Work specified in this section. B. Submit to ENGINEER an electronic copy and a minimum of two (2) hard copies of field test data and test records for all equipment and systems. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FURNISH INITIAL LUBRICANTS AND OTHER CONSUMABLES A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install initial supply of oil, grease or other consumable required per SUPPLIER's/MANUFACTURER'S instructions to startup,test,and place into service the supplied equipment. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING AND STARTUP PLAN A. Submit a plan that includes a schedule for testing and startup of all equipment and systems provided as part of the Work. Specific Tests for each piece of equipment are detailed in the Equipment Specification Section. B. Include in the startup plan: 1. Sequences. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 75 25-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 EQUIPMENTTESTING AND STARTUP JULY 2024 2. Lock-out procedures and safety precautions. 3. Utility requirements. 4. Related items and piping which must be complete and the schedule for completion. 5. Instrumentation settings. 6. Operation Support C. SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURER shall provide a schedule and outline for training of OWNER's personnel. Equipment shall not be turned over to OWNER prior to training of OWNER's personnel. Specifically identify adjustment and maintenance items that must be done in initial 30-day period. 3.2 PREPARATION A. SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURER shall verify that the CONTRACTOR has performed the following work prior to testing and startup: 1. Complete equipment installation with controls,safety devices and auxiliary support systems necessary to start the equipment and verify that the equipment functions correctly under no load conditions. 2. Remove temporary bracing supports and other construction debris that may damage equipment. 3. Remove protective coatings and oils from new equipment used for protection during shipment and installation. 4. Flush and fill lubricated systems in equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 5. On new equipment, install temporary connections and devices required to fill, operate, checkout and drain the system. 6. Check equipment for correct direction of rotation and freedom of moving parts. 7. Align equipment to Manufacturer's tolerances. 8. Check installation prior to start-up for conformance to Manufacturer's instructions. 9. Adjust or modify equipment to make equipment properly operational. 10. Correct any deficiencies or problems noted in Manufacturer's representative's installation reports. 11. Complete testing of related piping systems and furnish test reports to ENGINEER. 3.3 TESTING AND STARTUP A. SUPPLIER shall perform the following: 1. SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURER with CONTRACTOR assistance as required shall begin checkout,testing,and startup procedures aftertraining of OWNER's personnel and approval by ENGINEER of testing and startup plan. SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURER's installation report shall be submitted within 48 hours of startup. 2. Make final connections to equipment and complete the system installation necessary to apply the system loads to the equipment and verify the equipment functions correctly. 3. Perform all tests as required by the specifications prior to startup. 4. Start equipment according to manufacturer's instructions. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 75 25-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 EQUIPMENTTESTING AND STARTUP JULY 2024 5. Place each piece of equipment in the system in operation until the entire system is functioning. 6. Operate the system through the design performance range consistent with available flows. Adjust, balance, and calibrate and, in general, check out the equipment,safety devices, controls, and process system to operate within the design conditions. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 75 25-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 EQUIPMENTTESTING AND STARTUP JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 01 75 25-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 EQUIPMENTTESTING AND STARTUP JULY 2024 SECTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Final cleaning. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0170 00"Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section 0178 39 "Project Record Documents"for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data"for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Section 0179 00"Demonstration and Training"for requirements for instructing OWNER's personnel. 5. All other Contract Document sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list),the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise OWNER of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties,workmanship bonds,maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting OWNER unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits,operating certificates,and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by OWNER. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to OWNER. Advise OWNER'S personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0177 00-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Closeout Procedures JULY 2024 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site,along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise OWNER of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to OWNER'S occupancy,use,operation,and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, ENGINEER will either proceed with inspection or notify CONTRACTOR of unfulfilled requirements. ENGINEER will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify CONTRACTOR of items,either on CONTRACTOR'S list or additional items identified by ENGINEER,which must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINALCOMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to the provisions in the Agreement Form. 2. Submit certified copy of ENGINEER'S Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by ENGINEER. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final,continuing insurance coverage complyingwith insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty,as applicable. 5. Instruct OWNER's personnel in operation,adjustment,and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, ENGINEER will either proceed with inspection or notify CONTRACTOR of unfulfilled requirements. ENGINEER will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify CONTRACTOR of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. C. The retainage and its interest earnings, if any,shall not be paid to the CONTRACTOR until the OWNER, and/or TWDB or other funding agency, has authorized a reduction in, or PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0177 00-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Closeout Procedures JULY 2024 release of, retainage on the contract work. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS(PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three(3) copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by CONTRACTOR that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINALCLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each Project site, equipment, structures, buildings, and related facilities. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site,yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas,of rubbish,waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills,stains,and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools,construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,free of stains,films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0177 00-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Closeout Procedures JULY 2024 h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over"UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. M. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition,free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps,globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on OWNER's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0177 00-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Closeout Procedures JULY 2024 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems,subsystems,and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0133 00"Submittal Procedures"for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Section 0170 00"Execution Requirements"for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Section 0178 39 "Project Record Documents"for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. All other Contract Documents for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Preselection Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Preselection Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Definitions 1. Preliminary Data: Initial and subsequent submissions for ENGINEER'S review. 2. Final Data: ENGINEER accepted data,submitted as specified herein. 3. Maintenance Operation:As used on Maintenance Summary Form is defined to mean any routine operation required to ensure satisfactory performance and longevity of equipment. Examples of typical maintenance operations are lubrication, belt tensioning, adjustment of pump packing glands, and routine adjustments. 4. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment,or subsystems united by regular interaction. S. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similarto a system. 6. Instructional Manual: Equipment and Operating Data submitted prior to the testing and startup of the equipment, subsystem, or system. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data:The operation and maintenance data submitted to be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual for the Project. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequencing and Scheduling 1. Equipment and System Data (Instructional manual): a. Preliminary Data: PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 1 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 1) Do not submit until ENGINEER has approved Shop Drawings. 2) Submit prior to shipment date. b. Final Data: Submit Instructional Manual Formatted data not less than 30 days prior to equipment or system field functional testing. Submit Compilation Formatted and Electronic Media Formatted data prior to Substantial Completion of Project. B. Coordination 1. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative,assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit draft copy of each Operation and Maintenance Data (Manual) at least 60 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 1 Section 013100. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. ENGINEER will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of Manual is acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of each Manual in final form at least 30 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. ENGINEER will return copy with comments within 21 days of receipt or notify CONTRACTOR it's accepted. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with ENGINEER'S comments. Submit 4 copies of each corrected manual within 21 days of receipt of ENGINEER'S comments. Provide 3 electronic copies of the final manual in PDF format. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically or by treatment area as directed by ENGINEER. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system,organized alphabetically by system or by treatment area as directed by ENGINEER. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency,operation,and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system,subsystem,and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 2 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 2.2 MANUALS,GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of OWNER. 4. Name,address,and telephone number of CONTRACTOR. 5. Name and address of ENGINEER. 6. Subcontractor,Supplier, Manufacturer, Installer,or Maintenance Contractor's name, address, and telephone number, as appropriate. a. Identify area of responsibility of each. b. Provide name and telephone number of local source of supply for parts, replacement, and service. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume,and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty,3-ring,vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents,sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper;with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,VOLUME NO. OF_", Project title or name,and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. C. Text: Manufacturer's printed data,or neatly typed. d. Three-hole punch data for binding and composition;arrange printing so punched holes do not obliterate data. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 3 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch 20-POUND MINIMUM,white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary,fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts,fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 6. Electronic Media Format: a. Portable Document format(PDF) 1) After all preliminary data has been found to be acceptable, submit operational and maintenance data in PDF format on CD-ROM or USB drive. 2) Files to be exact duplicates of accepted preliminary data.Arrange by specification Section number. Bookmark sections. 3) Files to be fully functional and viewable in most recent version of Adobe Acrobat. b. Manufacturer's Standard Electronic Format: 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System,subsystem,and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. S. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 4 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following,as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed,and identifies color-coding where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information,maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following,as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern,and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 5 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system,subsystem,and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information,manufacturers'maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers'Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers'maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings,diagrams,and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly;component removal, repair,and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning,adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape,if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily,weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers'forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 6 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 G. Maintenance Service Contracts: If applicable,include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material,and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system,subsystem,and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem,and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers'standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Section 0178 39. G. Comply with Section 0177 00 for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. H. Maintenance Summary: 1. Compile individual Maintenance Summary Form for each applicable equipment item, respective unit, or system and for components or sub-units. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 7 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 2. Format: a. Use Maintenance Summary Form include with this Section as a guide. b. Use only 8-1/2 by 11-inch size paper. 3. Include detailed lubrication instructions and diagrams showing pints be greased or oiled, recommended type,grade, and temperature range of lubricants and frequency of lubrication. 4. Recommended Spare Parts: a. Data to be consistent with manufacturer's Bill of Materials/Parts List furnished with the Operation and Maintenance Data. b. "Unit" is the unit of measure for ordering part. C. "Quantity" is the number of units recommended. d. "Unit Cost" is the current purchase price. 3.2 DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINSIHES A. Content for Architectural Products,Applied Materials,and Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data,giving full information on products: a. Catalog number,size,and composition. b. Color and texture designations. C. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products. 2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to product. C. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. B. Content for Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: 1. Manufacturer's data,giving full information on products: a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. C. Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. 3.3 SUPPLEMENTS A. Sample forms included after"End of Section" are considered part of this Section. 1. Maintenance Summary Form. END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 8 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM PROJECT: CONTRACT NO: EQUIPMENT ITEM: MANUFACTURER: EQUIPMENTTAG NOS.: WEIGHTOF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS(Over 100 Pounds) NAME PLATE DATA(HP, Voltage, Speed, etc.): Manufacturer's Local Representative: Name: Telephone No. Address: Maintenance Operation Requirements Frequency Lubricant List briefly each maintenance operation required and refer to specific information in manufacturer's maintenance manual, if List frequency of each Refer by symbol to applicable.Also note tools needed for each maintenance operation. lubricant required. maintenance operation and safety considerations. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 9 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM (Continued) LUBRICANT LIST Reference Symbol Mfgr Mfgr Mfgr List symbols used in maintenance List equivalent lubricants of several manufacturers' requirements RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR OWNER'S INVENTORY Part No. Description Unit Quantity Unit Price PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 10 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 11 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 23-PAGE 12 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JULY 2024 SECTION 0178 36 WARRANTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section includes: 1. Preparation and submittal of warranties. 2. Time and schedule of submittals. 3. Transfer of Maintenance responsibility. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Related Sections: 1. Section 0133 00"Submittal Procedures" 2. Section 0178 23"Operation and Maintenance Data" 3. Section 0177 00"Closeout Procedures." 4. Warranties required for specific products or work included in individual technical specification Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. At the end of the project furnish the following warranty summary: 1. Provide two copies of all warranty information in an electronic format on a compact disk(CD) or USB Flash drive. 2. Provide one copy of all warranty information in a commercial quality 81/2 x 11-inch three-ring hardback, plastic binder. 3. CDs and binder shall be labeled WARRANTIES with current year, project name, contractor name and telephone number, and equipment supplier name and telephone number. 4. Prepare table of contents in the same sequence as the manual submitted per Section 0178 23. 5. Separate each warranty with index tab sheets keyed to the table of contents listing. 6. Behind each index sheet, or within each warranty file, include an information sheet labeled WARRANTIES, with current year, project name, contractor name and telephone number,subcontractor name and telephone number,equipment supplier name and telephone number, manufacturer name and telephone number, and applicable Section number and title. B. Preparation 1. Warranty shall be on the company's'original forms signed by authorized agent only. 2. No warranty shall start prior to equipment being put into operation. 3. Verify that documents are in proper form,contain full information,and are notarized. 4. Co-execute submittals when required. 5. Retain warranties until time specified for submittal. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 36-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 WARRANTIES JULY 2024 6. All of the above shall be included in each submittal. C. Conditions 1. Warranty date of beginning shall be the date of Substantial Completion as determined by the applicable technical specification Section. If an item does not have a separate substantial completion date, the project substantial completion data shall be used as the beginning of the warranty period. 2. Equipment warranty period shall be for a minimum of two years from the warranty date of substantial completion, unless specifically stated otherwise. D. Schedule 1. Submittals shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 0133 00. 2. Provide the responsible subcontractors,suppliers,and manufacturers'warranties in duplicate, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. 3. Warranties shall be submitted priorto final Application for Payment. 4. Provide a separate letter for each maintenance responsibility transference to include the mutually agreed time and date of the transfer of responsibility. 1.4 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT WARRANTY A. Special Equipment Warranty 1. The SUPPLIER shall jointly warrant to the OWNER and CONTRACTOR that all equipment, including all components of the complete assembly furnished by it hereunder, complies in all material respects with the design and specifications of these documents and contains no defects of material or workmanship. In the event of failure of any part or parts of the equipment during the warranty period, due to defects of design, materials, or workmanship, the affected part or parts shall be replaced or repaired at SUPPLIER's option promptly upon notice by the OWNER. All replacement parts shall be furnished, delivered, and installed at the expense of the SUPPLIER. 2. Unless specifically stated otherwise,the warranty period shall be interpreted as the 12-month period of beneficial use following substantial completion which includes the 30-day startup period and successful completion of the performance testing of the SUPPLIER-furnished equipment by the OWNER as provided below, and shall be exclusive of the time of use of the equipment in installation,testing, adjusting, etc., during the construction period, or of the time in storage, after delivery and prior to installation.All equipment shall be operated for a minimum 30-day startup period and shall successfully complete the performance testing before final acceptance and before the start of the 12-month warranty period. SUPPLIER's warranty, should CONTRACTOR be delayed,will not extend beyond 5 years (for equipment with a 1- year warranty, extend period for equipment with longer warranties) after receipt of purchase order from the CONTRACTOR, without adjustment in contract price. 3. If the equipment does not meet the requirements of the Specifications,the SUPPLIER shall correct or service the equipment at no additional cost to Owner,as necessary to meet the specified requirements. In the event the equipment is unable to meet the specified requirements within the warranty period,the equipment SUPPLIER shall refund an amount equal to the original purchase price of the equipment. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for insuring that the SUPPLIER's special PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 36-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 WARRANTIES JULY 2024 equipment warranty is not voided by acceptance of the terms of purchase agreements between the CONTRACTOR and the SUPPLIER. In all events,the CONTRACTOR will be held ultimately responsible for enforcement of the requirements of this warranty at his expense. 5. Payment for equipment as"Materials-On-Hand"will not be made until the OWNER receives an approved Special Equipment Warranty. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WARRANTY CERTIFICATES A. The installation contractor shall complete all warranty certificates and register the product with the manufacturer. B. Use the date of substantial completion as the installation date. C. List the product model, product serial number,and any additional information required by the manufacturer on each certificate. D. Provide a copy of the original certificate in lieu of the original certificate in the warranty manual if the manufacturer requires the original copy in lieu of a copy. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT WARRANTY A. The CONTRACTOR shall fill out all product warranty forms during the manufacturer's required time limit. 1. Failure to do so may result in the OWNER's loss of standard product coverage in which the CONTRACTOR shall become liable for the same coverage and time limit forfeited due to their omission. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the owner, prior to installation,of all optional extended warranties provided by the manufacturer and make available to the owner the opportunity to purchase the extended warranty. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall insure that all warranty documents, including copies of completed registration forms, are included in the closeout documents into their closeout documents as required by Section 0177 00. B. Warranty pre-expiration equipment review 1. The CONTRACTOR, OWNER,and ENGINEER shall conduct an on-site review of equipment and systems covered by warranties. a. This review will be scheduled approximately 2-months prior to expiration of the Warranty. b. The purpose of the review will be to evaluate the condition of the equipment and systems to determine if Warranty repairs of claims are necessary. C. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate to notify the issuer of the Warranty and to schedule necessary repairs or corrective actions prior to expiration of the Warranty. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 36-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 WARRANTIES JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 36-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 WARRANTIES JULY 2024 SECTION 0178 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Preselection Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Preselection Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 0177 00"Closeout Procedures"for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data"for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Remaining Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS—NOT USED 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. B. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: CONTRACTOR shall maintain one set of blue-or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity,to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings,whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 39-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Project Record Documents JULY 2024 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers,alternate numbers,Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Date. b. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." C. Name of ENGINEER. d. Name of CONTRACTOR. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Prior to Substantial Completion,complete miscellaneous records,and place in good order, properly identified and found or filed, ready for use and reference. Miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Field records on excavations and foundations. 2. Field records on underground construction and similar work. 3. Surveys showing locations and elevations of underground lines. 4. Invert elevations of drainage pipes. 5. Surveys establishing building lines and levels. 6. Records of equipment testing,start-up,and operation. 7. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products. 8. Batch mixing and bulk delivery tickets. 9. Documented qualifications of installation firms. 10. Inspections and certification of governing agencies. 11. Load and performance testing. 12. Results of pressure testing of lines. 13. Final inspection and correction procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 39-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Project Record Documents JULY 2024 order and in a clean,dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for ENGINEER'S reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 39-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Project Record Documents JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0178 39-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Project Record Documents JULY 2024 SECTION 0179 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing OWNER's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems,subsystems,and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems,subsystems,and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training videotapes. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections 1. All other Contract Documents for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS—NOTUSED 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program B. Demonstration and Training Videotapes 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: Field representatives shall be factory-employed personnel and have a minimum of 2 years of experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment. Sales representatives will only be considered acceptable service technicians if they have 3 years of experience with the operation of and training on this type of equipment from the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER being supplied and have started up 15 units of a similar size and type from the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER.The field representative shall submit a resume for approval before startup assistance can be provided. C. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training. D. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by ENGINEER. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0179 00-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING JULY 2024 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Submit copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,including a schedule of proposed dates,times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module per Section 013100. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system,as required by individual Specification Sections. C. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: 1. Basis of System Design,Operational Requirements,and Criteria: Include system and equipment descriptions, operating standards, regulatory requirements, equipment function, operating characteristics, limiting conditions, and performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review emergency, operations, and maintenance manuals; Project Record Documents; identification systems; warranties and bonds; and maintenance service agreements. 3. Emergencies: Include instructions on stopping; shutdown instructions; operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits; instructions on meaning of warnings,trouble indications,and error messages;and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 4. Operations: Include startup, break-in,control,and safety procedures;stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; operating procedures for emergencies and equipment failure; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Adjustments: Include alignments and checking, noise,vibration,economy, and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include diagnostic instructions and test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include inspection procedures,types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, procedures for preventive and routine maintenance, and instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include diagnosis, repair, and disassembly instructions; instructions for identifying parts; and review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,to coordinate instructors,and to coordinate between CONTRACTOR and OWNER for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct OWNER'S personnel to adjust,operate,and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0179 00-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING JULY 2024 C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with OWNER,through ENGINEER,with at least seven days'advance notice. 2. Provide two training sessions, one in the early morning and one in the late afternoon. D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module,assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a written performance-based test. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEOTAPES OR DVD'S A. OWNER may choose to videotape,or otherwise record,training sessions. SUPPLIER shall not limit ability of OWNER to record training. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0179 00-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 0179 00-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING JULY 2024 DIVISION 02 SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 02 4100 DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of facilities, including buildings, structures, and other site facilities. 2. Abandon in-place or remove below-grade construction as designated on Drawings. 3. Disconnect, re-route, cap,or seal and abandon in-place or remove site utilities as designated on Drawings. 4. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled by CONTRACTOR or OWNER. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition"for partial demolition of buildings,structures, and site improvements. 2. Section 3110 00"Site Clearing"for site clearing and removal of above-and below- grade site improvements not part of facility demolition. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Demolish: Completely remove and legally dispose of off-site. B. Recycle: Recovery of demolition waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. C. Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to OWNER. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated,demolition waste becomes property of CONTRACTOR. B. Historic items, relics,antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to,cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to OWNER that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of OWNER. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to OWNER. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including drawings,that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property,for environmental protection,for dust control, and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. Adjacent Facilities: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent facilities to remain. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 02 4100-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEMOLITION JULY 2024 B. Schedule of Facilities Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of demolition work,with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 3. Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services. C. Facility Demolition Plans: Drawings indicating the locations of temporary protection and means of egress for adjacent occupied facilities, if applicable. D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and delivered to OWNER prior to start of demolition. E. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by facility demolition operations. Submit before the Work begins. F. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Facilities to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work. B. Facilities immediately adjacent to demolition area will be in use. Conduct demolition so operations of these facilities will not be disrupted. 1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent facilities. 2. Maintain access to existing walkways,exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings and/or operations of adjacent facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. OWNER assumes no responsibility for buildings,structures, and other faculties to be demolished. 1. OWNER will maintain conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose as far as practical. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. OWNER will remove hazardous materials before start of the Work. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify ENGINEER and OWNER. OWNER will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 02 4100-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEMOLITION JULY 2024 E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with OWNER's on-site operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by OWNER and ENGINEER. OWNER or ENGINEER does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. D. Perform an engineering survey of condition of facilities to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during demolition operations. Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning, if applicable. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction before starting demolition. B. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify,disconnect,and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving facilities to be demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If removal, relocation,or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied buildings or operating facilities,then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings, structures, and facilities. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Remove cables or wires from conduit back to power source. Cap,valve,or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 4. At power surface remove any identification and installed plate identifying as'Spare'or 'Not in Service.' C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. D. Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: 1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 02 4100-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEMOLITION JULY 2024 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to OWNER. 4. Transport items to storage area designated by OWNER. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries,and other facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing facilities. B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities,as acceptable to OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. a. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to OWNER if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection,such as walks,fences,railings,canopies, and covered passageways,where required by authorities having jurisdiction, and as indicated. Comply with requirements in 0150 00. 1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities. 2. Protect existing site improvements,appurtenances,and landscaping to remain. 3. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 4. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. 5. Protect walls,windows, roofs,and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain and that are exposed to building demolition operations. D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place. 3.4 DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish indicated existing buildings, structures, and site improvements completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 4 hours after flame cutting operations. 3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 4. Locate demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. B. Engineering Surveys: During demolition, perform surveys to detect hazards that may result from facilities demolition activities. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 02 41 00-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEMOLITION JULY 2024 C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks,walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice,flooding, and pollution. D. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. 3.5 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the facilities by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize ground impact and dust generation. C. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction that are within footprint of new construction and extending 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon below-grade construction outside this area by demolishing walls to a depth of 5 feet below grade and placing penetrations through the floor of the structure as noted on the Drawings. Fill structures as noted on the Drawings. D. Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing utilities and below-grade utility structures. 1. Remove existing utilities and piping that are within 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction. 2. Abandon utilities outside this area by plugging pipes and removing cables within conduits back to motor control centers or source. 3. Remove nameplate from motor starters or panelboards and replace with new nameplate identified as "Spare." 4. Remove all underground utility structures and fill in accordance with Section 3120 00. If within roadways, replace with like paving materials. 3.6 SITE RESTORATION A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Section 3120 00. B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 02 4100-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEMOLITION JULY 2024 3.7 REPAIRS A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA- approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Do not burn demolished materials. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust,dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before demolition operations began. END OF SECTION PLUMMER ASSOCIATES, INC. 02 41 00-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEMOLITION JULY 2024 SECTION 02 4119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following selective demolition work when shown on the Drawings: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled by CONTRACTOR or OWNER. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 0173 29,"Cutting and Patching"for cutting and patching procedures. 2. Section 3110 00, "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above-and below- grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to OWNER. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed,and salvaged,or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work,with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. B. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces,which might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Section 0132 33, "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins. C. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 024119-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION JULY 2024 B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. OWNER may occupy portions of structures or treatment units immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so OWNER'S operations will not be disrupted. B. OWNER will maintain conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose as far as practical. C. Before selective demolition, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with OWNER in order for OWNER to effectively remove the portion to be demolished from service and to remove any materials or supplies located in these areas. D. Notify ENGINEER of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. E. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify ENGINEER and OWNER. OWNER will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2-PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 024119-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION JULY 2024 C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate, and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to ENGINEER. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 0132 33, "Photographic Documentation." F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap,valve,or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads,streets,walks,walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Complywith requirements for access and protection specified in Section 0150 00. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain,and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb,square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 024119-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION JULY 2024 construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering, and chopping,to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces,such as duct and pipe interiors,verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire- suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors, or framing. 5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to OWNER. 4. Transport items to OWNER'S storage area designated by OWNER. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by ENGINEER, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. This Section does not address removal of hazardous materials or substances such as asbestos or polychlorinated byphenyls (PCBs). If these materials or substances are or could be found on-site, stop work in the area and notify the OWNER and ENGINEER. B. OWNER will contract with a licensed remediation or abatement firm to determine if dangerous materials exist in the demolition area. If they exist,the firm will proceed with the removal. C. PCBs are heavy,oil-like liquids or solids,clearto yellow in color, produced in the U.S.from 1929 to 1977; their manufacturer banned in 1979. PCBs were used as dielectric fluids in electrical transformers, capacitors, and fluorescent light ballasts; also in adhesives and calking compounds. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 02 4119-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION JULY 2024 D. Asbestos used in many construction products was banned in 1978. In construction completed before 1978,asbestos is typically found in four forms; as sprayed-or troweled-on surfaces for ceilings or walls; as the thermal insulation around pipes or ducts; as fire proofing on structural members; and in various materials, such as shingles, roofing tiles, and gypsum board patching compounds. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain OWNER'S property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off OWNER'S property and legally dispose them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust,dirt,and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 024119-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 024119-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION JULY 2024 DIVISION 03 CONCRETE SECTION 030020 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the materials used;for the storing and handling of materials; and for the proportioning and mixing of concrete for culverts, manholes, inlets, curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways, curb ramps, headwalls and wingwalls, riprap, and incidental concrete construction. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water,proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I,II or III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer,the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram(Wagner Turbidimeter— TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). For concrete piling, the above limit on specific surface area is waived for Type II cement only. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, with each shipment, a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement expressed in square centimeters per gram. For cement strength requirements, either the flexural or compressive test may be used. Either Type I or 11 cement shall be used unless Type 11 is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. Different types of cement may be used in the same structure, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type will be permitted in any one structure unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. 030020 Page 1 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor more than 1000 parts per million of sulfates as 5O4. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. Tests shall be made in accordance with the "Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete" (AASHTO Method T26), except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof; free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps, nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale, nor more than 5 percent by weight of laininated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-413-A. It shall have a wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-410-A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, coarse aggregate will be subjected to five cycles of the soundness test in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-411-A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent when sodium sulfate is used, or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used. Permissible sizes of aggregate shall be governed by Table 4 and Table 1, except that when exposed aggregate surfaces are required, coarse aggregate gradation will be as specified on the plans. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. 030020 Page 2 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Nominal 2-1/2 2 1-'/z 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 Grade No. Size In. In. In. In. In. In. In. No. 4 No. 8 1 2 in. 0 0 to 15 60 to 95 to 20 to 80 100 50 2 (467)* 1-'/z in. 0 0 30 to 70 95 to to 65 to 100 5 90 4 (57)* 1 in. 0 0 40 90 to 95 to to to 100 100 5 75 8 3/8 in. 0 0 to 35 to 90 to 5 80 100 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. The aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (TxDOT Test Method Tex-406-A)plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed one percent, or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt,alkali,vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities (TxDOT Test Method Tex-408-A),it shall not show a color darker than standard. The fine aggregate shall produce a mortar having a tensile strength equal to or greater than that of Ottawa sand mortar when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-317-D. Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand for slab concrete subject to direct traffic, the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 28 percent by weight when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-612-J. When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate or combination of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. 030020 Page 3 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No. 3/8 In. No.4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 1 0 0 to 5 0 to 20 15 to 50 35 to 75 70 to 90 90 to 100 97 to 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85, the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (TxDOT Test Method Tex-203-F). The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the plans,whichever is greater. For concrete Classes `A' and `C', the fineness modulus as defined below for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10. The fineness modulus will be determined by adding the percentages by weight retained on the following sieves, and dividing by 100; Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand,or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the following requirements: A "water-reducing, retarding admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and will retard the initial set of the concrete. A "water-reducing admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a 030020 Page 4 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 given consistency. (a) Retarding and Water-Reducing Admixtures. The admixture shall meet the requirements for Type A and Type D admixture as specified in ASTM Designation: C494, modified as follows: (1) The water-reducing retarder shall retard the initial set of the concrete a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of 4 hours, at a specified dosage rate, at a temperature of 90°F. (2) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a"reference" Type I cement from one mill. (3) Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced and test concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. (b) Air-Entraining Admixture. The admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: C260, modified as follows: (1) The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a"reference" Type I cement from one mill. (2) Unless otherwise noted on the plans,the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. 3. STORAGE OF CEMENT All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. The Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of 48 hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering. 4. STORAGE OF AGGREGATE The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground,the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. 030020 Page 5 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 When conditions require the use of two or more sizes of aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least 24 hours to reduce the free moisture content. 5. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS The measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be by weight. The fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and mineral filler shall be weighed separately. Where bulk cement is used, it shall be weighed separately, but batch weighing of sacked cement will not be required. Where sacked cement is used, the quantities of material per batch shall be based upon using full bags of cement. Batches involving the use of fractional bags will not be permitted. Allowance shall be made for the water content in the aggregates. Bags of cement varying more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds may be rejected, and when the average weight per bag in any shipment,as determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random, is less than the net weight specified, the entire shipment may be rejected. If the shipment is accepted, the Engineer will adjust the concrete mix to a net weight per bag fixed by an average of all individual weights which are less than the average weight detennined from the total number weighed. 6. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, using a coarse aggregate factor acceptable to the Engineer,for the class(es) of concrete specified. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with the THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that 030020 Page 6 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregates. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4,the Contractor may use an approved water-reducing or retarding admixture, or he shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until the redesign is checked. Water-reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. When water-reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor,reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. Entrained air will be required in accordance with Table 4. The concrete shall be designed to entrain 5 percent air when Grade 2 coarse aggregate is used and 6 percent when Grade 3 coarse aggregate is used. Concrete as placed in the structure shall contain the proper amount as required above with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percentage points. Occasional variations beyond this tolerance will not be cause for rejection. When the quantity of entrained air is found to be above 7 percent with Grade 2 coarse aggregate or above 8 percent for Grade 3 coarse aggregate, additional test beams or cylinders will be made. If these beams or cylinders pass the minimum flexural or compressive requirements, the concrete will not be rejected because of the variation in air content. 7. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive,possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements will be as specified in Table 3. 030020 Page 7 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 3 Slump Requirements Concrete Desi ng ation Desired Slump Max. Slump Structural Concrete: (1) Thin-Walled Sections(9" or less) 4 inches 5 inches (2) Slabs,Caps,Columns,Piers, Wall Sections over 9", etc. 3 inches 4 inches Underwater or Seal Concrete 5 inches 6 inches Riprap,Curb,Gutter and Other Miscellaneous Concrete 2.5 inches 4 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 8. QUALITY OF CONCRETE General The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio,the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer or his designated representative will cast test cylinders or beams as a check on the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete actually placed. Test cylinders must be picked up by the testing lab within 24 hours. A test shall be defined as the average of the breaking strength of two cylinders or two beams, as the case may be. Specimens will be tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods Tex-418-A or Tex-420-A. Test beams or cylinders will be required as specified in the contract documents. For small placements on structures such as manholes,inlets, culverts,wingwalls, etc.,the Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of one for each 25 cubic yards placed over a several day period. All test specimens, beams or cylinders, representing tests for removal of forms and/or falsework shall be cured using the same methods, and under the same conditions as the concrete represented. "Design Strength"beams and cylinders shall be cured in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in THD Bulletin C-11 for the purpose of curing test specimens. Provision shall be made to maintain the water in the curing tank at temperatures between 70°F and 90°F. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight-day compressive tests,job control will be by seven-day compressive tests which are shown to provide the required twenty-eight-day strength, based on results from trial batches. If the required seven-day strength is not secured with the 030020 Page 8 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 cement specified in Table 4, changes in the batch design will be made. TABLE 4 Classes of Concrete Minimum Class Compressive Min. Beam Maximum Coarse of Sacks Cement Strength(fc) Strength Water-Cement Aggregate Concrete per C.Y. (min.) 28-Day(psi) 7-Day(psi) Ratio (gal/sack) No. A* 5.0 3000 500*** 6.5 2-4-8**** B* 4.5 2500 417 8.0 2-4-8**** C* 6.0 3600 600*** 6.0 1-2-4** D 6.0 3000 500 7.0 2-4 S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 2-4 *Entrained Air(slabs,piers and bent concrete). **Grade 1 Coarse Aggregate may be used in foundation only(except cased drilled shafts). ***When Type 11 Cement is used with Class C Concrete,the 7-day beam break requirement will be 550 psi; with Class A Concrete, the minimum 7-day beam break requirement will be 460 psi. ****Permission to use Grade 8 Aggregate must have prior approval of the Engineer. 9. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures",Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Retamping of concrete will not be permitted. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. 10. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT All equipment,tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work underway without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform 030020 Page 9 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 distribution of the material throughout the mass. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum,the mixing shall continue not less than 1 minute for mixers of one cubic yard or less capacity plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. The concrete mixer shall be equipped with an automatic timing device which is put into operation when the skip is raised to its full height and dumping. This device shall lock the discharging mechanism and prevent emptying of the mixer until all the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required, and it shall ring a bell after the specified time of mixing has elapsed. The water tank shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately, and when the tank starts to discharge, the inlet supply shall cut off automatically. Whenever a concrete mixer is not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Engineer and a suitable mixer provided by the Contractor. Pick-up and thro-over blades in the drum of the mixer which are worn down more than 10 percent in depth shall be repaired or replaced with new blades. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements stated above, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site in non-agitating equipment. 11. READY-MIX PLANTS A. General. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirement of the governing specification sections, and concrete not meeting the slump, workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification sections shall not 030020 Page 10 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 be placed in the structure or pavement. Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at truck agitator or truck mixer agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the following provisions: (a) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters which will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revolutions. (b) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the plant not less than 50 nor more than 70 revolutions at mixing speed,transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. (3) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non-agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. B. Equipment. (1) Batching Plant. The batching plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper entirely free and independent of that used for weighing the aggregates. (2) Mixers and Agitators. (a) General: Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and unifonn mass. Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. Mixers and agitators shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades, and any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced with new in 030020 Page 11 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 accordance with the manufacturer's design and arrangement for that particular unit when any part or section is worn as much as 10 percent below the original height of the manufacturer's design. (b) Stationary Mixers: These shall conform to the requirements of Article "Mixing and Mixing Equipment". Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered as a stationary mixer. (c) Truck Mixers: In addition, truck mixers shall comply with the following requirements: An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately gauging the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified revolutions per minute (rpm) will not require a separate engine. All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum, as specified in Article 11. A. above, may be readily verified. The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. Each until shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. (d) Agitators: Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. C. Operation of Plant and Equipment. Delivery of ready-mixed concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Engineer for continuous placement. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching,mixing and delivery date. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation,the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. 030020 Page 12 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one- fourth of the specified mixing time. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this Article, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed 63 percent of the total volume of the drum. When used as an agitator only, the loading shall not exceed 80 percent of the drum volume. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one sack cement, three parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck, and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix plants. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Engineer and under his supervision. When water is added under the above conditions, it shall be thoroughly mixed as specified below for water added at the job site. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed except that when water is added at the job site, 25 revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one (1) nor more than five (5) rpm. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. 12. PLACING,CURING AND FINISHING The placing of concrete,including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,the quantities of concrete of the various classifications which will constitute the completed and accepted structure(s) in-place will be measured by the cubic yard,per each, square foot, square yard or linear foot, as the case may be. Measurement will be as shown on the drawings and/or in the Bid Form. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 030020 Page 13 of 13 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 032020 REINFORCING STEEL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, of the size and quantity designated on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all bar reinforcement shall be deformed, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 615, Grades 60 or 75, and shall be open hearth,basic oxygen, or electric furnace new billet steel. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18),Grade 75,will be permitted for straight bars only. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grade 60 is required, bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth (not defonned)bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the plans, and shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace. Bars shall be rolled from billets reduced from ingots and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 306, Grade 65 minimum (references to ASTM Designation: A 29 is voided). Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 615, or ASTM Designation: A 615, Grade 60, except for deformations. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 185. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation to which reference is made, the provisions of this specification shall govern. Report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and sulphur will be required for all reinforcing steel when it is to be welded. 032020 Page 1 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification are as follows: Nominal Weight per Bar Size Diameter, Nominal Area, Linear Foot, Number In. Sq. In. Pounds 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.6 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 Smooth round bars shall be designated by size number through No.4. Smooth bars larger than No. 4 shall be designated by diameter in inches. When wire is ordered by gauge numbers, the following relation between gauge number and diameter, in inches, shall apply unless otherwise specified: Equivalent Equivalent Gauge Diameter, Gauge Diameter, Number Inches Number Inches 0 0.3065 8 0.1620 1 0.2830 9 0.1483 2 0.2625 10 0.1350 3 0.2437 11 0.1205 4 0.2253 12 0.1055 5 0.2070 13 0.0915 6 0.1920 14 0.0800 7 0.1770 032020 Page 2 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 3. BENDING The reinforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the plans. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the plans,the inside diameter of bar bends,in terms of the nominal bar diameter(d), shall be as follows: Bends of 90 degrees and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend: Grade 60 #3,#4,#5 4d #6,#7,#8 5d All bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above: Grade 60 Grade 75 #3 thru#8 6d -- #9,#10 8d -- #11 8d 8d #14,#18 10d -- 032020 Page 3 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 4. TOLERANCES Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be within 3 percent of specified or as follows: Plan Dimon. = 3/4" ,. 7/8- Bar or Smaller--Plan. Dimon_ s 1/2" 1*' Bar or Larger--Pian. Darren- 1` s 3/W H= over 6`.--Domen.-4 Zero or -1/27 H = 6 and less-Dimen. + Zero or -6/4" 11 H 7/0" Bar or Smaller---Plan Dimon_ r- l" Bar or 1_arger--Plan Dimon. s 1" -"Spiral or Circular Tie Tie or Stfx"p gPVonDirmnen]-*-I Plan Cm-=L 1/2 5. STORING Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports, and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt,paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface it or mill scale will not be cause for rejection,provided the minimum dimensions,cross- sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 6. SPLICES No splicing of bars, except when provided on the plans or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of the Engineer. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. When permitted in main bars, splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered a minimum of two splice lengths. 032020 Page 4 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 TABLE 1 Minimum Lap Requirements Lea Uncoated Coated Lap in inches > 40d 60d Where: d=bar diameter in inches Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the plans or as permitted herein. All welding operations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the drawings and industry standards.All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars shall be done in the field. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. For box culvert extensions with less than one foot of fill,the existing longitudinal bars shall have a 20-diameter lap with the new bars. For box culvert extensions with more than one foot of fill, a minimum of 6 inches lap will be required. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 1. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches. 7. PLACING Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-twelfth of the spacing between bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-quarter inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch or as otherwise shown on the plans. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tension members and be attached securely thereto. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers,metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on the project, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, alternate intersections only need be tied. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar shall be cleaned from the reinforcement.Precast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Engineer and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or 032020 Page 5 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. Except in unusual cases, and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Engineer,the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. Reinforcement shall be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with the first paragraph of Article 7 of this specification. Mats of wire fabric shall overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be fastened securely at the ends and edges. No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforcing steel is considered subsidiary to the various items shown in the Bid Form and shall not be measured and paid for as a separate item. 032020 Page 6 of 6 Rev.10-30-2014 SECTION 038000 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for construction of all types of structures involving the use of structural concrete, except where the requirements are waived or revised by other governing specifications. All concrete structures shall be constructed in accordance with the design requirements and details shown on the plans; in conformity with the pertinent provisions of the items contracted for; the incidental specifications referred to; and in conformity with the requirements herein. 2. MATERIALS (1) Concrete. All concrete shall conform to the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". The class of concrete for each type of structure or unit shall be as specified on the plans or by pertinent governing specifications. (2) Expansion Joint Material. (a) Preformed Fiber Material. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans. The material shall be one of the following types, unless otherwise noted on the plans: 1. Preformed Bituminous Fiber Materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)". 2. Preformed Non-Bituminous Fiber Material shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)",except that the requirements pertaining to bitumen content, density and water absorption shall be voided. 3. Redwood. (b) Joint Sealing Materials. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, joint sealing material shall conform to the following requirements. The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete j oint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressibles. The material shall not crack or break when exposed to low temperatures. 038000 Page 1 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 1. Class 1-a. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Extruded Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self-leveling. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 24 hours. For performance requirements see under 2.(2)(b)2. below. 2. Class 1-b. (Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Pourable, Self-Leveling Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 3 hours. Performance Requirements: Class 1-a and Class 1-b joint materials,when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-525-C, shall meet the above curing times and the following requirements: It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured, or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 60 degrees F. Penetration, 77'F.: 150 gm. cone, 5 sec., max., cm.................. 0.90 Bond and Extension 75%, O°F, 5 cycles: Dry Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Wet Concrete Blocks............................ Pass Steel Blocks...(Primed if specified by manu£). Pass Flow at 2000 F................................. None Water Content%by weight, max................. 5.0 Resilience: Original sample min. % (cured)................. 50 Oven aged at 158'F min. % .................... 50 For Class 1-a Material Only: Cold Flow (10 min.)............................ None (c) Asphalt Board. Asphalt Board shall consist of two liners of 0.016-inch asphalt impregnated paper,filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. Boards shall be smooth,flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-524-C, the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch in three and one-half inches (1" in 3%2"). (d) Rebonded Neoprene Filler. Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed- cell neoprene particles, rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness, of the dimensions shown on plans. Filler material shall have the following physical properties and shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1752"Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction", Type 1, where applicable: 038000 Page 2 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 PROPERTY METHOD REQUIREMENT Color ASTM D1752, Type 1 Black Density ASTM D1752, Type 1 40 lb./ft' Min. Recovery ASTM D1752, Type 1 90% Min. Compression ASTM D1752, Type 1 50 to 500 psi Extrusion ASTM D1752, Type 1 0.25 inch Max. Tensile Strength ASTM D1752, Type 1 20 psi Min. Elongation 75% Min. The manufacturers shall furnish the Engineer with certified test results as to compliance with the above requirements and a 12 inch x 12 inch x 1 inch sample from the shipment for approval. (3) Curing Materials. (a) Membrane curing materials shall comply with ASTM Designation: C 309 "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete", Type 1 clear or translucent, or Type 2 white-pigmented. The material shall have a minimum flash-point of 80 degrees F when tested by the "Pensky-Martin Closed Cup Method". It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 40 degrees F. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than 4 hours nor more than 7 days after application. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous, uniform moisture impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface at the rate of coverage specified herein,be dry to the touch in not more than 4 hours, and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. It shall not disintegrate, check,peel or crack during the required curing period. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material, and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. The water retention test shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-219-F. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein)shall not exceed the 038000 Page 3 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 following: 24 hours after application........... 2 percent 72 hours after application........... 4 percent Type 1 (Resin Base Only)curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. (b) Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 1 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3. EXPANSION JOINTS Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the plans. All open joints and joints to be filled with expansion joint material, shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete, these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. Prior to placing the sealing material, the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. The joint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. Where preformed fiber joint material is used,it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint by light wire or nails, to prevent the material from falling out. The top one inch (1") of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. Finished joints shall confonn to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 4. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. The term "monolithic placement" shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. Construction joints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the plans. Additional joints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Engineer, and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the plans for joints in similar locations. Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints, except when horizontal. Construction joints requiring the use of joint sealing material shall be as detailed on the plans. The 038000 Page 4 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 material will be specified on the plans without referenced to joint type. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material, laitance, dirt or foreign material, and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 5. FORMS (1) General. Except where otherwise specified, forms maybe of either timber or metal. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel, except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Engineer. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval as specified. Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete shall be taken into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. For j ob fabricated forms, an additional live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses shall not exceed 125 percent of the allowable stresses used by the Texas Department of Transportation for the design of structures. Commercially produced structural units used in formwork shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment, shear or end reaction. The maximum working load shall include a live load of 35 pounds per square foot of horizontal form surface, and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking formwork details for approval. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight,rigidly braced and strong enough to prevent bulging between supports, and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. Forms shall be maintained in a manner that will prevent warping and shrinkage. Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth of an inch (1/16"). Deflections due to cast-in-place slab concrete and railing shown in the dead load deflection diagram shall be taken into account in the setting of slab forms. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such work is completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging,the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately,if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 038000 Page 5 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 (2) Timber Forms. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned, of good quality, and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one side and two edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces, except for the inside of culvert barrels, inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and, any surface formed by a single finished board. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as Masonite or plywood. Thin membrane sheeting, such as polyethylene sheets, shall not be used for form lining. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch in thickness,with no form lining required. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the span between the supporting studs or joists. Plywood used for forming surfaces that remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class II Exterior, of the U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards and Technology, latest edition. Forms or form lumber to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. Any lumber which is split, warped, bulged, marred, or has defects that will produce inferior work, shall not be used and, if condemned, shall be promptly removed from the work. Studs and joists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. Wales shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least 4 feet on each side of joints to provide continuity. A row of wales shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical,i.e.,long dimensions set in the same direction. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. Wood molding shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-quarter inch (3/4") on the sides. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork. All moldings,panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true, sharp and clean cut. 038000 Page 6 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 All forms shall be constructed to penult their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. The forms may be given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forms in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2") from the concrete surface. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling,and when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. Burning off of rods, bolts or ties will not be permitted. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch(1/2") from the face of the concrete. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. Prior to placing concrete, the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. Care shall be exercised to prevent coating of the reinforcing steel. (3) Metal Forms. The foregoing requirements for timber forms regarding design,mortar-tightness, filleted corners,beveled projections,bracing, alignment,removal,reuse and wetting shall also apply to metal forms, except that these will not require lining, unless specifically noted on the plans. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. Clamps, pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Metal shall be kept free from rust, grease or other foreign materials. 6. PLACING REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement in concrete structures shall be placed carefully and accurately and rigidly supported as provided in the City Standard Specification Section 032020 'Reinforcing Steel". Reinforcing steel supports shall not be welded to I-beams or girders. 7. PLACING CONCRETE-GENERAL The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 50 degrees F. 038000 Page 7 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for finishing,the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only,and shall be held to a minimum amount. Fog spray for this purpose may be applied with hand operated fogging equipment. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following: Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete: Above 80 degrees F 15 minutes Up to 80 degrees F 30 minutes Afzitated Concrete: Above 90 degrees F 45 minutes 75 degrees F to 90 degrees F 60 minutes 35 degrees F to 74 degrees F 90 minutes The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the above temperature-time maximums by 30 minutes for direct traffic culverts, and one hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed 30 minutes for non-agitated concrete. Before starting work,the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the construction methods he proposes to use, the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms, reinforcing steel placement, and other preparations. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit prior to the completion of formwork and placement of reinforcement therein. Concrete mixing, placing and finishing shall be done during daylight hours, unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finished work. If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started,the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. In case of drop in temperature, the provisions set forth in Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. The placing of concrete shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. 038000 Page 8 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement, and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than 5 feet,except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Engineer. Concrete may be transported by buckets, chutes, buggies, belt conveyors, pumps or other acceptable methods. When belt conveyors or pumps are used, sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind,if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes, tubes or other aluminum equipment. Chutes,troughs, conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. When steep slopes are necessary, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical downspouts. Open troughs and chutes shall extend,if necessary, down inside the forms or through holes left in them. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clear of the concrete. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than 36 inches in thickness, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold joint. Not more than one hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placements of concrete. Unauthorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one continuous operation. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold joints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. Openings in forms shall be provided, if needed, for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. All fonns shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. Vibrators which operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted, except on steel forms. At least one stand-by vibrator shall be 038000 Page 9 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 provided for emergency use in addition to those required for placement. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. Prior to the beginning of work, a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and thorough working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically, at points 18 to 30 inches apart, and slowly withdrawn. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated, allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the joint surface. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation, and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced, but not long enough to cause segregation.Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding,if necessary,to insure the flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. Slab concrete shall be mixed in a plant located off the structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four(4)full curing days. If carts are used,timber planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. After concrete has attained its initial set, at least one(1)curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs generally shall be avoided and, when permitted, shall be limited to quantities and distribution that will not induce excessive stresses. 8. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER (1) Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete may be placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 35 degrees F. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 32 degrees F. Aggregates shall be free from ice, frost and frozen lumps. When required, in order to produce the minimum specified concrete temperature,the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly, in accordance with the following: The water temperature shall not exceed 180 degrees F, and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 150 degrees F. The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F before introduction of the cement. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: (a) The temperature of slab concrete of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 50 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40 degrees F for an additional 72 hours. 038000 Page 10 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 (b) The temperature at the surface of all concrete in piers,culverts walls,retaining walls,parapets, wingwalls,bottoms of slabs, and other similar formed concrete shall be maintained at 40 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. (c) The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground, shall be maintained above 32 degrees F for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. Protection shall consist of providing additional covering, insulated forms or other means, and if necessary, supplementing such covering with artificial heating. Curing as specified under Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. When impending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before permission is granted to begin placement. Sufficient extra test specimens will be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed, prior to form removal and acceptance. (2) Precast Concrete. A fabricating plant for precast products which has adequate protection from cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering, which protects the concrete when placed in the forms, and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities,may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: (a) The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one hour after the concrete is placed. This shall not be construed to be one hour after the last concrete is placed,but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one hour. (b) Steam heat shall keep the air surrounding the concrete between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F for a minimum of three hours prior to beginning the temperature rise which is required for steam curing. (c) For fabricating plants without the above facilities and for j ob site precast products,the requirements of the Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall apply. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions.Permission given by the Engineer for placing concrete during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory,it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 038000 Page 11 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 9. PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER Concrete shall be deposited in water only when specified on the plans or with written permission by the Engineer. The forms or cofferdams shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. Pumping will not be permitted during the concrete placing, nor until it has set for at least 36 hours. The concrete shall be placed with a tremie, closed bottom-dump bucket, or other approved method, and shall not be permitted to fall freely through the water nor shall it be disturbed after it has been placed. The concrete surface shall be kept approximately level during placement. The tremie shall consist of a water-tight tube 14 inches or less in diameter. It shall be constructed so that the bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. It shall be supported so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work area and vertically to control the concrete flow. Bottom-dump buckets used for underwater placing shall have a capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard. It shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed and raised very slowly during the upward travel; the intent being to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. 10. PLACING CONCRETE IN BOX CULVERTS In general, construction joints will be permitted only where shown on the plans. Where the top slab and walls are placed monolithically in culverts more than 4 feet in clear height, an interval of not less than one (1) nor more than two (2)hours shall elapse before placing the top slab to allow for shrinkage in the wall concrete. The base slab shall be finished accurately at the proper time to provide a smooth uniform surface. Top slabs which carry direct traffic shall be finished as specified for roadway slabs in Article "Finish of Roadway Slabs". Top slabs of fill type culverts shall be given a reasonably smooth float finish. 11. PLACING CONCRETE IN FOUNDATIONS AND SUBSTRUCTURE Concrete shall not be placed in footings until the depth and character of the foundation has been inspected by the Engineer and permission has been given to proceed. Placing of concrete footings upon seal concrete courses will be permitted after the caissons or cofferdams are free from water and the seal concrete course cleaned. Any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operation shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. All temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams or caissons shall be constructed or adjusted as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized construction joints in footings or shafts. 038000 Page 12 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 When footings can be placed in a diy excavation without the use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be omitted,if desired by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer,and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing; in which case,measurement for payment will be based on the footing dimensions shown on the plans. 12. TREATMENT AND FINISHING OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES EXCEPT ROADWAY SLABS All unformed upper surfaces shall be struck off to grade and finished. The use of mortar topping for surfaces under this classification will not be permitted. After the concrete has been struck off, the surface shall be floated with a suitable float. Sidewalks shall be given a wood float or broom finish, or may be striped with a brush, as specified by the Engineer. Other surfaces shall be wood float finished and striped with a fine brush leaving a fine- grained texture. 13. FINISH OF ROADWAY SLABS As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section of sufficient width to permit working,the surface shall be approximately leveled, struck off and screeded, carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to insure filling of all low spots. The screed shall be designed rigid enough to hold true to shape and shall have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber. A vibrating screed may be used if heavy enough to prevent undue distortion. The screeds shall be provided with a metal edge. Longitudinal screeds shall be moved across the concrete with a saw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway grade or on the adjacent finished slab. The surface of the concrete shall be screeded a sufficient number of times and at such intervals to produce a uniform surface, true to grade and free of voids. If necessary, the screeded surface shall be worked to smooth finish with a long handled wood or metal float of the proper size, or hand floated from bridges over the slab. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform sufficient checks with a long handled 10-foot straightedge on the plastic concrete to insure that the final surface will be within the tolerances specified below. The check shall be made with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. Each pass thereof shall lap half of the preceding pass. All high spots shall be removed and all depressions over one-sixteenth inch (1/16")in depth shall be filled with fresh concrete and floated. The checking and floating shall be continued until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions, high spots, voids or rough spots. Rail support holes shall be filled with concrete and finished to match the top of the slab. Surface Texturing. Perform surface texturing using a either carpet drag or metal tining as indicated on the drawings. Complete final texturing before the concrete has attained its initial set. Draw the carpet drag 038000 Page 13 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 longitudinally along the pavement surface with the carpet contact surface area adjusted to provide a satisfactory coarsely textured surface.A metal-tine texture finish is required using a tining machine unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide the metal-tine finish immediately after the concrete surface has set enough for consistent tining. Operate the metal-tine device to obtain grooves spaced at 1 in., approximately 3/16 in. deep, with a minimum depth of 1/8 in., and approximately 1/12 in. wide. Do not overlap a previously tined area. Use manual methods for achieving similar results on ramps and other irregular sections of pavements. Repair damage to the edge of the slab and joints immediately after texturing. Do not tine pavement that will be overlaid. Upon completion of the floating and/or straight edging and before the disappearance of the moisture sheen, the surface shall be given a broom or burlap drag finish. The grooves of these finishes shall be parallel to the structure centerline. It is the intent that the average texture depth resulting from the number of tests directed by the Engineer be not less than 0.035 inch with a minimum texture depth of 0.030 inch for any one test when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-436-A. Should the texture depth fall below that intended, the finishing procedures shall be revised to produce the desired texture. After the concrete has attained its final set, the roadway surface shall be tested with a standard 10- foot straightedge. The straightedge shall be placed parallel to the centerline of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch high spots. Ordinates of irregularities measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed one-eighth of an inch(1/8"), making proper allowances for camber,vertical curvature and surface texture. Occasional variations,not exceeding three-sixteenth of an inch (3/16") will be acceptable, if in the opinion of the Engineer it will not affect the riding qualities. When directed by the Engineer,irregularities exceeding the above requirements shall be corrected. In all roadway slab finishing operations, camber for specified vertical curvature and transverse slopes shall be provided. 14. CURING CONCRETE The Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing; shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts; and shall have the proposed methods, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. Inadequate curing and/or facilities, therefore, shall be cause for the Engineer to stop all construction on the job until remedial action is taken. All concrete shall be cured for a period of four(4)curing days except as noted herein. 038000 Page 14 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 EXCEPTIONS TO 4-DAY CURING Description Required Curing Upper Surfaces of Bridge Slabs and 8 curing days(Type I or I11)cement Top Slabs of Direct Traffic Culverts 10 curing days (Type II cement) Concrete Piling(non-prestressed) 6 curing days When the air temperature is expected to drop below 35 degrees F,the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature, taken in the shade away from artificial heat, is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature of all surfaces of the concrete above 40 degrees F for the entire 24 hours). The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table I and the following requirements for each method of curing. (1) Form Curing. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. (2) Water Curing. All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. The water used for curing shall meet the requirements for concrete mixing water as specified in the specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Seawater will not be permitted. Water which stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. (a) Wet Mat. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. (See Article, "Placing Concrete" of this specification.) Damp burlap blankets made from nine-ounce stock may be placed on the damp concrete surface for temporary protection prior to the application of the cotton mats which may be placed dry and wetted down after placement. The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats and anchored positively to the forms or to the ground so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. (b) Water Spray. This curing method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers that keep all unformed surfaces continuously wet. (c) Pondin . This curing method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two inches (2")of clean granular material,kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one-inch 038000 Page 15 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 (1") depth of water. Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated granular material. (3) Membrane Curing. This consists of curing concrete pavement,concrete pavement(base),curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement-stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the plans by impervious membrane method. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the plans, either Type 1-D or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1-D (Resin Base Only) will be required for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. TABLE 1 REQUIRED PERMITTED MEMBRANE MEMBRANE STRUCTURE UNIT WATER FOR WATER FOR DESCRIPTION FOR INTERIM FOR INTERIM CURING CURING CURING CURING 1 Top slabs of direct traffic culverts X X 2 Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval (Stub walls, risers, etc.). X Other superstructure concrete(wing walls, parapet walls, etc.) 3 Concrete pavement (base),curbs,gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, X* X* islands, concrete structures, concrete riprap, etc. 4 All substructure concrete,culverts,box sewers, inlets, X* X* manholes, retaining walls *Polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene mats or laminated mats to prevent outside air 038000 Page 16 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 from entering will be considered equivalent to water or membrane curing for items 3 and 4. 038000 Page 17 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 Membrane curing shall not be applied to dry surfaces,but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. When membrane is used for complete curing, the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the plans,the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. Only one type of curing compound will be permitted on any one structure. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed,and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Engineer, but not less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of application of the compound. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement (base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface. If the surface of the concrete has become dry, it shall be moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities,pinholes or other defects, or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, an additional coat of the compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. To insure proper coverage, the Engineer shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected, an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing, curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental 038000 Page 18 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 to the work,the Contractor,when notified,shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. 15. REMOVAL OF FORMS Except as herein provided,forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one day(24 hours)when Type I and Type 11 cement is used, and not less than one-half day (12 hours) when Type III cement is used, provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. 16. FINISHING EXPOSED SURFACES Concrete shall be finished as required in the specification Section for the respective item or as otherwise specified on the plans. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: After form removal, all porous or honey-combed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. Feather edges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. If judged repairable by the Engineer,large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Engineer. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing, shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch (1/2") and the surface repaired. All fins,runs, drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces which remain exposed. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. Grease, oil, dirt, curing compound, etc., shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashing of asphalt,paint or other similar material shall be removed. Repairs shall be dense, well bonded and properly cured, and when made on surfaces which remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding concrete. 038000 Page 19 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 17. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form,no direct measurement or payment will be made for the work to be done or the equipment to be furnished under this specification,but it shall be considered subsidiary to the particular items required by the plans and the contract documents. 038000 Page 20 of 19 Rev.3-25-2015 DIVISION 05 METALS SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Metal ladders. 5. Metal ships' ladders and pipe crossovers. 6. Metal floor plate and supports. 7. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards and loading-dock edge angles. 8. Metal bollards. 9. Abrasive metal nosings treads and thresholds. 10. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed,under this Section: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts,steel pipe sleeves,slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00"Cast-In-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts,steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. 2. Section 05 53 00"Metal Gratings." 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination 1. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. 2. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings,templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 1 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 anchors,that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Product Data: For the following: a. Metal nosings and treads. b. Paint products. C. Grout. 2. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. a. Include plans, elevations,sections,and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 3. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread. 4. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional ENGINEER responsible for their preparation. B. Informational Submittals 1. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 2. Welding certificates. 3. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1,"Structural Welding Code-Steel." 2. AWS D1.2,"Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6,"Structural Welding Code-Stainless Steel." 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional ENGINEER, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings,shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 5000-PAGE 2 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 overstressing of components,failure of connections,and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F,ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. 2.2 METALS,GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.3 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates,Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A36. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet,Strip,and Plate: ASTM A240 or ASTM A666,Type 316L. C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276,Type 316L. D. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A793. E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500,cold-formed steel tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53,standard weight(Schedule 40)unless otherwise indicated. G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels(struts)complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches or as indicated. 2. Material: Galvanized steel,ASTM A653,structural steel, Grade 33,with G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness. 2.4 NONFERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209,Alloy 6061-T6. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221,Alloy 6063-T6. C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B632,Alloy 6061-T6. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,ASTM F593; with hex nuts,ASTM F594; and,where indicated,flat washers; Alloy Group 2. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36,of dimensions indicated;with nuts,ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanized or provide mechanically deposited,zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. D. Eyebolts: ASTM A489. E. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. F. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 5000-PAGE 3 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 G. Wood Screws: Flat head,ASME B18.6.1. H. Plain Washers: Round,ASME B18.22.1. I. Lock Washers: Helical,spring type,ASME B18.21.1. J. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47 malleable iron or ASTM A27 cast steel. Provide bolts,washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F2329. K. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material: Alloy Group 2 stainless-steel bolts,ASTM F593,and nuts,ASTM F594. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9100"Painting and Protective Coatings." C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187, E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining, noncorrosive,nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. F. Anti-Seize Lubricant: Loctite LB 8023 Marine Grade Anti-Seize lubricant or approved equal. 2.7 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections,finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints,flush and smooth,using concealed fasteners PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 4 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce,drill,and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry,equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches on centers, unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates,and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with primer specified in Section 09 9100 "Painting and Protective Coatings" where indicated. 2.9 SHELFANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than six inches from ends and 24 inches on centers, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately two inches larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. Galvanize shelf angles where indicated. D. Prime shelf angles where indicated with primer specified in Section 09 9100"Painting and Protective Coatings." E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts,complete with fasteners,to attach shelf angles to cast- in-place concrete. 2.10 METAL LADDERS A. General: PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 5000-PAGE 5 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 18 inches(457 mm)apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch(12.7-by-64-mm)steel flat bars,with eased edges. 3. Rungs:3/4-inch(19-mm)square steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of Siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum- oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. 6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1) IKG Industries,a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac. 2) SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring,a W.S. Molnar company; SlipNOT. 7. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than [1/2 inch (12 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] in least dimension. 8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 9. Galvanize ladders,including brackets and fasteners. 10. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. primer specified in Section 09 9100 "Painting and Protective Coatings." C. Aluminum Ladders: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. ACL Industries, Inc. b. Alco-Lite Industrial Products. C. Halliday Products. d. O'Keeffe's Inc. e. Precision Ladders, LLC. f. Royalite Manufacturing, Inc. g. Thompson Fabricating, LLC. 2. Space siderails 18 inches(457 mm)apart unless otherwise indicated. 3. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels ortubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm)wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)thick. 4. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm)deep and not less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)thick, with ribbed tread surfaces. 5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails;fasten by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners or brackets and aluminum rivets. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 6 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 6. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from pressure-locked aluminum bar grating or extruded-aluminum plank grating, supported by extruded-aluminum framing. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch (12mm) in least dimension. 7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c.with welded or bolted aluminum brackets. 2.11 METAL SHIPS'LADDERS ANDPIPE CROSSOVERS A. Provide metal ships' ladders and pipe crossovers where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation. 1. Fabricate ships'ladders and pipe crossovers,including railings from aluminum. 2. Fabricate treads and platforms from pressure-locked aluminum bar grating extruded- aluminum plank grating. Limit openings in gratings to no more than [1/2 inch (12 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] in least dimension. 3. Fabricate treads and platforms from rolled-aluminum-alloy tread plate abrasive- surface floor plate. B. Galvanize exterior steel ships' ladders and pipe crossovers,including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners. C. Prime exterior steel ships' ladders and pipe crossovers, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners,with primer specified in Section 09 9100"Painting and Protective Coatings." 2.12 METAL FLOOR PLATE A. Fabricate from rolled-aluminum-alloy tread abrasive-surface floor plate of thickness indicated below: 1. Thickness: Min 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)or as indicated in plans. B. Provide grating sections where indicated fabricated from extruded-aluminum plank grating. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) in least dimension. C. Provide aluminum angle supports as indicated. D. Include aluminum angle stiffeners and fixed and removable sections as indicated. E. Provide flush aluminum bar drop handles for lifting removable sections,one at each end of each section. 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts,fittings,and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Section 09 9100"Painting and Protective Coatings." PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 5000-PAGE 7 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 2.14 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. B. Fabricate bollards with 3/4-inch thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts. 1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs,angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards. C. Galvanize bollards. 2.15 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast aluminum,with an integral-abrasive,as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. b. Balco Inc. C. Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc. d. Granite State Casting Co. e. Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc. f. Wooster Products Inc. 2. Nosings: Cross-hatched units,4 inches wide with 1-inch lip,for casting into concrete steps. B. Extruded Units: Aluminum,with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide,silicon carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. ACL Industries, Inc. b. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. C. Amstep Products. d. Armstrong Products, Inc. e. Balco Inc. f. Granite State Casting Co. g. Wooster Products Inc. 2. Provide ribbed units,with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch above aluminum extrusion. 3. Nosings: Square-back units,4 inches wide,for casting into concrete steps. C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete,either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer. D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 5000-PAGE 8 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 E. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units. 2.16 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates where indicated. C. Prime plates with primer specified in Section 09 9100"Painting and Protective Coatings." 2.17 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than eight inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize loose steel lintels where indicated. D. Prime loose steel lintels where indicated with primer specified in Section 09 9100"Painting and Protective Coatings." 2.18 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.19 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.20 STEEL ANDIRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A1S3 for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123 for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete,sprayed-on fireproofing,or masonry,or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 09 9100"Painting and Protective Coatings." C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. OS S000-PAGE 9 OF 14 BID SET 0537-0S5-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3,"Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 09 9100"Painting and Protective Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1,"Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners,crevices, bolts,welds,and sharp edges. 2.21 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform,directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. C. Dull Satin Finish: No.6. D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 2.22 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10(Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified). C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: non-specular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte;Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker)complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb,true, and free of rack;and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections,finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 10 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts,toggle bolts,through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. G. Anti-Seize Lubricant: Where stainless steel nuts and bolts will be installed, apply anti-seize lubricant to threads as recommended by lubricant manufacturer to prevent seizure of nut and bolt during installation or upon removal at a future date. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers'written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards to existing construction with chemical anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Embed anchor bolts at least 6 inches in concrete unless indicated otherwise. B. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes three inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete,mounding top surface to shed water. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. 3.4 INSTALLING NOSINGS,TREADS,AND THRESHOLDS A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated. B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs,align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces. C. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant to provide a watertight installation. 3.5 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges,shims,or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed,tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 11 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 but,if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use non shrink grout, nonmetallic grout unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: OWNER will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be 100 percent visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. Full penetration welds and other welds as specified: In addition to 100 percent visual inspection, 10 percent of connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. C. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 1. Corrective measures shall be taken when welding is unsatisfactory or indicates inferior workmanship. Chip and grind if the removal of part of the weld or a portion of the base metal is required. Where deposition of additional weld material is necessary,the sides of the area to be welded shall have no less than one to one (1:1) slope to allow room for depositing new material. Correct defective or unsound welds by the removal and replacement of the entire weld using the following procedures: a. Excessive Convexity: Reduce to size by removal of excess weld metal by grinding. b. Shrinkage Cracks, Cracks in Base Metal, Craters and Excessive Porosity: Remove defective portions of base and weld material down to sound metal, and deposit additional sound material. C. Undercutting, Undersize, and Excessive Concavity: Clean and deposit additional weld metal. d. Overlapping and Incomplete Fusion: Remove and replace the defective portion of the weld. e. Slag Inclusion: Remove those parts of the welds containing slag. Fill with sound weld metal. f. Removal of Adjacent Base Metal during Welding: Clean and form full size by depositing weld material. 2. Remove cracked welds throughout their length. 3. Where work performed subsequently to the making of the deficient weld has PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 12 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 rendered the weld inaccessible or has caused new conditions which make connection of the deficiency dangerous or ineffectual, restore the original conditions by removing welds or members, or both before making the necessary corrections. Another option is to compensate for the deficiency with additional work according to the revised design, approved by the ENGINEER. 4. Cut apart and reweld improperly fitted and misaligned parts. 5. Straighten members distorted by heat of welding using mechanical means or by carefully supervised application of a limited amount of localized heat. Heated areas shall not exceed 1200 degrees Fahrenheit as measured by Tempilsticks. Parts to be heated for straightening shall be free from external stress forces, except when mechanical means are used in conjunction with heat application. 6. If faulty welding or its removal for rewelding damages the base metal so that, in the ENGINEER 's judgment, it is not in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, remove and replace the damaged material and compensate for the deficiency in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER. 7. Maximum space between pieces or members for fillet welds shall be 1/16 inch. Only effective portion shall be considered in measuring fillet welds. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 Section "Painting and Protective Coatings." END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 13 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 00-PAGE 14 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL FABRICATIONS JULY 2024 SECTION 05 5010 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide anchor bolts, expansion anchors and concrete inserts for equipment and metal fabrications as specified or shown on the Drawings, including, but not limited to: a. Baffles,weirs,and troughs. b. Sprockets and conveyors. C. Rails. d. Sluice and slide gates. e. Hangers and brackets. f. Equipment. g. Piping. h. Tanks. i. Grating and floor plate. j. Electrical, Plumbing and HVAC Work. k. Wood and plastic fabrications. I. Partitions and ceilings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 40 05 05 "Basic Piping Systems, Basic Materials and Methods,"for pipe joining materials. 2. Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping" for requirements for hangers and supports for equipment and piping systems,as an engineered system by the Contractor. 1.3 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS A. References: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. ACI 318,Appendix D-Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; Anchoring to Concrete. b. ACI 355.2-Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete& Commentary 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A 36—Specification for Carbon Structural Steel b. A 193—Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 10-PAGE 1 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS JULY 2024 Applications C. A 194—Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature, or Both d. A 283—Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates e. A 307—Specification for Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners f. A 320—Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service g. C 881—Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for concrete h. E 488—Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Units i. E 1512—Test Method for Testing bond Performance of Bonded Anchors j. F 436—Specification for Hardened Steel Washers k. F 593—Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,and Studs I. F 594—Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts M. F 844-Specification for Washers,Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use n. F 1554—Specification for Anchor Bolts,Steel,36,55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength 3. International Building Code,2006 or later edition. 4. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.(ICC ES): a. AC193—Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements b. ESR-Evaluation Service Report 5. FM Global (Formerly: FM -Factory Mutual System) 6. National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF) B. Definitions: 1. Exterior Area: Location not protected from the weather by a building or other enclosed structure. 2. Interior Dry Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is not subject to liquid spills or washdown, not where wall or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retaining structure. 3. Interior Wet Area: Location inside building or structure where floor is sloped to floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or washdown, or where wall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water-holding or earth-retaining structure. 4. Submerged: Location at or below top of wall or embankment of open water-holding structure, such as a basin or channel, or wall, a ceiling, or floor surface inside a covered water-holding structure,or an exterior below grade wall or roof surface of a water-holding structure (open or covered). 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Designed in accordance with ACI 318 (Strength Design method using Appendix D)for use in cracked and uncracked concrete. 2. Testing Requirements:Tested in accordance with ACI 355.2 and ICC ES AC193 for use PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 10-PAGE 2 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS JULY 2024 in cracked and uncracked concrete including seismic and wind loading(Category 1 anchors). 3. When the size, length, or load-carrying capacity of an anchor bolt, expansion anchor, or concrete insert is not shown on the Drawings, provide the size, length and capacity required to carry the design load in accordance with ACI 318,Appendix D for cracked and uncracked concrete. 4. Determine design loads as follows: a. For equipment anchors, use the design load recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the ENGINEER. b. For pipe hangers and supports, use one half the total weight of pipe, fittings, valves, accessories,and water contained in pipe between the hanger or support in question, and adjacent hangers and supports on both sides. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes for products. 2. Provide the ICC ES Evaluation Service Report(ESR Number)for each fastener. B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: 1. Setting drawings and templates for location and installation of anchorage devices. 2. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, materials, load tables,dimension diagrams, and installation instructions for anchorage devices. C. Samples: Submit representative samples of bolts,anchors, and inserts as may be requested for review by the ENGINEER. Review will be for type and finish only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: 1. Manufacturer shall have been engaged in the manufacturer of anchor bolts, expansion anchors, concrete inserts, and related items for a minimum often (10) years. 2. ISO 9001 Certified. B. Installer Qualifications: Adhesive anchor installers shall be trained and certified by manufacturer. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified for testing anchors in accordance with ASTM E 488 and E 1512 and has performed ICC ES method of evaluation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated,comply with the following requirements: PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 10-PAGE 3 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS JULY 2024 Stainless Steel: Bolts,Threaded Rods,and Anchor Studs F 593,AISI Type 316, Condition CW Nuts F 594,AISI Type 316, Condition CW Steel Bolts and Nuts: Carbon Steel A 307 bolts,with A 563 nuts High-Strength A 325,Type 1 bolts,with A 563 nuts Anchors Bolts and Rods F 1554,Grade 55,with weldability supplement S1 Eyebolts A 489 Threaded Rods A 36 Flat Washers(Unhardened) F 844 Flat and Beveled Washers (Hardened) F 436 Thrust Ties for Steel Pipe: Threaded Rods A 193, Grade B7 Nuts A 194, Grade 2H Plate A 283, Grade D B. Bolt,Washers,and Nuts: Use stainless steel and carbon steel types, as indicated in Fastener Schedule at end of this Section. 2.2 ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES A. Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts: 1. Headed type, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Material type and protective coating as listed in Fastener Schedule. B. Anchor Bolt Sleeves: 1. Plastic: a. Single unit construction with corrugated sleeve. b. Top of sleeve shall be self-threading to provide adjustment of threaded anchor bolt projection. C. Material: High density polyethylene. 2. Fabricated Steel:ASTM A 36. 2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY DRILLED ANCHORS A. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: 1. Design Requirements:Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly shall have capability to sustain without failure, as determined by the Strength Design method when installed in cracked and uncracked concrete, in accordance with the International Building Code and as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 488 and AC-355.2. 2. Material:AISI Type 304,AISI Type 316 stainless steel,and carbon steel as listed in Fastener Schedule. 3. Current evaluation and acceptance reports by ICC or other similar code organizations, PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 10-PAGE 4 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS JULY 2024 and listed by UL and FM Global. 4. Acceptable for use in potable water structures by NSF and local health organizations. 5. Type: a. ICC-ES Code Listed,Category 1,Cracked and Uncracked Concrete. b. Self-drilling Anchors;snap-off or flush type,zinc-plated. C. Non-drilling Anchors;flush type for use with zinc-plated or stainless-steel bolt, or stud type with projecting threaded stud. 6. Size: As shown on Drawings and required for the concrete strength specified. 7. Manufacturers.Subject to compliance with requirements,available products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: a. ITW Ramset/Red Head,Wood Dale, IL. b. Hilti, Inc.,Tulsa,OK C. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton,CA B. Wedge Bolts: 1. Material: Zinc-plated, case-hardened carbon steel. 2. Current evaluation and acceptance reports by ICC or other similar code organizations and listed by UL and FM Global. 3. Type: a. ICC-ES Code Listed,Category 1,Cracked and Uncracked Concrete. b. Description:One-piece, heavy-duty screw anchor with finished hex head suitable for cracked and uncracked concrete and grouted masonry. 4. Size: As shown on Drawings and required for the concrete strength specified. 5. Manufacturers.Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: a. ITW Ramset/Red Head,Wood Dale, IL. b. Hilti, Inc.,Tulsa,OK C. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton,CA C. Internally Threaded Drop-In (Snake)Anchors: 1. Material:Zinc plated, case hardened carbon steel. 2. Current evaluation and acceptance reports by ICC or other similar code organizations and listed by UL and FM Global. 3. Type: a. ICC-ES Code Listed,Category 1,Cracked and Uncracked Concrete. b. Description: Internally threaded, self-tapping screw anchor designed for performance in cracked and uncracked concrete and grouted masonry.Suitable base materials included normal-weight concrete, structural lightweight concrete, and concrete over metal deck. 4. Size: As shown on Drawings and required for the concrete strength specified. 5. Manufacturers.Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 10-PAGE 5 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS JULY 2024 a. ITW Ramset/Red Head,Wood Dale, IL. b. Hilti, Inc.,Tulsa,OK C. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton,CA D. Adhesive Anchors: 1. General:Adhesive anchoring system designed for bonding threaded anchor rod and reinforcing bar hardware into drilled holes in concrete and solid masonry base materials. 2. Threaded rod: a. Material: Unless otherwise specified: 1) ASTM A36 for interior application, unless otherwise specified. 2) ASTM F 593 Stainless steel threaded rod for exterior, interior wet,and submerge applications. 3) ASTM A 193,Grade 137,Type 2 for high strength applications. b. Diameter as shown on the Drawings or as required for the loads and conditions. C. Length as required to provide minimum depth of embedment. d. Clean and free of grease,oil,or other deleterious material. e. For hollow-unit masonry, provide galvanized or stainless-steel wire cloth screen tube to fit threaded rod. f. Anchor rods shall have rolled threads. 3. Adhesive: a. Two-component, high strength adhesive anchoring system designed to be used in adverse/thaw environments,with gray color mixing. 1) ICC-ES Code Listed. 2) Cure Temperature, Pot Life,and Workability: Compatible for the intended use and environmental conditions. 3) Non-sag,with selected viscosity base on installation temperature and overhead application where applicable. 4) ASTM Compliance: a) Uncracked Concrete: Meets ASTM C881,Types I, II, IV,and V, Grade 3, Class A and B. b) Uncracked and Cracked Concrete: Meets ASTM C881,Types I, II, IV, and V, Grade 3, Class B and C. 5) Compliant with NSF/ANSI Standard 61 for potable water applications. 6) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: a) ITW Ramset/Red Head,Wood Dale, IL. b) Hilti, Inc.,Tulsa,OK c) Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY d) Simpson Strong-Tie Co.,Inc., Pleasanton,CA E. Concrete Inserts: 1. For piping,grating and floor plate provide malleable iron inserts. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 10-PAGE 6 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS JULY 2024 2. Provide those recommended by them an ufacturer forth e required loading. 3. Finish shall be black. F. Powder-actuated fasteners and other types of bolts and fasteners not specified herein shall not be used, unless approved by ENGINEER. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Accurately locate and hold anchor bolts in place with templates at the time concrete is placed. B. Use anchor bolt sleeves for location adjustment and provide two nuts and one washer per bolt of same material as bolt. C. Minimum Bolt Size: 1/2-inch diameter by 12 inches long, unless otherwise shown. 3.2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY DRILLED ANCHORS A. Begin installation only after concrete or masonry to receive anchors has obtained design strength. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide minimum embedment,edge distance,and spacing as follows,unless indicated otherwise by manufacturer's instructions or shown otherwise on Drawings. • • . My-IT1741 My-I • 0111 Wedge 9 6 12 Expansion 4 6 12 and Sleeve Adhesive 9 9 7 13.5 D. Use only drill type, bit type, and diameter recommended by anchor manufacturer. Clean hole of debris and dust with brush and oil-free compressed air. E. Contractor shall accurately locate steel reinforcement by the use of a pachometer or other approved means, prior to drilling the hole. If reinforcing is encountered in drilling holes for mechanical anchors,the hole should be abandoned and a new hole should be drilled. F. Mechanical anchors shall be set by applying the manufacturer's recommended torque. G. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Do not install adhesive anchors when temperature is below 40 degree F or above 100 degree F. 2. Remove any standing water from hole with oil-free compressed air. Inside surface of hole shall be dry. 3. For hollow-unit masonry, install screen tube in accordance with manufacturer's PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 10-PAGE 7 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS JULY 2024 instructions. 4. Do not disturb anchor during recommended curing time. 5. Do not exceed maximum torque specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: OWNER will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections on concrete and masonry anchors when indicated on the Drawings. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Adhesive Anchors:Conduct site training of installation personnel for proper installation, handling, and storage of adhesive anchor system. 3.5 FASTENER SCHEDULE A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide anchor bolts and anchors as shown in Table 3. B. Anti-seizing Lubricant: Use on all stainless-steel threads. C. Do not use adhesive anchors to support fire-resistive construction or where ambient temperature will exceed 120 degree F. Table 3: Fastener Schedule MENEARequirements for Anchor Bolts Anchors Product16 1.Anchor Bolts Cast into Concrete for Equipment Bases Interior Dry Areas Stainless steel headed anchor bolts,unless otherwise specified with equipment. Submerged,Exterior, Stainless steel headed anchor See Section 09 90 00, Interior Wet, and bolts with fusion bonded coating, "Painting and Protective Corrosive Areas unless otherwise specified with Coatings." equipment. 2.Drilled Anchors for Equipment and Components to Cast-in-Place Concrete Interior Dry Areas Adhesive zinc-plated carbon steel anchors. Submerged,Exterior, Adhesive stainless-steel anchors. Interior Wet, and Corrosive Areas 3.Anchors in Grout-Filled Concrete Masonry Units Exterior and Interior Wet Zinc-coated carbon steel or and Dry Areas stainless-steel adhesive anchors. 4.Anchors in Hollow Concrete Masonry Units PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 10-PAGE 8 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS JULY 2024 Table 3: Fastener Schedule R&9Mjl;#Mg,&ts for • C• • Anchors 6ervice Use • Logatiod •• jjjMprks Exterior and Interior Wet Zinc-plated carbon steel or and Dry Areas stainless-steel wedge anchors or stainless steel adhesive anchors with screen tube. 5.Connections for Structural Steel Framing and Support Components Exterior and Interior Wet High-strength steel bolted Use hot-dipped galvanized, and Dry Areas connections. high-strength bolted connections for galvanized steel framing members. 6.Connections of Aluminum Components Submerged, Exterior and Stainless steel bolted Interior Wet and Dry connections, unless otherwise Areas specified with equipment. 7. Overhead Pipe and Duct Supports Exterior and Interior Wet Snake anchors or adhesive and Dry Areas anchoring systems. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 50 10-PAGE 9 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. OS 50 10-PAGE 10 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 ANCHOR BOLTS,EXPANSION ANCHORS,AND CONCRETE INSERTS JULY 2024 SECTION 05 53 00 METAL GRATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal bar gratings. 2. Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic gratings. 3. Metal frames and supports for gratings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination 1. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings,grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings,templates,and directions for installing anchorages,including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Product Data: For the following: a. Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic gratings. b. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 2. Shop Drawings: Include plans,sections,details,and attachments to other work. 3. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria,including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Informational Submittals 1. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 2. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531,"Metal Bar Grating Manual" and NAAMM MBG 532, "Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1,"Structural Welding Code-Steel." 2. AWS D1.2,"Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 53 00-PAGE 1 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL GRATINGS J U LY 2024 3. AWS D1.6,"Structural Welding Code-Stainless Steel." 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design gratings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Floors: Min Uniform load of 100 Ibf/sq.ft.or concentrated load of 1500 Ibf unless otherwise specified on drawings,whichever produces the greater stress. 2. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Other Than Exits: Min Uniform load of 60 Ibf/sq.ft. unless otherwise specified on drawings 3. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Used as Exits: Min Uniform load of 100 Ibf/sq.ft. unless otherwise specified on drawings 4. Sidewalks and Vehicular Driveways,Subject to Trucking: Uniform load of 250 Ibf/sq. ft. or concentrated load of 8000 Ibf, whichever produces the greater stress. 5. Limit deflection to L/240 or 1/4 inch,whichever is less. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates,Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36. B. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A36 or steel strip,ASTM A1011 or ASTM A1018. C. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet,Strip,Plate,and Flat Bars: ASTM A666,Type 316. E. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276,Type 316. 2.3 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer for type of use indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. B. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B221,alloys as follows: 1. 6061-T6 or 6063-T6,for bearing bars of gratings and shapes. 2. 6061-T1,for grating crossbars. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 53 00-PAGE 2 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL GRATINGS J U LY 2024 B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F593 for bolts and ASTM F594 for nuts, Alloy Group 2. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36,of dimensions indicated;with nuts,ASTM A563; and, where indicated,flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanized or provide mechanically deposited,zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material: Alloy Group 2 stainless-steel bolts,ASTM F593,and nuts,ASTM F594. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy that is welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9100"Painting and Protective Coatings." C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. D. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. E. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings,frames,and supports rigidly in place and PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 53 00-PAGE 3 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL GRATINGS J U LY 2024 to support indicated loads. 1. Fabricate toeplates to fit grating units and weld to units in shop unless otherwise indicated. 2. Toeplate Height: 4 inches(100 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fasteners for securing grating to supports. 2.7 EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM PLANK GRATINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company. 2. IKG Industries; a division of Harsco Corporation. 3. Ohio Gratings, Inc. 4. Seidelhuber Metal Products; Division of Brodhead Steel Products. 5. Insert manufacturer's name. B. Provide extruded-aluminum plank gratings in type, size, and finish indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for indicated applications and as needed to support indicated loads. 1. Type: Extruded-aluminum planks approximately 6 inches (152 mm)wide with multiple flanges approximately 1.2 inches (30 mm) o.c., acting as bearing bars connected by a web that serves as a walking surface. Top surface has raised ribs to increase slip resistance. 2. Depth: [1 inch(25 mm)] [1-1/2 inches(38 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)] [As required to comply with structural performance requirements]. 3. Perforations: [None] [Rectangular, 19/32 by 3 inches(15 by 76 mm),with adjacent rows staggered] [19/32 inch (15 mm) square,with adjacent rows aligned]. 4. Finish: Mill finish,as fabricated. C. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings. 2.8 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC GRATINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Grating, LLC. 2. Creative Pultrusions, Inc. 3. Enduro Systems Inc.; Composite Products Division. 4. Fibergrate Composite Structures Inc. 5. Fisher&Ludlow; Division of Harris Steel Limited. 6. Grating Pacific, Inc. 7. Seasafe, Inc.;a Gibraltar Industries company. 8. Strongwell Corporation. B. Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Gratings: Bar gratings made by placing glass-fiber strands that have been saturated with thermosetting plastic resin in molds in alternating directions PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 53 00-PAGE 4 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL GRATINGS J U LY 2024 to form interlocking bars without voids and with a high resin content. 1. Configuration: 1-1/2-inch square mesh, thickness as required to comply with structural performance requirements or as required to comply with structural performance requirements. 2. Resin: [Polyester] [Vinylester]. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84. 3. Color: [Beige] [Gray] [Green] [Orange] [Yellow] [Manufacturer's standard]. 4. Traffic Surface: [Plain, meniscus] [Applied abrasive finish] [As indicated]. C. Pultruded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Gratings: Bar gratings assembled from components made by simultaneously pulling glass fibers and extruding thermosetting plastic resin through a heated die under pressure to produce a product without voids and with a high glass-fiber content. 1. Configuration: As required to comply with structural performance requirements]. 2. Resin Type: [Polyester] [Vinylester]. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84. 3. Color: [Beige] [Gray] [Green] [Orange] [Yellow] [Manufacturer's standard]. 4. Traffic Surface: [Plain,grooved] [Applied abrasive finish] [As indicated]. D. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings. 2.9 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut,drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise indicated,fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long. B. Frames and Supports for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Gratings: Fabricate from glass-fiber- reinforced plastic shapes of sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, use shapes made from same resin as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integral anchors. C. Galvanize steel frames and supports where indicated. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 2.11 STEEL FINISHES PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 53 00-PAGE 5 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL GRATINGS J U LY 2024 A. Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish gratings,frames,and supports after assembly. C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153 for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123 for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry,wood,or dissimilar metals,with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise,fasten by bolting as indicated above. 3.3 INSTALLING GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC GRATINGS A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing gratings. Use manufacturer's PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 53 00-PAGE 6 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL GRATINGS J U LY 2024 standard stainless-steel anchor clips and hold-down devices for bolted connections. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. OS S3 00-PAGE 7 OF 8 BID SET OS37-OS5-01 METAL GRATINGS JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 05 53 00-PAGE 8 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 METAL GRATINGS J U LY 2024 DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PRTECTION SECTION 07 2163 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Spray-applied insulative coating including primer, insulative coating and topcoat for the following applications: 1. NORTH AND SOUTH WTP PIPE GALLERY PIPING 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9100 Painting and Protective Coatings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1. ASTM B117—Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray(Fog)Apparatus 2. ASTM C518-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 3. ASTM C1057—Standard Practice for Determination of Skin Contact Temperature from Heated Surfaces Using a Mathematical Model and Therm esthesiometer. 4. ASTM D870—Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Immersion. 5. ASTM D4060—Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. 6. ASTM D4541—Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. 7. ASTM D4585—Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Controlled Condensation. 8. ASTM D4587—Standard Practice for Fluorescent UV-Condensation Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings. 9. ASTM D4624/ISO 4624—Standard Test Method for Bond Strength 10. ASTM D5894—Standard Practice for Cyclic Salt Fog/UV Exposure of Painted Metal, (Alternating Exposures in a Fog/Dry Cabinet and a UV/Condensation Cabinet). 11. ASTM D638—Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength 12. ASTM D695—Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength 13. ASTM D790—Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength 14. ASTM D2240—Standard Test Method for Determining Durometer Hardness 15. ASTM E84—Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 16. ASTM E119—Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. B. Association of the American Walls and Ceilings Industries(AWCI) C. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 07 2163-PAGE 1 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING JULY 2024 1. UL 263:Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. D. The Society of Protective Coatings(SSPC) 1. SSPC-SP6: Commercial Blast Cleaning Standard 2. SSPC-PA1:Shop, Field,and Maintenance Painting of Steel. 3. SSPC-PA2: Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness Requirements. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The liquid applied thermal break acrylic material shall be applied at the required thickness specified by the manufacturer in order to mitigate thermal bridging. In no case shall the K- value of the liquid applied thermal break be more than 0.040 W/mK. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit product data including manufacturers technical data indicating product performance characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer written installation instructions. C. Applicator Qualifications:Submit applicators current certification as a manufacturer trained applicator. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: 1. Company specializing in manufacturing product in this section with a minimum of 2 years documented experience in manufacturing insulative technology. 2. Applicator:Company specializing in applying the work of this section with documented experience and trained by the manufacturer. 3. Fluid-Applied Thermal Break Acrylic system shall be the complete system from a sole source consisting of primer, acrylic thermal break material and topcoat. All materials shall be LEED Version 4 or Version 4.1 compliant. B. Mock-up: 1. Minimum thirty days prior to application in any area, provide mock-up Samples of thermal break materials in accordance with the following requirements: 2. Provide minimum two square feet (.18 square meter) on representative substrate, where directed by the Engineer,for each different thickness and finish of required for the work. 3. Provide mock-up areas that comply with thickness,density application,finish texture, and color. 4. Inspect mock-up areas within one hour of application for variance due to shrinkage, temperature, and humidity. 5. Where shrinkage and cracking are evident, adjust mixture and method of application as necessary to meet required installation,finish, and color requirements. 6. Continue to provide mock-up areas until acceptable areas are produced. 7. Acceptable areas shall constitute standard of acceptance for method of application, PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 07 2163-PAGE 2 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING JULY 2024 thickness,finish texture,and color requirements,for fluid applied thermal break material applications. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and label B. Storage: Materials shall be stored in strict accordance with manufacturers documented instructions. C. Documentation:All batch number, product identification and quantities shall be recorded on appropriate QC documents. A copy of the transport document and manufacturers conformance certificate shall be attached to the material delivery on site. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Project Environmental Requirements:Substrate and air temperature shall be in accordance with the manufacturers' requirements. 1. Protect work area from windblown dust and rain. Protect adjacent areas from over spray of material. 2. Provide ventilation in areas to receive work of this section during application and minimum 24 hours after application. B. Temperature and Humidity Requirements: Maintain air temperature and relative humidity in areas where products will be applied for a time period before during and after application as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Do not apply Fluid Applied Acrylic Thermal Break when temperature of substrate and/or surrounding ambient air temperature is below 45' F (7°C).Temporary protection and heat shall be maintained at this minimum temperature for 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after material application. 2. Steel substrate temperature shall be a minimum of 5°F (3° C)above the dew point of the surrounding air for a period of 24 hours prior, during the application of the material and 24 hour cure period. 3. If necessary for job schedule, the General Contractor shall provide enclosures and heat to maintain proper temperatures and humidity levels in the application areas. 4. The relative humidity of the application area shall not exceed a maximum of 85 percent 24 hours prior, during, and 24 hours after the application of the material.The relative humidity shall not exceed 75 percent throughout the application and curing of the decorative top coat finish. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUID-APPLIED INSULATIVE COATING GENERAL A. Materials Compatibility: 1. Provide shop and field primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Provide products of same manufacturerfor each coat in a coating system. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 07 2163-PAGE 3 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING JULY 2024 A. Products specified are manufactured by Tnemec Company Inc., 6800 Corporate Drive, Kansas City,Missouri 64120-1372,816-483-3400,www.tnemec.com, ist@tnemec.com, and are specified as a standard of quality. B. Materials specified herein shall not preclude consideration of equivalent or superior materials. Suggested equivalent materials or other substitutions shall be submitted to ENGINEER for consideration in compliance with substitution procedures in Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" and include the following: 1. Submittals shall be provided no later than (10)days after Owner letter of Notice to Proceed. 2. Requests for substitution shall include evidence of satisfactory past performance in similar environment. 3. Substitutions will not be considered that change the number of coats or do not meet specified dry film thicknesses. 4. Manufacturer's certified test reports showing the substitute product(s)performance as outlined in Paragraph 2.15 shall be submitted. 5. After second submittal, Engineer/Owner hourly rates will be charged to review further submittals. C. Bidders desiring to use coatings other than those specified shall submit those with their proposal based on the specified materials,together with the information required in Paragraph 1.5 above, and indicate the sum which will be added to or deducted from the base bid should alternate materials be accepted. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Water-Based Cementitious Epoxy: 1. Tnemec Series 1224 Epoxoline WB 2. VOC Content: 1 gram/liter 3. Color: 1288 Off-White 4. Requirements: a. Abrasion(ASTM D4060): No more than 149 mg loss after 1,000 cycles. b. Adhesion to Steel (ASTM D4541): No less than 1,989 psi after 10 freeze/thaw cycles. C. Humidity Resistance(ASTM D4585): No blistering,cracking, rusting,or delamination after 2,000 hours. d. CDPH Compliant: Passes the California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers,Version 1.2- 2017 (also known as Section 01350). e. Fire Testing (UL 263,ASTM E119): Any UL Classified spray-applied fire resistive materials having a maximum average density of 19.5 pcf. Including GCP Applied Technologies (formerly W.R. Grace) Monokote MK-6/HY and Isolatek(Cafco) Blaze-Shield II (Type II). f. Salt Fog Corrosion(ASTM B117): No cracking or delamination of film. No more than 1/64" rust creepage at scribe and no more than 3% rusting on plane after PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 07 2163-PAGE 4 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING JULY 2024 10,250 hours exposure. g. Slip Coefficient&Tension Creep: Meets AISC requirements of a Class B surface with a mean slip coefficient no less than 0.57. h. CDPH Compliant: Passes the California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, Version 1.2- 2017 (also known as Section 01350). 2.4 THERMAL INSULATIVE COATING A. Fluid-Applied Acrylic Insulative Coating 1. Tnemec Series 971 Aerolon Acrylic 2. VOC Content: 1.9 grams/liter 3. Solids by Volume: 76 percent. 4. Colors: 1278 Insulation Yellow 5. Requirements: a. Abrasion(ASTM D4060): No more than 50.2 mg loss after 1,000 cycles. b. Cyclic Salt Fog/UV Exposure(ASTM D5894): No blistering,cracking, rusting or delamination of film after 5,000 hours. C. Humidity Resistance(ASTM D4585): No blistering,cracking, rusting,or delamination after 2,000 hours. d. Immersion (ASTM D870): No blistering,cracking, rusting,or delamination after six months continuous tap water immersion. e. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): Class A f. Thermal Conductivity(ASTM C518): No greater than 0.0356 W/m-°K or 0.2468 BTU-in/ft2-hr-°F. g. NORSOK M-501 ISO 20340: Passed 25 cycles. h. CDPH Compliant: Passes the California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, Version 1.2- 2017 (also known as Section 01350). B. Topcoat-Waterbased, High Dispersion Pure Acrylic Polymer 1. Tnemec Series 1028 Enduratone 2. VOC Content:94 grams/liter. 3. Colors:As selected by OWNER. 4. Requirements: a. Adhesion(ASTM D4541): No less than 2,363 psi. b. Abrasion(ASTM D4060): No more than 102 mg loss after 1,000 cycles. C. Impact (ASTM D2794): No visible cracking or delamination of film after 93 inch- pounds or less direct impact. d. QUV (ASTM D4587): No blistering, cracking or delamination of film. No less than 72%gloss retention, no more than 0.69 DE00 color change and no more than 22 units gloss loss after 3,000 hours. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 07 2163-PAGE 5 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING JULY 2024 e. Salt Spray(Fog) (ASTM B117): No blistering, cracking, rusting or delamination of film. No more than 3/16" (5 mm) rust creepage at scribe after 5,000 hours exposure. f. CDPH Compliant: Passes the California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers,Version 1.2- 2017 (also known as Section 01350). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. All surfaces to receive the specified Tnemec Series 971 Aerolon shall follow the manufacturer's printed instructions and be clean, dry and free of oil,grease, loose mill scale, dirt, dust or other foreign substances which would impair bond of the material to the substrate. D. Other corrections of the surfaces to receive the Fluid Applied Insulation Coating material shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Application of the primer, Series 971 Aerolon, and topcoat shall not commence until the contractor,applicator and inspector have examined the surfaces to receive the primer and determined the surfaces are acceptable to receive the primer and Aerolon°. Commencement of application means acceptance of substrate. F. Verify that substrate and workspace temperature and humidity conditions are in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide masking, drop cloths or other suitable coverings to prevent overspray onto surfaces not intended to be coated with thermal break coating. C. Weld spatter and defects shall be ground smooth prior to commencement of primer and fluid applied thermal break material. D. Primer shall not be applied to prepared substrate until the area has been adequately vented to remove all airborne dust. Prior to the application of any coating material,the blast products, dust and debris shall be removed by vacuuming. E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. 1. Fabrication defects: a. Correct steel and fabrication defects revealed by surface preparation. b. Remove weld spatter and slag. C. Round sharp edges and corners of welds to a smooth contour. d. Smooth weld undercuts and recesses. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 07 2163-PAGE 6 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING JULY 2024 e. Grind down porous welds to pinhole-free metal. f. Remove weld flux from surface. 2. Ensure surfaces are dry. 3. Remove visible oil,grease,dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP 6/NACE 3, unless otherwise specified. F. Abrasive Blast-Cleaned Surfaces: Coat abrasive blast-cleaned surfaces with primer before visible rust forms on surface. Do not leave blast-cleaned surfaces uncoated for more than 8 hours. G. Concrete Surfaces(where thermal break is needed): 1. Grind all surfaces to receive primer. 2. Apply Series 1224 Epoxoline WB. 3.3 COATING APPLICATION A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Mix and thin coatings, including multi-component materials, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Keep containers closed when not in use to avoid contamination. 3. Do not use mixed coatings beyond pot life limits. 4. Use application equipment,tools,pressure settings,and techniques in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DFT. C. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or appearance of coating systems. D. Apply primer at thickness recommended by manufacturer. E. Apply Series 971 Aerolon Thermal Insulative Coating as specified in Section 3.8 Coating Schedule. F. Apply topcoat at thickness recommended by the manufacturer. G. Final Dry Film Thickness(DFT)shall be measured with a dry film thickness gauge. H. The steel deck is not to be sprayed unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 REPAIR A. Materials and Surfaces Not Scheduled to Be Coated: Repair or replace damaged materials and surfaces not scheduled to be coated. B. Damaged Coatings:All patching and repair to material,due to damage by other trades, shall be performed under this section and paid for by the trade responsible for the damage. Patching shall be performed by applicators certified by the manufacturer and applied in accordance with the manufacturer application instructions. C. Coating Defects: Repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions coatings that exhibit film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or appearance of PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 07 2163-PAGE 7 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING JULY 2024 coating systems. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner will engage an independent testing laboratory inspect and verify the application of material in accordance with the provisions Tnemec Company. 1. Material inspection and testing shall be performed 24 hours after completion of final application coat. 2. The results of the above tests shall be made available to all parties at the completion of each pre-designated area and approval. 3. In-place material not in compliance with the specified thickness requirements shall be corrected prior to final acceptance. B. The dry film thickness (DFT) of the applied material shall be measured with a non- destructive coating thickness gage after material has completely cured.All measurements shall be documented in writing and furnished to the Owner. C. Manufacturer's Technical Services:Coordinate with coating manufacturer's technical service department or independent sales representative for current technical data and instructions. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove overspray materials from surfaces not required to be thermally protected. B. Protect surfaces of coating systems from damage during construction. C. Touch-up,or repair damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.7 ONE-YEAR INSPECTION A. Specifier Note: Specify the one-year inspection of coating systems as required for the specific application. Delete the following paragraphs if the inspection is not required. B. Owner will set date for one-year inspection of coating systems. C. Inspection shall be attended by Owner,Contractor, Engineer, and manufacturer's representative. D. Repair deficiencies in coating systems as determined by Engineer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.8 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING SCHEDULE A. Ductile Iron and Cast Iron Piping: 1. Specifier Note: Select one of the following systems based on project requirements. Delete systems not required.Fluid-Applied Condensation Mitigation System, Water- Based: a. Surface Preparation: All external surfaces of ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be delivered to the application facility without asphalt or any other protective lining on the exterior surface.All oils, small deposits of asphalt paint, grease, and soluble deposits should be removed and uniformly abrasive blasted using angular abrasive in accordance with NAPF 500-03-04: External Pipe Surface condition.When viewed without magnification,the exterior surfaces shall be free of all visible dirt, dust, loose annealing oxide, rust, mold, coating, and other PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 07 2163-PAGE 8 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING JULY 2024 foreign matter. Any area where rust reappears before application shall be reblasted.The surface shall contain a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils (38.1 microns) (Reference NACE RP0287 or ASTM D 4417, Method C) b. Prime Coat(Shop or Field): Series 1224 Epoxoline WB, DFT of 4.0 to 10.0 mils (100 to 250 microns) per coat. C. Intermediate Coat(Shop or Field)—Two Coats:Series 971 Aerolon Acrylic, DFT of 40.0 to 50.0 mils (1000 to 1250 microns) per coat.Total thickness of Series 971: 80 to 100 mils (2000 to 2500 microns). d. Finish Coat: Series 1028 Enduratone, DFT of 2.0 to 3.0 mils (50 to 75 microns) per coat. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 07 2163-PAGE 9 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 07 2163-PAGE 10 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 FLUID-APPLIED CONDENSATION MITIGATION COATING JULY 2024 DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 3 KWH ENGINEERING LLC SECTION 08 9119 TBPE# F-17606 LOUVERS t •{]F 7.`•4' 11iF+�PART 1 - GENERAL ►�� ••�� �1 .'.�.t....................... 1.1 SUMMARY XUEFEI FEND �........$9274..........� A. Section Includes: �1 {�CgE�• r C 1. Fixed extruded-aluminum louvers. 2. Blank-off panels for louvers = •�, B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 91 00 "Painting and Protective Coating". 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e.,the axis of the blades are horizontal). C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axis of the blades are vertical). D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening. E. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven-rain performance, as determined by testing in accordance with AMCA 500-L. F. Windborne-Debris-impact-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified windborne- debris-impact resistance, as determined by testing in accordance with AMCA 540. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal,include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. I. Show weep paths, gaskets,flashings, sealants, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 2. Show mullion profiles and locations. C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. Louvers 08 91 19 - I 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed in accordance with AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified. B. Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports. C. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following: 1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Finish Warranty,Factory-Applied Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of baked enamel, powder coat, or organic finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty,Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of anodized finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214. C. Cracking, peeling, or chipping. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1 Louvers 0891 19 - 2 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain fixed and operable louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type,design, or factory-applied color finish. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Louvers withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components,noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures are considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: a. Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. B. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Louvers located within 30 feet(9.1 m)of grade pass enhanced protection,when tested in accordance with AMCA 540. C. Seismic Performance: 1. As indicated on Drawings. 2. Louvers,including attachments to other construction,withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7. a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. D. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width in accordance with AMCA 500-L. E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),material surfaces. F. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 2.3 FIXED EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Drainable-Blade, Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Louver, Extruded Aluminum: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. b. Airolite Company, LLC (The). C. Ruskin. 2. Louver Depth: 6 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (2.03 mm). 4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 5. Louver Performance Ratings: Louvers 1 08 91 19 - 3 a. Free Area: No less than free area as specified in the LOUVER SCHEDULE on the HVAC drawing. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1,250 fpm(5.5 m/s). C. Air Performance: Meet or exceed the air performance as specified in the LOUVER SCHEDULE on the HVAC drawing. 6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 7. AMCA Rating: AMCA 540. 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Insect screening. B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. 2. Finish: Mill finish unless otherwise indicated. 3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Insect Screening, Stainless Steel: 18-by-18 (1.4-by-1.4-mm) mesh, 0.009-inch (0.23-mm)wire. 2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS A. Insulated Blank-Off Panels: Laminated panels consisting of an insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets and attached to back of louver. 1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Metal Facing Sheets,Aluminum: Not less than 0.032-inch(0.81-mm)nominal thickness. 3. Insulating Core: Rigid, glass-fiber-board insulation or extruded-polystyrene foam. 4. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames, not less than 0.080- inch (2.03-mm) nominal thickness, with corners mitered and with same finish as panels. 5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with gaskets or sealant. 6. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers. 7. Attach blank-off panels with clips. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M),Alloy 3003 or 5005,with temper as required for forming,or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. 1 Louvers 0891 19 - 4 C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless steel fasteners. 3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from stainless steel components,with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated in accordance with ICC-ES AC193 and ACT 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in Jambs and mullions,reinforced with splice plates. 1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade- spacing pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated. 2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing,including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills,to fit in openings of sizes indicated,with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated,but not more than is recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less. 1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated,provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations,fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. 2. Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated,provide mullions partly recessed behind louver blades, so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations,fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. Louvers 0891 19 - 5 3. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated,provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations,provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction. G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers. H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. High-Performance Organic Finish, Two-Coat PVDF: Fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 1. Prepare,pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions for seacoast and severe environments. 2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams,templates,instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. Louvers 0891 19 - 6 E. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete,masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings,joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses,where weathertight louver joints are required. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering,to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. END OF SECTION Louvers Al 0891 19 - 7 DIVISION 09 FINISHES SECTION 09 9100 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Exterior substrates: a. Concrete,vertical,and horizontal surfaces. b. Steel. C. Galvanized metal. d. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 2. Interior Surfaces: a. Concrete. b. Steel. C. Galvanized metal. d. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). B. Related Sections: 1. Applicable equipment Sections for manufacturer's special coatings of equipment. 1.3 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS A. References: 1. ASTM International (ASTM) a. D16-Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint,Varnish, Lacquer,and Related Products. b. D2016-Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. 2. The Society for Protective Coatings(SSPC) a. SSPC Painting Manual,"Good Painting Practice" b. SSPC Painting Manual,"Systems and Specifications" C. SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning d. SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning e. SSPC-SP5 White Metal Blasting f. SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning g. SSPC-SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning h. SSPC-SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning i. SSPC-SP12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Priorto Recoating PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 91 00-PAGE 1 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 j. SSPC-SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete k. SSPC-SP14 Industrial Blast Cleaning I. SSPC-VIS 189 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel 3. NACE International(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) a. RP0287-95"Field Measurements of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel Surfaces Using Replica Tape" b. RP0188-99 "Discontinuity(Holiday)Testing of Protective Coatings" C. TM-01-70"Visual Comparator for Surfaces of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive" d. TM-01-70"Visual Comparator for Surfaces of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Slag Abrasive" e. RP0178-95"Fabrication Details,Surface Finish Requirements,and Proper Design Considerations for Tanks and Vessels to be Lined for Immersion Service" f. RPO 892-92"Linings Over Concrete for Immersion Service" g. RPO 591-96"Coatings for Concrete Surfaces in Non-Immersion" h. 6G186"Surface Preparation of Contaminated Steel Surfaces" i. 6G191"Surface Preparation of Contaminated Concrete." j. RPO 178"Weld preparation Visual Comparator." 4. National Science Foundations (NSF) B. Definitions: 1. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 2. Exposed Surfaces: Used to define painting locations and requirements it shall include all visible interior or exterior surfaces,top of walls, ceilings, and inside surfaces to 1 foot—0 inches below grade or the weir level or to floor level, whichever applies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data,certificates,and application instructions for each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Show where each coating is to be used on the Project,with cross reference to this Section paragraphs and Painting Schedule. 2. Product date and information submitted shall demonstrate compliance with this Section. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 91 00-PAGE 2 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 3. Provide the surface preparation required or recommended by coating manufacturer for each type of coating application if different from that specified in this Section. E. Provide ENGINEER with certification from coating supplier that sufficient paint has been purchased to provide required quantity of coatings for Project. 1. Certificate shall list the quantities and types of paint purchased. F. Provide ENGINEER with certification from the blast cleaning supplier that sufficient materials have been purchased to provide for the surface preparation specified for Project. 1. Certificate shall list the quantities and gradation purchased. G. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Provide manufacturer's instructions for the application of the coating system forthe purpose intended by these specifications.The instructions shall provide the limitations, precautions, and requirements that may adversely affect the coating system; that may cause unsatisfactorily results after the application; or that may prevent the coating system not to serve the purpose for which it was intended, which is to provide coverage and protection from corrosion, shall be clearly stated. 2. The instructions shall include, but not limited to: a. Surface preparation. b. Methods of Application. C. Number of coats. d. Thickness of each coat. e. Total Thickness. f. Drying time of each coat, including primer. g. Drying time of final oat before placement in service. h. Time allowed between coats. i. Primers required to be used. j. Primers not permitted. k. Use of a primer. I. Compatible topcoats. M. Thinner and use f thinner. n. Weather limitations during and after application(temperature, humidity,wind velocity). o. Protection from sun. P. Physical properties of paint, including percent solids content by volume, ingredient analysis, and weight per unit surface per dry mil thickness. q. Cathodic disbonding limitations,if any. r. Equipment settings(air cap,fluid tip,equipment pressure settings,etc.) H. Field quality-control reports: Provide temperature and humidity readings, testing for coating dry mil thickness and bonding, surface preparation,and related coating testing. I. Pre-installation Conference: Provide minutes of the pre-installation conference. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 91 00-PAGE 3 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing quality coating products with 10 years' experience. B. Applicator:Company specializing in industrial painting and finishing with 5 years documented experience, approved by product manufacturer. C. CONTRACTOR shall apply coatings systems from only one manufacturer for each type of application. D. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate materials to be painted, shop primers,field primers, and finish coating systems to ensure compatibility for all materials and coatings in this project. E. All coatings in contact with potable water and water being treated for use as potable water shall conform to ANSI/NSF Standard 61 and shall be certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. All process, service water, potable, and chemical piping, fittings, tanks,valves, equipment, and structures in contact with the water being treated are included in this requirement. F. Coating system manufacturer shall review actual job conditions prior to purchase of any materials. Manufacturer shall submit to ENGINEER a statement listing any exceptions to the specifications regarding preparation requirements or coating applicability. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements for finishes. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store,and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Deliver products to site in the original, sealed, labeled, and unopened containers; inspect to verify acceptance. Damaged containers will not be accepted. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name,type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials in well ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F (7 degrees C)and not more than 90 degrees F(32 degrees C). E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. Remove oily rags,waste,or other fire hazards from facilities each night. Place cloths and cotton waste,which might constitute a fire hazard, in metal containers or destroy at the end of each workday. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F(7 degrees C)for 24 hours before, during,and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 4 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 temperatures are between 50 and 95 degrees F(10 and 35 degrees Q. C. Do not apply coatings in; 1. snow, rain, mist or fog; 2. or when relative humidity meets or exceeds 85 percent; 3. or at temperatures less 5 degrees F(3 degrees C)above the dew point; r 4. or when it is predicted the air temperature will drop below 45 degrees F(7 degrees C) or less than 5 degrees F(3 degrees C) above the dew point is forecast within 8 hours after application of coating unless it is enclosed and heated; 5. or to damp or wet surfaces. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints:45 degrees F (7 degrees C)for interiors;50 degrees F(10 degrees degrees C)for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F(18 degrees C) for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Comply with all manufacturer's instructions for coating application and environmental conditions, which may be more stringent than the minimum requirements listed in this specification. G. Provide lighting level of 80-foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. H. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for personnel safety during painting operations. 1. Display caution signs in necessary areas advising of spray painting and warning against open flames. 2. Provide barriers or shelters on windy days to protect equipment and facilities. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied. 2. The material shall be delivered in unopened labeled containers as delivered from the manufacturer. If the manufacturer does not deliver in gallon containers, and in the case of special colors,the new gallon containers, properly closed with typed labels indicating brand, type, color, location used, etc. 3. Where multiple component materials are used, provide an unopened kit of the necessary materials in the manufacturer's smallest standard packaging size. Provide 3 copies of the manufacturer's instructions describing the materials and directions for their use. 4. Provide a typed inventory list of the extra materials furnished at time of delivery. 1.10 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Warranty inspection of the coating systems shall be conducted during the eleventh month following completion and acceptance of all coating system work. The personnel or their representatives present at the pre-installation conference are requested to attend. All PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 91 00-PAGE 5 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 defective coating systems shall be repaired in accordance with this Section and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and OWNER. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT,GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions;these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. C. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. I. Dimethyl phthalate. M. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. P. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. S. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. U. Methylene chloride. V. Naphthalene. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 91 00-PAGE 6 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 W. Toluene(m ethyl benzene). X. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. Y. Vinyl chloride. 2.2 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Color Selection: 1. Colors: As selected by OWNER from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2. Colors selected may or may not be the manufacturer's standard color. 3. Submit color charts to OWNER at least 60-days prior to coating application to allow time for color selection. 4. Different colors will be selected for concrete structures; building columns,framing, walls, window and door frames, and other areas;various items of equipment; piping and conduit; safety colors will be used for fire equipment locations, protective covers for rotating or moving equipment,walkways, and other related items; architectural treatment, both interior and exterior of buildings; and for all other items of Work. 5. Colors for equipment shall be selected by OWNER during submittal process. B. Colors selection for piping systems and identification of piping systems shall be in accordance with Section 10 90 00. Refer to Piping and Sign Color Code included in this Section for colors for lettering, piping, and background. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide a coating system from one of the manufacturers listed, if not listed under each Painting System Application: 1. Carboline Protective Coatings and Linings,St. Louis, MO. 2. PPG Protective and Marine Coatings(formerly Ameron Coatings). 3. Tnemec Company, Inc., Kansas City, MO. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency,capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. B. CONTRACTOR shall have complete responsibility for ensuring that each coating applied is compatible with its substitute and/or its intended finish coat, and that the completed coating system is suitable for its intended service. C. Accessory Materials: Thinning of paint and all accessory type materials used shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations covering material types, solvents, mix ratios, and methods. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present,for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 91 00-PAGE 7 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface of substrates to be coated shall be prepared in accordance with the SSPC specification as listed in Part 3.6 and as described in the paragraphs below. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. C. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt,oil,grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove unknown primers or coatings systems and incompatible primers of shop painted work and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. a. When removal is not feasible and with approval of ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR may apply a barrier coat in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions prior to application of the designated coating system. 2. When sandblasting, use a source of compressed air,which is free of detrimental water and oil and capable of delivering the required volume and pressure. 3. Subject to review by ENGINEER, any substrate in which SSPC-SP6 or SSPC-SP10 sandblasting cannot be accomplished shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP3 removing loose mill scale, rust, paint, and other foreign matter. E. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents,curing compounds, efflorescence,and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 91 00-PAGE 8 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 1. Allow new concrete to cure for 28-days. F. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. G. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. H. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale if work has not been shop primed with coating system compatible primer. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. I. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. J. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. K. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view,and dust off. 3. Prime edges,ends,faces, undersides,and backsides of wood. 4. After priming,fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. L. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. M. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry. N. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Do not begin paint application until surfaces are dry. O. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields,and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site and dispose of all excess materials and empty containers in full accordance with all applicable state,federal, and local laws. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Minimum Dry Film Thickness(MDF).Where applicable,the Coating Schedule includes the minimum dry film thickness required for the various coating systems specified.The film thickness is measured in mils. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions regarding drying time PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 91 00-PAGE 9 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 between coats,technique of application,ventilation,paint thinning, and safety precautions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. C. Allow applied coat to dry for the time period specified by the coating manufacturer before next coat is applied. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry to touch. D. Apply each coat to uniform finish;free from runs, drips, ridges,waves, laps, brush marks and variations in color, texture and finish. E. Where multiple coats are specified; apply each coat in a different color,which compliments the following coat and is different than the proceeding coat. Each coat must be free of shadows and uniform in appearance. F. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish G. Double-lap all welds.Apply prime coat by brush to all weld areas; then apply prime coat to entire surface, including weld areas. H. Where clear finishes are required,tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. I. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. J. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. K. Paint all items throughout the project except for surfaces listed below unless shown otherwise in the plans or specifications: 1. Concrete walkways, pavement,sidewalks,and stair treads. 2. Interior fiberglass items unless specified otherwise. Exterior fiberglass shall be painted. 3. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum,stainless steel,or chromium plate. 4. Operating parts,unless otherwise specified. 5. Existing structures or equipment,unless otherwise specified. 6. Equipment,valve,and other items nameplates or serial numbers. 7. Valve operator stems. L. Repair any damage or overspray paint on existing structures caused by construction work. Match existing colors with touch-up paint. M. New concrete and rubbed finish and mortar joints shall age a minimum of 30 days before application of coatings. N. Concrete surfaces to be painted shall be coated prior to installation of equipment, piping, conduit and supports and touched up following installation of these items. Components which cannot be adequately painted due to space limitations following installation, shall be coated prior to installation, and touched up after installation as well. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 10 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 O. Where inspection shows that the specified thickness is not developed, apply additional coats in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and cure schedule requirements to produce the required dry film thickness. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICALAND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 10 90 00, and Section 26 05 53,for requirements for color-coding and identification banding of ductwork, piping, conduit, and identification systems. B. Paint shop primed equipment. Touchup paint equipment furnished with factory coatings with manufacturer's correct color. C. Remove unfinished louvers,grilles,covers,and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. D. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports. For insulated pipe, provide shop and field primer coats on pipe and surface preparation and final coat on insulation jacket. E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts,and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint,to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers,grilles,and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. G. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. H. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. I. Color code equipment, piping, conduit,and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows and names. J. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,and fittings removed prior to finishing. K. Coating systems applied at the factory shall be protected against damaged during transit, delivery, storage, and erection. Damaged areas shall be refinished as the original so that end of the Project the finish will be in perfect shape. 1. The following items shall receive factory applied coatings: a. Electrical panels,motor control centers,transformers,and related items. b. Light fixtures. C. Pressure gauges. d. Instrumentation. 3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING SCHEDULE A. All surfaces in contact with potable water: 1. Surface Preparation: a. Steel,submerged or intermittently submerged: 1) Surface Preparation Prior to Abrasive Blast Cleaning:Weld flux and spatter PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 11 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 shall be removed by power tool cleaning. Sharp projections shall be ground to a smooth contour. All welds shall be ground to a smooth contour as per NACE Standard SP0178, Designation D. 2) Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10 Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning. Anchor profile shall be angular with a 3.0 mil profile as per ASTM D 4417, Method C or NACE Standard RP0287. b. Ductile iron pipe,submerged or intermittently submerged: 1) Clean all surfaces as per NAPF 500-03-01 Solvent Cleaning to remove all oil, grease, factory-applied tars and/or bitumastic coatings and all other soluble contaminants. 2) Prepare ductile iron pipe as per NAPF 500-03-04 Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Ductile Iron Pipe providing a minimum 1.5 mil angular anchor profile. 3) Prepare ductile iron valves and fittings as per NAPF 500-03-05 Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Cast Ductile Iron Fittings. 4) If existing ductile is factory coated with Tnemec Series 20, follow the manufacturer's recoat instructions. c. Concrete: Prepare new and existing concrete surfaces in accordance with NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13 Joint Surface Preparation Standards and ICRI Technical Guidelines.Abrasive blast,shot-blast,water jet or mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to remove laitance, curing compounds, hardeners, sealers, and other contaminants and to provide a minimum ICRI-CSP 5 surface profile. 2. Products and Manufacturer(only use products approved by NSF 61): 1) First Coat: a) Steel/Ferrous Metals:Series 20 Pota-Pox applied at 3.0-5.0 dry mils. b) Concrete:Tnemec CPP Trowel-Liner at 1/2-inch thickness. c) Steel/Ferrous Metals:Series 20 Pota-Pox applied by brush to all weld seams, edges, corners, rivets, nuts, bolts,washers, etc. 2) Second Coat: a) Steel/Ferrous Metals:Tnemec Series 22 Epoxoline applied at 20.0 to 40.0 dry mils. Second coat shall be certified to both NSF/ANSI Standard 61 and NSF/ANSI 600. 3) Total Minimum Dry Film Thickness: a) Steel/Ferrous Metals:23 mils. b. PPG (Steel/Ferrous Metals): 1) Primer:Amerlock 2-1 coat 5.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Novaguard 840-1 coat-20.0 MDF.Second coat shall be certified to both NSF/ANSI Standard 61 and NSF/ANSI 600. C. Or approved equivalent by named manufacturers. B. All Aluminum in Contact with Dissimilar Materials: 1. Surface Preparation: Remove all foreign matter. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 12 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline-2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat b. Carboline: 1) Carboline 893-2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat. C. PPG: 1) Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy-2 coats,4.0 MDF per coat. C. Exposed Uninsulated PVC Piping and FRP Components, Interior and Exterior where painting is required. 1. Surface Preparation:As recommended by coating manufacturer. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Tnemec: 1) Finish: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline-1 coat,4.0 MDF. b. Carboline: 1) Finish: Carboline 890-1 coat,4.0 MDF. C. PPG: 1) Finish: Amercoat 385 Polyamide Epoxy-1 coat,4.0 MDF. 3. A second finish coating of epoxy urethane, 3.0 MDF, shall be applied on all exterior PVC and FRP components(TNEMEC Series 1074 or equal by other named suppliers). D. All outdoor fiberglass items including FRP protective tank shell on steel tanks, and structural components shall be coated as follows: 1. Surface Preparation: a. Brush off cleaning,SSPC-SP7. b. Solvent cleaning, SSPC-SP1. 2. Products and Manufacturers: a. Tnemec: 1) Primer:Series 66-Highbuild Epoxoline,3.0-4.0 MDF. Broom surface after coating has cured. 2) Intermediate Coat: Series-Highbuild Epoxoline, 3.0-4.0 MDF. 3) Finish:Series 290 CRU,3.0-5.0 MDF. b. PPG: 1) Primer:Amerlock 400 3.0-4.0 MDF. 2) Finish: Pitthane Ultra 2.0-3.0 MDF. C. Caroline equivalent coating system. 3. The intent of this coating specification is to obtain a polyurethane top coat for UV protection and cosmetic purposes. Primer and intermediate coats, as well as initial surface preparation shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer for proper adhesion and serviceability on the fiberglass items to be painted. E. Exposed, Uninsulated Metal Pipe in Marine Environment: 1. No coating shall be applied to stainless steel piping. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 13 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 2. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Anchor profile shall be angular with a 1.5 to 2.0 mil profile as per ASTM D 4417, Method C or NACE Standard RP0287. 3. Products and Manufacturers: a. Tnemec: 1) First Coat:Tnemec Series 90G-1K97 Tneme-Zinc,2.5—3.5 MDF. 2) Stripe Coat:Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline. Brush applied and scrubbed into all weld seams, edges,corners, bolts, rivets, pits,etc. 3) Second Coat:Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline,4.0—6.0 MDF. 4) Third Coat:Tnemec Series 290 CRU, 2.0—3.0 MDF. b. Carboline: 1) Primer: Carbozinc 849,2.0—3.0 MDF. 2) Intermediate: Epoxy Carboguard 635,4.0—6.0 MDF. 3) Finish: Carbothane 134HG,2.0-3.0 MDF. C. PPG: 1) Primer:Amercoat 385,5.0-6.0 MDF. 2) Intermediate:Amercoat,385 5.0-6.0 MDF. 3) Finish: Pitthane Ultra,2.0-3.0 MDF. F. Exposed Ferrous Surfaces in Marine Environment: 1. Surface Preparation: a. SSPC-SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning. 2. Products and Manufacturers: a. Tnemec: 1) First Coat:Tnemec Series 90G-11<97 Tneme-Zinc,2.5—3.5 MDF. 2) Stripe Coat:Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline. Brush applied and scrubbed into all weld seams, edges, corners, bolts, rivets, pits, etc. 3) Second Coat:Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline,4.0-6.0 MDF. 4) Third Coat:Tnemec Series 290 CRU, 2.0—3.0 MDF. b. Carboline: 1) Primer: Carbozinc 849, 2.0—3.0 MDF. 2) Intermediate: Epoxy Carboguard 635,4.0-6.0 MDF. 3) Finish: Carbothane 134HG,2.0-3.0 MDF. C. PPG: 1) Primer:Amercoat 385 5.0-6.0 MDF. 2) Intermediate: Amercoat 385 5.0-6.0 MDF. 3) Finish: Pitthane Ultra 2.0-3.0 MDF. G. Submerged or Intermittently Submerged Metal Pipe in Marine Environment: 1. No coating shall be applied to stainless steel piping. 2. Surface Preparation: PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 14 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 a. SSPC-SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning. 3. Products and Manufacturers: a. Tnemec: 1) First Coat:Tnemec N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II,6.0-10.0 MDF. 2) Stripe Coat:Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II. Brush applied and scrubbed into all weld seams, edges, corners, bolts, rivets, pits, etc. 3) Second Coat:Tnemec N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II,6.0-10.0 MDF. 4) Third Coat:Tnemec Series 290 CRU, 2.0—3.0 MDF b. Carboline: 1) Reactamine 760 Series, 25.0-30.0 MDF. C. PPG: 1) Sigmashield 880 12.0-15.0 MDF. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the following testing during coating operations: 1. Prior to start and during the coating application each day,temperature and humidity readings will be obtained. If the values obtained are not within the recommended temperature and humidity range described herein or as required by the coating manufacture, the coating application will not be allowed. 2. Periodically check the wet film thickness during coating applications. 3. Prepared records of the above tests and readings. B. Testing Agency: OWNER will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Minimum Dry Film Thickness(MDF) readings will be obtained after each coat of paint has been applied, and after final coat has been applied.A test will be made for every 25 square feet of surface and at locations designated by the ENGINEER. A minimum of three readings of the area around the location will be obtained. If the average of these readings indicates the MDF for the final coat is below the specified minimum, CONTRACTOR shall apply another coat in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. The interiors of liquid containing structures and tanks will be tested for holidays after final coat application. Areas found to be defected shall have an additional coat applied. C. The coating system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. When this occurs the ENGINEER will specify corrective measures.The coating system will be retested,with the additional expense occurred charged to the CONTRACTOR. Refer to 0140 00 for addition information regarding retesting and reinspection and 0170 00 for correction of work. D. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 15 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 identified,sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing,and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials,the two paints are incompatible. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping,or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. E. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. F. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. G. Upon completion of the work remove all staging and scaffolding. Dispose of all sand, containers, ad rubbish in a suitable manner. Remove overspray, paint spots,oil,or stains on adjacent surfaces. Leave the entire Project clean and acceptable. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 09 9100-PAGE 16 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS JULY 2024 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 14 19 SAFETY SIGNS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish all labor, materials,tools,equipment,and perform all work and services for furnishing and installing safety signage as shown on the drawings and as specified. 2. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items, including connections and mounting hardware, necessary for a sound,secure,and complete installation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 9100, "Painting and Protective Coatings"for surface preparation and coating system requirements. 2. Section 10 90 00,"Identification,Stenciling,and Tagging"for identification devices for piping,valves, equipment, and other items. 1.3 ALLOWANCES A. Except where specifically designated in the Drawings or in the Specifications,the type, number, and locations of signs shall be determined by the OWNER. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A13.1—Schemes for the Identification of Piping Systems 2. Z53.1—Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards B. Federal Specification (FS): 1. L-P-387A(1) Plastic Sheet, Laminated,Thermosetting (For Designation Plates) C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 49-75 Hazardous Chemical Data 2. 704-90 Standard System for the Identification of the Fire Hazards of Materials D. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA): 1. §1910.144 Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards 2. §1910.145 Specifications for accident Prevention Signs and Tags 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Safety signage shall be installed at non-potable water locations, equipment that automatically starts, covers for rotating machinery, electrical control centers,firefighting apparatus locations,eye and noise protection, hazardous material locations,chlorine and chemical areas, and other designated locations. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 1014 19-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SAFETY SIGNS J U LY 2024 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit copies of manufacturer's technical brochure including color chart and list of standard signs. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following available manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation, Milwaukee, WI 2. Seton Name Plate Corp., New Haven,CT 2.2 SAFETY SIGNS A. Plastic Signs (Type A): 1. 60-mil rigid plastic for indoor/outdoor use,endures temperatures of-40 degrees F to 176 degrees F. 2. Rounded corners with mounting holes. B. Signs, Self-Sticking(Type B): 1. Flexible 4-mil peel and stick vinyl for indoor/outdoor use, endures temperatures of- 40 degrees F to 176 degrees F. 2. Adhesive backing shall adhere quickly and firmly to smooth surfaces. C. Fiberglass Signs(Type C): 1. Material: Multi-ply laminated fiberglass, minimum 0.100-inch thick,with guaranteed not to chip, fade, rust, shatter, or peel for 15 years. 2. Message encapsulated between two clear weather-resistant surface layers. 3. Indoor/outdoor use,endures temperatures of-40 degrees F to 190 degrees F and graffiti resistance. D. Metal Signs(Type D): 1. Material:Silk-screened, baked enamel finish or synthetic film laminate,0.040 aluminum panels. 2. Round-cornered and punched for application to wall surfaces. E. Painted Signs(Type E): 1. Stencils: Standard stencils prepared with letter sizes complying with recommendations in ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 1-1/4 inches for ducts, and 3/4 inch for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 2. Material: Fiberboard. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior,oil-based,alkyd-gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior,oil-based,alkyd enamel in colors according to PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 1014 19-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SAFETY SIGNS J U LY 2024 ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. F. Exit Signs (Type F): 1. Material: Plastic, 1/8-inch (minimum)thickness. 2. Description:6-inch high,3/4-inch stroke, red letters on white background. 3. Illumination:As required by applicable jurisdictional agency fire code. 4. Available Manufacturers: a. Brady Corporation, Milwaukee, WI b. Seton Name Plate Corp., New Haven,CT G. Safety Sign Message: 1. Consists of two parts;the OSHA Heading and the Specific Message. 2. OSHA Heading will consist of one of the following: a. DANGER.White letters on red oval surrounded by a rectangular black field. b. NOTICE.White letters on a blue field. C. SAFETY FIRST.White letters on a green field. d. CAUTION.Yellow letters on a black field. e. RADIATION.Yellow letters on a purple field. f. THINK.White letters on a green field. g. BE CAREFUL.White letters on a green field. 3. Safety signs shall comply with the requirements of OSHA 1920.145 with respect to size, color, and symbols. 4. Information regarding message, location,and related items shall be shown on the Drawings or in the Sign Schedule at END OF SECTION. H. All sign attachment and mounting hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Each sign shall utilize 4 screws or 2 brackets. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Safety Signage: Provide and install at the following locations as applicable: 1. Non-potable Water Faucets:CAUTION/Do Not Drink Water. 2. Automatic Equipment Operation:CAUTION/Equipment Starts and Stops Automatically. 3. Electrical Entrance and Fence Surrounding Electrical Equipment: DANAGER/High Voltage. 4. Eye Wash Station: EMERGENCY/Eye Wash Station Keep Area Clean. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 1014 19-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SAFETY SIGNS J U LY 2024 5. Safety Shower: EMERGENCY/Safety Shower Keep Area Clean. 6. Fence Surrounding Property: Notice/No Trespassing. 7. Adjacent to Vertical Ladders:SAFETY FIRST/Remember Wear Safety Harness. 8. Visitors: NOTICE/All Visitors Must Register at Office. 9. Visitor Parking: 10. No Smoking:At designated locations. B. Warning Labels: Apply warning labels to equipment, machinery, electrical equipment, storage containers,and related items to the items as designated below. Label size shall be according to the space available. Do not apply label to concrete or masonry surfaces, use Type A or C signs. 1. Electrical Disconnects: DANAGER/480 Volts(Provide correct voltage or use High Voltage). 2. Equipment Belt Guards:CAUTION/Keep Guard in Place. 3. Flammable Material Storage: Flammable Liquids. C. Chemical and HazCom: 1. Chemicals: Place NFPA Signs on chemical storage tanks, adjacent to chemical pumps, and related items communicating the following information: a. Health Hazard. b. Fire Hazard. C. Specific Hazard. d. Instability Hazard. e. Type: Depending on application sign shall be self-adhesive vinyl (Type B)or fiberglass (Type C). 3.3 SIGN SCHEDULE A. Safety Signs: In addition to paragraph 3.2 above, referto Safety Sign Schedule following the "End Of Section"for other applications. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 10 14 19-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SAFETY SIGNS J U LY 2024 LU v Lu N N O � N O] J N U _0 O O Ln N d w z QN N a } H rn LL d � N C � N f6 C qD h f6 O Q 4 C UA ZZ v N O V) a� LU � z Q V O V) ri V) Q -I cc o w ,n vi g u' v g 0 Z a o PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 1014 19-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SAFETY SIGNS 1 U LY 2024 SECTION 10 90 00 IDENTIFICATION,STENCILING,AND TAGGING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and perform all work and services for all identifications, stenciling and tagging as shown on the drawings and as specified. B. Items include but are not necessarily limited to the following areas of work: 1. Paint and provide identification signs for all exposed piping, ductwork,and conduits in accordance with Schedule A at the end of this section. 2. Provide identification tags and stenciling for all equipment,valves, instrumentation, and electrical components, including existing equipment and valves. Specific valve and equipment tag information shall be furnished by the OWNER. C. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, all supplementary or miscellaneous items, including connections and mounting hardware, necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation shall be furnished and installed as part of this work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise specified,all equipment and valves including mechanical, process, electrical, and instrumentation are required to be identified. B. Unless otherwise specified,openings,accesses and related locations are required to be identified. C. Coordination,development,and initiation of identification, marking,and tagging systems and determination of separation of subcontractor's and manufacturer's corresponding responsibilities is the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. D. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. ANSI A13.1,Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. Great Lakes- Upper Mississippi River Board of State Sanitary Engineers (Ten States Standards). Recommended Standards of Waste Treatment Works latest edition, Recommended Color Scheme for Piping.Three Great Lakes- Upper Mississippi River Board of State Sanitary, 1968 Edition,Addendum No. 6, Painting of Water Works Piping for Public Water Supplies. 3. OSHA 1910.144,Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. 4. SSPC Volume 2,System and Specifications,Surface Preparation Guide and Paint Application Specifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit identification register acknowledging all designated or scheduled equipment, instruments, gauges,valves, HVAC equipment, mechanical and electrical equipment. All items on register shall be tagged. Numbering system will be as shown on P&ID drawings. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 10 90 00-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 IDENTIFICATION STENCILING AND TAGGING JULY 2024 B. Develop and submit full identification register acknowledging equipment,valves, instruments, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment which is not designated or scheduled in drawings and specifications. Provide identifications compatible but not conflicting with designated or scheduled equipment and related items. All items on register shall be tagged. C. Submit assurances that subcontractors and manufacturers have been advised of register requirements. D. Update identification register immediately prior to final acceptance of work. E. Pipe Markers and Safety Signs: 1. Submit for approval samples of each type of marker and sign specified. 2. Submit copies of manufacturer's technical brochure including color chart and list of standard signs. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Seton Identification Products. 3. Or approved equal. B. General: 1. Pipe marker and safety sign materials shall withstand normal washing as required to remove grease, oil, chemicals, etc., without showing discoloration, loss of gloss, staining or other damage. 2. Piping markers shall be formed from laminated plastic. All printing shall be sealed with a formed butyrate plastic film. Markers for piping up to 6-inch diameter shall be pre-formed to completely wrap around the pipe requiring no adhesive. Markers for pipes over 6-inch diameter shall be performed to the contour of the pipe and attached with stainless steel spring fastener. 3. Each marker shall consist of at least one legend descriptive of the function of the pipe, as listed in Schedule A, and a directional arrow. 4. The size of lettering and marker shall conform to ANSI A13.1. 5. Location of markers: a. Adjacent to each valve and"T" connection. b. At each branch and riser takeoff. C. At each pipe passage through a wall,floor and ceiling. d. On all horizontal and vertical pipe runs at 20-foot intervals. 6. Safety signs shall be 18 inches by 24 inches formed from semi-rigid butyrate or polyethylene. They shall be attached with 4 stainless steel screws or similar fastener for substrate. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 109000-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 IDENTIFICATION STENCILING AND TAGGING JULY 2024 2.2 COLORS AND FINISHES A. Color Schedule: Paint colors will be selected by the ENGINEER from the approved manufacturer's color chips. B. Color Coding: In general, all color coding of piping, ducts and equipment shall comply with applicable standards of ANSI A13.1 and OSHA 1910.144 and shall meet the TCEQ requirements of 30 TAC 217. C. Piping and Sign Color Code: Refer to Schedule A at end of section. 2.3 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS A. Tagging system and stenciling system shall be selected by the CONTRACTOR. Valve tags shall include identification number, process,valve type, direction to open and number of turns to open. B. Tagging of Equipment: 1. Yard Valves: Identify with brass marking plate(minimum 1/8-inch thick)with embedment for placement in concrete. 2. Yard Slide Gates: Provide stainless steel plates with black enamel filled embossed lettering. Provide minimum plate of 2-1/2 inches with minimum letter height of 2 inches. Attach to gate frames at visible location by stainless steel fasteners. 3. Process valves,mechanical valves, instrumentation,and mechanical and process equipment(interior/exterior): a. Provide minimum 2-1/2-inch stainless steel plate with black enamel filled lettering. b. Attach to valves by nylon strap or stainless steel nonremovable beaded chains or to equipment by stainless steel fasteners. C. Provide general color scheme of tagging for listed items with black letter and numbers on background as follows: 1) Instrumentation tags White 2) Process valves and equipment tags Red 3) Water valves tags Blue 4) Mechanical valve and equipment tags Green 5) Electrical equipment Yellow 4. Electrical Equipment: Observe requirements and provisions stated in Division 26 of these specifications. C. Identification of piping, process tanks,galleries, pits,chemical liquid or solid storage tanks and silos, storage vessels, air ducts and similar items. 1. Use Tagging Systems by W.H. Brady Company, as follows: a. Vinyl film cloth for interior non-insulated piping systems(Category B-500). b. Thin film for insulated piping systems(Category B-350). C. All weather film for outdoor exposed piping(Category B-350). Provide flow arrows, banding tape, and numbering and lettering of same materials for corresponding applications. 2. Use stenciling systems in accordance with accepted practices. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 109000-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 IDENTIFICATION STENCILING AND TAGGING JULY 2024 3. Tagging and stenciling letter and number heights shall be: a. Minimum 1/2 inch for piping less than 1-inch diameter. b. Minimum 1-1/8 inches for piping 1 inch to 3-inch diameter. C. Minimum 2-1/4 inches for piping greater than 3-inch diameter to 24-inch. d. Minimum 3-1/2 inches for piping greater than 24-inch diameter and all process tanks, galleries, pits, chemical, liquid, or solid storage tanks and silos, storage vessels, mechanical heat exchangers, ducts, blowers,and similar related items. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Protected printed surfaces and adjacent work and materials by suitable covering during progress of work. B. Insure hardware,accessories, plates,fixtures,finished work and similar items are removed or protected. C. Paint or apply not less than one band on any length of pipe. Follow a clean-cut line around entire pipe. D. Install piping markers and safety signs only after all painting and finish work has been completed. This does not include temporary"wet paint"or construction safety signs. E. Provide arrows and identification stickers: 1. At 20'-0" maximum centers along continuous lines. 2. At changes in direction(route),valves, risers,joints,machinery,or equipment. 3. Where pipes, ducts pass through floor,wall,ceiling, cladding assemblies, and the like obstruction on both sides of assembly. 4. Apply markers on both sides of pipe and where view is not obstructed. 5. Arrow markers must point away from pipe markers and in flow direction if flow in both directions use double-headed arrow markers. F. Identify piping and ductwork including interior or exterior,exposed or covered, insulated or not, including pipes and ducts in open or covered floor or ceiling ducts or spaces. G. Apply tapes in uniform manner and parallel to piping and ducts. SCHEDULE A PIPING AND SIGN COLOR CODE Piping Lettering Background Piping and Legend Color Color Color Water Raw Water Tan Black Yellow Air Conditioning Water Blue White Green Domestic Hot Water Blue w/ Black Yellow 6" Red Bands Plant Water/Reclaimed Purple Black Green PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 10 90 00-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 IDENTIFICATION STENCILING AND TAGGING JULY 2024 Potable Water Light Blue Black Green Effluent after clarification Dark Green Black Green Air and Gas Blower Air Green White Blue Chlorine Gas Yellow Yellow Black Compressed Air Light Green Yellow Black Instrument Air Light Green w/ Dark Green Bands Mixed Gas Red Black Yellow Natural Gas Red Black Yellow Propane Gas Red Black Yellow Sulfur Dioxide Lime Green Black Yellow w/Yellow Bands Sludge Gas, HP Red Black Yellow Sludge Gas, LP Red Black Yellow Waste Gas Red Black Yellow Blower Lube White White Blue Grease White Black Green Foul(odorous)Air Beige Yellow Black Oxygen Gas N/A Green White Ozone Stainless Steel w/ White Bands Chemicals Aluminum Sulfate(Solution) Yelloww/ Black Yellow Green Bands Aluminum Sulfate(Liquid) Yelloww/ Black Yellow Orange Bands Chlorine Liquified Yellow Black Yellow Chlorine Solution Yellow Black Yellow Ferric Chloride Light Brown w/ Black Yellow Red Bands Ferric Sulfate Light Brown w/ Yellow Bands Ferric Sulfide Yellow Black Yellow Ferrous Chloride Yellow Black Yellow Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow Black Yellow Sulphur Dioxide Lime Green w/ Black Yellow Yellow Bands Polymer White w/ Green Bands Process Grit Brown Black Green Groundwater Drain Tan White Black Drain Green Black Green Scum Brown Brown Green Sewage Gray Black Green PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 109000-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 IDENTIFICATION STENCILING AND TAGGING JULY 2024 Sludge Brown Black Green Digester Tank Vent Brown Black Green Oxygenated Wastewater Grey White Green Vents High and Low Yellow Black Yellow Temperature H. Colors listed above shall be similar to the following standard colors by Tnemec Company: 1. Light Blue: 17BL"Horizon Blue" 2. Blue: 59HT"Safety Blue" 3. Red: 06SF"Safety Red" 4. Gray: 33GR" Gray" 5. Green: BS28"Safety Green" 6. Lime Green: 46GN "Limeade" 7. Light Green 09SF"Spearmint/Safety Green" 8. Tan: TRA Twine(Tan) (Tnemec has on file) 9. Yellow: 02SF"Safety Yellow" 10. White: OOWH "White" 11. Purple: 13SF"Purple Mountain's Majesty" 12. Brown: TRA Outside Equipment Brown(Tnemec has on file) 13. Light Brown: 06BR"Amber Canyon" END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 10 90 00-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 IDENTIFICATION STENCILING AND TAGGING JULY 2024 DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Air Moving and Conditioning Association,Inc.(AMCA): 203,Field Performance Measurement of Fan Systems. 2. American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,Inc. (ASHRAE): HVAC Applications Handbook. 3. Associated Air Balance Council(AABC):National Standards for Field Management and Instrumentation Total System Balance. 4. National Environmental Balancing Bureau(NEBB): a. Procedural Standards for Testing,Adjusting,Balancing of Environmental Systems. b. Procedural Standards for Measuring Sound and Vibration. 5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'National Association (SMACNA): HVAC Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing Manual. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Documentation of experience record of testing authority. 2. Documentation of current AABC or NEBB certifications for those technicians in responsible charge of the work under this Contract. 3. Submit detailed test and balance procedures,including test conditions for systems to be tested,prior to beginning the Work. 4. Written verification of calibration of testing and balancing equipment. 5. Balancing Log Report following completion of system adjustments including test results, adjustments, and rebalancing procedures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Balancing and Test Agency Qualifications: 1. Certification by AABC of NEBB for testing,adjusting and balancing of HVAC systems. 2. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority. 3. Professionally independent of manufacturers,suppliers,and installers of HVAC equipment being tested. 4. Have a proven record of at least five similar projects. 5. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing,adjusting and balancing of HVAC equipment and systems. Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing 230593 - 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide materials,tools,test equipment,computers and instrumentation required to complete the work included. B. Test Hole Plugs: Plug test holes in ducts with plugs made for that purpose and replace any insulation removed to specified conditions. C. Drives for Belt-Driven Fans: 1. Furnish cast iron or flanged steel sheaves. 2. Sheaves and belt combination shall be capable of providing 150 percent of motor horsepower. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Adjust and balance air and water systems in accordance with standard procedures and recognized practices of the AABC or SMACNA. B. Adjust and balance the following systems: I. Air conditioning supply and return systems. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING AIR SIDE A. Preparation: 1. Prior to beginning the Work,perform the following activities: a. Review shop drawings and installed system for adequate and accessible balancing devices and test points. b. Recommend to Engineer dampers that need to be added or replaced in order to obtain proper air control. C. Verify proper startup procedures have been completed on the system. d. Verify controls installation is complete and system is in stable operation under automatic control. e. Verify test instruments have been calibrated to a recognized standard and are within manufacturer's recommended calibration interval before beginning the Work. B. General: 1. When adjustments are made to a portion of a fan system,reread other portions of that same system to determine effects imposed by adjustments. Readjust as necessary. 2. Lock and mark final positions of balancing dampers with permanent felt pen. C. Equipment Data: 1. Collect the following data and included in final report: Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing 23 05 93 -2 a. Type of unit. b. Equipment identification number. C. Equipment nameplate data.(including manufacturer,model,size,type, and serial number). d. Motor data(frame,hp,volts,FLA rpm,and service factor). e. Sheave manufacturer, size,and bore. f. Belt size and number. g. Sheave centerline distance and adjustment limits. h. Starter and motor overload protection data. i. Include changes made during course of system balancing. D. Fan Systems: 1. Measure fan system performance in accordance with AMCA 203. 2. In each system at least one airpath from fan to final branch duct termination shall have dampers fully open. Achieve final air quantities by adjusting fan speed. 3. Adjust Fan Air Volumes: a. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives for required equipment air volumes, with allowable variation of plus 10 percent minus 0 percent. b. After final adjustments,do not operate motor above nameplate amperage on any phase. C. After final adjustments,do not operate fan above maximum rated speed. d. Perform airflow test readings under simulated or actual conditions of full cooling, full heating,minimum outside air, full outside air and exhaust, and full return air. e. Provide and make drive and belt changes on motors or fans as required to adjust equipment to specified conditions. Drives shall be able to deliver 150 percent of motor horsepower. Provide written notice to air handling unit manufacturer and [Owner] [Engineer] if drive or belt changes were made. 4. Adjust outside air dampers,return air dampers,relief air dampers, exhaust air dampers,and motorized louvers for maximum and minimum air requirements. 5. Read and record static pressures at unit inlet and discharge,each filter set, coils, dampers, plenums, and mixing dual-duct or adjustable-volume boxes, on every supply,return, and exhaust fan for each test condition. 6. Read and record motor amperage on all phases for each test condition. E. Air Terminal Devices: 1. Terminal Airflow Calibration: Calibrate and set the flow coefficients in terminal controller units to ensure controller readings are identical to measured values. This shall be a one-point calibration at maximum flow conditions. Record coefficient values. 2. Test each terminal flow device at minimum and maximum flow conditions. Ensure terminal controller is under control at time of each test. 3. If airflow of terminal device is derived from two or more flow streams,the individual air streams shall be measured and recorded independently for each test. 4. In each terminal system at least one airpath from terminal to final duct termination shall have dampers fully open. Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing 23 05 93 -3 5. Adjust air volumes on each terminal to quantity shown,with allowable variation of plus 10 percent minus 5 percent. F. Air Outlets and Inlets: 1. In each system at least one air path from fan to final branch duct termination shall have dampers fully open. 2. Adjust air volumes on supply diffusers and grilles,and on return and exhaust grilles,to the quantity shown,with allowable variation of plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Adjust diffusers and grilles for proper deflection,throw, and coverage.Eliminate drafts and noise where possible. 4. After final adjustments are made secure dampers to prevent movement and mark final positions with permanent felt pen. G. Building Static Pressure: 1. Measure building static pressure relative to outside in perimeter entrances during normal system conditions that would yield widest range in internal building pressure. 2. Adjust building static pressure control parameters to ensure perimeter entrances are positive to outdoors by 0.05-inch WC with entrance doors closed. 3.3 EXISTING SYSTEMS 1. When existing systems are modified by changes of capacity or addition or deletion of components the entire existing system shall be rebalanced using the procedures defined herein. 2. Rebalancing of air systems will not include coils except where specifically noted. 3. Capacities shall be as shown on the Drawings or if not shown,capacities shown on existing system drawings, if available, shall be used. 3.4 CONDENSING UNITS 1. Furnish data in Excel spreadsheet format tabulating the following: a. Manufacturer,model number,size and serial number of all units. b. All design and manufacturer's rated data. C. Suction and condensing temperatures,and pressures. d. Outside air dry bulb temperature in degrees F. e. Voltage and ampere input of motors under full load(one for each phase leg). f. Capacity of machine in Btuh. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General:Perform functional tests as required by Section 01 75 25,Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. B. Performance Testing: 1. Heating or Sensible Cooling Coil Testing: a. Adjust system as required to achieve design flow conditions for both air and water sides of coil. Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing 23 05 93 -4 b. Measure and record airflow rate,water flow rate, entering air temperature,entering water temperature,leaving air temperature and leaving water temperature. 2. Cooling or Dehumidification Coil Testing: a. Adjust system as required to achieve design flow conditions for both air and water sides of coil. b. Measure and record airflow rate,water flow rate, entering air dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures, entering water temperature,leaving air dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures and leaving water temperature. C. Balancing Log Report Requirements: l. Include narrative description for each system explaining TAB methodology and assumptions used. Clearly identify test conditions for tests performed. Include control setpoint. 2. Log and record operational information from every test for each system,as necessary to accomplish services described. 3. Include equipment data for units tested. 4. Include reduced set of HVAC Drawings or system schematic diagrams with each element uniquely identified and indexed to balance log. 5. Indicate recorded site values,and velocity and mass correction factors used to provide equivalent standard air quantities. 6. Include separate section in log,if necessary,describing operating difficulties in air or water systems that could not be eliminated by specified procedures. Identify these problems by system and location within building;include outline or summary of condition and its effect on building, and describe corrective actions attempted and recommended. D. Quality Control Verification: 1. After adjustments have been completed and balance logs submitted,balancing and testing agency shall be available to demonstrate the following: a. Air and water balancing procedures,vibration tests,and verification of test results. b. Perform spot tests on a maximum of 20 percent of total diffusers and grilles, on two air handling fan devices per building,and on 10 percent of total water balance fittings,with measuring equipment used in original tests, at random points selected by Engineer. C. Results of these spot tests shall agree with balance logs within plus or minus 10 percent. Where this accuracy cannot be verified,rebalance portions of system as requested by Engineer. d. At completion of rebalance procedures,perform another spot test if required to verify results. 3.6 OPPOSITE SEASON TEST A. The balancing agency shall perform an inspection of the HVAC system during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made. The balancing agency shall make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments to produce optimum system operation. Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing 23 05 93 -5 END OF SECTION Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing 23 05 93 -6 SECTION 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating& Air-Conditioning Engineers Inc. (ASHRAE): 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. 2. ASTM International(ASTM): a. B209,Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. b. C547, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. C. C553,Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. d. C1071, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material). e. C1139, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Thermal Insulation for Sound Absorbing Blanket and Board for Military Applications. f. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. g. G21, Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. h. G22, Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria. 3. Association of the Nonwoven Fabric Industry(INDA).IST 80.6,Water Resistance(Hydrostatic Pressure). 4. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): a. 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. b. 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. 259, Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials. 5. Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc. (UL). 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cold Air Ductwork: Designed to convey mechanically cooled air or return ducts in such systems. B. Warm Air Ductwork: Designed to convey mechanically heated air or return ducts in such systems. Thermal Insulation 23 07 00 - 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals:Product description,list of materials and thickness for each service or equipment scheduled,locations, and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating,corrosiveness,and compressive strength. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials furnished under this specification shall be standard,cataloged products,new and commercially available, suitable for service requiring high performance and reliability with low maintenance, and free from all defects. B. Provide materials by firms engaged in the manufacture of insulation products of the types and characteristics specified herein,whose products have been in use for not less than 5 years. C. UL listing or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory is required to indicate fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Manufacturer's Stamp or Label: 1. Every package or standard container of insulation,jackets, cements, adhesives and coatings delivered to Project Site for use must have manufacturer's stamp or label attached, giving name of manufacturer,brand, and description of material. 2. Insulation packages and containers shall be marked"asbestos-free." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable,grease-resistant,nonflaking,and nonpecling. B. Insulation shall conform to referenced publications and specified temperature ranges and densities in pounds per cubic foot. C. Insulation for fittings,flanges,and valves shall be premolded,precut,or job-fabricated insulation of same thickness and conductivity as used on adjacent piping. D. Fire Resistance: 1. Insulation,adhesives,vapor barrier materials and other accessories,except as specified herein, shall be noncombustible. Thermal Insulation 23 07 00 -2 2. Use no fugitive or corrosive treatments to impart flame resistance. 3. Flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration resulting from the effects of moisture or high humidity are not acceptable. 4. Materials including facings,mastics,and adhesives,shall have fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread without evidence of continued progressive combustion, and 50 for smoke, developed as per tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) methods. E. Materials exempt from fire-resistant rating: 1. Nylon anchors. 2. Treated wood inserts. F. Materials exempt from fire-resistant rating when installed in outside locations,buried,or encased in concrete: 1. Polyurethane insulation. 2. PVC casing. 3. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic casing. 2.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Type PI—Fiberglass(ASTM C547,Type 1 (Minus 20 Degrees F to 500 Degrees F): 1. Fiberglass,UL-rated,preformed, sectional rigid,minimum 4 pounds per cubic foot(pcf)density,K factor 0.23 maximum at 75 degrees F mean,with factory- applied all-service jacket(ASJ) composed of reinforced kraft paper and aluminum foil laminate. Jacket shall have self-sealing lap to facilitate closing longitudinal and end joints. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. CertainTeed;Preformed Pipe Insulation. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok AP-T. C. Owens/Corning;Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. d. Knauf; Crown Pipe Insulation. B. Type P3—Elastomeric(ASTM C534,Minus 40 Degrees F to 220 Degrees F): 1. Flexible,closed cell elastomeric. 2. Nominal 6 pcf density,K factor 0.27 maximum at 75 degrees F mean. 3. Water vapor transmission 0.1 perm-inch,or less. 4. Insulation fire and smoke hazard ratings for composite(insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation),as tested by procedure ASTM E84,NFPA 255 and UL 723,not exceeding: a. Flame spread: 25. b. Smoke developed: 50. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Armacell;AP Armaflex. b. Nomaco;K-Flex LS. C. Rubatex; R-180-FS. 2.3 DUCT INSULATION A. Type D1 -Flexible Insulation: Thermal Insulation 23 07 00 -3 1. Material: Commercial-grade fiberglass thermal insulation,formaldehyde free. 2. Scheduled thickness and installed R-value. Installed R-value when compressed to a maximum of 25 PCT following recommended duct wrap stretch outs. 3. Factory-applied foil scrim vapor barrier facing. 4. Average thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.27(BTU-IN)/(HR-FT2-DEGF)at a mean temperature of 75 DEGF (installed). 5. Fungi and bacteria resistance: a. ASTM C1338. b. Does not breed or promote growth. 2. Fire hazard classification: a. UL 723,ASTM E84,NFPA 255. 6. Flame spread not exceeding 25 and smoke developed not exceeding 50. 7. Basis of design: Johns Manville Microlite fiberglass duct wrap insulation. B. Type D2-Semi-Rigid Insulation for Indoor Installation: 1. Scheduled thickness and R-value. 2. Factory applied vapor barrier facing-white scrim foil. 3. Average thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.23 (BTU-IN)/(HR-FT2-DEGF)at a mean temperature of 75 DEGF. 4. Fungi and bacteria resistance: a. ASTM C1338. b. Does not breed or promote growth. 5. Moisture adsorption: a. ASTM C553. b. Not greater than 0.5 PCT moisture by volume when exposed to moisture laden air at 120 DEGF and 96 PCT RH. C. Type D3 -Semi-Rigid Insulation for Outdoor Installation: 1. Scheduled thickness and R-value. 2. Factory-applied foil scrim vapor barrier facing. 3. Average thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.23 (Btu-IN)/(HR-FT2-DegF)at mean temperature of 75 DEGF. 4. Minimum density: 3 LBS/CUFT. 5. Fungi and bacteria resistance: a. ASTM C1338. b. Does not breed or promote growth. 6. Basis of Design: Johns Manville#815 SPIN-GLASS fiberglass duct insulation. 2.4 INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS A. Type F1-PVC: I. Polyvinyl chloride(PVC)jacketing,white,for straight run piping and fitting locations,temperatures to 159 degrees F. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. Ceel-Co; 550. B. Type F2-Paint: 1. Acrylic latex paint,white,and suitable for outdoor use. Thermal Insulation 23 07 00 -4 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Armstrong;WB Armaflex finish. b. Rubatex; 374,white finish. C. Type F3—Aluminum: I. Aluminum Roll Jacketing:For straight run piping,wrought aluminum Alloy 3003, 5005, 1100 or 3105 to ASTM B209 with H-14 temper,minimum 0.016-inch thickness,with smooth mill finish. 2. Moisture Barrier:Provide factory applied moisture barrier,consisting of 40-pound kraft paper with 1-mil-thick low-density polyethylene film,heat and pressure bonded to inner surface of the aluminum jacketing. 3. Fitting Covers:Material as for aluminum roll jacketing,premolded,one or two piece covers,which includes elbows,tee/valves, end caps,mechanical line couplings, specialty fittings, etc. 4. Manufacturer and Product:RPR Products;INSUL-MATE. D. Type 174—Ceramic: 1. Insulating duct coating,fluid-applied coating with ceramic insulating particles. 2. Manufacturers and Products:ASTEC,by Insulating Coatings Corp.,Inverness, FL. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION OF PIPING INSULATION A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Apply insulation over clean,finish painted,and dry surfaces. C. Install insulation after piping system has been pressure tested and leaks corrected. D. Use insulating cements,lagging adhesives,and weatherproof mastics recommended by insulation manufacturer. E. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation,with a single cut piece to complete the run. Do not use cut pieces of scraps abutting each other. F. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. G. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. Seal open ends of insulation with mastic. Sectionally seal all butt ends of chilled water and condensate drain piping insulation at fittings with white vapor barrier coating. Thermal Insulation 23 07 00 -5 H. Cover valves, flanges, fittings, and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded,precut or job-fabricated units.Finish cold pipe fittings with white vapor barrier coating and hot piping with white vinyl acrylic mastic,both reinforced with glass cloth. I. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls,floors,and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. J. Install protective metal shields and foamglass inserts where pipe hangers bear on outside of insulation. K. Insulation on piping that is to be heat traced shall be installed after installation of heat tape. L. Insulate valve bodies,flanges,and pipe couplings. M. Insulate and vapor seal hangers,supports,anchors,and other piping appurtenances that are secured directly to cold surfaces. N. Do not insulate flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints. O. Do not allow insulation to cover nameplates or code inspection stamps. P. Install removable insulation sections on devices that require access for maintenance of equipment or removal, such as unions and strainer end plates. Q. Connection to Existing Piping: Cut back existing insulation to remove portion damaged by piping revisions. Install new insulation. R. Cold Surfaces: Provide continuous vapor seal on insulation on cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used. S. Placement: 1. Slip insulation on pipe or tubing before assembly,when practical,to avoid longitudinal seams. 2. Insulate valves and fittings with sleeved or cut pieces of same material. 3. Seal and tape joints. T. Insulation at Hangers and Supports: Install under piping,centered at each hanger or support. U. Vapor Barrier: 1. Provide continuous vapor barrier at joints between rigid insulation and pipe insulation. 2. Install vapor barrier jackets with pipe hangers and supports outside jacket. 3. Do not use staples and screws to secure vapor sealed system components. Thermal Insulation 23 07 00 -6 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION A. General:Install insulation products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulation.Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. Tape all punctures. E. Seal longitudinal and circumferential joints with FSK tape,and finish with fiberglass mesh fabric embedded in vapor barrier mastic. F. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls,floors,and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. G. Except as otherwise indicated,omit insulation on ductwork where internal insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Application Requirements:Insulate where external surface temperature of equipment is below ambient temperature in the space, including surfaces that have a recognized possibility for condensation. B. Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves intended purpose. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clear and dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gaping joints and excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship. D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. E. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment that must be opened periodically for maintenance;include metal vessel covers,fasteners,flanges,frames, and accessories. F. Replace damaged insulation that cannot be repaired satisfactorily,including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture-saturated units. G. Avoid using scrap pieces of insulation where larger sheets will fit. Thermal Insulation 230700 - 7 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS A. Use a continuous friction type joint to hold jacket in-place,providing positive weatherproof seal over entire length of jacket. B. Secure circumferential joints with preformed snap straps containing weatherproof sealant. C. On exterior piping,apply coating over insulation and vapor barrier to prevent damage when aluminum fitting covers are installed. D. Do not use screws or rivets to fasten the fitting covers. E. Install removable prefabricated aluminum covers on exterior flanges and unions. F. Caulk and seal all exterior joints to make watertight. 3.5 PIPING iNSULATiON REQUIREMENTS A. Refrigeration Suction: 1. Type P3, elastomeric. 2. 1/2-inch thickness for pipe sizes up to I inch. 3. 3/4-inch thickness for pipe sizes over 1 inch. B. Condensate Drain: 1. Type P3, elastomeric. 2. 1/2-inch thickness for pipe sizes up to 2-5/8 inches ID. 3. 3/4-inch thickness for pipe sizes over 2-5/8 inches ID. C. Pipe Hangers: I. Type P1, Fiberglass: UL-rated,preformed rigid pipe insulation inserts of thickness equal to adjoining insulation, 10 inches in length,with factory-applied, vinyl-coated and embossed vapor barrier jacket with self-sealing lap. 2. Type P3,Elastomeric:Rigid insulation section with 9-inch-long, 16-gauge galvanized steel saddle. 3.6 DUCTWORK INSULATION REQUIREMENTS A. Mechanically Cooled and Heated Supply and Return Air(Indoor): 1. Type D2. 2. 1-1/2-inch thiclmess. B. Mechanically Cooled and Heated Supply Air,Return Air(outdoors): 1. Type D3 2. 2-inch thickness. C. Air Distribution Devices: Refer to Drawing for requirements. Thermal Insulation 230700 - 8 3.7 INSULATION FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Piping Insulation(Indoors): 1. Type F3, aluminum. B. Ductwork Insulation(Indoors):Factory finish. C. Equipment Insulation(Indoors): Type F2,paint(for use with Type P3,elastomeric). D. Piping Insulation(Outdoors): 1. Type F2,paint(for use with Type P3,elastomeric). 2. Type F3, aluminum. E. Ductwork Insulation(Outdoors): Type F3,aluminum. F. Apply coating of insulating cement where needed to obtain smooth and continuous appearance. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test factory-applied materials assembled.Field-applied materials may be tested individually. END OF SECTION Thermal Insulation 23 07 00 -9 SECTION 23 3100 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Air Movement and Control Association(AMCA): 500,Test Methods for Louvers,Dampers and Shutters. 2. American Society of Heating,Refrigerating,and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)Handbook. 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 4. Association of the Nonwoven Fabrics Industry(INDA): IST 80.6,Water Resistance(Hydrostatic Pressure). 5. ASTM International(ASTM): a. A36/A36M,Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A90/A90M, Standard Test Method for Weight(Mass)of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings. C. A167,Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. d. A176,Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. e. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet,and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. f. A480/A480M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat- Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. g. A568/A568M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural,and High-Strength,Low-Alloy,Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for. h. A653/A653M, Standard Specifications for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. i. A700, Standard Practices for Packaging,Marking,and Loading Methods for Steel Products for Shipment. j. A924/A924M,Specification for General Requirements for Sheet Steel, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. k. A1008/A1008M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,Structural,High-Strength Low-Alloy,High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 1. A101 I/A1011M,Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,Hot- Rolled, Carbon, Structural,High- Strength Low-Alloy,High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. Ductwork and Accessories 233100 - 1 in. B209,Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. n. C423, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. o. C9161,Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation. P. C1071, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material). q. C1139, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Thermal Insulation for Sound Absorbing Blanket and Board for Military Applications. r. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. S. E96/E96M,Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 6. National Air Duct Cleaners Association(NADCA): General Specifications for the Cleaning of Commercial Heating,Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems. 7. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): a. 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. b. 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air- Conditioning Systems. C. 96, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations. d. 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. 259, Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials. f. 701, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films. 8. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'National Association (SMACNA): a. Duct Construction Standards. b. Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems. C. Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards. d. Fire,Smoke,and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems. e. HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 9. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL): a. 181, Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. b. 214, Standard for Tests for Flame-Propagation of Fabrics and Films. C. 555, Standard for Safety Fire Dampers. d. 5555, Standard for Safety Smoke Dampers. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. The following is a list of abbreviations which may be used in this section: 1. CFM: cubic feet per minute. 2. FPM: feet per minute. 3. PCF:pounds per cubic foot. 4. WC: water column. Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 -2 B. Sealing Requirements: For the purpose of duct systems sealing requirements specified in this section,the following definitions apply: 1. Seams: Joining of two longitudinally(in direction of airflow)oriented edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. All other duct surface connections made on perimeter are deemed to be joints. 2. Joints,duct surface connections including: a. Girth joints. b. Branch and subbranch intersections. C. Duct collar tap-ins. d. Fitting subsections. e. Louver and air terminal connections to ducts. f. Access door,and access panel frames and jambs. g. Duct,plenum,and casing abutments to building structures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Rectangular Ductwork: 1) Schedules of duct systems,materials,joints,sealing,gage and reinforcement. 2) SMACNA Figure Numbers for each shop fabricated item. 3) Reinforcing details and spacing. 4) Seam andjoint construction details. 5) Hangers and supports,including methods for building attachment,vibration isolation, and duct attachment. b. Ductwork Accessories: 1) Manufacturer's product data including catalog sheets,diagrams, standard schematic drawings, installation instructions and details, details of materials,construction, dimensions of individual components, and finishes, including the following items: a) Fittings and volume control damper installation(both manual and automatic) details. b) Sealing materials. c) Dampers;include leakage,pressure drop,and maximum back pressure data. d) Duct-mounted access panels and doors. e) Flexible ducts. 0 Sheet metal fasteners. 2. Duct Fabrication Drawings: a. Drawn after actual job measurements are obtained. b. Drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/4 inch equals I foot,on drawing sheets same size as Contract Drawings. C. Include the following features: Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 -3 1) Fabrication, assembly, and installation details including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. 2) Duct layout,indicating pressure classifications, and sizes in plan view. 3) Duct material and thickness. 4) Fittings and volume control damper installation(both manual and automatic) details. 5) Reinforcing details and spacing. 6) Seam and joint construction details. 7) Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 8) Duct accessories and control devices such as automatic dampers, airflow monitors, terminal units, smoke detectors, regulators, air distribution devices, etc. 9) Hangers and supports,including methods for building attachment,vibration isolation, and duct attachment. 10) Fire and smoke damper installations,including sleeves and duct- mounted access door and panel installation. 11) Coordination with ceiling suspension members. 12) Spatial coordination with other systems installed in same space with duct systems. 13) Coordination of ceiling-and wall-mounted access doors and panels required for access to dampers and other operating devices. 14) Coordination with ceiling-mounted lighting fixtures,air outlets, and inlets. 15) Coordination of ductwork with sprinkler piping and other mechanical and electrical services, and equipment. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Record Drawings: Include duct systems routing,fittings details,and installed accessories and devices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Industry Standards: 1. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, sheet metal ductwork shall be constructed and installed in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards relevant to ductwork system being provided.These standards are herein referenced as the SMACNA Manual,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Comply with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook recommendations,except as otherwise indicated. 3. NFPA Compliance: NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. B. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required,whose products have been satisfactorily used in similar service for not less than 5 years. Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 -4 C. Suppliers of duct and fitting components shall provide on request the following information: 1. Laboratory performance data for duct,including leakage rate,bursting strength, collapse strength, seam strength, and pressure loss. 2. Laboratory performance data for fittings,including zero-length dynamic losses. D. Installer shall be a firm with at least 3 years' experience of successful installation on ductwork systems similar to that required for this Project. E. Changes or alterations to layout or configuration of duct system shall be: 1. Specifically approved in writing by Engineer. 2. Proposed layout shall provide original design results,without increasing system total pressure. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish,tag,and box for shipment and storage the spare parts, special tools,and materials: Item Quantity Fusible Links 10 percent of amount installed Special tools required to maintain or One complete set dismantle B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 0140 00,Quality Requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect ductwork from dirt,water, and debris.During storage on Job Site,keep ends of ductwork covered to prevent foreign objects and water from entering ductwork. B. If fabricated sound-lined ductwork[or ductboard] gets wet during installation,remove and dispose of ductwork from the Site. C. Deliver sealant materials to Site in original unopened containers labeled with manufacturer,product name and designation,color,expiration period for use,pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. D. Store and handle sealant materials in compliance with manufacturers'recommendations to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture,high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. E. Deliver and store stainless steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 -5 2.1 GENERAL A. Specified components of this ductwork system,including facings,mastics,and adhesives, shall have fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread without evidence of continued progressive combustion, and 50 for smoke developed, as per test conducted in accordance with ASTM E84 and NFPA 255 methods. B. Internally Lined Ductwork: Duct sizes indicated for internally lined ducts are the clear inside dimensions, and shall be increased in both dimensions by twice the thickness of the liner. C. Ductwork thinner than 26-gauge will not be allowed. D. Ductwork Interior Surfaces: 1. Smooth. 2. No sheet metal parts,tabs,angles,or other items may project into air ducts, unless otherwise specified. 3. Seams and joints shall be external. 4. For ductwork that is required to be reinforced,Contractor may use either external or internal reinforcing. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ductwork: 1. Comply with ASTM A653/A653M and ASTM A924/924M. 2. Product Name: Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated(Galvanized Steel). 3. Sheet Designation: CS Type B. 4. Applicable Specification:ASTM A653/A653M. 5. (Zinc)Coating Designation: G90. 6. Coating designation in accordance with Test Method A,ASTM A90/A90M. and ASTM A924/A924M. 7. Provide mill-phosphatized finish for ducts exposed to view and for ducts scheduled to be painted. 8. Provide sheet metal packaged and marked as specified in ASTM A700. B. Aluminum Ductwork: 1. Comply with ASTM B209. 2. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 3003-H14,unless indicated otherwise. 3. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock:Alloy 6061-T6 or equivalent. C. Stainless Steel Ductwork: 1. Comply with ASTM Al67,ASTM Al76,ASTM A240/A240M,and ASTM A480/A480M. 2. Stainless Steel Sheet: Type 304,unless indicated otherwise. 3. Gauge shall comply with SMACNA manual,unless specified otherwise. 4. Finish:No. 2 B(cold-rolled,bright)finish except as otherwise noted. D. Exposed Ductwork: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces,provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 -6 seam marks,roller marks,oil canning,stains,discoloration,and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated,provide reinforcements of same material as ductwork. F. DUCT SCHEDULES Building System Static Construction SMACNA Pressure Material Standard Pipe Gallery 1 New supply and return duct +/-4" Aluminum M&F,IRT Pipe Gallery 2 New supply duct +/-3" Aluminum M&F,IRT 2.3 DUCT SEALING MATERIALS A. General: The term sealant used here is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature, but also includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics. B. Adhesives,Cements, Sealant,and Installation Accessories: As recommended by duct manufacturer for application. C. Solvent-Based Sealants: 1. Ultraviolet light resistant. 2. Mildew resistant. 3. Flashpoint: Greater than 70 degrees F, SETA CC. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Hardeast,Inc.;Versagrip 102. b. Rectorseal; AT-33. C. Childers CP-140. D. Water-Based Sealants: 1. Listed by manufacturer as nonflammable in wet and dry state. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Foster; Series 32. b. Childers;CP-145A, 146. C. Rectorseal;Airlok 181. 2.4 DUCTWORK FASTENERS A. General: 1. Rivets,bolts, or sheet metal screws. 2. Ductwork fasteners shall be same metal as duct being supported,unless otherwise noted. B. Self-Drilling Screws: 1. Galvanized Steel Ductwork System: Sheet metal screws shall be hex washer head (HWH) TEKS® self-drilling type,formed from heat-treated carbon steel with zinc electroplated finish. Ductwork and Accessories 233100 - 7 2.5 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS A. Construct duct systems to pressure classifications indicated as follows: 1. Supply Ducts: 3-inch WC. 2. Return Ducts: 3-inch WC,negative pressure. 2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK A. Fabricate rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, unless specified otherwise. B. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger and are 20-gauge or less,with more than 10 square feet of unbraced panel area,as indicated in SMACNA Manual,unless they are lined or are externally insulated. C. Air Handling Unit Discharge Ductwork: Ductwork extending from variable air volume air handling units up to and including first elbow or terminal tap outside air handling unit room shall be constructed of 16-gauge,minimum sheet metal,same material as remainder of system. 2.7 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK FITTINGS A. Fabricate elbows,transitions,offsets,branch connections,and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. B. Elbows: 1. Fit square-turn elbows with vane side rails. 2. Shop fabricate double-blade turning vanes of same material as ductwork. 3. Fabricate with equal inlet and outlet. 4. Rectangular radius elbows with inside radius of 3/4 of duct width in direction of turn. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Elgen;All-Tight. b. Duro-Dyne;Type TR. 2.8 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK BRANCH CONNECTIONS A. Branch duct connections to rectangular duct mains shall be made using factory fabricated fittings with spot welded tap to main duct connections or with factory fabricated,field installed taps, with spin-in or mechanical fastened tap to main duct connections. 2.9 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Fabricate in accordance with: 1. UL 181, Class 1. 2. NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. Ductwork and Accessories 233100 - 8 B. Construction: 1. Outer Jacket: Fire retardant reinforced metalized vapor barrier jacket with reinforced cross-hatched scrim having a permeance of not greater than 0.1 perm when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M,Procedure A. 2. Inner Liner: Tri-laminate of aluminum foil,fiberglass,and aluminized polyester. 3. Reinforcing: Galvanized steel wire helix,mechanically locked to and encapsulated by inner liner fabric. 4. Insulation: a. Factory insulated with fiberglass insulation. b. R-value: 6.0 minimum at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. 5. Internal Working Pressure:Rating shall be minimum 4-inch WC positive and 5-inch WC negative,with bursting pressure of at least 2-1/2 times working pressure. 6. Air Velocity Rating: 4,000 fpm,minimum. C. Environment: Suitable for continuous operation at temperature range of minus 20 degrees F to plus 200 degrees F. D. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Flex-Master;Type 5M. 2. Thermaflex;Type M-KC. 3. Hart&Cooley; Type F216. 2.10 HIGH TEMPERATURE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Metal flexible ductwork for high heat applications. B. Fully interlocked,stainless steel,0.012-inch thickness. C. Manufacturer and Product:Flexonics;RT-6. 2.11 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: 1. Attachments,hangers,and supports for ductwork shall be in accordance with SMACNA Manual referenced for type of duct system being installed. 2. Duct hanging system shall be composed of three elements;upper attachment to building,hanger itself, and lower attachment to duct. 3. Wire hangers are not acceptable. 4. Hanger Spacing: a. Ducts Up to 60 inches in Largest Dimension: 10 feet,maximum. b. Ducts Over 61 inches in Largest Dimension: 8 feet,maximum. B. Construction Materials: Supporting devices including,but not limited to,angles used for support and bracing,baseplates,rods,hangers, straps, screws,bolts shall be as follows: 1. Galvanized Steel Ductwork: a. Indoors: Carbon steel,zinc electroplated. b. Outdoors: Carbon steel,hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. 2. Aluminum Ductwork Indoors and Outdoors: Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 -9 a. Carbon steel,hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. b. Non-metallic pad between lower attachment and ductwork,to achieve dielectric separation. 3. Stainless Steel Ductwork Indoor and Outdoors: Stainless steel,same ASTM Grade as ductwork. C. Building Attachments: 1. Concrete inserts,powder-actuated fasteners,or structural steel fasteners appropriate for building materials. 2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 3. Upper Attachment(Concrete): a. Drive pin fastener and expansion nail anchor may be used for ducts up to 18-inch maximum dimension. b. Threaded stud fastener may be used for ducts up to 36-inch maximum dimension. C. Concrete attachments shall be made of steel. D. Duct Fasteners: Sheet metal screws,blind rivets,or self-tapping metal screws;compatible with duct materials and conforming to requirements of Article Ductwork Fasteners. E. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A36/A36M,hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. 2.12 DUCTWORK FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. General: 1. Factory fabricated metal-edged fabric flexible connectors for commercial or industrial applications. 2. Sheet metal permanently secured to fabric with double fabric fold,double metal crimp. 3. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B requirements. 4. Airtight and waterproof. B. Materials: 1. Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics,coatings,and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. 2. Metal Edges: Construct from same material as ductwork,unless otherwise noted. 3. Fabric: a. Comply with NFPA 701 or UL 214(except teflon coated). b. Woven polyester or nylon for most applications. C. Woven fiberglass for high temperature applications. d. Coating: Vinyl. C. Construction: 1. Fold and crimp metal edge strips onto fabric as illustrated in SMACNA Manual. 2. Standard Metal Edged Connectors: Strip of fabric 3 inches wide attached to two strips of 3-inch-wide sheet metal. Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 - 10 3. Wide Metal Edged Connectors: Strip of fabric 4 inches wide attached to two strips of 4-inch-wide sheet metal. 4. Extra Wide Metal Edged Connectors: Strip of fabric 6 inches wide attached to two strips of 6-inch-wide sheet metal. D. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate;PROflex,Commercial. 2. Ventfabrics. 3. Duro-Dyne. 2.13 DUCT INSPECTION DOORS A. General: 1. Insulated,gasketed,and at least 15 inches by 15 inches when duct dimensions are large enough. 2. On ductwork where largest side dimension is less then 16 inches,furnish inspection doors at least 8 inches by 8 inches. 3. Complete with necessary hardware and either Amerlock 10 or Ventlock No. 100 latches, and Ventlock Series No. 100 hinges. 4. Fabricated of same material as ductwork. B. Casing and Plenum Access Doors: 1. Size: 12 inches high by 12 inches wide minimum where possible. 2. Complete with hardware,hinges,seals,and latch handles. 3. Doors and frames shall be designed to equal or higher than pressure. 4. Latch Handles: Ventlock,Series No.260. 5. Hinges:Ventlock, Series No. 200 and No. 300. C. Manufacturers: 1. Ventlok. 2. Duro-Dyne. 3. Flexmaster. 2.14 MANUAL DAMPERS A. Butterfly Manual Dampers: 1. Fabricate from two gauges heavier than duct in which installed,of same material as ductwork. 2. Align operating handle with damper blade. 3. Provide 2-inch standoff bracket for insulated duct systems. 4. Damper Manufacturers: a. Ruskin. b. American Wanning and Ventilating. 5. Operator Manufacturers: a. Accessible Ductwork: Ventlok. b. Accessible Insulated Ductwork:Ventlok. C. Concealed Ductwork:Ventlok;Type 677 with extended operating rod and concealed regulator with plain cover. Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 - 11 B. Manual Opposed-Blade Balancing Dampers: l. Externally operated gang airfoil,damper blades. 2. Fabricate from same material as ductwork. 3. Stainless steel or nylon sleeve bearings. 4. Construction shall have interlocking edges and maximum 10-inch blade width. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Ruskin; CD102. b. American Warming and Ventilating;Model VC-31. 2.15 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION A. Refer to Section 23 07 00,Thermal Insulation. 2.16 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Louver and Grille Blank-Off Sections: 1. Fabricate from 20-gauge sheets of same material as louver/grille. 2. Line with sound attenuation/insulating material. 3. Shop-prime and paint outside face of blank-off section with two coats of flat black exterior paint. B. Auxiliary Drain Pans: l. Dimensions: Minimum 6 inches larger in both dimensions than equipment it is serving and 2 inches high, minimum. 2. Construction: 16-gauge stainless steel with welded joints.Pans shall be watertight and have hemmed edges. 3. Drain Connection: a. Minimum 1-inch IPS or as shown on Drawings. b. Locate at lowest point of drain pan. C. In lieu of drain connection,float switch may be installed.Float switch shall shut down air handling equipment upon sensing water. C. Accessories Hardware: 1. Instrument Test Holes: a. Cast metal,material to suit duct material,including screw cap and gasket and flat mounting gasket. b. Size to allow insertion ofpitot tube and other testing instruments. C. Provide in length to suit duct insulation thickness. 2. Flexible Duct Clamps: a. Stainless steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with worm-gear action. b. Provide in sizes from 3 inches to 18 inches to suit duct size. 3. Adhesives: High strength,quick setting,neoprene based,waterproof and resistant to gasoline, and grease. 2.17 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION A. Painted Identification Materials: Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 - 12 1. Stencils: Standard metal stencils,prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally comply with recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications,but not less than 1-1/4-inch high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4-inch-high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel;black, except as otherwise indicated;either brushing grade or pressurized spray can form and grade. 3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or in accordance with ASME A13.1 for colors for systems not identified herein. B. Plastic Duct Markers 1. General:Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic,color coded duct markers. Conform to the following color code: a. Black text on yellow background: Odorous Air. b. White text on green background: Services other than hazardous exhaust and odorous air. C. For other hazardous exhausts,use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. C. Nomenclature: Include the following: 1. Direction of air flow. 2. Duct service(supply,return,exhaust). 3. Design cfm. D. Manufacturers: I. W.H. Brady, Co. 2. Seton Identification Products. 3. Craftmark. 4. Brimar Industries,Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Miscellaneous: 1. Install sheet metal ductwork and flexible ductwork in accordance with SMACNA Manual,NFPA 90A, and NFPA 90B. 2. Install ductwork using manufacturer's recommended adhesives,cement,sealant, and insulation accessories. 3. Align ductwork accurately at connections,within 1/8-inch misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. 4. Interface Between Ductwork and Louvers: At locations where ductwork is connected to louver for either intake or exhaust purposes, ductwork shall be installed,sloped,and connected to louver so water entering ductwork system positively drains back to and out of louver. B. Ductwork Location: Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 - 13 1. Locate ductwork runs vertically and horizontally,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. 3. As indicated by diagrams, details, and notations or,if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route that does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and equipment. 4. In general,install as close to bottom of structure as possible. 5. For ductwork concealed above ceiling,maximize clearance between bottom of ductwork and top of ceiling construction. 6. Hold ducts close to walls,overhead construction,columns,and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. 7. Ductwork that must transition and drop below piping or other ductwork shall be transitioned back to bottom of structure immediately adjacent to obstruction. C. Penetrations: 1. Provide duct sleeves or prepared openings for duct mains,duct branches,and ducts passing through roofs,walls and ceilings. 2. Clearances: a. For uninsulated ducts,allow 1-inch clearance between duct and sleeve, except at grilles,registers,and diffusers. b. For insulated ducts,allow 1-inch clearance between insulation and sleeve, except at grilles,registers, and diffusers. 3. Closure Collars: a. Minimum 4 inches wide on each side of walls or floors where sleeves or prepared openings are installed. b. Fit collars snugly around ducts and insulation. C. Same gauge and material as duct. d. Grind edges of collar smooth to preclude tearing or puncturing insulation covering or vapor barrier. e. Use fasteners with maximum 6-inch centers on collars. 4. Packing: Mineral fiber in spaces between sleeve or opening and duct or duct insulation. D. Concealment: 1. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces,conceal ductwork from view by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceiling. 2. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,except as specifically shown. 3. Limit clearance to 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness,if any. E. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Coordinate duct installation with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames,equipment,controls,and other associated work of ductwork system. 2. Ductwork shall be configured,positioned,and installed to permit installation of light fixtures as indicated on Drawings. 3. Coordinate ductwork layout with suspended ceiling,lighting and sprinkler head layouts and similar finished work. Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 - 14 4. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and other electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. F. Shower Room and Toilet Room Exhaust Ductwork: 1. Joints and Seams: Seal watertight. 2. Slope branch ducts downward to grille. G. Fume Hood,Laboratory,and Chlorine Room Exhaust Ductwork: 1. Seal joints and seams with chemical-resistant mastic. 2. Rivet butt joints with minimum of eight pop rivets. 3.2 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK A. General: 1. Where possible,install ductwork so seams and joints will not be cut for installation of grilles,registers, or ceiling outlets. 2. If cutting of seams or joints is unavoidable,reinforce cut portion to original strength. B. Low Pressure Taps: 1. Use bell mouth or conical fittings with integral locking quadrant damper. Spin-in fitting shall be sealed at duct tap with a gasket or sealed with sealant as specified for medium pressure ductwork. 2. Determine location of spin-in after outlet location is determined. 3. Fitting shall be securely attached to shaft to prevent damper from rotating around shaft. C. Fittings: 1. Use bell-mouth or conical tee fittings for round duct takeoffs from rectangular mains. 2. Use 45-degree entry fittings conforming to SMACNA requirements for rectangular takeoffs from rectangular or round mains. 3. Make offsets with maximum angle of 45 degrees. 4. Use fabricated fittings for changes in directions,changes in size and shape,and connections. D. Rectangular Ductwork Transverse Joints: 1. Install each run with a minimum of joints. 2. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a minimum. 3. Mechanical Joint Option: a. Construct transverse joints with Ductmate 25/35 duct connector systems, Ductmate W.D.C.I. Heavy/Lite duct connector systems, or Ductlok J/E duct connector system. Slip-on duct flange connectors shall have integral sealant pocket with permanently flexible sealant. b. When using Ductmate W.D.C.I. Heavy/Lite system, construct ductwork- in accordance to the Ductmate W.D.C.I. Heavy J and Light H Assembly Manual and Duct Construction Standards. Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 - 15 C. When using Ductlok J/E duct connector system, construct ductwork in accordance with Ductlok's Rectangular Duct Construction Manual for Low, Medium, and High Pressure. d. For longitudinal seams, use Pittsburgh lock seam sealed internally with permanently elastic sealer such as Ductmate 5511M mastic. e. Conform to SMACNA Class A sealing requirements. 3.3 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Installation: 1. Where shown,between branch duct and ceiling diffusers and grilles. 2. Without sags,kinks,sharp offsets,or elbows. 3. As straight and taut as possible. B. Connection: Connect flexible ductwork to round collars,air distribution devices,and terminal units in accordance with flexible duct manufacturer's recommendations. C. Length: 1. Maximum length of low-pressure flexible duct(construction pressure class up to 2-inch WC)to be 8 feet. 2. Maximum length of medium pressure flexible duct(construction pressure class up to 4-inch WC)to be 4 feet. D. Flexible ductwork shall not pass through wall,floor,or fire resistant rated assembly. 3.4 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install ductwork with support systems in accordance with SMACNA Manual,unless otherwise noted. B. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties,braces,hangers,and anchors of type,which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. C. Install additional bracing on ductwork as required,to prevent ballooning or breathing. D. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection. E. Support vertical ducts at maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor. F. Upper attachments to structures shall have allowable load not exceeding 1/4 of failure (proof test)load,but are not limited to specific methods indicated. G. In new construction,install concrete insert prior to placing concrete. 3.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Flexible Collars and Connections: Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 - 16 1. Use between fans and ducts. 2. For round ducts,securely fasten flexible connections by zinc-coated steel clinch- type draw bands. 3. For rectangular ducts,lock flexible connections to metal collars. 3.6 DAMPERS A. General: 1. Inspection: a. Inspect areas to receive dampers. b. Notify Engineer of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent utilization of dampers. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 2. Install dampers at locations indicated on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Install square and level. 4. Handle damper using sleeve or frame.Do not lift damper using blades or jack- shaft. 5. Damper blades and hardware shall operate freely without obstruction. 6. Damper blades and hardware that bind within frame or obstructed by adjacent construction will not be acceptable. 7. When installed, damper frames shall be gasketed or caulked to eliminate leakage between duct and damper frames. S. Head and sill shall have stops. 9. Suitable for installation in mounting arrangement shown. 10. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening. B. Manual Dampers: 1. Provide balancing dampers for grilles and diffusers as indicated on Drawings in branch duct as near main as possible. 2. Add or remove balancing dampers as requested by air balancing firm for necessary control of air. C. Back Draft Dampers: 1. Install dampers square and free from racking with blades running horizontally. 2. Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed. D. Fire Dampers: 1. At ceiling grille and diffuser fire dampers,provide thermal blankets where required by local authorities. 2. Install I-1/2-hour rated,unless otherwise indicated,at locations shown and in accordance with SMACNA Fire, Smoke, and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems. Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 - 17 3.7 ACCESS DOORS A. Ductwork: Install access doors in ductwork,in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, at each: 1. Duct mounted fire damper. 2. Duct mounted smoke or ionization detector. 3. Electric duct heater. 4. Booster coil. 5. Humidifier. 6. Motorized damper. 7. Sail switch. 8. Turning vane. 9. Volume damper. 10. Automatic damper. IL Temperature controller. 12. Coil,on both upstream and downstream side. 3.8 SOUND ATTENUATORS A. Install where shown and in accordance with applicable SMACNA Manual and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide dielectric separation where attenuator material differs from connected duct system. 3.9 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION A. Refer to Section 23 07 00,Thermal Insulation. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Auxiliary Drain Pans: 1. Under equipment for which pan is shown on Drawings and under all horizontal air handling units located above ceilings and piping located in ceiling space directly above computer facility areas; furnish and install auxiliary drain pans. 2. Route drain lines to nearest floor or hub drain independent of any other drain. 3. Slope drain pans toward drain connection to promote drainage. B. Louver and Grille Blank-Off Sections: Attach airtight to louver or grille and install to allow for easy removal. 1. Where required in ductwork for balance measurements. 2. Test holes shall be airtight and noncorrosive with screw cap and gasket. 3. Extend cap through insulation. 3.11 DUCT SEALING A. Seal duct seams and j oints as follows: 1. In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 2. In accordance with the following: Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 - 18 a. Pressure Classifications Greater than 3-Inch WC: Transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct penetrations. b. Pressure Classification Between 2-Inch and 3-Inch WC: Transverse joints and longitudinal seams. C. Pressure Classification Less than 2-Inch WC: Transverse joints only. 3. In addition to other requirements,provide the following duct sealing: a. For interior ductwork,tape joints with Hardcast Lag-Rite tape and bonder or Ray-Chem shrink tape. b. For exterior ductwork,tape joints with Hardcast outdoor tape and rosin. B. If no specific duct sealing requirements are specified,requirements of SMACNA manual shall govern. C. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation. D. Provide additional duct sealing as required to comply with Article Ductwork Leakage Testing. E. Seal all audible leaks. 3.12 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TESTING A. General: 1. Tests shall be conducted on completed ductwork systems. 2. Testing of partial installations or limited sections of ductwork will not be acceptable. 3. All ductwork leakage test procedures and results shall be submitted to Engineer for review. 4. Engineer shall retain the right to witness some or all ductwork leakage testing procedures. 5. Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing at least 5 working days prior to ductwork testing. B. Leakage Criteria: 1. Assemble and install ductwork with maximum leakage limited as follows: 2. Constant Volume Systems: a. Supply Ductwork: 1) Operating Pressure: 0-to 2-inch WC. a) Allowable Leakage:2 percent of design airflow. 2) Operating Pressure: 3-inch and over WC. a) Allowable Leakage: 1 percent of design airflow. b. Return Ductwork: 1) Operating Pressure: All. 2) Allowable Leakage: 2 percent of design airflow. 3. Variable Air Volume System: a. Supply Ductwork: 1) Fan to VAV Boxes: I percent of design maximum airflow. 2) VAV Boxes to Register: 2 percent of design maximum airflow. b. Return Ductwork: Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 - 19 1) Operating Pressure: All. 2) Allowable Leakage: 2 percent of design maximum airflow. C. Leakage Testing Method: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary test fans and calibrated measuring devices to accomplish ductwork leakage test and to demonstrate that ductwork systems leakage rate is less than maximum rate specified. 2. Pressure testing shall be accomplished using a pressure blower with a calibrated orifice and manometer. 3. Blower shall maintain system design static pressure, SMACNA construction pressure classification during test. 4. Perform testing in accordance with procedures given in SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 3.13 BALANCING OF AIR SYSTEMS A. Perform air balancing in accordance with requirements of Section 23 05 93,Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 3.14 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Open ends of installed ductwork systems shall be covered to prevent dust,foreign objects and water from entering ductwork. B. Ductwork systems shall not be used for air conveyance until adequate air filtration devices are installed in air handling equipment,to prevent ingress of construction dust. 3.15 CLEANING A. Ductwork shall be cleaned of rust,dust,and debris,both internally and externally,before placing in operation. B. Before installing air outlets,use air handler to blow dry air through entire system at maximum attainable velocity. Provide temporary air filters for this operation. C. If duct systems are found to contain construction debris at time of construction completion Contractor shall provide complete ductwork system cleaning in accordance with NADCA Standards. END OF SECTION Ductwork and Accessories 23 31 00 -20 3 KWH ENGINEERING LLC TBPE# F-17606 ►.wW1c4rrr SECTION 23 34 00 t�e OF ' %%� HVAC FANS OW E,9,5,�F+� 0 •;yk 1 1 .: ................ ..::a:4:a XUEFEI FEND a........ .. PART 1 GENERAL ,11 •89274. .!� 1.1 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this sec p I 1. Acoustical Society of America(ASA): S2.19,Mechanical Vibration—Balance Quality Requirements of Rigid Rotors—Part 1, Determination of Permissible Residual Unbalance. 2. Air Movement and Control Association International (AMCA): a. 99, Standards Handbook. b. 201, Fans and Systems. C. 203, Field Performance Measurement of Fan Systems. d. 204, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. e. 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating. f. 300, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. g. 301, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. 3. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 52.2, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. 5. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B 117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. b. D2247, Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100%Relative Humidity. c. D2794, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation(Impact). d. D3363, Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. e. D4167, Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Fans and Blowers. f. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 7. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 45, Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals. 8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 9. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. b. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning. C. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. d. SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning. 10. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 507, Safety Standard for Electric Fans. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. The following is a list of abbreviations which may be used in this section: A1. AC: Alternating Current. � HVAC Fans 23 34 00 - 1 2. CISD: Chemical Industry, Severe-Duty. 3. dB: Decibel. 4. DWDL Double Width, Double Inlet. 5. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 6. hp: Horsepower. 7. ODP: Open Drip Proof. 8. SWSI: Single Width, Single Inlet. 9. TEFC: Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled. 10. UV: Ultra Violet 11. XP: Explosion Proof. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Provide following for specified products: a. Identification as referenced in Contract Documents. b. Manufacturer's name and model number. C. Descriptive specifications, literature, and drawings. d. Dimensions and weights. e. Fan sound power level data(reference 10 to power minus 12 watts) at design operating point. f. Fan Curves: 1) Performance Curves Indicating: a) Relationship of flow rate to static pressure for various fan speeds. b) Brake horsepower curves. c) Acceptable selection range(surge curves, maximum revolutions per minute). d) Static pressure, capacity, horsepower demand and overall efficiency required at duty point, including drive losses. 2) For variable air volume applications,indicate operating points at 100, 80, 60 and 40 percent of design capacity on fan curves including data to indicate effect of capacity control devices such as inlet vanes on flow,pressure, and brake horsepower. g. Capacities and ratings. h. Construction materials. i. Fan type, size, class, drive arrangement, discharge, rotation, and bearings. J. Wheel type, diameter, maximum revolutions per minute for fan class, operating revolutions per minute, and tip speed. k. Motor data, including service factor and operating horsepower, as specified in Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 1. Fan shaft first critical speed. in. Belt service factor. n. Drive assembly horsepower rating. o. Sheave horsepower rating. p. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. q. Vibration isolation. r. Factory finish system. S. Color selection charts where applicable. t. Corrosion protection coating product data. HVAC Fans 233400 - 2 2. "Or Equal" Equipment: a. Where submitted equipment results in change to fan inlet or outlet ductwork configuration shown on Drawings, submit system effect factor calculations indicating increased static pressure requirements as described in AMCA 201. b. Where submitted equipment results in change to ductwork and equipment configuration shown on Drawings, submit detailed information on structural,mechanical,electrical, or other modifications necessary to adapt arrangement to equipment furnished. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Recommended procedures for protection and handling of products prior to installation. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 60 00,Product Requirements, for the following: 4. Motors specified to be premium efficient type. 5. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 0143 33,Manufacturer's Field Services. 6. Test reports. 7. Operation and maintenance data in confonnance with Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. Include as-built version of equipment schedules. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings: Tested in accordance with AMCA 210. B. Sound Ratings: Tested in accordance with AMCA 300. C. Fabrication: In accordance with AMCA 99. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts, special tools, and materials: Item Quantity Vee Belts One complete set per unit Special tools required to maintain or One complete set[for each different size unit dismantle B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES A. Some specific equipment requirements are listed in Equipment Schedule. Refer to HVAC drawings. Q HVAC Fans 23 34 00 - 3 2.2 GENERAL A. Operating Limits: Fans designated to meet a specified fan class shall comply with requirements of AMCA 99-2408. B. Acoustical Levels: Equipment selections shall produce sound power levels in each octave band no greater than shown in Equipment Schedule. C. Fan Drives: 1. Drive assembly shall be sized for a minimum 140 percent of fan motor horsepower rating. 2. Furnish multiple drive belts where motor horsepower is 2 hp or larger. 3. Sheaves: a. Capable of providing 150 percent of motor horsepower. b. Unless otherwise noted, furnish belt-driven fans with cast iron or flanged steel sheaves. 4. Drive Adjustment: a. When fixed-pitch sheaves are furnished, accomplish system air balancing by either trial of different fixed-pitch sheaves or use of temporary adjustable-pitch sheaves. b. Provide trial and final sheaves, as well as drive belts, as required. 5. Fan Shafts: First critical speed of at least 125 percent of fan maximum operating speed. 6. Provide speed test openings at shaft locations. 7. Belts: Oil and heat resistant, nonstatic type. 8. Motors: a. Motors 20 hp or Smaller: 1) Variable pitch V-belt sheaves allowing at least 20 percent speed variation. 2) Final operating point shall be at approximate sheave midpoint. b. Motors Larger than 20 hp: Fixed-pitch sheaves. c. Furnish motors for V-belt drives with adjustable rails or bases. 9. Weather Cover:For outdoor applications,factory fabricated drive assembly of same material as fan housing,unless specified otherwise. 10. Belt and Shaft Guards: a. Easily removable and to enclose entire drive assembly,meeting federal, OSHA, and State of Texas requirements. b. Guard faces of expanded metal having minimum 60 percent free area for ventilation. c. Bright yellow finish. D. Finishes: 1. Carbon Steel Parts: Factory finish as follows, unless indicated otherwise. a. Parts cleaned and chemically pretreated with phosphatizing process. b. Alkyd enamel primer. C. Air dry enamel topcoat. 2. Aluminum Parts: Finished smooth and left unpainted, unless stated otherwise. 3. Stainless Steel Parts: Finished smooth and left unpainted. 4. Fiberglass Parts: Finished in accordance with Paragraph Fiberglass Material. 2.3 1NL1NE FAN, CENTRIFUGAL, SQUARE A. General: 1. Factory-assembled, centrifugal, inline fan, square housing configuration; including housing, fan wheel, drive assembly, motor and accessories. HVAC Fans 233400 - 4 2. Bearing AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. B. Housing: 1. Construction: All aluminum. 2. Integral duct collars. 3. Removable side panels, for ease of service. 4. Field convertible for side air discharge configuration. 5. Predrilled universal mounting brackets for vertical or horizontal installation. 6. Inlets: Aerodynamic aluminum venturi. 7. Corrosion-resistant fasteners. 8. Drive belt and bearings separated from air steam by enclosure. C. Wheel: 1. Centrifugal backward inclined, 100 percent aluminum construction. 2. Precision machined cast aluminum hub. 3. Die-formed airfoil or backward inclined blades. 4. Matched to inlet venturi. 5. Attached to fan shaft with split taper lock bushing. D. Shaft, Bearings, Drive: 1. Shafts: a. Turned, ground and polished carbon steel. b. Keyed for sheave installation. 2. Bearings: a. Grease lubricated, precision antifriction ball, self-aligning,pillow block style, relubricatable or sealed type. b. Selected for average life(ABMA 9 Lso) of not less than 200,000 hours operation at maximum cataloged operating speed. 3. Drives: a. In accordance with Paragraph Fan Drives. b. Factory set to specified fan revolutions per minute. c. Type and arrangement: As scheduled in Equipment Schedule. E. Accessories: as follows: 1. Belt Guard: Sheet metal construction, OSHA type. 2. Motor and Drive Cover: a. Factory fabricated, OSHA type. b. Sheet metal construction, same material as fan housing. C. Vented, openings sufficient size for proper motor cooling. d. Fan speed controller. 3. Gravity Backdraft Damper: Galvanized steel frame, aluminum blades,brass pivot pins, neoprene seals on damper blade edges, gravity operation, and adjustable counterweight. 4. Motorized Damper: Galvanized steel frame, aluminum blades, neoprene seals on damper blade edges, 120V operator. 5. Insulated Housing: Fiberglass insulation, 1-inch thick,neoprene coated, foil faced, on interior of housing. 6. Filter Box: a. Refer to Article Filter Housings. b. Attached to fan inlet. HVAC Fans 233400 - 5 c. Box construction to match fan housing. d. Integral duct collars. e. Access Doors: Hinged and latched. £ Filter Media: 1-inch [aluminum wire mesh, pleated disposable type. 7. Inlet Screen: Removable 1-inch mesh screen, aluminum construction, overexposed inlets. 8. Single Side Discharge: Package consisting of side duct connection collar and rear-discharge blank-off panel. 9. Dual Side Discharge: Package consisting of side duct connection collars and rear-discharge blank-off panel. 10. Bearing Lubrication Lines: a. Extended to outside of fan housing. b. Terminate with zerk fittings. 11. Corrosion Protection Coating: a. Provide factory-applied corrosion protection coating on the following: 1) Wheel. 2) Housing. 3) Accessories. 4) Interior surfaces in contact with airstream. b. Coating system shall be as scheduled in fan Equipment Schedule, and shall be in accordance with Article Corrosion Protection Coating. c. Coating system shall be in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. F. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck 2. Loren Cook 3. Hartzell 2.4 WALL FAN, CENTRIFUGAL A. General: 1. Factory-assembled centrifugal wall fan;including housing, fan wheel,drive assembly,motor and accessories. 2. Bearing AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. B. Housing: 1. Construction: Spun-formed aluminum, minimum 16-gauge marine alloy. 2. Windband: Finish with rolled bead. 3. Cap: Motor access via quick release latches. 4. Motor completely sealed from exhaust air stream. 5. Motor cooling via air breather tubes. 6. Integral conduit chase for wiring. 7. Fan Inlet: a. Full inlet cone of aluminum construction. b. Match inlet shroud. 8. Wall Flange: Aluminum construction, with prepunched key slot holes. C. Fan Wheels: 1. Aluminum construction, backward inclined centrifugal, nonoverloading type. 2. Machined, cast aluminum hub. HVAC Fans 23 34 00 - 6 3. Matched to deep spun inlet venturi. D. Shaft, Bearings, Drive: 1. Shaft: a. Turned, ground, and polished carbon steel. b. Keyed for sheave installation. c. Zinc-phosphate coated and oil emulsion-dipped. 2. Bearings: a. Grease lubricated, precision antifriction ball, self-aligning, pillow block style. b. Selected for average life (ABMA 9 Lso) of not less than 200,000 hours operation at maximum cataloged operating speed. c. Terminate with zerk fittings. 3. Drives: a. In accordance with Paragraph Fan Drives. b. Factory set to specified fan revolutions per minute. c. Type: Belt or direct, as indicated in Equipment Schedule. E. Accessories: Provide as scheduled in Equipment Schedule. F. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck 2. Loren Cook 3. Hartzell 2.5 CORROSION PROTECTION COATING A. General: 1. Factory-applied corrosion protection coating for application to fan components and accessories,where required by this section. 2. Quality Control: a. Verify dry film thickness before final baking. b. Finished coating system shall be free from voids, checks, cracks, and blisters. 3. Surface Cleaning: Clean parts to be coated as follows: a. Immerse parts in heated cleaning solution to remove lubricants, machining oils, and residual factory contamination. b. Follow with immersion in potable water bath to neutralize and remove cleaning solution. c. Chemical Pretreatment: Immerse parts in heated chemical solution, iron phosphate for steel, clear/yellow chromate for aluminum. B. Refer to Fan Schedule for coating requirement. 2.6 MOTORS A. General: 1. Fan motors shall comply with provisions of Section 26 05 19,Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 2. Provide integral self-resetting overload protection on single-phase motors. 3. Motors for fans specified for use with variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty type. HVAC Fans 233400 - 7 4. Motors shall not operate into service factor in any case. B. Motor requirements shall be as follows, unless designated otherwise on Equipment Schedule: 1. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily. 2. Winding Thermal Protection: None. 3. Space Heater: No. 4. Number of Speeds: Single. 5. Number of Windings: One. 6. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficient. 7. Shaft Type: Solid, carbon steel. 8. Mounting: As required for fan arrangement. 9. Service Factor: 1.15. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plates: Furnish 16-gauge Type 316 stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component and control panel in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 1/4-inch high engraved block type black enamel filled equipment identification number and letters indicated in this Specification [and as shown on Drawings. B. Lifting Lugs: Furnish suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Fan shall operate at single stable point as indicated by fan curve. Fans having two potential operating points are not acceptable. 2. Fan and motor combination shall be capable of delivering 110 percent of scheduled air quantity and static pressure. Motor shall not operate into motor service factor in any listed case. 3. Consider drive efficiency in motor selection according to manufacturer's published recommendation or according to AMCA 203, Appendix L. B. Testing Provisions: 1. Provide tachometer access holes large enough to accept standard tachometer drive shaft. 2. Center punch fan shaft to accommodate tachometer readings. C. Acoustical Levels: 1. Perform noise tests in accordance with AMCA 300 and AMCA 301. 2. Fan sound power levels (dB,Reference 10-12 Watts) shall be no greater than scheduled values. D. Balancing: 1. Unless noted otherwise, each fan wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ASA 52.19 Grade G6.3. 2. Fans controlled by variable frequency drives shall be dynamically balanced at speeds 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of design revolutions per minute. HVAC Fans 1 23 34 00 - 8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fans level and plumb. B. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with Type 316 stainless steel hardware. C. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. D. Scroll Drains: Pipe drain connection through running trap to floor drain. E. Labeling: 1. Label fans in accordance with Article Accessories. 2. Mark exhaust fans serving fume hoods with arrows to indicate proper direction of rotation, in accordance with NFPA 45. F. Service Access: Locate units to provide access spaces required for motor, drive, bearing servicing, and fan shaft removal. G. Equipment Support and Restraints: 1. Install floor-mounted units on concrete bases designed to withstand,without damage to equipment,the seismic force required by code. 2. Secure vibration controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base. 3. Seismic Restraint Snubbers: Install with sufficient clearance so unit isolators are not restricted for proper free isolation but do limit movement in all directions. H. Connections: 1. Refer to Section 23 31 00, Ductwork and Accessories. 2. Isolate duct connections to fans. 3. Install ductwork adjacent to fans to allow proper service and maintenance. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Tests: 1. Verify blocking and bracing used during shipping are removed. 2. Verify fan is secure on mountings and supporting devices, and connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. 3. Verify proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 4. Verify cleaning and adjusting are complete. 5. Disconnect fan drive from motor; verify proper motor rotation direction and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. 6. Reconnect fan drive system; align and adjust belts and install belt guards. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork are in fully open position. 1 B. Performance Tests: HVAC Fans 23 34 00 - 9 1. Starting Procedures: a. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated revolutions per minute. b. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 2. Operational Test: a. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. b. Repair or replace malfunctioning units;retest as specified after repairs or replacement is made. c. Test and adjust control safeties. d. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at site or classroom designated by Owner for minimum person-days listed below,travel time excluded: 1. Two person-days for installation assistance and inspection. 2. Two person-days for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. Two person-days for pre-startup classroom or site training. 4. Two person-days for facility startup. 5. Two person-days for post-startup training of Owner's personnel. 6. Training shall not commence until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been reviewed by Owner. B. Refer Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Lubricate bearings. D. Balancing: 1. Perform air system balancing as specified in Section 23 05 93, Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 2. Replace fan and motor sheaves as required to achieve design airflow. 3.5 CLEANING A. After completing system installation,including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes. B. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturers' written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet. 1 END OF SECTION HVAC Fans 23 34 00 - 10 3 S GTION 23 94 nn DART 1 GENERAL "FE"NGES rzA. The following;s list of stand ds..,L.;,.1.may be -eF e,-eed i this seetion: } Ai,- !`.,.-..J;r;..,-.;,-.,, Heating,and Re „ .,,-. T,�sr;t„ o(A LID I). !1 G'.,,-ee > > t; r 4 1 o 2. , Method foF Sound Testing of Fans. �. z4ieiEm3 vCvcyviire-&tii3g,cerrg@ratiii•,and Aif G,•� a;ti0===="=g�irgl�t@@�� . 4. . fl. E84,S candy d Test Mtithed for-Sufi36o-Buffing Cha faetefist}Esof Building Matefials. 5. 7. L,..re.-,..,,r;ona Qtn,..,1nv,1n!h-g,,n;z.,r;.,n(ISO)! 900 Quality 1,Am,,,re,-.-en 8. Conditioning Systeffis. 9. Geeling . 1�LL'TT�TTa 1. J. 5. 6. 1D. 7. LED: Light t Emitting Diode. 10. 11. SPS Single Pole, Single Thfow. 12. . 13. tAll Tnt.a-yi,lo6 4.3 CT TBMIT-TAT C 1. Shop Dfawiflg-si 2. > tive > > and > ifielttde ht ef > and ejeetfieal , b. DehttmiElitieatiaiipaekagedaifhatidlitigttiiitAl4U 4. Complete per-f-ofmanee data that indieates fitil eomplifflee with Speeifieations: a. iaeltide F v, sound power level data (tyf 10 watts t 1 2watts) 4 design vbased onAWAe Setup No. 4. n d t; s G Faetoi:y dip applied p ateetiye e .,t;,..,..,.,-orl et rl.,r., 1 Seis ie,, ,.1.,.,age.,,-.,J b-aei- g,.,,lett„t; ., ,-o,J by Seetio 01 89 15, 2. e • 4. , na,.iwe re Data. 6. cr a guafa+ltees. , labeled.B. Unit shail be fated(when ffiatehedwith appfepfia4e etitdoefidnit)per-AHRI 210,1240. G. Units shall be eei4ified by UL and GSA,aind shall be UL of ET-h listed and it r",.,.1ing 4 ,-,ti.e ,nee,-„te,l; ,-1.,fiee with A 4R I testing,.,,-,,,.e,1,,,es D. 1.5 SPECIAL G T A R 0TTE1~' ,with Ownef named as 9 B. Speeial gua-Fantee shall pfovide for-eeffeetion, OF a�the option of Owner-,removal aq 1.6 EXTRA BAATCR1Ai Q 4CGtit Fiftefs C',.v..;,,1 tools ,-o,l to Maintain, One, ploto set for-eaeh,life-o,.t size disman B. Del;.,o,-. . i,-. ., ..,4.,neew44 Seet;o„n 016100, ,�,Gofi. o D,-..,1 et Ro,,,,;.-ome.�t� DART 2 DR OD TGT-S 2.1 GENERA ...., CQA .,,,.d NF-R A 755 ffi,tl-eds 2.2 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES CQ A. Refef to Df&wiiigs. 23 4�Ai4 00 3 DEHUMIDIFIER,PACKAGED DX AIR H AND NG tWIT A 2. . b. €ter. C. Matef. d. Reeipfeeating Of Sefall eampfessef, e. Reffigefan4 speeialties. f. GOPAfols. 3. Contained; a eathe.-...-,,,,feasing. 4. Beafing Uh labe, 6. Unit shall be designed to eoiifofffi to ETh of GSA standaMs. 7. (oils shall be,rr of GSA listed, 8. . 9. Refr4gefflfi-t Pi-pe: T- ,Te r r,.,.pe fl. „I 60ate,,f v o e f 4ie �. I I-Mno,,�hAll hR, Wifed,Piped,Pr-eehafged wi th 11. . B. /~r.l.,iiie4. 1. C,,,.pot4ed, stool full lefig4,,mounfling F 4s 2. it Opefation. 3. 4. a. Bases! ,6 gatige 00625;r b. C. Aeeess Page1s20 ga}tge(0.034 8 ink fiber-glass with an R value ef 4.2. 6. . 4. Unit base pan shall be petifed with ffiiniffitiffi 1,14 ineh het asphalt(taf)te pfevew Steel EffeffS. D. Paifft Finis . 1. ,b 23,84 00 4 3. . 4. MinitffHffi pait4 filffi thiekness of 1 ffiil. 5. . b. . 2)€ at s pefeepA pef AS 370. Salt+� . 4j--Salt"S Test! 3,T n�00 livi s per-�iz.rBrrr. C. i NI iffhibited life 4m;r;,f,,,,.. 7 yeafs he exposed to rl;,.t# E. u 1. 2. Eirw@r-ivrvEif:pdwS. Type 30T&t&iiR-iv&s'rsrt@@-Fromm—t@d— ith an epoxy finish th;# F. GeffiffessEff� ReafestmajO 4. . G. Evapefatof Gail: 1 n un r u 10 fated, 3. Ahiminum plate tiffs fofmed on multiple fows of seamless eappef tffbiftt- 4w 1. . 2. 3. haeh t:abe shail be an individually sealed heat pi-pe filled with a wefking fliiid eelifefffiing 23 84 00—5 4. Heat pipe tubes shall be wieked. The eapill&Fy wiek ef eaeh heat pipe shall-be an integfal 5. > • 7 T„l.os sh ll 1.v„ o l ten.,e?kp,,,,lo.l f;,-V.,ly be14Elifi`�Wb@ t6 ShOtjld6W-of @a�6h z. x avco oxxaxx vc xrrccxxarrxvaxx�cafpaxxaca,xxx xxxx� � j. Pfaiirarr. 1 f`,,,,I;n,. ,.,,;I ,1,-,,;,..pa*s shall be fab-;,., e f 304 stainless .,reel a-R n 1 r-effieval. 1 Ra,4• PI:OPvlly-t TO bajaJ 00d A44.1 .1;,-0C# .1,-;t,014 b5lf RR4 ter. 1„ ., ,t• �2�p1T 3. n„t,lOOF aif Shall be,1;S L,,fge 1 tl -,,,,,.b, a Viff!6O t0,1 f;,R g++afEl. L. Evapefatof Fan and Motof= od fn evapefat, 2. Fa IA4ieek r-axr-rrxxvcrs a. b. 1\R,.,,,..t, a solid tool ha#stippefted by sealed ball beafings. 3. . 4. Shaft! Dfiveii by adjustable belt dfi�,-e[fixed pitehl shea-ves eefifteeted te a 5. 1. . 3. hiqaid line so eneid. 4. c,,,.t;,.r line aeettmulatef. 23 84 00—v 5. G,.ndet se f eei4 6. . 7. . 8. High Went he&t evftpefatef eeil. 9. . 10. F l 11. . 13. Reffigefant pfessttfe sefviee valves. 1. ❑aetaf ,lst.,lloa 2. 1~- Galvanized eol,l r-olled steel sheet miniffvdm 20 gatige 0034 ;r � 3. HeatingElemea-tsi RT;..Lol - ;gr.,,,,.o,A; olo.Y..,o.�f� �. , bushings Lola ; eleme +s oi4 l.,-.,eke b. wife monel or-stainless steel tefminal ittgs and tefminal pi*s shall 4. . 5. nv—c^vini^vis 3. Gont- l +.ansf 4. Gowplete with tfansdiieefs,thefmostats, wif:ed in the eofitf a!panel. 6. . R. Maiittfaetufefs! 2. 3. 4. Addison. 23 84 00-7 2.4 > A CTnRv DIP APPLIED IED RR OTEGTIVR Gn A TN A. 1. . 2. . �. A pIpl ,00 tifig t,. ,;l 1 ofnro f;,,al faotol,jl'. mbly of o.,,,;p,v,o,-.t G at;,,.. not aeeeptable. if protective coating is applied to oeil after-faet0f�,ftSSeMbly Of B. Use „ of t e f6l l ew;...,r,.0 ting m.,te,ials• 1. 2. Epoxyepox-y etl^. 3. . 1. Gail hispeetiati and Sealftig-.- a. > 2. a. , • eleaBiRg S04140417. 3. Go ting A rpl;" tioni a. , heat o "t,ange „-faces b. Goil shall be eo pletely+:emoved ffem ment dwifigeea applieatioll. 4. . 5. Quality G,.,.Af01! Free f;-,.,.,voids,,.kee . efaeks and blisters. D. Geil finis1, shall ffi „t o eEeeed the felle ; ,-;t,,,-,,. 2. . 3. UNI inhibited life of ffiinitffaffi 10 yeafs when e"esed le stin in the State of F. Mantifaet-ufefs and Pfoddets! 1. . 2. AST T L'l e6tF9Fifi ine;Ele6tFo A . Genefal� 1. . 2. Gentfol voltage to indeef tinit fian shall be 24 volts. D. Motefs: Dom x. xv�xcx to S@etxoa sti 20 nn,Law Voltage AC--, etie4-4-Motor-s,fef ge4eval 2. Unless thee= ise Stated,eleetfie MotoFs shall ,,1„withthe fell b. Effeloc ! OT,D , rIeSs.peeif4ed etheFWtse. C. T-o.Fque Gliafaeter-ist eientteaeeeler-at en leads d. f. MialtispeedMotofs,Syftehfenetts Speed,Ndffibef ef Windiiigs: g. . h. . i. . j. SefvieeFaetef! 1.15. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment ldef4ifioa�ion Pla4es: Fttmis4 16 gamuge Type 3 16 stainless steel ideatif4eation p44e visible loeation. Plate shall bear-3,18 ineli high engt:a-ved bleek t�Te blae-k effa+Hel Alled B. Liffi*g Lugs: Fumisk suitably aRaehed for-e"ipmef4 assemblies and eewponeats weighing DART 2 EXECUTION 2 1 PiST A T T A TION ��rr�.n�-�-rnvr�r 2 nD 1rcTrnrr_ n44DrrEnNPr G f, un'nr B. Aif 14a-nd e fs. , r Writ„- +;or. > , ,;k +• , deh,,,. id fiea, ,,,,, , r;+ z. Test fof a eon-tifitious 3 hour-period without malfitneti 4. Adjust, a;f,units as neeessai=y and +es+ 5. Submit Festilts to Engineer, END o SECT-io N 23 4^� (l�r00 10 KWH ENGINEERING LLC TBPE# F-17606 3 AjE•OF SECTION 23 84 00 �� 5 Humidification Control Equipment "•'••'••• � XUEFEI FENG ............................... �l89274 � PART 1 GENERAL `'1 ��C NSE�•• •_� 1.1 REFERENCES �����5�� •AL"�� '� 0 A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Air-Conditioning,Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI): 410,Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. 2. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA): 300,Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 3. American Society of Heating,Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): a. 52.1, Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. b. 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers. c. 90.1 IP/SI, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B 117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. b. C423, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. c. D635, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning Plastics in a Horizontal Position. d. D2370, Standard Test Method for Tensile of Organic Coatings. e. D4060, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. f E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 6. Electrical Test Laboratories (ETL). 7. International Standards Organization(ISO): 9001, Quality Management Systems— Requirements. 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. b. 90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems. c. 255, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 9. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL). 10. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1995,UL Standard for Safety Heating and Cooling Equipment. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. The following is a list of abbreviations which may be used in this section: Humidity Control Equipment 23 84 00 - 1 1. AC: Air Conditioning. 2. COP: Coefficient of Performance. 3. DX: Direct Expansion. 4. EER: Energy Efficiency Ratio. 5. HP: Heat Pump. 6. 1R: Infrared. 7. LED: Light Emitting Diode. 8. OSA: Outside Air. 9. PSC: Permanent Split Capacitor. 10. PTAC: Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner. 11. SPST: Single Pole, Single Throw. 12. TXV: Thermostatic Expansion Valve. 13. UV: Ultraviolet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and data sheets, as required by Section 01 88 15,Anchorage and Bracing. B. Specifications, descriptive drawings, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature; include make, model, dimensions,weight of products, and electrical schematics, for the following equipment: a. De-humidifiction packaged air handling unit AHU-1. b. De-humidification packaged air handling unit AHU-2. 2. Manufacturer's standard finish color selection for enclosure finishes. 3. Complete performance data that indicates full compliance with Specifications: a. Include fan sound power level data(ref. 10 watts to 12 watts) at design operating point,based on AMCA 300, Setup No. 1. b. Include heating and cooling performance data at design operating conditions. 4. Factory protective coating product data. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Anchorage and Bracing. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Product Requirements, for the air-conditioning units and motors. 3. Recommended procedures for protection and handling of equipment and materials prior to installation. 4. Detailed information on structural,mechanical, electrical, or other modifications necessary to adapt the arrangement or details shown to equipment furnished. 5. Operation and maintenance data as specified in Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 6. Special guarantees. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Heating and Cooling Equipment: Minimum operating efficiencies, defined as COP and EER, as specified in ASHRAE 90.1. Humidity Control Equipment 23 84 00 - 2 B. Unit shall be rated(when matched with appropriate outdoor unit) per AHRI 210/240. C. Units shall be certified by UL and CSA, and shall be UL or ETL listed and labeled. D. Cooling performance rated in accordance with AHRI testing procedures. 1.5 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Furnish manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty,with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. B. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of Owner,removal and replacement of the Work specified in this Specification found defective during a period of 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. C. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in the General Conditions. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts andspecial tools: Item Quantity Filters Four complete sets per unit Special tools required to maintain or One complete set for each different size dismantle unit B. Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Specified components of this section,including insulation, facings, mastics, and adhesives shall have fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread without evidence of continued progressive combustion, and 50 for smoke developed,as per test conducted in accordance with ASTM E84 and NFPA 255 methods. 2.2 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES A. Refer to Drawings. 2.3 DEHUMIDIFIER, PACKAGED DX AIR HANDLING UNIT A. General: 1. Consisting of the following components: a. Condenser and evaporator coils. b. Fan. Humidity Control Equipment 23 84 00 - 3 c. Motor. d. Reciprocating or scroll compressor. e. Refrigerant specialties. f. Electrical heat. g. Wrap-around heat pipe. h. Controls. 2. Contained in a weatherproof casing. 3. Bearing UL label. 4. Unit shall be designed to conform to ETL or CSA standards. 5. Coils shall be UL or CSA listed. 6. Fan motor and compressor shall be UL or CSA listed. 7. Refrigerant Pipe: Type L Copper; vinyl coated for corrosion prevention. 8. Units shall be completely factory assembled,wired,piped,precharged with R-45413, and fully tested in all modes of operation. 9. Controls shall be factory tested, adjusted and preset to design conditions. 10. Test report shall be available on request. Engineer reserves the right to witness factory performance testing. 11. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years' experience in the production of dehumidification systems. 12. Substitution of any product other than that specified shall ensure no deviation below the stated capacities, air flow rate,heat transfer rate, filtration efficiency and air mixing quality.Power requirements shall not be exceeded, and where specifically defined, sound power levels shall not be exceeded. B. Cabinet: 1. Supported on steel full-length mounting rails. 2. Units shall be provided with access doors to the following components: fans,motors, filters, dampers and operators, access plenums,humidifiers/wet cells, electrical control panels and burner/compressor compartments. Access doors shall be as large as practical for easy access. Screwed wall panel access will not be acceptable for the above listed components. 3. The unit shall be built to meet Risk Category 11 and Inland I standards,withstanding wind speeds of up to 155 MPH. Unit casing shall be constructed of G-90 galvanized steel with a minimum gauge of 18. The entire unit shall be provided with a 22-gauge satin coat galvanized metal liner over insulated areas with two component epoxy finish. 4. Interior of the indoor side shall be thermally insulated with 2-inch-thick 3 lb/O density coated insulation. Drain pans and all floor areas shall be insulated on the underside. 5. All walls,roofs, and floors shall be of formed construction with at least two breaks at each joint. Joints shall be secured by sheet metal screws or pop rivets. Wall and floor Joints shall be broken in and on all outdoor units roof joints broken out(exposed) for rigidity. All joints shall be caulked with a water-resistant sealant. 6. Paint entire cabinet internally and externally. All unprotected metal and welds shall be factory coated. ase: 1. Unit base pan shall be poured with minimum 1/4-inch hot asphalt(tar)to prevent rain or condensate from contacting steel on bottom of base pan. 2. Asphalt shall be poured prior to final factory assembly to assure protection of steel areas. Humidity Control Equipment 23 84 00 - 4 D. Paint Finish: 1. Coating shall be factory applied by the equipment manufacturer/supplier. If this is not possible, coating shall be applied by a specialty shop under contract to the equipment manufacturer/supplier. After coating application is completed, the equipment manufacturer/supplier shall test the equipment and certify system operation prior to releasing the equipment to the job site. 2. Finish coatings shall be of Heresite ES606 baked phenolic for all exposed surfaces. The coating shall exhibit exceptional durability and performance,meeting or exceeding the following standards: Salt spray resistance per ASTM B 117 with a minimum of 6,000 hours and cyclic offshore corrosion resistance per ISO 12944-9 with a minimum of4,200 hours. UV resistance shall meet ASTM D4587 with a minimum of 5,000 hours and UV-C resistance for 1,500 hours. Water resistance under controlled condensation per ASTM D4585 shall be at least 5,000 hours. The coating shall withstand over 100 acetone double rubs per ASTM D5402, with a dry film thickness between 1.0 and 1.5 mils (25-38 microns). Adhesion shall achieve a rating of 4B-5B per ASTM D3359, and flexibility shall pass a'/4-inch mandrel bend test per ASTM D522. Pencil hardness shall range from 2H to 4H per ASTM D3363. Heat transfer reduction shall be less than 1% at the recommended dry film thickness, and the coating shall maintain 4B-5B adhesion after 5 cycles of dry heat exposure at 350°F (177°C) for 4 hours. 1. Exterior Nuts, Bolts and Washers: Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Exterior Screws: Type 304 stainless steel or coated with an epoxy finish that meets or exceeds minimum 4,000-hour salt spray test per ASTM B 117. F. Compressor: 1. Hermetic type, scroll type suction gas cooled,with hot gas bypass capacity reduction, suitable for refrigerant R-454B, equipped with internal thermal protection, and resilient type external mounting. 2. Provide with crankcase heaters and motors equipped with internal overheat-overload protection. 3. Compressor manufacturer shall have a wholesale outlet for replacement parts in nearest major city. 4. Warranty: 5 years. G. Evaporator Coil: 1. AHRI 410 rated. 2. Designed for heavy moisture removal. 3. Aluminum plate fins formed on multiple rows of seamless copper tubing arranged in a staggered tube configuration. 4. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded, firmly bonding tube to shoulder of each fin. 5. Provide Heresite P-413 a pure phenolic with plasticizers thermosetting resinous coating to protect the coils against exposure to corrosive air streams. The process shall be accomplished by a multiple coat application resulting in complete coating coverage of the fins,tubes, headers, and casing. Salt spray tested to ASTM B-I 17 standards. H. Wrap-Around Heat Pipe 1. The heat recovery device shall be a wrap-around heat pipe heat exchanger. Humidity Control Equipment 238400 - 5 2. The heat exchanger core shall be constructed of seamless aluminum tubes permanently expanded into fins. The secondary surface shall be continuous plate aluminum fins of corrugated design to produce maximum heat transfer efficiency and reduce the frost threshold of the unit. 3. Each tube shall be an individually sealed heat pipe filled with a working fluid conforming to the Mechanical Refrigeration Code. 4. Heat pipe tubes shall be wicked. The capillary wick of each heat pipe shall be an integral part of the inner wall of the tube to provide a completely wetted surface for maximum heat pipe capacity with minimum heat transfer resistance. 5. Provide Heresite P-413 a pure phenolic with plasticizers thermosetting resinous coating to protect the coils against exposure to corrosive air streams. The process shall be accomplished by a multiple coat application resulting in complete coating coverage of the fins,tubes,headers and casing. Saltspray tested to ASTM B-117 standards. 1. Condenser Coil: 1. Aluminum plate fins formed on multiple rows of seamless copper tubing arranged in a staggered tube configuration. 2. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded, firmly bonding tube to shoulder of each fin. 3. Provide Heresite P-413 a pure phenolic with plasticizers thermosetting resinous coating to protect the coils against exposure to corrosive air streams. The process shall be 1 accomplished by a multiple coat application resulting in complete coating coverage of the fins, tubes, headers, and casing. Salt spray tested to ASTM B-117 standards. ram an: 1. Cooling coil drain pans shall be fabricated of 304 stainless steel and are an integral part of the floor paneling, a minimum of 2" deep with welded corners. 2. Drain pans shall extend a minimum of 6" downstream of coil face and be provided with a 1 Yz" S.S. M.P.T. drain connection. 3. All cooling coil drain pans shall have a fast pan and be sloped and pitched such that there is no standing water. 4. Intermediate drain pans shall be provided where required for effective moisture removal. K. Condenser Fan and Motor: 1. Fan: Propeller type, electronically balanced and direct-driven by fan motor. 2. Motor: Inherent protection, with sealed ball bearings that do not require lubrication. 3. Outdoor air shall be discharged through a vinyl coated fan guard. L. Evaporator Fan and Motor: 1. Forward curved, statically and dynamically balanced,DIDW centrifugal fan to be used for evaporator air. 2. Fan Wheels: a. Galvanized or galvalume steel. b. Mount on a solid steel shaft supported by sealed ball bearings. 3. Fan Housing: Epoxy-coated steel. 4. Shaft: Driven by adjustable belt drive [fixed pitch] sheaves connected to a 1,725 rpm motor with sealed ball bearings. 5. Sealed bearings on both the fan and motor shall not require lubrication. M.Refrigerant Circuit: Humidity Control Equipment 23 84 00 - 6 1. Spring mounted hermetic compressor. 2. Crankcase heater. 3. Liquid line solenoid. 4. Suction line accumulator. 5. Condenser coil. 6. Rubber mounted upflow propeller condenser fans. 7. Connections for refrigerant piping and specialties. 8. High latent heat evaporator coil. 9. Thermal expansion valve. 10. Filter drier. 11. Sight glass moisture indicator. 12. Suction line accumulator. 13. Refrigerant pressure service valves. N. Electric Heater: 1. Factory installed. 2. Frame: Galvanized cold-rolled steel sheet,minimum 20-gauge (0.0348 in.), including a protective screen. 3. Heating Elements: a. Nickel-chromium resistance wire elements, supported on ceramic bushings held in element support brackets. b. Crimped to morsel or stainless steel terminal lugs and terminal pins shall include a protective screen. 4. Provide built-in controls with integral electric heater and prewired components: contactors, fused control transformer,pressure differential switch,power supply terminals, control terminals, thermal overheat protection, and maximum of three ON/OFF stages. O. Control Panel 1. UL listed and labeled control panel shall be mounted to the unit for main incoming power,power distribution and controls complete with transducers, fuses, control power transformer,motor starters,thermostats,unit on/off switch,terminal strips for all wiring originating or terminating at the panel, and electrical control circuit factory pre-wired in the control panel. 2. Control panels shall be NEMA 4X. 3. The control power transformer shall be powered from the single point electrical connection to the unit. 4. The dehumidifier shall include a digital controller to start the supply fan and control the refrigeration cycle to maintain the cooling coil leaving air dew point temperature and dry bulb temperature. 5. The control panel shall include terminal strip for remote controls. 6. Compressor,fan, and fan motor contactors or starters with thermal protection(auto-reset) on all inductive loads. 7. Overload protection in each leg. 8. Compressor winding and overheat protection. 9. Hot gas bypass valve and compressor unloader shall provide capacity modulation of the first-stage cooling coil. Humidity Control Equipment 23 84 00 - 7 10. Refrigerant controls shall include a high pressure control(manual-reset),low pressure control(auto-reset),head pressure control, field adjustable refrigerant system lock-out, and compressor antishort cycle timer. P. Wiring 1. Wiring shall be installed in accordance with UL electrical standards, and shall be in accordance with NFPA 70—National Electrical Code. All components used shall be UL listed. All wiring shall be routed in rigid galvanized steel conduit raceway. Flexible conduit connections to devices shall be made with liquidtight flexible non-metallic conduit and non-metallic fittings. Exposed wiring is not acceptable. Q. Filters: 1. The unit casing shall include removable filters mounted on tracks and accessible through panels or doors. Filters shall be constructed of a non-woven media held in a rigid frame. Filter mounting partitions shall be sealed to eliminate air bypass. Filters shall be UL900 classified, 2-inch-deep disposable type, and MERV 8 per ASHRAE 52.2. 2%FS. The gauge range shall be approximately 3 times the clean filter pressure drop. The gauge shall be equal to Dwyer Series 2000. R. Accessories: Provide as scheduled in Equipment Schedule. S. Manufacturers: 1. Engineered Air. 2. Trane. 3. Daikin 4. Or approved equal. 2.4 FACTORY DIP-APPLIED PROTECTIVE COATING A. General: 1. Factory dip-applied protective coating for application to plate fin and tube coils. 2. Coil factory assembled and tested before coating application. 3. Coating suitable for coils with maximum 30 fins per inch fin density. Bridging of product across coil fins is unacceptable. 4. After application and proper curing,product shall endure bending of coil assembly in standard manufacturing process without cracking. 5. Apply coating to coil before final factory assembly of equipment. Coating process that requires disassembly of equipment for removal of coil to be coated is not acceptable. If protective coating is applied to coil after factory assembly of equipment, cost for shipping unit to coating factory, disassembly, coating process,reassembly, and delivery to Site shall be borne by Contractor. B. Coating Process: 1. Coil Inspection and Sealing: a. Inspect coil for open tubes, headers, capillary tubes; repair as necessary. b. Fill with dry nitrogen, cap and seal,to prevent contamination of internal coil surfaces with cleaning or coating solutions. 2. Coil Cleaning: Humidity Control Equipment 238400 - 8 a. Immerse coil in heated alkaline cleaning solution to remove lubricants,machining oils, and residual factory contamination. b. Followed with immersion in potable water bath to neutralize and remove cleaning solution. 3. Coating Application: a. Immerse coil assembly in coating bath, including headers, casing, and heat exchange surfaces. b. Coil shall be completely removed from equipment during coating application. C. Spray-on coatings are not acceptable. 4. Curing: Oven baked at a metal temperature not to exceed 400 degrees F. 5. Quality Control: Free from voids, checks, cracks and blisters. C. Coil finish shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Salt Spray Test: In accordance with ASTM B 117,minimum 3,000-hour duration,with no fin corrosion or degradation. 2. Thermal Efficiency: Loss no greater than 1 percent after coating application. 3. UV inhibited life of minimum 10 years when exposed to sun in the State of Florida. 1 2.5 ELECTRICAL A. General: 1. Units shall include high and low voltage terminal block connections. 2. Control voltage to indoor unit fan shall be 24 volts. 3. Motor Starters/Contactors: Factory installed with equipment, unless otherwise noted. 4. Disconnects: Factory installed nonfused disconnects or circuit breakers on each unit, unless otherwise noted. B. Motors: 1. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 2. Unless otherwise stated, electric motors shall comply with the following: a. Voltage,Phase, Horsepower, Synchronous Speed: Refer to Equipment Schedule for motor driven equipment. b. Enclosure: ODP, unless specified otherwise. c. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily. d. Winding Thermal Protection: Manufacturer's standard. e. Space Heater: Manufacturer's standard. f. Multispeed Motors, Synchronous Speed,Number of Windings: Manufacturer's standard. g. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficient. h. Shaft Type: Solid, carbon steel. i. Mounting: As required for fan arrangement. j. Service Factor: 1.15. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plates: Furnish 16-gauge Type 316 stainless steel identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component and control panel in a readily Humidity Control Equipment 23 84 00 - 9 visible location.Plate shall bear 3/8-inch high engraved block type black enamel filled equipment identification number and letters indicated in this Specification and as shown on the Drawings. B. Lifting Lugs: Furnish suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Filters: 1. Install a complete set of filters in each unit before operating, and leave in place during startup and testing to keep equipment and ductwork clean. 2. Install a complete set of clean filters at the time of final cleaning as defined in Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Air System Balancing: As specified in Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. B. Air Handlers: 1. Lubricate nonsealed bearings prior to startup. 2. Do not operate units until filters are installed. If operated without filters,completely clean coils and interior of units. C. Vibration: 1. Statically and dynamically balance fan equipment. 2. Perform field testing on rotating equipment, as specified in Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC, to determine actual operating vibration. 3. If vibration limits described therein are exceeded,rebalance equipment in-place,if directed by Engineer,until design tolerances are met. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's representative at site in accordance with Section 0143 33, Manufacturers' Field Services,for installation assistance,inspection and certification of proper installation, equipment testing, startup assistance, and training of Owner's personnel for specified equipment. B. Dehumidification manufacturer's representative shall conduct a performance test on the dehumidification unit. 1. Perform under active and approval simulated operating conditions. 2. Test for a continuous 3-hour period without malfunction. 3. Test Log: Upon completion of test, record, and report results. 4. Adjust or modify units as necessary and retest. 5. Submit results to Engineer. Humidity Control Equipment 23 84 00 - 10 END OF SECTION Humidity Control Equipment 23 84 00 - 11 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL- GENERAL PROVISIONS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.The CONTRACTOR shall include furnishing of all labor,tools,testing, materials,and equipment necessary to install,test and provide a completed operational electrical system in accordance with the National Electrical Code(NEC)as shown on drawings and as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 26 Electrical specifications. B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted and furnished as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. D.The work shall include furnishing,installing,and testing the equipment and materials detailed in each Section of Division 26. E. The work shall include furnishing and installing the following: 1. Conduit,cables,wire and field connections for all motors, motor controllers, power panels,control devices,control panels and electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions.The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate his construction schedule and electrical interface with the supplier of electrical equipment specified under other Divisions. 2. Conduit,cables,wiring and terminations for all field-mounted instruments furnished and mounted under other Divisions, including process instrumentation primary elements,transmitters, local indicators,and control panels. Lightning and surge protection equipment wiring at process instrumentation transmitters. Install vendor-furnished cables specified under other Divisions. 3. A complete raceway system for the Data Cables and specialty cable systems, including those furnished under other Divisions. Install the Data Cables and other specialty cable systems, in accordance with the system manufacturer's installation instructions. Review the raceway layout, prior to installation,with the Process Control System supplier and the cable manufacturer for raceway compatibility with the systems and materials being furnished.Where redundant/multiple cables(or wire)are furnished, install the cables(or wire) in separate raceways. 4. Modifications to existing control systems including installation of auxiliary motor starter contacts, relays,switches,etc.,as required to provide the control functions or inputs as shown on the Drawings. Obtain the existing equipment shop drawings from the OWNER,or information not shown on existing Drawings, before attempting to make any modifications to the existing equipment wiring.Verify all existing wiring and connections for correctness before making any modifications. If record drawings are not available,trace all circuits in the field and develop the wiring diagrams necessary for completion of the work. Document all changes made to the wiring diagrams and return a marked-up set of Record Drawings to the OWNER after the work is complete. 5. Coordinate the sequence of demolition with the sequence of construction to maintain plant operation in each area. Remove and demolish equipment and materials in such a sequence that the existing and proposed plant will function properly with no disruption of treatment. 6. Make modifications to existing switchboards and panelboards including installation of circuit breakers,fuses,terminals, etc., or disconnection of circuits as required to provide the power supplies to new and existing equipment to maintain the plant in operation. 7. All bidders may be required to visit the site of the project, prior to submitting a bid,and satisfy themselves as to any question that they might have,relating to existing equipment,condition,or construction. ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-1 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or drawings,and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All raceways,power and control wiring,fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings,shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit Shop Drawings, in accordance with Division 1 requirements,for equipment, materials,and all other items furnished under each Section of Division 26,and as indicated in the individual specifications except where specifically stated otherwise. Partial submittals will not be accepted and will be returned without review. B. Submittals will not be accepted for Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. C. Each Section submittal shall be complete,contain all of the items listed in the Specification Section,and shall be clearly marked to indicate which items are applicable on each cut sheet page. The Submittal shall list any exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings,and the reason for such deviation. Shop drawings, not so checked and noted,will be returned without review. D.The CONTRACTOR shall check shop drawings for accuracy and contract requirements prior to submittal. Errors and omissions on approved shop drawings shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from the responsibility of providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings.Shop drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a statement indicating that the shop drawings conform to Specifications and Drawings.Shop Drawings shall be organized by Specification Section,with one Specification Section per transmittal. Each submittal shall be complete,contain all the items listed in the Specification Section, and shall be clearly marked to indicate which items are applicable on each cut sheet page.This statement shall also list all exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings.Shop drawings, not so checked and noted,will be returned without review. E. If, however, in the opinion of the CONTRACTOR,a hardship of equipment delay or delivery of a specific item would delay the project through no fault of the CONTRACTOR,the CONTRACTOR may request an early review of that equipment or material, clearly stating the reason for separate approval.The approval of such material or equipment must not be dependent upon the approval of other equipment or materials to be submitted later,such as the Power System Study, etc. F. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other trades. G. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No material shall be ordered or shop work started if shop drawings are marked "APPROVED AS NOTED CONFIRM", "APPROVED AS NOTED RESUBMIT",or"NOT APPROVED". H.At the time ofjobsite delivery of the equipment,the CONTRACTOR shall have an approved shop drawing in his possession for the OWNER's Inspector and OWNER's Engineer,for verification. I. Shop Drawings,0&M Manuals,and other documentation shall be submitted as listed in each of the Electrical Specification Sections. 1. Submit operations and maintenance data for equipment furnished under this Division. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include catalog data sheets,drawings, equipment lists,descriptions, parts lists,etc.,to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 2. 0&M Manuals shall include the following as a minimum: a. A comprehensive index. b. A complete"as built"or"record"set of approved shop drawings. ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-2 c. A complete list of the equipment supplied,including serial numbers,ranges,and pertinent data. d. A table listing the"as left"settings for all timing relays and alarm and trip set points. e. System schematic drawings"As-Built"or"Record",illustrating all components,piping and electric connections of the systems supplied under this Section. f. Complete parts list with stock numbers,including spare parts. g. Detailed service,maintenance and operation instructions for each item supplied. h. Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined,along with special calibration and test procedures. i. The operating instructions shall also incorporate a functional description of the entire system, with references to the system's schematic drawings and instructions. j. As specified for each Section requiring an O&M manual. J. In-Progress Conduit Schedule Status Report Submittals are Not Required. K. Record Drawings shall be promptly furnished when the equipment installation is complete.Payment will be withheld until Record Drawings have been furnished and approved.The drawings will be reviewed at that time by the ENGINEER and OWNER and will be corrected as necessary to represent the as-built condition at that time.A set of drawings will be kept in a central location until the entire project is completed and all Record Drawings submitted. L. CONTRACTOR shall submit an"as built"or"Record"drawing point-to-point instrumentation diagram where new instruments have been installed. M. Contractor shall submit an"as built"point-to-point instrumentation diagram where new instruments have been installed. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Electric equipment, materials,and installation shall complywith the latest edition of the National Electrical Code(NFPA 70)and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Safety Code(NESC). 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 5. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 7. International Society of Automation (ISA). 8. Underwriters Laboratories(UL). 9. Factory Mutual(FM). 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE). B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards,the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply unless otherwise noted at the bid opening. C. All material and equipment for which a UL standard exists shall bear a UL label. No such material or equipment shall be brought onsite without the UL label affixed or with UL paperwork attached. D.All electrical equipment, including but not limited to switchboards, panelboards, and industrial control panels provided shall be field marked to warn qualified persons of potential electrical arc flash hazards, per NEC 110.16. ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-3 E. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and any referenced standard,or code of any technical society,organization,or association, the provisions of the Contract Documents will take precedence if they are more stringent or presumptively cause a higher level of performance. If there is any conflict or discrepancy between standard specifications,or codes of any technical society,organization,or association,or between Laws and Regulations,the higher performance requirement shall be binding on the CONTRACTOR, unless otherwise directed by the OWNER/ENGINEER. F. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents,the CONTRACTOR accepts the fact that compliance with the priority order specified shall not justify an increase in Contract Price or an extension in Contract Time, nor limit in any way the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to comply with all Laws and Regulations at all times. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE(NOT USED) 1.6 SERVICE AND METERING(NOT USED) 1.7 ENCLOSURE TYPES A. Unless otherwise specified herein,elsewhere in the specifications,or shown on the Drawings,electrical enclosures and associated installations shall have the following ratings: 1. NEMA 12 for dry,non-process,indoor above grade locations(i.e., HVAC areas including administration areas, laboratories,control rooms,electrical rooms,storage rooms). 2. NEMA 7/4X combination (and listed for use in the area classifications shown)for"Class I Div.1 Group D"and "Class I Div. 2 Group D" hazardous locations shown on the Drawings. 3. NEMA 4X,PVC or Fiberglass enclosures shall be used for Chlorine and Caustic Rooms. 4. NEMA 4X,304 stainless steel enclosures,suitable for corrosive areas and outdoor areas,shall be provided for all other locations on the project, unless Drawings indicate otherwise. 1.8 HAZARDOUS AREAS A. Equipment,materials,and installation in areas designated as hazardous on the Drawings shall comply with NEC Articles 500,501, 502,503 and 504. B. Equipment and materials installed in hazardous areas shall be UL listed for the appropriate hazardous area classification. 1.9 CODES,INSPECTION AND FEES A. Equipment,materials,and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections. 1.10 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT A. Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas within the building structures. B. The equipment shall be always kept upright during storage and handling.When equipment must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment in a manner that tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment. 1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS A.As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of Project Contract Drawings, hereinafter called the"Record Drawings".The Record Drawings and Specifications shall be kept up to date throughout the project. B. Record Drawings shall accurately show the installed condition of the following items: 1. Raceways and pullboxes. ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-4 2. Conductor sizes. 3. Conduit Seals color coded to indicate sealed. 4. Panel Schedule(s). 5. Control Wiring Diagram(s). 6. Underground raceway and ductbank routing. 7. Plan view,sizes and locations of panelboards. C. The CONTRACTOR'S retainage may not be paid until the Record Drawings have been furnished to the OWNER and ENGINEER. 1.12 EQUIPMENT INTERCONNECTIONS A. Review shop drawings of equipment furnished under other related Divisions and prepare coordinated wiring interconnection diagrams or wiring tables.Submit copies of wiring diagrams or tables with Record Drawings. B. Furnish and install all equipment interconnections after approval of submittal. 1.13 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment shall be new,except where specifically identified on the Drawings to be re used. B. The CONTRACTOR shall not bring onsite material or equipment from a manufacturer not submitted and approved for this project. Use of any such material or equipment will be rejected, removed,and replaced by the CONTRACTOR,with the approved material and equipment at his own expense. C. Material and equipment shall be UL listed,where such listing exists. D.The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all material, product,equipment, and workmanship being furnished by him for the duration of the project. He shall replace the equipment if it does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. E. All hardware for mounting boxes and equipment,such as racks, brackets,washers,springs, nuts,etc., shall be 316 stainless steel. 1.14 JOBSITE DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior tojobsite delivery,the CONTRACTOR shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the OWNER/ENGINEER upon delivery of the equipment,an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment,or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted. B. Equipment and materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and as specified in the individual Specification Sections. 1.15 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Provide warranty per Division 01,Warranties and Bonds,and as specified herein. B. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for the period specified in Division 01, Warranties and Bonds, from the date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER. 1.16 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify equipment(disconnect switches,separately mounted motor starters, control stations, etc.) furnished under Division 26 with the name of the equipment it serves. Motor control centers,control panels,panelboards,switchboards,switchgear,junction or terminal boxes,transfer switches,etc.,shall have nameplate designations as shown on the Drawings. ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-5 B. Reference specification Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems for additional information and requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Condition:Materials and equipment provided under these Specifications shall be new products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment. B. NEC and UL:Products must conform to requirements of the National Electrical Code.Where Underwriters Laboratories have set standards, listed products,and issued labels, products used must be listed and labeled by UL. C. Space Limitations:Equipment selected must conform to the facility features and must be coordinated with them. Do not provide equipment which will not suit arrangement and space limitations. D. Factory Finish: Equipment must be delivered with a hard surface,factory-applied finish so that no additional field painting is required. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A.The Drawings are not intended to show exact locations of conduit runs.Coordinate the conduit installation with other trades,facility work areas,and the actual supplied equipment. B. Unless otherwise approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER,conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed. C. Where circuits are shown as "home-runs",all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. Home-run circuits may be combined with like circuits(same voltage and load type)to reduce number of conduits;however,all derating and resizing of the conductors will be by CONTRACTOR and must meet NEC code and authority having jurisdiction requirements. D. Except where dimensions are shown,the locations of equipment,fixtures, outlets,and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER during construction.Obtain information relevant to the placing of electrical work and, in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the OWNER/ENGINEER and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner. E. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings or other installation details. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, all lighting, and other electrical systems shown. F. The redesign of electrical or mechanical work which is required due to the CONTRACTOR's use of a pre- approved alternate item,arrangement of equipment and/or layout other than specified herein,shall be done by the CONTRACTOR at his/her own expense. Re-design and detailed plans shall be submitted to the OWNER/ENGINEER for approval. No additional compensation will be provided for changes in the work,either his/her own or others, caused by such redesign. G. Raceways and conductors for lighting,switches, receptacles,and other miscellaneous low voltage power and signal systems as specified are not shown on the Drawings. Raceways and conductors shall be provided as required for a complete operating system. Refer to riser diagrams for signal system wiring. Homeruns,as shown on the Drawings,are to assist the CONTRACTOR in identifying raceways to be run exposed and raceways to be run concealed. Raceways installed exposed shall be near the ceiling or along walls of the areas through which they pass and shall be routed to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts,cranes hoists, monorails,equipment hatches, doors,windows,etc. Raceways installed concealed shall be run above suspended ceilings or in partitions as required. ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-6 H.The CONTRACTOR shall install all conduit and wire for each PLC enclosure,VFD enclosure,and other devices where designated on the Drawings;hence,the conduit and wire as shown on the interconnect drawings and interface drawings may not necessarily be shown on the floor plans. I. Install conductors carrying low voltage signals(typically twisted shielded pair cables), intrinsically safe circuits and communication cables in raceways totally separate from all other raceways containing power or 120-volt control conductors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT PADS AND SUPPORTS A. Electrical equipment pads and supports,of concrete or steel including structural reinforcing and lighting pole foundations,are shown on the Drawings. B. No electrical equipment or raceways shall be attached to or supported from sheet metal walls. 3.3 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS A. Provide and place all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors,walls, partitions,etc. Locate all necessary slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured. B. Exact locations are required for stubbing-up and terminating underground conduits from grounding circuits and ductbanks. Obtain shop drawings and templates from equipment vendors or other subcontractors and locate the concealed conduits before the floor slab is poured. Where conductors are extended through the stubbed-up conduit(such as grounding conductors),make arrangement to support the conductors to protect against damage or being embedded into slab. C. Where setting drawings are not available in time to avoid delay in scheduled floor slab pours,the OWNER/ENGINEER may allow the installations of such conduit to be exposed provided exposed conduit does not cause a trip hazard or restrict overhead hoist/crane access. Requests for this deviation shall be submitted in writing with additional information pertaining to the cause of the deviation,including responsible parties. No additional compensation for such a change will be allowed. D.Seal all openings,sleeves,penetration,and slots as specified in Section 26 05 33.13 and 26 05 33.16. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Coordinate with other Divisions for cutting and patching. B. Core drill holes in concrete floors and walls as required.The CONTRACTOR shall obtain written permission from the OWNER/ENGINEER before core drilling any holes larger than 2 inches. Core drilling, cutting, or breaking out sections of any footer or foundation is prohibited. C. Install work at such time as to require the minimum amount of cutting and patching. D. Do not cutjoists,beams,girders,columns,or any other structural members. E. Cut opening only large enough to allow easy installation of the conduit. F. Patching shall be of the same kind and quality of material as was removed. G.The completed patching work shall restore the surface to its original appearance or better and shall include necessary painting or epoxy. H. Patching of waterproofed surfaces shall render the area of the patching completely waterproofed. I. Remove rubble and excess patching materials from the premises. J. When existing conduits are cut at the floor line of wall line,they shall be filled with grout of suitable patching material. K. No roof penetrations are to be made without request-in-writing and approval from OWNER/ENGINEER. 3.5 INSTALLATION A.Any work not installed according to the Drawings and Division 26 shall be subject to change as directed by the OWNER/ENGINEER. No extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes. ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-7 B. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other trades. C. Cooperation with trades of adjacent,related or affected materials or operations,and of trades performing continuations of this work under subsequent contracts, is considered a part of this work in order to effect timely and accurate placing of work and to bring together, in proper and correct sequence,the work of such trades. D.Work must be performed by workers skilled in their trade. E. Concealed Work:Conceal electrical work,raceways,and wire,inside walls,under floors,inside chases, inside ductbanks, underground and above ceilings except: 1. Where shown or specified to be exposed. Exposed is understood to mean open to view. 2. Where exposure is necessary to the proper function. 3. Process areas. 4. Where size of materials and equipment precludes concealment. F. Electrical equipment shall be protected at all times against mechanical injury or damage by water. Electrical equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters as required by each Specification Section. Do not install electrical equipment in its permanent location until structures are weather-tight. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water,it shall be thoroughly dried out and tested as directed by the OWNER/ENGINEER,or shall be replaced at no additional cost,at the OWNER/ENGINEER'S discretion. G. Equipment that has been damaged shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer,at the OWNER/ENGINEER'S discretion. H.Repaint any damage to the factory-applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. If the metallic portion of the panel or section is damaged,the entire panel or section shall be replaced,at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3.6 PHASE BALANCING A.The design does not attempt to balance the electrical loads across the phases. Circuits on motor control centers and panelboards shall be field connected to result in evenly balanced loads across all phases. B. Field balancing of circuits shall not alter the conductor color coding requirements as specified in Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables, or as realized on Drawings. 3.7 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE A. Provide manufacturer's services for testing and start-up of the equipment as listed in each individual Specification Section.Settings required by the Power System Study shall be made to the equipment and approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER prior to energizing of the equipment. B. Testing and start-up shall not be combined with training.Testing and start-up time shall not be used for manufacturer's warranty repairs. 3.8 TESTS AND SETTINGS A.Test systems and equipment furnished under Division 26,and repair or replace all defective work. Adjust the systems as specified and/or required and instruct the OWNER's personnel in the proper operation of the system(s). B. Prior to energizing electrical equipment,make all tests as required by the individual Specification Sections. Submit a sample test form or procedure and submit the required test reports and data to the OWNER/ENGINEER for approval at least two weeks prior to the start-up of the tested equipment. Include names of all test personnel and initial each test as well as equipment name, equipment description,and equipment manufacturer. C. Check motor nameplates for correct phase and voltage.Check bearings for proper lubrication. D.Check wire and cable terminations for tightness. ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-8 E. Check rotation of motors prior to energization. Disconnect driven equipment if damage could occur due to wrong rotation. If the motor rotates in the wrong direction,the rotation shall be immediately corrected,or tagged and locked out until rotation is corrected. The swapping of phases to gain the correct rotation shall be done at the motor's junction box. F. Verify all terminations at transformers,equipment,capacitor connections, panels,and enclosures by producing a 12 3 rotation on a phase sequenced motor when connected to"A","B",and "C"phases. G. Mechanical inspection,testing and setting of circuit breakers,disconnect switches,motor starters,control equipment,etc.,for proper operation. H.Check interlocking,control,and instrument wiring for each system and/or part of a system to prove that the system will function properly as indicated by schematic and wiring diagrams. I. Check the ampere rating of thermal overloads for motors and submit a typed record to the OWNER/ENGINEER of same, including MCC cubicle location and load designation, motor service factor, horsepower,full load current and starting code letter. If inconsistencies are found,new thermal elements shall be supplied and installed. J. Verify motor power factor capacitor ratings when supplied. K. Testing shall be scheduled and coordinated with the OWNER/ENGINEER at least two weeks in advance. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments,and test equipment. L. Referto the individual equipment Sections for additional specific testing requirements. M. Document each modification,setting,adjustment,or change made during this step. Submit copy of document to OWNER/ENGINEER. 3.9 TRAINING A.The CONTRACTOR shall provide manufacturer's training as specified in each individual Section of the Specifications. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000-9 SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall include furnishing of all labor,tools,materials,and equipment necessary to complete all the"work" required for the project,as specified herein and shown on the drawings. B. Cooperation with contractors under separate contracts is required,and the work described herein and shown on the drawings shall be coordinated as required to fulfill the intent of the Contract. C. This Section and other Sections in Division 26 shall be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or drawings,and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All raceways,power and control wiring,fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings,shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include: 1. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet,indicating pertinent data and clearly marked identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a monthly report to the OWNER/ENGINEER for review,stating that the Master Electrician has been to thejob site and thoroughly reviewed the work.The report shall be signed by the Master Electrician and include the date and time the Master Electrician was on site,the CONTRACTOR shall follow all local and state codes requiring oversight of Master Electrician by the authority having jurisdiction. 1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of the Master Electrician's Texas license and all licensed Journeyman(with Texas license)who will be working on the project to the OWNER and ENGINEER. This information shall be submitted as a formal submittal prior to beginning any work. C. The CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Prepare,and keep up to date,the Record Drawings and detailed construction drawings. 2. Record the exact locations of each of the differences,sizes,and details of the Construction Work as executed,with cross-references to and other requirements on the Record Drawings. 3. Keep the Record Drawings at the Work Site. 4. Upon completion of the Work,or at such other time as may be determined by the ENGINEER,submit the Record Drawings and copies to the OWNER's Representative in accordance with the OWNER's Requirements. 5. Underground Interference drawing showing all underground duct banks,ground rods,ground conductors,pipes,piers,vaults,manholes,pull boxes,etc.,that clearly identifies the location and routing of these systems. All interferences shall be brought to the ENGINEER's attention. 6. Provide revised final shop drawings in AutoCAD format noting any changes made to equipment during start-up. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-1 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated,the current editions of the following apply to the work of this Section: 1. International Electrical Testing Association(NETA)standards. 2. National Electrical Code(NEC). 3. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace(NFPA 70E). 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA). 5. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA). 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA). 7. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 8. Insulated Cable Engineers Association(ICEA). 9. International Society of Automation (ISA). 10. Underwriters Laboratories(UL). 11. Factory Mutual (FM). 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE). a. IEEE Std.242: IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. b. IEEE Std.399: IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis. c. IEEE Std.1584: IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations. B. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall be provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association(ANSI/NFPA), No.70- National Electrical Code(NEC),Article No.590-Temporary Installations. C. Electrical work shall be executed in accordance with local,State,and national codes,ordinances,and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the work. If the standards and codes conflict with each other,the most stringent shall apply. D. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. E. CONTRACTOR shall submit the company names of the electrical Subcontractor with the bid documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. B. Verify field measurements,circuits,raceways and equipment arrangements are as shown on the Drawings. C. CONTRACTOR's Qualifications 1. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers,trained and experienced in their crafts,and who are familiar with the specifications and methods of performing the work in this Division 26. 2. A licensed Journeyman shall be on site at all times when electrical work is being performed. 3. Electrical work shall be performed underthe direct supervision of Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. D. CONTRACTOR's Workmanship 1. Work shall be performed in accordance with quality and best practices.The appearance of finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. 2. Materials and equipment shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Locations for materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-2 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Schedule with the OWNER/ENGINEER for required shutdowns to accommodate electrical system work. B. Follow the manufacturer's directions for the delivery,storage and handling of equipment and materials for this work. Also,tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt,water,chemical or mechanical injury and theft. C. Major electrical equipment shall be stored indoors in a climate controlled environment and space heaters energized where applicable. Equipment that will be stored indoors for an extended period of time and that may be exposed to harmful condensation shall have a 100 watt incandescent light placed in it and energized to eliminate the build-up of condensation in the equipment. Coordinate with equipment manufacturer for additional storage requirements. D. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation,protect the materials until the work is completed and accepted by the OWNER. 1.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Permits,licenses,and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law bythe CONTRACTOR for the completion of the work.Certificates of approval for all final inspections made by authorities having jurisdiction,shall be secured, paid for,and delivered to the OWNER before receiving the final acceptance of the work. B. The location of materials,equipment,devices,and appliances indicated are approximate and subject to revisions at the time the work is installed. Final location shall be as proposed by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER. C. Should project conditions require any rearrangement of work,or if equipment or accessories can be installed to a better advantage than the general arrangement of work on the plans,the CONTRACTOR shall,before proceeding with the work,prepare and submit plans of the proposed rearrangement for the ENGINEER's review and approval. D. Motor Horsepower ratings identified are anticipated ratings.Shall the actual equipment is a different size,the CONTRACTOR shall provide the appropriate wiring,conduit,over current protection,starters and accessories for a complete and working system at no additional cost to the OWNER. E. , hppn the breakel=_,; have been set per the SheFt Gire-u.4 and- Relay GeeFdinatian Study,testing and inspecti the new equipment. Ne exceptiens. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Not used. PART 2- PRODUCTS A. Not applicable. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. For electrical systems scheduled for removal,disconnect electrical systems completely including those in walls,floors,and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with the Utility Company to provide continuous service to operating equipment. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260S00-3 C. Coordinate new utility service(s)with the Utility Company and the authority having jurisdiction. D. Provide temporary wiring,connections,and services to maintain existing systems in service during construction. E. When work must be performed on energized equipment,circuits,or panels,use personnel experienced in such operations. Proper PPE, procedures,and sign-offs must be obtained prior to beginning work; each facility may have unique requirement for working energized equipment. F. For all existing electrical services, maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service.Disable system only to make switchovers and connections.Obtain permission from the OWNER/ENGINEER at least one week in advance, before partially or completely disabling any system. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Maintain the waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through the exterior walls and floors.Conduit penetrations through any roof structure must be approved by OWNER/ENGINEER and include a description pertaining to reason. B. Submit location drawings and obtain ENGINEER approval prior to installing conduit penetrations through slabs, beams,and walls.The complete installation shall be watertight and the fire rating of penetrations through walls,floors,and ceilings shall be maintained. C. Carry out the work in an orderly and careful manner. Hold noise, dust, and vibration to a minimum and conduct the"work"so as to avoid any damage to the surroundings. Remove all items and parts as shown and noted on the Drawings and as otherwise may be required to be removed to carry out the"work". D. Route all conduits parallel to building lines,columns,or steel route conduits near to columns and roof beams. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports to protect the remaining masonry.The cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without the specific written approval of the ENGINEER. 3.4 PAINTING A. Maintain the original factory finish on material and equipment installed,unless specifically indicated on the plans or specifications. If the finish is marred in transit or during installation, re-finish to a neat, workmanlike appearance equal to the original factory finish. Leave equipment and raceway systems clean and free of grease,dirt, rust,and in a suitable condition for painting. 3.5 CIVIL WORK A. Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the OWNER, utility companies,and OWNER's facilities department.Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior to excavation to avoid disruption of services.Provide a minimum of 72 hours'written notice to the OWNER prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or excavation until authorized by the OWNER.Utilities or services which are damaged,which are identified prior to excavation or trenching,or where confirmation by utility companies has not been obtained verifying that utilities are marked,shall be repaired to operable condition immediately,at no cost to the OWNER. B. Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the project. Barricades for excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness.Trenches shall be marked with warning tape,or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily identifiable sawhorses,warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be illuminated or recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly maintained at all times. C. Protect all adjacent work,structures,and properties.Damage to adjacent work,structures,or properties shall be repaired,or the cost of repair reimbursed in full. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-4 D. All construction areas shall be finally graded as indicated on the Contract Documents,or to the conditions of the site prior to construction.Grading shall bring the site back to the existing conditions as close as practical.Turfed areas shall be sodded,or hydro-mulched with matching turf. Landscaping shall be replaced with identical shrubbery,ground cover,or plants as existed.The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining water on new turf and landscaping until established. If new turf and landscaping is impractical due to weather conditions,CONTRACTOR shall provide satisfactory arrangements to have turf and landscaping furnished and installed at the earliest opportunity thereafter. Provide a 90-day warranty on new turf and landscaping. E. Determine if irrigation systems exist prior to trenching and excavation.Obtain record or as-built drawings and locate control wiring and pressure main branches and devices. Determine by actual operation that systems are functional and repair or replace damaged systems to their original condition prior to beginning construction. 3.6 SECURITY A. Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the OWNER with two keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the OWNER's locking system. 3.7 CLEANING A. For existing equipment near or inclose proximity of the electrical"work": Clean existing equipment, floors,walls,doors and windows from dirt,grease,and stains implied from the electrical "work". B. For new equipment: Remove shipping labels,dirt, paint,grease,and stains from new equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates.Upon completion of work,clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation so that it is suitable for the OWNER's use. END OF SECTION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-5 SECTION 26 05 05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall include furnishing of all labor,tools, materials,and equipment necessary to complete all the demolition required for the project as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Cooperation with contractors under separate contracts is required,and the work described herein and shown on the drawings shall be coordinated as required to fulfill the intent of the Contract. C. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately correct all deficiencies made or implied during demolition. D. The purpose of this Specification and accompanying Drawings is to describe and realize the demolition work to be performed. It is not intended that the Specifications and Drawings describe and indicate every piece of equipment required to be removed for where items are intended to be removed or as required for the satisfactory completion of the project or is considered to be the accepted practice of the trade;they shall be considered to be specified and indicated. E. Furnish,install,and test all equipment,wiring,and appurtenances as may be required to perform the electrical demolition shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. F. The CONTRACTOR shall protect and store all demolition equipment offsite unless requested to do otherwise. G. The CONTRACTOR shall disconnect and remove all lighting fixtures,conduit,wire,and related electrical items as indicated on the drawings or as required by the project.This includes all abandoned low voltage signals and communication cables. H. The CONTRACTOR shall seal floor,wall,and ceiling openings with fire-resistive compound and non- shrink grout after removal of conduits. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or drawings,and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All raceways,power and control wiring,fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings,shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include the following. 1. Demolition-Re-installed Equipment a. For equipment such that is to be re-installed: 1) Prior to demolition,photographs shall be taken to identify any existing damaged areas of existing equipment. 2) Photographs shall betaken before moving of equipment. 3) Photographs shall be taken prior to transport. 4) Photographs shall betaken prior to re-installation. 5) Photographs shall betaken after installation. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 260505-1 2. Demolition-Damaged Equipment a. Photographs shall be taken to identify any existing damaged areas of existing equipment. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated,the current editions of the following apply to the work of this Section: 1. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA)standards. 2. National Electrical Code(NEC). 3. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace(NFPA 70E). 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 7. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 8. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 9. International Society of Automation (ISA). 10. Underwriters Laboratories(UL). 11. Factory Mutual(FM). 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE). B. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall be provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No. 70- National Electrical Code(NEC),Article No. 590-Temporary Installations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements,circuits,raceways,and equipment arrangements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Discrepancies shall be reported to the OWNER/ENGINEER before disturbing the existing installation. D. By beginning demolition,the CONTRACTOR accepts the existing conditions and warrants that he will maintain service to equipment and items not scheduled or indicated for removal. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.10 SCHEDULES A. Schedule with the OWNER/ENGINEER for required shutdowns to accommodate system demolition and installation of temporary facilities. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 260505-2 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment as necessary for patching or repairing of work and as specified in other Sections or Drawings. 2.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. When temporary electrical wiring and services are required,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such"work and products"and comply with the NEC. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. For electrical systems scheduled for removal,disconnect electrical systems completely including those in walls,floors,and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with the Utility Company to provide continuous service to operating equipment. C. Provide temporary wiring,connections,and services to maintain existing systems in service during construction. D. When work must be performed on energized equipment,circuits,or panels,use personnel experienced in such operations. Proper PPE, procedures,and signoffs must be obtained prior to beginning work; each facility may have unique requirement for working energized equipment. E. For all existing electrical services, maintain the existing system in service until the new system is complete and ready for service. Disable the system only to make switchovers and connections.Obtain permission from the OWNER/ENGINEER at least one week in advance before partially or completely disabling any system. F. Reference Drawings for additional demolition requirements. 3.2 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Prior to start of demolition,check to determine that power,communication services,etc.,such as electricity and telephone, have been disconnected at the source of supply. B. Demolition shall be performed in such a manner as to avoid hazards to persons and property. C. Work shall be performed in strict accordance with all Municipal,State,and Federal Rules, Regulations, Codes,and Laws which may govern and apply to this work. D. Remove, relocate,and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. E. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment that has been indicated for removal. G. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access to panels as appropriate. H. Where the demolition or revision of any portion of a raceway or box in the raceway system,in any area, causes the raceway system of the area to no longer comply with the classification or specification requirements of the area,the CONTRACTOR shall provide and install such boxes,fittings,etc.,as may be necessary to return the raceway system to compliance with Classification or Specifications. I. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified for new work. J. Carry out the work in an orderly and careful manner. Hold noise, dust, and vibration to a minimum and conduct the Work so as to avoid any damage to the surroundings. Remove all items and parts as shown and noted on the Drawings and as otherwise may be required to be removed to carry out the Work. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 260505-3 K. Material removed from the construction site during demolition, and any equipment not otherwise designated to remain the property of the OWNER in accordance with the pre-demolition identification process shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR and shall be promptly removed from the construction site and properly disposed of. L. The CONTRACTOR shall refurbish and replace any existing facility to be left in place which is damaged by the demolition operations, at no additional expense to the OWNER.The repair of such damage shall leave the parts in a condition at least equal to that found at the start of the Work. M. Salvaged Equipment and Materials 1. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damage to existing materials affected by the demolition work.The CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace damaged material or equipment as directed at no additional cost to the OWNER. Repairing, patching,and painting of areas shall be done by the respective trade involved with the demolition, utilizing workmen skilled in the trade involved with the repair or replacement of the material in question. 2. The OWNER reserves all rights to claim material removed during demolition.The CONTRACTOR is responsible for removing from the site all material not claimed by the OWNER. In addition,the CONTRACTOR is responsible for delivering to the OWNER's storage facilities the equipment claimed by the OWNER. 3. The OWNER shall have the right to retain any or all electrical and instrumentation equipment shown or specified to be removed from the site. 4. Prior to starting demolition, the CONTRACTOR and OWNER/ENGINEER shall jointly visit the areas of demolition and the OWNER/ENGINEER will designate those items that are to remain the property of the OWNER. 5. Equipment and material designated by the OWNER as remaining the property of the OWNER shall be removed from the structure and hauled to a designated location on the site and stored for the OWNER's use.Store on wood runners raised above the surrounding grade and cover with weather- resistant covering,and tie securely or store inside OWNER-furnished storage as directed by the OWNER/ENGINEER. 6. Take necessary precautions in removing OWNER-designated property to prevent damage during the demolition process. Remove steel structural members by unbolting, cutting welds,or cutting rivet heads and punching shanks through holes. Do not use a cutting torch to separate the OWNER's equipment or material unless approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER. 7. Generally, items to be salvaged shall be removed in one piece or in a manner that does not impact their reuse. Loose components may be removed separately.Controls and electrical equipment may be removed from the equipment and handled separately. Large units may be handled separately. 3.3 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. B. Panelboards:Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide cover plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuit arrangement. END OF SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 260505-4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL 260505-5 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall include furnishing of all labor,tools,materials,and equipment necessary to install 1000 volt and below cables and wire. B. Cooperation with contractors under separate contracts is required,and the work described herein and shown on the Drawings shall be coordinated as required to fulfill the intent of the Contract. C. Work shall include the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 1000volts and below. 2. Connectors,splices,and terminations. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or Drawings,and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All raceways,power and control wiring,fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings,shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include the following. 1. Product Data a. Low Voltage Cables b. Low Voltage Wire c. Ground Wire d. Shielded Cable 2. Samples:Provide 18-inch lengths of each type of cable indicated upon specific request. 3. Certificates a. Submit Labels of Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.affixed to each item of material. b. If materials are by manufacturers other than those specified,submit certification that material meets applicable Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.Standards. c. Submit certified test reports;reference Section 26 0126, Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems. d. Test reports must be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval after testing is complete and prior to energization. Low-voltage power conductors and cable will not be accepted without the appropriate tests. e. The testing report shall contain at a minimum:type of test used, results of tests,calculated test results,ambient air temperature,temperature of cable/conductor insulation and explanation pertaining to pass or failure of test. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-1 f. If Certified Test failed,a written report shall be submitted to the ENGINEER as to why the cable failed and a corrective action plan developed which describes activities,dates,and assignments. Once corrective actions are completed,a new Certified Test shall be done following the guidelines above. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated,the current editions of the following apply to the work of this Section: 1. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA)standards-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 2. National Electrical Code(NEC). 3. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace(NFPA 70E). 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 7. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 8. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 9. International Society of Automation (ISA). 10. Factory Mutual(FM). 11. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE). a. IEEE Std.400-Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems. b. IEEE Std.576-Practice for Installation,Termination,and Testing of Insulated Power Cable as Used in Industrial and Commercial Applications. c. IEEE Std. 1202-Standard for Flame Propagation Testing of Wire&Cable. B. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall be provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No. 70- National Electrical Code(NEC),Article No.590-Temporary Installations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements,circuits,raceways,and equipment arrangements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Acceptable Cable Manufacturers 1. Okonite. 2. General Cable. 3. Triangle. 4. Southwire Company. 5. Rome Cable Corporation. 6. Belden. 7. Senator Wire and Cable Company 8. American Insulated Wire Corp.-A Leviton Company C. Acceptable Splicing and Accessories 1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems,Inc. 3. 0-Z/Ged ney. 4. TE Connectivity. 5. Thomas&Betts Corporation. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-2 6. 3M-Electrical Products Division. 7. Tyco Electronics D. Cable and Insulation Material shall be UL listed. E. Verify phasing at three-phase circuit connection points. F. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to the manufacturer's recommended values. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store,and handle equipment components in accordance with shop drawings,manufacturer's written instructions,and the following: 1. Deliver wires and cables to the project in full cartons or reels marked with conductor size,insulation type,and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label. 2. Store wires and cables in a manner to prevent damage from the elements, personnel,equipment, and moisture. 3. Handle wires and cables in a mannerto prevent damage to conductor, insulation,and identifying markings. 1.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Special Warranty:CONTRACTOR and/or manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Provide warranty per Division 01,Warranties and Bonds,and as specified herein. 2. Cost for the removal,shipment,repair and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in warranty,as well as correction of defective work. 3. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for the period specified in Division 01, Warranties and Bonds, from the date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition.Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER. 1.10 SCHEDULES A. Schedule with the OWNER/ENGINEER for required shutdowns to accommodate low-voltage cable installations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Low-voltage power conductors and cables shall be suitable for use within the raceways installed. Each cable and conductor within the same raceway shall have the same voltage rating. Each cable inside a man hole or hand hole shall comply with the NEC for voltage ratings. B. At a minimum,low-voltage power conductors and cables shall: 1. Be copper and shall be stranded.Solid conductors shall not be allowed without ENGINEER'S written approval. 2. Utilize insulated conductors meeting applicable requirements of NEMA,UL 1581 and listed as UL type THHN-2,THWN,XHHW,or XHHW-2 as indicated on drawings. When not indicated on drawings, use XHHW-2 insulated cables. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-3 3. For lighting and receptacles,conductor insulation shall be listed as UL type XHHW-2. 4. Unless noted otherwise,conductor sizes indicated are based on copper conductors. Do not provide conductors smaller than those indicated. 5. Where flexible cords and cables are specified, provide Type SO,600 volt,with the number and size of copper conductors indicated. 6. The insulation rating for the copper ground wire shall match the insulation rating of the phase conductor(s). C. Low-voltage power conductors and cables shall be furnished in reel lengths,each long enough to reach from connection point to connection point without splice,utilizing the manufacturer's published maximum reel length capability for each type and size to be used on this Project. 1. If any length capability is insufficient to provide without splice,the Shop Drawing submittal shall clearly describe the insufficiency, and explain the location required for such a splice. An appropriate terminal box shall be installed for the connections. Installation of such terminal boxes without such approval will require removal of such cable and replacement with another manufacturer's cable meeting the requirements of the location, all at no expense to the OWNER. 2. Splices inside ductbank raceways,manholes,or handholes are prohibited. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Low-Voltage Conductors for Power and Control Circuits 1. Single Conductors a. Power transfer conductors shall be soft-drawn,stranded,annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98 percent pure copper bearing the UL label. b. Phase Color Markings on the conductor's insulation shall be made at the ends of each conductor and shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. c. Grounding conductors shall be Class B stranded copper conductor without insulation in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit,or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate copper ground wire with green insulation type as specified above. 2. Cables for lighting, power, class 1,and non-power-limited fire alarm circuits shall be UL listed for the type of raceway(s) used, is rated as type OF(Underground Feeder)or direct burial, rated for cable tray,sunlight resistant,and conforms to the requirements of NEC Article 340. Cables for class 2 and class 3 shall be UL listed Power Limited Circuit Cable that conforms to the requirements of NECArticle 725. Provide cables permanently and legibly marked with the manufacturer's name,the maximum working voltage for which the cable was tested,the type of cable, and labeled UL(or submit evidence of UL listing). a. Multi-Conductor Control Cable 1) Multi-conductor control cable shall be rated for 600 volts and meet the vertical tray flame test requirements of UL 1277. 2) Shall include a grounding conductor when realized on drawings. Minimum cable temperature rating shall be 90 degrees C dry locations,75 degrees C wet locations. 3) Minimum conductor size shall be#14AWG copper. 4) The outerjacket shall be rated for cable tray,flame-retardant,sunlight-resistant and oil- resistant,with nominal thickness per ICEA standards and comply with UL 1277. 5) Conductor insulation color shall be per ICEA Method. 6) Splicing of cable is acceptable when terminations are within junction box enclosure utilizing terminals with appropriate ratings. 7) Multi-conductor control cable shall have suitable pulling strength for the distance pulled without exceeding cable's maximum pulling force. b. 600 Volt Multi-Conductor Power Cable LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-4 1) Multi-conductor power cable shall be rated for 600 volts and meet the vertical tray flame test requirements of UL 1277. 2) Shall have either three or four conductors plus a grounding conductor(s). Minimum cable temperature rating shall be 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C wet locations. 3) Minimum conductor size shall be#12 AWG copper. 4) The outerjacket shall be rated for cable tray,flame-retardant,sunlight-resistant and oil- resistant,with nominal thickness per ICEA standards and comply with UL 1277. 5) Conductor insulation color shall be per ICEA Method. 6) Splicing of cable is prohibited unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 7) Multi-conductor power cable shall have suitable pulling strength for the distance pulled without exceeding cable's maximum pulling force. B. Conductors/Cables for Instrumentation 1. Single and Multiple Pairs(600 Volt,Twisted-shielded-Pairs Instrumentation Cable,Type TC)No.16 AWG conductors-minimum unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: a. The cable shall contain twisted-shielded-pairs)designed for noise rejection for process control, computer,or data log applications. Each pair individually shielded plus an overall shield. b. Jacket shall be flame-retardantandsunlight-and oil-resistant with PVC material. c. Suitable for installation in cable trays,conduit,direct burial,or other approved raceways. Minimum cable temperature rating shall be 90 degrees C dry locations,75 degrees C wet locations. d. Soft annealed tinned copper conductors. Minimum drain wire size AWG 20. e. A drain wire to be included with each pair. f. Pairs shall have conductor insulation color black and red or black and white. g. Instrumentation cable shall have suitable pulling strength for the distance pulled without exceeding cable's maximum pulling force. 2. Single or Multiple Triads (600 Volt,Twisted triads,Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable,Type TC) No. 16 AWG conductors-minimum unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: a. Triad instrumentation cable designed for noise rejection for process control,computer,or data log applications.Suitable for installation in cable tray,conduit,or other approved raceways. Minimum cable temperature rating shall be 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C wet locations. b. Soft annealed tinned copper conductors,Class B,16 AWG 7-strand concentric per ASTM 138. Minimum triad drain wire size AWG 20;group drain wire size AWG 18. c. The drain wire to be included with each triad. d. Jacket shall be flame-retardant and sunlight-and oil-retardant PVC. e. Triad conductors pigmented black,red,and blue;or black,white,and red. f. Instrumentation cable shall have suitable pulling strength for the distance pulled without exceeding cable's maximum pulling force. 3. Cables for RTDs shall be cable suited for use per RTD manufacturer specifications. The cable shall meet or exceed the requirements listed above for Single or Multiple Triads. The color of triad RTD conductor insulation to be black,white,and red. 4. Cables and terminals for Thermocouples shall be suited for use per Thermocouple manufacturer specifications. C. Manufactured Conductor Products 1. CONNECTORS,COMPRESSION, COPPER,600 VOLT: Shall have appropriate hole sizes and spacing which are in accordance with NEMA standards;two holes in the tongue for use on conductor sizes 250 kcmil or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-5 2. 600 VOLT PLASTIC TAPE:Shall be Minnesota Mining&Manufacturing Company,No.35 or equal. 3. WIRENUTS:Shall be spring wire connecting devices with plastic covering;where required shall be UL listed for damp and wet locations.Wirenut shall meet requirements of UL486D for Sealed Wire Connector Systems and shall be manufactured by Ideal Industries, Inc. model 63;or as manufactured by ITT, Panduit,or equal.Wirenut shall be spring insulated, properly sized and resistant to vibration, may be used for No. 14 through No. 10 gauge conductors. 4. SPLIT BOLTS: Kearney, Burndy, Ilsco,or equal;shall be usable for connecting conductors which are both copper. Split bolts shall have a spacer between the two conductors which it connects. 5. MECHANICAL SET SCREW CONNECTOR: Blackburn HIPS,ADR-ALCUL,GP or GT, Burndy or Ilsco or equal;consisting of an aluminum body which has openings on opposite ends for insertion of the conductors.Conductors inserted into these holes shall each be clamped by two set screws. Connectors shall be suitable for use with copper conductors. 6. RUBBER TAPE:Scotch 2210 or equal. 7. ARC PROOFING TAPE: 3M "Scotch 77 Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape". Fireproofing shall be done with a half-lapped layer of arc proofing tape,anchored at each end with a double wrap of 3M "Scotch 69 Glass Cloth Electrical Tape". 8. VINYLTAPE:Scotch 88 or equal. 9. INSULATING RESIN:Scotch 3576,3577,or 3578. 10. POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS: Ferraz Shawmut, Ilsco,or Allen-Bradley; rated for 600 VAC and termination of copper conductors. Individual poles shall be constructed of tin-plated aluminum and mounted on an insulating base. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate utility service outages with the Utility Company to provide continuous service to operating equipment. B. Provide temporary wiring,connections,and services to maintain existing systems in service during construction. C. When work must be performed on energized equipment,circuits,or panels,use personnel experienced in such operations. Proper PPE, procedures,and sign-offs must be obtained prior to beginning work; each facility may have unique requirement for working energized equipment. D. For all existing electrical services,maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the OWNER/ENGINEER at least one week in advance, before partially or completely disabling any system. E. Completely swab raceway system(s)before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which deteriorate the conductors or their insulation. F. Tighten screws and terminal bolts using torque type wrenches,and/or drives,to tighten to the inch- pound requirements of the manufacturer's recommendation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pull Conductors:Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 1. Where necessary,use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that will not deteriorate conductor, insulation or raceway. 2. Use pulling means,including fish tape,cable,rope,and basket-weave cable grips that will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable. 3. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-6 4. All ductbank cable pulls and all pulls greater than 150 feet shall be done while measuring the pulling tension (dynamometer)and include a resettable maximum tension gauge or recorder. Any pulls done without working pulling tension meter will be rejected.The cables shall be removed, discarded, replaced, reinstalled, and re-terminated at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. B. The cable shall not be bent to a radius no smaller than the manufacturer cable's minimum bending radius,which is typically 12 times the overall cable outside diameter. Cable bent with a diameter less than recommended by the cable's manufacturer shall be removed,discarded,replaced,reinstalled,and re-terminated at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Once cable is over bent, it shall not be reused in any manner. C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicularto surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible. D. Where single conductors and small cables are in manholes, handholes,vaults,cable trays,and other indicated locations and are not wrapped together by some other means such as arc and fireproofing tapes -then bundle throughout their exposed length with nylon, self-locking, releasable, cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 12 inches on centers. E. When inserting conductors into an enclosed raceway,comply with the following: 1. First,install raceway(s)complete without conductors. 2. Do not install pull rope,wires and conductors until the raceway is complete. 3. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing pull ropes and wires. F. All cable pulls shall be done using cable reels. Proper care of cables shall be taken to avoid cables laid on the ground during pulling. G. Waste certain footage(3 feet minimum to 6 feet)of cable at each end to get a good piece of cable after the pull. H. Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the plans indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. I. Properly support cables in accordance with the NEC and manufacturer's recommendations in all raceways. Provide strain relief as required. J. Circuits shall not share a neutral conductor. K. Verify all conductors by Ohm meter, or by current sourcing and offer OWNER's inspector(s)an opportunity to observe. All conductors shall be labeled prior to testing and final terminations being done. Final conductor labels shall match wiring diagrams and criteria for labeling,according to Division 26. Any conductor that is de-terminated for any reason shall be re-tested.All associated controls,if tested before,shall be re-tested following final re-termination. L. Conductor Splices: Conductors shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without splice, unless noted otherwise. 1. Conduit type fittings shall not contain splices. 2. No splices shall be allowed below grade. Cable splices and conductor splices are prohibited unless approved in writing by the ENGINEER and OWNER. 3. Light switches and receptacles conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except at outlets.Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make connections to equipment without straining. 4. Branch circuit wiring shall be stranded conductors and connections to switches and receptacles made with fork-spade or ring lug insulated connectors.Wire nuts may be used on solid conductors of 120-volt, 208-volt, 277-volt lighting,and 120-volt receptacle circuits only. M. Arrange wiring in cabinets, panels, and motor control centers neatly cut to proper length. Remove surplus wire,and bridle and secure in an acceptable manner. Identify circuits entering motor control centers or other control cabinets in accordance with the conductor identification system specified herein. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-7 N. Conductor Terminations: Terminate power,control and instrumentation wiring with methods consistent with manufacturer's instructions.Where terminals provided will accept such lugs,terminate wiring(except solid thermocouple leads)with insulated,locking-fork compression lugs,Thomas&Betts, Sta-Kon,or equal. 1. Soldered connections shall not be allowed. 2. For No. 10 and smaller,connect conductors with a twist-on spring wirenut. Insulate connection with a minimum of three layers of 600 volt plastic tape, in all cases the tape voltage rating shall be equal or exceed conductor's voltage insulation rating. If a splice or tap may encounter rain or water,fill the spring connectors with an electrical insulating resin so that conductor and spring materials are encapsulated by the resin. 3. Conductor terminations inside the MCC,VFDs,panels,etc.,shall be on the terminal strips or power distribution blocks. 4. Furnish and install power distribution blocks as required for tapping conductors at their load connection point with conductors of smaller sizes. Install power distribution blocks with the number of poles and sizes needed for connecting the phase, neutral,and ground conductors. 5. Shielded cable(pairs)and shielded cable(triad or RTD cable)shall be broken at terminal strips only. These types of cables shall not share a raceway with control or power conductors unless Drawing(s) realize otherwise. Each conductor and shield shall have dedicated terminals. 6. For terminals designed to accept only bare wire compression terminations, use only stranded wire, and terminate only one wire per terminal. 7. Cap spare conductors,not terminated,with UL listed end caps or wire nuts. 0. Arc Proofing: Use arc and fireproofing tapes on 600 volt conductors and cables, except for type TC cable, at locations not protected by conduit,cable tray, direct burial,or termination materials. P. Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements. Q. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations,splices,and separable insulated connectors.Ground metal bodies of terminators,splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings,and hardware. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING A. Testing:All testing required shall be per Specification Section 26 0126, Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems. B. Perform field tests and field inspections prior to preparing test reports: 1. Test reports shall be submitted as required by Specification Section 26 0126, Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems.All test reports for low voltage conductors and cables shall be submitted in one binder under Specification Section 26 0126, Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems. 2. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,test for compliance with requirements. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection test stated in NETA ATS.Certify compliance with test parameters. 4. Cable testing and inspection for all new cables shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations on a generic form,and shall include the following: a. Visual and mechanical inspection. b. Shield continuity test,if possible. c. Insulation resistance test C. Infrared Scanning Inspections 1. Infrared Scanning:After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice or termination of cables and conductors No. 10 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so terminations are accessible to portable scanner. a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each termination 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-8 b. Instrument:Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. c. Record of Infrared Scanning:Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-9 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-10 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall include furnishing of all labor,tools, materials, and equipment necessary to install hangers and supports for each type of electrical system in accordance with the National Electrical Code(NEC)as shown on Drawings and as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 26 Electrical Specifications. B. Cooperation with contractors under separate contracts is required,and the work described herein and shown on the Drawings shall be coordinated as required to fulfill the intent of the Contract. C. Furnish and install necessary electrical support hardware, including but not limited to, mechanical anchors,chemical anchors,undercut anchors,metal framing,strut,nuts, bolts,washers,lock nuts,rods, rod caps and other electrical support hardware as shown on the Drawings,specified herein,and recommended by raceway manufacturers. D. Work shall include methods,materials,and equipment,plus the following where applicable: 1. Underground Ductbanks:Reference Section 26 05 43,Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems. 2. Conduit for Electrical Systems: Reference Section 26 05 33.13,Conduit for Electrical Systems. 3. Pull&Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems:Reference Section 26 05 33.16,Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or drawings,and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All raceways,power and control wiring,fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include the following. 1. Product Data for Material Used a. Cut Sheets. 2. Underwriters Laboratories approval certificate for all support hardware. B. For anchor systems,the submittal information shall include manufacturer's specifications and technical data including, but not limited to the following: 1. Acceptable base material conditions(that is cracked,un-cracked concrete). 2. Acceptable drilling methods. 3. Acceptable bore hole conditions(dry,water saturated,water filled,underwater,etc.). 4. Cure time tables. 5. Temperature ranges for storage,installation and in-service. 6. Manufacturer's installation instructions including bore hole cleaning procedures and adhesive or chemical injection procedures. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements,raceways and equipment arrangements areas shown on the Drawings. B. Comply with NFPA 70(NEC). 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle,and store equipment components in accordance with shop drawings,manufacturer's written instructions,and the following: 1. Deliver material for the hangers and supports to the project in full cartons or reels marked with name,size,type,and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label. 2. Store material for the hangers and supports in a manner to prevent damage from the elements, personnel,equipment, and moisture. 3. Anchors a. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled,unopened containers, identified with brand and type. b. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date,minimizing storage time at jobsite. c. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions. d. Comply with recommended procedures,precautions,or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. e. Material shall be new and unused;do not use damaged or expired materials. f. Storage restrictions(temperature range)and expiration date must be supplied with product. 4. Metal Framing a. Material shall be new and unused with no signs of damage from handling. 1.6 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated,the current editions of the following apply to the work of this Section: 1. National Electrical Code(NEC). 2. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace(NFPA 70E). 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). S. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 6. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 7. MSS SP-69 Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application. 8. NECA 101 Standard for Installing Steel Conduits. 9. NECA 1 Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction. 10. ASTM E 488-96(2003),Standard Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements;ASTM International. 11. ASTM E 1512-93,Standard Test Methods for Testing Bond Performance of Adhesive-Bonded Anchors,ASTM International. 12. AC308,Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete Elements,latest revision. 1.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-2 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Special Warranty:CONTRACTOR and/or manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Provide warranty per Division 01,Warranties and Bonds,and as specified herein. 2. The cost for the removal,shipment,repair,and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in warranty,as well as correction of defective work. 3. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for the period specified in Division 01, Warranties and Bonds, from the date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such a period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition.Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER 1.10 SCHEDULES A. Schedule with the OWNER/ENGINEER for required shutdowns to accommodate hangers and supports for electrical systems. 1.11 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design hangers and supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment as well as connected systems and components. C. An engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer for the design of hangers and supports will be required when specified on Drawings, requested within Division 26 Electrical specifications,or requested by authority having jurisdiction. D. Floor Stand Support: 1. Where equipment,cabinets,consoles,panels,enclosures,and boxes cannot be wall-mounted, provide an independent floor stand support. 2. Floor stand support shall consist of struts,plates,brackets,connection fittings,braces,accessories, and hardware assembled in a rigid framework suitable for mounting of intended materials and equipment. 3. Equip floor stand support with brackets and bases for rigidly mounting the framework to the ceiling or floor, as applicable; or equip floor stand supports with beam clamps, angle plates, washers, and bolts for fastening to beam flanges,as applicable. 4. When equipment,cabinets,consoles,panels,enclosures,and boxes weigh more than 100 pounds: a. Main vertical supports of floor stand support assemblies shall be back-to-back struts. b. Bracing,clamping and anchoring of each floor stand support shall be sufficient to ensure rigidity of the floor stand support with the intended equipment,enclosures,conduit,cable tray, busway,cable bus,and wireway installed. c. Floor stand supports shall not deflect by more than 1/8-inch when a 100-pound force is applied at any point on the support in any direction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MECHANICAL ANCHORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Drawings and specifications,the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Hilti Inc.(Kwik Bolt TZ SS 316,typical). b. Cooper B-Line,Inc. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-3 c. MKT Fastening, LLC. B. Product Description 1. Torque controlled insert-wedge-type expansion anchor,consisting of anchor body,expansion element,washer,and nut. 2. For use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension,shear,and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and materials in which it is used. C. Product Material 1. All parts shall be 316 stainless steel. 2.2 CHEMICALANCHORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Drawings and specifications,the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Hilti Inc.(HIT-HY 200-A with HIT-Z-R 316SS,typical). B. Product Description 1. Includes a chemical adhesive for the injection of an anchor body with a helical cone shaped thread, contains standard threads on the exposed end with washer and nut. For use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension,shear,and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and materials in which it is used. C. Product Material 1. All hardware parts shall be 316 stainless steel. 2.3 UNDERCUT ANCHORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Drawings and specifications,the following manufacturers are acceptable. a. Hilti Inc.(HAD-TR or HAD-PR,typical). B. Product Description 1. Heavy-duty fastening for dynamic loading in cracked or uncracked concrete and corrosive environments. 2. Used for supports in overhead systems including pipes,crane rails,safety barriers,etc. C. Product Material 1. All parts shall be 316 stainless steel. 2.4 STRUT A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Drawings and specifications,the following manufacturers are acceptable. a. Tyco Unistrut. b. Cooper B-Line. c. Thomas&Betts. d. Allied Tube&Conduit. B. Product Description 1. Used for metal framing systems for supporting electrical equipment,panels,enclosures,lighting fixtures and raceways. 2. The strut size shall be selected for applicable load criteria. 3. Field welding of components will not be permitted. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-4 C. Product Material 1. Strut components shall consist of telescoping channels,slotted back-to-back channels,end clamps, flat plate fittings, 90-degree fittings, braces, clevis fittings, U-fittings, Z-fittings, Wing fittings, post bases,channel nuts,washers,all thread and conduit clamps. 2. Acceptable strut sizes are 13/16 inch through 3.25 inch. 3. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings,all parts and components shall be manufactured of: a. 316 stainless steel. b. For chemical areas or rooms containing chlorine or ammonia,the framing system may be manufactured of structural fiberglass. 2.5 GENERAL PRODUCTS A. Raceway and cable support hardware includes hangers,clamps,grips,and associated fittings of which shall be type 316 stainless steel. B. Structural steel necessary for fabricated supports and restraints include steel plates,cut shapes, bars, (- beams,C-channel of which shall be 304L stainless steel. C. Supports for conductors in vertical conduits shall be factory fabricated consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug(s)for non-armored electrical conductors or cables. Plugs shall have number, size,and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required with body made of malleable iron. D. Hanger rods shall be 316 threaded stainless steel sized for the necessary load. E. Toggle bolts shall be 316 stainless steel,unless otherwise stated in these specifications or on the Drawings. F. Through bolts shall be 316 stainless steel,unless otherwise stated in these specifications or on the Drawings. G. Clamps for attachment to steel structure shall meet MSS SP-58 and be of type suitable for attached structure and rated for the necessary load. H. Nuts,washers,and locknuts shall be type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise stated in these specifications or on the Drawings. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. When work must be performed on energized equipment,circuits,or panels,use personnel experienced in such operations. Proper PPE, procedures,and sign-offs must be obtained prior to beginning work; each facility may have unique requirement for working on or around energized equipment. B. For all existing electrical services, maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the OWNER/ENGINEER at least one week in advance, before partially or completely disabling any system. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Comply with codes and standards for the application of hangers and supports for electrical systems unless the requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Use stainless steel components unless otherwise shown on Drawings. C. Maximum support spacing for raceways shall be as defined in NEC,minimum threaded rod size shall be -inch diameter. D. No electrical equipment or raceways shall be attached to or supported from sheet metal walls. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-5 E. Stainless spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1.5 inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze. F. For multiple raceways,running in parallel,install trapeze type supports fabricated with the support system and sized so capacity can be increased by a minimum of 25 percent in the future without exceeding specified design load limit of the support system. 1. Secure raceways to these supports with stainless steel single-bolt conduit clamps. 2. Reference Drawings for additional information. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall install all hangers and support equipment strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,Contract Drawings,and these Specifications. In case(s)where multiple options arise,the CONTRACTOR shall select the option realized in this article. B. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with installation requirements in other specifications for metal fabrications of metal supports. C. The location of supports and hangers may be varied within reasonable limits so as to avoid any piping, duct or other obstruction without extra cost,subject to the approval of the OWNER,as long as complying with the codes and standards for hangers and supports. D. Raceways may be supported by openings through structure members as permitted in the NEC. E. When not indicated on Drawings,select sizes of hanger and support components so strength will be adequate to carry design static load plus 25 percent more for future static loads. Minimum static load used for strength determination shall be weight of present and future static loads plus 200 lbs. F. The anchoring and fastening of electrical items and their supports to building structural elements shall be by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code or Drawings: 1. Wood-Fasten with lag screws and,when accessible to back side,then utilize through bolts. 2. New Concrete-Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. Masonry-Expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry structures and toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry structures. 4. Existing Concrete-Chemical anchors for floor areas used for support structures. Mechanical anchors for floor areas used to anchor non-support structures such as cabinets,enclosures,boxes, etc. Use undercut anchors for overhead supports. S. Steel-Beam clamps complying with codes and standards. 6. Light Steel -Sheet metal screws. 7. Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces-Mount devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. G. The anchoring and fastening of electrical items and their supports to concrete support pads shall be by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code or Drawings: 1. Use supported equipment manufacturer's drawings,templates,diagrams,and instructions furnished with the items to be chemically anchored. 2. Place and secure devices to be anchored. 3. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 4. Ensure that drilled holes for chemical anchors do not exceed depth of concrete. 5. Drill holes for anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 6. Install chemical and anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. H. Cut,fit,and place miscellaneous metal supports in correct locations and maintain alignment,plumb,and elevations to support and anchor electrical equipment. I. Install required labels. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-6 3.4 CONCRETE SUPPORT PADS A. Anchors shall be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from the edge of the concrete pad base,otherwise contact the ENGINEER. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the installation. B. Remove dirt,dust,and concrete spatter from the equipment using brushes,vacuum cleaner,lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air. C. After drilling hole(s)into concrete,just before applying the anchor, use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust from the drilled hole. The hole shall be clean and dry in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment,grounding,and physical damage. B. Inspect the tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable tightness values are given in the manufacturer's information. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-7 SECTION 26 05 33.13 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall include furnishing of all labor,tools, materials, and equipment necessary to install a completed conduit system for each type of electrical system in accordance with the National Electrical Code(NEC)as shown on drawings and as specified herein. A conduit system,sometimes referred to as raceway system,shall consist of materials designed expressly for containing wires and cables, including, but not limited to conduit,equipment bodies,conduit fittings and bodies, raceway boxes,hangers,supports,fasteners,and related material. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 26 Electrical specifications. B. Conduit indicated to be run "exposed" or in "Open Area" on the Drawings shall be run near the ceilings or along the walls of the areas through which they pass and shall be routed to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts,cranes and hoists,lighting fixtures,doors and hatches,etc.Conduit indicated to be run concealed shall be run under concrete floor slabs,in partitions, Ductbanks,or above hung ceilings,as required. C. Cooperation with contractors under separate contracts is required,and the work described herein and shown on the drawings shall be coordinated as required to fulfill the intent of the Contract. D. Work shall include methods and materials for the conduit system(s)and equipment, plus the following where applicable: 1. Underground Ductbanks:Reference Section 26 05 43,Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems. 2. Pull&Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems:Reference Section 26 05 33.16,Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or drawings,and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All raceways,power and control wiring,fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings,shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include: 1. Product Data for Material Used a. Cut Sheets. 2. Certificates a. Labels of Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.affixed to each item of material. b. If materials are by manufacturer other than those specified,submit certification that material meets applicable Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated,the current editions of the following apply to the work of this Section: 1. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA)standards-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-1 2. National Electrical Code(NEC). 3. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace(NFPA 70E). 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 7. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 8. International Society of Automation (ISA). 9. Underwriters Laboratories(UL)UL6Aand 514B. 10. Factory Mutual(FM). 11. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE). 12. ANSI C80.5-Aluminum Conduit. 13. ANSI/NEMA FB 1-Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes,and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 14. NEMA RN 1-PVC Externally-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing. 15. NEMA TC 2-Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit(EPC-40 and EPC-80). 16. NEMA TC 3-PVC Fittings for use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 17. NEMA TC 14-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit(RTRC)and Fittings. B. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall be provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No. 70- National Electrical Code(NEC),Article No.590-Temporary Installations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements,circuits, raceways,and equipment arrangements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Conduit System and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store,and handle equipment components in accordance with shop drawings,manufacturer's written instructions,and the following: 1. Deliver material for the Conduit System to the project in full cartons or reels marked with name, size,type,and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label. 2. Store material for the Conduit System in a manner to prevent damage from the elements, personnel, equipment,and moisture. 1.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Special Warranty:CONTRACTOR and/or manufacturer agree to repair or replace components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Provide warranty per Division 01,Warranties and Bonds,and as specified herein. 2. Cost for the removal,shipment, repair,and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in warranty,as well as correction of defective work. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-2 3. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for the period specified in Division 01, Warranties and Bonds, from the date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition.Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER 1.10 SCHEDULES A. Schedule with the OWNER/ENGINEER for required shutdowns to accommodate conduit system installations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit systems shall meet or exceed the specifications and requirements of the latest governing agency. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Rigid Metal Conduit(RMC) 1. Conduit Material shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel with zinc coated threads and an outer coating of zinc bichromate,complete with coupling and one end thread protector. 2. All(RMC)fittings shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel with zinc coated threads and an outer coating of zinc bichromate. 3. Shall conform to ANSI C80.5 and UL listed. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit:Shall not be used. C. Flexible Metal Conduit(FMC)Hazardous Locations 1. Brass coupling which is explosion-proof,dust-proof,and rated for wet locations. 2. An acceptable product shall be Crouse Hinds,18 inch long,3/4-inch,part ECLK218 or equal. D. Rigid Aluminum Conduit 1. Heavy wall,aluminum alloy AA 6063,with temper designation T-1,free from defects and manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.5 standards and UL listed. 2. Acceptable manufacturers are VAW,Western,Alumax,Republic Conduit,SAPA,and Allied. 3. Hubs shall be cast aluminum,with broad flat surfaces with gripping teeth on both sides of conduit entry. Hub portion on exterior side of entry shall contain "0" ring for watertight seal of conduit entry. Hubs shall be Meyers Hub,Appleton,Alumax,or Efor. E. Aluminum Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Aluminum flexible metal conduit shall have an interlocked aluminum core,meeting NEC Article 348, UL land Federal Specification WW-C-566C,as manufactured by Southwire Alflex,the Anaconda Metal Hose Div.;Anaconda Co.;American Flexible Conduit Co., Inc.;or Universal Metal Hose Co. 2. Fittings used shall be from AA 6063 aluminum alloy with temper designation T-1. 3. Shall conform to ANSI C80.5 and UL listed. F. Liquid-tight Aluminum Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Liquid-tight aluminum flexible metal conduit shall have an interlocked aluminum core, PVC jacket rated for 80 degrees C, meets NEC Article 351 and UL 360 as manufactured by Ultratite AEF by Southwire,the Anaconda Metal Hose Div.;Anaconda American Brass Co.;American Flexible Conduit Co., Inc.; Universal Metal Hose Co.;or Alflex. 2. Liquid-tight conduit connectors shall be copper-free aluminum construction, cadmium-plated malleable iron body and nut, cadmium-plated steel ferrule, insulated throat, external ground lug. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-3 3. Fittings used with liquidtight flexible aluminum conduit shall be extruded from 6063 alloy in temper designation T-1 with maximum 0.1 percent copper content and shall conform to FEDSPEC WW-C- 540C ANSI C80.5,and UL-6. G. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit(LFMC) 1. UL listed single strip,helicallywound,interlocking,hot dipped zinc galvanized steel core. 2. Extruded polyvinyl jacket over the flexible metal. 3. Acceptable product is Anaconda Type UA. 4. Liquid-tight conduit connectors shall be copper-free aluminum construction, cadmium-plated malleable iron body and nut,cadmium-plated steel ferrule,insulated throat,external ground lug. H. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT) 1. Not used. I. PVC-coated Rigid Aluminum Conduit 1. Shall meet the requirements of rigid aluminum conduit; 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating, UL 6A listed manufactured in accordance with Fed.Spec.WW-C-581, ANSI C80.5 standards, ETL Verified PVC-001 and UL listed. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to American Conduit(by SAPA), Perma-Cote,OCAL Inc.,and Rob Roy Plastibond Red. 3. Fittings for PVC-coated Aluminum Conduit shall have a minimum coating thickness,0.040 inch,with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. J. PVC-coated Rigid Metal (Steel)Conduit 1. Shall meet the requirements of rigid steel conduit;40 mil PVC,exterior coating and 2 mil red urethane interior coating,UL 6A listed manufactured in accordance with Fed.Spec.WW-C-581, ANSI C80.5 standards, ETL Verified PVC-001 and UL listed. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to Perma-Cote,OCAL Inc.,and Rob Roy Plastibond Red. 3. Fittings for PVC-coated Aluminum Conduit shall have a minimum coating thickness,0.040 inch,with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. K. Rigid PVC Conduit 1. Schedule 80 and Schedule 40 PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit(RNC)shall be designed for use above ground and underground as described in the NEC, resistant to sunlight.The conduits and fittings shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-2, Federal Specification WC1094A and UL 651 specifications. Fittings shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-3,Federal Specification WC1094A and UL 514B.Conduit shall have a UL Label.Conduit shall be by Carlon,Certain Teed,or Kraloy. 2. Fittings shall be Solvent-welded,slip-on joints,in accordance with NEMATC-3 as manufactured by Carlon,Certain Teed,and Kraloy. L. Elbows and Bends 1. Rigid, non-metallic conduit system shall use PVC-coated rigid aluminum conduit for all bends other than those which can be purchased from the factory(factory bends). The PVC-coated rigid aluminum conduit shall meet the requirements of rigid steel conduit;40 mil PVC, exterior coating and 2 mil red urethane interior coating.Acceptable Manufacturers shall be Rob Roy Plastibond Red, Ocal,and Perma-Cote. 2. Other conduit systems shall use same material as the conduit with which they are installed. M. Conduit Seals for Wall and Floor Penetrations 1. For existing walls and floors with above grade penetrations,the seals shall consist of the following: a. Utilize non-shrink grout to seal between conduit and wall or floor. b. Utilize PVC-coated rigid aluminum conduit. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-4 N. Smoke and Fire Seals 1. Material shall be intumescent,one part(requiring no mixing)and capable of expanding up to a minimum of eight times. Material shall be UL classified with a fire rating equal to or greater than the penetrated material. Products to be in caulk, putty,wrap strip,sheet, or access kit form. Approved product is 3M "Fire Barrier". 0. Expansion Fittings 1. Linear expansion fittings shall be aluminum with aluminum bonding jumpers;allow for 8-inch movement. Approved product is OZ Gedney ZX or Crouse Hinds type XJGSA. 2. Combination linear and deflection fittings shall be 3/4-inch axial expansion and contraction movement,3/4-inch parallel misalignment movement,and up to 30 degrees of angular movement in any direction. It shall be of copper-free aluminum,with exterior bonding jumper of tinned copper braid and 316 stainless grounding straps, Cooper Crouse-Hinds Model XD as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.,or equal. P. Accessories 1. Reducers,bushings,washers,etc.,shall be cadmium-plated malleable iron with dimensions best suited for the application. Q. Conduit Drains 1. Shall be 316 stainless steel as manufactured by Crouse Hinds,ECD Universal,or engineer-approved equal. R. Ductbank Spacers 1. Shall be interlocking module spacers as manufactured by Formex or engineer-approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary wiring,connections,and services to maintain existing systems in service during construction. B. When work must be performed on energized equipment,circuits,or panels,use personnel experienced in such operations. Proper PPE, procedures,and signoffs must be obtained prior to beginning work; each facility may have unique requirement for working energized equipment. C. For all existing electrical services, maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the OWNER/ENGINEER at least one week in advance, before partially or completely disabling any system. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Unless conduit routing and locations are shown on the Drawings,the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the placement of conduit system and related components with other trades and existing installations. B. Minimum above ground conduit size shall be%-inch trade size and the minimum below grade conduit size shall be 1-inch trade size, unless specified otherwise on Drawings. C. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete without ENGINEER's permission. When penetrating concrete and at underground bends, use PVC-coated rigid aluminum conduits. D. Conduit systems for the installation of Fiber Optic Cables shall not contain conduit bodies or device boxes,unless written permission is obtained from the ENGINEER. All Fiber Optic Cable raceway boxes shall contain more than 12 inches of bend radius. E. Raceway Fittings shall be compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-5 1. For PVC Externally Coated Conduits, use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks,and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting or conduit manufacturer. F. Conduit System Usage Schedule 1. Unless shown on the Drawings or specified otherwise,the conduit types shall be installed with respect to the location as follows: a. Rigid Metal Conduit:Use only when specified in Drawings. b. Flexible Metal Conduit Non-Hazardous Locations:Use only when specified in Drawings. c. Flexible Metal Conduit Hazardous Locations:Make connections to vibrating equipment utilizing flexible conduit rated for the area. d. Rigid Aluminum Conduit:Unless noted otherwise,rigid aluminum conduits are used for above grade areas for both in-door and out-door locations and for both exposed and concealed locations other than concrete encasement applications. e. Aluminum Flexible Metal Conduit: Unless noted otherwise, used for in-door fixture whip connections to light fixtures with a maximum length of 3 feet. Whips with prefabricated cables are not permitted. Aluminum flexible metal conduits may be used only at non-hazardous locations. f. Liquid-tight Aluminum Flexible Metal Conduit: Unless noted otherwise, used for raceway connections to vibrating equipment or to instrumentation (maximum length of 6 feet),used for out-door fixture whip connections to lighting fixtures with a maximum length of 3 feet. Liquid- tight aluminum flexible metal conduits may be used only at non-hazardous locations. g. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit:Use only when specified in Drawings. h. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Not used. i. PVC Coated Aluminum Conduit: Used for underground conduit bends,and is preferred conduit used with sleeves installed through concrete walls and floors utilizing non-shrink grout for seal. When specified on drawings, PVC-coated aluminum conduits may be used for conduit stub ups through concrete floors, inside Chlorine and Caustic rooms, as well as in wet-wells and other areas. j. PVC-coated Rigid Metal (Steel)Conduit:Use only when specified in Drawings. k. Rigid PVC Conduit: Unless noted otherwise,Schedule 40 rigid PVC conduits are used with red dyed reinforced concrete for underground installations,in wet-wells,and for conduit stubbed up through concrete floor under free standing enclosures. When specified on drawings, Schedule 80 rigid PVC conduits may be used in Chlorine or Caustic rooms. Rigid PVC Conduits may be used in non-hazardous locations only. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Size conduits as indicated on the drawings and as required by the NEC. 2. Complete conduit installation in all details plus ensure the conduit is swabbed cleaned before beginning conductor installation. 3. Keep conduits at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues,steam,or water pipes and install the conduits above the flues,steam,or water pipes. 4. Conduits shall not exceed three 90-degree bends without a pull box or conduit device that can be used for pulling. Pull boxes shall be provided as required or as directed. 5. During the conduit installation period, while the conduit-end is not being worked on, the conduit- end shall be tightly plugged to prohibit dust, moisture, or debris. Duxseal or 3M seal, or engineer- approved equal,shall be used to plug the conduit-end. Plugging with tape is prohibited. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-6 6. Where conduits enter or leave the raceway system and where the conduit originate or terminate could be subjected to the entry of moisture, rain, or liquid of any type, particularly where the termination of such conduits terminate in any equipment,new or existing at a lower elevation,such conduits shall be tightly sealed at the higher elevation, both before and after the installation of cables,such that there shall be no entry of water or moisture to the Conduit System at any time. Any damage to new or existing equipment shall be corrected by complete replacement of such equipment,at no cost to the OWNER. Cleaning or drying of such equipment will not be acceptable. 7. Make all conduit joints mechanically tight,electrically continuous,and watertight. Pitch conduits in a manner to avoid creating moisture traps. 8. Provide conduit expansion fittings at structural expansion locations, at seismic joints and on exposed conduit runs of more than 100 feet or as required. Provide combination expansion/deflection fittings where conduits are concealed at thesejoints. For metallic conduits, provide ground bonding jumpers across expansion/deflection fittings. 9. Cap conduits with standard manufactured cap as soon as the conduits have been permanently installed in place. For all spare conduits,the caps will remain in place. 10. Conceal conduits from view in all areas except mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, basements, vaults,maintenance closets,and crawl spaces. Should it appear necessary to expose a conduit then bring to the attention of the Architect and ENGINEER and rearrange the work to facilitate an approved installation. 11. Bends and offsets in conduits may be done with approved bending devices. Do not install conduits which have had their walls crushed and deformed and their surface finish damaged due to bending. 12. Ream and remove burrs before conductors are pulled in. 13. Install and neatly rack exposed conduits parallel and perpendicular to the building walls. Do not install exposed diagonal conduits. 14. Do not run conduits exposed on roof unless approval is obtained prior to installation. 15. Install conduit other than PVC with threaded couplings and other threaded fittings.Threadless or clamp type fittings shall not be used on metallic conduit. 16. A conduit identification plate shall be installed on all power, instrumentation,alarm,and control conduits at each end of the run and at intermediate junction boxes, manholes, handholes,etc. Conduit plates shall be installed before conductors are pulled into conduits. Exact identification plate location shall be coordinated with the OWNER/ENGINEER at the time of installation to provide uniformity of placement and ease of reading. Conduit numbers shall be exactly as shown on the drawings. B. Underground 1. Reference Section 26 05 43,Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems. 2. All underground conduits shall be concrete encased with red dyed reinforced concrete, no exceptions without written permission from ENGINEER. Conduit,which is below the finished grade, encased in concrete,shall be rigid PVC Schedule 40 conduit, except where indicated on the drawings or otherwise stated herein. 3. When not realized on drawings, bury underground encased conduit(s) a minimum of 24 inches deep to the top of the concrete encasement for 0-1000-volt systems, 30 inches deep to the top of the concrete encasement for 1000-22 kilovolt systems. Backfill encased conduit with material which is free from large rock, paving material, or large angular substance. 4. Install underground conduit with the conduit duct bank dimensions shown on the drawings. Adhere to conduit spacing by using spacers at necessary intervals to ensure that proper spacing is maintained. 5. Conduit extending into concrete shall not be closer than 2 inches from adjacent conduit, or as indicated on the drawings. For pre-pour concrete installations,install the conduit such that it not closer than 1 inch from any reinforcement bars. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-7 6. For conduits stubbed up under freestanding enclosures where enclosures are flush with the surface, such as motor control centers shall utilize PVC Schedule 40 conduit with a PVC bell end terminator solvent welded onto each conduit end,the bell end may extend above the concrete surface. 7. For conduits stubbed up in concrete pre-pour installations,and where conduit to be extended after the pour, utilize PVC-coated rigid aluminum conduit and fittings. Install a threaded fitting with plug so that the top of the fitting is flush with the concrete or finished floor surface after the pour. 8. No conduit shall be placed into a concrete floor slab or a concrete beam. 9. CONTRACTOR shall properly tape PVC-coated aluminum conduit where it transitions to PVC conduit in underground concrete encased conduits so that no aluminum conduit is in contact with concrete encasement.Tape shall be recommended by PVC-coated aluminum conduit manufacturer. C. Sleeve and Seal Installations 1. For concrete slabs and concrete walls,when possible,install sleeves into slab or wall prior to concrete pour. If not possible then core-drill location. If concrete forms are used,verify dimensions are correctly sized. 2. Use circular sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches,thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to or greater than 50 inches,thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 3. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. 4. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 5. When space exists between seal and wall or floor,seal space with non-shrink grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry. When other material is penetrated,contact ENGINEER for approved method and material. 6. Roof-Penetration Sleeves:Use only when approved by ENGINEER/OWNER. 7. For existing walls and floors, use non-shrink grout to seal between the PVC-coated rigid aluminum conduit and the wall/floor. Ensure enough clearance between conduit(s)and wall/floor to allow for application of non-shrink grout. 8. For new construction: a. Exterior-wall penetrations above ground, utilize 316 stainless steel sleeves, mechanical sleeve seals and water stop. Select sleeve size to allow for enough annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. b. Exterior-wall penetrations underground,utilize cast-iron"wall pipes"for sleeves,mechanical sleeve seals and water stop.Size sleeves to allow for enough annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. c. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve.Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve.Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. D. Routing and Support 1. Reference Section 26 05 29,Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 2. Route conduits in close proximity to the conduit routes where shown on the Drawings. Route conduits that do not have a specified route in the most direct path between the two points,i.e., home runs shown with an arrow symbol. 3. Conduit supports,other than for underground raceways,shall be spaced at intervals of 8 feet or less,as required to obtain rigid construction. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-8 4. Install conduit at elevations which maintain headroom, and at locations which avoid interference with other work requiring grading of pipe,the structure,finished walls,etc.Avoid crossing other work. Conduits shall not be placed in close proximity to equipment, systems, and service lines. Maintain a minimum of 6-inch separation, except in crossing which shall be a minimum of 3 inch. Conduits shall not be installed/concealed between wall supports/studs which contain water or steam piping. 5. Conduits in buildings may be exposed on unfinished ceilings and basements, as shown on the plans. Rigidly support conduits to the building structures using hardware bolted or screwed to the structure.The mounting hardware shall not mount the conduit directly on concrete walls and ceilings but shall space the conduit away from the surfaces using strut channel or approved method. 6. Rigid aluminum conduit systems shall utilize stainless straps,clamps,and strut channel.The contactor shall provide a neoprene barrier around the conduit to prevent corrosion.The neoprene barrier shall prevent the stainless steel from coming in contact with the aluminum conduit. 7. Aluminum conduit,straps,and struts shall not be in direct contact with concrete. Provide a rubber washer between the two materials 8. PVC coated aluminum conduit and PVC coated rigid metal(steel)conduits shall utilize PVC factory coated straps,clamps,and thread rods,etc.as manufactured by Robroy. 9. Nuts,bolts,concrete anchor bolts,and other metallic fasteners shall be stainless steel. 10. The support structure for a group of conduits(four or more)shall provide space for an additional 25 percent of conduits. 11. Conduits terminating at a cable tray shall be supported independently from the cable tray. Provide a conduit support within 1 foot of the cable tray. The weight of the conduit shall not bear on the cable tray. E. Firestopping 1. For fire-rated walls and floor penetrations, install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. If openings pre-exist and are compatible with firestop system used during construction of floor or wall,then sleeves may be omitted;however,after electrical installation the walls and floors must be restored to original fire-resistance rating of the assembly. 2. Apply firestopping material to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies in the annular clear space between raceway and sleeve to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Use"Fire Seal" Poke Thru PTFS by OZ/Gedney or equal for firestopping material. 3. After conductors/cables have been pulled and terminated within conduit stubbed up at enclosures, floors, panels,etc. use 3M Fire Barrier"Water Tight Sealant"to plug air space between conductors and conduit-this is to help prevent unwanted gases to enter. F. Terminations 1. For conduit terminations at locations subject to moisture or vibration,use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No.4 AWG. 2. For flexible conduit terminations,use maximum of 36 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures. For equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission,or movement;and for transformers and motors, use a maximum of 48 inches of flexible conduit. 3. Use watertight hubs to fasten conduits to enclosures in wet or damp locations,else use non- watertight threaded hubs for termination of conduit to enclosures. Locknut termination of conduits shall not be used. 4. Flexible conduit shall not be used for terminations at enclosures, panel boards, motor control centers,switchgear,or other non-vibrating devices and lighting fixtures unless approved by the ENGINEER. 5. Conduits containing equipment grounding conductors and terminating in metal enclosures shall have insulated throat grounding bushings. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-9 G. Protection 1. Ground conduits in accordance with the National Electrical Code and Section 26 05 26,Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 2. Conduit ends exposed to the weather or corrosive gases shall be sealed with conduit sealing bushings. 3. At wet or damp locations,for conduit terminating in control panels,or enclosure containing electrical equipment,the conduit shall enter from the bottom of the panel or enclosure,and the raceway shall be sealed with a removable silicone sealant. 4. Conduits passing from heated to unheated spaces,exterior spaces, refrigerated spaces,cold air plenums,etc.,shall be sealed with"Duxseal,"as manufactured by Mansville or 3M,or seal fitting to prevent the accumulation of condensation. 5. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings,finishes,and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Repair any damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.13-11 SECTION 26 05 33.16 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall include furnishing of all labor,tools, materials, and equipment necessary to install a completed system containing pull boxes and junction boxes in accordance with the National Electrical Code(NEC1 as shown on drawings and as specified herein. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall consist of materials designed expressly for containing wires and cables, including but not limited to conduit fittings,supports,fasteners,sub-panels,terminals,and related material. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 26 Electrical specifications. B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for sizing all pull boxes and junction boxes per the National Electrical Code(NEC1 unless otherwise stated on Drawings or in these specifications. C. Cooperation with contractors under separate contracts is required,and the work described herein and shown on the Drawings shall be coordinated as required to fulfill the intent of the Contract. D. Work shall include methods and materials for pull boxes and junction boxes,plus the following where applicable: 1. Conduit for Electrical Systems: Reference Section 26 05 33.13,Conduit for Electrical Systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or Drawings,and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All raceways,power and control wiring,fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings,shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include Product Data for Material Used and Shop Drawings: 1. Pull Boxes. 2. Junction Boxes. 3. Sizing Calculations for determining the pull boxes and junction boxes size shall be submitted to the ENGINEER with the pull box or junction box initial submittal. Submittals without the sizing calculation will not be accepted. 4. Certificates a. Labels of Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.,affixed to each box. b. If materials are by manufacturer other than those specified,submit certification that material meets applicable Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated,the current editions of the following apply to the work of this Section: 1. International Electrical Testing Association(NETA1 standards-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 2. National Electrical Code(NEC1. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.16-1 3. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace(NFPA 70E}. 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA}. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA}. 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA}. 7. American National Standards Institute(ANSI}. 8. International Society of Automation (ISA}. 9. Underwriters Laboratories(UL}UL6Aand 514B. 10. Factory Mutual(FM}. 11. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE}. 12. ANSI C80.5-Aluminum Conduit. 13. ANSI/NEMA FB 1-Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes,and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 14. NEMA TC 2-Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit(EPC-40 and EPC-801. 15. NEMA TC 3-PVC Fittings for use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 16. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 17. ANSI/NEMA OS 1-Sheet Steel Outlet boxes, Device boxes,Covers and box. B. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall be provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA}, No. 70- National Electrical Code(NEC},Article No. 590-Temporary Installations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements,circuits, raceways,and equipment arrangements are as shown on the Drawings. Verify location and box supports do not constrict or prevent pipes,conduit,or instruments from inspection or access. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Robroy. 2. O/Z Gedney. 3. Hubbell. 4. Hoffman. 5. Appleton. 6. Killark. 7. Crouse Hinds. 8. Bryant. 9. Raco. 10. Perma-Cote. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store,and handle equipment components in accordance with shop drawings,manufacturer's written instructions,and the following: 1. Deliver material for the boxes to the project in full cartons with name,size,type,on the label. 2. Store material for the boxes in a manner to prevent damage from the elements,personnel, equipment,and moisture. 1.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.16-2 1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00,Electrical General Provisions. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Special Warranty:CONTRACTOR and/or manufacturer agree to repair or replace components that fail(s} in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Provide warranty per Division 01,Warranties and Bonds,and as specified herein. 2. The cost for the removal, shipment, repair,and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in the warranty,as well as correction of defective work. 3. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for the period specified in Division 01, Warranties and Bonds, from the date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such a period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition.Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER. 1.10 SCHEDULES A. Schedule with the OWNER/ENGINEER for required shutdowns to install any pull box orjunction box. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall meet or exceed the specifications and requirements of the latest governing agency. B. All pull box and junction box supports,spacers,clamps,hangers,channel, nuts,bolts,washers,etc.,shall be made of 316 stainless steel unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. The CONTRACTOR shall use a tagging format for each junction box and pull box to include area abbreviation and number or as shown on the drawings. Where modifications or additions are made to existing equipment,the CONTRACTOR shall replace existing tags with the new modified tags. Each box tag shall be embossed stainless steel permanently secured to the box-front without screws. D. For Junction Box hardware,reference division 40,or if supplied,reference specification 26 2913.01 for types of hardware. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General Areas 1. Exposed, indoor,ventilated, non-hazardous area where corrosive chemicals such as sodium hypochlorite and fluoride are not present,pull boxes and junction boxes shall be NEMA 12 painted galvanized steel. 2. Exposed,indoor, non-ventilated, non-hazardous area where corrosive chemicals such as sodium hypochlorite and fluoride are not present, pull boxes and junction boxes shall be NEMA 4X and made of 316 stainless steel, unless specified otherwise on the Drawings. 3. Exposed,outdoor, non-hazardous area where corrosive chemicals such as sodium hypochlorite and fluoride are not present, pull boxes and junction boxes shall be NEMA 4X and made of 316 stainless steel. 4. Concealed pull boxes and junction boxes are permissible in ceiling areas when meeting the following:maintenance has full accessibility, meet NEMA 4X, made of 316 stainless steel,and in non-hazardous area. 5. NEMA 4X pull boxes and junction boxes manufactured with holes for mounting will not be acceptable. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.16-3 a. NEMA 4X pull boxes and junction boxes shall have continuously welded seams ground smooth, continuous hinged door for boxes larger than 12-inches,quarter turn latches,with foam gaskets. b. NEMA 4X pull boxes and junction boxes shall be constructed of not less than 16-gauge 316 stainless steel as manufactured by Hoffman. 6. Pull boxes installed in floors:only when permission from ENGINEER is given in writing. 7. NEMA 1 or NEMA 1A boxes shall not be used unless indicated on the Drawings. B. Flush-mounted Pull Boxes 1. Shall be NEMA 4X,indoor,316L stainless steel,non-hazardous areas,and have overlapping covers with flush-head stainless steel retaining screws. C. Hazardous Areas 1. Use boxes that meet or exceed an area classification listing as defined in NEC Articles 500,501,502, and 503. 2. Boxes constructed for either indoor or outdoor use in hazardous areas shall be copper-free aluminum,with stainless steel hinged cover,watertight neoprene cover gasket with stainless steel bolts.Boxes shall be rated NEMA 7.All penetrations shall be minimum 3/4-inch,factory drilled and tapped. Enclosures shall be Type EJB Style C as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds or Appleton. 3. Explosion-proof fittings shall be designed for Class 1 Division 1,Group D, hazardous locations. Fittings shall be of copper-free aluminum, consist of seals,breathers,and drains of type ED,as required for the application. Fittings shall be manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.,Appleton Electric Co.,O.Z./Gedney Co., or equal. D. Pump Rooms 1. Use NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel boxes for pump rooms not in a hazardous area. The box shall be provided with watertight gasketed covers fastened with stainless steel screws. All supports and mounting hardware shall be 316 stainless steel unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Boxes shall be provided with integral mounting lugs. E. Chemical Rooms 1. Use NEMA 4X, non-metallic, made of PVC or fiberglass reinforced polyester boxes. Material shall be chosen based on chemical compatibility. 2. In all cases the box material shall be compatible with the chemicals used. Boxes shall have UV inhibitors and shall not have any factory installed holes or knockouts. Access doors shall include quick-release latches. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary wiring,connections,and services to maintain existing systems in service during construction. B. When work must be performed on energized equipment,circuits,or panels,use personnel experienced in such operations. Proper PPE, procedures,and signoffs must be obtained prior to beginning work; each facility may have unique requirement for working energized equipment. C. For all existing electrical services, maintain the existing system in service until the new system is complete and ready for service. Disable the system only to make switchovers and connections.Obtain permission from the OWNER/ENGINEER at least one week in advance before partially or completely disabling any system. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes are for use with raceway systems only. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.16-4 B. Unless pull boxes and junction boxes location(sj are shown on the drawings,the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the placement of boxes and related components with other trades and existing installations. C. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall have NEMA ratings suitable for the location in which they are installed. D. Where the raceway system connects to junction boxes and pull boxes in a general area, use a double locknut(one outer and one inner}plus insulated bushing. E. Boxes shall be provided with factory mounting lugs. Drilling through the back of any pull or junction box is prohibited,and if so installed shall be removed and replaced,with no increase in the Contract Price or Construction schedule. F. Pull boxes for the installation of Fiber Optic Cables shall contain more than 12 inches of bend radius; however,the box shall meet or exceed all requirements for Fiber Optic cables. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Use separate pull boxes and junction boxes for power circuits,lighting circuits,control circuits, DC circuits,and communication circuits. B. Pull and junction boxes shall not be fastened directly to concrete. Provide a neoprene isolation pad between the enclosure and concrete.The neoprene pad shall extend beyond the pull/junction box. C. Install pull boxes where required by the National Electrical Code,wherever required to overcome mechanical difficulties, meet pulling bend requirements,and as specified on drawings. D. Install pull boxes in indoor conduit systems at not more than 200 feet apart, not to exceed maximum pulling force of the conductor or cables,when conduit runs are not broken byjunction,outlet boxes,or pulling fitting. E. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be accessible and not buried. F. Do not install boxes together back-to-back,provide a minimum of 6-inch separation.In acoustic-rated walls, provide 24-inch separation between the back of the boxes. G. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that are connected to rigid metal conduits,and both rigid metal conduits are supported within 12 inches of box. H. Junction boxes shall be approved by the ENGINEER in writing. The submittal request must include CAD drawings, Bill-of-Material, area location,and reason for request if not indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533.16-5 SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall include furnishing of all labor,tools, materials, and equipment necessary to install a completed underground ductbank system in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC),as shown on drawings,and as specified herein. An underground ductbank system, sometimes referred to as underground raceway system,shall consist of materials designed expressly for containing wires and cables, including but not limited to conduit, manholes, handholes,cable management handholes,ladders,boxes,duct,spacers,couplings,bends,elbows,adapters,reinforcing steel,concrete, plugs,covers, raceway boxes, hangers,supports,fasteners,and related material. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 26 Electrical specifications. B. Coordination with contractors under separate contracts is required,and the work described herein and shown on the drawings shall be coordinated as required to fulfill the intent of the Contract. C. Work shall include methods and materials forthe underground ductbank system(s)and equipment,plus the following where applicable: 1. Conduit for Electrical Systems: Reference Section 26 05 33.13,Conduit for Electrical Systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or drawings,and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All raceways,power and control wiring,fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings,shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include: 1. Shop drawings for precast of factory fabricated underground manhole, handhole and cable management handhole structures,including plans,elevations,sections,details,attachments to other work, accessories,and the following: a. Ductbank entry provisions,including quantity of conduits,locations,conduit sizes,conduit name,and cable(s)to be routed through the conduit. b. Detailed layout showing elevation of conduits entering and exiting the structure. c. Reinforcement details. d. Frame,cover design,and frame support rings. e. Ladder details. f. Grounding details. g. Dimensioned locations of cable racks, lifting accessories, and sump. h. Joint details. 2. Shop drawings for fabricated manhole,handhole and cable management handhole and boxes other than precast concrete, including the following: a. Dimensioned plans,sections,and elevations. b. Fabrication plans and installation details. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543-1 c. Reinforcement details. d. Ductbank entry provisions,including quantity of conduits,locations,conduit sizes,conduit name, and cable(s)to be routed through the conduit. e. Detailed layout showing elevation of conduits entering and exiting the structure. f. Frame and cover design and any support rings. g. Ladder details. h. Grounding details. i. Dimensioned locations of cable racks and lifting accessories and sump. j. Joint details. 3. Shop drawings for each ductbank riser or vault entry,including plans,elevation,accessories,and the following: a. Dimensioned plans,sections,and elevations. b. Duct locations,spacing,and sizing. c. Equipment details to ensure placement and size of ductbank meet equipment criteria. d. Grounding details and plans. e. If for a utility service entry,then approved and signed plans from the utility must be submitted to ENGINEER with the riser plans. 4. Product Data for Material Used a. Ductbank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. b. Ducts and conduits and their accessories,including elbows,bends,fittings,and solvent cement for PVC. c. Accessories for manholes, handholes, cable management handholes, boxes, and ladders. d. Conduit markers. e. Marking tape. f. Ductbank markers. 5. Drawings for ductbank coordination which realize duct profiles and coordination with other underground utilities or underground piping. The Drawing(s)shall include the following: a. Detail plans and sections realizing spacing and elevations when crossing underground pipes. b. Detail procedures for backfill and compacting of soils. c. Signed agreement from underground piping contractor(for new construction)and from OWNER and ENGINEER(for existing piping). If an electric utility pipe system is undermined or crossed,then sign-off from utility company is required. 6. CONTRACTOR shall provide manhole and handhole pulling calculations for each pull to verify that cable's rated pulling tension is not exceeded. Reference other specifications for additional requirements. 7. Strength tests for each precast manhole and handhole shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. 8. Certificates a. For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes,handholes and cable management handholes as well as cast-in-place manholes and handholes. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated,the current editions of the following apply to the work of this Section: 1. National Electrical Code(NEC-NFPA 70). 2. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace(NFPA 70E). 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA)-Excavation Safety Standards. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543-2 6. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 7. International Society of Automation (ISA). 8. Underwriters Laboratories(UL)UL 6A and 514B. 9. Factory Mutual(FM). 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE). 11. National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA). 12. ASTM A615/A615M-06a-Standard Specifications for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 13. ASTM A536-Standard Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings. 14. ASTM A-48-Gray Iron Castings. 15. ASTM C-850-Specifications for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. 16. ASTM D-698a-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort. 17. ACI 301. 18. NEMA TC 2-Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit(EPC-40 and EPC-80). 19. NEMA TC 3-PVC Fittings for use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. B. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall be provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No. 70- National Electrical Code(NEC),Article No.590-Temporary Installations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements,circuits,raceways,and equipment arrangements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Precast items shall be manufactured by a NPCA(National Precast Concrete Association)Certified Plant. C. Concrete for precast items shall obtain a compressive strength of 5000 psi minimum at 28 days. D. Precast concrete structures shall be tested or inspected according to ASTM C 1037 and other applicable standards. Strength tests of complete manholes, handholes and cable management handholes shall be by an independent testing agency or the manufacturer; if using the manufacturer,then a qualified registered professional engineer shall certify the tests by the manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store,and handle equipment components in accordance with shop drawings,manufacturer's written instructions,and the following: 1. Deliver material for the underground ductbank and raceway system to the project in full cartons or reels marked with name,size,type,and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label. 2. Store material for the underground ductbank and raceway system in a manner to prevent damage from the elements, personnel, equipment,and moisture. 3. Store ducts(RNC or PVC conduit)on a flat surface and make necessary provisions to prevent warping or deterioration. Protect stored ducts from direct sunrays. 1.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00,Electrical General Provisions. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543-3 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Special Warranty:CONTRACTOR and/or manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Provide warranty per Division 01,Warranties and Bonds,and as specified herein. 2. The cost for the removal, shipment, repair,and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in the warranty,as well as correction of defective work. 3. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for the period specified in Division 01, Warranties and Bonds, from the date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such a period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition.Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER. 1.10 SCHEDULES A. Schedule with the OWNER/ENGINEER for required shutdowns to accommodate underground ductbank and raceway system installations. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, cable management handholes and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities,site grading,and surface features as determined in the field. B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and ductbank entrances into manholes, handholes, cable management handholes and vaults with final locations and profiles of ducts and ductbanks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions,and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes, handholes and cable management handholes. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Underground ductbanks and raceways shall meet or exceed the specifications and requirements of the latest governing agency. B. The minimum inside dimensions of manholes shall be 6 feet x 6 feet x 8 feet,or as realized on the Drawings. Handholes'inside dimensions shall be a minimum of 4 feet x 4 feet x 4 feet or as realized on the Drawings. Cable Management Handhole's inside dimensions shall be a minimum of 2 feet x 2 feet x 3 feet deep or as realized on the Drawings. In all cases,the manhole, handhole and cable management handhole shall be sized large enough by the CONTRACTOR to meet ductbank depth and width requirements,space constraints for walls,and for authority having jurisdiction. C. Handholes shall not be used on medium-voltage power systems. All cables shall be racked on non-metallic cable racks designed for installation on walls of manholes and handholes. Handholes and manholes in streets must be approved by the ENGINEER and shall meet state Department of Transportation standards. D. Cable Management Handholes are to be used only for communication cables,antenna cable and other types of cables as shown on the drawings. Cable Management Handholes shall be located near rackstands, communication towers,and buildings as shown on the drawings. The goal of the Cable Management Handhole is to accumulate cable slack to prevent the cable slack from being located inside above ground enclosures. E. The maximum cable length between manholes or handholes,shall be less than 400 feet for an essentially straight run,and reduced by 50 feet for each bend of over 45 degrees;however,the total bends shall not exceed 360 degrees between manholes, handholes and termination points. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543-4 F. The CONTRACTOR shall install handholes, manholes and cable management handholes as indicated on the drawings, at a minimum. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the necessary cable-pulling calculations for tensions and pressures. The CONTRACTOR shall add handholes and manholes into the ductbank to ensure that the maximum tension or sidewall pressures are not exceeded for the conductor(s)and cable being pulled. The CONTRACTOR shall inform the ENGINEER of additional handholes or manholes added to the ductbank design. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Electrical Duct 1. Electrical duct shall be rigid non-metallic conduit(RNC) utilizing Schedule 40 PVC,and encased in red-dyed reinforced concrete, unless otherwise noted on Drawings and approved bythe ENGINEER. 2. RNC fittings shall be solvent welded with slip-on joints and of same manufacturer as conduit. 3. Each electrical duct terminating in manholes, handholes, cable management handholes and vaults shall use bell end fittings of the same size and type as the raceway. 4. Thin wall conduit for encased burial(type EB)is not acceptable for any application. 5. RNC conduit shall have a UL Label. 6. RNC conduit and fittings shall be manufactured by Carlon,Certain Teed, Kraloy,or engineer- approved equal. 7. Bends and offsets greater than 20 degrees shall be with PVC-coated rigid aluminum conduit using long radius bends. B. PVC-coated rigid aluminum conduit shall be in accordance with specification Section 26 05 33.13 "Conduit for Electrical System". C. Electrical Duct Spacers(or Separators)shall be factory-fabricated rigid PVC with interlocking spacers, sized for type and size of electrical duct used,and selected to provide minimum duct spacing while supporting ducts during the application of concrete or backfilling. Manufacturers to be Underground Devices, Inc.;Carlon;Vertical-Lock;or engineer-approved equal. D. Concrete and Grout for Underground Ducts 1. Concrete mixtures shall comply with ACI 301 requirements. 2. Concrete shall be of the same type, brand,and source throughout project. 3. Concrete encasement for raceways and ductbanks shall be cast-in-place,of normal weight concrete weighing not more than 145 pcf with compressive strength,a minimum of 3000 psi at 28 days, or greater if required by other Divisions of the Specifications. 4. Concrete shall have crushed aggregate with a maximum size of 3/4 inch,a target slump of 4 to 5 inch and flow freely without the use of vibrators. 5. Install red dye of 40 pounds per 10 cubic yards of concrete, installed in the truck at the concrete plant. 6. Grout shall be waterproof and non-shrink type. E. Steel Reinforcement for Underground Ducts 1. Reinforcing Bars shall meet ASTM A615,Grade 60,deformed. 2. Sizes and locations of reinforcing shall be as realized on Drawings. F. Manhole openings shall be hinged metal access hatches with support struts and recessed handles. Access hatches shall comply with structural design loading for traffic-bearing loads.Access hatches shall also comply with the following: 1. Top cover surface shall have raised lettering"Electrical". 2. On the top of the surface, either on the cover or on the concrete, a 316 Stainless Steel plate shall be installed with mechanical anchors (if onto concrete) and with 316 Stainless Steel screws (if onto the cover).The plate shall include the name of handhole or manhole. 3. Allow for opening to 180 degrees. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543-5 4. Not to exceed 55 pounds equivalent lift. G. Handhole and cable management handhole openings shall be round with minimum size as indicated on drawings.Access hatches shall comply with structural design loading for traffic-bearing loads.Access hatches shall also comply with the following: 1. Top cover surface shall have raised lettering"Electrical". 2. On the top of the surface,either on the cover or on the concrete,a 316 Stainless Steel plate shall be installed with mechanical anchors (if onto concrete) and with 316 Stainless Steel screws (if onto the cover).The plate shall include the name of the handhole or cable management handhole. 3. Allow for lifting the hatch at two locations. 4. Provide a lifting tool for each type of hatch. H. Pulling Eyes installed in concrete walls shall consist of an eyebolt with a 2-inch diameter eye, 1-inch by 4-inch exposed bolt,and with reinforcing bar fastening insert rated for 13,000 Ibf tension. I. Pulling and lifting irons shall be of copolymer polypropylene coated%-inch diameter cable,tensile strength rated at 270,000 psi,with polyethylene pulling iron pocket,all recessed in the manhole wall opposite each duct entry inside a pulling iron pocket. Pulling irons shall be manufactured by M.A. Industries, Inc., Peachtree,GA;or Bowco Industries, Portland,OR. Pulling irons for handholes shall have the pulling iron located in the floor of the handhole near the center of the handhole opposite the duct entry. J. Concrete warning Planks shall be 22 inches by 40 inches by 4 inches thick and from 6000 psi concrete. The concrete color shall be red. The text marking on each plank shall be"ELECTRIC DUCTBANK"with an arrow indicating direction of ductbank. Letters to be%-inch wide and%-inch deep. K. Inserts and Anchors 1. Bolting inserts shall be flared;contain threaded inserts;and be non-corrosive,chemical-resistant, non-conductive thermoplastic material. A typical size is 0.5-inch I.D. by 2.75 inch deep,flared to 1.25 inch at base. Bolting inserts shall be used with an anchor insert locator which is sheared off during form removal. Bolting inserts and locators shall be manufactured by M.A. Industries, or engineer-approved equal. 2. Expansion anchors are for installation after concrete is cast;expansion anchors shall be zinc-plated, carbon-steel-wedge type with stainless steel expander clip with 0.5-inch bolt.They shall be rated at 5300 Ibf pullout strength and minimum of 6800 Ibf shear strength. L. Cable racks shall be heavy duty, non-metallic,with components fabricated from non-conductive fiberglass-reinforced polymer. 1. Cable rack stanchions shall be nominal 36 inches high by 4 inches wide and contain a minimum of nine holes for arm attachment. 2. Cable rack arms shall be capable of being locked in position. Arms shall be available in lengths ranging from 3 inches with a 450-pound rating to 20 inches with a 250-pound rating. The top of arm shall be nominally 4 inches wide and arm shall have slots for cable ties. 3. Cable rack arms shall be vertically spaced not greater than 24 inches on center. 4. Fasten stanchions to inserts/anchors with 316 stainless steel bolts. 5. Furnish inserts for all present and future cable racks as shown on the Drawings. 6. Cable racks shall be manufactured by Underground Devices, Inc. (CR36-B, 3HDS, RA04, RA20- typical);or engineer approved equal. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543-6 M. Precast Manholes,Handholes and Cable Management Handholes 1. General a. Castings for manholes, handholes and cable management handholes positioned in roadways shall meet heavy dutyAASHTO M306 casting requirements and have a minimum of40,000 lbs. proof load on a 9-inch X 9-inch load test area. b. Castings for manholes, handholes and cable management handholes positioned in non- roadway areas shall meet light duty NPCA requirements;however,comply with minimum casting thickness as realized on the drawings. c. Manholes, handholes and cable management handholes minimum size shall be as realized on the Drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall increase size to comply with specifications, codes,and authority having jurisdiction. d. Manholes,handholes and cable management handholes are subject to compliance with all codes and these specifications. e. Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include the following: 1) Oldcastle Precast. 2) Carder Concrete Products. 3) Utility Vault Co. 2. Construction a. Concrete for manholes, handholes and cable management handholes shall have a 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi. Reinforcing steel shall be grade 60 with yield strength 60,000 P.S. b. Shall be supplied with interlocking mating sections,complete with accessories,water stop, hardware, and features. c. Shape shall be rectangular unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. d. Each precast manholes,handholes and cable management handholes shall have an opening in the top section designed for the cover. e. Each precast manhole's base section shall have provisions for an 18-inch diameter x 12-inch- deep concrete sump located near the center of the floor. 3. Precast Openings(Windows) a. The windows shall be located in the manholes, handholes and cable management handholes walls,arranged to match dimensions and elevations of ductbanks; plus an additional 6 inches vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations. b. The windows shall be located not less than 6 inches from the floor or roof. Windows shall be close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls. c. Window openings shall have cast-in-place,welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie into concrete envelopes of ductbanks. d. Window openings shall include a minimum of two additional No.4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening. e. In all cases,the ductbank shall meet or exceed burial depth requirements at the precast window. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543-7 4. Ductbank Terminations with Structural Connection a. Existing and New Pre-Cast Manholes,Handholes,Cable Management Handholes and Vaults: 1) Where Ductbanks terminate into structures which do not have threaded rebar couplers in the wall of the ductbank window,the reinforcing steel shall be dowelled into the structure at least one-half of the wall thickness every 6 inches around the perimeter of the window. The ductbank reinforcing bar shall be#5 rebar and set into the opening and secured with epoxy compound. a) Ductbank entries into a manhole,handhole or cable management handhole shall be centered on the entering window; if into a vault,then contact ENGINEER for best location. b) All ductbank connections with structure shall be watertight and withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground water at grade. b. New Manholes and Handholes Cast-In-Place 1) New manholes and handholes shall be provided with threaded splice bars, setting bars, and threaded rebar couplers, as manufactured by Meadow Burke Inc., at every 6 inches around the perimeter of the window and set at the center of the wall thickness. Overlap the ductbank reinforcing steel with screwlock couplers and connect to the manhole and handhole structure: a) Threaded splice bars 24 inches in length shall be installed in all of the existing threaded couplers,and the threaded splice bars lapped into the ductbank steel for the last 24 inches of the ductbank and tied to the ductbank reinforcing steel at the end for thatlength. b) Ductbank entries into the manhole or handhole shall be centered on the entering window. c) All ductbank connections with structure shall be watertight and withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground water at grade. 5. Concrete Knockout Panels a. Concrete knockout panels used for future conduit entrances inside the manhole or handhole. The knockout panels shall be 1.5 inches to 2 inches thick. 6. Joint Sealant a. Joint Sealant shall be Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion,cohesion,flexibility,and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground water at grade. 7. Hardware a. Each manhole and handhole shall include inserts for cable racks,installed at 3 inches on center. b. Each manhole and handhole shall have a#4/0 bare copper conductor ring around the inside perimeter of the manhole. Reference Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems,and Drawings,for more information. c. Sump frame and grate shall be class 30B gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A-48. N. Steps and Ladders 1. Vertical Stairways shall be installed into each manhole and handhole where indicated on Drawings: a. Manhole and handhole stairway shall include mounting brackets and braces. Stairway shall be fixed and constructed of fiberglass reinforced resin. Steps shall be safety yellow, 18-inch rung width with 16 inch rung spacing. b. Non-fixed ladders are not to be installed. c. Telescoping ladders are not to be installed. 0. Ductbank Sealing at Manholes, Handholes, Cable Management Handholes and Vaults 1. Install a water stop membrane around the perimeter surface of the window. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543-8 2. Use end bell fittings to terminate all ducts at windows of manholes,handholes,and vaults unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Maintain proper spacing of ducts. 3. Use waterproof non-shrink grout for all duct sealings. Apply waterproof non-shrink grout at exterior and interior of structure. 4. Do not use duct terminators unless given written permission by the ENGINEER. P. Waterproofing 1. The waterproofing material shall be a single-component asphalt emulsion waterproofing membrane manufactured by Tremco,such as TREMproof 250GC,or engineer approved equal. It is a rapid-curing, high-solids,VOC-compliant polyurethane waterproofing membrane. a. TREMproof 250GC requires the concrete to be cured for 24 hours prior to application. b. The CONTRACTOR shall use the viscosities available for roller application;spraying and troweling are not acceptable. c. Apply waterproofing only when temperatures are above 40 degrees F. d. Waterproofing must meet ASTM C 836. e. CONTRACTOR shall apply waterproofing to a dry mil thickness of 60 mils around perimeter of each conduit penetration at a width of 2 feet external of the penetration. Q. Water Stop 1. In applications for manholes, handholes, cable management handholes or vault openings (windows),for ensuring a watertight seal with ductbanks,use a water stop material by BoMetals, Inc., product RF-4316,which is 4 inches wide by 2-3/8 inches tall: a. Ensure water stop material and concrete surface is free from oil dirt and concrete splatter prior to use. b. Ensure steel reinforcing bars do not interfere with positioning of water stop. c. Sandblast or grind the perimeter concrete surface prior to applying epoxy adhesion. d. Apply the epoxy adhesion 1/4 inch wider on both sides than the water stop material and at 1/8 inch thick around the perimeter of the opening. e. Before the epoxy cures,secure the water stop with a stainless-steel batten bar and anchors per the manufacturer's instructions. Use 3/16-inch x 1-1/4-inch stainless steel batten bar with 2- 1/4-inch x 1/4-inch stainless steel screws with stainless steel anchors. f. Care should be taken during concrete installment to prevent movement of the water stop. 2. In applications for pre-cast concrete walls, use the water stop material and application recommended by the pre-cast concrete supplier;however,in all cases,contact ENGINEER for approval of material and application. R. Mandrel 1. The mandrel shall be of aluminum;the diameter shall be 1/4 inch less than the bore of the duct and of length equal to the duct diameter. The mandrel shall have a leather or rubber gasket slightly larger than the bore of the duct; however, in all cases,the CONTRACTOR shall ensure the mandrel size is sufficiently sized for duct offsets,duct bends, or any duct transitions. S. Pull-Line 1. Pull-Lines shall be nylon, rated 1500-pound test,and shall be installed into all ducts. For ducts which will have plugs,the pull-line shall have double-back ends into the duct to permit the installation of duct plugs. T. Identifying tape for underground conduits shall be in accordance with specification Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543-9 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary wiring,connections,and services to maintain existing systems in service during construction. B. When work must be performed on energized equipment,circuits,or panels,use personnel experienced in such operations. Proper PPE, procedures,and signoffs must be obtained prior to beginning work; each facility may have unique requirement for working energized equipment. C. For all existing electrical services, maintain the existing system in service until the new system is complete and ready for service. Disable the system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the OWNER/ENGINEER at least one week in advance, before partially or completely disabling any system. D. Field verify the routing of all existing underground ductbanks,conduits,and piping systems before beginning the work. E. No wire shall be pulled until the ductbank system has been completed in every detail. 3.2 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR may modify the ductbank routing as necessary to avoid underground utilities or above-ground objects. Modification or rerouting for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR,or to reduce the length of duct run as designed,will not be permitted.The CONTRACTOR shall provide any alternate routing of the ductbanks to the OWNER/ENGINEER and, after approval, shall proceed with the installation. B. The CONTRACTOR shall saw cut and repair existing pavements,sidewalks,and walkways above new and modified existing ductbanks. C. Install raceways to drain away from buildings. Raceways between manholes or handholes shall drain toward the manhole or handhole. Raceway slopes shall not be less than 3 inches per 100 feet or more than 60 inches per 100 feet unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings,or to avoid existing pipes with ENGINEER's approval. D. Reinforce ductbanks as shown on the Drawings. E. Install raceway ducts in trenches on compacted earth. Use plastic spacers located not more than 4 feet apart to hold raceways in place. F. Minimum distance between ducts shall be 2 inches for like services, 12 inches between power and signal,and 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall or form wall. G. The minimum depth, measured from top of ductbank encasement to grade,for areas not subject to deliberate traffic is 24 inches and 36 inches for areas subject to deliberate traffic, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or as permitted by the OWNER/ENGINEER. H. Raceway terminations at manholes, handholes and cable management handholes,existing and new, shall be with end bells correctly sized for the PVC conduit. When duct terminators are approved by the ENGINEER,the duct's plastic terminators in the manholes shall be completely seated and attached to the terminators by using a solvent cement as recommended by the duct terminator manufacturer. I. Bends in Duct 1. Install ducts with standard factory fittings and accessories. 2. For small changes in direction or elevation,use factory 5-degree angle couplings. 3. For large changes in direction or elevation, use long sweeping bends of at least 10 times the nominal duct diameter, or larger,as required by the minimum bending radius of the cables, whichever is greater. a. Make bends of less radius only with expressed permission of the ENGINEER. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-10 4. PVC-coated aluminum conduit shall be used for duct bends and offsets greater than 20 degrees or when factory PVC bends are not available. Tape unions and transitions of PVC-coated aluminum conduit such that the aluminum does not come into contact with the concrete. J. The ends of all ducts shall be tightly plugged to eliminate dust and moisture during construction. Duxseal shall be used in all applications. Plugging with tape is prohibited,even for a temporary time. K. Where ducts or raceways enter or exit the Underground System,and the raceways rise to a higher elevation upon entering or leaving the System,such raceways shall be tightly sealed at the higher elevation,both before and after the installation of cables,such that there shall be no entry of water or moisture to the Underground System at any time. L. Using a mandrel,swab all underground ducts clean before installing cable. M. For cables in manholes and handholes,support and restrain them onto cable racks.All cables passing through manhole duct entrances to another duct entrances, in the manhole or handhole,shall pass above the ductbank windows(or duct entrance) utilizing cable racks. No cable shall pass in front of or below ductbank windows. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Prior to Installation 1. Prior to installation,ducts shall be inspected for defects. 2. Prior to duct installation,the interior of the ducts shall be rid of moisture,oil,grease,asphalt,dirt, rocks,or other foreign material. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the equipment necessary for the safe and efficient installation of the ductbank system. 4. The equipment,tools,and methods for performing the work shall be subject to the ENGINEER'S approval. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall take measures to maintain the stability and otherwise protect existing structures,sidewalks, pavements, utilities,and piping which are to remain in place during excavation. The CONTRACTOR shall verify the locations of underground piping, underground structures,and underground utilities prior to excavation. B. Excavation 1. While excavating is in progress,traffic shall be maintained,and all utilities shall remain in operation. 2. Where site conditions warrant and during inclement weather,the CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to prevent surface water run-off from entering the excavation. Remove and dispose of water entering excavated trench.As needed,grade trench bottom and compact subgrade. Do not install ducts,duct material, and reinforcing bars in trenches containing water. Provide control of water until excavated trench backfill is complete. 3. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of subgrade soils.The trench may be excavated by machinery to,or just below,the designated subgrade elevation, provided that material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no more than slightly disturbed. 4. When the soil encountered at established trench floor is quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material,the CONTRACTOR shall remove the unstable soil to a depth where stable material is encountered.The depth of the trench shall be increased to the depth of stable material with gravel fill,of maximum coarse aggregate size of 3/4 inch. 5. Regardless of the nature of unstable material encountered or the groundwater conditions,trench and excavation drainage shall be complete and effective by the CONTRACTOR. 6. The excavation shall extend to the lines,grades,depths,and dimensions shown and as necessary to accomplish the Work. The excavation shall also provide suitable room for installing manholes, handholes, ducts, boxes, and appurtenances. The excavation method and Work shall allow for supports, protection materials,working space, bedding material,topsoil,and other related material. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-11 7. The excavation widths shall be uniform and shall be sufficient for installing manholes and laying the ducts.Trench width shall be a practical minimum, but not less than 6 inches greater than the total duct section arrangement, including reinforcing steel. Coordinate the trench width with the duct size and quantity shown on the Drawings. 8. Unless otherwise specified,the CONTRACTOR shall construct ductbanks in open-cut trenches with vertical or a combination of vertical and sloped sides.The CONTRACTOR shall provide sheath and brace trenches to the extent necessary to maintain the stability of the excavation and provide full safety for the workmen throughout the construction period.Adequacy of sheathing and bracing shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and shall meet or exceed the minimum trenching requirements as required by OSHA. 9. Excavation by the CONTRACTOR shall include material of every description and of whatever substance encountered, regardless of the methods or equipment required to remove the material. Pavement, concrete,and sidewalks shall be cut with a saw,wheel,or pneumatic chisel along straight lines before excavating. 10. CONTRACTOR shall strip and stockpile topsoil from grassed areas crossed by trenches. At the CONTRACTOR's option,topsoil may be otherwise disposed of and replaced with approved topsoil of equal quality or it may be reused. 11. The CONTRACTOR shall work with caution in areas of existing utilities exposing them by hand excavation means or other means acceptable to utility owner. Protect, support,and maintain existing utilities. 12. The CONTRACTOR shall avoid disturbing soil within areas of trees designated for protection. If it is necessary to excavate through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with a sharp axe. C. Preparation of Trench Bottom 1. For hard subgrade earth,the CONTRACTOR shall grade the trench bottom with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed materials, and trim off high areas left by excavating bucket-teeth. 2. For soft subgrade earth,the CONTRACTOR shall remove the unstable soil to a depth where stable material is encountered.The depth of the trench shall be increased to the depth of stable material with gravel fill,of maximum coarse aggregate size of 3/4 inch. 3. The trench bottom elevation shall be adjusted to allow for bedding material as required on Drawings. D. Ductbank Installation 1. The ductbank raceways shall utilize RNC,NEMA type EPC-40-PVC for the ducts unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall use solvent cemented joints in ducts and fittings. The CONTRACTOR shall make all joints watertight according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger joint couplings a minimum of 6 inches so those of adjacent duct joints do not lie in the same vertical plane. However, duct joints maybe placed side-by-side horizontally. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall install duct separators not less than 4 feet apart or close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts. The CONTRACTOR shall secure duct separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during the pouring of concrete; if ducts float or miss the designed burial depth,the CONTRACTOR shall remove and re-install at no cost to the OWNER. 4. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie the entire assembly together using fabric straps;do not use tie wire or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or ductbanks. 5. Reinforced Concrete Encasement of Ducts a. Reinforcing Steel 1) Reinforcing steel shall be completed for the target area of the pour prior to the pouring of concrete. 2) Clean reinforcing steel free of loose rust,mill scale,ice,or other objects just prior to use. 3) Install the reinforcing steel as indicated on the Drawings. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-12 4) At points where reinforcing bars lap or splice,provide a wide-tied minimum lap of 40 bar diameters, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 5) Stagger reinforcing steel splices or laps in adjacent bars. 6) Wire ties for splices and laps shall be made with 16-gauge,black annealed wire. Welded splices will not be accepted. 7) The reinforcing steel shall be held in place using spacers,chairs,or other approved supports. Holding the reinforcing steel in place by hand during the pouring of concrete shall not be permitted. b. Forms 1) When forms are used,the CONTRACTOR shall ensure dimensions between duct encasement and form walls are a minimum of 6 inches. The form removal method shall not damage the ductbank in any way. c. Concrete 1) The concrete shall contain red dye,cast-in-place concrete,at 3000 psi and comply with ACI 301 requirements. 2) Prior to pouring of concrete,determine the slump of the concrete mixture. The slump will be a maximum of 5 inch and a minimum of 1 inch. 3) Provide a minimum of 3 inches of concrete over and under the reinforcement cage,and a minimum of 6 inches of concrete on each side of the reinforcement cage. 4) Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to the center of bank and rise up in middle,uniformly filling all open spaces. 5) Use power-driven agitating equipment specifically designed for ductbank applications. 6) Pour each partitioned section of ductbank in one continuous operation. Begin at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage to the ducts. 6. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Handholes a. Use end bells spaced a minimum of 2 inches apart from exterior surfaces;however,it is okay to space 10 inches on center for 5-inch ducts.Vary proportionately for other duct sizes. 1) Begin change from regular spacing to end bell spacing 12 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. 2) Grout end bells into manholes or handhole walls from both sides to ensure a watertight installation. 3) Connect ductbank reinforcing steel#5 at 6 inches on center to wall of manhole,handhole, and vault as shown on Drawings and these specifications. 7. Wall and Floor Penetrations with Planned Conduit Extension a. Make a transition from RNC duct to PVC-coated rigid aluminum conduit at least 10 feet from outside wall surface without reducing duct slope and without forming a trap in the duct. b. Install wall and floor penetrations for underground raceways in accordance with specification Section 26 05 33.13,Conduit for Electrical Systems. E. Warning Tape 1. During backfilling of trenches, install underground-line warning tape directly above ductbank at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of ductbank exceeds 16 inches. Underground-line warning tape installation shall comply with specification Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. F. Installation of Manholes, Handholes and Cable Management Handholes UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-13 1. Install manholes,handholes and cable management handholes in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,engineered Drawings,and these Specifications. a. Excavate the hole for the manhole, handhole and cable management handhole which permits inspection,safe work,ductbank connections,and other factors relative to the work. Base material and backfill shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,drawings,and these specifications. b. Each manhole,handhole or cable management handhole shall be plumb and level. c. Use precast neck and shaft sections to bring manhole, handhole and cable management handhole rooftop(cover)to elevation above finished grade as indicated on Drawings. In paved areas and traffic paths,the rooftop shall be flush with paved elevation. d. For manholes and handholes, install a grounding ring around the perimeter of the floor. Refer to specification Section 26 05 26,Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems, and Drawings, for additional details. e. Install necessary hardware inside the manhole or handhole, including cable racks, pulling eyes, cable stanchions,cable arms,and other as required. 1) Provide quantity of racks by the number of conductors routed through manhole or handhole. Provide a minimum of two cable hooks per rack. 2) Install a minimum of two racks on each wall in each manhole or handhole. 3) Install cable racks for future conductors. 4) Instrumentation cables,power cables,control cables,and communication cables shall be kept separately when routed along the racks to other duct openings. f. Waterproof exterior surfaces of manholes,handholes and cable management handholes, including joints and interruptions,after concrete has cured for a minimum of 24 hours. g. For field-installed anchors in manholes and handholes,do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion. G. Backfilling 1. Prior to backfilling ductbank trench,manhole area,handhole area,or cable management handhole remove from the excavation all materials which the OWNER/ENGINEER may deem unsuitable for backfilling. Process excavated material to rid of undesired materials including masonry, metals, rocks, paving,concrete, etc. 2. Dust control measures shall be employed at all times. 3. Backfilling of the manhole,handhole and cable management handhole areas cannot take place until after the waterproofing of the manhole and handhole have been completed. 4. In all instances,backfilling cannot begin earlier than 60 hours after placement of any concrete in targeted backfilling location. 5. Compaction shall be by use of hand or pneumatic tamping with tools weighing at least 20 pounds; however,do not use gasoline-power-driven impact type compactors unless at least 4 feet of backfill is placed over top of ductbank or pipe. The material being spread and compacted shall be placed in layers not over 8 inch thick. 6. Do not allow backfill to free-fall into the trench above 2 feet of target drop. 7. Allow for the ductbank markingtape(s)to be installed. 8. Backfill to grade with allowances for topsoil,crushed rock surfacing,pavements,or other work. 9. Waterjetting will not be accepted as a means of consolidating or compacting backfill. 10. Backfill Density Control for ductbanks, manholes, handholes and cable management handholes: a. In areas subjected to vehicular traffic, the material below the ductbank, manhole, handhole and cable management handhole shall be backfilled with select common fill material in layers not to exceed 8 inches loose measure and compacted at optimum moisture content (plus or minus 3 percent)to 95 percent standard Proctor density. UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-14 b. In areas subjected to vehicular traffic,the material above the ductbank shall be backfilled with select common fill material in layers not to exceed 8 inches loose measure and compacted at optimum moisture content (plus or minus 3 percent)to 95 percent standard Proctor density. The top 18 inches below subgrade level shall be compacted at optimum moisture content(plus or minus 3 percent)to 100 percent of standard Proctor density. The backfill shall be mounded 6 inches above the existing grade or as directed by the OWNER/ENGINEER. c. In areas NOT subjected to vehicular traffic,the material below the ductbank, manhole, handhole and cable management handhole shall be backfilled with select common fill material in layers not to exceed 8 inches thick and compacted at optimum moisture content(plus or minus 4 percent)to 95 percent standard Proctor density. d. In areas NOT subjected to vehicular traffic,the material above the ductbank shall be backfilled with select common fill material in layers not to exceed 8 inches thick and compacted at optimum moisture content (plus or minus 4 percent)to 90 percent standard Proctor density. The backfill shall be mounded 6 inches above the existing grade or as directed by the OWNER/ENGINEER. 11. All adjacent paved surfaces,concrete surfaces,walkways,or roadways shall be swept and cleaned immediately after backfilling. H. Markers for Underground Conduits 1. Install concrete warning planks just below the surface extending no more than 1 inch above grade. The concrete warning planks shall be installed near the point of origin, at 200-foot intervals,and near point of termination (even if not shown on Drawings). I. Grounding of Ductbank Components 1. Grounding shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 as well as Specification Section 26 05 26,Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems,and Drawings. a. Provide a#4/0 bare copper conductor ring around the inside perimeter of the manhole floor and handhole floor. Use exothermic welds to connect the copper grounding ring to the two ductbank#4/0 grounding conductors. b. Install a#4/0 bare tinned-copper grounding conductor the length of each ductbank;for each ductbank tee or branch, a new tinned-copper#4/0 AWG bare grounding conductor shall be connected,exothermic welded,and follow the route of each ductbank branch. c. For more details regarding ductbank grounding connections, manhole and handhole grounding connections, and exposed metal parts within manholes and handholes, reference specification Section 26 05 26,Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. J. Restoring Trench and Adjacent Surfaces 1. For paved areas, sidewalks, walkways, and concrete areas,the edge of the existing material to be removed shall be cut along straight lines,and the material replaced with the same type and quality as the existing material. 2. In sections where the ductbank passes through grassed areas,the CONTRACTOR shall,at his own expense,remove and replace the sod,or shall loam and reseed the surface to the satisfaction of the OWNER/ENGINEER. K. Field Quality Control 1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the following: a. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. b. Take pictures of ductbank trench just prior to concrete pour;label picture to match CONTRACTOR's Drawings for realizing concrete pours. c. Take pictures of manholes,handholes and cable management handholes during construction. L. Cleaning UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-15 1. Remove all foreign material,dirt,and debris from inside each manhole, handhole,cable management handhole and sump. Use brooms,vacuum,or lint-free rags for cleaning;do not use compressed air for cleaning. END OF SECTION UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-16 SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.The CONTRACTOR shall include furnishing of all labor,tools,materials,and equipment necessary to complete all the"work" required for the project,as specified herein and shown on the drawings. B. Cooperation with contractors under separate contracts is required,and the work described herein and shown on the drawings shall be coordinated as required to fulfill the intent of the Contract. C. This Section and other Sections in Division 26 shall be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. D.The Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this section. E. This Section includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification for power and control cable. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Identification for communication cable. 5. Underground-line warning tape. 6. Warning labels and signs. 7. Instruction Signs. 8. Equipment identification labels. 9. Other identifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or drawings,and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All raceways,power and control wiring,fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings,shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include: 1. Product Data for each identification product indicated. 2. Identification Schedule with an index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. 3. Samples for each type of label and sign to illustrate size,colors, lettering style,mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated,the current editions of the following apply to the work of this Section: 1. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA)standards. 2. National Electrical Code(NEC). 3. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace(NFPA 70E). IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-1 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 7. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 8. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 9. International Society of Automation (ISA). 10. Underwriters Laboratories(UL). 11. Factory Mutual(FM). 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Identification labels shall comply with: 1. ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. 2. NFPA 70. 3. ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.The CONTRACTOR shall install all identifications prior to substantial completion of the work. 1.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to this Section. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Provide warranty per Division 01,Warranties and Bonds,and as specified herein. B. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for the period specified in Division 01, Warranties and Bonds, from the date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such a period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification tags,names,abbreviations,colors,and other features with requirements within these Specifications,Shop Drawings,OEM wiring diagrams,and with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout the project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION FOR RACEWAYS A.All markings for raceway labels shall be machine printed. B. Raceway identification plates shall be utilized for each raceway: 1. Identification plates shall be installed at the end-of-run of each conduit,at each connecting end to a pull box or junction box,within each manhole,within each handhole, etc. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-2 2. Identification plates shall be installed at the ends (both sides) of each wire way and cable tray, for lengths of runs greater than 100 feet,then identification plates shall be installed every 50 feet onto both sides. 3. Identification plates shall be installed prior to conductors being pulled into the raceway. 4. Identification plates shall identifythe raceway name/number or conduit name/number which matches the schedule. 5. Coordinate with ENGINEER/OWNER for the requirements for the plate material and type. Provide an example to ENGINEER/OWNER as a formal submittal for approval prior to the installation. 6. Attach identification plates to conduit and cable trays with stainless steel tie wraps or stainless- steel wire. Attach identification plates to wireways with adhesive material approved by OWNER/ENGINEER. Attach identification plates inside manholes and handholes under each bell fitting using mechanical anchors and stainless-steel screws. 2.2 IDENTIFICATION FOR POWER AND CONTROL CABLE A.All markings for power and control(wire or cable)labels shall be machine printed. B. Cables shall be tagged at each termination,inside pull boxes,inside junction boxes,and inside enclosures as follows: 1. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. 2. Labels relying on adhesives or tape-on markers are not acceptable. 3. Provide labels for cables with permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations stamped on the plate. Attach the marker plates to the cable with stainless steel wire ties. Labels shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers,or equal. 4. The text for the labels shall be as realized on the Drawings,or as otherwise noted below: a. Panelboards: Cable labels shall include circuit position such as"PD131-23,25,27". b. MCCs:Cable labels shall include MCC number,section number,position number,and load-tag number such as"MCC2-134-13WR3". c. Service Entry: Cable labels shall include utility number such as"SE-1". d. Control Cable:Cable labels shall include PLC name and instrument-tag number such as PLC-AB- AIT101. e. Lighting and Outlets:Cable labels shall have power conductor labeled with panel and circuit name such as"LP1-12". f. General Instruments not connected to PLC:Each cable shall have a label that represents the instrument name and cable number such as"LSL201-1". 2.3 IDENTIFICATION FOR CONDUCTORS A.All markings for conductor labels shall be machine printed. B. Conductors shall be tagged at each termination as follows: 1. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. 2. Labels relying on adhesives or tape-on markers are not acceptable. 3. Provide labels for conductors#10 and smaller with legible permanent sleeve of yellow(or white) PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or equal. 4. Provide labels for conductors#8 and larger with permanent nylon marker plates with legible text stamped on the plate. Attach the marker plates to the conductor with stainless steel wire ties. Labels shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or equal. 5. The text for the labels shall be as realized on the Drawings,or as otherwise noted below: a. Panelboards: Conductor labels shall include circuit numbers such as"PDP1-23". b. Instrument and Control:Conductor labels shall match labels realized on electrical I&C Drawings. c. Communication or data:Unless otherwise specified,conductors within these cables will have no label. However,the cable shall be labeled according to Paragraph 2.4. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-3 6. For color-coding of conductors, use self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mil thick by 2 inches wide within 1 inch of each termination. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION CABLE A.All markings for communication labels shall be machine printed. B. Communication cables shall be tagged at each termination, inside pull boxes, inside junction boxes,and inside enclosures: 1. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. 2. Labels relying on adhesives or tape-on markers are not acceptable. 3. Communication cable labels shall utilize permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations stamped on the plate. Attach the marker plates to the cable with stainless steel wire ties. Labels shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or equal. 4. The text for the labels shall be as realized on the Drawings,or as otherwise noted below: a. The text shall include cable number as well as"from" and "to" equipment names, such as "C15- PLC2-CAB3A",where PLC2 is"from" and CAB3A is"to" equipment names. 2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Every underground raceway shall include a suitable tape located on top of the raceway, ductbank,or concrete encase raceway. The tape shall extend the full length of the underground raceway. Tape shall be as follows: 1. The tape shall be made of Polyethylene material,6 inches wide with continuous printing along the length of the tape. The tape shall be manufactured by Brady"Identoline",or Sentry Line "Terra Tape". a. For Underground Raceways and Ductbanks containing power circuits,use 6 inch wide(or wider) yellow tape with black letters.Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE"with 3- inch-high letters. b. For Underground Raceways and Ductbanks containing only instrument and communication circuits, use 6 inch wide (or wider)green tape with black letters.Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED WIRING"with 3-inch-high letters. c. When Underground Raceways contain both power circuits and instrument circuits,use 6-inch- wide(or wider)yellow tape with black letters.Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE"with 3-inch-high letters. B. The tape shall comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2.6 WARNING LABELS A. Warning labels shall comply with NFPA 70,NFPA 70E,and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Warning label locations shall include,but not be limited to front covers;doors;or other equipment access points. C. Warning labels shall be of the following type: 1. Self-adhesive type: Pre-printed, multi-color, pressure-sensitive adhesive. 2. Baked-enamel type: Pre-printed,aluminum constructed, punched,or drilled for fasteners;may include colors and legend: a. Include 0.25-inch grommets in corners for mounting. b. Nominal size to be 7 inches by 10 inches. 3. Butyrate,Metal-backed type: Weather-resistant,non-fading,pre-printed,cellulose-acetate butyrate sign with 0.0396-inch galvanized steel backing; may include colors and legend: a. Include 0.25-inch grommets in corners for mounting. b. Nominal size to be 10 inches by 14 inches. D.Warning labels shall include but not be limited to the following: IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-4 1. Multiple Power Source Warning:"DANGER-ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD, EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES". 2. Workspace Clearance Warning:"WARNING-OSHA REGULATION,AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36-INCHES". 3. Arc Flash Hazard;typical examples: a. "WARNING-ARC FLASH HAZARD". b. "SYSTEM VOLTAGE IS 480VAC". c. "ARC FLASH BOUNDARY IS 5.8-FEET". d. "AVAILABLE INCIDENT ENERGY IS 11.1 CAL/CMZ". e. "PPE CATEGORY 3-MIN.CLOTHING 25 CAL/CMZ". 2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Instruction signs shall include engraved text,plastic constructed, 1/16-inch thick for signs up to 20 square inches and 1/8-inch thick for larger signs. 2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Equipment identification labels shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine,and include punched or drilled holes for screw mounting. 1. The engraved letters shall be black in color. 2. The background shall be white. 3. Use a minimum of two stainless steel screws with nuts at each end of the equipment identification label. For NEMA 4X enclosures, provide an O-ring for the mounting screws to ensure air-tight integrity is maintained. 4. The equipment identification label shall include the tag name and description as realized on the Drawings. B. Equipment to be labeled,when indicated on Drawings with a tag-name or label: 1. Panelboards(lighting, distribution, power, etc.). 2. Control enclosures and electrical cabinets. 3. Switchboard. 4. Transformers. 5. Disconnects. 6. Junction boxes. 7. HVAC units and systems. 8. Thermostats. 9. Push button stations and each button/indicator position. 10. UPS Equipment. 11. Combination Motor Starters. 12, Reduced Voltage Starters(Soft Starters). 13. Lighting Control Panels. 14. Wireways. 2.9 OTHER IDENTIFICATIONS A. Label power outlets(208 VAC,240 VAC,480 VAC,etc.)with text indicating voltage,ampere,panel number and circuit number(s)for the supplying circuit,such as"208V/20A/TTDP1-15,17". Cover plates shall be custom laser engraved to include the above text. B. Label toggle switches and 120 VAC receptacles with text indicating panel number and circuit number for the supplying circuit,such as"BBDP1-13". Cover plates shall be custom laser engraved to include the above text. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-5 C. Label all pushbuttons with markings as shown on Drawings.The label construction and markings shall be approved by the ENGINEER/OWNER. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary wiring,connections,and services to maintain existing systems in service during construction. All temporary wiring shall include identification markings. B. Verify the identity of each item before installing identification products. Consider the most convenient location to attach identification product without interfering with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Painted Identification is prohibited unless permission is granted from the OWNER. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Apply identification products only after finishing work has been completed. B. Before applying self-adhesive identification products,clean the surface using materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the identification product. C. Attach non-adhesive identification products with stainless steel screws and hardware appropriate to the location and substrate; use O-rings with hardware for NEMA 4X equipment to ensure rating. D. During backfilling of underground raceways,ductbanks,and cable, install warning tape the complete length of the underground raceway at a depth of 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. For underground raceways wider than 16 inches,use multiple tapes;i.e.,apply one tape for every 16 inches of ductbank width. E. Warning labels for accessible raceways,such as wireway,and metal-clad cables shall be installed: 1. Containing Power Circuits-Identify with "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" using orange background and black letters,the letters to be 2 inches high,and utilize self-adhesive vinyl labels. Repeat identification every 10 feet. 2. Containing Instrument or Communication Circuits - Identify with "DANGER ENERGIZED CIRCUITS" using orange background and black letters,the letters to be 2 inches high,and utilize self-adhesive vinyl labels. Repeat identification every 10 feet. F. Warning labels for Junction Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets serving Power and Lighting circuits shall be installed utilizing self-adhesive warning labels for indoor equipment and utilizing Butyrate, metal-backed type for outdoor equipment: 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door,cover,or other access. G. Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems;instruction signs shall be installed where instructions are necessary. 1. Operation Instructions-The instruction legend shall be approved by OWNER/ENGINEER. Utilize black text on a white background. 2. Emergency Operating Instructions-The emergency operating instructions shall be approved by OWNER/ENGINEER. Utilize white text on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch-high text. H.Power-circuit conductor identification for 600 volts and less shall utilize the cable and conductor identification products as realized in Paragraphs 2.2 and 2.3,as well as include color-coding to identify the phase. 1. For conductor sizes smaller than#8AWG,the conductor insulation color shall match the color- coding. For conductor sizes#8 AWG and larger,and for conductors of a cable,a tape shall be field applied to the conductor. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-6 a. The field-applied,color-coding,conductor tape shall be applied to conductors in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from termination points and inside boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with little tension to prevent possible unwinding. 2. Color-Coding for 120/240 Volt Circuits a. Phase A- Black. b. Phase B- Red. c. Neutral -White (or Gray). d. Equipment Grounding Conductor-Green(or Green w/Yellow stripe). 3. Color-Coding for 208/120 Volt,Three-phase Circuits a. Phase A- Black. b. Phase B- Red. c. Phase C- Blue. d. Neutral -White (or Gray). e. Equipment Grounding Conductor-Green (or Green w/Yellow stripe). 4. Color-Coding for 480/277 Volt(up to 600 Volt),Three-phase Circuits a. Phase A- Brown. b. Phase B- Orange. c. Phase C-Yellow. d. Neutral -White (or Gray). e. Equipment Grounding Conductor-Green (or Green w/Yellow stripe). I. Equipment Labeling 1. Instructions a. General Equipment: Utilize a single line of text with 0.5-inch-high letters on a 1.5-inch-high label. Where two or more lines of text are required,use text with 0.5-inch-high letters,and allow clearance from the top of the text to the top-edge of the label;do the same for the bottom-edge and the bottom of the text in the last line. b. Elevated Components: Increase size of lettering and label for appropriate viewing from the floor. c. Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners and gaskets that do not change the NEMA or UL rating for the enclosure and void the UL listing. 2. Additional Labeling a. Panelboards: Include a typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer(panel schedule);to include load name, raceway name,conductor size, load in amps, breaker size,circuit position,as well as panel main information. b. Switchboards:Include necessary label(s)to identify the service disconnecting device as required by the NEC and authority having jurisdiction. c. Transformers: Include on the label feeder name and secondary connected device name. END OF SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553-7 SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section provides the guidelines for commissioning of an electrical system. Electrical systems to be commissioned include the following: 1. Electric Valve Actuators. 2. HVAC Systems. 3. Grounding Systems. B. The purpose of this Section is to define Sub-contractor responsibilities in the commissioning process, which are being directed by the General Contractor. Other electrical system testing is required under other Division 26 Specification Sections. National Electrical Installation Standards{NEIS}NECA90-2004, "Recommended Practice for Commissioning Building Electrical Systems",27th Volume of the NEIS Series, provides additional guidance for the commissioning of electrical systems. C. Commissioning requires the participation of the CONTRACTOR to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. "Division 26 Sub-contractor"{CONTRACTOR}shall be familiar with all parts of Commissioning requirements in other Divisions. The CONTRACTOR shall execute all Commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents and include the cost of Commissioning in the Contract price. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification and Drawings, referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or Drawings,and include such information or work as may be specified. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions in other Division Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26 Electrical. D. The work of the following Sections also applies to the work of this Section: 1. Section 26 00 00,Electrical General Provisions. 2. Section 26 05 00,Common Work Results for Electrical. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include: 1. Electrical Commissioning-General a. CONTRACTOR shall prepare Pre-functional Checklists and Functional Performance Test{FPT} procedures and execute and document results.All Pre-functional Checklists and tests must be documented using specific,procedural forms in Microsoft Word or Excel software developed for that purpose.Prior to testing,CONTRACTOR shall submit those forms to the OWNER for review and approval. 2. Electrical Commissioning Plan a. A minimum of two weeks before commissioning is to take place; CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed commissioning plan of the different configurations to be commissioned for the OWNER's and ENGINEER's approval.The CONTRACTOR shall list any needs or requirements needed from the OWNER or ENGINEER within the plan. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-1 3. Electrical Commissioning Documentation a. CONTRACTOR shall provide OWNER with documentation required for Commissioning work.At minimum, documentation shall include Detailed Start-up procedures, Full sequences of operation,Operating and Maintenance data, Performance data, Functional Performance Test Procedures, Control Drawings,and details of OWNER-Contracted tests. 4. Electrical Commissioning Report a. CONTRACTOR shall review and approve other relative documentation for impact on FPTs of the systems: 11 Shop Drawings and product submittal data related to systems or equipment to be commissioned.The Subcontractor responsible for the FPT shall review and incorporate comments from the OWNER and Process Control System Integrator{PCS11 via the CONTRACTOR. 21 Incorporate manufacturer's Start-up procedures with Pre-functional checklists. 31 Factory Performance Test Reports: Review and compile all factory performance data to assure that the data is complete prior to executing the FPTs. 41 Completed equipment start-up certification forms along with the manufacturer's field or factory performance and start-up test documentation: Subcontractor performing the test will review the documentation prior to commencing with the scheduled FPTs. 51 Operating and Maintenance{O&M1 information per requirements of the Technical Specifications and other Division requirements:To validate adequacy and completeness of the FPT,the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the O&M manual content, marked-up record Drawings and Specifications,component submittal drawings,and other pertinent documents are available at the Project Site for review. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated,the current editions of the following apply to the work of this Section: 1. International Electrical Testing Association {NETA1. 2. National Electrical Code{NEC}. 3. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace{NFPA 70E1. 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration{OSHA}. S. National Fire Protection Association {NFPA}. 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association {NEMA1. 7. American National Standards Institute{ANSI}. 8. Insulated Cable Engineers Association {ICEA1. 9. International Society of Automation {ISA1. 10. Underwriters Laboratories{UL1. 11. Factory Mutual{FM1. 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers{IEEE}. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation,and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00,Electrical General Provisions. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 26 00 00,Electrical General Provisions. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-2 1.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 26 05 53,Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00,Electrical General Provisions. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Provide warranty per Division 01,Warranties and Bonds,and as specified herein. B. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for the period specified in Division 01, Warranties and Bonds, from the date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition.Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER. 1.10 DEFINITIONS A. Commissioning: A systematic process confirming that systems have been installed,properly started,and consistently operated in strict accordance with the Contract Documents;that all systems are complete and functioning in accordance with the Contract Documents at Substantial Completion;and that CONTRACTOR has provided OWNER adequate system documentation and training. Commissioning includes deferred and/or seasonal tests as approved by OWNER and ENGINEER. B. Commissioning Plan: Document prepared by the General Contractor and approved by OWNER and ENGINEER that provides the structure,schedule,and coordination plan for the Commissioning process from the construction phase through the warranty period. The Commissioning Plan must satisfy the OWNER's test requirements. C. Commissioning Team: Working group made up of representatives from the OWNER,ENGINEER,General Contractor, CSI,specialty manufacturers,and suppliers. The General Contractor will provide ad-hoc representation of Subcontractors on the Commissioning Team as required for implementation of the Commissioning Plan. D. Deferred Tests: Functional Performance or Integrated System Tests performed after Substantial Completion due to partial equipment acceptance,seasonal requirements,design,or other Site conditions that prohibit the test from being performed prior to Substantial Completion. E. Deficiency: Condition of a component,piece of equipment,or system that is not in compliance with Contract Documents. F. Factory Acceptance Testing:Testing of equipment at the factory,by factory personnel with the OWNER's representative present. G. Operation Readiness Test Procedures: Commissioning protocols and detailed test procedures and instructions in tabular and script-type format that fully describe system configuration and steps required to determine if the system is performing and functioning properly. CONTRACTOR prepares these procedures to document Operational Readiness. H. Functional Performance Test{FPT}: Test of dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems executed by CONTRACTOR. Systems are tested under various modes and conditions to test functionality. Component failure, power failure,and other system failure will be simulated to test system response. Systems are run through all specified sequences of operation. Components are verified to be responding in accordance with Contract Documents. Tests are executed after Start-ups and Pre-functional Checklists are complete. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-3 I. Integrated System Test:Test of dynamic function and operation of multiple systems;Integrated System Tests are tested under various modes such as fire alarm and emergency situations,life safety conditions, power failure,etc. Systems are integrally operated through all specified sequences of operation. Components are verified to be responding in accordance with Contract Documents. Integrated System Tests are executed after Functional Performance Tests are complete and prior to Substantial Completion. Integrated System Tests provide verification that the integrated systems will properly function according to the Contract Documents. J. Integrated System Test Procedures: Commissioning protocols and detailed test procedures and instructions in tabular and script-type format that fully describe system configurations and steps required to determine if the interacting systems are performing and functioning properly. CONTRACTOR prepares these procedures to document Integrated System Tests. K. Pre-functional Checklist:A list of static inspections and material or component tests that verify proper installation of equipment{e.g.,belt tension,oil levels,labels affixed,gages in place,sensors calibrated, etc.}.The word Pre-functional refers to before Functional tests. Pre-functional Checklists must include the manufacturer's Start-up checklist{s}.CONTRACTOR shall sign Pre-functional Checklists as complete and submit with the Request for Start-up/Functional Performance Test Form. L. Startup:The activities where equipment is initially energized,tested,and operated.Startup is completed prior to Functional Performance Tests. Operating and Maintenance{O&M}manuals must be submitted and approved prior to startup. M. Test Requirements: Requirements specifying what systems,modes and functions,etc.must be tested. Test requirements are not detailed test procedures. Test requirements and acceptance criteria are specified in the Contract Documents. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Provide all specialized tools,test equipment,and instruments required to execute startup,checkout,and testing of equipment. B. All specialized tools,test equipment,and instruments required to execute startup,checkout,and testing of equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance within specified tolerances. A testing laboratory must have calibrated test equipment within the previous 12 months. Calibration shall be traceable. CONTRACTOR must calibrate test equipment and instruments according to manufacturer's recommended intervals and whenever the test equipment is dropped or damaged. Calibration tags must be affixed to the test equipment or certificates readily available. C. Infrared Thermo-graphic Scanner 1. Infrared scanning equipment shall be capable of viewing an entire bus or equipment assembly at one time and have a sensitivity of 0.2 degrees C with a liquid nitrogen reference. 2. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified. 3. A copy of the results from the thermo-graphic scan shall be submitted to the OWNER and ENGINEER in order to create baseline information of the equipment. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Construction Phase 1. In each purchase order or subcontract that is written for changes in scope, include the following requirements for submittal data,commissioning documentation,testing assistance,Operating and Maintenance{O&M}data, and training, as a minimum. 2. Attend Pre-Commissioning Meetings}, Pre-Installation Meeting{s},and other Project meetings. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-4 3. Provide manufacturer's data sheets and shop drawing submittals of equipment. 4. Provide additional requested documentation to the CONTRACTOR,prior to 0&M manual submittals, for development of Pre-functional Checklist and Functional Performance Tests procedures. a. Typically,this will include detailed manufacturer's installation and start-up,operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures,full details of any OWNER-contracted tests,full factory testing reports,if any,and full warranty information,including all responsibilities of the OWNER to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. b. In addition,the installation,startup,and checkout materials that are shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the CONTRACTOR. c. This information and data request may be made prior to normal submittals. 5. With input from the Control Systems Integrator{CSI}and OWNER,clarify the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the Specifications, CSI control drawings or equipment documentation are not sufficient for writing detailed test procedures. 6. Prepare specific Functional Performance Test procedures as specified in other Sections. Ensure that Functional Performance Test procedures address feasibility,safety,and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the tests. 7. Develop the Commissioning Plan using manufacturer's Start-up procedures and the Pre-functional Checklists. Submit manufacturer's detailed Start-up procedures and the Commissioning Plan and procedures and other requested equipment documentation to OWNER for review. 8. During the start-up and initial checkout process,execute and document related portions of the Pre- functional Checklists for all commissioned equipment. 9. Perform and clearly document all completed Pre-functional Checklists and Start-up procedures. Provide a copy to the OWNER prior to the Functional Performance Test. 10. Address current OWNER punch list items before Functional Performance Tests. Air and water test, adjust and balance shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before Functional Performance Tests of the respective air or water related systems are executed. 11. Provide qualified technicians to execute the starting of equipment and to assist in execution of Functional Performance Tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed-upon schedules and for a sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests,adjustments,and problem solving. 12. Correct deficiencies{differences between specified and observed performance}as interpreted by the OWNER and retest the system and equipment. 13. Compile all commissioning records and documentation to be included in a Commissioning and Closeout Manual. 14. Prepare 0&M manuals according to the Contract Documents,including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.These manuals shall be available during startup. 15. During construction, maintain as-built marked-up Drawings and Specifications of all Contract Documents and CONTRACTOR-generated coordination Drawings. Update after completion of Commissioning activities{including deferred tests}.The as-built marked-up drawings and specifications shall be delivered to the OWNER both in electronic format and hard copies as required by the OWNER. 16. Provide training forthe OWNER's operating personnel as specified. 17. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty. B. Warranty Phase 1. Execute seasonal or deferred tests,witnessed by the OWNER,according to the Specifications. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-5 a. Complete deferred tests as part of this Contract during the Warranty Period.Schedule this activity with OWNER. Perform tests and document and correct deficiencies. OWNER may observe the tests and review and approve test documentation and deficiency corrections. b. If any check or test cannot be completed prior to Substantial Completion due to the building structure, required occupancy condition,or other condition,execution of such test may be delayed to later in the Warranty Period, upon approval of the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall reschedule and conduct these unforeseen deferred tests in the same manner as deferred tests. 2. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals, Commissioning documentation,and as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal,state,and local requirements,referenced standards,and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations. 3.3 TESTING A. Pre-functional Checklists and Startup 1. Follow the start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in this Section and in other Divisions. Start up and complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional,meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Pre-functional Checklists shall be complete prior to commencement of a Functional Performance test. B. Functional Performance Tests 1. Functional Performance Tests are conducted after system startup and checkout is satisfactorily completed. 2. Refer to equipment specification for specific details on the required Functional Performance Tests. C. Coordination Between Testing Parties 1. Factory Startups: Factory startups are specified for certain equipment. Factory startups generally are start-up related activities that will be reviewed and checked prior to Functional Performance Tests. All costs associated with factory startups shall be included with the Contract price unless otherwise noted. Notify the Commissioning Team of the factory start-up schedule and coordinate these factory startups with witnessing parties.The Commissioning Team members may witness these startups at their discretion. 2. Independent Testing Agencies: For systems that specify testing by an independent testing agency, the cost of the test shall be included in the Contract price unless otherwise noted.Testing performed by independent agencies may cover aspects required in the Pre-functional Checklists,Start-ups,and Functional Performance Tests. Coordinate with the independent testing agency so that OWNER Representative{s}can witness the test to ensure that applicable aspects of the test meet requirements. END OF SECTION COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-7 SIGNATURE AUTOMATION 17950 PRESTON ROAD,SUITE 300 DALLAS,TX 75252 TBPELS FIRM NO.F-14711 3 fA`^^ES LLAN°n SECTION 26 24 16 75428 PANELBOARDS 01/23/2025 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall include furnishing of all labor, tools,testing, materials, and equipment necessary to install a completed Panelboard in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) as shown on drawings and as specified herein. A Panelboard shall consist of materials designed expressly for panelboards containing buses, lugs, circuit breakers and enclosure including but not limited to enclosure door, main bus, grounding bus, neutral bus, main breaker, sub-feed breaker and other devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 26 Electrical Specifications. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of factory field engineers for troubleshooting any equipment issues. C. Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation for the area installed. D. The work described herein and shown on the Drawings shall be coordinated as required to fulfill the intent of the Contract. E. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate layout and installation of panelboard(s) and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including other electrical equipment, raceways, piping,workspace clearance requirements, HVAC, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances. F. Work shall include methods and materials for the panelboard(s) and equipment, plus the following where applicable: 1. Conduit for Electrical Systems: Reference Section 26 05 33.13, Conduit for Electrical Systems. 2. Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems: Reference Section 26 01 26, Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems. 3. Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Reference Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 4. Identification for Electrical Systems: Reference Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section referring to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications,the CONTRACTOR shall provide such information or work as may be required in those references or Drawings and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All raceway, power and control wiring,fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include panelboard names and the following, as a minimum: 1. Shop Drawings Panelboards 26 08 00-1 a. Shop drawings and product data shall be included with the submittal and shall include the following: 1) Deviations from specifications should be clearly identified on a separate sheet of paper in the shop drawing submittal. 2) Detail the enclosure type with voltage rating, current rating, allocated phases, and neutral configuration. 3) Assembly ratings including short-circuit current ratings of bus, protection devices, and lowest rated device. 4) Major component ratings for voltage, continuous current, interrupting ratings. 5) Front view elevation with dimensions. 6) Top view with dimensions. 7) Door assembly and features. 8) Overall dimensions including the space available for conductors. 9) Conduit entry and exit points details with allocated dimensions. Provide a detailed bottom view and top view showing how conduits penetrate the panelboard. 10) Master drawing index which includes all items included for the submittal. 11) Overall panelboard weight. 12) Complete bill-of-material (BOM)with a detail drawing indicating location of the panelboard parts.The BOM shall clearly identify model numbers, description, and quantity of each item. 13) Detail drawing showing location of electrical bus, main lugs, main breaker, grounding terminals, neutral terminals. 14) Circuit schedule indicating breaker location and device rating. 15) Conductor sizes acceptable for each breaker and terminals. 16) Data Sheets for panelboards, Circuit Breakers, miscellaneous electrical equipment, etc., clearly identifying exact model numbers of each device. 17)Include time-current coordination curves for each overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper. 18) Panelboard nameplate schedule. 19) UL Listing. 20)Warranty Information. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following apply to the work of this Section: 1. National Electrical Code(NEC). 2. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace (NFPA 70E). 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 6. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 7. International Society of Automation (ISA). 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 9. Factory Mutual(FM). 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 11. NEMA PB-1 - Panelboards. 12. NEMA AB-1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. Panel boards 26 08 00- 2 F-*,��������� 13. UL 489- Molded Circuit Breakers. 14. UL 67- Panelboards. B. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall be provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No. 70- National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 590- Temporary Installations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements, circuits, and equipment arrangements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Manufacturer Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. C. Panelboard(s)and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use. 1. Labels of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. affixed to each item of material. 2. If materials are by manufacturer other than those specified, submit certification that material meets applicable Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle equipment components in accordance with shop drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and the following: 1. Deliver material for the Panelboard(s) to the project in full cartons marked with name, size, type, and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label. 2. Store material for the Panelboard(s) indoors in a manner to prevent damage from the elements, personnel, equipment, and moisture. 3. Deliver in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. 4. Unloading and storage of the equipment shall be the responsibility of the construction contractor, who shall inspect the equipment for apparent damage. Equipment which is found to be damaged will not be accepted until properly repaired or replaced by the Vendor or manufacturer. 1.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00, Electrical General Provisions. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Special Warranty: CONTRACTOR and/or manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Minimum of one year from date of Substantial Completion or 16 months after delivery, whichever occurs first. 2. Cost for the removal, shipment, repair,and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in warranty; as well as correction of defective work. 1.10 SCHEDULES A. Schedule with the OWNER/ENGINEER for required shutdowns to accommodate panel board installations. Panel boards 26 08 00-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Panelboard(s)and accessories shall meet or exceed the specifications and requirements of the latest governing agency. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Panelboard 1. Manufacturers a. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents and Drawings, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1) General Electric. 2) Eaton. 3) Square D. 4) Siemens. 2. General Requirements a. The Panelboard shall consist of a box, front, interior, door, and circuit protective devices, manufactured in accordance with NEMA standards and bear the applicable UL label(s). Unless Drawings specify otherwise, the following general requirements for panelboards are: 1) The enclosure shall be type surface mount. 2) A nameplate shall be provided listing manufacturer's name, panel type, and ratings. 3) The Panelboard shall be rated for the intended voltage, phases, and current as realized on the Drawings. 4) Three-phase Panelboards shall be listed as four-wire, three-phase with full capacity neutral; single-phase Panelboards shall be listed as such with full capacity neutral or as realized on the drawings. 5) The Panelboard shall utilize bolt-on, molded case circuit breakers. 6) Each Panelboard shall utilize a main-breaker. 7) The Panelboard shall be equipped with appropriately sized lugs for each circuit connection. 8) The Panelboard shall have grounding lugs and uninsulated equipment grounding terminals. 9) Rated for environmental conditions at installed location and as indicated on drawings: a) Indoor Dry and Clean locations(Electrical Rooms): NEMA 12. b) Other Indoor Locations: NEMA 4X stainless steel. c) Outdoor locations: NEMA 4X stainless steel. d) Hazardous Locations: Contact ENGINEER for approved enclosures. 3. Enclosure a. The Panelboard frame shall be of formed steel rigidly bolted together to support all cover plates, bussings, and component devices during shipping and installation. b. The Panelboard(s) shall include all protective devices and equipment, including necessary interconnections. c. NEMA 12 Panelboard enclosures shall be painted on all exterior surfaces.The paint finish shall be ANSI 61 light gray, ANSI 49 grey, or manufacturer's standard grey, applied by electro-deposition process over an iron phosphate pre-treatment. d. Hinged doors covering all circuit breaker handles shall be included in all panel trims. Panelboards 26 08 00-4 e. Boxes and trims shall be made from steel, unless otherwise noted. Boxes shall be without knockouts. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter space of 4 inches on all sides. 4. Panelboard Electrical Bus a. Each main bus shall be rated for the main breaker frame size, current, and voltage. b. Each electrical bus bar shall be a tin-plated copper bus and shall meet or exceed the amperage listed on the Drawings. c. The neutral bus bar shall have a current rating that matches the phase bus bar and shall be located at the opposite end from the mains. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each circuit requiring a neutral connection. d. The electrical bus bars shall be mounted on supports of high-impact, non-tracking, insulation material which is braced to withstand mechanical forces exerted during RMS symmetrical short circuit conditions, if not indicated on drawings the following minimal ratings shall be applied: 1) Minimum of 65,000 amps for 480/277 volt three-phase panelboards. 2) Minimum of 22,000 amps for 208/120 volt three-phase panelboards. 3) Minimum of 22,000 amps for 240/120-volt panelboards. 5. Circuit Breakers- General a. The Panelboard shall be equipped with molded-Case Circuit Breakers(MCCB), bolt-in type: 1) Circuit breaker frames shall be constructed of a high-strength, molded, glass- reinforced polyester case and cover. 2) Circuit breakers shall have an overcenter, toggle handle-operated, trip-free mechanism with quick make, quick break action independent of the speed of the toggle handle operation. 3) Circuit breakers shall have ON and OFF position clearly marked. 4) Circuit breakers shall be manufactured by the panelboard manufacturer. 5) All circuit breakers shall allow for manual operation. 6) All circuit breakers shall be provided with material and devices to be lockable in the off-position as noted on the DRAWINGS. b. All circuit breakers shall be rated for symmetrical current interrupting capacity of: 1) Minimum of 65,000 amps for 480/277 volt three-phase panelboards. 2) Minimum of 22,000 amps for 208/120 volt three-phase panelboards. 3) Minimum of 22,000 amps for 240/120-volt panelboards. c. Single-pole circuit breakers serving fluorescent lighting loads shall have the SWD marking. Circuit breakers serving air conditioning branch loads shall be UL listed as type HACR. Type HID breakers shall be used for feeding high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.Type B circuit breakers shall be used for feeding LED lighting loads. d. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter(GFCI) circuit breakers shall be applied as indicated on Drawings and according to the NEC. e. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) circuit breakers shall be applied as indicated on Drawings and according to the NEC.AFCI breakers shall be used as added protection for receptacles located inside a classified area. 6. Nameplates a. Equipment nameplates and designations shall be 2-inch by 5-inch minimum, but large enough for all lettering, not less than 1/1 6-inch-thick, engraved laminated plastic fastened with stainless steel screws. Nameplates lettering shall be 1 inch and have white lettering on a black background and shall indicate equipment designations as shown on the drawings. Panel boards /� 26 08 00- 5 b. Provide permanent warning labels as follows for each Panelboard compartment, door, or access point: 1) DANGER- HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT. 2) WARNING- HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK- DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE WORKING ON THIS UNIT. 7. Lifting Means a. Each Panelboard section shall be supplied with adequate lifting means. Each section shall be capable of being rolled or moved into installation position. 8. Circuit Breakers rated 600 Amps and Above a. Circuit breakers shall have solid-state adjustable trip settings with Long time, Short time and Instantaneous LSIG. Where Panelboards have neutral breakers shall included Ground settings (LSIG). b. Circuit breakers shall have trip indication of Overload, Short Circuit, and Ground Fault trip. c. Branch circuit breakers shall be suitable for terminating copper conductors using compression type lugs. See Drawings for size and number of conductors required per phase for each circuit breaker. Lugs shall be supplied by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary wiring, connections, and services to maintain existing systems in service during construction. B. When work must be performed on energized equipment, circuits, or panels, use personnel experienced in such operations. Proper PPE, procedures, and sign-offs must be obtained prior to beginning work; each facility may have unique requirement for working energized equipment. C. For all existing electrical services, maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the OWNER/ENGINEER at least one week in advance, before partially or completely disabling any system. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. The electrical contractor and equipment manufacturer has responsibilities in the installation and field testing of the equipment as described in these Specifications. B. Installation of equipment shall be performed by the electrical contractor who shall be required to assemble the equipment, if required, and install it in accordance with installation instructions, Operation and Maintenance instructions (which shall be furnished by the vendor or manufacturer), and the Drawings for this project. 1. The electrical contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment, and machinery necessary to receive, inspect, unload, store, protect, and install equipment completely and in proper operating condition. 2. The electrical contractor shall protect and store the Panelboard and Panelboard components indoors. 3. The electrical contractor shall also furnish incidental items not supplied with the equipment, but which may or may not be described in the Drawings and Specifications, for complete installation, such as wiring, conduit, ducts, anchors, and other appurtenances, as necessary. C. The electrical contractor shall schedule the service of the manufacturer to assist in troubleshooting issues or failures of the panelboard. Panel boards �� 26 08 00- 6 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install the Panelboard in accordance with applicable codes for each location. Provide filler plates for unused spaces and install onto the panelboard. B. Mount boxes for surface-mounted panelboards so there is at least 1/2-inch air space between the box and the wall. The panelboard shall be mounted plumb, rigid, and true without distortion of box. C. Install panelboards and accessories in their entirely according to manufacturer's instructions. D. Terminate conduits only in the Panelboard section allocated for conduits. E. Terminate feeder conductors in the appropriate Panelboard location.The CONTRACTOR is responsible for supplying necessary lugs and connection devices for conductor termination. F. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker trip ranges per the Power System Study. G. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using a calibrated torque wrench per manufacturer's instructions. H. Complete grounding connections and bond neutral for separately derived systems to ground per Specification Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars according to Drawings and NEC. I. Install nameplates and warning labels and identify all conductors and panelboard components according to specification Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. J. Type circuit directories, giving location and nature of load served. Install laminated printed circuit directories in each panelboard. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing and Inspection 1. A manufacturer's representative shall be present during the following inspections and tests: a. Refer to specification Section 26 0126, Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems for additional information and requirements. b. Inspect Panelboard for: 1) Physical Damage. 2) Correct equipment configuration. 3) Missing or loose Components connections. 4) Proper alignment. 5) Grounding. 6) Equipment anchorage and fastening. c. Test the resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. Refer to the manufacturer's literature for specific testing methods. d. Using a calibrated torque wrench, verify tightness of bolted bus joints and bus connections per the manufacturer's recommended torque values. e. Test installed GFCI and AFCI breakers per the NEC and manufacturer's recommended method. f. Acceptance Testing Preparation 1) Test insulation resistance for each Panelboard component, connecting supply, feeders, and control circuits. 2) Test continuity of each circuit conductor. 3) Verify cables and conductors are properly labeled. B. Testing Agency Panel boards 26 08 00- 7 1. Engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to perform field tests, inspections and prepare a test report: a. Perform each electrical test, visual and mechanical inspection in accordance with NETA Acceptance Testing Specification (ATS). Certify compliance with test parameters. b. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections after substantial completion, but no more than 45 days after: 1) Ready the panelboard(s)for infrared scanning: With permission of OWNER, with proper sign-off, and with proper PPE using qualified persons, remove the front panel so joints and connections are viewable. 2) Perform an infrared scan of each Panelboard, using an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature and to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for scanning device. c. Prepare and submit a report, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. 1) Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial actions. 2) Utilize information and requirements listed in Section 26 01 26, Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems. C. Field Adjustment and Troubleshooting 1. Adjust all moving parts and operable components to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Verify circuit breaker trip and time delay settings are according to the Overcurrent Protection Device Coordination Study. 3. Correct malfunctioning devices on site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new equipment and retest. D. Cleaning 1. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. Provide one quart of touch- up paint to OWNER for each color used. END OF SECTION Panel boards 26 08 00- 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK y Panel boards 26 08 00- 9 SIGNATURE AUTOMATION 17950 PRESTON ROAD,SUITE 300 DALLAS,TX 75252 TBPELS FIRM NO.F-14711 � ~ 3 tptE ` s JAMES E LANDGRAF SECTION 26 28 16 75J2A 01'232025 Disconnects PART1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Where references are made to the Related Work paragraph in each Specification Section, including other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or "work" as maybe required in those references or drawings, and include such information or "work" as may be specified for disconnects. B. All raceways, power and control wiring, fittings and electrical connections related to Mechanical Division equipment that is shown on the Electrical Drawings shall be provided under Division 26. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26, D. Work shall include methods and materials for the disconnects, plus the following where applicable: 1. Outlet Boxes for Electrical Systems- reference section 26 05 33.17 2. Conduit for Electrical Systems- reference section 26 05 33.13 3. Wiring devices for Electrical Systems- reference section 26 05 33.17 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall include furnishing of all labor,tools, materials, and equipment necessary to install a completed system containing disconnects in accordance with the National Electrical Code(NEC)as shown on drawings and as specified herein. Disconnects shall consist of switches, enclosures, doors, including,but not limited to handles,fuses, circuit breakers, and related material. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Division 26 Electrical specifications. B.The Contractor shall be responsible for sizing all disconnects per the National Electrical Code (NEC)unless otherwise stated on drawings or in these specifications. C. Cooperation with contractors under separate contracts is required, and the work described herein and shown on the drawings shall be coordinated as required to fulfill the intent of the Contract. D. The disconnecting operators are: 1. Fusible switches. 2.Non-fusible switches. 3.Molden-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). E. Work shall include methods and materials for the disconnects, plus the following where applicable: 1. Conduit for Electrical Systems: Reference Section 36 05 33.13 "Conduit for Electrical Systems". 2. Wiring devices for Electrical Systems: Reference Section 26 05 33.17 "Outlet Boxes for Electrical Systems". Disconnects 26 28 16-1 1.2 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Submittal Procedures and shall include: 1. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, fusible switch, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers'technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. i. Enclosure types and details it. Current and voltage ratings M. Horsepower rating iv. Fuse ratings and type- when supplied V. Lug sizes vi. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate) 2. Shop Drawings: i. Dimensioned elevations it. Wiring diagrams for power and control 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting disconnects. 1.3 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following apply to the "work" of this Section: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Standards for Electrical Safety in the Workplace (NFPA 70E) 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 4. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 7. Instrument Society of America (ISA) 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 9. Factory Mutual (FM) 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements, circuits,raceways and equipment arrangements are as shown on the Drawings. B. In-so-far as they are available, each disconnect shall be from one source from a single manufacturer. Disconnects i 26 28 16-2 C. Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle and store equipment components in accordance with shop drawings, manufacturer's written instructions," and the following: 1. Deliver material for the disconnects to the project in full cartons with name, size, type, on the label. 2. Store material for the disconnects in a manner to prevent damage from the elements, personnel, equipment, and moisture. 1.6 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Contractor and/or manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:One(1)year from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Cost for the removal, shipment, repair and installation by Contractor shall be included in warranty, as well as correction of defective work. 1.7 SCHEDULES A. Schedule with the Owner/Engineer for required shutdowns to accommodate disconnect installations. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of disconnects and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. i i i i PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Disconnects shall meet or exceed the specifications and requirements of the latest governing agency. B. Disconnects for hazardous (classified) locations shall be rated for the area installed and comply with NEC requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Disconnects 26 28 16-3 1. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure. 2. Switch blades shall be plated copper. B. Enclosures: Disconnects shall be rated for the area installed, and comply with the following: 1. For disconnects located indoor, in a dry and clean location utilize a NEMA 12 enclosure. 2. For disconnects located outdoor, or indoor in a wet or damp location utilize a NEMA 4X Type 316 Stainless Steel enclosure. 3. Furnish enclosures with interlocking covers with maintenance defeat feature and external front-operated flange-mounted switch levers. 4. Disconnects shall have provisions for the use of three (3) safety padlocks in the "Off" position. 5. Embossed or engraved "ON-OFF" indication shall be provided for the switch position. 6. Furnish horsepower rated disconnects for motor circuits. 7. For disconnects located in chemical areas utilize disconnect enclosures rated for the area installed. C. Disconnects with fusible switches: 1. Shall be of Heavy Duty design 2. Single Throw 3. Rated for the circuit voltage 4. Supplied with 2 normally open contacts for detection of switch position. 5. 3-pole device unless otherwise listed on Drawings 6. Supplied with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses specified. 7. Supplied with specified fuses. 8. Equipment grounding kit internally mounted and labeled. 9. Neutral kit internally mounted, insulated- when a neutral is used in the circuit arrangement. 10. Lugs shall be mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 11. Service Rated Switches shall be listed and labeled for use as service equipment. D. Disconnects with nonfusible switches: l. Shall be of Heavy Duty design 2. Single Throw 3. Rated for the circuit voltage 4. Supplied with 2 normally open contacts for detection of switch position. 5. 3-pole switch unless otherwise listed on Drawings. 6. Equipment grounding kit internally mounted and labeled. 7. Neutral kit internally mounted, insulated- when a neutral is used in the circuit arrangement. 8. Lugs shall be mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. E. Disconnects with molded-case circuit breakers: 1. Shall be of Heavy Duty design 2. Single Throw 3. Rated for the circuit voltage 4. Supplied with 2 normally open contacts for detection of switch position. 5. Supplied with thermal magnetic circuit breaker with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. Disconnects i 26 28 16-4 i. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. 11. Stand frame sizes and trip ratings. m. 3-pole device unless otherwise listed on Drawings. iv. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 600 amp and larger. 6. Supplied with Equipment grounding kit internally mounted and labeled. 7. Neutral kit internally mounted, insulated - when a neutral is used in the circuit arrangement. 8. Lugs shall be mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 9. Service Rated Switches shall be listed and labeled for use as service equipment. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include: 1. General Electric 2. Eaton 3. Square D 4. Allen Bradley 5. Appleton 6. Kiliark B. All others shall submit qualifications to the Owner and the Engineer for review and approval prior to bid submittal no later than one week after bid advertisement date. Any submittals after this time period shall not be evaluated. Qualifications shall include equipment manufacturer who have had at least 10 years of successful experience in providing equipment for similar projects with a generator and pump station configurations. Qualifications shall include a list of similar projects within the last 5 years with the name of the project and contact information of the Owner. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary wiring, connections and services to maintain existing systems in service during construction. B. When work must be performed on energized equipment, circuits, or panels, use personnel experienced in such operations. Proper PPE, procedures and signoffs must be obtained prior to beginning work- each facility may have unique requirement for working energized equipment. C. For all existing electrical services, maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the Owner/Engineer at least one week in advance,before partially or completely disabling any system. Disconnects i 26 28 16-5 3.2 APPLICATION A. Provide electrical disconnects in the locations shown on the Drawings, for the electrical equipment shown on the Drawings and as required for device connections, and code compliance. B. Disconnect locations shown on Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify locations of disconnects prior to rough-in. Coordinate job conditions and notify the Engineer of discrepancies before proceeding with the installation of the work. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install the disconnect in accordance with applicable codes at each location indicated on the plans. B. Coordinate layout and installation of disconnect and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. C. Install fuses in fusible disconnects. D. Install individual disconnects with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. E. Remove temporary lifting provisions,channels,brackets,and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. F. Install conduit,conductors, and grounding per NEC, these specifications and Drawings. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING A. General Testing: 1. Perform all testing outlined in section 26 0126 "Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems". 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. B. Tests for Conductors: 1. Test insulation resistance for each branch circuit,feeder and control circuits. 2. Test continuity of each conductor. C. Infrared Scanning: All infrared scanning must be performed while equipment is energized and running, see 3.02 B in this section. 1. Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, located inside the disconnect. With proper signoff and plant permission, remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 3. Replace damaged conductors, equipment and controls found to be defective or over-heated. D. Correct all problems associated with disconnects and circuit conditions. Disconnects 26 28 16-6 1. Remove malfunctioning units or devices and replace with new. 2. Retest as specified above. E. Prepare test and inspection reports,including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. Submit under Specification 26 0126 Testing of Electrical Systems. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field installed conductors,components,control wiring,interconnecting wiring complying with section 26 05 53 "Identification of Electrical Systems". B.Attach warning signs and label each enclosure a nameplate complying with requirements in section 26 05 53"Identification of Electrical Systems". END OF SECTION Disconnects 26 28 16-7 DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK SECTION 3110 00 SITE CLEARING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies site clearing activities including trees and vegetation removal and root grubbing,tree protection,topsoil stripping and stockpiling, capping and removing utilities, temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, and removing minor above-and below-grade site improvements. B. This section does not include detailed tree protection and trimming, tree and root pruning, or tree relocation; grading, excavating, backfilling for earthwork and trenching; building and selective demolition; or landscaping. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition"for partial demolition of buildings or structures undergoing alterations. 2. Section 02 4100"Demolition"for demolition of buildings,structures,and site improvements. 3. Section 3120 00"Earthwork"for soil materials,excavating, backfilling,and site grading. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Definitions 1. Interfering or Objectionable Material:Trash, rubbish,and junk;vegetation and other organic matter,whether alive, dead, or decaying. 2. Clearing: Removal of interfering or objectionable material lying on or protruding above ground surface. 3. Grubbing: Removal of vegetation and other organic matter, including stumps, buried logs, and roots greater than 2-inch caliber to a depth as specified in the following paragraphs. 4. Scalping: Removal of sod without removing more than upper 3-inches of topsoil. S. Stripping: Removal of topsoil remaining after applicable scalping is completed. 6. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles;friable, pervious,and black or a darker shade of brown,gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2-inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots,toxic materials, or other non-soil materials. 7. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Project Limits:Areas, as shown or specified,within which work is to be performed. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 311000-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SITE CLEARING JULY 2024 1.3 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain OWNER'S property, cleared materials shall become CONTRACTOR's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Photographs or videotape,sufficiently detailed,of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. B. Record drawings,according to Section 0178 39 "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads,streets,walks,and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets,walks,or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Salvable Improvements: As applicable,carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on OWNER'S premises where indicated. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. PART 2 -EXECUTION 2.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 2.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3): 1. CONTRACTOR shall obtain a permit to discharge storm water from the construction site from Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) in accordance with TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 (Permit). 2. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all requirements of the Permit, including the development of a SWP3,filling of the Notice of Intent(NOI) and Notice of Termination PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 311000-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SITE CLEARING JULY 2024 (NOT), record maintenance,and posting of the Permit. 3. Costs associated with obtaining and compliance with the Permit are the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. 4. Submit a copy of the SWP3 and other pertinent TCEQ submittals to the ENGINEER and the OWNER two weeks prior to submitting to TCEQ. B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: 1. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff to adjacent properties and walkways,according to a sediment and erosion control plan,specific to the site,which complies with the requirements of TCEQ, or EPA 832/R-92-005, or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall have the sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques,sequences,and procedures for furnishing, installing and maintaining the erosion and sedimentation control system. 3. Inspect, repair,and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 2.3 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials,debris,or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles,equipment,or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by ENGINEER. 1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located,to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status,as determined by ENGINEER. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 311000-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SITE CLEARING JULY 2024 2.4 UTILITIES A. Locate,identify, disconnect, and cap off utilities indicated to be removed.Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. B. Existing Utilities: If applicable, do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by OWNER or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify ENGINNER not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without ENGINEER'S written permission. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities as indicated to be removed. 2.5 LIMITS OF CLEARING A. As follows, but not to extend beyond Project limits shown on the Drawings. 1. Excavation: 5 feet beyond top of cut slopes. 2. Fill: a. Clearing and Grubbing: 5 feet beyond toe of permanent fill. b. Stripping: 2 feet beyond toe of permanent fill. 3. Roadways:Clearing and grubbing 20 feet from roadway centerline. 4. Overhead Utilities: Clearing and grubbing entire width of easements and rights-of- way. 5. Other Areas:As shown on drawings. B. Remove rubbish,trash and junk from entire area within Project limits. 2.6 BLASTING A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 2.7 BURNING A. Unless otherwise indicated, burning will only be allowed when the CONTRACTOR provides the OWNER with copies of written authorization from all appropriate and responsible regulatory agencies indicating that burning is acceptable. Said regulatory agencies may include, but not be limited to,State,City,County or local officials,fire marshals/chiefs,etc. 2.8 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions,trees, shrubs,grass,and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and remove roots,obstructions,and debris extending to a depth of 18-inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3110 00-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SITE CLEARING JULY 2024 B. As required,fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8-inches and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 2.9 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to a depth of 12 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and non-soil materials from topsoil,including trash, debris,weeds, roots, and other waste materials. 2. Topsoil can be stockpiled and used for final grading where approved for use in Division 2 specifications. C. Remove organic material remaining after stripping topsoil. Removal depths shall be verified in the field by the Geotechnical Engineer before filling in pockets where organic material was removed. D. Proofrolling 1. Following stripping of top soil, proofroll the site with a loaded tandem axle truck to locate any soft or unstable areas. Proofrolling shall be conducted in the presence of and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Soft or unstable areas shall be removed down to a stable subgrade as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer, and then filled in with select fill material. E. Subgrade Preparation 1. Following proofrolling,the following preparations shall be made to the Subgrade in the following order. a. Scarify the site. b. Moisture condition to above optimum moisture content. C. Recompact to a minimum 95 percent dry density Standard Proctor(ASTM D 698). F. Stockpile topsoil materials and removed soft, unstable, and organic materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to approximately 6 feet. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 2.10 SITE DEMOLITION A. Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving,curbs,gutters,and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain at the line of demolition before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 311000-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SITE CLEARING JULY 2024 2. Epoxy coat cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion. 2.11 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: 1. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil,obstructions,demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off OWNER'S property. 2. Dispose of stockpiled waste materials within 30-days. 3. When requested by OWNER, provide copies of the landfill receipts for waste material disposal. END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 311000-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 SITE CLEARING JULY 2024 SECTION 3120 00 EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Provisions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Site grading. 2. Preparing subgrades for roadways,structures,slabs-on-grade,and related facility work not specified elsewhere. 3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 4. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. S. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 3123 00"Excavation,Trenching,and Backfilling for Utilities"for excavation, trenching, and backfilling for utilities. 2. Section 3123 16"Excavation Support and Protection"for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling of excavation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions. 1. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 2. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. 3. Completed Course:A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of Work. 4. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. 5. Earthwork: Includes excavation,fill and compaction,grading,and disposal of waste and surplus material. 6. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. a. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by ENGINEER. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices. b. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. C. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by ENGINEER. Unauthorized PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 312000-PAGE 1 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 excavation, as well as remedial work directed by ENGINEER, shall be without additional compensation. 7. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, clearing and grubbing, stripping of topsoil, excavation or fill to grade, and subgrade preparation. 8. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. 9. Lift: Loose(uncompacted) layer of material. 10. Optimum Moisture Content: Determined in accordance with ASTM Standard specified to determine maximum dry density for relative compaction. Determine field moisture content on basis of fraction passing 3/4-inch sieve. 11. Relative Compaction: Ratio, in percent, of as-compacted field dry density to laboratory maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698.Apply corrections for oversize material to either as-compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by ENGINEER. 12. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses,conglomerate deposits,and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu.yd.for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu.yd.for footing,trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: a. Excavation of Footings,Trenches, and Pits: Late-model,track-mounted hydraulic excavator;equipped with a 42-inch-wide,maximum,short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 Ibf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 Ibf; measured according to SAE J-1179. b. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210- hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-Ibf breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732. 13. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs,tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances,or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. 14. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation,or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. 15. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts,and cables,as well as underground services within buildings. 16. Well-Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentrations or lack thereof of one or more sizes producing a material type which, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. B. Reference Standards. 1. ASTM International: a. D448—Standard Method Classification for sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge construction. b. D698—Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,499 ft-Ib.ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) C. D2487—Standard Method Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 2 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 (Unified Soil Classification system) d. D2922—Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 2. American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials(AASHTO): a. M288—Geotextile Specification for Highway Application 3. Texas Department of Transportation:Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges. (TxDOT). a. TxDOT Item 216"Proof Rolling" 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Geotextile, if specified on Drawings. 2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. B. Samples: 12-by-12-inch Sample of subdrainage and/or separation geotextile. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 3. Designated submittals for materials per Section 32 1100"Base Courses". D. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces,which might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: If applicable, do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by OWNER or others unless permitted in writing by ENGINEER and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify ENGINEER not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without ENGINEER's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities as indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. C. Weather Limitations: 1. Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than 32°F shall not be used as fill or backfill until material completely thaws. 2. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 3 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW,GP,GM,SW,SP, and SM or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,vegetation, and other deleterious matter. Satisfactory soils shall comply with the requirements of Section 32 1100 "Base Courses". C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC,SC,CL, ML,OL, CH, MH,OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487 or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. 2. Depending on the plasticity index(PI) and liquid limits(LL),Soil Classification Groups GC and SC may be used. D. Excavated backfill may be used for general site fill but may not be used for select fill. 2.2 DRAINAGE COURSE AND FILTER MATERIAL A. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel;ASTM D 448;coarse-aggregate grading Size 57;with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. B. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a f- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. 2.3 GEOTEXTILES A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: When shown on Drawings, provide non-woven needle- punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefin or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 IV;ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 IV;ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 56 IV; ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 Ibf;ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No.60 sieve,maximum;ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum;ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours'exposure;ASTM D 4355. B. Separation Geotextile: If shown on the Drawings, provide woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications,made from polyolefin or polyesters;with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 4 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 1. Survivability: Class 2;AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 Ibf;ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 Ibf;ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 90 Ibf;ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 90 Ibf;ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum;ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum;ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours'exposure;ASTM D 4355. 2.4 MATERIAL QUALITY CONTROL A. Sampling of material stockpiles and material sources shall be in accordance with ASTM D75. B. Perform gradation analysis in accordance with ASTM C136 for: 1. Coarse and fine aggregate,natural gravel,crushed stone for foundation,sand,select fill, impervious clay fill, earth fill, and topsoil. C. Perform abrasion testing in accordance with ASTM C131 or ASTM C535. 1. Coarse and fine aggregate and when requested by ENGINEER for natural gravel and crushed stone for foundation. D. Soundness testing in accordance with ASTM C88. 1. Coarse and fine aggregate and when requested by ENGINEER for natural gravel and crushed stone for foundation. E. Deleterious materials determination in accordance with ASTM C40,C117,and C142. 1. Coarse and fine aggregate and when requested by ENGINEER for natural gravel and crushed stone for foundation F. Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM D4318. 1. Sand for particles passing No.8 sieve,select fill, impervious clay fill,and earth fill. G. Determine pH of topsoil in accordance with ASTM D2974. H. Determine permeability(hydraulic gradient) in accordance with ASTM D5084 and percent dispersion in accordance with ASTM D4221 of impervious clay fill materials. I. Provide tests results showing flowable fill mix design achieves desired compressive strength. 2.5 CONTAMINATION TESTING AND CERTIFICATION A. When materials are suspected of contamination,the CONTRACTOR shall arrange and pay for the services of an EPA approved laboratory to perform a toxic contaminant scan of composite borrow material samples in accordance with Section 32 1100. B. Soil materials derived from the excavation of underground petroleum storage tanks shall not be used as fill on Project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities,sidewalks,pavements,and other facilities from damage caused PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 5 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 by settlement, lateral movement, undermining,washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation,topsoil, debris,obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Section 31 1000. C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls,which are specified in Section 31 10 00, during earthwork operations. D. Provide excavation support and protection in accordance with Section 3123 16. E. Excavation,trenching, and backfilling work for utilities shall be accomplished in accordance with Section 3123 00. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations,from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining,washout,and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system, specified in Section 3123 19,to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. No explosives of any kind will be allowed on site at any time. 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Excavations shall be observed by the Geotechnical ENGINEER to make sure that the proper bearing material has been reached. The excavations shall be checked for size and observed by the Geotechnical ENGINEER to make sure that loose material has been removed prior to concrete placement. B. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials from an approved quarry. Submit quarry test results to ENGINEER for approval prior to use. 2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. C. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 6 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to specified elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork,for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. Submit quarry test results to ENGINEER for approval prior to use. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. Refer to Drawings for treatment of subgrade,the addition of a concrete seal slab, installation of vapor barrier, or other work required prior to placement of footings and foundations. 2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. 3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. B. Undercutting: 1. When objectionable material not suitable for foundation or subgrade material is present in locations for subgrade or foundation construction, as determined by ENGINEER, undercut material to the depth and extent as directed and backfill with suitable material. 2. Place fill material in uniform layers and compact as specified for soil backfill and fills. 3. Dispose of undercut materials off-site. 3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify ENGINEER when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If ENGINEER determines that unsatisfactory soil is present,continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proofroll subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding using rollers that when loaded weigh at least 25 tons and no more than 50 tons. 1. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 2. Make at least two passes,offsetting each pass one tire width. Operate at speed between 2 and 6 miles per hour. 3. Excavate soft pockets, unsatisfactory soils,and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by ENGINEER, and replace with select fill as directed. 4. Following proofrolling and replacement of unsatisfactory soil with satisfactory soil,the following preparations shall be made to the subgrade in the following order. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 7 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 a. Scarify the site b. Moisture condition to above optimum moisture content 5. Recompact to a minimum 95%dry density Standard Proctor(ASTM D 698) 6. Work in areas under TxDOTjurisdiction, proofroll in accordance with TxDOT Item 216. D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices. E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures,frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by ENGINEER, without additional compensation. 3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill,with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by ENGINEER. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by ENGINEER. 3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrows soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place,grade,and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 2. Confine stockpiles to within easements, right-of-way,and approved areas. Do not obstruct roads or streets. 3.9 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following work as applicable: 1. Construction below finish grade including,where applicable, subdrainage,damp proofing,waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing,and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 8. Leakage tests for structures. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud,frost,snow,or ice. 3.10 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench,or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 8 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use select or granular fill, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 4. Under building slabs, use select fill, unless otherwise shown on drawings. C. Place soil fills on subgrades free of mud,frost,snow,or ice. 3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content, if not specified on the Drawings or in the Geotechnical Report. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen,or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace,or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3. Do not allow the moisture content in the subgrade and layers below the slab base to fall below the optimum moisture content. B. Vapor Barrier: Place polyethylene sheeting below the concrete slabs. If the subgrade underlying the vapor barrier contains sharp or angled particles,then a layer of cushion sand (1 to 2-inches thick)should be placed in contact with the sheet to provide protection against puncture. Note that the elevation and thickness of the slab shall not be changed to adjust for the layer of cushion sand. 3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment,and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698, if not specified on the Drawings: 1. For raft/mat foundation areas, scarify and compact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material to 98 percent. 2. For other areas at the site,scarify and compact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 98 percent. D. Avoid over compaction of the subgrade and any other layers of backfill or fill soil. 3.13 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface,free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines,and elevations indicated. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 9 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots,fill low spots,and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and structures and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1-inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.14 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE A. When shown on the Drawings, provide subsurface drainage in accordance with the following paragraphs. B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6 inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. Compact each filter material layer with a minimum of two passes of a plate-type vibratory compactor. C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated,to within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. Compact each filter material layer with a minimum of two passes of a plate-type vibratory compactor. 2. As shown on the Drawings,place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6 inch thick compacted layers to final subgrade. 3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud,frost,snow,or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows: 1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6-inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6-inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness,with no compacted layer more than 6-inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 10 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 3.16 CONCRETE SEAL SLAB A. When shown on the Drawings, provide a concrete seal slab on subgrade under structures of the specified thickness. Concrete shall comply with Section 03 30 00 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" having a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi. 3.17 CEMENT-SOIL BACKFILL A. When shown on the Drawings, provide cement-soil backfill as subgrade under structures. Cement-Soil Backfill shall comply with Section 32 1100 "Base Courses". B. Mix not less than 1-1/2 sacks of Portland cement per cubic yard of sand with water using a pug mill type mixer.Stamp batch ticket with time of loading. Material will be rejected if not place within 1-1/2 hours after loading or if the mixture has dried out. C. Application: 1. Pipes and Conduits. Use cement-sand material as bedding and backfill for pipes, conduits and other utilities as indicated on the Drawings or because of site conditions. 2. Foundations. Use cement-sand material for stabilizing foundation for manholes, inlets or other utility or drainage structures. 3. Manholes. Use cement-sand material as backfill around manholes if the manhole adjoins pavement. 4. Density Control: a. Place in lifts not exceeding 12-inches measured loose. Compact with mechanical hand tamps in accordance with Density Control requirements. b. Areas Subjected to or Influenced by Vehicular Traffic. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings,compact backfill to a minimum 100 percent of maximum density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698,with required moisture content within minus 2 to plus 4 of optimum. C. Areas Not Subjected to or Influenced by Vehicular Traffic. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, compact backfill to a minimum 95 percent of maximum density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698,with required moisture content within minus 2 to plus 4 of optimum. 5. Field Quality Control a. Test Method: 1) Determine the maximum density and the optimum moisture content of pipe zone and backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D698. 2) Determination of density control backfill materials shall be in accordance with ASTM D2922. b. Compaction Test Frequency: 1) For trench lengths less than 300 feet,around structures and manholes, minimum of one test for each layer of backfill. 2) For trench lengths in excess of 300 feet, perform a minimum of one test for every 300 linear feet for each layer of backfill. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 11 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. B. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by ENGINEER. C. Testing agency will test compaction in accordance with ASTM D 2922 and moisture content in accordance with ASTM of soils. Tests for both compaction and moisture content will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2500 sq.ft., but in no case fewer than 2 tests at each layer. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 3. Pavement Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, least 1 test for every 5,000 sq. ft, 4. Trenches: At each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test per 100 linear feet of trench. D. When testing agency reports that subgrades,fills,or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.19 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specify tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by ENGINEER; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off OWNER's property. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3120 00-PAGE 12 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 EARTHWORK JULY 2024 SECTION 3123 00 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies Work required for the excavation, excavation support and protection, trenching, embedment, concrete encasement,thrust blocking, and backfilling for utilities. B. The design and installation of trench excavation support and protection systems shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and shall comply with the requirements of Section 3123 16"Excavation Support and Protection." C. Pipe, conduit,duct banks, cable, and other utilities installation,along with embedment,fill within the pipe zone,thrust blocks, backfill, and related items are shown on the Drawings and described in this Section and related Sections. Pipeline testing is covered in other Sections. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 321100"Base Courses"for various materials used for bedding and backfill. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. The administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices are described in Section 0129 01. B. Trench Stabilization Material: 1. When directed by OWNER, contingency unit price bid item is provided for furnishing and placement extra crushed stone embedment for trench stabilization or foundation material as replacement for non-suitable material (Coarse aggregate gradation No.) 57) per Section 32 1100 if needed. 2. The Work shall include the excavation, removal and disposal of the non-suitable material;furnishing and placement of crushed stone to the lines and grade in the trench bottom. 1.4 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES A. Definitions. 1. Backfill:Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. a. Initial backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. b. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. 2. Bedding Course: Material placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe, conduits, cables, or duct bank. 3. Imported Material: Material obtained by CONTRACTOR from source(s)offsite. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 00-PAGE 1 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES JULY 2024 4. Lift: Loose(uncompacted) layer of material. 5. Pipe Zone: Bedding course and initial backfill,which includes full trench width, extending from trench bottom to an upper limit above top of pipe,conduct, duct bank, or other utility. 6. Prepared Trench Bottom: Graded, compacted trench bottom after excavation and installation of stabilized material, if required, but before placement of bedding course. 7. Select Backfill Material. Materials available onsite or offsite complying with the specified values. 8. Well-Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentrations or lack thereof of one or more sizes producing a material type, which when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. Well—graded does not define any numerical value that must be placed on the coefficient of uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size distribution parameters. B. Reference Standards. 1. American Public Works Association (APWA): Uniform Color Code for Temporary Marking of Underground Utility Locations. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM C33—Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates b. ASTM C117—Standard Test Method for Materials Finer Than 75-mm (No.200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing C. ASTM C136—Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates d. ASTM C150—Standard Specification for Portland Cement e. ASTM C618—Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Prozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete f. ASTM D75—Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates g. ASTM D698—Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,499 ft-Ib.ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) h. ASTM D4318—Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plasticity Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils i. ASTM D4832—Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CSLM)Test Cylinders j. ASTM D6938—Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate In Place by Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth) 3. Texas Department of Transportation:Standard Specifications for Construction for Highways, Streets and Bridges. (TxDOT). a. TxDOT Item 247"Flexible Base" 4. Texas Department of Transportation,Texas Test Methods(TEX). a. TEX-121-E "Soil-Lime Testing" 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Z535.1, Safety Color Code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 00-PAGE 2 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES JULY 2024 A. Submittals for Review. 1. Product Data:Submit manufacturer's literature for marking tapes to be used. 2. Samples: Provide 2 one-gallon samples of imported materials to be used for inspection and testing by ENGINEER, when requested. B. Submittals for Information. 1. Certified Gradation Analysis: Submit not less than 30 days prior to delivery for imported materials or anticipated to be used for trench stabilization, bedding, backfill within the pipe zone, and backfill above the pipe zone. 2. Certified Testing Analysis: Liquid limits, plasticity index,and other parameters for materials showing compliance with specified limits. 3. Flowable Fill:Certified mix design and test results. Include material types and weight per cubic yard for each component of mix. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Demolition: Complete applicable demolition work as required in accordance with Section 02 4119. B. Excavation Support and Protection: Provide an approved excavation support and protection plan prior to start of trenching operations in accordance with Section 3126 16. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MARKING TAPE A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of six inches wide and four mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility,with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep. B. Color: Comply with the requirements of APWA Uniform Color Code for Temporary Marking of Underground Utilities as well as TCEQ guidelines for color coding pipes. Red Electric power lines,cables,conduit,and lightning cables Orange Communication alarm or signal lines,cables, or conduit Yellow Gas,oil,steam, petroleum,or gaseous materials Green Sewers and drain lines Blue j Potable water Purple I Reclaimed water,irrigation,and slurry lines *As specified in NEMA Z535.1,Safety Color Code 2.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements for following materials are described in Section 3105 16. 1. Granular Material(Fill) PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 00-PAGE 3 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES JULY 2024 2. Coarse and Fine Aggregate 3. Natural Gravel 4. Sand. 5. Controlled Low Strength Fill 6. Concrete Encasement 7. Select Fill 8. Site Fill 9. Impervious Clay Fill 10. Top Soil B. Cement-Sand Backfill:Section 32 1100. C. Trench Stabilization Material: Comply with the requirements of Section 32 1100 for coarse aggregate ASTM C33, Size No. 4 (1-1/2 to 3/4-inch). 2.3 BEDDING COURSE AND INITIAL BACKFILL A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, materials used will comply with the following type and size requirements. 1. Piping: a. Ductile iron pipe, welded steel pipe, stainless steel pipe, and pretension or prestress concrete cylinder pipe: Coarse Aggregate No. 57,one inch maximum particle size. b. Reinforce Concrete Pipe: Coarse Aggregate No.67,3/4 inch maximum particle size. C. Copper and PVC Pipe,6-inch and Smaller:AggregateNo.8. d. PVC Pipe,8-inch and Larger: Coarse Aggregate No.67,3/4 inch maximum particle size. 2. Electrical and Communication: a. Duct Banks: In accordance with Section 26 05 43"Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" and as shown on the Drawings. b. Conduit and Direct-Burial Cable:Sand. B. Initial Backfill:Well-graded site fill or borrow having a Plasticity Index(PI) less than or equal to 16 and a maximum particle size of two inches. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities,sidewalks, pavements,and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation for trenches. B. Excavation support and protection for trench excavation shall be in accordance with Section 3123 00. C. Provide protection of designated trees,trimming trees as require permitting Work to proceed. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 00-PAGE 4 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES JULY 2024 D. During inclement weather and where site conditions warrant,take precautions to prevent surface-water run-off from entering the excavation. Remove and dispose of water entering trench, as necessary grade trench bottom and compact subgrade. Do not place bedding, lay pipe, conduits, cables, or duct banks in water. Provide continuous control of water until trench backfill is complete. E. Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than 32 degrees F shall not be used until material completely thaws. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction. 3.2 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Excavate to lines,grades,depths, and dimensions shown and as necessary to accomplish Work.Allow for excavation support and protection materials,working space, bedding course,topsoil, and related materials. B. Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type, nature, or condition of materials encountered. Remove all loose soil, mud, deleterious material from beneath structures, roadways, utility lines, and related work. C. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide required clearance of each side of pipe or conduit.Trench walls shall be vertical to elevation equal to 12 inches above top of pipe, conduits, cables, or duct banks. D. Minimum Width of Trenches: 1. Single pipes,conduits,cables,and duct banks: 2. Outside Diameter, less than four inches of width: 12 inches+OD of pipe. 3. Outside Diameter,equal to or greater than 4 inches: 12 inches greater than outside diameter or width of pipe, conduit, cables, or duct banks. 4. Multiple pipes,conduits,cables,or duct banks in single trench: 12 inches greater than aggregate width of pipes, conduits, cables, duct banks, plus space between. 5. Trench width to be increased for excavation support and protection systems. E. Maximum trench width: No more than 24 inches from outside diameter of pipes plus excavation support materials.When maximum trench is exceeded,the CONTRACTOR shall use the next higher class of embedment, at no additional cost. F. Proceed with caution in areas of existing utilities exposing them by hand excavation or other means acceptable to utility owner. Protect, support, and maintain existing utilities. G. Avoid disturbing soil within branch spread of trees designated for protection. If it is necessary to excavate through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with a sharp axe. H. Trench excavation shall not advance more than 100 feet ahead of the completed pipe work except where specifically authorized by ENGINEER. 3.3 PREPARATION OF TRENCH BOTTOM A. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.Additional excavation depth will be required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 00-PAGE 5 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES JULY 2024 B. Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed materials, and trim off high areas left by excavating bucket teeth.Allow space for bedding material as required. C. Soft Subgrade: Remove any soft subgrade, replacing with trench stabilizing material. D. Trench Stabilizing Material Installation: Place material over full width of trench bottom in six-inch lifts to required grade.Allow for bedding thickness. Compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding support for the bedding material. 3.4 BEDDING COURSE A. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, bedding and encasement shall be as described herein. Furnish imported bedding material, where excavated material is unsuitable for bedding or insufficient quantity. B. Place over full width of prepared trench bottom in two equal lifts when the required depth exceeds eight inches. Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface. C. Minimum thickness:As follows,except increase depths by two inches in areas of rock excavation. 1. Pipe: six inches. 2. Conduit:three inches. 3. Cable:three inches. 4. Duct Banks:three inches. D. Check grade, correcting irregularities in bedding material. Loosen top one inch to two inches of compacted bedding material with a rake or other means to provide a cushion before laying each section of pipe, conduits, cables, or duct banks. E. Install to form continuous and uniform support except at bell holes, if applicable. Excavate bedding at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of joint and to provide uniform bearing along barrel of pipe or conduit. F. Utility and pipe lines shall not use bedding course beneath or adjacent to structures in order to minimize the percolation of water through the bedding course towards the structure. Utility and pipe trenches shall include a plug formed from low permeable clays at the structure. The plug shall extend two feet beyond the footing, each way, and from the bottom of the trench to the surface. 3.5 INITIAL BACKFILL A. Upper limit of initial backfill shall be not less than the following: 1. Pipe: 12-inches, unless otherwise shown. 2. Conduit:three inches, unless otherwise shown. 3. Cable:three inches, unless otherwise shown. 4. Duct Bank:three inches, unless otherwise shown. B. Restrain pipe,conduit,cables,or duct banks as necessary to prevent their movement during backfill operations, particularly during placement of controlled low strength fill. C. Place material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of pipe and, if applicable, between pipes, conduits, cables, and duct banks installed in same trench. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 00-PAGE 6 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES JULY 2024 1. Pipe ten inch and smaller diameter: First lift less than or equal to one-half pipe diameter. 2. Pipe over ten-inch diameter: Maximum six-inch lifts. D. Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches,to ensure voids are completely filled before placing next lift.After the full depth of pipe zone material has been place, compact the material with vibratory plate compactor. Do not use power-driven impact type compactors to compact pipe zone material. 3.6 MARKING TAPE INSTALLATION A. Install detectable warning tape directly above utilities,approximately 12 inches above top of pipe. 3.7 FINAL BACKFILL A. General: 1. Process excavated material to meet specified soil fill requirements. Adjust moisture as necessary to obtain specified compaction. Place and compact backfill in six-inch loose lifts. 2. Do not allow backfill to free-fall into the trench or allow heavy,sharps pieces of material to be placed as backfill until after two feet of backfill has been placed. 3. Do not use power-driven impact type compactors until at least four feet of backfill is place overtop of pipe. 4. Backfill to grade with allowances for topsoil,crushed rock surfacing, pavements,or other work. 5. Backfill as soon as practicable after installation of piping,valves,encasement, restraint, and blocking. 6. Touch up damaged protective coatings prior to backfilling. Exercise care to avoid damaging piping or protective coatings with tamping equipment. 7. Settling backfill by jetting or flooding will only be permitted as shown on the Drawings or when approved by ENGINEER in writing.Trenches improperly backfilled and compacted, or where settlement occurs, shall be excavated to depth required, backfilled, compacted, and surface restored to required grade. 8. Backfill of pipe, conduits,cables, and duct banks under existing roadways, parking lots, or other facilities shall be in accordance Section 32 0117. 9. When authorized by the ENGINEER, sheeting and bracing may be left in trench. Cut off all members so that tops of same are at least 18 inches below ground. Sheeting and bracing left in place shall be indicated on Record Drawings. B. Concrete Backfill: 1. Place above bedding with minimum concrete thickness 6-inches on top and sides of pipe. Use concrete having a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi at 28 days. 2. Allow sufficient time for concrete to reach initial set before additional backfill material is place. Prevent floatation of pipe. 3. Begin and end concrete placement within four inches of a pipe joint. Do not encase pipe joints. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 00-PAGE 7 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES JULY 2024 C. Flowable Fill: Discharge from truck mounted drum type mixer into trench. Place in lifts as necessary to prevent floatation of pipe, conduits, and related items. D. Topsoil: Backfill using topsoil in the top 12 inches of the backfilled trench, if not under roadways, structures,or other facility. Maintain the finished grade of topsoil with adjacent area and grade as required restoring drainage. 3.8 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES A. Existing utilities or obstructions indicated on Drawings show approximate location only and the CONTRACTOR must field verify.This does not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility in anticipating the presence of all underground utilities whether or not shown on the Drawings. B. CONTRACTOR shall,at his own expense, maintain in working order and without interruption of service all existing utilities and services which may be encountered in the Work. Except when notified by ENGINEER,the service may be temporarily interrupted to permit removal or to make temporary changes in order for the completion of Work.All costs associated with these changes shall be at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. C. Before starting construction, the CONTRACTOR shall notify all utility companies involved to locate and mark their utilities in the field. All underground utilities shall then be uncovered for verification of location and elevation prior to start of construction. D. The CONTRACTOR must obtain the required permits from the utility companies. E. The Geotechnical Engineer will determine if soil at existing utilities is suitable. If the soil is found to be unsuitable,then the Contactor shall remove, replace, and compact the unsuitable soil in accordance with Specification Section 3120 00 "Earthwork." 3.9 MAINTENANCE OF TRENCH BACKFILL A. After each section of the trench is backfilled, maintain the surface even with the adjacent ground until final surface restoration is complete. B. Add topsoil as required to maintain surface of the backfilled trench with adjacent ground. C. Asphalt Pavement: Replace settled areas or fill with asphalt surface. D. Other areas:Add excavated material where applicable and keep backfilled surface level with adjacent ground surface. 3.10 POTABLE WATERLINE PROTECTION A. The CONTRACTOR shall abide with TCEQ Standards for installing potable water pipelines. Special attention shall be made to these standards regarding disinfection procedures and new water lines crossing existing sewer lines. Water lines and sanitary sewers shall be installed no closer to each other than 9 feet. B. Where this cannot be achieved,the CONTRACTOR shall place all underground water and wastewater (sewer) lines in accordance with the TCEQ'S "Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems" and "Design Criteria for Sewerage Systems." The removal and replacement of sanitary sewers and compliance with these requirements shall be considered subsidiary. 3.11 DISPOSAL PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 00-PAGE 8 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES JULY 2024 A. Dispose of waste material,trash, and debris off-site. Disposal of surplus excavation materials shall be off-site,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or designated on-site by the Engineer. 3.12 DENSITY CONTROL A. Areas Subjected to or Influenced by Vehicular Traffic. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, compact backfill to a minimum 100%of maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698,with required moisture content within minus two to plus four of optimum. B. Areas Not Subjected to or Influenced by Vehicular Traffic. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, compact backfill to a minimum 95%of maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698,with required moisture content within minus two to plus four of optimum. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Method: 1. Determine the maximum density and the optimum moisture content of pipe zone and backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D698. 2. In-place density testing of backfill materials shall be in accordance with ASTM D2922. B. Compaction Test Frequency: 1. For trench lengths less than 100 feet, minimum of one test for each layer of backfill. 2. For trench lengths in excess of 100 feet, perform a minimum of one test for every 100 linear feet for each layer of backfill. 3.14 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. The Work described in this Section for the removal of soft trench bottom material and replacement with trench stabilizing material will be measured by and paid for at the unit price per cubic yard of"Trench Stabilizing Material" complete in-place. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 00-PAGE 9 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 00-PAGE 10 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING,AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES JULY 2024 SECTION 3123 16 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 3123 19 "Dewatering"for dewatering system for excavations. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design,furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads. 1. Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, licensed to practice in the state where the Project will be constructed, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. As a minimum,the Excavation Support and Protection Plan shall address the following items: 1. Provide details of shoring,bracing,sheet piling,soldier piles and lagging,tie backs, and other support systems and provisions for worker protection from hazards of caving ground. 2. Methods and sequencing of installing excavation support. 3. Proposed locations for excavated materials. 4. Minimum lateral distance from the crest of slopes forvehicles,equipment,and stockpiled materials. 5. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes,or other means. 6. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 7. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer, licensed to practice in the state where the Project is constructed, responsible for their preparation. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project-Site Information: Ageotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 16-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION JULY 2024 available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions,tests,and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. OWNER and ENGINEER will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection. B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify ENGINEER if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities,sidewalks, pavements,and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1. Shore,support,and protect utilities encountered. B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets,walks,or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded. D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable. E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems. 3.2 TRENCHES A. For excavations exceeding 5 feet in depth, provide adequate safety system meeting requirements of applicable state and local construction safety orders, and Federal requirements. 3.3 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 16-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION JULY 2024 sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements,facilities, and utilities. 1. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Section 31 20 00. 2. Repair or replace,as approved by ENGINEER, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems. B. If the support or stability of existing structures or site improvements is dependent, leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches below overlaying construction and abandon remainder. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 16-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 16-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION JULY 2024 SECTION 312319 DEWATERING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes construction dewatering. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 3123 16"Excavation Support and Protection"for shoring, bracing,and sheet piling of excavations. 2. Section 3120 00"Earthwork"for excavating, backfilling, site grading, and for site utilities. 3. Section 3123 00"Excavation,Trenching,and Backfilling for Utilities"for excavation, trenching and backfilling for utilities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittal. Provide shop drawings for dewatering system. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of risers, headers,filters, pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of discharge,control of sediment, and disposal of water. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For dewatering system indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional ENGINEER responsible for their preparation. C. Informational submittals 1. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, land surveyor and professional ENGINEER as applicable. 2. Field quality-control reports. 3. Other Informational Submittals: a. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations, if applicable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in design of dewatering systems and dewatering work. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing notification regulations before beginning dewatering. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 19-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEWATERING JULY 2024 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: As applicable,do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by OWNER or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify ENGINEER no fewerthan two days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without ENGINEER's written permission. B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report for this specific project is not available. C. Survey Work: If applicable,engage a qualified land surveyor or professional ENGINEER to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify ENGINEER if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Dewatering Performance: Design,furnish, install,test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope,size,and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1. Delegated Design: Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional ENGINEER in the state where the Project is to be constructed, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented. 3. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes,or other means. 4. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings,structures,and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 5. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities,sidewalks, pavements,and otherfacilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area. 2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 19-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEWATERING JULY 2024 accumulation. B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads,streets,walks,and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets,walks,or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from OWNER and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water. D. Monitor dewatering systems continuously. E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering. F. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls,which are specified in Section 3110 00 "Site Clearing" during dewatering operations. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells,well points,or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps,filter material gradation,valves, appurtenances,water disposal, and surface-water controls. 1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering. 2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface. B. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required. C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines,soil piping,subgrade softening, and slope instability. D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Unless otherwise specified in the Geotechnical Report, maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below surface of excavation. E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property,and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Provide standby equipment on site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 19-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEWATERING JULY 2024 system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to OWNER. 1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction. G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Observation Wells: When shown on Drawings, provide,take measurements,and maintain at least the minimum number of observation wells or piezometers indicated; additional observation wells may be required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in observation wells. 2. Repair or replace,within 24 hours,observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or destroyed. In areas where observation wells are not functioning properly,suspend construction activities until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation-well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly. 3. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed. B. Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being removed by the dewatering operation. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3123 19-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 DEWATERING JULY 2024 DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 321100 BASE COURSES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Provisions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section provides the requirements for materials used for preparation of roadway fill, subgrade and base;structural subgrade and backfill; utility subgrade, bedding,embedment, and backfill; embankment and levee subgrade and fill; select fill, and other materials for related work. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 3120 00"Earthwork"for structural backfill. 2. Section 3123 00"Excavation,Trenching,and Backfilling for Utilities"for backfill work. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM): 1. When directed by Owner, contingency unit price bid item is provided for furnishing and placement extra CLSM, if needed. 2. The Work shall include the excavation, removal, and disposal of the non-suitable material; furnishing and placement of CLSM per requirements of this section and Contract Documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Samples:As required by Engineer, provide one-gallon sample in a sealed container. B. Contractor Design Mix Determination: Submit proposed mix design for Controlled Low Strength Material and preliminary results demonstrating the mix design achieves required compressive strength. C. Source of Materials:Submit name and location of source of materials. D. Off-Site Borrow Source: Prior to furnishing off-site borrow(soils), provide notarized certification from the landowner stating to the best of landowner's knowledge and belief, the borrow source has never been contaminated by hazardous and/or toxic waste materials. E. Certified Analysis: Submit test results by independent laboratory of material compliance with specifications. Results shall not be more than 30 days old. 1.5 REFERENCES A. Well-Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentrations or lack thereof of one or more sizes producing a material type which,when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3211 00-PAGE 1 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 BASE COURSES JULY 2024 B. American Concrete Institute,ACI 229.—Controlled Low Strength Materials. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C33—Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregate. 2. C40—Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. 3. C88—Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate. 4. C94—Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 5. C117—Standard Test Method for Material Finer than 75 Micrometer(No. 200)Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. 6. C127—Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density(Specific Gravity),and Adsorption of Coarse Aggregates. 7. C131—Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 8. C136—Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and coarse Aggregates. 9. C142—Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates. 10. C150—Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 11. C535—Standard Test Method for Resistant to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 12. C618—Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. 13. D75—Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. 14. D448-Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. 15. D 698-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,499 ft-Ib/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) 16. D1140—Standard Test Method for Amount of Materials in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75 micrometer) Sieve. 17. D2487—Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes(Unified Soil Classification System). 18. D2922—Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth) 19. D2940—Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for highways or Airports. 20. D2974—Standard Test Method for Moisture,Ash, and Organic Matter of Peat and other Organic Soils. 21. D4221—Standard Test Method for Dispersive Characteristics of Clay Soil by Double hydrometer. 22. D4318—Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit,and Plasticity Index of Soils. 23. D4832—Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)Test Cylinders. 24. D5084—Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity of PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 11 00-PAGE 2 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 BASE COURSES JULY 2024 Saturated Porous Materials using a Flexible Wall Permeameter. 25. E-11—Standard Specification for Wire-Cloth and Sieves for Testing Purposes. D. Public Works Construction Standards, North Texas Council of Governments(NCTCOG). E. Texas Department of Transportation,Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges (TxDOT). 1. TxDOT Item 247"Flexible Base" 2. TxDOT Item 340"Hot-Mix Asphaltic Concrete" 3. TxDOT Item 360"Portland Cement Concrete" F. Texas Department of Transportation, Manual of Testing Procedures(TEX): 1. TEX-110-E"Particle Size Analysis of Soils" 2. TEX-116-E"Ball Mill Method for Determining the Disintegration of Flexible Base Material" 3. TEX-117-E"Triaxial Compression for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials" 4. TEX-411-A"Soundness of Aggregate Using the Los Angeles Machine" S. TEX-460-A"Determining Crushed Face Particle Count" 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stockpile excavated materials and imported materials in designated areas or in areas approved by Engineer. Clearly identify stockpiles. B. Lightly compact top and slope stockpiles to prevent excessive erosion and ponding of water. C. Store and handle materials in a manner to prevent contamination. D. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide silt fences and surface drainage control at material stockpile areas in accordance with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Various site preparation,earthwork,trenching, and roadway subgrade and base sections reference the materials listed in the following paragraphs. Not all materials listed in this Section are used on the Project. B. Sampling of materials shall be in accordance with ASTM D75. 2.2 GRANULAR MATERIAL A. Granular material shall be free flowing, such as sand or hydraulically graded crushed stone fines, or mixed sand and gravel.The material shall be free from lumps,stones over 2-inches in diameter, clay and organic matter. The granular material shall be classified as GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, or SP according to Unified Soil Classification System, ASTM D2487. 2.3 COARSE AGGREGATE A. Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed concrete,gravel,crushed gravel,or crushed stone. It shall consist of sound and durable particles,free from frozen materials or injurious PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 1100-PAGE 3 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 BASE COURSES JULY 2024 amounts of salts, alkali,organic matter of other material either free or as adherent coating, and reasonably well graded between the prescribed limits listed in Table 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM C136. B. Amount of material finer than 75-micrometer(No. 200) sieve: Coarse aggregate for embedment shall contain not more than one percent by weight organic matter(other than native bitumen), clays, loam or pebbles coated therewith, and shall contain not more than five percent by weight on any one or combination of slate, schist, or soft particles of sandstone. C. Each class of aggregate gradation shall comply with the applicable gradation limits listed in Table No. 1, when tested in accordance with ASTM C136. Table No. I nnr����Coarse Aggregate Gradation Aggregate Size Aggregate Siz ggregate Size Aggregate Size Aggregate Size . NAmounts Finer than Each Laboratory Sieve Mass Percent 2 in. 100 100 ----- ----- ----- 1-1/2 in. 95 to 100 90 to 100 100 ----- ----- 1 in. ---- 20 to 55 95 to 100 100 ----- 3/4 in. 35 to 70 0 to 5 ----- 90 to 100 ----- 1/2 in. ---- ----- 25 to 60 ----- 100 3/8 in. 10 to 30 0 to 5 ----- 20 to 55 85 to 100 No. 4 0 to 5 ----- 0 to 10 0 to 10 10 to 30 No. 8 ---- ----- 0 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 No. 16 ---- ----- ----- ----- 0 to 5 Aggregate Size Number and gradation is in accordance with ASTM C33 and ASTM D448. 2.4 FINE AGGREGATE A. Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination thereof, complying with the requirements for abrasion, soundness, and impurities as specified for coarse aggregate. B. The fine aggregate gradation shall comply with the applicable gradation limits,when tested in accordance with ASTM C136. Fine aggregate shall not have more than 45 percent passing any sieve and retained on the next consecutive sieve shown in Table No. 2 and, its fineness modulus shall not be less than 2.3 or more than 3.1. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 1100-PAGE 4 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 BASE COURSES JULY 2024 3/8 in. 100 No. 4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100 No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 5 to 30 No. 100 0 to 10 Gradation in accordance with ASTM C33 Fine Aggregate. C. Plasticity index shall be less than six for material passing No.30 sieve. 2.5 NATURAL GRAVEL A. Natural gravel shall consist of uncrushed stones,washed, and screened,complying with the requirements for abrasion, soundness, and impurities as specified for coarse aggregate. B. The aggregate gradation shall comply with the gradation limits listed in Table No.3,when tested in accordance with ASTM C136. 16 Table No. 3 Coarse Aggregate Passing on 1-1/2 inch 100 Retained on 3/4 inch 100 Fine Aggregate Passing on 3/4 inch 100 Retained on No.4 100 2.6 CRUSHED STONE FOR FOUNDATION A. The application of crushed stone as a foundation will be indicated on the drawings. B. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings,the crushed stone foundation shall conform to the TxDOT Item 247 standard. 2.7 SAND A. Sand shall consist of well-graded, clean, hard,durable,uncoated grains,free from lumps and organic material having a Soil Classification SW. Sand particles will pass a No.4 sieve and be retained on a No. 200 sieve with the subdivisions as listed in Table No.4. If gradation subdivision not indicted, provide sand complying with the above gradation limits. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 1100-PAGE 5 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 BASE COURSES JULY 2024 SubdivisionsTable No.4 Sand Gradation Passing or Retained N�P�t by Weight on Sieve Coarse Sand Passing No.4 100 Retained on No. 10 100 Medium Sand Passing on No. 10 100 Retained on No.40 100 Fine Sand Passing on No.40 100 Retained on No. 200 100 Gradation requirements obtained from ASTM D2487. 2.8 PEA GRAVEL A. Pea Gravel: Conforming to ASTM C33,Aggregate Size No.8,and coarse aggregate graded with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve and 90 percent retained on a No. 4 sieve. 2.9 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT A. Provide ready mixed concrete prepared in accordance with ASTM C94. Select and proportion ingredients to obtain a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi at 28 days. B. Materials: 1. Cement:ASTM C150,Type I or Type 11. 2. Aggregate:ASTM C33,Size 67 or similar. 3. Fly Ash (if used):ASTM C618, Class C. 4. Water: Clean, potable,free of odor,organics,and deleterious materials. C. Slump: Not less than one inch, cushion portion of embedment; one to three inches for the sides and top of encasement. 2.10 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL(FLOWABLE FILL) A. Ready mixed flowable fill is a blend of cement,fly ash,fine aggregate, and water. It is designed as a low strength,flowable material requiring no subsequent vibration or tamping to achieve 100 percent consolidation. B. Unless indicated otherwise, select and proportion ingredients to obtain compressive strength between 100 and 200 psi at 28 days in accordance with ASTM D4832. C. Materials: 1. Cement:ASTM C150,Type 1, 11, or III. 2. Aggregate:ASTM C33,Size 8 or fine aggregate. 3. Fly Ash (if used):ASTM C618, Class C. 4. Water:Clean, potable,free of odor,organics,and deleterious materials. D. The flowable fill mixture shall be mixed either in a pug mill,concrete mixer,or transit mixer PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 1100-PAGE 6 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 BASE COURSES JULY 2024 and shall a minimum slump of five inches. 2.11 CEMENT-SOIL BACKFILL A. Stabilized sand shall consist of approximately one to one and half sacks of type 1/11 cement and 27 cu. ft. of cushion sand. Concrete sand is not permitted. B. Sand or Clayey-Sand: Sand or clayey-sand free from clay lumps, organic and other deleterious materials, having plasticity index of 6 or less, and totally passes through a No. 10 sieve (medium or fine grade sand). C. Portland Cement: ASTM C150,Type I. D. Water:Water shall be reasonably clean,free from injurious amounts of oil,acid,salt, organic matter, or other deleterious materials. E. The cement stabilized sand shall have a comprehensive strength of 50 to 150 psi in 28 days. Backfill that exceeds the maximum compressive strength shall be removed by the contractor. 2.12 FLEXIBLE BASE A. Flexible base shall conform to TxDOT Item 247 standard. 2.13 SELECT FILL A. Select fill shall consist of soil materials with sufficient plastic fines to minimize water transmission. The select fill should be free of organics and other deleterious materials and should have a maximum particle size no greater than two inches. The select fill should meet the USCS classification of either SC (clayey-sand), GC(clayey-gravel) or CL(clay of low plasticity, lean clay). Select fill derived from the site must be tested in accordance with Paragraph 2.17 of this Section, and then approved by the Engineer before use as select fill. Imported select fill materials must be tested, and then approved by the Engineer before use as select fill. B. Select fill shall have a liquid limit of 30 or less; plasticity index between 6 and 15. 2.14 SITE FILL A. Referto drawings for areas and applications in which placement of site fill is allowable. B. Satisfactory Site Fill: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP,GM,SW, SP,and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 4-inches in any dimension, debris,waste, frozen materials,vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Material shall have a liquid limit of 60 or less and gradation approximately falling within the limits indicated in Table No. 5. No. 4 Less than 35 No. 200 Less than 65 PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 1100-PAGE 7 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 BASE COURSES JULY 2024 2.15 TOP SOIL A. Material shall be natural friable loam;free of subsoil, roots,grasses, and excessive amount of weeds, stone, and foreign matter. B. Material shall have an acidity range (pH) between 5.5 to 7.5; an organic matter content between 4 to 25 percent in accordance with ASTM D2974; and a gradation complying with Table No. 6. No. 4 Less than 35 No. 200 Less than 65 2.16 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION A. All material excavated from site not meeting the requirements for materials specified above. 2.17 MATERIAL QUALITY CONTROL A. Sampling of material stockpiles and material sources shall be in accordance with ASTM D75. B. Perform gradation analysis in accordance with ASTM C136 for: 1. Coarse and fine aggregate,natural gravel,crushed stone for foundation,sand,select fill, impervious clay fill, earth fill, and topsoil. C. Determine Minus 200-Mesh Sieve Test in accordance with ASTM D1140. D. Determine optimum soil moisture content in accordance with ASTM D698. E. Deleterious materials determination in accordance with ASTM C40,C117,and C142. 1. Coarse and fine aggregate and when requested by Engineer for natural gravel and crushed stone for foundation. F. Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM D4318. 1. Sand for particles passing No.8 sieve,select fill, impervious clay fill,and earth fill. G. Determine pH of topsoil in accordance with ASTM D2974. H. Provide tests results showing flowable fill mix design achieves desired compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 1100-PAGE 8 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 BASE COURSES JULY 2024 SECTION 32 92 19 HYDROMULCH SEEDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hydromulch seeding of grass is required as shown on the Plans. Establishment of a uniform,full-coverage of grass is required in all disturbed areas, and other areas indicated on the Plans. Hydromulch seeding is specified for these areas where grass establishment is required. 2. Hydromulch seeding includes mixing fertilizer,grass seed and mulch material with water and spraying the mixture onto tilled topsoil. Seeding includes spreading fertilizer, and grass seed onto tilled topsoil. 3. Furnish all materials, labor and equipment including watering system to establish full coverage grass where specified and to maintain the established areas for 60 days. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 1100"Base Courses'. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Includes, but not limited to, Dandelion,Jimsonweed,Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry,Tansy Ragwort,Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perrenial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit data on fertilizer,seed,and mulch as necessary to show compliance with these specifications. Include source of supply for materials as well as: 1. Name,trademark,warranty,analysis,form, and coverage for fertilizer. 2. Name,type,germination, purity,germination test results with date of test for seed. 3. Name,type,components,and coverage for mulch. B. Submit maintenance instructions,cutting method, minimum and maximum grass height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Complywith regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide seed in containers showing name and type of seed,year of production, net weight, date of packaging, date of germination test, and location of packaging. B. Provide fertilizer in containers bearing the name,trademark warranty of producer,the weight and analysis, and form of constituents. C. In the designated areas for grass establishment, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to establish uniform stand of grass which is defined as not less than 150 growing plants per square foot of seeded area, regardless of adverse climatic or other conditions. The resident engineer may stop work if unfavorable conditions are likely until favorable PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3292 19-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 HYDROMULCH SEEDING JULY 2024 conditions are present. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged,wet,or moldy packaging is not acceptable. Store in dry location. B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags. Store in dry location not in contact with runoff. 1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. For areas where establishment is required per the Plans, maintain the hydromulched areas for 60 days beginning immediately after placement and watering as required until grass is well established and exhibits a vigorous growing condition. Coordinate water requirements with availability of water from Owner and areas to be seeded at one time. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SEED MIXTURE A. Seed Mixture Type I: Hulled common Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon) or approved hybrid of common Bermuda grass for the specified areas at a rate of 86 pounds pure live seed (PLS) per acre. B. Seed Quality: All seed shall meet the requirements of the Texas Seed Law including labeling requirements for showing PLS(PLS= purity x germination), name and type of seed. All seed shall be treated with a fungicide. Seed, which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or storage, will not be acceptable. Seed shall be new crop seed (harvested within 1 year prior to planting), free of other weed seed to the limits allowable under the Texas Seed Law. The seed shall have a germination and purity that will produce a pure live seed content of not less than 85 percent. 2.2 FERTILIZER A. Fertilizer shall be a commercial product uniform in composition,free flowing, and suitable for application with standard equipment. The fertilizer shall comply with the applicable State fertilizer laws and shall be delivered in bags or other convenient containers, each fully labeled and bearing the name,trademark, and warranty of the producer. Fertilizer applied during the initial planting shall have analysis ratio of 20-20-20 also containing traces of sulfur, iron and zinc. Fertilizer used in the second application shall have an analysis ratio of 12-4-8. The figures in the analysis represent the percent of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients, respectively as determined by methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Fifty percent or greater of the nitrogen required shall be in the form of nitrate nitrogen. The remaining nitrogen may be in the form of urea nitrogen. B. In the event it is necessary to substitute a fertilizer of a different analysis or form,the total amount of nutrients applied per 1000 square feet shall equal or exceed that specified for each nutrient. C. Fertilizer which has become caked or exposed to excess humidity or mixture will not be acceptable. 2.3 HYDROMULCH A. Hydromulch material for areas requiring grass establishment shall be Second Nature Hydroseeding Mulch as manufactured by Central Fiber Corporation,or approved equivalent. Mulch shall be manufactured of natural fiber stock free of plastics and foreign materials. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 3292 19-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 HYDROMULCH SEEDING JULY 2024 Mulch shall have a green non-toxic dye, disperse rapidly in water to form a homogeneous slurry and shall remain in suspension. It shall have a water holding capacity of not less than 1300 grams water per 100grams fiber. 2.4 MULCH A. Furnish straw mulch free of weeds and spread at the recommended rate to adequately cover all areas which are broadcast seeded and indicated to be mulched. 2.5 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Refer to material requirements in Section 32 1100. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Water: Clean,fresh, and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass. B. Erosion Fabric: Jute matting, open weave,where shown on Plans or where slope is steeper than 3:1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section that topsoil has been placed and final grading is acceptable to Owner. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing site conditions. 3.2 FINAL GRADING A. Comply with the requirement in Section 32 1100 for final grading, subsoil preparation and placement of topsoil prior to seeding. All areas to be seeded shall have sufficient topsoil placed prior to seeding. B. Smooth areas that have become gullied;and loosen or refill areas that have become compacted since completion of grading to a depth of 6 inches. 3.3 FERTILIZING A. Apply initial fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at a minimum rate of 15 lb per 1000 square feet with hydromulch mixture. B. A second application of fertilizer shall be applied to the establishment areas between 45 and 60 days from seeding, at a rate of 8 pounds per 1000 square feet. 3.4 SEEDING A. For hydromulch (grass establishment) areas, hydromulch mixture containing the seed, fertilizer, mulch and water shall be prepared in accordance with the quantities specified herein or as recommended by the manufacturer. Mixture shall be applied to planting area using conventional "Hydromulch" equipment. For seeded areas,seed and fertilizer shall be spread with mechanical spreaders to obtain the specified rates. Component Rate per 1000 square feet Grass Seed See Section 2.1 Fertilizer 15 pounds PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 92 19-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 HYDROMULCH SEEDING JULY 2024 Water As recommended by Manufacturer Paper Fiber Mulch As recommended by Manufacturer B. Planting Season: 1. Type I Seed Mixture—March 1 to July 31. 2. Type 11 Seed Mixture—February 15 to May 15 3. Seeding shall not be done during periods other than listed above. C. For areas to be established, apply water with a fine spray immediately (within 24 hours) after each area has been seeded and mulched. Saturate to 4 inches of soil.Water daily as often as necessary for 4 weeks to establish grass. 3.5 SEED PROTECTION A. Cover seeded slopes where grade is steeper than 4 inches per foot with erosion fabric. Roll fabric onto slopes without stretching or pulling. Cover hydromulched areas as recommended to obtain establishment of grass. B. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6-inch deep excavated topsoil trench. Provide 12-inch overlap of adjacent rolls. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with adjacent soil. C. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36-inch intervals with stakes. D. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil. E. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches. F. No heavy equipment shall be moved over planted area unless area is to be retilled and reseeded. 3.6 MAINTENANCE FOR HYDROMULCHED AREAS A. The Contractor shall mow grass as required. B. Contractor shall water as required to establish grass and to prevent grass and soil from drying out for the initial 60-day period. C. Contractor shall control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. D. Prior to the second fertilizer application, Contractor shall reseed areas which show bare spots of 2 square feet or larger. Minimum of 95 percent coverage shall be required for Owner acceptance. E. Contractor shall maintain grass and reseed as required to establish 95 percent coverage (within a minimum of 60 days) or 150 plants per square foot. F. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period,if necessary. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 92 19-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 HYDROMULCH SEEDING JULY 2024 SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish all materials,sod, labor and equipment to perform all operations necessary to establish healthy, growing sod in the areas shown in the Plans and in accordance with the Specifications. Areas to be sodded include a 4-foot wide strip on either side of all new or modified concrete roads, sidewalks, mow strips, curbs, retaining walls, structures, areas around the landscaping and as shown on the Plans. 2. Establishment of sod includes: a. Fertilizing. b. Planting solid sod (as indicated). C. Maintenance. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 1100"Base Courses". 1.2 REFERENCES(NOT USED) 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION(NOT USED) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Record Data: 1. Submittals shall be prepared and in accordance with Division 1. 2. Submit data on fertilizer and each type of sod necessary to demonstrate compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. Include source of supply for all materials, as well as: a. Name,trademark,warranty,analysis,form,and coverage for fertilizer. b. Name,type, and certification of grass for each type of grass for sod. 3. Submit maintenance instructions,cutting method,minimum and maximum grass heights;type, application frequency and recommended coverage for fertilizer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE(NOT USED) 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Acceptance at Site: 1. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags. 2. Sod may be shipped in blocks or rolled sections of equal width. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store in dry location not in contact with runoff. 2. Sod materials shall be planted within 48 hours of harvest unless stored in approved manner. 3. Sod shall be protected from excessive moisture loss during delivery and storage. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 92 23-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 SODDING JULY 2024 4. Sod shall not be dumped from vehicles. Damaged sod shall be rejected and removed from the site. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS(NOT USED) 1.8 WARRANTY(NOT USED) 1.9 EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS(NOT USED) 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Service: 1. Maintain sodded areas for 60 days beginning immediately after placement,watering as required until grass is well established and exhibits a vigorous growing condition. The irrigation piping and yard hydrants installed at the treatment plant may be utilized as coordinated with the OWNER's schedule and water availability as determined by the OWNER. 2. CONTRACTOR shall control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. 3. CONTRACTOR shall replace sod as necessary during 60-day period to provide fully healthy, growing sod for acceptance. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOD MATERIAL A. Sod shall contain a good cover of growing or living grass and a strong root system. Living grass shall be interpreted to include grass that is seasonably dormant during the cold season and capable of renewing growth after the dormant period. B. The sod shall be free of weeds, or undesirable plants, large stones, roots, and other materials that might be detrimental to the establishment and future maintenance of the sod. C. When sod is cut,the height of the grass shall not be any higher than 4 inches nor lower than 1-inch. D. Sod shall be cut evenly with a sod cutting machine to provide a soil thickness of at least 3/4-inch and not more than 1-1/4 inches. E. Care shall be taken at all times to retain native soil on the roots of the sod during excavating, hauling, and planting. F. Solid sod areas shall be certified common bermudagrass(Cynodon dactylon), certified in accordance with State Certification regulations. 2.2 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Refer to material specification in Section 32 1100. 2.3 FERTILIZER A. Fertilizer shall be a commercial grade, pelleted, uniform in composition,free flowing, and suitable for application with standard equipment. The fertilizer shall comply with the PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 92 23-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 SODDING JULY 2024 applicable State fertilizer laws and shall be delivered in bags or other convenient containers, each fully labeled and bearing the name,trademark, and warranty of the producer and the weight, analysis, and form of nutrients. Fertilizer applied shall have an analysis of 16-20-0 with iron and sulfur. The figures in the analysis represent the percent of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients, respectively as determined by methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Fifty percent or greater of the nitrogen required shall be in the form of nitrate nitrogen. The remaining nitrogen may be in the form of urea nitrogen. B. In the event it is necessary to substitute a fertilizer of a different analysis, it shall be pelleted or granulated fertilizer and the total amount of nutrients furnished and applied per 1000 square feet shall equal or exceed that specified for each nutrient. C. Any fertilizer that is caked or damaged or exposed to excess moisture shall not be acceptable. 2.4 WATER A. Water shall be fresh and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, salts, or other materials harmful to the growth of the grass. Plant and/or service water may also be used as directed by the OWNER. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing site conditions. 3.2 FINAL GRADING A. Comply with requirements in Section 3120 00"Earthwork"for final grading,subsoil preparation and placement of topsoil prior to placing sod. B. Smooth areas that have become gullied and loosen ortill areas that have become compacted since completion of grading. 3.3 FERTILIZER APPLICATION A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions uniformly at a rate of 18 pounds per 1000 square feet(750 pounds per acre) over all areas to be sodded. 3.4 TILLAGE A. Thoroughly till all areas to be sodded following application of fertilizer to a minimum depth of 3 inches by rototilling, disking, harrowing or other approved method. B. The soil shall not be excessively dry or wet during tillage. C. Clean area of stones and debris larger than 1-inch and level irregularities from tillage prior to sodding. 3.5 PLANTING SOLID SOD A. Sodding may be performed between April 1 and October 1. Areas to receive sod shall be moist but not muddy. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 92 23-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 SODDING JULY 2024 B. When grades are not low enough for sodding along paved areas or at the outer edge of the sodded areas,the soil shall be excavated so that the sod soil line is at or slightly below grade. C. Solid Sodding: The sod will be laid smoothly, edge-to-edge and with staggered joints.The sod shall be pressed immediately into contact with the sodbed by tamping or rolling with approved equipment, in order to eliminate air pockets and to provide a true and even surface. Following tamping or rolling,soil of the same texture as the sodbed shall be used to fill all cracks between sod strips. The level of the fill soil shall not exceed the soil level of the sod. D. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the sodded area shall be smooth and shall conform with the contour of the adjacent area. On slopes greater than 3 to 1, and on any other areas designed by the Plans,the sod shall be fastened in place with wooden pegs, wire staples or any other approved device. E. Water shall be applied to all sodded areas immediately (within 1-hour) after the finishing operation has been completed. Water shall be applied at a rate sufficient to ensure that the sod is completely wetted and that the underlying soil is wetted to a depth of 4 to 6 inches. Water liberally during the first 10 days to establish grass and then as necessary to keep sod from drying out (at least 1-inch per week). Provide temporary irrigation systems in areas that permanent systems are not being installed. 3.6 ACCEPTANCE A. Grass must be weed free, uniform, healthy, devoid of discoloration and signs of dehydration, and shall exhibit vigorous growth. B. Grass shall be firmly rooted as that sections cannot be removed. C. Following 60-day maintenance period, if grass exhibits the above qualities to the satisfaction of the OWNER, it shall be accepted. Any grasses replanted will be subject to the 60-day maintenance period commencing upon installation of the newly planted grasses. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 32 92 23-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 SODDING JULY 2024 DIVISION 33 UTILITIES SECTION 33 01 10.58 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING AND TANKS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Disinfection of water piping for potable water. 2. Testing. 3. Bacteriological and Disinfection Reports. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C651—Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. 2. C652—Standard for Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities. 3. C653—Standard for Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants. 1.4 CHAPTER 217—QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Laboratory: State Health Department certified approved for examination of drinking water in compliance with applicable legislation of the State of Texas. B. Piping,tanks, and equipment to be cleaned and disinfected shall be isolated from the finished water(potable water)at all times and shall be placed into service by the Owner following receipt of acceptable test reports. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable Texas Department of Health Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems for work of this section. D. The Owner will collect the sample and have it tested. Results of tests may take up to 48 hours. Samples may not be collected on Friday or the day before a holiday without prior approval from the Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a schedule of the proposed sequence for cleaning and method of sterilization to be used or list of the equipment to be used,and the sterilizing agent and quantities to be used, location and/or sizes of fill, blown down connections, sources of test water, and proposed plan to dispose of test water. B. Disinfection Report:Accurately record the items listed below and submit five (5)copies of the report. 1. Type and form of disinfection used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Initial and 24-hour disinfectant residuals(quantity in treated water) in ppm for each PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 01 10.58-Page 1 of 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 Disinfection of Potable Water Piping and Tanks JULY 2024 outlet tested. 5. Date and time of flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. C. Bacteriological Report:Accurately record the items listed below and submit five(5) copies of the report. 1. Data issued, project name,and testing laboratory name,address,and telephone number. 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24-hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 7. Certification that water conforms,or fails to conform,to bacterial standards of Texas Department of Health. 8. Bacteriologist's signature. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all equipment,temporary connections,taps,valves, piping, pumps, hoses, chemicals, and test equipment to accomplish the work, including taps to line. Provide adequate provisions to the line for sampling. B. Disinfection agents shall be chlorine solution prepared from sodium hypochlorite,or calcium hypochlorite. C. After completion of purging and disinfection, remove surplus pipe at the chlorination and sampling locations, plug the remaining pipe, back, and complete all appurtenant work required to secure the pipeline. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Contractor shall exercise care at all times during construction to prevent contaminated material from entering the structures and pipelines in the raw,settled,filtered,finished,and potable water system. B. Coordinate with plant staff before opening valves. Operate valves in a manner which prevents pipe surge or flows in excess of maximum allowable rates. C. All facilities and piping designed to hold or transport process water shall be cleaned, including piping, basins, and channels, prior to disinfection. D. The solids contact clarifier, process water piping, together with plant water valves, elevated water storage tanks, all potable water, service water, and chemical piping shall be disinfected with chlorine solution as specified herein following cleaning and testing. Vertical pumps may be disinfected immediately prior to installation. All surfaces shall be cleaned or washed and disinfected, even though there is no visible evidence of necessity thereof. E. Disinfection shall be in accordance with the applicable disinfection procedure described in AWWA C651, AWWA C652,AWWA C653, and AWWA C654, as well as in accordance with PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 01 10.58-Page 2 of 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 Disinfection of Potable Water Piping and Tanks JULY 2024 the Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality and the requirements of this section. Where conflicts exist,the Engineer shall determine the appropriate procedures. 3.2 PIPELINE DISINFECTION A. Preparation: Verify that piping system has been cleaned, inspected, and pressure tested. Flush out line, completely replacing its entire volume with potable water. B. Purging: Purging may be accomplished by flushing. 1. Flushing Method: If the "flushing" method of purging is used, the Contractor shall be required to prepare the main by installing blow-offs at locations and sized as directed by the Resident Project Representative. a. In general,this shall consist of furnishing all equipment, material, and labor to satisfactorily install blow-offs of sizes shown in Table 1. MethodEWFlushing Blow-Off Requirements ��_ize main Ak Size Blow-Off 2 to 8 inches 1-1/2 inches 10 to 12 inches 4 inches 16 inches to 24 inches 6 inches 30 inches and greater 10 inches b. Before disinfection, flush all foreign matter from the pipeline. Provide hoses, temporary pipes, ditches,etc., as required to dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent properties. Flushing velocities shall be at least 2.5 fps. For large diameter pipe where it is impractical or impossible to flush the pipe at 2.5 fps velocity, clean the pipeline in-place from the inside by brushing and sweeping,then flush the line at a lower velocity. C. After flushing is complete and satisfactory test results are received at the direction of the Resident Project Representative,the Contractor shall proceed with disinfection. C. Disinfection: Disinfection of the pipeline shall be accomplished by the "continuous feed" method of the "slug" method in accordance with the Owner or regulatory agency requirements.The free chlorine amounts shown are the minimum and calcium hypochlorite granulated shall be used as the source of chlorine. 1. Continuous Feed Method: a. Water from the existing disinfection system or other approved source shall be controlled to flow into the section to be sterilized at a constant rate. b. Inject treatment disinfectant at a point not more than 10-feet downstream from the beginning of the new conduit through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. C. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be sterilized very slowly,and the rate of application of the chlorinating agent shall be in such proportion of the rate of water entering the line that the chlorine dose applied to the water entering the line and released at the PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 01 10.58-Page 3 of 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 Disinfection of Potable Water Piping and Tanks JULY 2024 opposite end shall have a minimum chlorine concentration of 100-mg/L or a level determined by TECQ. d. Valves shall be manipulated so that the strong chlorine solution in the line being treated will not flow back into the line supplying the water. Use check valves if necessary. e. All valves shall then be closed and the chlorine solution shall remain in the line for a minimum of 24 hours. f. Operate all valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances during disinfection to assure that the disinfecting mixture is dispersed into all parts of the line, including dead ends, and similar areas that otherwise may not receive the disinfecting solution. g. Do not allow the chlorinated water to flow into conduits in services. h. A minimum residual of 25-mg/L free chlorine shall be present in the main following the 24-hour holding period. i. The water shall remain in the conduit until the chlorine residual is less than 4 mg/L. after this residual is achieved the water may be discharged into the drainage system. j. Remove the chlorine solution and flush the line with potable water. Comply with regulations and obtain necessary approvals for disposal or discharge of chlorine solution and flushing water. 2. Slug Method: a. Water from the existing disinfection system or other approved source shall be controlled to flow into the section to be sterilized at a constant rate. b. Inject treatment disinfectant at a point not more than 10-feet downstream from the beginning of the new conduit through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. C. Water entering the conduit shall receive a dose of chlorine such that the water shall have not less than 100-mg/L free chlorine.The chlorine shall be applied continuously and for a sufficient time to develop a solid column or"slug" of chlorinated water that shall expose all interior surfaces to the"slug"for at least 3-hours. d. Operate all valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances during disinfection to assure that the disinfecting mixture is dispersed into all parts of the line, including dead ends, and similar areas that otherwise may not receive the disinfecting solution. e. Do not allow the chlorinated water to flow into conduits in services. f. The heavy chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system and disposed of in an approved manner. D. Sampling: 1. The Owner will take samples from the sterilized line through a suitable point in accordance with AWWA C651 (not at a fire hydrant) and submit to the testing laboratory. 2. Provide analysis and testing of treated water for bacteriological quality in accordance with AWWA C651. 3. Two(2)consecutive set of acceptable samples shall be,taken at least 24 hours apart, PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 01 10.58-Page 4 of 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 Disinfection of Potable Water Piping and Tanks JULY 2024 shall be collected from the new conduit. 4. At least 1 set of samples shall be collected from every 1000 linear feet of new conduit, plus 1 set from the end of the line and at least 1 set from each branch. 5. The sterilized portion of the line shall be placed in service if the results of two consecutive tests conform to the bacterial standards. 6. If the samples show unsatisfactory quality,the sterilization process shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. E. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection. F. Scheduling: Perform scheduling and disinfection activity with startup,testing,adjusting,and balancing, and demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems. 3.3 DISPOSAL OF DISINFECTING WATER A. The disinfecting water shall be dechlorinated before being released to natural drainage ways in accordance with AWWA C652. Release neutralized disinfecting water at a controlled rate so as not to damage downstream facilities. B. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner to dispose of disinfecting water to the sewer. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 01 10.58-Page 5 of 6 BID SET 0537-0S5-01 Disinfection of Potable Water Piping and Tanks JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 33 01 10.58-Page 6 of 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 Disinfection of Potable Water Piping and Tanks JULY 2024 DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS SECTION 40 05 05 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Piping materials and installation methods common to the piping system Sections of Division 40 and includes joining materials, piping specialties,and basic piping installation instructions. 1. All exposed,submerged,and buried process, plant and station piping including new piping systems and modifications to existing systems. 2. Raw water, potable water,sanitary sewers,storm drains and culverts serving plant or station as shown on Drawings. B. Section Includes: 1. Pipe Joining Materials 2. Transition Fittings 3. Insulating Flanges, Couplings and Unions 4. Connectors and Couplings 5. Pipe Sleeves 6. Expansion Joints C. Related Sections: 1. Division 40 for related piping,valves,and support systems. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Preselection Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Preselection Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. B9.1 Standard Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration b. B31.3 Power Piping Code C. B31.3 Process Piping Code d. B31.9 Building Service Piping Code 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A 53—Specification for Pipe,Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless b. B 32—Specification for Solder Metal C. B 813—Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering Copper and Copper Alloy Tube d. B 828—Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of copper and Copper Alloy Tube and fittings e. C 1173—Specification for Flexible Transition Couplings for underground Piping Systems PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 1 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 f. D 1785—Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Plastic Pipe,Schedules 40, 80, and 120 g. D 2564—Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Plastic Piping systems h. D 2672—Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement i. D 2846—Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water distribution Systems j. D 2855—Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings k. D 3139—Specifications forJoints for Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals I. D 3212—Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals M. E 814 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops n. F 402—Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers,and Cleaners Used for Joining thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings o. F 656—Specifications for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings p. F 493—Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings q. F 593—Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,and Studs r. F 594—Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): a. A13.1 Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems b. 131.20.1 Pipe Threads,General Propose, Inch C. B16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipes Flanges d. B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series 4. American Welding Society(AWS): a. A5.8 Specification for Filler Metals for brazing and Braze Welding b. D1.1 Structural Welding Code Steel C. D10.12 Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe 5. American Waterworks Association (AWWA): a. C110—Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 In.Through 48 In. (76 mm Through 1,219 mm) for Water b. C219—Standard for Bolted,Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe 6. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61—Drinking Water Components—HealthEffects C. Definitions: 1. Piping Systems: Includes all piping,fittings,valves,specials, hangers and supports,and related items required for a complete piping system. 2. Ferrous Metal: Iron,steel,stainless steel,and alloys with iron as principal component. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 2 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 3. Nonmetallic: PVC, CPVC, PE, HDPE,and FRP. 4. Nonferrous Metals: Copper 5. Wetted or Submergence: a. Submerged,or less than one foot above the maximum liquid surface of water holding structures. b. Below top of channels, under cover of slabs of channels or tanks. C. In other damp or covered locations(e.g.,vaults,wetwells, utility corridors,etc.) 6. Exposed or Atmospherically Exposed Piping Systems:All piping systems exposed to the atmosphere (not buried, submerged, wetted, or embedded).This designation includes insulated piping inside chases, or piping hidden from view. 7. Texas Administrative Code (TAQ a. Chapter 217—Design Criteria for Sewerage Systems b. Chapter 290 Subchapter D—Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems 1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. The Drawings and Specifications are not all inclusive of explicit piping details; provide piping in accordance with the laws and regulations and intended use, including: a. Power Piping:ANSI/ASME B31.1 Code. b. Process Piping:ANSI/ASME B31.3 Code. C. Building Service Piping:ANSI/ASME B31.9 Code,as applicable. d. Sanitary Building Drainage and Vent Systems: ICBO/APMO Uniform Plumbing Code. 2. Buried Piping: Provide to be suitable for design conditions as follows: a. H2O-S16 traffic load(AASHTO Standard Highway Specifications for Bridges)with 1.5 impact factor. b. Piping both with and without internal pressure. 3. Hangers and Support Systems: Provide an engineered system in accordance with Section 40 05 07. 4. Pressure Testing and Disinfection of Pipelines: Refer to Section 40 0105 for testing of gravity and pressure piping systems; the disinfection of potable water systems; and to the individual piping system Sections for specific requirements. B. Design Requirements: 1. The configuration and layout of various piping systems are shown in the Drawings. The types of pipe and joints, and embedment(if buried)to be used for each system are shown on the drawings or included in the appropriate specification Sections. 2. In certain locations, pipe supports,anchors,and expansion joints have been indicated on the drawings, but no attempt has been made to indicate every pipe support, anchor, and expansion joint. 3. It shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to provide a complete system of pipe supports,to provide expansion joints,and to provide restraints and anchor all piping, in accordance with the requirements set forth herein. Additional pipe supports may PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 3 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 be required adjacent to expansion joints,couplings,or valves. 4. Pipe and fittings shown on yard piping drawings are general in nature. CONTRACTOR shall determine exact lengths and fittings required and make field adjustments necessary to complete piping and avoid conflicts. 5. Changes to the plan and profile of piping shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval. C. Restrained Pipe and Fitting Joints, Buried Piping: 1. Restrained joints shall be used for a sufficient distance from each bend,tee,elbow, plug, or other fitting to resist thrust that will develop at the design pressure. 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide restraint length calculations in accordance with AWWA M41 based on the laying conditions,soil conditions, depth of cover,and pressures to determine the number of restrained joints that will be required. 3. For the purposes of thrust restraint, design pressures shall be the working pressure shown, plus the additional surge allowance for potable water, service water, and pump discharge piping.The design pressure shall be 1.5 times the design test pressure indicated for all other piping. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Product Data: Submit product data on each product item to be installed. 2. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for piping systems,organized by plant areas or individual piping systems. Prepare drawings to scale (1/4-inch = 1 foot 0 inch minimum),with the following information: a. Type of piping including materials,fittings,weights, linings, and coatings.A code or key to product data sheet may be used. b. Location and type of joints,fittings, taps, supports, restraint systems, kickers, and blocking(as applicable). Identify by catalog number or shop drawing detail number. C. Provide information on interior linings and exterior coatings. d. Identify the exact number of restrained joints,as well as the length of restrained joint piping for pressure buried piping. 3. Specials: Provide fabrication drawings for specials including fabricated fittings,wall pipes, and wall sleeves. Show dimensions and materials of construction. 4. Before starting fabrication,CONTRACTOR shall provide ENGINEER with pipe design calculations,the proposed engineered hanger and support systems, and specials, which shall incorporate the following information: a. Laying plan identifying all restrained joints,details of standard pipe section, special fittings, pipe supports, and bends. b. Piping components shall be numbered or otherwise sequence designated. C. Outlets and bends shall be made up into special lengths so that,when installed, they will be located as indicated. d. Each pipe and fitting shall be marked indicating class of pipe and location number in pipe laying plan. Markings shall be coded to the Shop drawings. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 4 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Welding certificates. 2. Field Test Reports: For each pressure testing of piping systems and field-testing specified in other piping systems sections. 3. Affidavits: a. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance with reference standards. b. Laboratory Testing Equipment:Certified calibrations,manufacturer's product data and test procedures. C. Certified welding inspection and test results. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code." B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. 3. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ANSI B31.1.0,"Standard Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping," and the AWS Welding Handbook. 4. Soldering and Brazing Procedures shall conform to ANSI B9.1,"Standard Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with the requirements of Section 0160 00 and as described in the following paragraphs. B. Acceptance at Site: 1. General:Comply with manufacturer's instructions for unloading,storage,and handling at Project site. 2. Delivery and Handling: a. Do not deliver piping materials to project site prior to ENGINEER'S review of required submittals. b. Unload and handle piping materials using proper material handling equipment. Use heavy canvas or nylon slings to lift pipe and fittings to protect coatings. C. Do not drop, roll,skid piping materials. d. Take such additional precautions as necessary to avoid damaging piping materials and coatings thereon. C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store piping materials in a manner that will reduce risk of damage. 2. Block piping materials to prevent rolling. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 5 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 3. Protect materials from weather and sun as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube,except for concrete, corrugated metal, hub-and-spigot, and clay pipe. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. 5. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. When stored inside,do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. 6. Protect flanges,fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure,or by packaging with durable,waterproof wrapping.Attach protectors over entire gasketed surface of flanges. 7. Flexible piping shall be stored in shaded area 24-hours prior to installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings, construction contiguous with work, and related items by field measurements before fabrication. B. Flange Coordination: Coordinate the dimensions, hole drillings and type of flange face (flat or raised) of the flanges furnished with companion flanges of valves, pumps,and equipment to be connected to or installed in the piping. C. NSF Certified:All surfaces and materials in contact with water or in contact with a chemical being added to water that is being treated for potable water use and conveyance,shall comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and shall conform to NSF-61. Product shall bear the mark or seal of an accredited testing laboratory. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied to surfaces. C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Formwork, reinforcement,and concrete requirements are specified in Division 3. D. Coordinate installation of piping systems with other trades,such as electrical, instrumentation,fire protection, and HVAC ducts. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. As specified in the various Division 40 Sections,the Piping Schedule, and as shown on the Drawings. B. Diameters Shown: 1. Standardized Products: Nominal Size. 2. Fabricated Steel Piping(Except Cement-Lined):Outside diameter,ASME 1336.10M. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 6 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 2.2 PIPE JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21,nonmetallic,flat,asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face,Class 125,cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face,Class 250,cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber,flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: 1. ASTM A193 or ASTM A320,Type 316 stainless steel bolts;ASTM A194,Type 316, hex head nuts/and washers of the same material as bolts, unless noted otherwise. 2. Exposed:ASTM A193 or ASTM A320,Type 316 stainless steel bolts;ASTM A194,Type 316, hex head nuts/and washers of the same material as bolts. 3. Buried:ASTM A193 or ASTM A320,Type 316 stainless steel bolts;ASTM A194,Type 316, hex head nuts/and washers of the same material as bolts. 4. Wetted and Submerged:ASTM A193 or ASTM A320,Type 316 stainless steel bolts; ASTM A194, Type 316, hex head nuts/and washers of the same material as bolts. C. Segmented Mechanical Couplings: Provide when designated on the Drawings or as an option to flanges for above ground piping,segmented mechanical couplings may be used. 1. Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536,grade 65-45-12,with orange enamel coating. 2. Coupling Gasket:Grade"E" EDPM. 3. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A193 or ASTM A320,Type 316 stainless steel bolts; Heat- treated plated carbon steel,trackhead meeting physical and chemical requirements of ASTM A-449 and physical requirements of ASTM A-183. 4. Victaulic Style 77 standard flexible couplings or equivalent. D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts,and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 7 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Transition Fittings, General: Same size as,and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. B. Transition Couplings NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: 1. Underground Piping: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 2. Aboveground Piping: Specified piping system fitting. C. AWWA Transition Couplings NPS 2 and Larger: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. C. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson. g. ROMAC 2. Description: AWWA C219,metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping. D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Spears Manufacturing Co. 2. Description: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions;one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement- joint or threaded end. E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Colonial Engineering, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. C. Spears Manufacturing Co. 2. Description: CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass or stainless-steel threaded end, solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut. F. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 8 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. C. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities. 2. Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. 2.4 INSULATING FLANGES,COUPLINGS AND UNIONS A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Hart Industries, International, Inc. e. Watts Water Technologies,Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;Wilkins Div. 2. Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 and smaller. a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum at 180 deg F unless otherwise specified. b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: Factory-fabricated, bolted,companion-flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 and larger. a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum unless otherwise specified. b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 9 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 to,the following: a. Advance Products&Systems, Inc. b. Calpico,Inc. C. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator,Inc. 2. Description: Non-conducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges, NPS 2-1/2 and larger. a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum unless otherwise specified. b. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. C. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. d. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Calpico,Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation. 2. Description: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,thermoplastic lining, NPS 3 and smaller. a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F unless otherwise specified. b. End Connections: Threaded. F. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Perfection Corporation. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. C. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,thermoplastic lining. a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F unless otherwise specified. b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved. 2.5 CONNECTORS AND COUPLINGS A. General: Unless otherwise specified. 1. Type 316 stainless steel bolts,fasteners,tie rods and accessories are required for connectors intended for buried, wetted, or submerged service. 2. Carbon steel bolts,fasteners,tie rods and accessories are required in exposed atmospheric service. Coat items in accordance with Section 09 9100. B. Elastomer Bellows Connector: 1. Type: Fabricated spool,with single filled arch. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 10 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 2. Materials: Nitrile tube and neoprene cover. 3. End Connections: Flange, 125-lb ANSI B16.1 standard,with elastomeric face and steel retaining rings. 4. Working Pressure: 190 psig minimum,size 12-inch and smaller. 5. Thrust Restraint: Manufacturer designed control rods,fasteners,and accessories to limit travel of elongation and compression. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Garlock;Style 204 b. Goodall rubber Co. C. General Rubber Corp. C. Flexible Type Couplings(Steel and Stainless Steel Pipe): 1. Design:Provide thrust ties across flexible couplings. 2. Body and Middle ring: Carbon or Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Followers: Ductile iron, malleable iron,or Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Bolts:Carbon steel or Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Gaskets: EPDM 6. Materials of construction of coupling,closure plates,end rings, and fasteners to match piping materials on which coupling is employed, as well as whether it is exposed, wetted, or submerged service. 7. Manufacturer and Product: a. Dresser;Style 128 b. Smith-Blair;Style 912 D. Split Sleeve Couplings(Steel and Stainless-Steel Pipe): 1. Design: Double arch,with built-in thickened shoulders. Full joint restraint achieved for two times test pressure by weld-on end rings. Closure plates and sealing pad integral with coupling. 2. Gaskets: EDPM 0-ring style. 3. Joint Deflection: Up to 2 degree. 4. Carbon steel metal components to have factory-applied fusion bonded epoxy coating (7 MDFT). 5. Materials of construction of coupling,closure plates,end rings, and fasteners to match piping materials on which coupling is employed, as well as whether it is exposed,wetted, or submerged service. 6. Manufacturer and Product:Victaulic, Inc.; Depend-O-Lok Model FxF,Type 2 Coupling, or equal. E. Flanged Coupling Adapters(FCA) (Ductile Iron and Steel Pipe): 1. Design: Provide thrust across flexible coupling adapters. Restraint shall terminate at a flange or anchor studs attached to the pipe exterior by welded connections or using a slip on restraint flange. 2. Body:Carbon steel conforming to AWWA C207. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 11 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 3. Flange:AWWA C207 or ANSI Standards. 4. Bolts: Carbon steel or 316 stainless steel. 5. Gaskets: EDPM. 6. Carbon steel metal components to have factory-applied fusion bonded epoxy coating (7 MDFT). 7. Materials of construction of coupling,closure plates,end rings,and fasteners to match piping materials on which coupling is employed, as well as whether it is exposed, wetted, or submerged service. 8. Manufacturer and Product: a. Dresser;Style 128 b. Smith-Blair;Style 912 F. Wedge Action Restraints(Ductile Iron and PVC Pipe): 1. Design:Wedges and wedge actuating components are incorporated into the design of the follower gland. 2. Material: Ductile iron,ASTM A536,Grade 65-45-12;wedges BHN 370 minimum. 3. Nuts: Designed with torque-limiting twist-off nuts,exposing a bolt head sized to permit adjustment and removal of joint restraint. 4. Chemical and nodularity test shall be performed as recommended by Ductile Iron Society on a per ladle basis. 5. Traceability: Provide material traceability records. 6. Coating: a. Wedge Assembly:Two coats of liquid Xylan fluoropolymer,heat cured. b. Casting Body: Polyester based powder,electrostatically applied and heat cured, providing corrosion, impact, and UV protection. 7. Approvals: a. Ductile Iron Pipe Restraints: 1) Underwriters Laboratories: Size 3-inch through 24-inch. 2) Factory Mutual:Size 3-inch through 12-inch. b. PVC Pipe Restraints: 1) Underwriters Laboratories: Size 4-inch through 12-inch. 2) Factory Mutual:Size 4-inch through 12-inch. 3) Size 4-inch through 24-inch comply with ASTM F1674. 8. Manufacturer and Product: a. Ductile Iron Pipe: EBAA Iron Megalug 1100 series. b. PVC Pipe: EBAA Iron Megalug 2000 PVC series. 2.6 PIPE SLEEVES A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations: 1. Pipe to wall/casing penetration closures shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between pipe or conduit and wall/casing opening. Once expanded,the mechanical PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 12 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 seal shall provide a watertight seal. 2. Elastomeric element size and material shall be selected per manufacturer recommendations.Assemble with ASTM A276,Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. 3. Pressure end plates shall be either Type 316 stainless steel or manufactured of glass reinforced plastic, with a minimum tensile strength of 20,000 psi. 4. Sized:According to manufacturer's recommendations for the size of pipe shown;to provide a watertight seal between pipe and wall sleeve opening. 5. Available Manufacturers: a. Advance Products&systems, Inc. (Innerlynx) b. Pipeline Seal&insulator, Inc. (Link-Seal) B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M,Type E,Grade B, Schedule 40,galvanized, plain ends. D. Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent,with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785,Schedule 40. G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE,tapered cup shaped and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. H. Insulated and Encased Pipe Sleeve:Conforming to Pipe Shields, Inc.; Models WFB<WFB-CS and—CW Series, as applicable. I. Seepage Ring: Provide a seepage ring in middle of wall sleeve as follows: 1. 3/16-inch minimum thickness, centered between sleeve ends for water stoppage on sleeves located in exterior or water bearing walls. 2. Outside Diameter:3-inches grater that pipe sleeve outside diameter. 3. Continuously fillet weld on each side all around. J. Voids between sleeves or core-drilled openings and pipe or conduit passing through fire rated assemblies shall be fire stopped to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814. 2.7 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Elastomer Bellows: 1. Type: Reinforced, molded wide-arch. 2. End connections: Flanged, 125-lb ANSI B1.1 standard,with Type 316 stainless steel retaining rings. 3. Washers:Over the retaining rings to provide a leak proof joint under test pressure. 4. Thrust Protection: Manufacturer designed and supplied control rods,fasteners,and accessories to protect bellows from overextension at test pressures. 5. Tube and Bellows Arch Lining: EDPM. 6. Rated Temperature:250 degrees F. 7. Rated Deflection and Pressure: PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 13 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 a. Lateral Deflection: 3/4-inch minimum. b. Burst Pressure: four times rated pressure. C. Compression Deflection at Minimum Pressure: 1/2-inch at 250 psig. 8. Manufacturer and Product: a. Holz Rubber Company, Inc. b. Mercer Rubber Co.;Series 500 C. General Rubber Corp. d. Goodall Rubber Co. 2.8 LININGS AND COATINGS A. Interior Pipe Linings: Prepare, prime, and finish pipe interior in accordance the applicable piping system Section 09 9100. B. Exterior coatings: Prepare,prime,and finish pipe exterior in accordance the applicable piping system Section 09 9100. 2.9 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide piping,valve,equipment,and related product identification devices in accordance with Section 10 90 00. 2.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports as shown on the drawings and in accordance with Section 40 0507. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for, develop,and comply with the trench safety plan and a confined space entry plan. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide a dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry,stable subgrades complying with the requirements of Section 3123 19. C. Install all piping systems in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions. Pipe and fitting materials shall comply with the individual piping system Division 40 Sections. D. Examine all piping materials prior to installation and replace items that are damaged or otherwise defective. E. CONTRACTOR shall mark actual flow line or top of pipe elevations and actual coordinates on record drawings when pipelines are being installed. F. Thoroughly clean inside of all piping,valves, and accessories,and outside of all materials which will be exposed. Clean before installation and maintain in that condition until accepted by OWNER. G. Provide secure temporary caps or plugs over all pipe openings at the end of each day to PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 14 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 prevent foreign material from entering the piping systems. Brace pipe to prevent it from floating. H. Do not modify structures,equipment,or piping for the purpose of installing piping unless specifically authorized by the ENGINEER. I. All piping systems shall be cleaned and tested prior to making connections at structures and to existing pipe systems. Small diameter pipes shall be flushed, and large diameter pipes shall have mandrels pulled or other acceptable verification furnished that pipes are clean and no construction debris remains. Temporary blocking and forms used to grout inverts and blockouts shall be removed and manholes and pipes shall be tested before payment will be approved for the last 10 percent of the respective pipe pay estimate items. 3.2 PIPING FLEXIBILITY PROVISIONS A. General: Install flexible couplings to facilitate installation of piping, connections to equipment and pumping units, and to permit disassembly of valve and instrumentation components in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. B. Flexible Joints at Concrete Backfill or Encasement: Install within 18-inches from the termination of any concrete backfill or encasement. C. Flexible Joints at Concrete Structures: 1. Install 18-inches or less from the face of structure;joint may be flush with face. 2. Install a second flexible joint,whether shown or not: a. Pipe Diameter 18-Inches and Smaller:Within 18-inches of the first flexible joint. b. Pipe Diameter Larger Than 18-Inches:Within one pipe diameter of the first flexible joint. 3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric unions. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Dielectric flanges or dielectric flange kits. B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric couplings. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Dielectric nipples. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 8: Dielectric nipples or dielectric flange kits. 4. NPS 10 and NPS 12: Dielectric flange kits. 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 40 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 15 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping to permit valve servicing. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. I. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. K. Penetrations: Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas 2-inches above finished floor level. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions. 3. Watertight Penetrations; a. Provide wall pipes with thrust collars. Wall rings with tapped flanges are not allowed. 4. Non-Watertight Penetrations: a. Pipe sleeves with seep ring or modular mechanical seal. b. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled openings. 5. Existing Walls:Core-drilled openings and use modular mechanical seal. 6. Caulk all sleeves water and air tight. Seal annular space between pipe and sleeve with fire stopping compound. L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements. N. Isolation Valves: Provide piping systems with line size shutoff valves located at risers, at main branch connections to mains for all equipment,and at other locations as indicated and required. O. Vent and Drain Valves: 1. Pipe 2-1/2 Inch Diameter and Larger:3/4-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless otherwise shown. 2. Pipe 2-inch and Smaller: 1/2-inch vent.3/4-inch drain,unless otherwise shown. 3. Install vent and drain valves at low points (drains) and high point (vents) of piping systems so that these systems can be entirely drained and vented. Provide line size PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 16 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 ball valves for all vents and drains. P. Gravity drain systems beneath slabs shall be ductile iron, except for chemical drains, unless shown specifically on Plans. Encase all piping beneath slabs. Q. Install cleanouts on sludge piping so that all runs between bends may be accessed and at intervals not exceeding 250 feet on straight runs. R. All bolts and fasteners on buried or submerged fittings and valves shall be Type 316 stainless steel. S. Provide taps and connections for flushing,testing,and disinfecting pipeline systems. T. Provide taps or weld-u-lets with stainless steel ball valves and piping at all high points in the piping systems for addition of air valves. 3.5 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 40 Sections specifying piping systems. 2. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Remove scale,slag, dirt,and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. B. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 131.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. C. Welded Joints: Constructjoints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. D. Push-on Joints: 1. Comply with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer relative to gasket installation and other jointing operations. 2. Prepare pipe ends by removing from bell and spigot ends all lumps, blisters,excess coal-tar coatings, oil, and grease,then wire brush, and wipe clean and dry before laying pipe. 3. Install ring gasket and,when seated,apply thin film of lubricant to inside surface of gasket. 4. Set spigot,applying lubricant as necessary,aligning with bell,and contacting gasket. 5. Pipe 6-inches and smaller may be driven with a bar lever on end of pipe. 6. For larger pipe, use only approved ratchet-type jacking tool to pull pipe"home." E. Flanged Joints: 1. Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and align flanged joints to prevent mechanical prestressing of flanges, pipe, and equipment.Align bolt holes to straddle PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 17 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 the vertical, horizontal,or north-south center line. Do not exceed 3/64-inch per foot of inclination of the flange face from true alignment. 2. Select appropriate gasket material,size,type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. 3. Use bolts, nuts,and washers of the designated material for service conditions.Tighten bots progressively to prevent unbalance stress. Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. F. Mechanical Joints: 1. Assemble in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove all foreign matter from pipe ends, gaskets, and fittings before installation. 2. Wash ends of pipe,gaskets,and fittings with soapy water before assembly. 3. If effective sealing is not obtained, disassemble joint and clean and reassemble.Over tightening bolts to compensate for poor installation practice will not be permitted. 4. Mechanical joints shall be suitably restrained to prevent movement. G. Mechanical Couplings, Rigid: 1. Install per manufacturer's instructions.Pipe ends shall be clean and smooth. 2. Space between pipe ends shall be at least 1/4-inch, but not more than one inch. H. Flexible Couplings and Flanged Coupling Adapters: 1. Install per Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations to facilitate removal of equipment,valves, and other elements. 2. All flexible couplings and flanged couplings shall be restrained. I. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. J. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy(0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32. K. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's"Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. L. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. M. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dryjoining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 18 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 N. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. O. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. P. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. Q. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive,and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A. Prior to installing valves, remove foreign matter from within the valve. Inspect valves in the open and closed position to verify that all parts are in satisfactory working condition. B. Install valves, setting valves plumb, with operators aligned as shown on the Drawings. For buried valves, center valve boxes on valves. Carefully tamp earth around each valve box for a minimum of four feet or to the trench face if less than four feet. 3.7 SECURING AND SUPPORTING A. Exposed Piping Systems: 1. Engineered Hanger and Support System:The CONTRACTOR provide an engineered hanger and support system for the various piping systems in accordance with Section 40 05 07 as shown on the Drawings; and as specified herein to maintain the line and grade and prevent the transfer of stress to pumps, equipment, and other related work. a. This includes the design of multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers and the selection of appropriate hangers and anchors to the structures, buildings, and facilities.This design shall be accomplished by a professional engineer license in the state where the Project is to be constructed. 2. Reaction Anchorage and Blocking: Install suitable reaction blocking,struts,anchors, clamps,joint harness, or other adequate means for preventing movement of pipe caused by unbalanced internal liquid pressure. Pressure can be expected at tees, elbows,Y-branches, and other bends, which are installed in piping subjected to internal hydrostatic heads in excess of 15-feet in exposed piping. B. Buried Piping Systems: 1. Reaction Anchorage and Blocking: Install suitable reaction blocking, struts, anchors, clamps,joint harness, or other adequate means for preventing movement of pipe caused by unbalanced internal liquid pressure. Pressure can be expected at unlugged tees,Y-branches and bends deflecting 11-1/4 degrees or more,which are installed in piping subjected to internal hydrostatic heads in excess of 30-feet in buried piping. 2. Restrained Joints: a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings,the CONTRACTOR shall provide restrained pipe joints and fittings in accordance with Part 1 Project Requirements. b. All fittings shall be restrained using restrained joint pipe and fittings for a PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 19 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 sufficient length to resist the internal hydrostatic pressures. C. Restrained push-on pipe and fittings shall be capable of being deflected after assembly. d. The design for restrained joints, including the length necessary to resist the design thrust and the approval of the fill material and compaction method, shall be performed and sealed by a professional engineer license in the state where the Project is to be constructed. e. The above applies to unsaturated soil conditions. In locations where ground water is encountered,the soil density shall be reduced to its buoyant weight for all backfill below the water table and the coefficient of friction shall be reduced to 0.25. f. Bends and Appurtenances: 1) Provide restrained at all bends. 2) Horizontal changes in pipe direction may be accomplished without the use of direction-changing fittings. Controlled horizontal longitudinal bending using deflected joints may be used and shall not exceed 50 percent of the manufacturer's written recommendations. 3) Vertical changes in pipe direction may be accomplished without the use of directional-changing fittings which require vertical thrust blocking and/or joint restraint. Controlled vertical longitudinal bending shall be accomplished using deflected joints, resulting in a circular pipe arc where joints do not require restraint.Joint deflections shall not exceed 50 percent of the manufacturer's written recommendations. 4) Valves, hydrants, and fittings shall be supported by a concrete block or concrete cradle.The weight of these items shall not be supported by the pipe. 3. Concrete Thrust Blocking:When specified on the Drawings or with written approval from the ENGINEER, provide concrete thrust blocking between the fitting and solid, undisturbed ground. Unless specifically shown on the Drawings, concrete thrust blocking is not allowed at water or wastewater treatment plant sites. 4. In the event that adequate support against undisturbed ground cannot be obtained, install metal harness anchorages consisting of steel rods or bolts across the joint and securely anchored to the pipe and fittings, or other adequate anchorage facilities. 3.8 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Provide corrosion protection for all steel clamps, rods, bolts, and other metal accessories used in reaction anchorages or joint harness where subject to submergence or contact with earth or other fill material and not encased in concrete. Apply not less than two coats of coal-tar mastic coating material to clean, dry metal surfaces.Allow first to dry prior to application of second coat. 3.9 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller,adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 20 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes. B. Connections with Existing Piping: 1. Field verify all dimensions,sizes, configuration and related items on all existing piping to which connections are to be made. 2. Connections between new work and existing piping shall utilized suitable fittings for the conditions encountered. 3. Each connection with an existing pipe shall be made at a time under conditions which will least interfere with service to the OWNER or to customers, and as authorized by the OWNER. Provide notification 48 hours in advance prior to making connections. C. Pipe Connections: 1. Piping connections shall be of the type indicated on the Drawings or in the Piping Schedule provided in the Drawings. 2. Field-welded joints will be permitted only when indicated on the Drawings and will require approval of the ENGINEER. 3. Field-welded joints will only be permitted at locations where the interior coatings can be repaired and inspected. 4. Additional flanged, compression sleeve or grooved end couplings may be added by the CONTRACTOR to facilitate fabrication, handling,transportation,and field assembly at no additional cost. 3.10 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated. B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope. 3.11 PAINTING A. Painting of piped systems,valves,specials, hangers and supports,equipment,and components shall be as specified in the various sections and Section 09 9100. B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.12 IDENTIFICATION A. Piping Systems: Install pipe and valve markers, including arrows showing normal direction of flow in Accordance with Section 10 90 00. 1. Plastic markers,with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot non-insulated piping. 2. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following: a. Near each valve and control device. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 05-PAGE 21 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 b. Near each branch,excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious. C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible enclosures. d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. B. Buried Piping System Identification: 1. Buried water piping systems shall have marking tape installed approximately 12- inches above the pipe. 2. Install detectable warning tape above non-metallic pipelines. C. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate signor equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment in accordance with Section 10 90 00 and the following: 1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three- fourths of size of principal lettering. 2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. D. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions. E. Wiring: Identify system components,wiring,cabling,and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 10 90 00. 3.13 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,templates,diagrams,instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi,28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Section 03 30 00. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 22 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 3.14 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping"for information on the installation of the engineered hangers and supports for piping systems. 3.15 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Provide service connections to equipment furnished by others, utilizing equipment shop drawings furnished for indicating type, number,and location of connecting points.As part of the work,field adjustments as to the type, number, and location may be required.This is considered part of the Work. 1. Roughing-In: Extend service connections to various items of equipment.Temporarily terminate at proper points as indicated on the shop drawings furnished or as directed. 2. Final Connections: Provide items,such as pipe,fittings,adapters,valves, insulation, and other materials, required to connect equipment from the rough-in locations. 3. Valves: Provide cut-off valve for each service at rough-in locations,except drains. 3.16 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Clean piping systems thoroughly. Purge pipe of construction debris and contamination before placing the system in service. Provide temporary connections required for cleaning, purging and circulation. B. Install temporary strainers in front of pumps,tanks, solenoid valves, control valves, and other equipment where permanent strainers are not indicated. Keep these strainers in service until the equipment has been tested,then remove either entire strainer or straining element only. Fit strainers with line size blow off valve. C. Circulate a chemical cleaner in chilled, heating,and condensing water systems;and steam and condensing piping systems to remove mill scale, grease, oil, and silt. Circulate for 48- hours, flush system and replace with clean water. Dispose of chemical solution in accordance with local ordinances.The type and quantity of cleaning chemicals shall be as recommended by the supplier for the service. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Lined carbon steel pipe and fittings shall be inspected by the CONTRACTOR after installation to ensure linings are intact in accordance with the piping system section and shall certify to that effect. a. Pipe 24-Inches and Smaller: Engage an inspection organization to video inspect pipe and report findings. 2. Pressure test piping systems in accordance with Section 40 0105"Field Testing of Piping Systems." 3. Additional field-testing shall be as described in the individual piping systems Sections of Division 40. C. The piping system component(s)will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 23 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.18 SUPPLEMENTS A. Piping Schedule is provided in the Drawings. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 05-PAGE 24 OF 24 BID SET 0537-055-01 PIPING SYSTEM,BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS JULY 2024 SECTION 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work covered under this Section consists of providing hangers and supports for equipment and piping systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 50 00"Metal Fabrications"for materials for attaching hangers and supports to structures and buildings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES A. Definition: 1. Wetted or Submerged: Submerged, less than one-foot above liquid, below top of channel wall, under cover or slab of channel or tank,or in other damp locations. B. References: 1. American Welding Society(AWS): a. D1.1—Structural Welding Code-Steel b. D1.2-Structural Welding Code-Aluminum C. D1.6-Structural Welding Code-Stainless Steel 2. American Society of Mechanical ENGINEER's: a. B31.9-Standard Building Services Piping b. Section IX, Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:Welding and Brazing Qualifications 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B 633—Specification for Electrode posited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel b. A 36-Standard Specifications for Carbon Structural Steel C. A 123—Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products d. A 183—Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts e. A 525—Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. f. A 653—Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. g. A 780—Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip galvanized Coatings. h. A 1011—Specification for Steel,Sheet,and Strip, Hot-Rolled,Carbon,Structural, high-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 1 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 i. C 1107—Specification for Packaged Dry Hydraulic Cement(Non-Shrink) j. F 844—Specification for Washers,Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use Only 4. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS): a. SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials,Design and Maintenance b. SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application C. SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports-Fabrication and Installation Practices d. SP-127 Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design,Selection, Application 5. NFPA(National Fire Protection Association): a. NFPA 13—Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems b. NFPA-14-Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Product data to include, but not be limited to materials,finishes,testing agency approvals, load ratings, and dimensional information. 2. Provide installation instructions for each type of hanger and support. 3. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's Figure No.,size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support. B. Shop Drawings: Provide for each type of hanger and support, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly. Indicate all loads exceeding 250 Ibs imposed on building support systems and on structures. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Welder certificates signed by CONTRACTOR certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. 2. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifyingthat their product meet the specified requirements. D. Provide manufacturer's warranty for all products indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to the following codes depending on the material welded. a. AWS D1.1"Structural Welding Code--Steel." b. AWS D1.2"Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." C. AWS D1.6"Structural Welding Code-Stainless Steel." 2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME"Boiler and Pressure PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 2 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 Vessel Code,"Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports used as components of fire protection systems. D. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100. 1. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers,supports, and components include listing and labeling by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications:A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. E. Licensed Operators: Use operators that are licensed by powder-operated tool manufacturers to operate their tools and fasteners. 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Engineered Hanger and Support System:The CONTRACTOR shall provide an engineered hanger and support system for the various piping systems indicted on the Drawings.This includes the design of multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers and the selection of appropriate hangers and anchors to the structures, buildings,and facilities.This design shall be accomplished by a professional ENGINEER license in the state where the Project is to be constructed. B. Codes and Standards: 1. Regulatory Requirements:Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of the hanger and support system. 2. NFPA Compliance: Hanger and support system shall comply with NFPA-13 when used as a component of a fire protection system and NFPA-14 when used as a component of a standpipe system. 3. UL and FM Compliance: Hanger and support system components shall be listed and labeled by UL and FM when used for fire protection systems. 4. National Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Instead of UL and FN compliance,the hanger and support system components shall be listed and labeled by a NTRL where used for fire protection systems.The term "NTRL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 5. Duct Hangers:SMACNA Duct Manuals. 6. MSS Standard Compliance: Provide hanger and support system components of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-69. C. Design Requirements: 1. General: a. The configuration and layout of yard and station piping systems are shown in the Drawings. b. In certain locations, pipe supports, anchors, and expansion joints have been indicated on the drawings, but no attempt has been made to indicate every pipe support, anchor, and expansion joint. C. It shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to provide a complete system of pipe supports,to provide expansion joints, and to provide restraints and anchor PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 3 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 all piping, in accordance with the requirements set forth herein. d. Additional pipe supports may be required adjacent to expansion joints, couplings,flanged connections, or valves. e. Piping Smaller than 30-inches:Supports are shown only where specific types and locations are required; provide additional pipe,valve, and equipment supports as required. f. Piping 30-inches and Larger: Support systems have been designed for piping and shall be placed at the designated locations as shown on the Drawings. g. Piping 3-inches and Smaller: It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to provide a complete support system even if no supports are indicated on the Drawings. h. Comply with the requirements of MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69,and MSS SP-89. 2. Piping Support Systems: a. Support Load: Dead loads imposed by weight of pipes filled with water, except air and gas pipes, plus insulation. b. Safety Factor: Minimum of 5. C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Rod Size: 1) Steel or Ductile Iron Piping: Fable Steel or Ductile Iron Pig&. Am . .. a .. i= 1-inch and smaller 6 feet 1/4-inch 1-1/2-inch thru 8 feet 1/4-inch 2-1/2-inch 3-inch &4-inch 10 feet 3/8-inch 6-inch 12 feet 3/8-inch 8-inch 12 feet 1/2-inch 10-inch&12-inch 14 feet 5/8-inch 14-inch 16 feet 3/4-inch 16-inch&18-inch 16 feet 7/8-inch 20-inch 18 feet 1-inch 24-inch 18 feet 1-1/4-inch 30-inch and larger As shown on Drawings As shown on Drawings 2) Copper Piping: a) Maximum Support Spacing: 2 feet less per size than listed for steel, with 1-inch and smaller pipe supported every 5 feet. b) Minimum Hanger Rod Size:Same as listed for steel pipe. 3) Plastic and Fiberglass Piping: a) Maximum Support Spacing:As recommended by manufacturer for flow and temperature in pipe. b) Minimum Rod Sizing: Same as listed for steel pipe. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 4 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 c) Provide supports with width as required by pipe manufacturer and shields as required to protect pipe in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 4) Stainless Steel Piping: 1-inch thru 4-inch 8 feet 1/4-inch 6-inch 8 feet 3/8-inch 8-inch& 10-inch 10 feet 1/2-inch 12-inch 10 feet 1/2-inch 14-inch&16-inch 12 feet 5/8-inch 18-inch&20-inch 14 feet %-inch 24-inch 14 feet 7/8-inch 3. Framing Support Systems: a. Beams: Size such that beam stress does not exceed 25,000 psi and maximum deflection does not exceed 1/240 of span. b. Column Members:Size in accordance with manufacturer's recommended method. C. Support Loads: Calculate using weight of pipes filled with water. d. Maximum Spans: 1) Steel and Ductile Iron Pipe,3-Inch Diameter and Larger: 10-foot centers, unless otherwise shown. 2) Other Pipelines and Special Situations: May require supplementary hangers and supports. 3) Electrical Conduit Support: Include in design of framing support systems. 4. Anchoring Devices: Design, size, and pace support devices, including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor support, to withstand shear and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each particular support. 5. Vertical Sway Bracing: 10-foot maximum centers,or as shown. 6. Existing Support Systems: use existing support systems to support new piping only if CONTRACTOR can show that they are adequate for the additional loads,or if they are strengthened to support the additional load. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations and Section 0160 00. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 5 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. When specified items are not available,fabricate pipe supports of correct material and to general configuration indicated in catalogs. 2. Special supports and hangers details will be required for cases where standard catalog supports are inapplicable. 3. Materials: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,fabricate supports using the following materials: a. Wetted and Submerged:Type 316 Stainless Steel. b. Atmospheric Exposed: Hot-dipped galvanize after fabrication,coat in accordance with Section 09 9100"Painting and Protective Coatings." C. Hardware:Type 316 Stainless Steel. B. Hangers,Supports,and Components: 1. Selection and application of pipe hangers and supports for all service temperatures shall be in accordance with MSS SP-69. 2. Requirements for material,design, and manufacture of standard types of hanger and support system components shall be in accordance with MSS SP-58. 3. Requirements for the fabrication and installation of the hanger and support system shall be in accordance with MSS SP-89. 4. Requirements relating to the design, selection, and applications of bracing for piping systems subject to seismic-wind-dynamic loading shall be in accordance with MSS SP- 127. 5. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have a field-applied finish. 6. Pipe attachments shall include a nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper pipe and tubing. C. Products: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ANVIL International, Inc. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. C. National Pipe Hanger Corporation d. Piping Technology&Products, Inc. 2.2 HANGERS A. Adjustable Clevis Hanger:MSS SP-58,Type 1. B. Adjustable Swivel Ring for Non-Insulated Pipe: MSS Type 7. C. Hinged Split-Ring Pipe Clamp: MSS SP-58,Type 6 or 12. D. Yoke and Roller Hanger: MSS Type 41 and 43. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 6 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 E. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. F. Straps: MSS Type 26. G. Anchor Rods,Clevises, Nuts, Sockets,and Turnbuckles: In accordance with MSS SP-58. H. Attachments: 1. I-Beam Clamp: Concentric loading type, MSS SP-58,Type 21, 28,29,or 30,which engage both sides of flange. 2. Concrete Insert: MSS SP-58,Type 18, continuous channel insert with load rating not less than that of hanger rod it supports. 2.3 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Pedestal Type:Schedule 40 pipe stanchion,saddle,and anchoring flange. 1. Nonadjustable Saddle: MSS SP-58,Type 37 with U-bolt. 2. Adjustable Saddle: MSS SP-58,Type 38 without clamp. B. Pipe Stanchion:Anvil Figure 62 and 63 for support of steel pipe elbows, horizontal pipe, and for use with pipe saddles. 2.4 ROLLERS AND ROLLER SUPPORTS A. Roller with Adjustable Support Stand: 1. Designed for pipe support where longitudinal movement and vertical adjustment is required. 2. Non-metallic roller with stainless steel stand and hardware. 3. Complies with MSS SP-69 and SP-58,Type 46. B. Roller with Non-Adjustable Support Stand: 1. Designed for supporting pipe with longitudinal movement. 2. Non-metallic roller with stainless steel chair,stand and hardware. 3. Complies with MSS SP-69 and SP-58,Type 44. C. Roller with Ceiling Suspended Supports: 1. Designed for suspending pipe where longitudinal movement and vertical adjustment is required. 2. Steel with cast iron roller,standard finish. 3. Complies with MSS SP-69 and SP-58,Type 43 or Type 41. 2.5 WALL SUPPORTS A. Horizontal Pipe: 1. 1/4-Inch Thru 4-Inches:Offset or straight J-hook. 2. 4-Inches and Greater: Welded steel bracket MSS Type 31, 32, or 33 and wrought steel clamp. Provide adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll MSS Type 44 for hot pipe 2000 F and over and for sizes 6-inches and greater. a. One-Hole Clamp:Anvil; Figure 126. b. Channel Type: Unistrut,Anvil,Cooper B-Line. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 7 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 2.6 PIPE CLAMPS A. Riser Clamp: MSS SP-58,Type 4. B. Flexibility in hanger assembly required due to horizontal movement, use pipe clamps with weldless eye nuts: MSS SP-58, Type 4, with Type 17. For insulated lines use double bolted pipe clamps: MSS SP-58,Type 3, with Type 17. C. Offset Pipe Clamp: Galvanized carbon steel clamp for use is supporting piping away from floor or wall;Anvil Figure 103 or equivalent. D. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamp: Galvanized carbon steel riser clamp for support of vertical piping complying with MSS SP-69 and MSS-58,Type 8 and Type 42.Type 42 is designed also to be supported by hanger rods. 2.7 MULTIPLE OR TRAPEZE HANGERS A. Trapeze hangers constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS Gr.33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8-inch x 1-5/8-inch minimum. B. Mount pipes to trapeze with two piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe.Pipes subject to axial movement: 1. Use strut mounted roller supports; use pipe protection shield or saddles on FRP and insulated lines. 2. Use strut mounted pipe guide as required. 2.8 CHANNEL TYPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Steel Construction: 1. Channel: Pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, Class G90,or hot-dip after fabrication. 2. Hardware:Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Channel Size: a. Single Channel: 14-gauge, 1-5/8" by 1-5/8". b. Double Channel: 14-gauge,3-1/4" by 1-5/8". C. Manufacturer: Unistrut Series P1000 or equivalent. 4. Members and Connections: MFMA-2,factory-fabricated components for field assembly. Design for all loads with Safety Factor of 5. 5. Pipe and Tubing Clamps: Unistrut"Cush-A-Clamp"Omega Series or U-Bolt Series, stainless steel construction with thermoplastic elastomer cushion or equivalent. B. Fiberglass Construction: 1. Channel: Polyester and vinylester reinforce with multiple strands of glass filament, UV resistant surfacing veils channels. a. Single Channel: Heavy duty 1-5/8"' by 1-5/8"; Unistrut Series F20V-2000. b. Double Channel: Heavy duty 3-1/4" by 1-5/8"; Unistrut Series F20V-2100. 2. Seal all cut ends with a clear sealer and provide end caps on exposed ends after assembly. 3. Hardware: Fiberglass or stainless steel. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 8 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 C. Available Manufactures: 1. Anvil; Power-Strut Line 2. Cooper B-Line 3. National Pipe Hangers Corporation 4. Unistrut Corporation 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40;galvanized steel or stainless steel, 180 degrees arc, minimum 12-inches long,to prevent crushing insulation. B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39;fill interior with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. C. Thermal Shields: 1. Provide 100-psi minimum compressive strength, waterproof, asbestos free calcium silicate,encased with a sheet metal enclosure. Insert and shield shall cover the entire circumference or the bottom half circumference of the pipe,with length recommended by the manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. 2. Cold Piping: Calcium silicate shall extend beyond the sheet metal shield allowing overlap of vapor barrier. 3. Piping,4-inches and larger,supported on trapeze or pipe rollers, provide double thickness shields. 4. Piping, 12-inches and greater, provide 600 psi calcium silicate structural insert. D. Vibration Isolation and Supports: 1. For refrigeration, air conditionings, hydraulic, pneumatic, and other vibrating system applications, use a clamp that has a vibration dampening inserts and a nylon inserted locknut. For copper and steel tubing use Cooper B-Line BVT series VibraClamps,for pipe sizes use BVP series, or equivalent. 2. For larger tubing or piping subjected to vibration, use neoprene or spring hangers as required. For spring hangers use Mason or equal. 3. For base mounted equipment use vibration pads, molded neoprene mounts,or spring mounts as required. 4. Vibration isolation products as manufactured by Cooper B-Line,VibraTrol systems,or equivalent. E. Intermediate Pipe Guides: 1. Piping,6-inches and smaller: a. Type: Pipe clamp with oversized pipe sleeve to provide minimum 1/8-inch clearance. 2. Piping,8-inches and larger: a. Type: Specially formed U-bolts with double nuts to provide 1/4-inch minimum clearance around pipe. b. U-Bolt Stock Size: 1) 8-inch Pipe: 5/8-inch 2) 10-inch Pipe: 3/4-inch PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 9 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 3) 12-inch through 16-inch Pipe:7/8-inch 4) 18-inch through 30-inch Pipe: 1-inch F. Pipe Alignment Guides: 1. Piping 8-inches and Smaller:Spider of sleeve type. 2. Piping 10-inches and Larger: Roller type. G. Pipe Anchors: 1. Type:Anchor chair with U-bolt. H. Hangers shall be threaded at either end or continuous threaded rods of circular cross section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Hanger Support Anchors: Comply with the requirements of Section 05 05 23 for cast-in- place anchors, concrete and masonry drilled anchors, and material of construction for anchors based on the environment. 1. Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval. B. Powder actuated fasteners and other types of bolts and fasteners not specified herein shall not be used unless approved by ENGINEER. 1. Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners forfire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval. C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M,steel plates,shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. D. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183,steel, hex-head,track bolts and nuts. E. Washers: ASTM F 844,steel, plain,flat washers. F. Grout: ASTM C 1107,Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic; 1. Characteristics include post-hardening,volume-adjusting,dry, hydraulic-cement-type grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which the hanger and support system will be installed. Do not proceed with work until satisfactorily conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer. B. Proceed with installation of the hanger and support system only after required structural PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 07-PAGE 10 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 work has been completed in areas where work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including, but not limited to. Proper placement of inserts, anchors, and other structural attachments. Review Drawings to obtain structural support limitations. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers, supports,clamps,and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Channel Support Installation:Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. 1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricate heavy-duty trapezes. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install support intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field-fabricate from ASTM A36 steel shapes selected for loads being supported. 3. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1. D. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves,flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick. F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install according to fastener manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick. G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,washers, and other accessories. H. Supportfire protection systems piping independent of other piping. I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" is not exceeded. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any),to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 11 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span an arc of 180 degrees and have dimensions in inches not less than the following: Shield Length and Thickness NIPS Shield Length Shield Thicknes (IncheslILL (inches) 11 (inches) 1/4 to 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 and 6 18 0.060 8 to 14 24 0.075 16 to 24 24 0.105 4. Pipes 8 Inches(200 mm) and Larger: Include wood inserts. 5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping. L. Piping Support General Applications: 1. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by the equipment. 2. Support large or heavy valves,fittings,and appurtenances independently of connected piping. 3. Do not support one pipe from another. 4. Support pipe at changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible joints and couplings, and where shown. 5. Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access areas or bridge crane runs. 6. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing. 7. Install pipe anchors where required to withstand expansion thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion. 8. Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are made. M. Standard Pipe Supports: 1. Horizontal Suspended Piping: a. Single Pipes:Adjustable swivel-ring,split-ring,or clevis hangers. b. Grouped Pipes:Trapeze hanger systems. C. Furnished galvanized steel protection shield and oversized hangers for all insulated pipes. d. Furnish precut sections of rigid insulation with vapor barrier at hangers for all insulated pipe. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 12 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 2. Horizontal Piping Supported from Walls: a. Single Pipes: Wall brackets or wall clips attached to wall with anchors. Clips attached to wall mounted framing also acceptable. b. Stacked Piping: 1) Wall mounted framing system and clips acceptable for piping smaller than 3-inch nominal diameter. 2) Piping clamps which resist axial movement of pipe through support not acceptable. C. Wall mounted piping clips not acceptable for insulated piping. 3. Horizontal Piping Supported From Floors: a. Stanchion Type: 1) Pedestal type;adjustable with stanchion,saddle,and anchoring flange. 2) Use yoked saddles for piping whose centerline elevation is 18-inches or greater above the floor and for all exterior installations. 3) Provide neoprene waffle isolation pad under anchoring flanges, adjacent to equipment or where otherwise required to provide vibration isolation. b. Floor Mounted Channel Supports: 1) Use for piping smaller than 3-inch nominal diameter running along floors and in trenches at piping elevations lower than can be accommodated using pedestal pipe supports. 2) Attach channel framing to floors with anchor bolts. 3) Attach pipe to channel framing with clips or pipe clamps. C. Concrete Cradles: Use for piping larger than 3-inch nominal diameter along floor and in trenches at piping elevations lower than can be accommodated using stanchion type. 4. Vertical Pipe:Support with wall brackets and base elbow or riser clamps on floor penetrations. 5. Standard Attachments: a. To Concrete Ceilings:Concrete inserts. b. To Steel beams: I-beam clamps or welded attachments. C. To Wooden Beams: Lag screws and angle clips to members with anchor bolts. d. To Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles with anchor bolts. 6. Existing Walls and Ceilings: Install as specified unless otherwise shown. N. Intermediate and Pipe Alignment Guides: 1. Provide pipe alignment guides(or pipe supports that accomplishes the same function) at all expansion joints and loops. 2. Guide piping on each side of an expansion joint or loop at four to fourteen pipe diameters distance from each joint or loop. 3. Install intermediate guides on metal framing support systems not carrying a pipe anchor or alignment guide. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 13 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 O. Accessories: 1. Insulation Shield: Install on insulated non-steel piping.Oversized rollers and supports. 2. Welding Insulated Saddle: Install on insulated steel pipe.Oversized rollers and supports. 3. Vibration Isolation Pad: Install under base flange of pedestal type pipe supports adjacent to equipment, and where required to isolate vibration. 4. Dielectric Barrier: a. Install between carbon steel members and copper or stainless-steel pipe. b. Install between stainless steel supports and nonstainless steel ferrous metal piping. 5. Electrical isolation: Install 1/4-inch by 3-inch neoprene rubber wrap between submerged metal pipe and oversized clamps. P. Piping and ductwork supports are to be independent supports and directly supported from building or structure. Combining supports from more than one trade is not permitted. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make a smooth bearing surface. 3.4 METAL FABRICATION A. Cut,drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing,and so that contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Section 09 9100. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections,and abraded areas and apply PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 07-PAGE 14 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. 3.7 VIBRATION A. Vibration of the piping system during operation is not acceptable. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide additional lateral supports as required to eliminate piping vibration at no addition cost to OWNER. END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 07-PAGE 15 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 07-PAGE 16 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS JULY 2024 SECTION 40 05 19 DUCTILE IRON PIPE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section provides requirements for ductile iron piping system for exposed and buried applications and includes: 1. Mechanical joint, push-on and flanged ductile iron pipe,sizes 4-inch through 64-inch. 2. Mechanical joint and flanged ductile iron and cast iron fittings, sizes 4-inch through 64-inch. 3. Gaskets and fasteners. 4. Protective coatings, linings and encasements. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 0133 00"Submittal Procedures" 2. Section 40 05 05 "Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods" 3. Section 40 05 07"Hangers and Supports for Piping Systems" 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C104/A21.4-Cement-Motor Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. C105/21.5-Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast-Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids. 3. C110-C21.10-American National Standard for Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings,3- inch through 48-inch for Water and Other Liquids. 4. C111/A21.11-American National Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 5. C115/A21.15-American National Standard for Flanged Cast-Iron and Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. 6. C150/A21.50-American National Standard forthe Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe. 7. C151/A21.51-American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe,Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds, or Sand-Lined Molds,for Water and Other Liquids. 8. C153/A21.10-Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. 9. C600-Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 10. C606-Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 11. M41-Manual Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. B. ASTM International, Inc. (ASTM): PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 19-PAGE 1 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE JULY 2024 1. A48-Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A193-Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless-Steel bolting Materials for High Temperature or High-Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. 3. A194-Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, of Both. 4. A307-Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60000 PSI Tensile Strength. 5. A320-Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless-Steel Bolting Materials for Low Temperature Service. 6. A536-Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 7. A563-Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 8. A674-Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or other Liquids. 9. D1330-Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets. C. National Science Foundation (NSF): 1. NSF/ANSI 61-Drinking Water Components—Health Effects. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 0133 00"Submittal Procedures." B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Pipe layout drawings shall include plan,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other work. 2. Pipe layout schedule/drawings including pipeline stationing, elevation,and restrained joint locations. 3. Schedule of materials furnished. 4. Pipe layout drawings and data shall clearly indicate where pipe requiring special provisions are to be located,connections to equipment,valves,and related items. D. Material Certificates: 1. Certificate of Compliance with all applicable and appropriate reference standards certifying that all pipe,fittings, and specials, and other products and materials furnished, comply with the applicable provision of the Specification. 2. Certification of Adequacy of Design: The Certificate of Adequacy of Design shall show the necessary provisions required in the design of the pipe to comply with applicable sections of this Specification. A Professional ENGINEER registered in the state where the Project is located shall seal the Certificate of Adequacy of Design. E. Field quality-control test reports. 1.5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. Restrained Pipe and Fitting Joints, Buried Piping: 1. Restrained joints shall be used for a sufficient distance from each bend,tee,elbow, plug, or other fitting to resist thrust that will develop at the design pressure. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 19-PAGE 2 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE JULY 2024 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide restraint length calculations in accordance with AWWA M41 based on the laying conditions,soil conditions, depth of cover, and pressures to determine the number of restrained joints that will be required. 3. For the purposes of thrust restraint, design pressures shall be the working pressure shown, plus the additional surge allowance for potable water, service water, and pump discharge piping.The design pressure shall be 1.5 times the design test pressure indicated for all other piping. B. Hangers and Supports, Exposed Piping: Refer to Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping" for requirements for engineered hangers and supports for piping systems to be provided by CONTRACTOR. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: 1. Pressure Class: Unless otherwise noted in the pipe schedule or on individual drawing sheets, use the following pressure classes for each size of pipe. Nominal Pipe Size Pressure Class (inches) (psi) 3 350 4 350 6 350 8 350 10 350 12 350 14 250 16 250 18 250 20 250 24 200 30 150 36 150 42 150 48 150 54 150 60 150 64 150 2. Bolts, Nuts,and Washers: a. Exposed:ASTM A307,carbon steel,Grade A hex head bolts;ASTM A563,Grade A hex head nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers. b. Submerged or Buried:ASTM A193 or ASTM A320,Type 316 stainless steel bolts; ASTM A194,Type 316, nuts; and washers of the same material as the bolts. 3. Contractor is not required to restrain ductile-iron pipe that is concrete encased under PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 19-PAGE 3 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE JULY 2024 structures. 4. Contractor is not required to poly-wrap ductile iron pipe that is concrete encased under structures. 5. Ductile iron with a thickness design for the pressures and laying conditions complying with the requirements of AWWA C150 and the manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151. B. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151,with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110,ductile-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 2. Glands and Gaskets: AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets. C. Flanged-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151,flanged ends. 1. Flange Joints: Comply with the requirements of AWWA C115. 2. Gaskets: a. Flange, Flat Face: Full-faced,AWWA C111, 1/8-inch thick rubber,factory cut. D. Thickness Class Pipe Sizes: Where thickness design is indicated in lieu of pressure class design in the Drawings or Pipe Schedule, ductile-iron with a thickness design shall comply with the requirements of AWWA C150 and be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151. Comply with the following minimum thickness class, unless otherwise indicated in the Pipe Schedule. 1. Class 51: For pipe 6-inch and smaller. 2. Class 50: For pipe 8-inch and larger. 3. Class 53: For pipe with threaded flanged joints. 4. Class 53: For pipe with grooved ends;grooved in accordance with AWWA C606. 2.2 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS A. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed ball-joint sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for system pressures and for offset and expansion indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. b. Romac Industries, Inc. C. Star Pipe Products. B. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with ball joint,flexing section, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include rating for 250-psig minimum working pressure and for up to 15 degrees of deflection. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. C. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: Three-piece assembly of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include rating for 250-psig minimum working pressures and for expansion PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 19-PAGE 4 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE JULY 2024 indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. b. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. C. JCM Industries. D. Flange adapter: Forjoining steel pipe to cast iron, provide Dresser Style 127 or equal. Gasket to be BUNA-S, Grade 27. E. Dismantling Joint: Double-ended flange adapter,allowing longitudinal adjustment in piping system, similar to Dresser Style 131 or equal. F. Reducing and Transition Coupling: Required for making reduction is sizes of piping; changing classes of piping; or joining steel and cast-iron pipe, provide Dresser Style 62 or equal. 2.3 PROTECTIVE COATINGS, LININGS,AND ENCASEMENT A. Pipe and Fittings Interior: 1. Mortar: Unless otherwise specified in the Piping Schedule, all ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be provided with a cement-mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104.A bituminous seal coat shall be applied over the cement-mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104. 2. Epoxy:When specified in the Piping Schedule,apply a high build,fusion bonded epoxy lining per AWWA C116, minimum 16 mils dry film thickness, per AWWA C116. Epoxy lining shall be suitable for potable water service per NSF 61. 3. Glass Lining: a. Consist of glass completely fused above 1,450 degrees F,with a thickness of 6 to 10 mils and defects,which exposed base metal not greater than 0.1 percent of total lined surface. b. Hardness shall be greater than 5 on the Mohs scale and lining bonded sufficiently to withstand a metal strain of 0.001-inch/inch without damage to the glass lining. C. Finished lined pipe shall not deviate more than 0.0125-inch per foot of length from a centerline perpendicular to the flange face or square end of the pipe. d. Available Manufacturers:Water Works Supply Co., Ferrock MEH-32; Ceramic Coating Co., SL-31; or Ervite Corp., SG-14. 4. Amine-Cured Epoxy: When specified in the Piping Schedule,the inside of pipe, bells, and fittings shall be coated with an amine-cured Novalac epoxy with at least 20 percent by volume of ceramic quartz pigment,40 mils nominal DFT after the pipe has been solvent cleaned and abrasive blasted. Use Protecto 401 or approved equal. B. Pipe and Fittings Exterior: 1. Exposed Piping: Provide shop coat primer required for the coating system specified in Section 09 9100. 2. Buried Piping: Provide shop applied 1-mil bituminous coating system per AWWA C151 for pipe and AWWA C110 for fittings. C. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 19-PAGE 5 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE JULY 2024 1. Form: Sheet or tube. 2. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness or high-density,cross- laminated PE film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness. 3. Color: Black. 2.4 VENT AND DRAIN VALVES A. Pipelines 2-1/2-Inch Diameter and Larger:3/4-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. Pipelines 2-Inch Diameter and Smaller: 1/2-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. C. Install vents and drains at piping system high points (vents) and low points (drains) as required by final installation configuration. Provide line size ball valves for all vents and drains. 2.5 INSULATED CONNECTIONS A. Provide dielectric insulation kits, including gaskets, insulating sleeves and washers for each bolt and nuts,where flanges are to be cathodically insulated. Metal hardware such as backup washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Refer to Section 40 OS 05 for description and additional information. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with the requirements of Section 40 05 05. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Laying Buried Pipe: 1. Install pipe to the lines,grades and elevations shown on the Drawings,complying with the requirements of AWWA C600. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,within the plant site, bury piping with a minimum cover of 3-feet.Off-site, bury lines 12-inches and smaller with a minimum cover of 4-feet and lines 14-inches and larger with a minimum cover of 5-feet. 3. Do not lay pipe in water,or when the trench or weather is unsuitable for work. Keep water out of trench until jointing is complete. When work is not in progress, close ends of pipe and fittings securely so no trench water,earth or other substances will enter pipes or fittings. 4. Keep the inside of the pipe free from foreign matter during operations by plugging or other approved method. 5. Provide pipe bedding in accordance with the Drawings and Section 3123 00. Place pipe so that the full length of each section rests solidly upon the pipe bed, with recesses excavated to accommodate bells and joints.Take up and relay pipe when the grade or joint is disturbed after laying. 6. Lay pipe with bells facing the direction of the laying except when making enclosures. 7. Buried pipe and fittings shall be polyethylene wrapped in accordance with AWWA C105. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 19-PAGE 6 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE JULY 2024 8. Provide a restrained push-on joint or mechanical joint ten feet from outside face of structures. C. Restrained Joints: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings,the CONTRACTOR shall use mechanical restrained pipe joints and fittings (no thrust blocks). The length of pipe requiring thrust restraint shall be calculated as described in Chapter 13 of AWWA M-11. 1. All joints requiring thrust restraint shall be welded (buried) in accordance with AWWA C-206 or restrained with mechanical systems (exposed). 2. CONTRACTOR shall design restrained joints based on the specified pressures as shown in the Piping Schedule or Drawings and in accordance with AWWA M-11. 3. The design for restrained joints, including the length necessary to resist the design thrust,for the embedded conditions,shall be performed and sealed by a Professional ENGINEER in the state where the Project is being constructed. 4. CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs for the design and will not receive reimbursement from the OWNER. 3.2 CLEANING A. All piping systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed and all construction debris or foreign material removed.The CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary connections, equipment, and the like for cleaning. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Sterilization:Clean and sterilized potable water lines in accordance with Section 40 0105. B. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. C. Hydrostatic Tests: Conduct testing in accordance with Section 40 0105. D. Prepare reports of testing activities. 3.4 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Piping Schedule is provided in the Drawings. END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 19-PAGE 7 OF 8 BID SET 0537-055-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 400S 19-PAGE 8 OF 8 BID SET 0S37-OS5-01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE JULY 2024 SECTION 40 05 31.13 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE AND CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PROCESS PIPE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section provides requirements for PVC and CPVC piping systems and PVC wire reinforced tubing for exposed and buried applications, pressure and gravity applications and includes: 1. Polyvinyl chloride(PVC)and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)pressure pipe and fittings in sizes 1/2-inch through 60-inch. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)pressure pipe and fittings. 3. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC),Schedule 40 and 80, pressure pipe and fittings. a. Polyvinyl Chloride wire reinforced pressure tubing and fittings(PVCT) B. Related Work: 1. Refer to Section 40 05 05 "Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods" for information regarding submittals; coordination; material delivery, handling, and storage; projection conditions; design requirements;other materials; installation of piping systems;field testing; and related work. 2. This Section contains material requirements for pipe,fittings, specials, and appurtenances for PVC and CPVC piping systems and PVC wire reinforced tubing system,as well as Part 1-General and Part 3-Execution additional requirements not specified in the above referenced Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Preselection Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Preselection Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Standards: 1. American Waterworks Association (AWWA): a. C110—Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-In.Through 48-In. (76 mm Through 1,219 mm) for Water b. C111- American National Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings C. C153—Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service d. C219—Standard for Bolted,Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe e. C900—Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4-in.—60-in. (100 mm-300 mm)for Water Distribution f. C907—Standard for Injection-Molded Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure Fittings, 4-in.Through 12-in. (100 mm Through 300 mm) g. F477—Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe. h. F1417—Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air i. F1668—Guide for Construction Procedures for Buried Plastic Pipe PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.13-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE AND CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PROCESS PIPE JULY2024 j. F1674—Test Method for Joint Restraint Products Used With PVC Pipe. 2. ASTM International, Inc. (ASTM): a. D1785—Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe,Schedule 40,80, and 120 b. D2241—Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)Pressure- Rated Pipe (SDR Series) C. D2466—Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 d. D2467—Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 e. D2564—Specifications for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems f. D2846—Specifications for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic and Hot-and Cold-water Distribution Systems g. D3034—Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Sewer Pipe and fittings h. F437—Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 80 i. F438—Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Fittings,Schedule 40 j. F439—Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC)Plastic Fittings, Schedule 80 k. F441—Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC)Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80 I. F442- Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) M. F477—Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets)forJoining Plastic Pipe n. F679—Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Large-Diameter Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings o. F794—Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter p. F891-Specification for Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe With a Cellular Core q. F493—Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings 3. National Science Foundation (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61—Drinking Water Systems Components—Health Effects 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS—NOT USED 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 40 05 05. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.13-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE AND CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PROCESS PIPE JULY2024 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE—NOT USED 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. PVC materials to be stored on site longer than 6 months shall be covered to protect the pipe against UV exposure. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS—NOT USED 1.8 WARRANTY—NOT USED PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS,4-INCH THROUGH 60-INCH, PRESSURE A. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Pressure class 80 psi-305 psi (as shown on Drawings or in Pipe Schedule),with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end. 1. Comply with UL 1285 for fire-service mains if indicated. 2. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900,with bell-and-spigot or double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 3. PVC Molded Fittings: AWWA C907, 235 psi,with bell-and-spigot or double-bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 4. Push-on-Joint,Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110,ductile-or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 5. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110,ductile-or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111,ductile-or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 6. PVC Integral Joint Restraint System: a. Integral joint restraint system located in the bell designed for integration into PVC pipe manufactured to AWWA C900 and performance when tested in accordance with ASTM F1674. b. Consists of a ductile iron casing that sits adjacent to the ASTM F477 gasket in the bell; casing is molded into the raceway of the bell during pipe belling; and a ductile iron grip-ring is inserted into the casing after factory hydro-testing. C. Available Manufacturer: BuIIDog"' Integral Joint Restrain System. 2.2 CPVC/PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS, 6-INCH AND SMALLER, PRESSURE A. PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 pipe,with plain ends for solvent-cemented joints or threaded ends conforming to ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40 or ASTM D 2467,Schedule 80,socket-type orthreaded fittings. Use Schedule 80 for all pipes to be threaded. Use Schedule 80 for all pipes to be threaded. B. CPVC Pipe and Fittings:ASTM F441, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 pipe,with plain ends for solvent-cemented joints or threaded ends conforming to ASTM F438, Schedule 40 or ASTM F439,Schedule 80,socket-type or threaded fittings. Use Schedule 80 for all pipes to be threaded. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.13-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE AND CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PROCESS PIPE JULY2024 C. Solvent Cement:As recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer conforming to D2564 for PVC piping systems and ASTM F493 for CPVC piping systems. 2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS,GRAVITY SEWER AND DRAIN A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D 3034,SDR 35,with bell-and- spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 and Larger: ASTM F 679,T-1 wall thickness,with bell- and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 40 05 05 for commonly used joining materials. B. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts,and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE WIRE-REINFORCED TUBING (HOSE) A. PVC Tubing: Herco-Flex wire-reinforced PVC hose for transport of hypochlorite and bisulfite under pressure used with compression fittings. 2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 1. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve,gaskets, end rings,and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined. a. Standard: AWWA C219. 2.7 CORROSION-PROTECTION A. Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings Lining-When ductile iron pipe fittings are used on PVC pipe in wastewater applications, including treated effluent,fittings shall be lined with an amine- cured Novalac epoxy with at least 20 percent by volume of ceramic quartz pigment,40 mils nominal DFT after the pipe has been solvent cleaned and abrasive blasted. Use Protecto 401 or approved equal. B. Encasement for Underground Metal Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 1. Form: Sheet or tube. 2. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness or high-density,cross- laminated PE film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness. 3. Color: Black. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER A. Contractor 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 40 05 05. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.13-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE AND CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PROCESS PIPE JULY2024 3.2 EXAMINATION—NOT USED 3.3 PREPARATION—NOT USED 3.4 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the installation requirements of Section 40 05 05. 3.5 FIELD/SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing: 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 0175 25. a. Low pressure air piping systems shall be tested to 15 psi above operating pressure unless otherwise indicated in the Pipe Schedule. b. High pressure air piping systems shall be tested to 1.5 times the operating pressure unless otherwise indicated in the Pipe Schedule. 3.6 SYSTEM STARTUP—NOT USED 3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES—NOT USED END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.13-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE AND CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PROCESS PIPE JULY2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 31.13-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE AND CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PROCESS PIPE JULY2024 SECTION 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Provisions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves: 1. Ball Valves, Bronze,2-1/2 inches and smaller. 2. Ball Valves, Ferrous-Alloy,2-1/2 inches and smaller. 3. Ball Valves, PVC,6 inches and smaller. 4. Ball Valves,Stainless Steel,12 inches and smaller. 5. Check Valves, Bronze 3-inch and smaller. 6. Check Valves, PVC,4 inches and smaller. 7. Check Valve, Iron Body,3-inch and smaller. 8. Diaphragm Valves, 1/2-inch and larger. 9. Backflow Preventer, Reduce Pressure. 10. Instrument Air Shutoff Valve. 11. Combination Balancing and Shutoff Valve. 12. Sampling valve. 13. Pressure Relief Valves. 14. Pressure Reducing Valves. 15. Solenoid Valves. 16. Valve appurtenances. B. Related Sections: 1. Refer to Section 40 05 05 "Piping Systems, Basic Materials and Methods"for information regarding correlation with piping system submittals; coordination; material delivery,handling,and storage; project conditions;design requirements; other materials; installation of piping systems; field testing; and related work. C. Valve and Related Lists: Lists are included for the convenience of the Engineer and Contractor and are not complete listings of all valves,devices, and material to be provided under this Contract.The Contractor agrees to prepare his own material and valve takeoff lists as necessary to meet the requirements of the Project. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Following are standard abbreviations used for valves: 1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 3. NRS: Non-rising stem. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 1 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 4. OS&Y:Outside screw and yoke. 5. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 6. SWP:Steam working pressure. 7. WOG:Water,oil and gas(Cold working pressure) 8. TFE:Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body,seating,and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Product Certificates: For each type of valve,from manufacturer. 1. Compliance with AWWA,ASTM,and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 1 Section 0178 23. D. Field Quality Control: Provide field testing and performance reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain all valves of the same style and type,along with the associated manual operators, from a single manufacturer. B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61,"Drinking Water Systems Components—Health Effects"for valve materials for potable-water service. C. Valve manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five years of experience in similar applications for size of valves furnished. References shall be provided upon request. D. Valve supplier shall maintain a complete stock of parts in the state where the Project is constructed or shall indicate that parts will be delivered upon 48-hour after receipt of request. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads,flange faces,grooves,and weld ends. 3. Set angle,gate,and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 2 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 3. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, those listed in the valve descriptions. 2.2 GENERAL A. Valve to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem, floor stand, worm and gear operator,operating nut, chain,wrench,valve boxes, and all accessories and related equipment for a complete operating system. Refer to P&ID Drawings for valves requiring limit switches, electric or pneumatic operators, and related controls. B. Comply with the following: 1. Service: Suitable for intended service,with valve pressure and temperature ratings not less than indicated and as required for the system pressures and temperatures. 2. Valve Sizes:Same size as connection to upstream piping, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Valve Ends(Unless otherwise specified): a. Compatible with adjacent piping or equipment connections. b. Bronze Valves:2-inch and Smaller;threaded or soldered ends depending on application. C. Ferrous valves,3-inch and Smaller:Threaded ends. d. Ferrous Valves,3-inch and Larger: 1) Exposed Valves: Flanged ends. 2) Buried Valves: Mechanical joint ends. C. Valve Actuators: 1. Operator sized to operate valve for full range of pressures and velocities. 2. Open by turning counterclockwise,close by turning clockwise, unless otherwise specified. 3. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves,of size and mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation"Article in Part 3. 4. Gear Drive Operator: For quarter-turn valves 8-inch and larger. 5. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 6. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves 6-inch and smaller. 7. Wrench: For valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with one wrench for every 10 valves,for each size square plug head. D. Valves in Insulated Piping: Valves shall have 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Gate Valves: Shall be rising-stem type. 2. Ball Valves:Shall have extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 3 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 material, protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation, and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. 3. Butterfly Valves: Shall have extended necks. E. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves,ASME B16.5 for steel valves and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves. F. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606. G. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle,check,gate,and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. H. Threaded: With threads according to ASME 131.20.1. I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. J. Factory assembled valve with operator,actuator and accessories. K. Fasteners for flanged valves shall be as follows: Comply with pipe joining material requirements of Division 40 Section 40 05 01. L. Obtain all valves of the same type and materials of construction with associated manual operators from a single manufacturer. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Brass and bronze valve components and accessories shall be made with dezincification- resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy(brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. B. Approved alloys are of the following ASTM designations: 1. B61, B62, B98 (Alloy No. C65100,C65500,or C66100), B127, B139 (Alloy No. C51000), B584 (Alloy UNS No. C90300 or C94700), B164, and B194. 2. Stainless steel,ANSI Type 316 may be substituted for bronze. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Interior Lining and Coating: 1. Interior ferrous metal surfaces of valve body,stem, actuator,and related components shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA C550 "Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for valves and Hydrants", unless otherwise specified. 2. Epoxy coating material shall be NSF approved for use in potable water. 3. Either two-part liquid material or heat-activated (fusion) material except only heat- activated material if specified as "fusion" or"fusion bonded" epoxy. 4. Minimum 12-mil dry film thickness except where limited by valve operating tolerances. Epoxy coating shall be spark tested at the valve manufacturer's factory in accordance with AWWA C550 to verify uniform thickness.A certified test report on valve manufacturer's letterhead shall be supplied for each valve furnished. 5. Color to match adjacent piping.Coating application to be accomplished in accordance with Division 9. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 4 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 6. Safety isolation and lockout valves with handles, handwheels,or chain wheels"Safety Yellow." 7. Exposed valves,other than above, paint handles, handwheels,or chain wheels"Red." 8. Material in contact with water shall conform to NSF/ANSI 61. B. Exterior Coating 1. Manufacturer shall apply shop primer coating to valves and bonnet assemblies in the factory prior to delivery with product described in Section 09 9100. 2.5 BALL VALVE A. Bronze Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110 and have bronze body complying with ASTM B 584, except for Class 250 which shall comply with ASTM B 61,full-depth ASME B1.20.1 threaded or solder ends, and blowout-proof stems. 1. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: Chrome-plated bronze ball and bronze stem and; reinforced TFE seats; threaded body packnut design (no threaded stem designs allowed) with adjustable stem packing, solder or threaded ends; and 150 psig SWP 600 prig CWP rating. a. Manufacturers: 1) Crane Valve Group. 2) NIBCO. 3) Milwaukee Valve. 2. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: Type 316 stainless- steel vented ball and stem, reinforced TFE seats, threaded body packnut design (no threaded stem designs allowed)with adjustable stem packing, soldered or threaded ends; 150 psig SWP and 600-psig CWP ratings. a. Manufacturers: 1) Crane Valve Group. 2) NIBCO. 3) Milwaukee Valve. B. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valve,3-inch and Smaller: 1. Split-body construction,ASTM A-216 Type WCB,carbon-steel body;ASTM A-351,Type CF8M vented stainless-steel ball; and ASTM A-276,Type 316 stainless-steel stem; carbon-filled TFE seats; 285 psig CWP rating. 2. Fire rated according to API 607 (4th edition); and having flanged ends and blowout- proof stem. 3. Conforms to MSS SP-72. 4. Manufactures: a. Crane Valve Group. b. NIBCO. C. Milwaukee Valve. C. PVC/CPVC Ball Valve,2 inches and Smaller: 1. True union type manufactured to ATSM F 1970 and constructed from PVC Type 1, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 12454 or CPVC Type IV,ASTM D 1784 Cell PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 5 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 Classification 23447; 0-rings shall be EPDM or Viton°; ball seats of PTFE; handles of polypropylene;supplied with solvent-welded or threaded ends;approved for potable water service; rated at 150 psi at 73 degrees F; and shall be full port and block flow in both directions. 2. Manufacturer: a. ASAHI-America. b. Hayward. C. NIBCO. d. Spears. D. PVC/CPVC Ball Valve,3 inches through 6 inches: 1. True union type manufactured to ASTM F 1970 and constructed from PVC Type 1, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 12454 or CPVC Type IV,ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 23447; 0-rings shall be EPDM; ball seats of PTFE; handles of polypropylene; supplied with solvent-welded connections or flanged ends drilled to ASME B16.4; approved for potable water service; provide a pressure relief hole drilled on the low pressure side of ball; rated at 150 psi at 73 degrees F; and shall be full port and block flow in both directions. 2. Manufacturers: a. ASAHI-America. b. NIBCO. C. Spears. E. Stainless Steel Ball Valve, 1/2-inch to 2 inches: 1. Three-piece body, full port, vented ball, block-out proof stem, Type 316 stainless steel trim, reinforced TFE seat and seal,threaded ends, lever operator, rated 1000-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-110. 2. Manufacturers: a. Contromatics. b. Crane Valve Group C. NIBCO. F. Stainless Steel Ball Valve,3 inches to 12 inches: 1. Unibody design, blowout-proof stem,Type 316 stainless steel trim, mounting pad,fire safe,vented ball,flanged ends, rated 275-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-72 and MSS SP-25. 2. Manufacturers: a. NIBCO. 2.6 CHECK VALVES A. PVC/CPVC Check Valve,4 inches and Smaller: 1. True union type manufactured to ATSM F 1970 and constructed from PVC Type 1, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 12454 or CPVC Type IV,ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 23447; 0-rings and seals shall be EPDM or Viton°; ball seats of PTFE or standard 0-ring type; approved for potable water service; having replaceable valve PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 6 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 components; and rated 150-psi at 70 degrees F. 2. Manufacturers: a. ASAHI-America. b. NIBCO. C. Spears. B. Class 125 Bronze Check Valve,3-inch and Smaller: 1. Bronze, horizontal swing, regrinding type, Y-pattern, renewable seat and disc, 2-inch and smaller rated 125-psi SWP and 200-pound CWP, size 2-1/2-inch and 3-inch rated 150-psi SWP and 300-CWP, Conforms to MSS SP-80. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane b. NIBCO C. Powell,Wm. Co. C. Class 125 Iron Body Check Valve,3-inch and Smaller: 1. Class 125, iron body, horizontal swing, regrinding type, Y-pattern, renewable seat and disc, 2-inch and smaller rated 125-psi SWP and 200-pound CWP,size 2-1/2-inch and 3- inch rated 150-psi SWP and 300-CWP, Conforms to MSS SP-71. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane b. NIBCO C. Powell,Wm. Co. 2.7 DIAPHRAGM VALVES A. Diaphragm Valves, 1/2-Inch and Larger: 1. Type: Weir type, polypropylene-lined cast iron body,ANSI B16.1 flanged ends,manual operator indicating rising stem type with handwheel, diaphragm neoprene, in accordance with MSS-SP-88, Category B. 2. Manufactures: a. ITT Engineered Valves. b. Saunders Valve, Inc. B. Diaphragm Valves, 1/2-Inch and Larger: 1. Type:Straight-through type, polypropylene-lined cast iron body,ANSI B16.1 flanged ends, manual operator indicating rising stem type with handwheel, diaphragm neoprene, in accordance with MSS-SP-88, Category B. 2. Manufacturers: a. ITT Engineered Valves. b. Saunders Valve, Inc. C. Diaphragm Valve, Plastic Body,1/2-Inch and Larger: 1. Type: Weir Type, constructed from CPVC Type IV, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 23447; multiple layers of EPDM, PTFE, PVDF, or Viton°; flanged end connections; built-in position indicator with polypropylene handwheel; reinforced polypropylene PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 7 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 bonnet,stainless steel hardware. 2. Pressure Rating: a. 1/2-inch through 4-inch: 150-psi at 73 degrees F. b. 6-inch: 100-psi at 73 degrees F. C. 8-inch: 75-psi at 73 degrees F 3. Manufacturer: a. ASAHI America. b. Spears. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND RELATED ITEMS A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: 1. Description: Two check valves, independent relief between the valves; NRS isolation gate valves or ball valves,testing cock in accordance with AWWA C511, rated 175-psi CWP, meet requirements of USC Cross connection Control Laboratory. 2. Manufacturers: a. Cla-Val Company, Model RP Series b. FEBCO; Model 825Y, 825YD. C. Watts 909-QT RPZ B. Instrument Air Shutoff Valve: 1. Stainless steel body and ball, nylon handle. 2. Manufacturer and Product: a. Whitey;Series 40. b. Imperial Eastman; Series 200. C. Sampling Valve: 1. Description: Insertion type,Type 304 stainless steel bonnet, Type 316 stainless steel piston and stem,threaded end connections, hand crank, rated 600-psig CWP. 2. Manufactures and Products: a. Strahman; SV700. D. Pressure Relief Valves: 1. Wall Type,4-Inch, and 6-Inch: a. Description: Hydrostatic pressure relief for side wall installation in structures and basins. Valve shall be of the 100 offset with offset single pivoted hinge. b. Materials: Body and flap gate, either cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or cast bronze, ASTM B584,Alloy 844,with integral ANSI 125-lb flange; bronze trim, neoprene,ASTM D2000, rubber seat either retained by cast iron retainer plate or mounted in a dovetail type groove; hinge arms cast integrally with cover and attached utilizing a stainless-steel spring pin. C. Provide mating cast iron wall pipe shall be flange by plain end with internal perforated plate. d. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Clow Valve Co.; F-1494. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 8 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 2) Waterman; PRB-14. 3) Trumbull Industries, Inc.; (1)367-1564 2. Floor Type,4-Inch and 6-Inch: a. Description: Hydrostatic pressure relief valve designed for installing in the bottom of concrete structures and basins. b. Materials: 1) Body,cover,and grate shall be either stainless steel,type 316, cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or cast bronze,ASTM B584,Alloy 844. Provide neoprene,ASTM D2000,seat or seal either bonded to cover mating with bronze seat in body or mounted in groove in cover. 2) Valve shall have either an integral PVC receiver or cast-iron receiver, including a water stop, to accept a plastic pipe extension which shall be field cut to desired length. Provide either a cast iron or cast bronze debris screen. 3) Manufacturers and Products: 1) Clow Valve Co.; F-1493-T. 2) Waterman; PRF-15. 3) Trumbull Industries, Inc.; (1)367-1544 2.9 SELF-CONTAINED AUTOMATIC VALVES A. Pressure-Reducing Valve, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller. 1. Type: Direct diaphragm operated,spring controlled,bronze body. 2. Size(s)and Rating(s):As shown in valve Schedule. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Fisher;Type 75A. b. Mueller;Series H-93 10. B. Pressure-Reducing Valve,3 inches and Larger: 1. Function: a. Automatically reduces a higher inlet pressure to a steady lower downstream pressure, regardless of changing flow rate and/or varying inlet pressure. b. Pilot-operated regulator capable of holding downstream pressure to a pre- determined limit.When downstream pressure exceeds the pressure setting of the control pilot,the main valve and pilot valve close bubble tight. 2. Main Valve: Hydraulically operated,single diaphragm-actuated, pilot controlled,globe valve, consisting of: a. Ductile iron,ASTM A536,or cast steel,ASTM A216-WCB, body and bolted cover. All working parts shall be accessible without removal of the valve from the line. b. Disc Retainer and Diaphragm Washer:Cast Iron. C. Trim: Disc guide,seat and cover bearing, bronze or stainless steel. d. Disc: Buna-N rubber. e. Stem,Nut and Spring:Stainless steel. f. End Connections: Flange,150 ANSI. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 9 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 g. Flows: See Valve Schedule. 3. Pilot Control System: Direct-acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, normally open, diaphragm valve,designed to permit flow when pressure is less than the spring setting. a. Pilot Control: Bronze,ASTM B62. b. Trim:Type 303 stainless steel. C. Disc: Buna-N rubber. d. Adjustment Ranges:See Valve Schedule. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. CLA-VAL;Model 90 b. Bermad; Model 720 C. GA Industries; C. Solenoid Valve,2-Inch and Smaller: 1. Type: Two-way internal pilot operated diaphragm type, brass body, resilient seat suitable for air or water,solenoid coil molded epoxy, NEMA Class A, 120 volts ac,60- Hz, unless otherwise indicated. Solenoid enclosure NEMA 250,Type 4, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Sizes and normal position (OPEN or CLOSED)as indicated. 3. Minimum operating pressure differential no greater than 5-psig,maximum operating pressure differential not less than 125-psig. 4. Manufacturers: a. ASCO b. Skinner D. Ball Valves, Electric Operated, 2-Inch and Smaller: 1. Type: Continuous duty rated true union ball valve with manual override and NEMA 4X nonmetallic housing over actuator, closure time 6 seconds for 90 degrees cycle. 2. Materials. a. Body: PVC or CPVC to match piping, minimum pressure rating 230-psi. b. Seals: EPDM or Vitron as applicable for intended service. C. Motor: Heavy duty gear train, reversible motor with thermal overload switch, 120-volt, 60-Hz, with position indicator. 3. Manufactures and Products: a. GF Model 346 ball valve with Type EA20 actuator and Type 126 bracket. 2.10 APPURTENANCES A. Manual Operators: 1. Provide manual operators on valves, except those which are equipped with power actuated operators or designed for automatic operation. a. Operator force not to exceed 40 pounds under any operating conditions, including initial breakaway.Gear reduction operator when force exceeds 40 pounds. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 51-PAGE 10 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 b. Operator self-locking or equipped with self-locking devices. C. Position indicator on quarter-turn valves d. Worm and gear operators one-piece design worm-gears of gear bronze material.Worm hardened alloy steel with thread ground and polished.Traveling nut type operators threaded steel reach rods with internally bronze or ductile iron nut. 2. Exposed Operator: a. Galvanized and painted handwheels. b. Lever operators allowed on valves 6 inches and smaller. C. Cranks on gear operators. d. Chain wheel operator with tie backs,extension stem,floor stands,and other accessories to permit operation from normal operation level. e. Valve handles to take a padlock and handwheels a chain and padlock. f. Handwheels to comply with requirements of AWWA C500,Section 3.15 "Wrench Nuts and Handwheels." 3. Buried Valves:Wrench Nuts: a. Buried Valves: 2-1/2-Inch and Smaller: Provide cross handle for operation by a forked key. b. Buried Valves, 3-Inch and Larger: Provide wrench nuts on buried valves,on valves which are to be operated through floor boxes and where shown on Drawings. 1) Comply with requirements of AWWA C500,Section 3.15"Wrench Nuts and Handwheels." 2) Furnish no less than two operating keys for operation of wrench nut operating valves. C. Provide concrete pad,2-foot square by 6-inch thick concrete around valve box at ground surface. 4. Design buried service valves for quarter-turn valves to withstand 450 foot-pounds of input torque at the fully open or FULLY CLOSED positions,grease packed and gasketed to withstand a submersion in water to 10-psi. 5. Buried valves shall have a valve box. Valve box and bonnet shall be cast iron. All components of shaft extensions shall be Type 316 stainless steel including nut shaft, shaft housing and guides. 6. Extension stem diameter shall be 1-inch or diameter of valve shaft,whichever is greater. 7. Stem guides made of cast iron with bronze bushings with adjustable offset. Provide stem guides at 5-foot intervals. B. Chain Wheel Operator: 1. Provide for valves having a centerline six feet or more above the floor, unless otherwise noted. 2. Chain Wheel and Guide: Handwheel direct mounted,with galvanized or cadmium- plated chain. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 11 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 C. Operating Stands: 1. Provide fabricated steel or cast-iron operating stands in locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Support handwheel or operator approximately 36 inches above finish floor. 3. Handwheel diameter will not be less than 8 inches. 4. Provide sleeve made for opening in floor beneath each operating stand. 5. Provide suitable thrust bearing in each operating stand to carry weight of extension stem. D. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast iron,extension sleeve type,suitable for depth of cover required by Drawings. 2. Not less than 5 inches in diameter and minimum thickness at any point of 3/16-inch; provide valve boxes with suitable cast iron bonnets, bases and covers. 3. Provide covers;cast thereon an appropriate name designating service for which valve is used. 4. When located in traffic areas, designed for H-20 loadings. 5. Set valves and valve boxes plumb; place each valve box directly over valve it serves, with top of box flush with finished grade. 6. As shown on Drawings, provide concrete pad around valve surface box at ground surface. E. Extension Stem: 1. Provide extension stem when depth of valve is more than 3-feet below finish grade. 2. Provide extension stem with wrench nut locating the wrench nut 6 inches below ground surface and/or box cover. 3. Extension stem shall locate wrench nut in floor box. F. Floor Box and Stem: Plain type for support of non-rising type stem, complete with stem, operating nut,and stem guide brackets. Provide stainless steel guides with adjustable offset. Spaced such that stem L/R ratio does not exceed 200. Anchor bots to be Type 316 stainless steel. G. Torque Tube: Where operator for quarter-turn valve is located on floor stand,furnish extension stem torque tube of type properly sized for maximum torque capacity of valve. H. Identification: Provide valve identification tags in accordance with Division 10 Section 10 90 00 and as specified in the various Valve Schedules and as shown on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness,freedom from foreign matter,and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 12 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully close. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size,that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install valves,floorstands,valve boxes,and appurtenances in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install valves and operators or actuators to provide for ease of access and operation. 3. Install buried valve. B. Flanged Ends: 1. Bolt holes shall straddle vertical centerline of pipe. 2. Clean flange faces insert gasket and bolts and tighten nuts progressively and uniformly. C. Threaded Ends: 1. Clean threads by wire brushing or swabbing. 2. Apply joint compound. D. Valve Installation: 1. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 40 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties. 2. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. 3. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Provide access doors in finished walls and plaster ceilings for valve access. 4. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. a. Butterfly valves will be installed with stem horizontal to allow support forthe disc and the cleaning action of the disc. b. Unless otherwise noted, install operating stem vertical in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above finished floor. C. Unless otherwise noted, install operating stem horizontal in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevation between 4 feet 6 inches and 7 feet above finish floor. 5. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 6. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: a. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. b. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. C. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 13 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 7. Butterfly valves shall be installed with stems horizontal. 8. If a plug valve seat position is not shown, locate as follows: a. Horizontal Flow:The flow shall produce an"unseating" pressure;the plug shall open into the top half of valve. b. Vertical Flow: Install seat in the highest portion of the valve. 9. Install line size ball valve and union upstream of each solenoid valve, in-line flow switch,or other in-line electrical device,excluding magnetic flowmeters,for isolation during maintenance. 10. Provide union or flanged connection within two feet of each threaded end valve unless valve can be otherwise easily removed from piping. 11. Install safety isolation valves on compressed air lines which have stored energy in accordance with latest OSHA requirements. E. Valve Operators: 1. Manual Operators: a. Provide manual operators on valves, including those which are equipped with power or pneumatic actuated operators or designed for automatic operation. b. Unless otherwise specified in the various valve sections, provide handwheel or lever operators for valves, 6-inch and smaller, and gear operators for valves, fl- inch and larger. 2. Buried Service: a. 2-1/2-inch and smaller: b. 3-inch and Larger(not installed in Valve Vault): 1) Provide stainless steel shaft extension and wrench nut. Minimum extension stem diameter shall be 1-inch or diameter of valve shaft, whichever is larger. 2) Provide valve box, bonnet and cover. C. Wrench nut, handwheel and gear operator shall comply with the requirements of applicable AWWA Standards. d. As shown on the Drawings, buried Valves, 8-inch and larger, shall rest on concrete pad. Pad shall extend full width of trench,from back-to-back of hub or flange. 3. Above Ground Service: a. 3-inch and Larger:gear operators all valves 8-inch and larger, unless otherwise noted. b. Chain Wheel Operators: Install chain wheel operators on valves 4-inch and larger and more than 84 inches above floor, unless otherwise noted. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation. Where chains hang in normally travel areas, use appropriate "L"type tie-back anchors. 4. Electric and pneumatic operators and actuators shall comply with the requirements of the applicable Division 40 operator section. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform Tests and Inspections: PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 51-PAGE 14 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 1. Valve maybe either tested while testing pipelines,or as a separate step. 2. Test that valve opens and closes smoothly with operating pressure on one side and atmospheric pressure on the other, in both directions for two-way valve and applications. 3. Count and record the number of turns to open and close valve; account for any discrepancies with manufacturer's data. 4. Set,verify, and record set pressures for all relief and regulating valves. 5. Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing and as specified under Manufacturer's services. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and valve installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Provide in accordance with Division 1. B. For every five pneumatic or electrically operated valves or gates, or less, provided on the Project,a qualified manufacturers' representative shall be present at the Project site for the minimum person-days,travel excluded, as indicated: 1/2 Inspection of valve installation, functional testing, and certification valve assembly has been installed and tested in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and these specifications. 1/2 Plant startup. 1/2 Training of Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance. C. Startup Services; Comply with the requirements of Section 0175 25. D. Training of Owner's Personnel: Comply with the requirements of Section 0179 00. 3.5 VALVE SCHEDULE(NOT USED) END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 51-PAGE 15 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 51-PAGE 16 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES JULY 2024 SECTION 40 05 52 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves: 1. Check Valves, PVC,4 inches and smaller. 2. Class 125 Swing Check Valve, Iron Body,3-inch and smaller. 3. Double Disc Check Valve,2-inch through 54-inches. 4. Gate Valves, Bronze,3-inch and smaller. 5. Gate Valve, Iron Body,3-inch and smaller. 6. Globe Valves, Bronze, 3-inch and smaller. 7. Globe Valves,Cast Iron, 10-inch and smaller. 8. Angle valve, Bronze,3 inches and smaller. 9. Angle Valve, Iron body,8-inch and smaller. 10. Angle Type Hose Valve. 11. Angle Pattern Hose Valve. 12. Backflow Preventer, Reduce Pressure. 13. Instrument Air Shutoff Valve. 14. Gauge Cock 15. Corporation Stop. 16. Combination Balancing and Shutoff Valve. 17. SampIingvalve. 18. Shear Gate Valve. 19. Mud valves. 20. Pressure Relief Valves. 21. Spring Controlled Surge Relief Valves,2-inch through 16-inches 22. Flap Gate. 23. Telescoping Valves. 24. Pressure Reducing Valves. 25. Elastomeric Check Valves 26. Valve appurtenances. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Provisions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Definitions 1. Following are standard abbreviations used for valves: a. CWP:Cold working pressure. b. EDPM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 1 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 C. NRS: Nonrising stem. d. OS&Y:Outside screw and yoke. e. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. f. SWP:Steam working pressure. g. WOG:Water, oil and gas(Cold working pressure) h. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. C. Related Sections 1. Refer to Section 40 05 05 "Piping System, Basic Materials and Methods"for information regarding correlation with piping system submittals; coordination; material delivery, handling,and storage; project conditions;design requirements; other materials; installation of piping systems; field testing; and related work. 2. Refer to Section 40 05 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves"for valves not covered in this Section or the Sections listed below 3. Refer to Section 40 50 57.23 "Electric Motor Actuators." 4. Refer to Section 40 05 61 "Gate Valves"for AWWA gate valves,3-inch and larger,and for iron body gate valves, 3 inches through 24 inches. 5. Refer to Section 40 05 62"Plug Valves"for eccentric plug valves. 6. Refer to Section 40 05 64"Butterfly Valves"for butterfly valves D. Valve and Related Lists: Lists are included for the convenience of the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR and are not complete listings of all valves, devices, and material to be provided under this Contract.The CONTRACTOR agrees to prepare his own material and valve takeoff lists as necessary to meet the requirements of the Project. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS—NOT USED 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated, include body,seating,and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Product Certificates: For each type of valve,from manufacturer. 1. Compliance with AWWA,ASTM,and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 0178 23. D. Field Quality Control: Provide field testing and performance reports. E. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for all indicated products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain all valves of the same style and type,along with the associated manual operators, from a single manufacturer. B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61,"Drinking Water Systems Components—Health Effects"for valve PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 2 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 materials for potable-water service. C. Valve manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five years of experience is similar applications for size of valves furnished. References shall be provided upon request. D. Valve supplier shall maintain a complete stock of parts in the state where the Project is constructed or shall indicate that parts will be delivered upon 48-hour after receipt of request. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads,flange faces,grooves,and weld ends. 3. Set angle,gate,and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 3. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed in the valve descriptions. 2.2 GENERAL A. Valve to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem, floor stand, worm and gear operator,operating nut, chain,wrench,valve boxes,and all accessories and related equipment for a complete operating system. Refer to P&ID Drawings for valves requiring limit switches, electric or pneumatic operators, and related controls. B. Comply with the following: 1. Service: Suitable for intended service and chemical compatibility,with valve pressure and temperature ratings not less than indicated and as required for the system pressures and temperatures. 2. Valve Sizes:Same size as connection to upstream piping, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Valve Ends(Unless otherwise specified): a. Compatible with adjacent piping or equipment connections. b. Bronze Valves:2-inch and Smaller;threaded or soldered ends depending on application. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 3 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 C. Ferrous valves,3-inch and Smaller:Threaded ends. d. Ferrous Valves, 3-inch and Larger: 1) Exposed Valves: Flanged ends. 2) Buried Valves: Mechanical joint ends. C. Valve Operator: 1. Operator sized to operate valve for full range of pressures and velocities. 2. Open by turning counterclockwise,clockwise to close,unless otherwise specified. 3. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves,of size and mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article in Part 3. 4. Gear Drive Operator: For quarter-turn valves 8-inch and larger. 5. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 6. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves 6-inch and smaller. 7. Wrench: For valves with square heads. Furnish OWNER with one wrench for every 10 valves,for each size square plug head. D. Valves in Insulated Piping: Valves shall have 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Gate Valves: Shall be rising-stem type. 2. Ball Valves: Shall have extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation, and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. 3. Butterfly Valves: Shall have extended necks. E. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves,ASME B16.5 for steel valves and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves. F. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606. G. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check,gate,and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. H. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. J. Factory assemble valve with operator,actuator and accessories. K. Fasteners for flanged valves shall be as follows: Comply with pipe joining material requirements of Section 40 05 01. L. Obtain all valves of the same type and materials of construction with associated manual operators from a single manufacturer 2.3 MATERIALS A. Brass and bronze valve components and accessories shall be made with dezincification- resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy(brass)containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 4 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 B. Approved alloys are of the following ASTM designations: 1. B61, B62, B98(Alloy No. C65100,C65500,or C66100), B127, B139 (Alloy No. C51000), B584 (Alloy UNS No. C90300 or C94700), B164, and B194. 2. Stainless steel,ANSI Type 316 may be substituted for bronze. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Interior Lining and Coating: 1. Interior ferrous metal surfaces of valve body,stem, actuator,and related components shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA C550 "Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for valves and Hydrants", unless otherwise specified. 2. Epoxy coating material shall be NSF approved for use in potable water. 3. Either two-part liquid material or heat-activated (fusion) material except only heat- activated material if specified as "fusion" or"fusion bonded" epoxy. 4. Colorto match adjacent piping.Coating application to be accomplished in accordance with Section 09 9100 "Painting." 5. Safety isolation and lockout valves with handles, handwheels,or chainwheels"Safety Yellow." 6. Exposed valves,other than above, paint handles, handwheels,or chain wheels"Red." 7. Manufacturer shall apply shop primer coating on valves in the factory prior to delivery with product described in Section 09 9100. CONTRACTOR shall apply finish coating with product described in Section 09 9100. 8. Manufacturer shall apply shop primer coating on bonnets in the factory prior to delivery with product described in Section 09 9100. CONTRACTOR shall apply finish coating with product described in Section 09 9100. Coating for submerged valves shall apply to the submerged section of the bonnet plus V-0" above water surface. Coatings for exterior valves shall be applied to the remaining section of the bonnet. 2.5 CLASS 125 SWING CHECK VALVE, IRON BODY A. Refer to Section 40 05 51. 2.6 DOUBLE DISC CHECK VALVE A. Double Disc Check Valve,2-Inches through 54-Inches: 1. Wafer style,spring-loaded,two-piece Type 316 stainless steel disc,Type 316 stainless steel shaft,Type 316 stainless steel torsion spring and have an integrally molded elastomer seat vulcanized to the body. 2. Valve body shall be cast iron for 125-psi rating and cast steel for 150-psi rating,of the lugged wafer style. 3. Valve shall be designed to fit between ANSI flanges and valves,5-inches and larger, shall be fitted with a lifting eye bolt for installation purposes. 4. Valve,2-inches through 12-inches, rated 250-psi CWP,and 14-inches through 54- inches, rated 150-psi CWP. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. APCO;Series 9000 PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 5 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 b. Crane Valve Group; Duo-Chek II C. Henry Pratt; Series 740 d. Valmatic 2.7 PVC/CPVC BALL CHECK VALVE,4 INCHES AND SMALLER: A. True union type manufactured to ASTM F-1970 and constructed from PVC Type 1,ASTM D- 1784 Cell Classification 12454 or CPVC Type IV, ASTM D-1784 Cell Classification 23447; 0- rings and seals shall be EPDM or Viton°; ball seats of PTFE or standard 0-ring type; approved for potable water service; having replaceable valve components; and rated 150-psi at 70 degrees F. B. Manufacturers: 1. ASAHI-America. 2. Hayward 3. NIBCO. 4. Georg Fischer. 2.8 GATE VALVES A. Gate Valve,4 Inches and Larger: Comply with the requirements of Section 40 05 61. B. Gate Valve, Bronze,3-inch and Smaller: 1. Class 150 bronze construction, union bonnet,solid wedge disc, non-rising stem with threaded ends or soldered ends depending on application, rated for 150-psi SWP, 300-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-80,Type 1. 2. Use rising stem gate valves when piping is to be insulated. 3. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group. b. NIBCO. C. Milwaukee Valve. C. Gate Valve, Iron Body,3-Inch and Smaller: 1. Class 125, iron body with bronze trim,tapered solid wedge disc, renewable bronze seat rings, non-asbestos packing, and gaskets, bolted bonnet,threaded ends, rated 125-psi SWP, 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS-SP-70 Type 1. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group. b. NIBCO. C. Milwaukee Valve. 2.9 GLOBE VALVES A. Globe Valves:Class 125 Bronze Globe Valve,3-inch and Smaller: 1. All bronze, screw-in bonnet, integral seat, renewable disc, and seat,TFE seat, threaded or soldered ends depending on application, rated 125-psi SWP and 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-80. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 6 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group. b. NIBCO. C. Milwaukee Valve. B. Class 150 Bronze Globe Valve,3-inch and Smaller: 1. All bronze, union bonnet, integral seat, renewable disc and seat, threaded or soldered ends depending on application,TFE disc, rated 150-psi SWP, 300-psi CWP. Conform to MSS SP-80. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group. b. NIBCO. C. Milwaukee Valve. C. Class 125 Iron Body Globe Valve,2-inch to 10-inch: 1. Cast iron, bolted bonnet, renewable seat and disc, bronze mounted, bronze disc and seat ring,flanged ends, rated 125-psi SWP and 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-85. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group b. NIBCO D. Class 125 Bronze Angle Valve,3 inches and Smaller: 1. All bronze, union bonnet,integral seat, renewable seat, and disc,TFE disc,threaded or soldered ends depending on application, rated 125-psi SWP, 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-80. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group b. NIBCO E. Class 150 Bronze Angle Valve,3 inches and Smaller: 1. All bronze, union bonnet,integral seat, renewable seat, and disc,TFE disc,threaded ends, rated 150-psi SWP, 300-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-80. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group b. NIBCO C. Powell,Wm. Co. F. Class 125 Iron Body Angle Valve,2-inch to 8-inch: 1. Cast iron, bolted bonnet, renewable seat and disc, bronze mounted, bronze disc and seat ring,flanged ends, rated 125-psi SWP and 200-psi CWP. Conforms to MSS SP-85. 2. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve Group b. NIBCO C. Powell,Wm. Co. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 7 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 G. Angle Type Hose Valve: 1. Bronze, angle sillcock type body,threaded or soldered inlet as applicable, 1/2-inch or 3/4-inch male hose thread outlet, rated 125-psi CWP. 2. Manufacturer: a. NIBCO H. Angle Type Hose Valve: 1. 3/4-inch NPT female inlet,3/4-inch male hose thread outlet, heavy rough brass body, rated 125-psi CWP, lockshield bonnet, removable handle, atmospheric vacuum breaker conforming to CSA and IAPMO code. 2. ACORN Engineering Co. a. Mounting on structure walls: 1) 8120,bent nose with flange,without vacuum breaker. 2) 8121,bent nose with flange,with vacuum breaker. b. Installation on stand pipes: 1) 8131, pipe and pedestal mounted valve located above 6 inches,straight nose. 2) 8136, pipe and pedestal mounted valve lower than 6 inches, inverted nose. I. Angle Pattern Hose Valve, 1-inch through 3-inch: 1. All-bronze, screwed ends, inside screw, rising stem,TFE disc, outlet of cast brass NHT by NPT, male by male, nipple adapter with hexagonal wrench feature, brass cap with chain, rated 300-psi CWP. 2. Manufacturer and Product: a. Crane Valve Group;7TF and 17TF b. James Jones Co.;J-300 Series, angle fire hydrant valve with NPT inlet and NHT outlet. C. ITT Kennedy; Figure 936 angle fire hydrant valve with NPT inlet and NHT outlet. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND RELATED ITEMS A. Reduced Pressure backflow Preventer: 1. Refer to Section 40 05 51. B. Instrument Air Shutoff Valve: 1. Refer to Section 40 OS S1. C. Gauge Cock: 1. Description: 1/4-inch bronze body, hexagon end pattern,tee head, male ends, rated 125-psi CWP. 2. Manufacture and Product: United brass Works; Figure 973. D. Corporation Stop: 1. AWWA C800 type,tapered threaded inlet,except when connecting to tapped fittings which require IPS tapered threads, outlet compression connection or IPS threads to suit connecting pipe, stop 1-inch and smaller rated 100-psi, larger stop rated 80-psi. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 8 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 2. Manufacturers: a. Ford Meter Box Co. b. Mueller Co. E. Combination Balancing and Shutoff Valve, 2 inches and Smaller for Heating,Chilled, and Cooling Water Service: 1. Description: Non-lubricated plug valve, cast iron or semi-steel body,wrench lever manual operator, EPT resilient plug facing,adjustable memory stop,threaded ends, rated 175-psi CWP. 2. Manufacturer: a. DeZurick F. Sampling Valve: a. Refer to Section 40 05 51. G. Shear Gate Valve: 1. Description: Full opening,circular port,standard frame, unless otherwise shown.Cast iron body, ASTM A126, Class B,with integral flange, drilled for mounting; cast iron gate, STM A126, Class B, replaceable wedges,two per gate, with adjustable stop; bronze trim,Type 319 stainless steel bolts and hardware. 2. Manufactures and Products: a. Clow Valve Co.; F3000 H. Mud Valves: 1. Description: Heavy-duty flanged type designed to provide positive seal under both seating and unseating head conditions. a. Floor Box and Position Indicator: 1) A position indicator shall be provided which shall be installed in a cast iron floor box. The floor box shall be designed with internal flat sides to prevent rotation of the position indicator during operations. The adapter shall be provided with a bronze bushing to support and center the extension stem. A non-corrosive debris shield shall be furnished and installed into the cast iron floor box. The debris shield shall be designed to fit tightly inside of the cast iron floor box. The top scale plate of the position indicator shall have marking representing the number of turns, contain the word "Closed" and a directional arrow. The markings shall be permanently recessed,embossed,or engraved in the scale plate. The use of adhesive labels is not acceptable. The"open" line shall be marked on a transparent polycarbonate window,which will be field adjusted to the exact number of turns of each valve. The position indicator shall be sealed with 2 Neoprene 0-rings. The position indicator shall not admit more than 0.5 ounce of water, after 7 days of submergence.The position indicator shall be cycle tested by the manufacturer to insure successful operation of minimum 1 million revolutions. Drop testing shall be performed by dropping an 18#weight from 4 feet,to insure accidental impact will not crack or damage the position indicator. The manufacturer shall support submergence, cycle, and impact testing with a report from PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 9 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 an independent test laboratory. b. Stem Guide: 1) The stem guide shall be of the adjustable design for plumb alignment. The adjusting bolt and washer shall be type 316 stainless steel. Stem guides shall be spaced so that the unsupported length between extension stems shall not exceed 5 feet. Mud valves shall be operated with extension stems, stem guides, and position indicators. 2. Materials: Body flange,yoke, guide, gate, extension stem,top nut, bottom coupling, and connection couplings shall be stainless steel,type 316. After machining, all components shall be passivated in accordance with ASTM A-380;seat ring of resilient seated configuration; cover seat consists of molded ring of Buna-N, nonrising stem, 316 stainless steel extension stem, 2-inch square operating nut for floor box or floor stand operation. Flange drilling 125-lb ANSI. 3. As shown on the Drawings,provide pedestal lifts,stem guide,wall brackets and related components for a complete operating assembly. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Clow Valve Co.; F-3075-T. b. M&H Valve;Style 140-02 C. RW Gate Company; RW7200-S d. Trumbull Industries, Inc.; 1367 Series I. Pressure Relief Valves: 1. Refer to Section 40 05 51. J. Spring Controlled Surge Relief Valve, Inlet 2-Inch through 16-Inch: 1. Description: Surge relief valve shall open when the system pressure exceeds the adjustable settings and capable of opening to full port area with a minimum increase in inlet pressure. Relief valve shall close at a slow speed consistent with adjustment of a self-contained oil cushion chamber.Valve shall close at a slow consistent speed with adjustment of a self-contained oil cushion chamber. In closed position with line pressures below the spring setting, the valve shall provide bubble tight closure. a. Valve Body: 1) Cast iron, ASTM A-126,Class B,or ductile iron ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45- 12 with integral flanges,faced and drilled per ANSI B16.1 Class as specified. 2) Configuration: In-line wye configuration or long radius elbow configuration,with center to face dimensions equal to a long radius elbow of equal size, as shown on the Drawings. 3) Inherently self-cleaning having a net flow area through the valve no less than the area of its nominal pipe size. 4) Contain a securely fastened stainless steel ring. b. Valve Disc: 1) Cast iron, ductile iron,or steel construction with a renewable, resilient EDPM seat ring retained by a stainless-steel follower. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 10 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 C. Valve Stem: 1) Stainless steel construction,guided in a bronze bushing retained in the valve cover. 2) Sealed where it passes through the body by dual seals separated by a lantern ring with external leak detection port. d. Springs: 1) Springs shall be encased in steel cylinders; exposed springs or tension springs are not acceptable.An internal hydraulic system shall permit quick opening and adjustable, slow closing without the need of pre-charged cylinders. The valve shall be fully capable of operating in any position. 2) Sizes through 8-inches shall have dual compression springs; 10-inch through 16-inches shall have a single compression spring. 3) Permit field adjustment from near zero to 10 percent above factory setting. 4) Provide a cover through which all internal components are accessible. e. Factory Testing: 1) Valve shall be shop tested and set to open at a 70 psi. 2. Manufacturers: a. GA Industries Inc; Figure 625D b. DeZURIK;APCO SRA 3000. K. Flap Gate (Gravity Flow): 1. Description: Circular opening for gravity flow conditions; body and flap, cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B; bronze trim, neoprene seat;each hinge arm shall have two pivot points, upper pivot point shall be adjustable to vary flap sensitivity to unseating heads;Type 316 stainless steel bolts and hardware. 2. Manufacturers: a. Waterman. b. Hydo Gate. L. Flap Gate, Pressure Rated: 1. Description:Circular opening designed for pump discharge service; body and flap,cast iron,ASTM A126, Class B; bronze trim, neoprene seat; each hinge arm shall have two pivot points, upper pivot point shall be adjustable to vary flap sensitivity to unseating heads; provide anti-locking bar between the two hinge pins to prevent excessive rotation about the lower hinge pin;Type 316 stainless steel bolts and hardware. 2. Manufacturers: a. Waterman. b. Hydro Gate. M. Telescoping Valves: 1. Description:Assembly consists of a drain tube which can slip up and down inside a stationary vertical pipe utilizing a lifting device to maintain the desired level. Primarily used for sludge removal or liquid level control. 2. Rack and pinion type with offset floor stand and cast iron offset floor stem PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 11 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 incorporating the rack guides, pinion,and handwheel supports. Rack and pinion and connecting rods Type 304 stainless steel, slip pipe brass with flared type skimming funnel, cast iron pipe companion flange, O-ring seal, and gasket for connection to discharge pipe. a. Skimming Pipe Diameter:as shown on drawings. b. Skimming Pipe Top Configuration: C. Valve Adjustment Height: 3. Provide pedestal, mounting brackets,stainless steel extension stem,stem guides, Type 316 anchor bolts and hardware, and all related components for a complete assembly. 4. Manufactures and Products: a. Waterman; TS-2 b. Link-Belt C. Envirex 2.11 SELF-CONTAINED AUTOMATIC VALVES A. Pressure-Reducing Valve, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller. 1. Refer to Section 40 05 51. B. Pressure-Reducing Valve,3 inches and Larger: 1. Refer to Section 40 05 51. C. Ball Valves, Electric Operated, 2-Inch and Smaller: 1. Refer to Section 40 05 51. 2.12 "DUCKBILL" ELASTOMERIC CHECK VALVE A. "Duckbill" Elastomeric Check Valve, 2-Inches through 84-Inches: 1. Type:All rubber and flow operated check type with either a flanged end connection or a slip-on end connection as indicated.The port area shall contour down to a duckbill, which allows the passage of flow in one direction. 2. Material: a. The flange and flexible duckbill sleeve shall be one piece Buna-N rubber construction reinforced with a material compatible with the fluid. CONTRACTOR shall submit verification of compatibility. 1) Valves in water service shall have nylon reinforcement. 2) Valves in chemical service shall have EDPM reinforcement. b. The bill portion shall be thinner and more flexible to form into a curve of 180 degree. C. Flange drilling shall conform to ANSI B16.1 Class 125/ANSI B16.5 Class 150 standards. d. Slip-on check valves shall be secured to the pipe using stainless steel clamps. 3. Opening Requirements: 2-inches of water. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Tideflex Technologies: PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 12 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 1) Series TF-1 for slip-on style. 2) Series 35 for flanged-end. b. General Rubber: 1) Flex-Valve 4100 for slip-on style. 2) Flex-Valve 4200 for flanged-end. C. Proco: 1) Series 731 for slip-on style. 2) Series 711 for flanged-end. 2.13 ACCESSORIES A. Refer to Section 40 05 51. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness,freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully close. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size,that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install valves,floorstands,valve boxes,and appurtenances in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install valves and operators or actuators to provide for ease of access and operation. 3. Install buried valve B. Flanged Ends: 1. Bolt holes shall straddle vertical centerline of pipe. 2. Clean flange faces, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten nuts progressively and uniformly. C. Threaded Ends: 1. Clean threads by wire brushing or swabbing. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 13 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 2. Apply joint compound. D. Valve Installation: 1. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 40 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 2. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. 3. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Provide access doors in finished walls and plaster ceilings for valve access. 4. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. a. Butterfly valves will be installed with stem horizontal to allow support for the disc and the cleaning action of the disc. b. Unless otherwise noted, install operating stem vertical in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above finished floor. C. Unless otherwise noted, install operating stem horizontal in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevation between 4 feet 6 inches and 7 feet above finish floor. 5. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 6. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: a. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. b. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. C. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 7. Install line size ball valve and union upstream of each solenoid valve, in-line flow switch,or other in-line electrical device,excluding magnetic flowmeters for isolation during maintenance. 8. Provide union or flanged connection within two feet of each threaded end valve unless valve can be otherwise easily removed from piping. 9. Install safety isolation valves on compressed air lines which have stored energy in accordance with latest OSHA requirements. E. Valve Operators: 1. Manual Operators: a. Provide manual operators on valves,except those which are equipped with power actuated operators or designed for automatic operation. b. Unless otherwise specified in the various valve sections, provide handwheel or lever operators for valves, 6-inch and smaller, and gear operators for valves, fl- inch and larger. 2. Buried Service: a. 2-1/2-inch and smaller: b. 3-inch and Larger(not installed in Valve Vault): 1) Provide stainless steel shaft extension and wrench nut. Minimum extension stem diameter shall be 1-inch or diameter of valve shaft, whichever is larger. 2) Provide valve box, bonnet,and cover. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 14 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 C. Wrench nut, handwheel and gear operator shall comply with the requirements of applicable AWWA Standards. d. As shown on the Drawings, buried Valves, 8-inch and larger, shall rest on concrete pad. Pad shall extend full width of trench,from back-to-back of hub or flange. 3. Above Ground Service: a. 3-inch and Larger:gear operators all valves 8-inch and larger, unless otherwise noted. b. Chain Wheel Operators: Install chain wheel operators on valves 4-inch and larger and more than 84 inches above floor, unless otherwise noted. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation. Where chains hang in normally travel areas, use appropriate "L"type tie-back anchors. 4. Electric and pneumatic operators and actuators shall comply with the requirements of the applicable Division 40 operator section. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform Tests and Inspections: 1. Valve may be either tested while testing pipelines,or as a separate step. 2. Test that valve opens and closes smoothly with operating pressure on one side and atmospheric pressure on the other, in both directions for two-way valve and applications. 3. Count and record the number of turns to open and close valve; account for any discrepancies with manufacturer's data. 4. Set,verify,and record set pressures for all relief and regulating valves. 5. Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing and as specified under Manufacturer's services. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and valve installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Provide in accordance with Section 0143 33. B. For every 3 powered operated valves or gates, or less, provided on the Project, a qualified manufacturers' representative shall be present at the Project site for the minimum person- days, travel excluded, as indicated: MWIIMR14LWW Inspection of valve installation, functional testing, and certification valve assembly has been installed and tested in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and these specifications. 1/2 Plant startup. 1/2 Training of OWNER'S personnel in operation and maintenance. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 52-PAGE 15 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 C. Startup Services; Comply with the requirements of Section 019100. D. Training of OWNER'S Personnel: Comply with the requirements of Section 0179 00. 3.5 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Refer to Valve Schedules provided either on the Drawings or in the various individual valve sections for additional information. B. The Valve Schedule after the END OF SECTION shall be part of this Section.The Valve Schedule is not guaranteed to be accurate, and list valves 6-inch and larger, unless it is a control valve. Refer to Drawings for type, end connections, and locations for all valves. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 52-PAGE 16 OF 16 BID SET 0537-055-01 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES JULY 2024 SECTION 40 05 56 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Slide gates,frames,stainless steel construction. 2. Weir gates,frames,stainless steel construction. B. Related Sections: 1. Refer to Section 40 05 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves"for information regarding submittals; quality assurance;coordination;material delivery, handling,and storage; projection conditions; design requirements; other materials; installation of piping systems;field testing; and related work. 2. Refer to Section 40 05 57.23 "Electric Motor Actuators"for requirements for electric motor operators. C. Gate and Related Lists: Lists are included for the convenience of the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR and are not complete listings of all gates,devices, and material to be provided under this Contract.The CONTRACTOR agrees to prepare his own material and gate takeoff lists as necessary to meet the requirements of the Project. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 126,Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings. 2. A 240,Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless steel Plate,Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for general Applications. 3. A 276,Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. 4. B 584, Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 5. D 2000,Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications 6. D 4020,Specification for Ultra-High-Molecular-Weight Polyethylene Molding and Extrusion Materials 7. F 593,Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,and Studs 8. F 594,Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C 513—Open Channel, Fabricated-Metal,Slide Gates and Open Channel, Fabricated- Metal Weir Gates. 2. C 561—Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates 3. C 562—Fabricated Aluminum Slide Gates PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 56-PAGE 1 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR JULY 2024 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS-NOT USED 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Division 1. B. The following submittals are required, at a minimum, in addition to the applicable requirements of Division 1: 1. Shop drawings and product data, including detail drawings for each gate including range of travel, data, actuator information, and descriptive literature on all gates bound neatly in a single package. 2. Complete operation and maintenance data for all items in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions. 3. Start-up and test schedule in accordance with Division 1. 4. Field test data and test records in accordance with Division 1. 5. Manufacturer's warranty for all indicated products. C. Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed by the ENGINEER. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Handle all gates and appurtenances with care.Gates,frames,and appurtenances which are cracked, chipped, distorted, or otherwise damaged or dropped will not be acceptable. Protect all threads, seats, ends, etc.,from damage and corrosion. B. Store all gates and appurtenances in approved enclosed shelter,off the ground,and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE AND WEIR GATES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Fontaine 2. Golden Harvest, Inc. 3. Hydro Gate 4. Rodney Hunt Company 5. Waterman 6. Whipps, Inc. 7. RW Gates B. General: 1. Gates shall comply with the requirements of AWWA C513. 2. Stainless steel gates shall comply with the requirement of AWWA C561. 3. Gates shall be as specified and have the characteristics and dimensions shown on the Drawings 4. Leakage shall not exceed 0.05 gpm/ft of wetted seal perimeter in seating head and PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 56-PAGE 2 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR JULY 2024 unseating head conditions. 5. Gate shall utilize self-adjusting seats. 6. Structural components of the frame and slide shall be fabricated from stainless steel having a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch and have adequate strength to prevent distortion during normal handling, during installation and while in service. 7. All welds shall be accomplished by welders with AWS certification. 8. Finish: a. Mill finish on stainless steel. b. Welds to be sandblasted to remove weld burn and scale. C. Iron and steel components shall be prepared, primed,and coated with finish system in accordance with Section 09 9100. 9. Materials: • P• Frame Assembly and Retainers ASTM A240,Type 316 Stainless Steel Slide and Stiffeners ASTM A240,Type 316 Stainless Steel Stem ASTM A276,Type 316 Stainless Steel Fasteners, Nuts and Bolts ASTM F593 and F594,Type 316 Stainless Steel Invert Seal(Upward Opening Gates) Neoprene ASTM D2000 or EDPM Seat/Seal and Facing Ultra-High Molecular Weight Polyethylene ASTM D4020 (for friction reduction) in combination with Neoprene ASTM D2000 or EDPM (for water-tight seal). Lift Nuts Bronze ASTM B584 Pedestal and Wall brackets ASTM A240 Type 316 Stainless Steel Operator Housing Cast aluminum or ductile iron El 10. Weir gates shall be downward opening slide gates. C. Frame: 1. The frame guides, invert member and yoke members shall be constructed of formed stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch. a. Frame design shall allow for embedded mounting or mounting directly to a wall with stainless steel anchor bolts and grout or mounting to a wall thimble with stainless steel mounting studs and a mastic gasket material. Mounting style shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. b. Structural portion of frame that incorporates the seat/seals shall be formed into one piece for rigidity. C. The frame guides shall extend to accommodate the entire height of the slide when the slide is in the fully opened position on upward opening slide gates or downward opening weir gates. 2. Self-contained gates shall be provided with a yoke across the top of the frame guides. The yoke shall be formed by two structural members affixed to the top of the guides to provide a one-piece rigid frame.The yoke shall be designed to allow removal of the slide. 3. Provide a rigid stainless steel invert member across the bottom of the opening and shall be of the flush bottom type on upward opening gates. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 56-PAGE 3 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR JULY 2024 4. Provide a rigid stainless steel top seal member across the top of the opening on gates designed to cover submerged openings. 5. Provide a rigid stainless-steel member across the invert of the opening on downward opening weir gates. 6. Provide a frame that allows the bolts to be placed 4"from the edge of the wall for surface mount type gates. D. Slide: 1. The slide and reinforcing stiffeners shall be constructed of stainless-steel plate with a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch. a. The slide shall not deflect more than 1/360 of the span or 1/16 inch,whichever is smaller, under the maximum design head. b. When the width of the gate opening multiplied by the maximum design head is 80 square feet or greater,the portion of the slide that engages the guide members shall be of a "thick edge" design. The thick edge portion of the slide shall have a minimum thickness of 3 inches. 2. Reinforcing stiffeners shall be welded to the slide and mounted horizontally.Vertical stiffeners shall be welded on the outside of the horizontal stiffeners for additional reinforcement. 3. The stem connector shall be constructed of two angles or plates. The stem connector shall be welded to the slide. A minimum of two bolts shall connect the stem to the stem connector. E. Seals: 1. Gates shall be provided with a self-adjusting seal system to restrict leakage in accordance with the requirements listed in this specification. a. Gate guide rail shall be equipped with UHMW polyethylene seat to prevent metal to metal contact between the frame and slide. b. Frame edge shall be equipped with Neoprene or EPDM seat to restrict leakage. C. Seat/seals shall extend to accommodate the 1-1/2 x the height of the slide when the slide is in the fully closed or fully opened position. 2. Upward opening gates shall be provided with a resilient seal to seal the bottom portion of the gate.The seal shall be attached to the invert member of the frame or the bottom of the slide. 3. Downward opening weir gates shall be provided with UHMW polyethylene seat/seals across the invert member. 4. Seals shall be bolted or mechanically fastened to the frame or slide.Arrangements that are force fit or held in place with adhesives are not acceptable.Gates that utilize rubber"J" seals or"P" seals are not acceptable. 5. Seal system shall be durable and shall be designed to accommodate high velocities and frequent cycling without loosening or suffering damage. 6. Seals shall be mounted so as not to obstruct the water way opening. 7. The seal system shall have been factory tested to confirm negligible wear(less than 0.01")and proper sealing.The factory testing shall consist of an accelerated wear test comprised of a minimum of 25,000 open-close cycles using a well-agitated sand/water PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 56-PAGE 4 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR JULY 2024 mixture to simulate fluidized grit. 8. The seals shall be sealed on three sides of the frame. F. Stem: 1. A threaded operating stem shall be utilized to connect the operating mechanism to the slide. a. Rising stem gates,the threaded portion shall engage the operating nut in the manual operator or motor actuator. b. Non-rising stem gates,the threaded portion shall engage the nut on the slide. C. Threaded portion of the stem shall have a minimum outside diameter of 1 inch. Stem extension pipes are not acceptable. 2. Construction: a. Constructed of solid stainless-steel bar for the entire length,the metal having a tensile strength of not less than 90,000 psi for stems that are 3 inches or less in diameter. Stems that are in excess of 3 inches in diameter shall have a tensile strength of 85,000 psi. b. Threaded to allow full travel of the slide unless the travel distance is otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. C. Maximum L/R ratio for the unsupported part of the stem shall not exceed 200. d. In compression,the stem shall be designed for a critical buckling load caused by a 40 lb effort on the crank or handwheel with a safety factor of 2, using the Euler column formula. e. The stem shall be designed to withstand the tension load caused by the application of a 40 lb effort on the crank or handwheel without exceeding 1/5 of the ultimate tensile strength of the stem material. f. The threaded portion of the stem shall have machine cut or rolled threads of the full Acme type with a 16-microinch finish or better. Stub threads are not acceptable. 3. Stems of more than one section shall be joined by stainless steel couplings.The coupling shall be bolted to the stems. 4. Stems,on manually operated gates,shall be provided with adjustable stop collars to prevent over closing of the slide. G. Stem Guides: Stem guide shall be provided when necessary to ensure that the maximum L/R ratio for the unsupported part of the stem is 200 or less. 1. Stem guide brackets shall be constructed of stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch and shall be outfitted with UHMW or bronze bushings. 2. Adjustable in two directions. H. Wall Thimbles: 1. Wall thimbles shall be provided when shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Design: a. Wall thimble depth shall be equal to the thickness of the concrete wall in which the thimble is to be mounted. b. Fabricated stainless steel construction of adequate section to withstand all PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 56-PAGE 5 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR JULY 2024 operational and reasonable installation stresses. C. Constructed of 1/4-inch minimum thickness stainless steel and the front face shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4—inch. d. Fabrication process shall ensure that the wall thimble is square and plumb and the front face is sufficient flat to provide a proper mounting surface for the gate frame. e. Face of the wall thimble shall only be machined if recommended by the gate manufacturer and shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch after machining. 3. Water Stop: Provide 4-inch water stop welded around the periphery of the thimble. Wall thimbles shall be designed to allow thorough and uniform concrete placement during installation. 4. Studs and nuts shall be type 316 stainless steel. 5. A suitable gasket or mastic shall be provided to seal between the gate frame and the wall thimble. 2.2 MANUALOPERATORS A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,gates shall be operated by a manual handwheel, a manual crank-operated gearbox, or a remotely operated hand crank. The operator shall be mounted on the yoke of self-contained gates or on the pedestal of non-self-contained gates. 1. Select the proper gear ratio to ensure that the gate can be operated with no more than a 40 lb effort when the gate is in the closed position and experiencing the maximum operating head. 2. An arrow with the word "OPEN" shall be permanently attached or cast onto the operator to indicate the direction or rotation to open the gate. 3. Handwheel operators shall be fully enclosed and shall have cast aluminum or ductile iron housing. a. Provide a threaded cast bronze lift nut to engage the operating stem. b. Equipped with roller bearings above and below the operating nut. C. Provide mechanical seals above and below the operating nut to exclude moisture and dirt and prevent leakage of lubricant out of the hoist. d. Handwheel shall be removable and shall have a minimum diameter of 15 inches. B. Crank-operated gearboxes shall be fully enclosed and shall have cast aluminum or ductile iron housing. 1. Gearboxes shall have either single or double gear reduction depending upon the lifting capacity required. 2. Gearboxes shall be provided with a threaded cast bronze lift nut to engage the operating stem. a. Bearings shall be provided above and below the flange on the operating nut to support both opening and closing thrusts. b. Gears shall be steel with machined cut teeth designed for smooth operation. C. The pinion shaft shall be stainless steel and shall be supported on ball or tapered roller bearings. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 56-PAGE 6 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR JULY 2024 d. Provide mechanical seals on the operating nut and the pinion shafts to exclude moisture and dirt and prevent leakage of lubricant out of the hoist. e. Crank shall be cast aluminum with a revolving nylon grip and removable. 3. Gates having widths in excess of 72 inches and widths greater than twice their height shall be provided with two gearboxes connected by an interconnecting shaft for simultaneous operation. a. Interconnecting shafting shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. b. Flexible couplings shall be provided at each end of the interconnecting shaft. C. One crank shall be provided to mount on the pinion shaft of one of the gearboxes. 4. An extended operator system utilizing chain and sprockets shall be furnished by the manufacturer when the centerline of the crank or handwheel, on a non-geared operator, is located over 48-in above the operating floor. Chain wheels are not acceptable. a. Provide a removable aluminum or stainless-steel cover to enclose chain and sprockets. b. The extended operator system shall lower the centerline of the pinion shaft to 36-in above the operating floor. C. A handwheel may be utilized in conjunction with a gearbox in lieu of the extended operator system if the centerline of the pinion shaft is 60-in or less above the operating floor. 5. Pedestals shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. a. Pedestal height shall be such that the handwheel or pinion shaft on the crank- operated gearbox is located approximately 36-in above the operating floor. b. Wall brackets shall be used to support floor stands where shown on the Drawings and shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. C. Wall brackets shall be reinforced to withstand compression at least two times the rated output of the operator with a 40 lb effort on the crank or handwheel. d. The design and detail of the brackets and anchor bolts shall be provided by the gate manufacturer and shall be approved by the ENGINEER.The gate manufacturer shall supply the bracket, anchor bolts and accessories as part of the gate assembly. 6. Operators shall be equipped with fracture-resistant clear butyrate or lexan plastic stem covers. a. The top of the stem cover shall be closed. b. The bottom end of the stem cover shall be mounted in a housing or adapter for easy field mounting. C. Stem covers shall be complete with indicator markings to indicate gate position. 7. When shown on the Contract Drawings, provide 2 inch square nut with a non-rising stem. a. The square nut shall be constructed of bronze. b. The floor box, if required,shall be constructed of stainless steel or cast iron and shall be set in the concrete floor above the gate as shown. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 56-PAGE 7 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR JULY 2024 C. Provide one aluminum or stainless-steel T-handle wrench for operation. 2.3 ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATORS A. Electric Motor: Motor operator shall comply with the requirements of Section 40 05 57.23. 2.4 APPURTENANCES A. Equipment Identification Plates:A 16-gauge stainless steel identification plate shall be securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location.The plate shall bear 1/4- inch die-stamped equipment identification number indicated in this Section and/or on the Drawings. B. Lifting Lugs: Individual equipment and/or each field disassemble part weighing over 100 pounds shall be provided with lifting lugs. C. Anchor Bolts: Provide template and Type 316 stainless steel anchors in accordance with Section 05 50 10, and as shown on the Drawings. Size as required by manufacturer. 1. Quantity and location shall be determined by the gate manufacturer. 2. If epoxy type anchor bolts are provided,the studs and nuts shall be provided. 3. Anchor bolts shall have a minimum diameter of 1/2-inch. D. Initial Supply of Lubricants: Manufacturer shall indicate types, brands, and quantities of initial lubricants, oil, grease, etc. necessary to startup equipment. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the recommended lubricants and shall comply with all manufacturer recommended procedures. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: 1. Aluminum Gates:Test and inspect assembled slide and weir gates according to AWWA C562, Section 5 "Verification." Provide test results. 2. Stainless Steel Gates:Test and inspect assembled slide and weir gates according to AWWA C561, Section 5 "Verification." Provide test results. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all gates and appurtenances in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. B. Brace wall fittings internally during placement of concrete. Ensure that fittings are properly aligned and anchored; flanges are flush with concrete face and tapped holes plugged and protected from entry of grout. 1. Set anchor bolts in accordance with approved manufacturers drawings. 2. Gate assemblies shall be installed in a true vertical plane,square and plumb. 3. Fill the void in between the gate frame and the wall with non-shrink grout as shown on the installation drawing and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide a mastic gasket between the gate frame and wall thimble (when applicable) in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 56-PAGE 8 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR JULY 2024 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE A. Provide the service of qualified,factory-trained representative of the manufacturer to check and approve each part of the installation before it is placed in operation. The manufacturer shall instruct the plant personnel in operation, care and maintenance of all gates and appurtenances and supervise initial operation. 3.3 FIELD TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust all parts and components as required to provide correct operation. 1. Each gate shall be cycled to confirm that they operate without binding, scraping, or distorting. The effort to open and close manual operators shall be measured and shall not exceed the maximum operating effort specified above. 2. Electric motor actuators shall function smoothly and without interruption. B. Conduct functional field test of each gate to demonstrate that each part and all components function together correctly. All testing equipment required shall be provided. C. Perform a field leakage test after installation of the slide gate. 1. Perform all adjustments; lubricate mechanisms; and operate each gate through 10 complete cycles. 2. Seating and unseating heads shall be measured from the top surface of the water to the center of the gate. 3. Each gate shall be water tested by the CONTRACTOR. D. Allowable Leakage: 1. Aluminum Gates: Under design seating and unseating head shall not exceed 0.1 gpm/ft of seating perimeter. 2. Stainless Steel Gates: Under design seating and unseating head shall not exceed 0.05 gpm/ft of seating perimeter. 3.4 SUPPLEMENTS A. The following tables included below are considered part of this section: 1. Refer to the Drawings for the Gate Schedule END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 56-PAGE 9 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 56-PAGE 10 OF 10 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATES,SLIDE AND WEIR JULY 2024 SECTION 40 05 57.23 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Scope and Supply 1. It shall be the EQUIPMENTSUPPLIER's responsibility to provide fully integrated valve/gate/actuator as a complete operation unit. When listed below the manufacturer refers to the actuator manufacturer. B. Section Includes: 1. Electric motor actuators, both multi-turn and quarter-turn, isolation and modulating/throttling for valves and gates. C. Related Sections: 1. Refer to Section 40 05 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves"for information regarding submittals; coordination; material delivery, handling, and storage; projection conditions; design requirements; other materials; installation of valves; field testing; and related work. 2. Refer to various Division 40 valve or gate sections for information regarding the valve or gate on which the operator will be installed. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Standards 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C542—Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates, as applicable. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS -NOT USED 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be prepared and submitted for review in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. Action Submittals 1. As part of the applicable control valve or gate submittal, provide the following information: a. Product Data: Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities,operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 1) Shop Drawings: Provide plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other work. 2) Layout drawings including all proposed system components with dimensions,clearances required and sizes indicated,and arrangement and size of connections. 3) Specific design parameters for this project as specified herein. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 57.23-PAGE 1 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 4) Adjustable settings with range provided for valve opening, closing, and emergency closing speeds. 5) Sequenced operational control description indicating adjustment ranges and set points for each device and resulting action for failure to complete the individual sequences. 6) Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. C. Information Submittals 1. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and manufacturer's representative. 2. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years. Include a list of special tools required for checking,testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current pricing information. 3. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and factory-authorized service representative. 4. Source quality-control reports. 5. Manufacturer's warranty for all indicated products. D. Closeout submittals 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 0178 23. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Electric motor operators shall be the product of a manufacturer having at least 10 U.S. installations of the type being proposed, each with a minimum of 5 years of satisfactory service. 2. A list of similar installations shall be furnished with the shop drawing submittal, including names and telephone numbers of contacts. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Valve actuator shall be furnished integral with the control valve,along with accessories, by the supplier of the control valve. D. Electrical Components, Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store all components to be installed under this section in accordance with the manufacturer's written Pre-Installation Delivery,Storage,and Handling Instructions and the requirements of Section 0160 00. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. The equipment,sizes, materials, and arrangements described in this section are based on recommendations by equipment suppliers and shall be considered minimum limits of acceptability. The manufacturer shall be responsible for design, arrangement, and performance of all equipment supplied under this section. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 57.23-PAGE 2 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 B. Environmental Conditions: 1. All equipment including controls and drives specified herein shall be specifically designed to be installed forthis service and the environment encountered in this installation, unless noted otherwise. 2. The environment will be moist,and corrosive,exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal wastewater treatment plants. 3. All equipment shall be designed and capable of operation outdoors at ambient temperatures of-400 degrees F to 185 degrees F,with indoor operating temperature of 140 degrees F, and a 100 degrees relative humidity. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Extended Equipment Warranty: Refer to Section 0178 36 for extended equipment warranty. B. All equipment furnished under this section shall have a special equipment warranty, in accordance with the Contract Documents, for a period of 2 years after the date of Substantial Completion.The cost of removal, shipment, repair, and installation by CONTRACTOR shall be included in the warranty and correction of defective work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include: 1. Beck, Model Group 11 (For Valve Actuators) 2. Beck, Model Group 88(For Gate Actuators) B. No like,equivalent,"or-equal" item or substitution is permitted. 2.2 VALVE ACTUATOR SYSTEMS COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. The actuators shall be suitable for use on a 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz synchronous inductor no-burnout motor. 2. The use of a manufacturer's name and model number or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality and general configuration desired. 3. Like items of materials/equipment shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's service. 4. Operators shall be fully self-contained,conforming to AWWA C540,except as herein modified. B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Design Requirements: Control valve,operator,and accessories shall comply with the following general requirements: a. Actuators and appurtenances shall be designed for the conditions and requirements as specified in the respective valve sections. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 57.23-PAGE 3 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 b. Liberal factors of safety shall be used throughout the design, especially in the design of parts subject to intermittent or alternating stresses. In general, working stresses shall not exceed 1/3 of the yield point or 1/5 of the ultimate strength of each material. C. Designed forthe project conditions described in Project Conditions paragraph. d. Supports, anchors and fasteners shall be of adequate strength to withstand loads associated with opening, closing,turbulence,thrusts from liquid movement,thermal expansion and contraction and other loads encountered under normal operating conditions. e. Fasteners and hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Mounting brackets that are exposed to the water or to seal or packing leakage shall be Type 316 stainless steel or other acceptable non-corrosive material. f. Compliance with AWWA, ASTM, and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. 2. Valve actuators: a. Each actuator shall be designed to open or close the valve under operating conditions. b. The actuators and gear train shall be designed for the full design head rating of the valve and the actual fluid velocity through the valve not less than 16 fps. C. Valve actuators shall be provided and adjusted by the Valve Manufacturer. Actuator mounting arrangements and positions shall facilitate O&M and shall be determined by the Valve Manufacturer unless shown otherwise on the Drawings or directed by the ENGINEER. d. Pump control valves: Valves shall provide controlled opening and closing of the pump discharge valve actuator. The pumps will be started and stopped against a closed valve imposing full pump shut-off head on the valve when closed. C. Electrical/Controls 1. For modulating duty, the actuator shall be suitable for up to a maximum of 1,200 starts per hour. Actuator shall be cable of responding to a remote 4-20 mA control signal and positioning itself accordingly between 0-100 degrees valve travel as well as provided a contactless transmitter to give a 4-20 mA analog signal corresponding to valve travel for remote indicated.The control module shall be capable of initiating shaft movement in steps down to 0.1 degrees.The control module shall contain adjustments for span, zero, gain, and deadband, and shall have infinite resolution. 2. For Open/Close (Isolation) duty, the actuator shall be electo-mechanical type suitable for 60 starts per hours and of rating appropriate to motor size.Actuator shall receive a 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz discrete or pulsed input signal from an automatic controller or relay to energize the motor directly without any electronics in the actuator required. D. Local Indication and Control: 1. The actuator shall include LCD and LED indicators. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 05 57.23-PAGE 4 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 2. A five-position, actuator-mounted electric hand switch shall be provided to permit local electrical operation upon loss of control signal.With the hand switch in AUTO mode, actuator shall respond to remote control signals automatically. Auxiliary contacts on the hand switch shall be provided for remote indication for when the switch is in AUTO. E. Emergency Shut Down (ESD): 1. An Emergency Shut Down (ESD) shall be included in each actuator. The actuator shall permit inputs for ESD and they shall be configurable. The ESD signal shall override any existing signals(expect LOCAL, STOP, and INHIBIT) and send the valve to its configured emergency position. F. Phase Correction Circuit: 1. A phase correct circuit shall be included to correct motor rotation faults caused by incorrect site wiring. The phase correction circuit shall also detect the loss of a phase and disable operation to percent motor damage. G. Status Contacts: 1. Provide 4 status contacts rated at 120 Vac for remote indication of valve position, configured as 1-normally open and 1 normally closed for both the open and closed positions. Two contacts may be configured to represent any other actuator status. H. Motor Requirements: 1. Manufacturer's designed for applicable valve operator service; high torque,totally enclosed, non-ventilated construction. 2. Capable of seating and unseating the valve against maximum differential pressure when voltage to the motor terminals is 10 percent above or below nominal. 3. Pre-lubricated,suitable for year-round service based at prevailing ambient temperature conditions, and with bearings of the antifriction type. 4. Motor shall have Class H insulation. Motor shall be permanent magnetic, synchronous, and rated for 100 degrees continuous duty. 5. Motor shall be non-coasting with instant magnetic breaking and shall be self-locking and self-releasing without the use of a separate brake winding, mechanical brake, or work gear mechanism. 6. Motor controller shall be capable of holding a load equal to at least 200 degrees of the rated output without the use of AC power. I. Actuator Sizing Requirements: 1. The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified torque and/or thrust requirement as indicated by the valve manufacturer or supplier. Produce actuator output of 1 1/2 times the required valve operating torque. 2. The actuator must be adequately sized to provide the torque required to operate the valve at 90 degrees of the nominal voltage. 3. The operating speed shall provide valve closing and opening at approximately 12 inches per minute for gate valves,4 inches per minute for globes valves and as indicated in the valve list for quarter turn valves. If not listed in the valve list, quarter turn valves shall operate at 1 minute. Quarter valves will be furnished with mechanical stops that restrict the valve/actuator travel. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 57.23-PAGE 5 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 J. Enclosure: 1. Actuator shall be sealed,watertight to NEMA4X/6 and rated to IP-68. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply connection. All external fasteners shall be of stainless steel. 2. All field connections shall be made in one terminal compartment.Separate conduit entrances shall be available for power and control wiring. K. Unit Gearing: 1. Motor speed reduction accomplished a geartrain consisting of spur gears of heat treated steel or ductile iron. 2. Unit gearing shall be fully lubricated by a premium,heavy duty, lithium based lubricant. No oil baths shall be used for lubrication. 3. Gearing and shafting supported on anti-friction, maintenance free bearings with thrust components supported by use of tapered roller bearings. L. Valve Position and Torque Calibration: 1. Stall torque shall be self-limiting, not exceeding 21/2 times the rated torque.The motor shall be de-energized if the torque limits is exceeded. 2. Two SPDT over-travel limit switches shall be provided for over-travel protection and two auxiliary SPDT switches, adjustable over the full range of travel for remote indication of full open and full close status.Switches shall be rated for 6 amps at 120 volts AC. Actuator shall have integral mechanical stops capable of limiting travel of the actuator and load. 3. Switches shall be rated for 6 amps at 120 volts AC. Actuator shall have integral mechanical stops capable of limiting travel of the drive and load. Actuator shall be provided with a dry contact for remote indication of actuator trouble, including loss of power, loss of control signal, over travel, and/or over torque with LED indicator lights on the actuator to indicate which condition has caused the alarm. 4. A dry contact shall be provided for actuator trouble indication. M. Manual Operation: 1. Provide a permanently mounted hand wheel or hand crank for manual operation. 2. Upon loss of input signal,the actuator shall be field configurable to move to any predetermined position. 3. When in manual operating position,the unit shall remain in this position until the motor is next energized at which time the operator shall automatically return to electric operation and shall remain in motor position until manual operation is next desired. 4. Additional Requirements: Refer to various Division 40 valve sections or as shown on the Drawings. 2.3 GATE ACTUATOR SYSTEMS COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. The motor shall be suitable for 480-volt 3 phase, 60 Hz power supply with an internal transformer and must include motor, integral reversing starters, local controls, and terminals for remote control and indication housed within a self-contained, sealed enclosure. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 57.23-PAGE 6 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 2. In addition, provision shall be made for the protection on configured actuator settings by means of a password. 3. The use of a manufacturer's name and model number or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality and general configuration desired. 4. Like items of materials/equipment shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's service. 5. Operators shall be fully self-contained,conforming to AWWA C540,except as herein modified. B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Design Requirements: Control valve,operator,and accessories shall comply with the following general requirements: a. Actuators and appurtenances shall be designed for the conditions and requirements as specified in the respective valve sections. b. Liberal factors of safety shall be used throughout the design, especially in the design of parts subject to intermittent or alternating stresses. In general, working stresses shall not exceed 1/3 of the yield point or 1/5 of the ultimate strength of each material. C. Designed forthe project conditions described in Project Conditions paragraph. d. Supports, anchors and fasteners shall be of adequate strength to withstand loads associated with opening, closing,turbulence, thrusts from liquid movement,thermal expansion and contraction and other loads encountered under normal operating conditions. e. Fasteners and hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Mounting brackets that are exposed to the water or to seal or packing leakage shall be Type 316 stainless steel or other acceptable non-corrosive material. f. Compliance with AWWA,ASTM, and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. 2. Gate actuators: a. Each actuator shall be designed to open or close the valve under operating conditions. b. The actuators and gear train shall be designed for the full design head rating of the gate and the actual fluid velocity through the gate not less than 16 fps. C. Gate actuators shall be provided and adjusted by the Gate Manufacturer. Actuator mounting arrangements and positions shall facilitate O&M and shall be determined by the Gate Manufacturer unless shown otherwise on the Drawings or directed by the ENGINEER. C. Electrical/Controls 1. For modulating duty, the actuator shall be solid-state type suitable for up to a maximum of 1,200 starters per hour. Actuator shall be cable of responding to a remote 4-20 mA control signal and positioning itself accordingly between 0-100 degrees valve travel, providing 4-20 mA feedback.The control module shall be capable of initiating shaft movement in steps down to 0.1 degrees.The control module shall contain adjustments for span, zero, gain, and deadband. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 57.23-PAGE 7 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 D. Local Indication and Control: 1. The actuator shall include a graphical LCD for when the valve is open, closed,or in- transition. 2. The Actuator shall have 2 non-intrusive, magnetic hand switches(i.e., no switch shaft penetration of the actuator body). One hand switch shall be for Local/Remote/Stop and other for Open/Close.The Local/Remote/Stop hand switch shall be lockable. E. Monitor Relay: 1. The Actuator shall include 4 configurable,SPST relays, rated at 250 VAC/30 VDC,2A max. Each relay may be independently configured for any one of a number of functions, including Open Position, Close Position, In Remote Status, Fault, etc. F. Emergency Shut Down (ESD): 1. An Emergency Shut Down (ESD) shall be included in each actuator. The actuator shall permit inputs for ESD and they shall be configurable. The ESD signal shall override any existing signals(expect LOCAL, STOP, and INHIBIT) and send the valve to its configured emergency position. G. Phase Correction Circuit: 1. A phase correct circuit shall be included to correct motor rotation faults caused by incorrect site wiring. The phase correction circuit shall also detect the loss of a phase and disable operation to percent motor damage. H. Motor Requirements: 1. Manufacturer's designed for applicable gate operator service; high torque,totally enclosed, non-ventilated construction. 2. Capable of seating and unseating the gate against maximum differential pressure when voltage to the motor terminals is 10 percent above or below nominal. 3. Pre-lubricated,suitable for year-round service based at prevailing ambient temperature conditions, and with bearings of the antifriction type. 4. Motor shall have Class H insulation. 5. Motor shall be permanent magnet, servo-motor, rated for continuous duty with solid state thermal protection.Thermal relays shall be unacceptable.The servo-motor shall provide programmable speed, acceleration and torque. The servo-motor shall start at full torque, therefore eliminating the need for"hammer blow".The servo-motor shall not coast or overshoot and will not overheat. 6. Actuator output speed shall be programmable from 6-60 RPM. 7. Actuator shall have soft-start motor control to reduce wear and tear damage to the drive nut and coupling. The starting acceleration and stopping deceleration shall be programmable. I. Actuator Sizing Requirements: 1. The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified torque and/or thrust requirement as indicated by the gate manufacturer or supplier. Produce actuator output of 1 1/2 times the required gate operating torque. 2. The actuator must be adequately sized to provide the torque required to operate the valve at 90 percent of the nominal voltage. 3. Slide,sluice,and weir gates shall operate at approximately at 12 inches per minute. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 57.23-PAGE 8 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 4. Actuator output torque shall be programmable from 25-250 lb-ft. For applications(1) requiring> 250 lb-ft, and/or (2)with stems greater than 2 inches, it shall be acceptable to source a separate gearbox. J. Enclosure: 1. Actuator shall be O-ring sealed, water tight to NEMA 4X/6 and rated to IP-68. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply connection. All external fasteners shall be of stainless steel. Gear case shall be cast iron. The enclosure shall be coated with a corrosion-resistant, polyurethane paint. 2. All field connections shall be made in one terminal compartment.Three 1" NPT conduit entrances shall be available for power and control wiring. 3. Stem protection shall be provided for rising stems. K. Unit Gearing: 1. Motor speed reduction accomplished a gear train consisting of all ferrous spur gears. 2. Unit gearing shall be permanently lubricated with grease. No oil baths or breathers shall be used for lubrication. 3. Gearing and shafting supported on anti-friction, maintenance free bearings with thrust components supported by use of tapered roller bearings.The Actuator shall have an efficient, all ferrous, spur-gear design that is permanently lubricated.The drive train shall not use any worm gears or non-ferrous gears constructed from soft metals like bronze. L. Gate Position and Torque Calibration: 1. Precise over-torque control shall be accomplished by controlling the motor current via the programmable output torque setting. 2. When powered,the Actuator shall have redundant position and torque sensing via the servo-motor rotor and output shaft. 3. The Actuator shall be capable of maintaining absolute position up to 4,000 turns,even on loss-of-power. The Actuator design and settings shall not rely on batteries. In a loss-of power event,the absolute position shall be maintained even though the local Position Display shall be nonfunctional.The Actuator shall include a fail-safe brake to hold position during power loss. M. Manual Operation: 1. Provide a permanently mounted hand wheel or hand crank for manual operation.The hand wheel shall include a 1/2 inch Hex Drive to allow a drill with a standard socket to 2. manually move the actuator more quickly. 3. Hand wheel or hand crank shall not rotate during electric operation but shall be responsive to manual operation at all times except when being electrically operated. Upon loss of input signal,the actuator shall be field configurable to move to any predetermined position. 4. Motor shall not rotate during hand operation, nor shall a seized motor prevent manual operation. 5. When in manual operating position, the unit shall remain in this position until the motor is next energized at which time the operator shall automatically return to electric operation and shall remain in motor position until manual operation is next desired. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 57.23-PAGE 9 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 6. It shall not be possible to place the unit in manual operation when the motor is running. 7. Additional Requirements: Refer to various Division 40 gate sections or as shown on the Drawings. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Actuator Testing: Three (3) types of actuator tests are required; proof-of-design test, performance test, and pressure test. The as defined by this standard. Actuators shall meet the requirements for each type of test. B. Proof-of-Design Test: Purpose is to prove that the design, material selection, and manufacture of the actuator are suitable for the purpose intended. One (1) production sample of each actuator size shall be tested. Should the actuator design be changed or modified so as to affect its strength of function,the test shall be repeated in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C542. C. Performance Test: Purpose is to prove that each actuator is in working order prior to shipment. Each actuator and valve assembly shall be cycled a minimum of 3 times using the start and stop controls from the fully closed to the fully open position to demonstrate that the complete assembly, including controls, operates properly. D. Pressure Test: Each actuator shall be tested at the overload pressure. The duration of this test shall be sufficient to allow visual examination for leakage and shall be a minimum of 1 minute. E. Test Certification: Certification of tests and copies of test or certificate of conformity reports shall be provided on request if the request is made prior to the time of testing. 2.5 ACTUATOR MOUNTING A. Actuator Mounting Responsibility: Actuators shall be shipped to the control valve or gate supplier's facility for mounting and assembly on the control valve or gate, calibration, and acceptance testing.A certification of the calibration,testing, and warranty shall be included in the final O&M Manual. B. Mounting height and position shall be as shown on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER A. CONTRACTOR 3.2 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR to install equipment per this Section and the manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.3 FIELD/SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer Services 1. Manufacturer Field Representative: PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 57.23-PAGE 10 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 a. The Manufacturer Field Representative shall be present at the project site or classroom designated by OWNER for minimum person-days and trips provided in the table below. Each person-day shall be defined as 8 hours duration, exclusive of travel.The Manufacturer Field Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary to correct deficiencies. Table 1—Manufacturer Field Services o Installation Assistance and Inspection 1 1 Acceptance Test and Initial Training 2 1 Post-Startup Training 1 1 3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Startup of the facility shall be in accordance with Section 0175 25. Installation Assistance and Inspection. After Equipment Installation and before start up, the CONTRACTOR and Manufacturer Field Representative shall inspect the installation of the equipment. A preliminary running period (as applicable)will be provided for the CONTRACTOR to make field adjustments with the Manufacturer Field Representative. CONTRACTOR shall submit a report for manufacturer approval of equipment installation. B. Initial Training. Manufacturer shall perform initial training at the end of the Acceptance Test for owner's representative. Training shall be with a draft of the full Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Post-Startup Training. Manufacturer will perform additional training at a time mutually agreeable to the OWNER and manufacturer to take place no earlier than 30 days after equipment substantial completion and no later than 90 days after substantial completion. 3.5 ACCEPTANCE TEST A. Conduct an acceptance of the assembled control valve or gate and actuator,verifying the satisfactory operation and performance of each actuator. Each actuator and valve/gate assembly shall be cycled a minimum of 10 times in the field using the start and stop controls from the fully closed to the fully open position to demonstrate that the complete assembly, including controls, operates properly. Control valves and fail "closed"valves shall also be tested under power loss to verify proper closure. B. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the ENGINEER. The equipment and piping will be completely checked for leakage, general operation, vibration, and related factors. C. Each actuator must perform in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER before final acceptance will be made by the OWNER. 3.6 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. A copy of all information from functional tests including data, worksheets, and other materials shall be turned over to the OWNER at the completion of the testing program. END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 57.23-PAGE 11 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 S7.23-PAGE 12 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS JULY 2024 SECTION 40 05 61 GATE VALVES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following gate valves: 1. AWWA Ductile-Iron Resilient-Seated Gate Valves,3-inch and larger. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. Refer to Section 40 05 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves;" a. For information regarding submittals; quality assurance; coordination;material delivery, handling, and storage; projection conditions; design requirements; coating requirements; other materials; installation of piping systems;field testing; and related work. 3. Refer to Section 40 05 52"Miscellaneous Valves and Appurtenances"for valves not covered in this Section or the Sections listed below 4. Refer to Section 40 05 57.23 "Electric Motor Actuators." 5. Refer to Section 40 05 61"Gate Valves"for AWWA gate valves,3-inch and larger,and for iron body gate valves, 3 inches through 24 inches. 6. Refer to Section 40 05 62 "Plug Valves"for eccentric plug valves. 7. Refer to Section 40 05 64"Butterfly Valves"for butterfly valves 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS—NOT USED 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated, include body,seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Product Certificates: For each type of valve,from manufacturer. 1. Compliance with AWWA,ASTM,and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." D. Field Quality Control: Provide field testing and performance reports. E. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for all indicated products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain all valves of the same style and type,along with the associated manual operators, from a single manufacturer. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 61-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATE VALVES JULY 2024 B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61,"Drinking Water Systems Components—Health Effects"for valve materials for potable-water service. C. Valve manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five years of experience is similar applications for size of valves furnished. References shall be provided upon request. D. Valve supplier shall maintain a complete stock of parts in the state where the Project is constructed or shall indicate that parts will be delivered upon 48-hour after receipt of request. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads,flange faces,grooves,and weld ends. 3. Set angle,gate,and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Block valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 3. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS—NOT USED 1.8 WARRANTY—NOT USED PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. ACIPCO American Flow Control 2. American R/D 3. Clow Valve Co. 4. Henry Pratt Company 5. Kennedy 6. Mueller 7. M&H 8. U.S. Pipe Metroseal 2.2 GENERAL A. Valve to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem,floor stand, worm and gear operator,operating nut, chain,wrench,valve boxes,and all accessories and related equipment for a complete operating system as required per this Section. Refer to Drawings for valves requiring limit switches, electric or pneumatic operators, and related PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 61-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATE VALVES JULY 2024 controls. B. Comply with the following: 1. Suitable for intended service. Renewable parts not to be of a lower quality than specified. 2. Same size as adjacent piping. 3. Ends to suit adjacent piping. 4. Operator sized to operate valve for full range of pressures and velocities. 5. Open by turning counterclockwise, unless otherwise specified. 6. Factory mount operator,actuator and accessories. C. Obtain all valves and associated manual operators from a single manufacturer. D. Gate valves shall be of the resilient seated design. 2.3 VALVE DESCRIPTION A. AWWA C515 Gate Valves,3-inch and Larger, Resilient-Seated: 1. Construction: Ductile-iron body with full round port opening and integrally cast guides; smooth valve bottom with no recessed areas; bonnet cover. 2. Position: Vertical 3. Gate: Completely covered with rubber on all interior and exterior ferrous surfaces. The rubber shall be secured to the gate body, including the part which houses the stem nut. 4. Stem: Cast,forged,or rolled bonze. 5. Stem Seals: Double O-ring,Buna-N protected by grit and dust cap. 6. Stem Nut: Brass or bronze. 7. Seats: Resilient seats bonded to wedge for seating against a corrosion resistance surface. 8. Nylon bushing and Teflon washer for friction protection. 9. Operating Pressure: a. 12-inch and smaller,200 psig b. 16-inch and 20-inch, 150 psig 10. Flange Ends(Unless otherwise specified): a. Above Ground: Flanged,ANSI B16.1,Class 125. b. Buried Service: Mechanical joints,ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 11. Coating: In accordance with Section 09 9100 "Painting and Protective Coatings." Comply with requirements of AWWA C515"Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service." 2.4 OPERATORS A. Buried Service: 1. 3-inch and Larger: a. Non-rising stem with stainless steel shaft extension and wrench nut. Minimum extension stem diameter shall be 1-inch or diameter of valve shaft,whichever is larger. All components shall have continuous welded joints. Provide stem PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 61-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATE VALVES JULY 2024 guides or rock shields at 5-foot intervals. b. Valve Box: Three-piece screw type 5%-inch diameter,cast iron construction. 1) Manufacturer a) Clow,or approved equal B. Above Ground Service: 1. 3-inch and Larger:OS&Y,gear operators all valves 16-inch and larger unless otherwise noted. 2. Chain Wheel Operator: Provide for valves having a centerline six feet or more above the floor, unless otherwise noted. C. Wrench nut, handwheel and gear operator shall comply with the requirements of applicable AWWA Standard previously reference and Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." D. Electric motor operators shall comply with the requirements of the applicable Section 40 05 57.23 "Electric Motor Actuators." 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Identification: Provide valve identification tags in accordance with Section 10 90 00 "Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging." B. Refer to Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves"for additional accessories requirements. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 40 05 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves"for Execution requirements for the installation,field quality control,and manufacturer's services. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 61-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 GATE VALVES JULY 2024 SECTION 40 05 62 PLUG VALVES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes the following valves: 1. Eccentric plug valves, 3-inch and smaller. 2. Eccentric plug valves,4-inch and larger. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Definitions 1. Following are standard abbreviations used forvalves: a. CWP: Cold working pressure. b. EDPM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. C. NRS: Nonrising stem. d. OS&Y:Outside screw and yoke. e. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. f. SWP:Steam working pressure. g. WOG:Water, oil and gas(Cold working pressure) h. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.3 DESIGN A. Related Sections 1. Refer to Section 40 05 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves;" a. For information regarding submittals,quality assurance,coordination,material delivery, handling, and storage, project conditions, general requirements, material requirements, installation of valves,field testing, and related work. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS—NOT USED 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated, include body,seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Product Certificates: For each type of valve,from manufacturer. 1. Compliance with AWWA,ASTM,and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 0178 23"Operation PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 62-PAGE 1 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PLUG VALVES JULY 2024 and Maintenance Data." D. Field Quality Control: Provide field testing and performance reports. E. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for all indicated products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain all valves of the same style and type, along with the associated manual operators, from a single manufacturer. B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61,"Drinking Water Systems Components—Health Effects"for valve materials for potable-water service. C. Valve manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five years of experience is similar applications for size of valves furnished. References shall be provided upon request. D. Valve supplier shall maintain a complete stock of parts in the state where the Project is constructed or shall indicate that parts will be delivered upon 48-hour after receipt of request. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads,flange faces,grooves,and weld ends. 3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 4. Block valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 3. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,those listed for the various valves. 2.2 GENERAL A. Valve to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem,floor stand, worm and gear operator,operating nut, chain,wrench,valve boxes,and all accessories and related equipment for a complete operating system as required per this Section. Refer to Drawings for valves requiring limit switches, electric or pneumatic operators, and related controls. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 62-PAGE 2 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PLUG VALVES JULY 2024 B. Comply with the following: 1. Suitable for intended service. Renewable parts not to be of a lower quality than specified. 2. Same size as adjacent piping. 3. Ends to suit adjacent piping. 4. Operator sized to operate valve for full range of pressures and velocities. 5. Open by turning counterclockwise,unless otherwise specified. 6. Factory mount operator,actuator and accessories. C. Obtain all valves and associated manual operators from a single manufacturer. 2.3 VALVE DESCRIPTION A. Eccentric Plug Valve,3-inches and Smaller: 1. Description: Non-lubricated type,drip-tight shut off with pressure in either direction, cast body,flanged (ANSI B16.1 Class 125 and ANSI B16.5 Class 150)or threaded ends (NPT requirements of ANSI B1.20.1) for rigid joints and mechanical joints for buried valves. Design similar to MSS SP-108. 2. Body: a. Cast iron,ASTM b. ASTM A126,Class B, ductile iron ASTM A536,Grade 65-45-12,or carbon steel, ASTM A216, Grade WCB, with bolted bonnet of same material. C. Body receives a coating of corrosion-resistant nickel seat. d. Provide a grit seal for upper and lower journal. 3. Plug: a. Plug with upper and lower shaft in a one-piece casting,with round or rectangular port. b. Material: NBR face, ductile iron for cast iron or ductile iron body,for carbon steel body plug to be Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Stem Seal: NBR or PTFE. 5. Body and Bonnet Bearing:Type 316L stainless steel. 6. Bonnet Screws and Nuts:Stainless steel. 7. Port Area: 100%of connecting pipe area. 8. Pressure Ratings: a. Cast iron: 175-psi CWP b. Ductile iron: 175-psi CWP C. Carbon Steel: 285-psi CWP 9. Manufacture and Product: a. DeZurik b. Pratt C. Val-Matic B. Eccentric Plug Valve,4-inches and Larger: PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 62-PAGE 3 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PLUG VALVES JULY 2024 1. Description: Non-lubricated type, drip-tight shut off with pressure in either direction, cast body,flanged (ANSI B16.1 Class 125 and ANSI B16.5 Class 150)for rigid joints and mechanical joints for buried valves. Design similar to MSS SP-108. 2. Body: a. Cast iron,ASTM A126, Class B,or ductile iron,ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12,with bolted bonnet of same material. b. Body receives a welded overlay of corrosion-resistant nickel seat machined to a smooth finish 3. Plug: a. Plug with upper and lower shaft in a one-piece casting,with round or rectangular port. b. Material: Ductile iron with resilient facing of NBR. 4. Body and Bonnet Bearing:Type 316L or Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Packing: NBR or PTFE V-Type. 6. Bonnet Screws and Nuts:Stainless steel. 7. Port Area: 100%of connecting pipe area valves 4-inches and smaller,85%on 16-inch and smaller, 80%on 18-inch through 24-inch, 75%on 30-inch and larger. 8. Pressure Ratings: a. 4-inch to 12-inch: 175-psi CWP b. 14-inch and Larger: 150-psi CWP 9. Manufacture and Product: a. DeZurik b. Pratt C. Val-Matic d. GAlndustries 2.4 OPERATORS A. Buried Service: 1. 3-inch and Larger(not installed in Valve Vault): a. Non-rising stem with stainless steel shaft extension and wrench nut. Minimum extension stem diameter shall be 1-inch or diameter of valve shaft,whichever is larger. b. Provide valve box, bonnet and cover. B. Above Ground Service: 1. 4-inch and Smaller: Lever 2. 6-inches and Larger:Totally enclosed, geared, manual operator with hand wheel, wrench nut, or chain wheel as required. 3. Chain Wheel Operator: Provide for valves having a centerline six feet or more above the floor, unless otherwise noted. a. Handwheel direct mounted,with galvanized or cadmium-plated chain. C. Wrench nut, handwheel and gear operator shall comply with the requirements of Section 40 PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 62-PAGE 4 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PLUG VALVES JULY 2024 OS 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves." D. Electric and pneumatic operators and actuators shall comply with the requirements of the applicable Section 40 05 57.23 "Electric Motor Actuators." 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Identification: Provide valve identification tags in accordance with Section 10 90 00 "Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging." B. Refer to Section 40 05 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves"for addition accessories requirements. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 40 05 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves"for Execution requirements for the installation,field quality control,and manufacturer's services. B. Plug valves shall be installed with stem installed horizontal. C. Horizontal flow 1. Install plug valves with flow against face of plug. 2. Install valve laying on its side so plug rotates 90-degrees upward to open. 3. The flow shall produce an "unseating" pressure;the plug shall open into the top half of the valve D. Vertical flow 1. Install seat in the highest portion of the valve. END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 62-PAGE 5 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PLUG VALVES JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 62-PAGE 6 OF 6 BID SET 0537-055-01 PLUG VALVES JULY 2024 SECTION 40 05 64 BUTTERFLY VALVES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following butterfly valves: 1. AWWA Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves;3-inch and larger. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Refer to Section 40 05 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves;" a. For information regarding submittals;quality assurance;coordination; material delivery, handling, and storage; projection conditions;general requirements; material requirements; installation of valves; field testing; and related work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated, include body,seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Product Certificates: For each type of valve,from manufacturer. 1. Compliance with AWWA,ASTM,and ANSI standards including hydrostatic tests, operational tests and other testing required by the standards. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 0178 23"Operation and Maintenance Data." D. Field Quality Control: Provide field testing and performance reports. E. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for all indicated products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain all valves of the same style and type, along with the associated manual operators, from a single manufacturer. B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61,"Drinking Water Systems Components—Health Effects"for valve materials for potable-water service. C. Valve manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five years of experience is similar applications for size of valves furnished. References shall be provided upon request. D. Valve supplier shall maintain a complete stock of parts in the state where the Project is constructed or shall indicate that parts will be delivered upon 48-hour after receipt of request. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 64-PAGE 1 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Butterfly Valves JULY 2024 2. Protect threads,flange faces,grooves,and weld ends. 3. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 4. Block valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 3. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. 1.5 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: Rubber seated shall be tight closing type conforming to the latest version of AWWA C504 standards. 1. AWWA C-540-"Power-Activating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates." 2. AWWA C-550-"Standard Specification for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants." 3. ASTM A-48-"Standard Specification for Grey Iron Castings." 4. ASTM A-126-"Standard Specification for Grey Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings." 5. ASTM A-536-"Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings." 6. ANSI-"American National Standards Institute." 7. ANSI/NSF-"Standard 60/61." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each valve shall have manufacturer's nameplate in stainless steel showing the pressure ratings, serial and model numbers,year manufactured and other pertinent data. B. Butterfly valves and manual operators shall be completely assembled at the factory, adjusted for correct seating, and tested in accordance with the AWWA C-504 standard. Factory adjustments and operational tests shall be performed on each valve with the valve oriented in the same position as the installed field position. The valves shall be cycled five times (full open to full close) and successfully seat tested each cycle to certify proper seating. Seat adjustments and manual indicators shall be set and checked at the factory. C. For valves 24 inches and larger, the manufacturer shall conduct ultra-sound testing on each of the valve bodies and discs in addition to hydrostatic testing of each valve body. The manufacturer shall perform the hydrostatic valve tests in accordance with AWWA C-504 and provide certified reports of test results. The manufacturer shall notify the OWNER three weeks prior to testing so that the OWNER may witness tests. Hydrostatic test pressures shall be 150 psi for the bodies and 150 psi for the discs and seats. D. All surfaces and materials in contact with water, or in contact with a chemical being added to water that is being treated for potable use, shall conform to ANSI/NSF 61 and be certified by an organization accredited by ANSI,or shall meet the TCEQ requirements for contact with potable water. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 64-PAGE 2 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Butterfly Valves JULY 2024 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Crispin, K-Flo B. DeZurik C. Pratt 2.2 GENERAL A. Obtain all butterfly valves and associated manual operators of a given type from a single manufacturer. B. Valve operators to turn to left, counterclockwise,to open; and to right,clockwise,to close. All valves shall have position indicators. C. End connections to be compatible with those specified for pipe. Mechanical joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C11/A21.11. Flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1 and have a pressure rating to meet the requirements of the adjoining pipe. D. Furnish geared operators for all valves in pressure piping systems(>_10 psig working pressure) and valves 6 inches and larger, unless otherwise specified. E. Furnish geared operators with the following features unless otherwise specified. 1. Weatherproof enclosure. 2. Grease lubricated design. 3. Closes valve when turned clockwise. 4. Position indicator. F. All internal materials for valves shall withstand corrosion. G. All valves in submerged service shall utilize 316 stainless steel hardware and bolts. H. The water being delivered through the valves may be treated with chlorine and/or chloramines. The materials used to manufacture the valves shall be resistant to chlorine and chloramine oxidation. I. Buried valves shall be quarter-turn butterfly valves that utilize 316 stainless steel shaft extensions with stem guides or rock shields,2-inch square nut,and adjustable valve boxes with covers. A 2-inch nut shall be located within 18 inches of grade. J. Fasteners on buried valves,valves in manholes and vaults, MJ joints,flanges,and restraints shall be 316 stainless steel. Buried MJ fitting bolts may be Corten. Fasteners on exposed valves shall be 316 stainless steel. K. Areas on the disc and bodythat are subject to cavitation damage shall be constructed of materials that are resistant to the effects of cavitation. L. Maximum velocity through the valves should be assumed to be 12 feet per second when fully opened. 2.3 VALVE DESCRIPTION A. Provide valves as shown on the Plans. B. Valve type:AWWA C504 rubber-seated butterfly valve. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 64-PAGE 3 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Butterfly Valves JULY 2024 C. Non-shockworking pressure: 150 psi, minimum,sized to meet test pressure of pipeline: 1. Body type:Short body flanged, unless shown otherwise on the plans. 2. Valve flanges for valves 24-inch and larger and for all exposed valves shall have ANSI Class 125 or Class 250 flanges based on the corresponding pipe class. Buried valves smaller than 24-inch shall utilize MJ joints. Two(2)trunnions for shaft bearings shall be integral with each valve body. Valve bodies shall be hydrostatic tested to a minimum of working pressure class. D. Valve construction: 1. Body: Cast iron (ASTM A126 Class B)or ductile iron (ASTM A-536 Grade 65/45/12) for valves smaller than 24-inch diameter. Ductile iron (ASTM A-536 Grade 65/45/12) for valves 24 inches and larger. 2. Shaft: Solid stainless steel,type 316. 3. Disc: Ductile iron ASTM A-536, Grade 65/45/12. Operating pressure of valve disc shall be 150 psi. Valve discs shall be hydrostatic tested to a minimum of 150 psi. 4. Seats: EPDM rubber mechanically secured to the body. Valve seats shall provide tight shut-off at 0 to 150 psi operating pressure. The seat shall be field adjustable and field replaceable. The mating surface shall be 18-8 stainless steel or a 95 percent pure nickel overlay. 5. Bearings: Fitted sleeve type. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant and self-lubricated materials that will not deteriorate neutral or synthetic rubber. 6. Shaft Seals: Split-V or O-ring type,suitable for buried service requiring no gland adjustment. 2.4 OPERATORS A. Refer to Section 40 05 51 for manual operators' requirements. B. Refer to Section 40 05 57.23 for electric motor operator requirements. 2.5 FINISHES A. Paint exterior of valves and operators as shown on the plans and specified in Section 40 05 51 colors to be selected by OWNER. Interior of valves shall be factory lined with NSF approved epoxy meeting the requirements of Section 09 9100,AWWA C550, and Section 40 05 51. Flange faces shall be protected from atmospheric corrosion. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 4005 51 for Execution requirements for the installation,field quality control, and manufacturer's services. B. Install butterflyvalves with shafts horizontal unless otherwise shown. END OF SECTION PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4005 64-PAGE 4 OF 4 BID SET 0537-055-01 Butterfly Valves JULY 2024 SECTION 40 08 00 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide all necessary labor, materials, and equipment, including test pumps and gauges, as well as temporary valves and piping to perform the testing operations of piping systems as specified herein. 2. All piping systems will be tested. 3. Contractor's Responsibility: a. Take such precautions as required to prevent damage to lines and appurtenances being tested. b. Repair any damage resulting from tests. C. Repair and retest all items which do not pass the tests as specified herein. d. Conduct all tests in the presence of the Engineer,and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and all State and local authorities having jurisdiction. e. All necessary pumps, water, pipe connections, meters,gauges, and any necessary apparatus to perform and conduct the tests shall be furnished by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment and make all tests at Contractor's expense without separate measurement and payment but said expense shall be subsidiary to installation of pipe. 4. Test pressures are specified in Test Pressures for Pressure Lines in Part 3 of this Section or in the pipe schedule. 5. Water used for testing purposes shall be potable water only. 1.3 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Gravity lines: shall refer to PVC, clay pipe, reinforced concrete (non-cylinder-type) pipe, and other such pipes designed to normally operate in a partially full condition. 2. Pressure lines: shall refer to ductile iron, PVC, RCCP, steel, and other such pipes designed to operate in a full condition, with the system's energy grade line at or above the top of the pipe during normal operating conditions. 3. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. 4. LLDPE: Linear low-density,polyethylene. 5. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 6. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride. 7. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 1 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 B. References: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C 600—Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances b. C 605—Standard for Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water C. M 23—PVC Pipe: Design and Installation 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C 924—Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method b. F 1417—Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air 3. Unibell PVC Plastic Pipe Association: a. "Handbook of PVC Pipe: Design and Construction, Latest Edition" b. UNI-B-6,"Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the general requirements of Section 0160 00"Product Requirements" and the supplemental requirements below. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit a description of proposed testing methods, procedures,and apparatus for review prior to testing. 2. Submit description of weir and weir tables to be used in infiltration test, if applicable. C. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Submit a certified test report for each test to Engineer certifying the test pressures, duration of the test, leakage and pertinent observations and comments. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Test equipment shall be selected,obtained, and maintained by the Contractor. All gauges shall be calibrated prior to beginning testing and as often as is necessary to provide accurate, reliable information. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain the Engineer's approval of proposed testing methods, procedures, and apparatus, before performing any test. Upon receipt of the Engineer's approval,submit a schedule of testing dates and times at least 24 hours in advance of testing. B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 2 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: 1) Maximum average ID shall be equal to the average OD minus two minimum wall thicknesses per applicable ASTM Standard. Manufacturing and other tolerances shall not be considered for determining allowable deflections. 2) Maximum allowable deflections shall be as follows: a) Drainage Pipe:6.5 percent nominal inside diameter. b) PVC Composite Pipe:3.0 percent maximum ID. c) Plastic Pipe: Percentage of maximum average ID shall be as listed in Table 1 Maximum PercentaFLe Deflection Allowed Nominal Pipe Size, inches Mb Percentage Deflection Allowed Up to and including 12 5.0 Over 12, up to and including 30 4.0 Over 30, up to and including 60 3.0 Over 60, up to and including 90 2.5 Over 90, up to and including 120 2.0 Over 120 1.5 Source: NCTCOG Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Latest Edition C. Crushed,broken,cracked,or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. C. Test new piping systems,and parts of existing systems that have been altered,extended,or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose,cover,or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Sewage and Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 3 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 authorities havingjurisdiction, UNI-B-6,and the following: a. Exception: Piping with soil tight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction. b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. C. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924. 6. Force-Main and Pressure Piping: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports, and anchors have sufficiently hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1.5 times the maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. a. Ductile-Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing"Section. b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA C605, "Hydrostatic Testing Maintenance" Section. 3.2 CLEANING,TESTING,AND DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER LINES A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. B. Hydrostatic Tests: 1. Ductile Iron and Plastic Piping Systems: Test with a pressure of not less than 150 psi maintained over a period of time of not less than 4 hours. Test Polyethylene Piping Systems per paragraph below. 2. Concrete Piping Systems:Test with a maximum pressure of 120%of design operating pressure maintained over a period of time of not less than 4 hours. 3. Steel Piping Systems: Test with a maximum pressure of 150%and not less than 120% of design operating pressure maintained over a period of time of not less than 4 hours. 4. Water lines of materials in combination shall be tested for the type of pipe material with the least stringent hydraulic test pressure maintained over a period of time of not less than 4 hours. 5. Rate of leakage of all pipes tested shall not exceed 11.65 gallons-per-inch of nominal diameter of pipe per mile over a 24 hour period.Acceptable values for 4 hour at a test pressure of 150-psi are listed in Table 2. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 4 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 Length Pipe Diameter(Inches) (Feet) 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.11 0.12 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 10 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.24 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 6 15 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.17 0.20 0.23 0.26 0.30 0.33 0.36 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 1 3 20 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.22 0.26 0.31 0.35 0.40 0.44 0.49 4 6 7 9 0 2 3 5 8 25 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.28 0.33 0.39 0.44 0.50 0.55 0.61 6 7 9 1 3 5 7 8 2 50 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.55 0.66 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1.31 1 5 8 2 6 9 3 7 4 75 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.83 0.99 1.16 1.32 1.49 1.66 1.82 7 2 8 3 9 4 0 5 3 100 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.10 1.32 1.54 1.77 1.99 2.21 2.43 2 9 7 4 1 9 6 4 8 200 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.7 2.21 2.65 3.09 3.53 3.97 4.41 4.85 4 9 4 8 3 8 2 7 7 300 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.2 2.6 3.31 3.97 4.63 5.30 5.96 6.62 7.28 6 8 0 2 4 7 9 1 5 400 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.6 2.9 3.5 4.41 5.30 6.18 7.06 7.94 8.83 9.71 8 8 7 7 6 5 5 4 3 500 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.2 2.5 2.9 3.3 3.6 4.4 5.52 6.62 7.72 8.83 9.93 11.0 12.14 0 7 4 1 7 4 1 8 1 3 600 1.3 1.7 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.5 3.9 4.4 5.3 6.62 7.94 9.27 10.5 11.9 13.2 14.56 2 7 1 5 9 3 7 1 0 9 2 4 1.5 20. 2.5 3.0 3.6 4.1 4.6 5.1 6.1 7.72 9.27 10.8 12.3 13.9 15.4 16.99 700 4 6 7 9 0 2 3 5 8 1 6 0 5 1.7 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.1 4.7 5.3 5.8 7.0 10.5 12.3 14.1 15.8 17.6 800 7 5 4 3 2 1 0 8 6 8.83 9 6 2 9 5 19.42 1.9 2.6 3.3 3.9 4.6 5.3 5.9 6.6 7.9 11.9 13.9 15.8 17.8 19.8 900 9 5 1 7 3 0 6 2 4 9'93 2 0 9 7 6 21.85 2.2 2.9 3.6 4.4 5.1 5.8 6.6 7.3 8.8 11.0 13.2 15.4 17.6 19.8 22.0 1000 24.27 1 4 8 1 5 8 2 6 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 Valve 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.94 1.12 1.31 1.50 1.68 1.87 2.06 9 5 1 7 4 0 6 2 5 Allowable Leakage(gallons)for 4 Hours=4 x(S x D V P)_133,200 S = Length of Pipe, Feet Valve Leakage Allowance-0.0078 Gal/Hour/Inch of valve size D = Diameter of Pipe, Inches Test: Ductile Iron, Plastic at 150-psi P = 150 psi Concrete 120 percent Design Pressure Height Correction =0.43 psi/Ft Steel 120 percednt Min.to 150 percent Max, Design Working Pressure Source: NCTCOG Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction,2004 Edition PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 5 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 6. Newly laid pipe,or any valve section thereof,shall be subjected to the test with the gauge located at the lowest point in the system to be tested. If the line cannot be tested at its lowest point, a correction factor of minus 0.43 lb/vertical feet shall be made. 7. If test indicates a leakage in excess of Table 2 rate, CONTRACTOR shall repair the leak and retest. Even if test requirements are met, all apparent leaks shall be stopped. 8. OWNER cannot guarantee that an old existing system valve shall hold the required pressure. CONTRACTOR has the option of testing against the existing valve and, if it does not hold pressure, plugging the new pipe,testing, and then connecting to the existing valve, or accomplish the latter initially. 9. Prepare reports of testing activities. C. Polyethylene Piping Systems: 1. Test pressure shall be measured at the lowest elevation in the test section. 2. Hydrostatic test at a maximum pressure of 150 percent of design operating pressure maintained over a period of time of not less than 4 hours when the test section is all polyethylene pressure piping. 3. Hydrostatic test pressure is the pressure rating of the lowest pressure rated, non- polyethylene component in the system when the test section contains non- polyethylene components. 4. Thermoplastic piping has reduced strength at elevated temperatures so the test pressure must be reduced when the test section is at elevated temperature resulting from service conditions or from environmental conditions by multiplying the test pressure by the appropriate Table 3 multiplier. Test Temperature,T °F T<_80 80<T<_90 90<T<_100 100<T 110<T 120<T 130<T :5110 :5120 :5130 :5140 °C T<_27 27<T<_32 32<T<_38 38<T<_43 43<T<_49 49<T<_54 54<T<_60 Multiplier 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.75 0.65 0.60 0.50 Maximum service temperature for polyethylene piping is 140 degrees F(60 degrees C) Source: NCTCOG Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction,2004 Edition, Item 506.5 Hydrostatic Test D. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge new potable water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use in accordance with Section 33 01 10.58. 2. Fire-protection water piping not connected to potable water supply: Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 6 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 3. Fire-protection water piping connected to potable water supply: Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Retain last subparagraph above orfirst subparagraph below. C. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow standing for 3 hours. d. After standing time,flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. 4. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. 3.3 TESTING OF PRESSURE LINES(EXCEPT POTABLE WATER LINES) A. General: 1. Allow concrete blocking to cure for at least 28 days before testing. 2. Backfill and compact soil behind all blocking. 3. Backfill over pipe to extent necessary to restrain the piping. Backfill shall extend to within 1-foot of proposed final grade. 4. Conduct water leakage test after completing hydrostatic pressure tests. 5. Lines which fail to hold the specified test pressure for at least 4 hours or which exceed an allowable leakage rate specified below, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and retested at the Contractor's expense. 6. System shall be tested in sections between valves and shall not exceed 2,000 feet unless authorized by Engineer. B. Procedures for Hydrostatic Pressure Tests: 1. Slowly fill isolated section of line with water. 2. Ensure that all air has been expelled through air and vacuum release valves,taps,or connections shown on Plans for permanent piping,valves, or accessories. Do not make additional taps solely for air expulsion purposes unless approved by Engineer. No additional compensation will be made for additional taps. 3. Allow concrete pipe to stand full of water at least 24 hours before starting leakage test. 4. Apply specified test pressure based on the elevation of the lowest section of line under test and corrected to elevation of test gauge. Duration of test shall be 4 hours. 5. At the end of the 4 hours of the test,the entire route of the pipeline shall be inspected to locate any leaks or breaks. Any defective joints cracked or defective pipe, fittings, or valves discovered in consequence of this pressure test shall be removed and replaced with sound material in the manner provided and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. Any and all noticeable leaks shall PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 7 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 be repaired regardless of whether the actual leakage is within the allowable. The pipe shall be retested over a period of two hours. 6. All piping systems shall be tested for leakage by a hydrostatic pressure test. Lines shall be filled slowly,with a maximum velocity of 1-foot per second,while venting all air. If permanent air vents have not been installed,the Contractor shall install corporation cocks at all high points to expel air during initial filling and testing of the lines. 7. The duration of each leakage test shall be two hours unless otherwise specified,and during the test the line shall be subjected to a continuous specified test pressure at the lowest elevation. 8. Leakage is defined as the net quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe,or any valved section thereof, necessary to maintain pressure within 5-psi of the specified leakage test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air in the pipeline has been expelled. No installation shall be accepted if the leakage is greater than that determined by the following formula: SS xDD xPP x0.5 LL = 133,200 Where: L=allowable leakage in gallons per hour D= nominal diameter of the pipe, inches P=average test pressure during the leakage test, psig S= length of pipe tested, in feet 9. The test pressure shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe and to an approved water container,or other approved method,for accurate measurement. The test pressure shall be maintained (by additional pumping, if necessary)for the specified time. 10. While the line is under pressure,the system and all exposed pipe,fittings,valves,and hydrants shall be carefully examined for leakage. All defective elements shall be repaired or replaced and the test repeated until all visible leakage has been stopped and the allowable leakage requirements have been met. 11. On completion of tests,any newly installed,approved taps shall be tightly plugged with brass fittings. 12. Thoroughly purge all compressed air lines after testing. C. Clean and disinfect piping in contact with water being treated for potable use as follows: 1. Purge new water piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use in accordance with Section 33 01 10.58. 2. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. 3.4 TEST PRESSURES FOR PRESSURE LINES A. Piping shall be tested to pressures shown on Plans. If not shown,test as follows: 1. All process piping shall be tested to 75-psi. 2. Pump discharge and force main to 200-psi. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 8 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 3. Chemical piping to 100-psi. 4. Plant water and potable piping to 150-psi. 5. Drain and sewage lines using pressure pipe to 50 psi. 3.5 TESTING OF DRAINS,SEWERS,AND OTHER GRAVITY LINES A. General: 1. For all pipe,the method of testing shall be an exfiltration test using either a hydrostatic test or a pneumatic test. For any flexible, non-metallic,or non-concrete pipe, such as plastic (PVC, CPVC, PE, etc.) or fiber reinforced plastic pipe or similar flexible pipe materials, a deflection test shall also be performed. 2. Deflection Test: Upon completion of flexible wastewater pipe installation, Contractor shall test pipe for vertical deflection. Deflections tests shall be accomplished no sooner than 30 days after completion of pipe placement and compaction of backfill. 3. Contractor may make first test promptly after first section of line is laid and backfilled. A section of pipe will normally be a run between two manholes, or between a structure and the first manhole. 4. Do not lay additional piping of the type being tested until test of first section is complete. 5. Do not perform any City required leak test until backfill has been installed to grade for a minimum of 30 days. 6. Individual leaks will ordinarily be revealed by looking through sewer(larger than 24- inch diameter)with a light while ground water level is over sewer, during water tamping operations, or immediately after water from exfiltration tests is emptied from sewer. 7. Settlement in backfill during exfiltration tests will be taken as an indication of leakage. B. Hydrostatic Exfiltration Test Procedure: 1. Seal ends of section being tested with watertight plugs. 2. Fill section with water 24 hours prior to start of test. 3. Vent line during filling so that no air is trapped in line. 4. Leave outlets of stacks, inlets, and service lines exposed and unplugged until after exfiltration test has been made. 5. Outlets terminating below level of test water surface to be temporarily extended upward by installing lengths of pipe. 6. Measure leakage or exfiltration during test period by adding measured quantities of water to maintain water level in test structure. 7. Quantity of water added to maintain water level is amount of leakage or exfiltration. 8. Test for at least four hours with minimum head of four feet measured above top crown,inside pipe at upper end of section being tested. Allow for increase in height due to ground water level, if any. 9. Storm sewer leads to be tested with water level at gutter grade. 10. After completion of satisfactory test, remove lengths of pipe added for test. 11. Allowable Leakage: Allowable leakage for exfiltration test in any individual section or entire sewer line under construction shall not exceed 10 gallons per inch of inside PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 9 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. C. Hydrostatic Exfiltration Test Procedure for Agri Drain Structures and Associated Piping: Following installation of pipe,Agri Drain structures, and backfill, all joints as a system shall be tested by the exfiltration test as follows: 1. Seal open ends of pipe upstream and downstream of the Agri Drain structure with watertight plugs. 2. Fill Agri Drain structure to the top with water. 3. Vent pipes during filling so that no air is trapped in line. 4. Measure leakage or exfiltration after a 24-hour period by observing the level of water from the top of the Agri Drain structure. 5. The difference in depth between the water level and the top of the Agri Drain structure is the amount of leakage or exfiltration. 6. Allowable Leakage: Allowable leakage for exfiltration test shall be a difference in depth less than 1.25 inches. D. Low Pressure Air Joint Test: 1. All pipe joints shall be tested in accordance with this Section. 2. Equipment shall be the product of manufacturers having more than five years of regular production of successful joint testers. Joint tester shall be as manufactured by Chane Industrial, Inc., of Edina, Minnesota, or equal. 3. Testing shall be performed on all joints after backfill has been installed and properly compacted, and as installation progresses. At no time shall pipe installation exceed 100 feet beyond the last joint tested. 4. Joints failing to meet the requirements of this test should be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer or the defective pipe shall be replaced. Rejected pipe shall be removed from the project. Installation shall be stopped until defective joints are repaired or replaced. 5. The testing equipment shall be assembled and positioned over the center of the pipe joint and the end element tubes inflated to a maximum of 25 psi. 6. Pressurize the center joint test area to 4.0 psig and allow the temperature and pressure to stabilize at the minimum of 2.5 psig for a period of 2.0 minutes prior to testing. 7. To test, adjust the pressure to 4.0 psig and measure the time required to decrease the pressure from 4.0 psig to 2.0 psig. 8. The joint is acceptable if the time for the pressure to drop from 4.0 psig to 2.0 psig is greater than 15 seconds. E. Pneumatic Test Method (Air Test): 1. Air tests shall be made by the pressure drop versus time method, in accordance with UNI-13-6, "Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe." 2. Equipment:The equipment used shall meet the following minimum requirements: a. Pneumatic plugs shall have a sealing length equal to or greater than the diameter of the pipe to be inspected. PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 08 00-PAGE 10 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 b. Pneumatic plugs shall resist internal test pressures without requiring external bracing or blocking. C. All air used shall pass through a single control panel. d. Three individual hoses shall be used for the following connections: 1) From the control panel to pneumatic plugs for inflation. 2) From the control panel to a sealed line for introducing the low-pressure air. 3) From a sealed line to control panel for continually monitoring the air pressure rise in the sealed line. e. Air compressor of adequate capacity for charging the system. 3. Procedures: All pneumatic plugs shall be seal-tested before being used in the actual test installation. One length of pipe shall be laid on the ground and sealed at both ends with the pneumatic plugs to be checked. Air shall be introduced into the plugs to 25 psig. The sealed pipe shall be pressurized to 5 psig. The plugs shall hold against this pressure without bracing and without movement of the plugs out of the pipe. 4. After a manhole-to-manhole reach of pipe has been backfilled and the pneumatic plugs have been checked by the above-mentioned procedure,the plugs shall be placed in the line at each manhole and inflated to 25 psig. Low pressure air shall be introduced into this sealed line until the internal air pressure reaches 4 psig. Allow at least two minutes for the air temperature to stabilize, adding only the amount of air required to maintain pressure. 5. If the pipe to be tested is submerged in ground water, insert a pipe probe by boring or jetting into the backfill material adjacent to the center of the pipe, and determine the pressure in the probe when air passes slowly through it. This is backpressure due to ground water submergence over the end of the probe. All gauge pressure in the test should be increased by this amount. After the stabilization period (3.5 psig of minimum pressure in the pipe) start stopwatch. Determine time in seconds that is required for the internal air pressure to reach 2.5 psig. 6. Allowable Leakage: For sections of pipe less than 36-inch average inside diameter,the minimum time allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge shall be computed from the following equation: T=0.0850(D)(I<)/(Q) Where: T=shortest time for pressure to drop 1.0 PSI gauge in seconds K=0.000419(D)(L), but not less than 1.0 D=average inside diameter in inches L= length of line in feet of same pipe size being tested Q= rate of loss, 0.0015 cubic feet per minute per square foot internal surface shall be used. 7. Since a K value of less than 1.0 shall not be used,there are minimum testing times for each pipe diameter as follows: PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 08 00-PAGE 11 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 Table No.4 Minimum Testing Times Pipe Diameteirinimum Time Length for (inches) (seconds) Minimum Tirn]= 6 340 398 0.855 (L) 8 454 298 1.520(L) 10 567 239 3.374(L) 12 680 199 3.419 (L) 15 850 159 5.342 (L) 18 1020 133 7.693 (L) 21 1190 114 10.471(L) 24 1360 100 13.676(L) 27 1530 88 17.309(L) 30 1700 80 21.369(L) 33 1870 72 25.856(L) 3.6 TELEVISION INSPECTION (NOT USED) 3.7 PIPELINE REPAIR A. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. Replace leaking piping using new materials and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. 3.8 QUALITY CONTROL A. The Pipe Testing report template located after the END OF SECTION is part of this Section. END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 12 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 QUALITY CONTROL PIPE TESTING REPORT Project: Contractor: Pipe Diameter: Location: Date: From Station: To Station: TEST MEDIUM (circle one) Water Air Other(specify) TEST EQUIPMENT: (list) SPECIFIED TEST PRESSURE: psi Specified Duration: Time (gauge on): Pressure (start): Time (check): Pressure Drop: Pressure (check): Water Added: Time (check): Pressure Drop: Pressure (check): Water Added: Time (check): Pressure Drop: Time(gauge off): Pressure (check): Water Added: Pressure(finish): REMARKS: WITNESSING SIGNATURES: Contractor: Signature Title Date Engineer: Signature Title Date PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4008 00-PAGE 13 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM MER ASSOCIATES,INC. 40 08 00-PAGE 14 OF 14 BID SET 0537-055-01 FIELD TESTING OF PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS JULY 2024 SECTION 40 42 13 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. C. Mineral fiber. 2. Adhesives,mastics,sealants,and tapes. 3. Factory-applied and field-applied jackets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail application of protective shields,saddles,and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows,fittings,flanges,valves,and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties,equipment connections,and access panels. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 8. Detail field application for each equipment type. 9. Manufacturer's warranty for products indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic,tapes, and cement material containers,with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less,and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 1 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation,coverings, cements,adhesive,and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt,water,and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. General Requirements: 1. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead,mercury,or mercury compounds. 2. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. 3. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. 4. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. B. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible,foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K. 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552,Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552,Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552,Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 6. Factory fabricated shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. C. FlexibleElastomeric: Closed-cell,sponge-or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534,Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.;Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC;AP Armaflex. C. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. D. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.;Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. C. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 2 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I,850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547,Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets,and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated. Adhesive shall be as recommended by the supplier of the insulation and jacket materials. 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets,and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C,Type II, and as recommended by insulation supplier. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based;suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B,0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644,59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. 2.5 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint sealants shall be as recommended by pipe insulation supplier and the Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 4. Color: White or gray. B. ASJ Flashing Sealants,and Vinyl, PVDC,and Aluminum Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets,and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper,fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136,Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive,acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136,Type I. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 3 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921,Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209,Alloy 3003,3005,3105 or 5005,Temper H-14. 1. Minimum Thickness: a. Outdoors:0.024 inches. b. Indoors: 0.016 2. Finish: Stucco-embossed. 3. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and Kraft paper. 4. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and Kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick Polysurlyn. 5. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: a. Same material,finish,and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2-piece or gore,45-and 90-degree,short-and long-radius elbows. C. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End caps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. C. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil-thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Tapes supplied with products per manufacturers recommendations. B. Securements:Aluminum bands, insulations pins and hangers,staples,wire,corner angles and related components supplied with products per manufacturers recommendations. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Complywith requirements for heat tracing that applies to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 4 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 B. Install insulation materials,forms,vapor barriers or retarders,jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets,clips,or other attachment devices to piping,fittings,and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with the least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints,seams,and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields overjacket,arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support,and shield. K. Apply adhesives,mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. 4. For below ambient services,apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 5. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 6. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 5 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightlyjoined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations(That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 6 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. 3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings,Valves,Strainers, Flanges,and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings,valves,strainers,flanges, unions,and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not insulate flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints. 3. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints,seams,voids,and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 4. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 5. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 6. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter,whichever is thicker. Fill joints,seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 7. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter,whichever is thicker. 8. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 9. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted aluminum cover over elbows,tees, strainers, valves,flanges,and unions. Terminate ends with aluminum end caps. Tape aluminum covers to adjoining insulation facing using aluminum tape. 10. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,test connections,flow meters,sensors,switches,and transmitters on insulated pipes, PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 7 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame,with its attached insulation,to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry,apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Finish exposed surfaces with an aluminum jacket. 3.5 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated,seal longitudinal seams,end joints,and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services,secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services,do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 8 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturers recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of airto surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 9 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated,seal longitudinal seams, end joints,and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces,secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation,to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. 1. Install aluminum jackets on exterior above grade piping and fittings and on interior piping insulated using cellular-glass. 3.9 FINISHES A. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. General Requirements: 1. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 10 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. 2. All exposed outdoor piping and piping installed in unheated vaults, 8 inches in diameter and smaller(Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings)shall be insulated. PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE Pipe7qW insulation Thickness (inches) Diameter 19 . .. Outdoor (inches) AL Instrument Sensing Linen') ---- NA Domestic Hot Water 3/4 3/4 Flexible Elastomeric Domestic Cold Water 1 Flexible Elastomeric Water and Waste Water Less than 2 NA 1-1/2 Cellular-glass Mineral Fiber Water and Waste Water 2 to 6 NA 2 Cellular-glass Mineral Fiber Water and Waste Water 8 to 12 NA 2 Cellular-glass Mineral Fiber Vent,Air Release 1 to 2 NA 1 Flexible Elastomeric Mineral Fiber Blower Air Piping(4) Mineral Fiber Sample 1/2 to 1 NA 3/4 Flexible Elastomeric 1. Instrument sense lines include tubing used for differential pressure measurements in venture flow meters, pressure indicating devices, and other instruments. 2. Outdoor includes piping exposed to atmosphere; areas inside unheated vaults, utility corridors, chases, etc. 3. When more than one insulation type named Contractor may select. 4.Apply insulation to hot blower discharge piping in accessible areas for personnel protection. 3.11 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket,install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. 1. Piping,Concealed: a. None. 2. Piping, Exposed: a. Aluminum,Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch thick. 3.12 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Piping: 1. Aluminum,Stucco Embossed with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.024 inch thick. END OF SECTION PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 11 OF 12 BID SET 0537-0S5-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLUM M ER ASSOCIATES,INC. 4042 13-PAGE 12 OF 12 BID SET 0537-055-01 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION JULY 2024 SECTION 40 7100 FLOW INSTRUMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes flow instrumentation used in process control system. Refer to Attachment A of this Section for the Instrumentation Schedule. B. The PCSI shall furnish the labor, materials, equipment, and related services required to install and bring into operation all new instrumentation, complete as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 01 Summary of Work 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 01 for general submittal requirements. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide literature detailing all custom configured parameters and back-up/restore procedures for each network component. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Refer to Division 01 Section 0140 00 Quality Requirements 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Refer to Division 10 General Requirements. B. Deliver instrumentation in packaging designed to prevent damage from static electricity and physical damage. C. Store instrumentation according to manufacturer requirements. At a minimum, store indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect instrumentation from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Also, protect from all forms of electrical and magnetic energy that could reasonably cause damage. FLOW INSTRUMENTS 4071 00- 1 1.06 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATIONS A. Instruments intended for installation within hazardous locations shall have Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and CENELEC approvals and certifications at or beyond the hazardous area classification in which they are to be installed. 1.07 DEVIATIONS A. No deviations from the specification requirements will be allowed except those listed in the table of compliance that are reviewed and approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All cabling, mounting hardware, and accessories required to install all components of the instrumentation system shall be provided by the PCSI and/or CONTRACTOR. B. Instrumentation shall be suitable for installation at the location as shown on the drawings. C. To the furthest extent possible, instruments of similar types shall be by the same manufacturer and match the OWNER's existing installation base and OWNER's preferences for types of instruments. 2.02 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts 1. One instrument of each type 2. One year's supply of all maintenance components, kits,and consumables. 2.03 WARRANTY A. Provide a minimum of two-year manufacturer warranty for all supplied instrumentation and equipment. FLOW INSTRUMENTS 4071 00-2 2.04 FLOW METER—ELECTROMAGNETIC TYPE-FLANGED A. General 1. Microprocessor-based Pulsed DC electromagnetic induction type providing a signal which is linear to the flow rate of a conductive liquid in a full pipe. Use of insert flow meters or multiple single point probes inserted into a spool piece is unacceptable. 2. Measure flow of liquids with a minimum conductivity of 20 microS/cm. B. Function 1. Input Power: 120 VAC to flow transmitter. 2. Accuracy: +/-0.5 percent of rate for velocities of 1 to 30 fps. 3. Turndown: 10:1 minimum,at flow rates above 1 fps. 4. Process Temperature: Up to 60 degrees C, unless otherwise noted. 5. Ambient Temperature: -10 to 50 degrees C. 6. Provide RFI Protection and zero stability feature. 7. Operating Temperature:23 to 176 degrees F. 8. Outputs: one 4-20mA,one relay, and one pulse output signal. 9. Display: LCD,two-line Digital indicator scalable to flow rate engineering units or 0-100 percent. 10. Stability: Combined temperature effects shall be less than 0.2 percent of maximum span per 50 degrees F temperature change. Effect on accuracy, due to static pressure changes, shall be negligible. 11. Drift:0.10 percent per six months for 4-20 mA output. 12. Meter shall be capable of running empty indefinitely without damage to any component. C. Physical 1. Meter Tube: Stainless steel, NEMA 6P rated for indefinite submergence in 30 feet of water for inside of the vault and Carbon steel with 304 Stainless steel interior and NEMA 4X rated for other applications. All exterior surfaces shall be painted with chemical and corrosion-resistant epoxy finish. 2. Flanges:ANSI B 16.5 Class 150 or AWWA Class D epoxy-coated carbon steel flanges as required to match the associated piping system. 3. Wetted Parts:316 SS, bullet nosed or elliptical self-cleaning type electrodes. 4. Liner: Hard Rubber. 5. Transmitter: NEMA Type 4X, unless installed in locations such as vaults that will experience submergence. In those applications NEMA 6P is required. Where hazardous areas are indicated on the Drawings,the equipment shall be rated for that area. 6. Hazardous Area Rating: Class 1 Div 2 or Class 1 Div 1 as indicated on the Drawings. FLOW INSTRUMENTS 4071 00-3 7. Transmitter Mounting: Integral to meter tube, or suitable for remote mount on pipe or stand mounting indoors or outdoors as indicated on the Drawings and Instrument Schedule. 8. The transmitter display shall be oriented on the upright position to be easily readable. 9. For outdoor installations,the terminal box conduit entries shall not be on the top. D. Options/ 1. Provide all cables, connectors, mounting hardware, and tubing required for a Accessories fully operational instrument system. 2. Provide sufficient cable length for the transmitter remote installation. 3. Provide keypad or remote device where required fortransmitter configuration depending on area classification. 4. Factory calibration:All meters shall be factory calibrated.A copy of the report shall be included in the O&M manual. 5. Grounding: Meter shall be grounded on both sides. Provide two ground rings, ground wires, gaskets, etc., as required. All materials shall be suitable for the liquid being measured. 6. Provide data,signal,and power surge protection for each instrument. 7. Provide a handheld programmer for each transmitter where full setup is not available for the instrument directly. 8. Outdoor: Sunshade with necessary stainless steel mounting hardware,fitting, and conduits for protecting transmitter display; preventing display from temperature changes caused by solar radiation; and providing partial protection from falling objects, rain, snow, and windblown sand. (See detail drawings.) 9. All meters for drinking water service shall be NSF 61 certified. E. Manufacturer 1. Endress+Hauser,Proline Promag W 500 2. Approved Equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install and connect the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Each instrument shall be supplied with a stainless-steel tag identifying the instrument tag number as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. FLOW INSTRUMENTS 4071 00-4 3.02 STARTUP AND TRAINING A. The instrument manufacturer or manufacturer's certified service representative shall provide start-up and training services. Reference Division 01 Section 0175 25 Equipment Testing and Startup and Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training B. The start-up services shall be to calibrate, oversee the installation of the sensor, and start up the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at the instrument and to a remote system.The vendor shall work with the PCSI and ASP to verify the transmitter sends correct information to the remote system(i.e., that the scaling and units are the same at the instrument and on the remote operator interface). END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FLOW INSTRUMENTS 4071 00-5 z — — — - — - — - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -- 2 ° o < < < C 1 2 o c o U ci O I� W O W Q W Z s s O z z s r s r Z H H z x r SECTION 40 76 39 CARBON DIOXIDE ANALYZER PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.This Section includes Carbon Dioxide analyzer(s) used HVAC system. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Refer to Division 23—Heating,Ventilation and Air Conditioning. B. Refer to Division 26—Electrical. C. Reference Div 01 Scope of Work 1.3 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Referto Division 01 for general submittal requirements. B.Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide literature detailing all custom configured parameters and back-up/restore procedures for each network component. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.Refer to Division 01 Section 0140 00 Quality Requirements. B. Deliver instrumentation in packaging designed to prevent damage from static electricity and physical damage. C.Store instrumentation according to manufacturer requirements.At a minimum,store indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect instrumentation from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.Also, protect from all forms of electrical and magnetic energy that could reasonably cause damage. 1.5 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATIONS A.Instruments intended for installation within hazardous locations shall have Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and CENELEC approvals and certifications at or beyond the hazardous area classification in which they are to be installed. 1.6 DEVIATIONS A.No deviations from the specification requirements will be allowed,except those listed in the table of compliance that are reviewed and approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.All cabling, mounting hardware,and accessories required to install all components of the instrumentation system shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. B. Instrumentation shall be suitable for installation at the location as shown on the Drawings. CARBON DIOXIDE ANALYZER 407639-1 2.2 SPARE PARTS A.Provide the following spare parts 1. One instrument of each type 2. One year's supply of all maintenance components, kits,and consumables. 2.3 WARRANTY A.Provide a minimum of two-year manufacturer warranty for all supplied instrumentation and equipment. 2.4 GAS DETECTOR-SENSOR/TRANSMITTER-CARBON DIOXIDE 120 VAC A. General 1. Electrochemical with infrared sensor for detecting carbon dioxide. B. Function 1. Output: Dual 4-20mA current source 2. Power: 120 VAC 3. T90: 30 sec 4. Lower Detectable Limit(LDL): 2%of full scale 5. Accuracy: ±5%of full scale Relays:Three relays-10 amp rating(at 120 VAC),SPDT isolated contacts.2 relays for gas alarms and 1 trouble relay. Relays fully 6, programmable for: increasing or decreasing alarm, latching or self reset, normally energized or normally de-energized,time delay for alarm on and alarm off C. Physical 1 Housing: NEMA 4X wall mounting grey fiberglass with hinged cover 2. Sensor Measuring Ranges:0-5%Vol 3. Operating Temperature Range: -40°F to+122°F(-40°Cto+50°C). 4. Relative Humidity (Non-Condensing): 0-99% 5. Display: 2 x 8 Alphanumeric display with backlighting Audible: Built-in audible alarm,94 dB,mounted on enclosure 6 Coded output: pulsing=gas alarm, steady=fail Visual: 3 LED's on the front cover for alarm status indication,and malfunction. Optional top-mount strobe 8. Hazardous Area Rating: Class I Div 1 Groups B, C, D D. Options/ Remote mounting up to 500 feet from transmitter,and as 1 indicated on detail drawings. �eeess- Provide all cables connectors,mounting hardware,and tubing 2 required for a fully operational instrument system. „i.de su#fi-cie nt cable length f e r the-traAsrn itteF remote 3 installation. FACtsrTC�I'h�ra't09r All spnsprrshall b2�-REt91TCzalibraa%ed.AC-opy 4 of the report shall be included in the O&M manual. Outdoor: Sunshade with necessary stainless steel mounting hardware,fitting,and conduits for protecting transmitter display; 5. preventing display from temperature changes caused by solar radiation;and providing partial protection from falling objects, rain, snow, and windblown sand. (See detail drawings.) E. Certifications 1. CSA Certified to CSA C22.2 No.61010-1-04 and UL 61010-1 E. Manufacturer 1. RKllnstrument CARBON DIOXIDE ANALYZER 407639-2 Controller: Beacon 110 Model w/ Sensor:Direct Connect Sensor 61-0191RK-03 2. Other:Approved Equal PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A.Install and connect the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Each instrument shall be supplied with a nameplate identifying the instrument tag number as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.All wiring shall be labeled at each end. 3.2 STARTUP AND TRAINING A.As specified in Division 01 Section 0175 25 Equipment Testing and Startup and Section 0179 00 Demonstration and Training. B. If indicated in the instrumentation paragraphs above,the instrument manufacturer or manufacturer's certified service representative shall provide start-up and training services.This work shall not be done by the PCSI/ASP CONTRACTOR. C.The start-up services shall be to calibrate, oversee the installations of the sensor, and start up the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at the instrument and to a remote system.The vendor shall work with the PCSI/ASP to verify the transmitter sends correct information to the remote system (i.e.,that the scaling and units are the same at the instrument and on the remote operator interface). END OF SECTION CARBON DIOXIDE ANALYZER 407639-3 r> W Q U 5 j z W w m _ Q ~ W Q u Ile tz Q U cn Q 0 a � y z � J U z z` o � a z DIVISION 46 WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 4 SECTION ne e1 1-3 G RA19ITV FILTRATION, MEDIA DLDI A!`LAMAIT on„T1-GENERAIt 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS and- niyissi„r I SpeGifiGa+ieR SeGtieRs ply to this SeGti„r B. ni„sieR 11 SperifiGa+i„r coc+i r nc M 23 "Gravity Fil+r-,+i r System"fer test4,L 1 2 SU�ATo,M-AR replace,A. CONTR.A.G.TOR shall install, staFt i filter(Filter Nr 4) as she.xp in the DI-r.s 72 "Gravity C'Itra+'r.., Systei n z. REFERENCES A. NSF—StaardaFdvz DFORI(wrr WateFSysteFnsCE)nTpvRerts-ue^lthEff.,..+.- B.Q nWnnin QInn •Idol-teFTFeat...eRtFilteFiRgMaterial 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. A�F. Q Giter rar,aeity: v. 1. $eSigp surTfaee Leading Rate: 5 sf z. a. DIT;TeRs+(�rs-Tuba-ed en rpastFeeerigs. TheaE�u',�d-.O, Te lsfe,rs A-rt filter Sh-,II be field rified by the CONTRACTOR r F to supplying the fil+.,r.ti,.,.Ji h. Pr om oceeerd I,Fawilngs. Filter Avo.4 Is 37 feet 7 inches leng)E 4?feel 9 inches ede Refer+.. Plans fee el ,.,tams FiltFatien System! a. nr ting r r.a•+• enR z , rote), 5 gpng/sf 7.25 gpFn/s•. RT—Air SeeuF(Upflew): 5 sef.,,/sf/.,-.-,..iRq nq Fate), 4 SGf.ti./Sf(ReFFnal ra+..) r,dl 2 ;rfRq/sf/lew r-,+4 PI I INAMER ASSOCIATES ICl/" AC Al 14 DAGF'I Ap G RID SpT Qq-47�CC Alll GRAVI TV CII TD ATIII AI MA C f11A DCDI A/"C�A CHIT II 1114 71M T) Combination mT'r Scvc'rr--and va, �' ccrsh Air at�A scf iT af arid water at �.� SUBMITTALS A. r eempenents and PF8fm!eS, Fated repeFating ehaFaeteFiSties, speei-,I+'„ and sections, details, Fnam'M M: samples, fre.m. Sieve rsizes,nd shapes deseFiption, haFdnessrsperifiG gFavity, Im,I,,..,+ bed expansien f,..-eaeh type at 10 deg and 89 deg ever the speeified �. IIIalcaw vca c�c aIIOIOII IVI cacll type at b arck yash ranges and the degFee of ir.+orrnixing and restratefircateen fellewing the h"h `va,WAf;lTT3. Speeifie design paFa.m.ente-F-s fer this pFejeet ineluding flew rate-s-and hem-ad- .'A_-rses. D. 1. r 3. r 4. S pplierrs Ccer+ifiecate 9f Dr..peF IRS+RI AtiAR S. Qual4geatmen Data: FeFswpplieF'S r if appimeable. T.7 L ist of simmilar installatiens 8. M ate FiTest RepertsPersa nth r-;;e+ta PA ed;� 10 Field q ality ntFel r epeFtS. E. PaFtial eF incomplete submittals may be FetUFned by the ENGINEER without Feview. F. All devwatiE)nsfFE)MeantFaEt deeuments shall be submitted sepaFately by CONTRACTOR as a with- the speeifieatiens. of I InAnAro nccnr,InTEc INN nc Al 14 oAGF�np c QIpcCT nC]7�CC Alll GRAVITY CIITR TIAnI nnChln DC.PI AC-EMENT II 1114'AM 1.6 LQU,�LITYASSSSUR NC€ i. Medea shall be the pre-al-wet f-, c ipplier having-a+least 20 U.S.c nst-all-ati.e.pr of+he , r.,J.,rrdr�in .deseFibe d On Speeifina+ien Sieben 46 6 2-3 � a -61 D Tg WateF System Ge„Tp,Tents—Hi^-I+h Eff e+. 1. DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HAND' ING , ,;,z�m�afrc^rEttHerS F e+1�,r�ft1E+6,rS�Tnd the "cegwiFe.m.eigis ef nvrbTsfen 1. 1.9 PRQjEGT GONDI�TIONS equipment, utilitie5, and Felated items by field ngeaSUFeFnents befeFe supplying 1. Media shall be specifically seleeted for this serviEe and the eRViFeRment eREeUntered 9 9 WADDANITV 1TP07TIlTTI"V-rT nts PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIERS .,.du ets that may be +h.,\A/.,rL * rI,,.d_,the felle.. *..... ,ill supply the r.d -;;nd- -nthr-cite .ti.ed. a 2.2 FILTER MEDIA z. [-•Flr+c�r media-5hulllrcvmfE)FiF,r te ncn-n�n v Ic+-r d-rd cpeEifir-+i ns fee CilteFiRg MateFia'"e)(cept as medified heFe 'I Tee abe a Speeifieatien shall ge r. fee the testing --Iz�ti-I�g�eee given �:_._--- -I---...__._._.. _.._.. o-�--... ._. _..-testing eE. .Fed an the#ilteFing FnateFiall_.Test r peFts en the ..9at r,.,ls to be fUFnishe d shall be r.ih,ti 4tte.d to the ENGINEER. EER B.Q I n deF dr-.in cr-,..ek D.- NOT OT utilize g el of I InAnAro nccnr,InTcc INN nc Al 94 once;Ap c QIpcCT /q;;z AqC IlllI GRAVITY CIITDnTION nAChIA DCPI AC-EMENT !III 11 v T!1M G. Dual Mediffia- z. Sand Media /Qe++em Layer)! a. Sang m.edi-, -`hall he F..reirhed+e a .ide 12 inches plus a addi+ienal 1 /7 � eh r•Irimmi.,g allemianee eF+e+al depth with an aaddli+ie. al C e e+fer incidental less -.lied+e the+e+aI depth. Cer these s eifieatiens sand media shall he elass+#Ted p a e i-A%voth -;;p e#eet+vin s+ze A f 0 TS m m te 0.55 rya; Tn Ffieie.,+eF 1 nn er lees. ,r eoef Ifcfcf fc of x.�v of fC», and an average speei is-gravity ef 2.69±9.95. hh.. Sand Pned;a shall -he re rrpesed of ha Fd, du Fable gains,free of Gla •, Ieam, dirt and eFga,Rrs ratter. Net+m.e;n than 1peFceRtb weight shall hhef'la m -or+.io par+i The se1whili+..ref+hoc Rd in hydrerchIePic arch- (H ) sha1 fie+ a ed- S e e F G e.,+ A.P.tttr-vC�temed�crshalc�ll he f,wprshed to r, vide 22 inches pl..s ap addi+ieAal 1 nr•h skimming alle . ant eF+etal depth A.+hr,rite r I •h,le .erked ed and r Faded e al merJi-,...i+h ;in offer•+i..e rize of n DC mm+e 1 0=5 m 'fermi+.,reef.... r,+eF 1 A!1 er less;a aiflfvf I I lfc�cvcf f fcfcf fc of =.40 a less, an an average speei ie-gravity a 1.65± 0.05. h-,rrJeer•r• Alp eF An leer+hAA 7 7 ;4nd r•hAll he -,r•free IIIas .. .,ess ihle of it ..Ifidles•r elays7 shaler a e.(+r-,nee-.r• dirt myi+h m ir•+'.re leer+haA 4.0 + shipped cel..hili+.,ie nn eeFeee+uri per eeilc as shipped. vofavfffc�ff f w�cl ccI fc f Ic Shall e negligible. S6 61 I Ityln 1 r nt hot/1 Dn de flees F\sedi.�m hydFO)(Ode solution shall he less than nt by weight. D. Testing_-. 1 A sample of each r -,.J-+ie., of+he filter media taken Frem supeF eks duFI'er. '7 Eaeh r• .,le shall he r. eked i �i+�hle n r.+ai.,er and labeled with the Drr,ien+ z. I. name, stpprIi'eff� name, EQrArITrDcAc�(v)rQ�fo narr�and rgnaJ cr+'ier. I The v r.h+of each sample and the a mher of hags sampled shall he-, ed ie A\A/\A/A Q1 nn 16. 4. Them +eri.I. .ill he tested h..a appFeveJA\A/\A/AQ 10016+ems+in.Iahera+.r..fr.r -,Fermi+..with the r nts; eF+hose s cif eatie..r• S. Testing of filter medm.;; Shall he -.+the r/IAI TRACTOR'S e 6. Ne Fnatermals shall be plaeed in filter beds URtil writteR approval is reeeived frem the ENGINEER after ngateFial testing z3-SOURCE QUALITY C NTTTRO erg f r+he Dreie,.+as erd ie A\n/\n/A Q1nn 1e DI I InAnArD nccnrinTEc INN nc Al 94 oAGF n Ap c RID_qp eC]7�CC Alll GRAVITY FILTRATION'nnChln REP AC-EMENT II1114'AM PART R EX€EUTTION 3.1 GENERA Re ntat'. B. 3.2—INST I I ATTION h-r been i ed- fer*him u r..deF drai., system, and the filter st.-ue+..re and RA-,r...f-,r+..rer-,Rd ENGINEER and all tests have -been s GGessf.III..G.,mplete d en h. PI;4r-pmpnt Af thp raT media layer ski,I�ll he Ee„T fete in aeee,aneewith D-.r-.. Faph 3.2.A.2 h..fere adding the anthracite nge dia a. Sand shall be+ra.,S.,eFte.d and placed e Fef..11..to prevent c n+-,.~,inane, efVRY .,r+r and sand � .,+�.,-,�.,�+.,.d .,g+h.,r .,hfeFe ., .,af+ r place. .e.,+ sh-all be r d place b. Sand shall e plaEedOn the f;TteF, pFe#cFably t#Fugh watef and ski-a Ise P u n i s h ed .,fFil S.P,.,.,+h to the pFepeF.,I.,..�+�.,.�, After S Rd h-,- been placed to the depth shh^owr"'r^en the Plans,the filteFS shall be baekwashed 3 tinges, at a-Fate-te give 30 Sand,peFeent exp-ap-sien of the e tern e.r RA-t less t#a;T R9 sese, d-s. The fine Arid n top shall he rpMAPed andr Of sand depth afteF thiS washing epeFatien is net as shAWA An the Plans, .lffi.,O.,r.+.- RH .-h-.II h., -..JdPH W+h., r e d .depth CONTRACTOR shall verify the .-and depth by.-..r.,.,.,ir.R the .,I.,yatien of the+.-p of .n d Medi-a I-yeF(at 10 .d.,P ,.,ithin the filteF) and e g+hi.- .,I.,.,-.+ien ..,i+h the eleyatir.r. "f the+ep of the w.erdi-a retaining eap. G(DNTD A-T(1D sh-all swFvey eley-.tier f the tee of the Media r +miming e p (at IA_ r .W,d...M. I.� + ..r�. 4thdA the filter) prier to adding and-FAedia to the filter. OWNER shall wetness the SHFvey te veFify the depth of the sand media. '.ieyed VeFif..the r . lting sand .Depth unto! the final depth Fn ets the of I InAnAro nccnr,InTEc INN Ac Al 94 oAGF c np c RID_qp nC]7�CC All GRAVITY RITDnTIA nI AAChln REP AC-EMENT II1114'AM the supplieF and as fellewsi Tfl"09�t'Cf'Cr z 3) D Fain filte.r-amd p ea s we fFeFn edge ef treugh er frA-.Pnrse„Te ether fixted- tep 4) Wash at a velee+ty efZ24 peF minute dWFiTgwhieh time mere fnRcs-,Ta-serrre F-;;thi-QF Ilaa"rge flatpoeceS v.Tl,.;ll be caroed away. This may I , hem 5)—BFaoiq f.rte.r-;;ATa„Teasare to tep eraed to see he%v PATac--h red l tie; har, taken plaGe. oTCac IIIcO pca QIIQ serape DII and al-cala II evashinsfailste remeve hlaclE 7) The Tonal-thiekni-mss thi-m eeaI�yeF aTteF washong la IIbe as evf-the-tee-ef the sa,"Td-media ay , CONTRACTOR shall ,.eeeyatien ef pFieF to adding anthFaeite ngedia te the filter. OWNER shall witness the oTII al ICI II aclw IO aaaca/ repeat the occoo of washing and SlElmminsantll thepreper elevatien is reached. "^4y the .,Iting anthFae;te .Depth CnlD OF CC!`TIllnl of I Innnnro nccnr,I T-ES INN nc Al 94 oAGF c Ap c RID_qp /q;;!AqC All !`D A\/ITV CII TD nTIII nI nnChlA DC.PI AC-EMENT II1114'AM 4 SECTION ne 63 73 PART /]DAI AITV LII TD ATI A IU C ART-E- A RTT-1—GENERA 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 6e;,Tt ens a s+c��1 Spee#TEatien Seet+ens,apply te this Seeti 12 SUMMARr A. c etio , Ineli„ es- 1. FUFnish, install, staFtUp and test the eemplete gravity filtFatien system feF I filter (FiTte F "was--;hA-I.A.FA On them Plans. The f*ltp-.r is 3 7feet 7 i n eft 42feet -9- i.vid-e. The existing samd- and apt.hFaGite Fnedia,apd-filter und-erdrain system will -he gf•I will ti ep I eel 't� h I e�type e�-e �e�r�t+p ;Tte�-�,�Tae,�,a ,�e�- ,� � �o tee .J .J II ,;, Ta=�'lI Nae�n�t I T ��F e�e�T;Qe t-ena n system �aTr water supperting, @Rd sealing the undle—ralrain system; all as required 2. The equipment pFevided bindeF this seetien shall be fHFnished by a single espensible feF the Ee . pletesyste..., ..._._._....o--._..__......_-- -- the ._..___...o.__...-: a. UndeFdFawn5. b. AneillaFy piping and Eenneetiens. Q Dolma+o.J Co.�+i.,.,o• a FiltFatien Media Replaep—mempt" equipment and- Media as a cemplete system. 1.3 REFER€NGES A. 1. N S-F�S.1 61-BrnmTTg-WateF Systems GeFnpeni-mntr 1.4SYST€M DESCRI°T Tom'GN d. 3. Equipment shall be designed and mRstalled te enSLIFe leng teFng stability PI I IAA�ACD Af-SC)CIATCf ICl/" 46 Al P7 DAGR I Ap'IA RIDf CTCT /lC?7�CC Alll GRAVITY CII TDATIAN S4gT-E A II II�T7(17A headless,flew r and any etheF effe EtS ...high al d on time E e less of effieie.,E y e effeeti.,..ne-s.- In 4. All equipment, SUppOFtS, a cheFS -and-fasteiAeis Shall hte-^of-adequate Stfength to eOT,Q .,. k' e ;-CT�T;T 5. All subFneFged EeMpv^,Tel tssh-aIzT'IveC-errstruietedd efT. 316 tai.,I.,ss; s+...,I e ..Jw...g ngat.,Foals speeified On this Seetion 7 All.di..ti,o.n,,.i.,.n,� be fi.olrl ye.-ff ed p F to fah.-ir-,+i.,p -;Ad- T-. 8. C. a. The equipment shall him installed fer each filter as shewn An the plans. hr The UtFatien systepaa-'s+r�teda;sed, primarily,teperferm thef,,TEtipm Arerxxe�;Trs 1.5 SUBMITTALS r +'E.- d f� h I+' 9perati-rig 3FFsri'c��clrra�-d-ni-i�i-r2 pe cFaTcFe5 aEEes§viT2s. relevatiens, r 2. Detail equipment assemblies and indwEate dingensions, weights, leads, FeqbliFed el ea Fances, PAeth e d ef Re Id asse Fn bly,ee„Tpenents,'gal 1A-err-,T;p-1 s+zP_ef e-;;eh f-re1d ' crnTRc +cclv,T innsFogle paekage. The felvllewingIT feFffl rtiewn Shall he as a iinimum: nn-,.,..f-,�+...o.-,.,,J .,,,,.Jol ., .�,ho.-„f o.•.. �.•,.�,o.,+ h I aye t .J.-,...ings inel... ing all .�,.-.,.,. sed system c., o. ca�oac alavvlllgo Illclaalll'�aIl,Jlopooca opocclll comp6nentS%yoth. dompp.reens, eleaFaneesrequ+Fed-and sizes ind+eated, eenneet+en types and leeatiens, and tetaI weights „f+he .. e.Juc+ _a eatings fee a rmh f..rAffished Detailed eific-.+ice,.,.-and.J-.+-..J.,.-G.-ihing the v r, I�of tFuetie G. , Yr water, speeified leading and flA_;.AV e. install details,flow diStFibutien ease ulatmenand eeft+fieatten of f. Detailed 5tae , hydFauk,and aiF 5EeUF testPFeEedUFes. aqF and wateF both feF initial Fates and feF sustained peFieds. DI I IMMER ASSOCIATES ICl/" 46 Al 7] DAGR P Ap'IA RIDf CTCT /q;;!AqC Al Ill /=R WITV CII TDATIAN f gT-F44 11 11 v P(1']4 j. nA�.,..f��+�..-.,.-�� r,,.-+ific-a+ien of r.,mplianc., ¢ n anuf-a..+ureir'S +.-. r+i...,i f.,. installation S. I., a+i.,.-,of stee.ing diStFih.�+.,.-of snare paFts i paFts FeplaceFnefR-,- and- i L . .fin+ z. r. 1.6 QUALITY ASSU Dr ANCI at least 5 the URited States ef the type beiRg pFepesed eaeh with a FnmRiFnuFn of 3 yeaFs of +isf-,.-+eF y B. 1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exeessive vi-hr-atieR ef equipment while epeFating eF uneven -air A-Ir vi-ater distribuitien d----F!'Rg B. Stainless Steel CA-RA-Fuctien: sl loll col I101 III [O [1Ic 1 cGrClll cll ICI I[s OI Opcc111GC1[101Is er the Design, Fa rieatien _a.Adl r v>mr�'str e'cR+• c 'vnr. r • welds,The ment rs welding preeedures, welders and welding eperaters shall be qualified and eertified on aecerdanee with the requirements ef the latest edotie" "StFUEtUFal Welding- §teed-pubI+shed by 3_ FabFieate all paFts and assemblies fFeFn sheets and plates ef 316 staWess steel with a 4. De all welding in the faeteFy bising shielded are, ineFt gas, M IG eF TOG ngethed. Add fill.,.-...i..,+., III welds to pre-vide fee� .,e+i.,., -,.,.J, .,I.J .,-..,+,I equal+.,., ..a+.,.- PI II�A nACD Affll!'IATCf INN 46 Al 7] DAGR'J Ap'IA RIDf CTCT /q;;!AqC Al Ill /=RWITV CII TDATIAN!4gTEM II II�T'](1']A S. Field welding of stainless, Steel viiii not be n ++r.rl 6. Belts, nuts, and washeFS shall be AISI 316 staiRless steel fumished OR a6EeFdance with ACT�mm"93.. +hn �nr+�Il�+inn L. SeFvoEe: Beth n+;n„n„r and intermittent a +,nn 1.8 WARRANTT equipment. waFFanty and eeti n of defective,. rL 1.DELIVEDv STORAGE,AND HANDLING nr+rU etinns and the r n+r„f Diyirinn 'I Seetion n•I Gn nn B. Equipment u....••hjnrtte iern,. ___.etinn at the ENGINEER'S r....••„r+if+h„rn is .idenee of damage. 1.10 DDIIICCT/YINDITIONC being added te vi-ater th-at is being tFeated feF petable wateF use and eenveyanee, shall Dredue+rh-,II hp-r+he r.,-,rk a -,I of n.Jited testing I-,hnr-,+nr.. B. The equipment, sizes, mateFials, and affangements described On this specificatien are hased 1. The equipment manufacturer Shall be Fespensible feF design, arrangement, and nrf rrr,-,nee of a r nlete system fee all equipment supplied under thiS r.,e+ien meeting the intent ef the design at ne e)(tFa eest te the OWNER. 1.11 T'I EXTRA TER f€X TmT�MATERIAL A.n .-Dr .Vide the fellewing rpaFe -.r+r. 2. Plt+F€nd Caps! _S DI I IAA�ACD Affll!'IATCf ICl/" 49-A-1 7] P.A.GE A QF'IA DIDf CTCT nC]7�CC Il'IC Ill /=RWITV CII TDATIAN f gT-F44 II II�T'](1']A C. ManwfaEtWFeF shall shew evidenEe ef faEalities,within the Eentinental United States,who the equipment 5y5ten95 OF units within 48 heUFS. PART PRODUCTS 1 Mnnll IRnCTl ID� nND nannGl L. TT'1"POT'!Z VTC TT4DTlV�GL Zekeneple LE6, Zelieneple, Pennsylvania, A D..rfe speG f o.J when. 1, Fate J nder the fell.,.. ing C nditieRS• a fl.,mmfl.,w Af f*l+or .,fl or,t w;4+or. Flew of up to 5 m/sf h I pfle%y Af Por w. f\esigR Fat of A sef. /sf and- - to maximum Fange „f 2 to C sEf.+./,f E. I pfiew of b.-,..Lwash tee Design. Fate of 15. png/sf..,*+h lew ha..L. ash Fate .f .J I pflew of-.ir SEe Hr +,-getheF with bad(.. ash tee AOr at A sef..-./sf and and .. .-.4feFng .Jos+rob...+:en of h•,..I.wash . ateF and r the tetaI aFea of the fil+..r i lAnr and- myatear flews+hFe u he-u+the filter roll CI.,.., pif.,Fmit y peF e feet of filter aFea shall Permit effieie.mt-and effeetive epeFatien and bad(washang. TheFe shall he me -.r..A,- Af�,..�.,��iye flow(r.,.aldis+rih��tien) ..,hieh ..e-i'd eause ..�...��r.. ing net eause any significant I-ess of filter.ti.. dia during bael(washing r J,r Jr I�+.,ral U feet I ng shall net e ed 4) �h . .p+ r rAh,mm (r.r*.naFy and ,-..Aar.,) of an individual a ...JeFdFain hleEk shall net be less than 20 L ..hes ateF ...lungr. at a baEk ash flee Fate .f 22.5 R ng/sf of filteF a 6. Field testing will be FeqbliFed te shew that un*feFng distFibatien ef aiF and wateF will andemay. Testing shall be witnessed by-the ENGINEER. be Fejeeted of it dees not meet these eFiteFia. 7o The folteF undeFdFain system,as installed,shall pFevide aeEeptable flew bfflifeFfflity. PI I IAA�ACD Affll!'IATCf ICl/" 46 Al 7] DAGR C Ap'IA RIDf CTCT /q;;!QqC Il'IC Il'I /=RWITV CII TDATIAN154gTEM II II�T'](1']A a. LateFal MA;#,_mr The M. I-ateRal. 15 feet long or less Jm^Il not emeee / ? p ..+ of the aveFage ng/sf of filteF fee a bad(wash Fate of 22.5 .. ng/sf ,.r. nvrnc-vvc#eir� rrvte th-at ��t�9T�r-acre te �ifie flume a ..+ ...tFy G.....ditiA .r iAtA h..+h fl.'.ti,..-a.,.d. .,.J.,.-.J.--,i.-, r must be eens4deFed. E. SyS enTrA. . .d h.. .,�f., +crnar I v rclIcJ.rrr5 f9n. VFS{uuIIrr� FSTh nrvIrcrSn to m. 8. Adequate safety faEteFS shall be ineluded OR the design ef the uRdeFdFaiR te aeEeuRt fee.d....- mie lea dings...hieh m eeew.dHFing the -..,.d teFi,-,lo.,-,+io.,.A, of h;;c,loAfa,;h system,Thp- design shall adequately pFevid-ea fer-all d--F*Rg shipmeRt, handling, wheR installed, .,A+h r r J net J ,r J leading ,f net less+4. 2,800 • i. Re PA eve f0Itei-frelp. s er.,Iase+he fake.-i..fl. e.AA Iye-;; .d afira ..leave 1..d.......to 2. When the folteF level dF8pS tO within 12 inEhes ef the tep ef the FRedia, Elese the filteF effluent valve and epeR the bael(wash waste valve. 3. When the#;Tte.r e#,luie.pt valve is cempletely clesed, S•taFt the aiF bleweF, slewly epen +hp air scei ir fil+.....AI..., A;xeF a 60 seeend ., edr d n a .,fi+hl+...-,+ n ;r-f.,-,/sf f.,.-+.. .+., 4 Open+h.,fil+...-h-.rl",yash supply y-.I... pump ., high speed. G. CI.....I...,.-.en the filteF h��l....��h s .-.I.,flew e ..trel..-.I. e e a 1 to 7 minute p d e v and adjust the pump speed te- ebtaim a flew Fate ef appFemomately 5 r Faise the level in the filter to yi:+hi.. G i..eh..S of the tFeu.,h +h C ICOCI III [I IC 111[CI CO 00I[1IIII O II IGI IC3 OI the [1 OQ-s11, [Iles tarn e the air 6yNer. E 65e the f*l+.,.--.*.-se-eu.-..- lye -...d h_r-l....pi„h this Imo.w rate f'..-+...e rni....+. s Me d..late the hael(wash supply flew cent...1;halve 9F the pump speed to ebtain this .ate v_alvem ever-;; I te 2 minute peFied and adjust the punqp speed te a high baekwash flew the flew Fate to 7.25 ..pnq/sf,r 'I to 2 .v.in u+.. pe Fie.d and bael.wash at this I.....Fate PI I IAA�ACD ACSC)C=IATCf ICI!' 46 Al 7] DAGR G Ap'IA RIDf CTCT /q;;!AqC Al Ill /=RWITV CII TDATIAN154gTEM II II�T'](1']A tFeUghS. !I. AheFthe filteF has"aged"feF teR nginutes,epen the filteF influent valve. 12 When+h...., +,r level r -ehes the R al a Fati g level, epen the Fil+..r effluent the pFepeFtienate plant flew(Faw and Feeyele flew divided by num-her ef filters enline) n Is.,+A m. n+-ain+he e p e F a t 0 n g IeyeI in+he F +.,r 1. The uimdeFdFain systern fer the filters.Shall -he a dual paFallel lateral type with an OOI[1 III I thin GI OJJ JCGCI OII OI a songle blee C. The IC Gress sCG[Ien e the an er raim shall he vi�cr�v.o-;;te,. All, urA efi;;I A- if ees s�1 Iurrve integrally Qed t9 PFeVid2 rmAeth heFe peF squaFe feet ef filteF aFea. The eFifiees shall be net less than 11/64 iRehes diameteF in Fr F*I+..r h.,++.,nn .billy flat with abeye stated rlispeFsien ..riFin..r F..r 4. n.��l..,-,+.,r r..�l,.,.,r.,e-hApppl�m4h r..+.�r.. hel..s shall he inn-erpeFated into the tep of the . nderdr- kq hleek tee mifer.m. -and -air FII...,Free the+.,.. .J.,�I� „ and r,Feyi.Jl. .,FeateF air stability I In.J..r.Jr- ins 5. The seEE)igdaFy EhangbeFS of the URdeFdFamig shall have baffles sized and IeEated tE) These appUFtenanEes shall be Type 316 stainless steel te pFevent EeFFe5ieR eveF tk- We of the folte-F :7. The undeFdFain system shall have an intemal grout peeket deSigAed tE) pFeVide Uplift PIII�A�ACD Affll!'IATCf ICl/" 46 Al 7] DAGR;I Ap'IA RIDf CTCT /q;;!QqC Il'IC Il'I /=R WITV CII TDATIANI f gT-F44 II II�T'](1']A Fesistanee „I+ f ir.teFnal r +i r. r.f 20 Dcl . ,i+heut any .term- r...+r.rr.al Ehr.r Fed r.r.,hr.rlded into the filter flr.r.r and shall r...+eRd -.heye the peFcenteftkre allewable I.�- aaREheF5 shall be Type 316 staff less steel. 8. The a -rlr.,r, pipes sh-all hr,rlr,,,hlr, ,II...J r r.f.,rn.,.J PVC,he-se -.++-.shed +r.+hr, M r, hr.�rlr.r �r,rl r,rlr.rrlr�ir, hl.,.-L� ...�+h 2�G +-,�r,l.,r� �+.,.,I h.,s., eIa,ti,r.s 9. The aiF sceUF piping system shall Meet the fellewing., al r ..+r. Type 316L stainless steel constFuetien-aTTa ✓v;is shallmrbe -31-�T II +hir-k-Ale-. G. AiF SGeUF FiseF piping--;h-;;" -him sized by the system supplieF and sh-all h-ave a v.oall +hi re-l.r.r.rr s ,tah-lr.f.-.r+hr.f Aelrrepes+ha++h r ill r.+..r Q. nAr�rrV,C IrI rI iIOrrc.r1,rJ,ilpr.i1r1.IS.,must r ee+TGCQ rules Fer r revi ins eu a vi-alls en In r,+-ar+..,i+h filterr,rl . ,-a+er-and n r, fil+r,rr,rl . ,ateF e. All aiF sceuF piping shall Fneet the FeqUiFements of ASTM A312. joints shall F Piping a nts that FeqUiFe field. elrliRg of stainless steel pipiRgshall Ret he ngi++r..J B. MateFar. The wndo.,idual b!eE!(s used ir.the r.,r+r ng shall be of ir...r.r.r.,ir.,,r high r+rr.r..,+h z. , i rh-.II her iStant to r r.rl r.rl h-...p , r.if.,rrA S.M. et r ,rf G. D*mens+ens: 1. Thn hleek size and.. ght shall p mi+ease r.f h-,ndling and Ieng Thr.weight of+he h eek 1011�11Ic vV clgl Ic vl cl Ic []Ivcl'c shall e appre)(imate y 24.5 peun S. The bleeks shall he essentially FeetaRgular in shape with dispeFsien eFmfic=es leeated in the ter,flat r ,rf 2. The hl cks shall have rid es and pockets f r structural rigidity, that the walls Ean bond with the gFeUt. r,.dr.r.dFain lateFals tel.,equivalent to the Ir.r.r.+h of the filter eell 2. The i., nts shall be gasketr.rlr r.bell and r et type A.A,i+h i +.,r r.Al alignment tabs fer DI I IAA�ACD Affll!"IATCf ING AG Al 7] DAGR D Ap'IA DIDf CTCT /q;;z AqC Al Ill /=R WITV CII TDATIANI fVfTC44 II II�T'](1']A PFOpeFjeffint alignment and he air and yoaterti hr p l aR d lU g r n+er.-fer ea5e of assembly aR d ir.541atk r, F.C .d Meie Re+-.roar. r,.d ale.d to the+ep of the u nder.dFair. thFE)Ugh the u n.der.drain 4. Ver+ieal haffIes; s;haII he leea+e.d en the he++en•, S,We of+he P4e.dia re+einer+e «EBmpaFtmeptalrze"+he fl,1id+e Loon it frem M a heriient@lly aleeg the he++el:R equal a n+i+ieS of-air_,n.d/er water during the back ash e.ele S. The ret-aine-Ir shall Feplaee the Reed-fA-.r Suippert gravel and- shall net the n der dr in height by r, e than 1 1 /A eh Tie 316 stainlerS; r+e.,l Self tapping serevis-and ?I\A \A/e-.+herh_;lR Sp-alant Tape. Gu ni.-+rih..+iee nrifiee Dlate5 ..the filter effl�per,+a n d��i+and the end of the u n der.dr-.in later-.I.- 2. The E)Fifiee plate shall be designed to evenly distribute mi-ater-and--air te P--;qr--h n.der.dr�in I-,+er�l e r+herange of flew s eifie.d herein .d�firing water only anal , r/water ceneurrent hael.wash 3. QFifiee plates shall he a RStF..eteal of 316 stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL and adjust equipment aerce-rd-a.mr--p- the Drawings, appFeved shep dFawings, -and the De net epeFate the theFA-pinufaetweF, pment FepFesentative appFeves the 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FILTER''NDER^°�A'R SYSTEM A.A rre Ut(te he supplied by the CONTRACTOR) z. CeFnen-t- CtaR daF d Wand Perth, d a r,+e r.ferrr.in.,+e ACTI\A C Cfl Type 11 fergen ,I w5e: « n shall Ret be u 2. ++eN \A atodor ngmxmngand EUFiRg shall he elean and eleaF pe+-.hle water. Water shall he a ri.dere.d petable if i+.g. e+e the r .,+r of+he leea o_`__......_.._ goer._.__. PI I IAA�ACD Affll!'IATCfr IA«" 46 Al 7] DAGR 0 Ap'IA RIDf CTCT eC]7�CC Al Ill /=RWITV CII TDATIAN154gT-PA 11 11y P(1']4 �niate F..,i+h -a tet—al dirr-al.,e d realid—s n+ratian of� nnn Fng/I ear hogheF G. r r tWbidity of greateF than 19 NTIJ shall net be used. 3. a. Cane)rh-,II hn elnan anal.. arhneJ mason Fy Sa Rd h Test i nreJ-annex. ,i+h ACTM mn 19 to verify the sand n alenn.. i not Inrr than On nnrrnn+fear-an of samples, } } p + CI ICII I 7v�JC1 GCI IC 101 all aver asC OI [111 CC OOl l 1p es, an net ass than g��ereent fear a individual sample. E. peFEent of sand pcaFtieles shall pass Ne. 4 sieve and R6+c FAE)"rre—than 4 peFCent of sand n-.r+ielear shall pass Ale, Inn 4 rhtePA c,^1 Arl.�.i.,+. rote N4e ee c-al Admowt,,l-e6sAeerIed. The gFewt Gap he Mixedema small haatrh and Used in, o.Ji,tole, Sm StFengthT- a. The,gFAGIA rl i nr+ Ilin.the hlecks shall have r+rongth eafr n nn n of+or 20 days e,f Gw ing iT Use—a—gFeUt With eRep,3Ft PeFtland—eeim.e.n* a,Ta—twe PaFtS clearrSiliea sand- nreanearl.,mixed— -end—...n++ea-J..,i+h -. .tie-,..iY.-.��Y.-...,ateF r.,.. en+r-.+i h.,.. e0gh+ equaI +-a n Cn+n n [C fear+he, base gFe..+ and n c1 W n G7 feF the,fill R ut i. r nr+�Il�+inn rlr-,...in..r who i5wpeFVi5ingand r.hrr.r.,ir.g the WI-VA, 3. Any addi+innal r n+r r dfied— heareain -align. .e.mt -and elle .-,+ien If r ed steel a rh..r r...Jr shall furnished h.,the filter PA ..f-e+..rear-aneJ re,+ in the fleaear rl-,4.en hn+h Sides of+h.. d*r+rih. +ie,n fl..mp i eardpimr-a..,i+h the dF a...in„ n .i.Je d De net paint the fleaear er vi--aII -;irpA ..hear., it will r n+ae,+..,ith the R wt .line.+hn .�neJe,reJr�in The fil+ear fleaear-anal filter Sat 1 OQ1llolll'S[1IC QI IQCI al all I. 11IC 111[CI pool —and— Illtereva extending 16 ine eS lap frmm+hn fil+ear fleaear it ea++ea he, painted. fl I In-lear-lrain 1 -a+ l Ins+-.Il-,+i.-.n• D. eara . I. The, .�r.elearelr-.ir. I,+ear-.Ir rh-.II he, Set OR relatively Iea.,eal rea..,r eR a bed e.f..re...+ -,..ear the r r the e.L -J all r�.a-arear between se-�tiRg- c�cr-a-ncr g�t�.�e-t�i�r-a5r.�@On-a�-possible, _...-l--.--- .-------.. the FeWS ef bleeks and walls shall be foiled with gFeat se that the entiFe bed is tetally rshall be supplied by the undeFdFamnMANUFACTURER, %voth the and PI I InA nACD nccnr`IATCc INN AC 69 7] DAGF 9n AP 94 RIDc CTCT nC]7�CC Alll /=R WITV CII TDATIANI c gT-F44 11 11 v P(1']4 veFteEal pull test shall be peFfeFnged. Testing shall be peFferfned en 100 peFeent ef the anEheF Feds. The pull test shall be peFfE)FFned by the undeFdFamn MANUFACTURER aEEeFdaigEe with the MAN IFACTI loves Or..-+r..,. 0819 al suippkeF and as specified heFein te ensure Vhat the ---AdeFdFaqn system and piping Gennected E. The CONTRACTOR shall*_alce -all neeeSS@Fy pFeeautiens Feeemmended by the rh;;" hp thereughly flushed elean. AiF piping shall be flu-shed with peFts ll r paper, paFtially Gempleted shall be pFeteGted with heavy building aeeeptable means te maintain be m.-aint-ampend- until final r.l-.e.,.v ent of filter media to distFibute the lead of yard buel(ets heelharr..ws la d.deFs ff r IOCIQ OI�OI Q IJQGICC[�, 001ICCIOCII 1 vv03, ICIQQCl3, seal elks, eke.,�e�reven�damage te the r,d r,dr p._.__..._.._,the _,_tell. ells.. be __...r.___., _.__...__. and ___._..__. fFee _f all lees_ ..._.__.._.. r eh -,the S+r..e+..ral s+drill+.of+h., H. PFieF te installing the ngedia, the tAndeFdFawn shall be tested fer unifeffflity ef aiF flew by- rrl -4phm 44r fIAwA PA he Aif. FrA a s+hP Pr,+ire .)PIP Fri raiA hpfArp+hp A dpr.dra0., 3.3 FIELDQUALITY CONITRE these cif eatie Q FLjnr+h.,. a1 Prier to plant s+-.r+up and inst llatiRen .,f+he filter media,the with the assistance ef the r CONTRACTOR, equipment feF PFOpeF assembly and alignment, quiet opeFatieR, aAd PFE)peF s representative,shall inspeEt all i. PlaEe equipment in the system ... _r_._._._.. _..._..the _.._.._ _,_sell. is ._...__._.....o. All exeept as- r erten_ed, fee eight e_"seealiv. e hews to be E_. si._eFe_ sta Fte_ _fir. t)I II�A�ACD ACfll!'IATCf ICl/" AC 61 7] DAGF'I'I Ap'IA QIpf CTCT /q;;!QqC Il'IC Ill /=R WITV CII TDATIAN1 54gTEM 11 11 v P(1']4 vv�^'arivvrl e-#lvoc5 Adjust, nEe, 6alia2 and eFi }hthat the er"prrrelt, SaTe'jsafety deviEe shall be tested feF pFepeF setting and signal. RespeRse shall be Ehe FeF e� meen-arrc-arI aFFn. C;'rTaTI a+r'ef signals eray be used r+e ch eek� D. A eepy ef_all infer.m.atieR fre.m. fi-inetienal tests, ineluding data, wed(sheets, -and- ether PA P+..ri_ls Sh-ll he t ,r. ed- A- rte the(1WNIED a++he r Fn p1etien of+he tes+ing p FegFa Fn. the epeFatieR ef the system Sh-all. be The system shall be tested by 3.4 MnAlrrN_I F.A.0 l_IRE.RSJ' trtRTTQC,ATEsJ and Cr. cif'ra+'l, 3.5 Mnnlrn-vv PA.C.TlvIRFER'SJ SERVICES Weil(Dee ptien testing, r pFeVide tFaining Se s Dr .ided: z. C .-h taFt 3. G Urnirh tFaining of OWNER'S p el_;#.-i leh+i..-eS F .,.ted by OWNED C. ManufactuFeF's seFVices shall comply with the requirements of Division 1 Sectien « n 3.6 DISINFECTION T�TJ7'fVT A. AfteF final aeeept-aneeef the#iltfatien system efeFe the filter aeed on seFvwee,t#e- PI I In4 nACD Accll!'InTEf In«" AC 69 7] DAGP I' Ap 94 RIDc CTCT ^g"�«01 GRAVITY FILTRATION SYSTEM ""AP4 3.7 FACILITY STARTUP // II CONTRACTOR,the r t r+. T END OF SECTION of I MMER ASSOCIATES INN AC 69 74 DAGF 9]Ap 94 RIDc CTCT /q;;!AqC Alll /=R WITV CII TD AT'AN'cVfTEM II II�T'](1']A PAGE INITENITIONIAI IV 1[[T QI ANTI! of I InA nACD Acclll9 ATCf In V" AC 69 74 DAGF 94 Ap 94 RIDc CT /q;;!AqC Alll /=R WITV CII TD AT'A nI cVfTEM II II�T']!1']A N sa nl =cuaa ifi�� !c ei ;:oder� �� g;. ` trox�xi'sa�snaao��i ozzas s�avnsoses 7f�1 133HSb3AO3 I� c Wv M39 : i iSI� c FJ S,IcOJ fO ., IJ SiN3w2/\OdMIonnVdCAHA31SASNOILVKild 'dgWWmd iNtnd iN3wiV2di H31VM SN3n3i3 N o +i4 4 IISINHJ sndUOD dO AlD moudiaasea 31« ONois,�n noueieos3a 3.-a s�3a v o _ s a ly - s 1W 1 e _ j O� r < l3 — �, o v i � t \P s Q f ` f^ V) z Cc I..L ti LU LU J aF �/�J V _nrvwi VJ > F—oi I I N r U �/�J } '• � w V r�^ 0 vJ z LLL `m o � LLI z 0- �J (�---- - q " O G U al <� W w o, / U o � � a z — 3 z DLT LL - � w n � m _ 0 W 033Vadfl 0 !f" S...�,,kah� irnez xi i ar>:a aai,csee SbX31 C4 SONIMV2i0 01 X30NI 6� ' a IISINHO Sndaoo 4o Aiii va3 3 z A �- S1N3w3AOldwl 71lm(]AH MiSAS NOliVUlld CN 1NVld1N3w1V3ala31VlA SN3A31S NO o I1SIHH7 SndUOJ dO A-LID _ 117�a�3o 3ida N No�s��a AMNaaavaad waw szoz/ei/z i h was N300d aid waw SZOZ/ST/Z z to S yy }oo ; i oo EEEE z f tiz� ,00400 w Jo a000� oaN Q r »Wsw as6io0 ddd66dzd666dd} ��i a��fi�mm�m oz ��¢ijw ww� > p -� waQao?�}�,g�3�azza a¢aa , aa 600Y;m�aw,nmw�? iz-- '�o»JLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL=? ===moo o}00000�� o{i000x -�� i of �ww ---- -? so 00000 ��00000l000ao faaoo L _ ^2 x w 0 z w ow oow z= - { ZNa,63a�m �12zoo n t a aaa = 3 ?Q�000z�gw�G�GSo�GfG'' w�0 >o�,�> f4z000'w" www z. f� ";Q �WSaQ6fV" 'LLLLp= ��� 009, --�`o zjozoo�o a�j�����kGGaa io�w� Nf� �fti Vi}N � �z$a�wo °u fu{JLL LLLL--LLjJ LLLLJ3~ LLLL LLLLLL LLLLLLLL o00 �1 LL�LL�LL'�LL J _ po 2(o 9LozitLi20 oaivodn sa»n�ag 6uuaau�6uD {o yuaugaodaa SNOIlN3ANOJ DNIODVl W w wan aan3Gns3a aaeG I z[roe-ssfrs£ � 4 6 I[bBL Xl"I15la HJ SnaaoJ DZZ 315531atl1i5 o5£S ^ Z d � Sb"X31 aNV 'S�09Wl.S 'SNOIlVI�3a99V .S rn ,�, ?i 11318H.O sndaoo Jo luo lVd3N30of Ask s z U�I YY YI�IU S1N3w3noadwi 71lf MIAH A31SAS NOI1VKl lj Fl o a (l FV Yr ■ ����rp� 1NVld 1N3w1V3a1831VM SN3n31S N 0 0 IlSINHJ sndN0D 30 AIID _ 8 8 8 8 8 8 X X W W > Q 3�8s 0 ? ffi a_2 a�aQa O ZO J - ' z U�oUup�< s�assasaaaaa sess�asaaa Q < s SsaaaaaaZR �,�NmNm��3 O j J seeeeeeeeeeeee W 0 J a LL.m,��.uLLLLLL.�LL xLLLLLLu.LLLLLLLL Z 8m m ' m> O ~ m Q M �a aaaa �Nm Q m - g Q u -- Z O O � - O Q W LL W - ~ �m - /m Q z O r r< m u o z 4 a w ' > a LL W J Z. oQa IW Y Q _ s z - O mmmmmuuuss LLmmm J U a w puo� Z Q W M.— W d - mmm>mmauump69> E X W Z X W m Z z - m52 a�w O - aBz - �Q wo o a� � yw Z. $a ma ummou n uuu m--m-m i.u-uo_x 0 WI aa -zo 3 -oo z W �o ax ax zOa Y>a i Ez m d .0� ; � a� my;mpm - zao ,34w � w i CD ` � w aa� am ��� � � u = aI� so a � um- m- min yr[n v- r> Z III O W - -` . �aaaammGSBuuuuuoo3o4ww44m�"5s:zzzzoaa8dda������a;Nod ;,$3 <a m m m m m m m p 4 m m x a o a m d14 m 44 w wl 3 �� - - a <> 0 Z. 4 _" -z In 3 a m. - 15 Cl o CO �_ _ 0 b - s O - - a u m m xa a I m u m o m a m u u s e (D CJo) 4o- o- o- TI -)-I DuON w - ' - m az o 3 w w oOZ 1 0 m m m m m p o m o a a a a 1w m 9GO/tiG/20 :=vodn sao!naaS6 6ui,aau,5u3 a{o 3tl1.&a iodaCj s 8 x saN sNaa es i3 bass sE3 31f103HOS 3dld (INV ShX31 00 S31ON NouondISN00 1"3N30 ^ rn IISIdH,? sndd00 }O ADD Wa3N30 o r.�y W'�.y�y■� S1N3H3AOHdWl:)HnV2CAHW31SASNOIIVKIH o U �a•• �`��_�'•^� 1NV1d 1N3H1VAHI HAiVM SN3A31S'N'0 W U SPy i��i I1SI21H3 Sf IOD JO Ally W NOildid0530 AB 3— ON NOiSIAM NOLLdid0530 1. 31tl0 �'ON N01-3d ZO I I I I I c M M I o00 gsa�� s s I = I I M z11 gg � Fzzz I 8a`aa y W € M <s�a 82! 8 �'� u 4SEm 'fln$N# $ 1 F a 0 F �W=g.a=W � OZBQa=�1W #E E E w z �4 W W W �86cjb�5:n � gCo $��8�8�W5 s;u z�r '�wd2-1Wo'b' 3��8 � io`go�ou 8�omm'n3 mc� a 0 - -.'n #3�s9Wv3 $o W 3ffrt8& �o 8 o�w Et z ggWys oa r 01 Z.- �.. �.n ��o: �3�� ���u � jz-m s :WW xWW xWW :WW Buys 1xmfml-N I � - I � a o iz Y mmWt !RE' g W Z. y s z 9 S �s� 09�9 u i Z3Ng `Wd WW x # W zo� gy> 's `� 3 � y -s �N si tadzzz W r< Dui `a<m W #8zF48 u< mjei� o=' ; 7s W �$EWS �899 aa# 8 ao< m 3�SSN <~z ~m:cis d �3z o'ern f 81moo Y Y 8 ' o 3jWY�ds'IWWme 8. $o ?80 ` ;gam g a .�<� Q � x 35 8� m:` gu 8;00� 8 i gai L8o .H3 �� msW �"� ono SSm e �: g �W m 4u� W W £bla nu Wy�'ppyl Ww °1I yz�W L w3uz3 €€o a o < af'J�WI Who 2'4d'rc� MY I- N $m�3 mn;Ej s W z i3 ?Y 48c w a o 0 0 o d "ul a �'do2 0� s `� � 8 $ aY'i � g°1I4 uW N ?-t5 W w 6 #g i u g� 5q! �ya a o � u: W. W' yu+Wm$ s ` Q ' qW ^3a v WW`� 8. MYR arcQ z =8u tl'i F iWgFu �Jrc 25goi ao F W �9Is o2ou wWj �iW W z�� o zYz$ o.m � o -; c �� & 3 izo l7� go cc��EE�z i 3mt C 'ys o 8$N` F z z w k aF -uW Q��m o �z ~gym �� S>@mh o LdW . W&m Ia=Ws, Wx9 R' �= R4 sts== _ WW3 � $ s0000 �eUIW sad VI --hap9aa i gs� 'sY R I a z`---- I I i a. 2. Q o =„r "o0 48 og W4� =s h� is zm - -law Me o Wo�mmm8 W ;S �F- o N h��i�` �. 8m 6��g�. nW kidxCaQW� mo"s,o�o�W�,m., maz <� �8~8 N¢ o 3W ffrc � W "# s'ag b1 . WOZ . m WW c zs N'yo S 8 96 �E6kig6� -c='o€ k6 Yg & Q �� ya W � o � xn!PS�oWg W 7 ouYG� 8m WY i m# io n� =�Wa # s < x -$ WW � wr G85 i � .0�CJ,Z � Wmz<d��Q o Y � i $5 �ffo� Y Fz.Wmg Y =o aWW x 0&3im �QW3�M I �W#a8 ig :8 €$i W oW c��= WQ soggW �� o o� ='3fa 8. s ��W ;g � iWoQeV"xW �`_< Wm =� W<€ Qg �$ UNZ,-`88o-E 6M o't _ i9 y-Q 395 ` 3 M2 Qri z8 u4 a "own _ �� � � a �_ �o3xa �_ =a=J so xc <Zc Wz U. "aYQg�L.S o. W W .s < WW �o Su -�; v X & .< W oWW hW ` sW QW=4Ny8 GW�rci W 8 c W Qo5 s� 8 3�� o W o�s oWW W Ix =Qc i sm "' '� _ 4f.vqt G7 �S $vi W �8- o1a W ha`~ s � pWm Z. L'" u< W o- sN QWgYB� sa WYy iWnWSa�'x3 Gso�"g'<ot93 W e qQZ KWBg m �WB o ''OFS2 Y 3 may,' 8 aN^ ❑$`moo 80 � . W• Yo ga lc $� Ego W 1 3m?�iWo Szz g 5o> � yangW N6 Go $mSS'�' mW�i iE3 ' `$o'?s go s�o w6 55J22 0� ~1irc G 18dI3~ Qffi'm„y J` c��"m s> �� W N,SaW 75 mdh tl8 z 3�W,_ ffimvW ON E ;Wok i 8 Wu<W :S W ��o N #Ym . NY - N o u= �ogo g�8 Eo N ��9• NW N8<S NQgQ� N' .Woi c o. mi �N�Wm >� W�u J4W . s� W c m' x j s S d Wz� Q &xW� 33 d g 1 g Wx' 3� "`44� Q m : :- . Y oN.W #�n �sW mi o -� �Wm $WmWa#o $fl—zm WQi ''ON & o QQ ~� �a �`LmW - . 05 QyoyB��"� oil W T8 0 fig,•, 38 Si �Q so.W o �080 0� o o &��' o. $i� mm @4 ug'I88a R 3t ��a $ S�� 8� $ az �mR �� - _ - - - - - - - 940Z/VL/£0 031VOd0 I I sa»naag 6uuaau�6u� }o yuaugaodaa �� say a3ewnw wan aaasinssa aaei zaroe-esfrss - - g a,. a �� icvxa xi'iinaHosnaao� ozzas's�aysssoses SVX31 NVId 31159NIlSIX3 I� z ' =ss i �, 11318HO sndaoo Jo luo va3N39 s z of Va,A',Ar/'��'�J S1N3H3noadwi 71l MIAH A31SAS NOLLVKlIj o a j i dg YYYI d 1NV1d 1N3H1V3a1 831VM SN3n31S N'0 o *'s�i'� IISINH�sndN0D d0 AID _ �c —� x--� Nz �a =s 4g o - _ U/ x o 000DOO 000 a a a El O°O 11 o aea0H0H / O C, O \ / \ oz H / M h LLsa .o o 0 o� —00 D--I W — w w w - e 0 zQQ ao �000 o,=�ooa - Ro 0 a �oaWop>- a�z" w Na m�I a> 9soaOtis/20 :=vodn X� sa>_>nzag 6uuaau6u� }o yuaugaodaa �' ry wale aaa3isissn aaei I za � e {s. i sn xi'unaHo snaaoa ozzas's�avissoses SVX31 NVId 831lld I1V213AO lWN3N39 0 �77 �; 11s1NH.O sniaoi Jo luo z gay �'� S1N3H3noadwl 7llnVi4AH A31SAS NOI1V lllj UgIY 1NWld 1N3w1W3a1831VM SN3n31S N OY U oo IISINHJ snd'dOD dO AIID _ 0 0 ------ o 0 w w� � LL� I co Go On a a w p e e w w s so "� = o �w - --- {fir 1 o L41 1� o� — tz 1 r_ I � l z I I =3 I I I I s� 1 q I LLm 1 1 1 I 1 I I I I I I I Hm ❑ 1 1 I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I ❑ i Imry I i , I� on � � 1 J I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 L I I I N I I I d I CN _ - J 9aOa/tia/20 :=vodn ° sa»nLag 6uuaau�6u� }o yuaugaodad � � � sf"a �' `S tros�xi1marosnaao��l ozzais'smabissoses �� o a Ca 4 SVX31 Ntlld 9Nldld 1N3flljj3 213111J 43NI9W0D cam' � e�C lIM7 z � ;a' & 11S1NH.O Snjaoo Jo uio z {4 SiN3w3noadwi:)nnvaanH w31SAS NOIUVK�ia'd3Wwmd iNnaiN3wiv3aia3ivmsN3n3is No oo IlSINH:)sndN0D d0 Alo _ --------------------------------- -G --------------------------- — w 31 0 0 u� G a❑ � I I s� /O/Md/LF D l Md/ZT 1 �a ooQo o I z ❑ o u g I I L- I J 9LaZ/b L/20 =voin N � sa»nLag 6uuaau�6u� }o yuaugaodaa � �ya3aw�tiwti�a3ti3�s�3ti3da� z�bassE�E SNVId NOUVIUMOW O0� ^ ^Q.. trox�xi1inae�snaao��i ozzas's�aysssoses Sb"X31 r ,. e� S ONtl'b"I 53X09 NOIlJNflf ;+ /IS121H.7 Sniaoo Jo .Ills NOIlnOW30 z r of �S1N3W3n0adWl 7llnVi4AH W31SAS NOI1VK IJ IlSINHJ sndNO:)JOA110UgIYY U 1NVld 1N3W1V3a1831VM SN3n31S N O oCD _ pc 3z �o �O m oN lI-Bl/f.6-.Z O lF-9ll s„?,Z V) z Q ^J za az m0 O 3 — oa _ a a i� \MEN\\k e V3 3 z O o l/7 oa 9LOZ/b L/20 =voin .w.... Q saan as 5--,bud /00}ua7odao SlIV134 (INV"NOI173S'NVld VT 3lOHNVW c,) avisioss SVX31 NOI1D3fNI IV01W3H0(INV 1N3f11333213111343NI8W00 ��z CT) , 1VDINVH73W s z �} ili�k.� snd�oo �a ,11I� � sWof �i m!: `<a g' �3wWn� == SiN3w3naddwl jnnvdaAH MiSnS NOUVUlld 6'o iNtndiN3wiv3did31VMSN3n3iS No rrr o I1SIHH7 SndUOD JO AID _ ouaiaos]o .0 3iva ti moisins e wnou3oav aid wrw szoz/sti/z t wa I � 1 3a aQo < �3mLL o3 III G III 3 zu-) I a <o I �a I z II a 0 5 _ �Qa <s I � a a W e :<J -d � W w � Q2 9LOZ/tip/20 =vodn X� sa»naag 6uuaau�6u� }o yuaugaodaa NVId co y say a3ewnw wan aaasinssa aaei z...... - - g w �s btq:. ` 6C icvxa xi'unaHo snaao� ozz als's�avls s oses SVX31 531V9 34115 ZT-T 521311H a 11318HO sndaoo )o luo IVJINVHJ3H s z U�IYYYI�IU S1N3H3noadwl 7llnV8(]AH A31SAS NOUVKl lj (l tNW ■l! 1NV1d 1N3H1V3a1 a31Vm sN3n31s No o ,Y M IlSINHJ snd'dOD d0 AllD _ r---------------i $ $ $ �Oz ¢ ~oj 2 Fopo Q�z dzow a Omo - �z0 -oo —- - O O�wzw z p J- 12 gF $ $ z $ s oz o 12-M-03 4$ ti Q p d 12-A9-02 �o lz 0 0 B o — ----- r 12-M-03 I I L---------------J 9saZ/tis/20 :=VOJn P sa»naag 6uuaau�6u� }o�yuaugaodaa ISNOUDIS P n � say a3ewnwwan aaasinssa aaei I zaroe esfrss - - g w � yq'., i icvxa xi'unaHosnaao� ozz3is's�aysssosrs SVX31 531V93411S ZT-1 S2131113 n z m Iai 11318HO sndaoo Jo luo 1V71NVH73H z '� ;J.o�� •�a S1N3HIAOddwi 71lMIH A31SAS NOVKIJ ; oV3A 1NV1d 1N3H1V3a1831VM SN3n31S N OA yU o ++i l IlSINHJ sndN0D d0 AIIDo _ 4�3 (, • - oz O ova oLL ` = Q U LU Qaz t\ �o w LU p - �; 1 — LLodo - A. _ -- doil os a� 3❑ F r°o o 71 EF�::1] Z o❑ v aLLJ iv 4 30 o " 3U oLU (N oQ 3� 3x� �o YD 9LOZ/tis/20 =vodn ,SNO, 001 : :w SA2 m«_»c<msu . } es� s Am & 2 0 ^ ` of / wrnd ` 3td ~ �qm/am 2 Ga \>\ \ \ /!; Iz - \\\ ( � :_ \ y} : \) . o \_ /} / ` /\ ) } _ - ( § \ » ; \ / d\ /Et d /\ \ \ ^ /\ /)§ *Z - 2 ;:o \/ \ z om o El _ ° (\ \ :SJ ). _OZ/t.m sa nl _ Fcuaa fi�� !c ei .7_od�Q III SNOIl73S 00 e `Q s� trox�xi'sa�snaao��i ozzas s�avi loses yf31 S31V9 3011$ZL-L SIJ311IJ • !^ �`. IirI�J I�'J CIdCJ`l7J �° i,11.J IV31NVHDIA c_ { o? siN3w3noaewi onnvaanH w31sns Nouvailii o2 'd3W Wmd LN na iN3wiv3ai a31vm 3N3n3i3 N o 'a+4 9, IISINHJ sndN09 30 All9 moudiaasea7T777777 51— noueieas3a era sea ^o 03 z� �a LL� owO a �LLp xo LL-x od�a wp ww 3 z w awd zoo; - OF )II_'7II II Lu u Ilill�� «,, z.; 111 l LU o w oo wo = o w 8 h a s@� x� aw \ ?Wz ?o„ Q� �¢o wu 9l Ol/bl/E0-031VOd0 isaya3ewnwwneaaa3is�3naaei zaroe-esrrss sa»naag 6uuaau6u� }o yuaw�aodaa 31n(13HDS g q acvxa xi1inae�snaao� ozzas's�ayss loses SVX31 1N3W3JVld3d 31V9 ZT-T S2 31113 z 11318HO sndaoo Jo luoof v�iNVH�3w s z 'dgWwmd SiN3n3noadni�nnv8anH n31SAS NOIU"i�i8 o iNtndiN3niV38i831VMSN3n3iS N O IISINHJ snd'dOD d0 AIID _ p0 �888888888888888888988898 1$8$8888$8$$88$&88888$$88 ozp g 000 o I$1 of a� oLL� 82 zoo — 8, B 8, 6t$ft$8 6t$@$fi3$fi3 $8$ o ��0 3m 33 o�z 6o zis oz NN woow oma N�ao MW �ww 883c�8333888883�3�u83c�S�u33 I9o7 ENHNNN8�N a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaa w 0 x wR o o o o o 0 o o o ooR�00000RoRoo s ss s s w Q c� N H 3R€38€38�3RdR88888F8R8RR8R88 �yxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx �8€38€3R88�R8id�388 F8R88 R 8888 8 8 8 5 8 9 b 8 3 8 9 S 91S �1� 8 z z j z z z o z 2.'M'm w �tan uol u�� M�l mmu�mi uo� 9LOz/bV20 :=vodn tt{ saolnaa5 6uuaau 6u� }o}uaw/�nda❑no _ � �._„ „SN011D35 dNV NVId �� �aa��' �hr Srne�xL L aar>'a anssses �� W e i Sb"X31 A2i3llV�J H1NON 9 T 5213111j 31"ter r �f� s7• -a: :?�4,� I1S121HO sndaoi 4a ,Ills 1voiNVHo3w — z of o S W' ibis'z'f8� �3WWn� SiN3w3noadwl Diiml)AH MiSAS NOUVUlld 1NVId 1N1V381 d31V'A SN3n31S No 3w o 'r s•....: :. I1SIHH7 SndUOJ dO A-LID _ a I a os a 11de wnaNsaav aad wow szoz/ei/z i fdn11 S oa o o aZ = �o _ zo - a p�LL - zU a 0 0�00 3 wG Lu pk> =Z 53 Lu > x G In am ou LL LLo� 1 o3z a LUW-ZS W = yLO-W-2: 8 8 moD 1 _ - ol ?aV oG 3�a �3 $ __ xo LLGG u � FZ > o - o Co _< ' adz o LL 3 - nG-���-ZS LO-LnI-ZS 4 LO'W-ZL 9 8 E DGz QkG o V� � 9LOZ/b L/20 '031VOdf1 \\ \A9s�o� wo . _\ N1VDINVHDA�a11J %, \q ` : AD �s t ~ /� / \ R f / `amm mam w G» ° > > : } \\\\ \ \/ : } / _ MATCH mrs a 7 (� \ \ \ } \\\ \} \ \\\ 1 MATCH LkN:E3STA o 7 lo _OZ/t.m Sa:)!AJaS 6UflaaU.'6U.3 JO ,UaLV�a(3 ......... SNOliD3S 00 SVX31 Ad3l]VD H18ON 9-T R131ll IISIYHD sncidoD io Aio zs T' SiN]HIAC)ddnl:)IlnV8(]AH A31SAS NOIUVK�IJ iNVld iN]HiV]di 831VM 3N3A3iS N 0 IISIUH:)snd'dO:)30 AIID NOIldl—G 3— DN NO-1-3.77777777 0 �5: z Z. 0- yz \ \ » \ ` � \ : / C) E 0 0 \ Lu 0 1 1 .0 .Z. 6 -2 Lu z >.LU Lu 0 7 t C oz v o 0 -Z Z 0 1,F Lu 2u z zz Lu 0 Lu LL Oz r2 Lu o 0, 0 tj 'Zi J \\� \ < -Z z 17- K \.0 L� Z z Z< 11 tj a! LuLn 0 0 >3 U Lu Z z Lu u, �l Lu u- > } � - /\ \�\ �� .. . 9LOZ/VL/CO:C)31VOdn sa�inaa5 6uuaaui6u� /o }uawynda❑ 31f143HD53A1tlA4N7 NOI1J35 W SVX31 A8311V9 H1210N 9-T 5213111j�s •, s^+: a; 1.4� IISINH.O sndaoo Jo Aiii voiNVHD3w z % !' �3WWn� SiN3w3noaawlDiimaAHMiSnSNouvaiiia �o 4y5P, iNnaiN3wiv3aia3ivmsN3n3is No o IISIHH7 SndUOJ dO A-LID _ 11dis 1 .a Siva ry eoisiewnaNaaavaad w.w szoz/ei/z in a o ---- ------_ �o 03 g3 — q Q d3 D° 2 2 0 9 9 9 9 9 J qo 0 0 0 0_o 0 0 o g o W F F z g s s g F o`o 0 0 o oo o'o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o a g g g it — o m II tf t5 N �a e aop o�N��NNo ~>> w>25 °WLU zs�n �ns as - az z w p zGLU o ag _ oo LL o z z z Lu E E E E o d o z i LL LL LL w w LL o z i i i z i i i 3 Az 3 3 5 5 i 5 5 5 5 3 3 o oz o� <o ,S a LL1 �m mom mom mom w3 0 W U oLn l z lz LL, a a a a J bbbbnb G m �°.�pSo So Sow So w_ _ _ _ _ Q � Q � g� w� _ w O 3 J O LL v off C .. __ �Lu 5 a x : a a k z o a� \ LL �O Vi z F- C 3 � a C � f z w w E E E,E o _ ______z¢_____ ______ 9LOZ/bL/20 a3ivodn _ a sa�n as 6uuaaubu��o}uawazodaQz��.- SN011D35 aNV NVId As CT)b � 2J s.. 11sINH.J sndaoo �o Aiio IVDwVHD3w z mi l"..i.: •�� F's� 41 _ _ �Q z oo "'4.. Y:�f? V�lAllA7fl"f� va S1N3W31ONd AiV3 dii83iVM 15AS iS.No llj �a., Ul !�'1lII{Y�YY11 l�1lUU 1NVld 1N3W1tl3H1 H31VM 5N3A315'N'O o 115R1H7 SndUOD JO A11J _ �a�s3o .a I 3ida Oudt—ON—Void WNW SZOZ/aL/Z N N L o 000 ooda�o 20o iiafr _ �o oi����oLL�� _ m 0 3 mG �o y - _ oz m aiamwin LL Ea.0 ao - _?. ,.... III CT-wI-ZL 1 40i-W-ZT NIA z O = LL W q v) 'a2z �o> - .. .. o v III ma _ LL v 3 3 G Z TT-W-zL r d - I V v 3 II LLja u oks - ao pLu 5 II o � spa _w Qa LL at-w-zT C pOL-A-zi { U I V v Ep I I �a I oa I - o aKa 9LOZ/az/20 =vodn �� sa�na5 6waaubu��o }uaw/�odaQ��� NVld llVi13A0���� M i 7 SVX31 A2 311VO H1f105 ZT L S1131l^}�s,•. 'y v 11SINH.J sndaoo �o Aiio IVDINVHD3woo z S1N3VUAONd Wl 3llnv8(]AH w31SAS NOUVUlld o H— r 1NVld 1N3w1V3a1 d31VM SN3A31S N o o rrrr� LLSIdH7 S(1dUO:)JO 1dl:) _ w.4 laos3o .e 3iva olslna olioI—ON—Void WNW SZOZ/aL/Z N e i wo — GGwoo� _ _ a°�zp3 of .. N�000d mN aF MATCH LINE STA 0+76 o II a aQa I I oQ IE I I � UI 2' h yyI I ~tea 8 8 a a Bo \- -- -- - -- MATCH LINE STA 0+76 II oa iii 9LOZ/tip/20 =vodn P sa�in�as buuaau�bu3 JO auawPodap SOlOHd(INV NO11D3S P \00 q B 4j,' 6 I[h%LXl"1151LHJ SfItla0J59OZZ 315531aH11505kS I� SG'X31 A21311V9 H1f10S ZL-L SN31113 $ � P.i� �, IlSRMO sncidoO {o Am iV:iNVH73w ZS n�J err. �3 �'�WWI,lC1 - - SiN3w3noadwi DnnMIAH A31SAS NOIUVK�i3 sr j iNtnd iN3wiV3ai 831VM SN3A3iS N 0 0 IlSINHJ sndN0D dO Ally ? _ NOO 1-30 3M ON NOISIA NOO 1-30 A9 31M 'ON N05N38 �✓� � �,S � � _ q�daa3 oz5 21 gswap -=N fl r; o 6 oho o os� r g 0apd FAG IP o w �/ op o ore w c 0 �90 `-' 'mow o _ uu w a 2 oc 3 w W � o V o ago w z z w wg w ->o_ LL Li i 30� i. -moo ire of 0 S Q� as 30 �a �O 0 �Lu U W 5r _ U o �k S~ LL LL uj uj W s } YW �o 910Z/bl/£0:031VOd0 sa�n a5 6uuaau bud /o }uaw/�odaQo 31n03H3S 3AlVA ONVN 011A5 00 � S[htLXl lii_�'N?.: "i1i:i:JVLSioS£5 w � gip,,�..... y� � Sk�X31 Ak13llV9 H1nOS ZT L S2131113 z � sm� ^_€ ,',� v 11SRIH7 S(1d210� a ll� v�INVN�3w �z (If o S1NiNVId idWIJIlfdiid31VM 15ASNOI1tlNlllj a., Ul !�'1lII{Y�YY11 l�1lUU 1Nb'1d 1N3W1tl3H1 H31VM 5N3A315'Wo o 11SIUH3 SndUOD 30 A11J _ �a�s3o .a 3ida N No�s� oiias wnou3oav aid waw szoz/sti/z t o`o�oo`ffi'"S�g000'"000000"'000000 .f• 0 5 S �����G G G�.Gm���,G�,G�G�������G�i w° _ iiiaa�i3�idi�iii3�1� — d3 ao wwwwwq �w wwww�y�� � w 3 $o"o o'o'o S$ '0 0 0` 8 00 a'o'o Go r u m m F F O nw rcw zOp w ° 0 g 8 o d o 0 0 w w w w w W a 3 a O w / � , 75, - a6 - w - -_ €€ Uw _ z E E E 03< ww o _������z000000�000000 p w s wo $zZNZt5&Z5 as s �� - LL d o m 5 5 3 5 5 3 `3 3`3 3`3`3 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5Lu 4 w�LL d � o0 LU ym my mym mym III of "N o� W U V) w f f f 2 �~ Q �bbbbb6 Q� mom mpm LU w2 oo 's z mm� z5s3a3aak ° oo o z wN \ 's o oao�^ � saas ���a�� a�gggg Fl 19 a I LLf a oo a a �N , I � - I � w 9LOZ/aL/20 =vodn n, zi Sa:)inlaS 6uuaau.'6u3 }0 aUaugJ0dap SNVId \00 N wail a3n3lsi�3n 3ael i o e bjq'•, ` c irvsz xl'Nnarosnaaol ozz3ls's�avlssosas StiX31 Ad3llVE)ZZ-El Sd31TJ g � g I1SRM0 SIldN00 {o /,110 v�INVHn3w N � � err•. r'I 3 LL S1N3w3noadwl 7llnV8(]AH w31SAS NOI1VNlll3 N W jdY.iF lr�l��llCC11 1NVld 1N3w1V3a1 831VM 3N3n31S NO W o IISINHJ snd'dO:)30 AIID ? _ NOIldl—G 3— 'DN NDi5N3b NO-1-30 A9 31M 'ON NOi5w3y 3 3NIl HJ1VW 5� odQ - _- 000 03 0 zo-vd-e p _ IZ m o ro,i =�wZw 6 a� Qua Q �a 0 _ eii it 2s — o z o zz zg FP — 3 — o ^o oz �a 0 0 - 3 s Z.Iz e zl 6 � mom Fob 633 as �2 _ =4 Z. o ow a z m a zo-�- j?z ~ s- oV V ob ob E --- -g� - _ zll > I g LLa - 18/Fvuo�P- - �I — t$+ 3 k Q s-�s ��Xa-oz s-.ati 3NIl HJIVW 5 3 0 - �Q W 9LOZ/VL/f0:031VOdn sa�in3aS buuaau�bu3 }o auaw�xodap I SN01173S a � ss-s a3ewnN wail a3n33si�3n 3ae3 I zsroe ssc we � yak', S t[vx[xi'Nnallo snaao� ozz 3is's�aysssosrs g SG"X31 hN31ltl9 ZZ-El SN31llj J Fi +., c IISRMO sncido0 {o Aio v�iNVHo3w o N err 3 g '. Y"`U(� S1N3w3noadwl 7nnV80AH w31SAS NOLLVKl lj r4 1NVld 1N3H1V3N1831VM SN3n31S'N'O N o ap IISINHJ sndN0�dO AIID ? _ NO-1-30 3M 'DN NOISIA NO-1-30 A9 31M 'ON N05N3N Oz LU [7zZ 1 p0 0 o�U¢ o LLO � Oo�ZOx g GF _ nOm zo�Y e3 Dowzo Jf � o W ~LU 4. U o i w w w LL zo F LL� gZ ' O aO lu i z ok of od 0d a u O GO s �a g L Zw M Z a uQ _NZ Z"tW N ► �� LU cr Lu w otj \ =o pk pk3 zoo oa aka 5m — 9LOZ/VL/£0:031VOdn _� \\_�< }s o/ ` :w q£ am»maem\° �, 7 \ s k \ ` \ ` ISlIw, amam @ 20 : » 7 r ± ® ` \\\ b]W ` 3t ~ // \ \ \) / ` �qm/am2Ga� > m w - - / - _ 0 / \ � } ® \ \ . - \ Lu ° » e E LU . \ � . /LU 2 [ 7 - / LLI � \ / ■ - ® ' . ` - / d / / - _ I \ ` / / q — \ \ , \ �( 0 _ z > � /. : ) .02 / § § ` ° \\ \Lf) \ 6 ) \ ` §6 /) (f\ ' /)} , )(} } \ } m�.a _� \\_�< III\o� ` :w sq£ ame me4m\° /5 \ ISlIw, amam @ 20ams\NVHD ` @7 k\ V. b]W ew SN ~ // \ \ §) ^wmm gam 2 Gad > m w Ez\ \ \\ \ \�\ \ {\\ /(f / 7 0 Apo� { / q j \ ( / ..... g ) z / i§ \ \ / / / \ ` \ @ / ( \. /\§ �:I \\ \\ \\ }\\! ] ° � »\ } } §Lu LU \\\ }: `(: i §( 02 k,\ \§ \ _ :0 J - ,:!- _® 7 !2 : . . \� \~ mOZ/V.a a _� a ,_�< sq£ \?/s a, \77 ) k } $ . ISlIw, amam @ 20 : @7 /) Ql ` td ~ rb]W �qm/am 2 Ga ) /22 z< »_ `\ . � ° 0 / 0 ~ } > . _: ± , / b � � \ z ; ► /( E : \\ © « . ±Lu > ±uj -� ��-- > j , .. // - /\ - AR! ;z > , 002 §§ j ()}� : \®� - :~ \j� /E mOZ/V.a say a3swnN wan a3n3lns3a 3ael zaroe-ssfrss saoinlaS buuaau�bu3 }o aua,,podap S31n(1]H7S 3AIVA a00� i4`, sc icvxa xl'unallo snaaol ozz lls's�ayss sows StiX31 M311V9 ZZ-ET S2 IIJ ^g M W. I1SRMD sncido� {o .11l� v3iNVH�3w o N s: err 3 S1N3w3noadwl71lnV8(]AH w31SAS NOUVKl IJ N �� y �J�-M• 1NVld 1N3w1V3a1831VM SN3n31S N 0 W o �d*. ;:•' IlSINHJ Sfldil0:)30 Ally NO-1-30 i5N3b NO-1-30 19 31M 'ON N01-8 z d o w i w D O O O O O O O C C W O C O O O O O O O .......... 31 Gt�GGGGGG �GGGGGGGGG a Y 0000 "� aw�o�N www w ww o LLz�oz a c00, 0, 0, z000zoiio� 0 0 0??o 0 0 o c o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0""HE d - - _=LL �bbbb 3bbbbb �bbbbbbbbbb � 2 2 2 Noo�o mo9 of F F F F F z O n G u�i N N N H N H 2 - 0 0 0 G G G o�� ���� w��������� a 5 5 a a 5? 0 5222w2 5 5 3 5 5 55 3 5 0 3 5 3 5 3 5 5 5 5 5 W J D a >> _U mmn=mmmmm m mmmmmmm mmmmmmmmm W J o 0 0 N z ' N a a a i LL g �8'g&E'�'i'�'2'o'O'L2 �86��98888�8 �gg$`8 g8gBig ig 3 Y 9LOZ/bl/f0:031VOdn N wai3 a3n31si�3n 3ae1 I zi sa�inaas buuaau�bu3 }0 auaw��0dap SNVld \00 p,4 Q ` c icvxn xliinallo snaao� ozz 3ls's�ay... sows SVX31 S3nlVA Alj ii-Lng zz-£T s2ao Ij $ � � ` .A IVDINVHDIN usiaHD sndboD io 11�� S1N3W3noad WlDnnVaOAH W31SAS NOUVKllj N 1NV1d 1N3W1V3a1831VM SN3A31S N O W o 11SINHJ snd'dO:)30 AllD ? _ NO-1-30 3M 'DN NOISIA NO-1-30 A9 31M 'ON NOi5w3y Oz iv w OzO� �z— —DO Z�Q�? DO �3 Ozl .. NDDDti i i 3NPHD1VW iv ao w g 3Go� i maV g3> p > z TTT< � w eG� iv ly ---LL-L iv �a zz r>� po aG� z ` O m so-uv-Ei o az 9 3NIIHJIVW 9LOZ/bl/f0:031VOdn _� /,_ < ° 2. \ :w sq£ AV A8/n%a m\, 010 ^ 7 \ / k \ , \/«° � ISlIw, a mam @ 20 k§®) \} b]W «w am=, 3td ~ \ewe wmm gam 2 Ga41. / \ \ > m w ] / /2§ : _. . : . z ry! . . , . . .. .. . - �( . . . . - w= y/ \\ � ; :e . . / ( §§ 3 . . . y : - «_ / iv - to ; e rF— - // / / \Q \ \ iv m�.a N wan a3n3lns3n 3ael i• s tmx�zl1inaN�snaaol ozzlls's�zaa vusosrs saonla5 buuaaubu }o aua,,poda II SN01173S P n00 SVX31 53�1Vn A13N311f18 ZZ-El 5231113 n $ 6) g ' I-LSRMO sncidoo {o Aio IVDINVHD3w o In y: Ql 3 g Gj�U i� "''` � ��WWn'� -� s1N3w3noadwi onnvaanH w31sns Nouval�ii cal�a � ��l• '� 1NVld 1N3w1V3a1 831VM SN3n31S N'0 W o IISINHJ sndN0D 30 AIID ? _ NOiItliNOS30 �.8 3M 'DN NOi5N3b NOLLtliYO530 A9 31M 'ON N015— Q c z r w C C m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W O O O O C O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 "' � 'ttGGGGGGGG��, ��22GG��t21GGG Ls L�uj uj LH — F — 'uf -�=Owap �p�zao o 0 8 l7 d o 0 o I 0 0 0 o g o g o 0 0 0 0 0 0 oIN N m �� d W �Z�c aIIa �a� 0000 cc`000000000 000000000000`0 F o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0. a a 0 0 0 G C G oawwwwwwwEl oam-1 w-w-w-sa slaw-mew-was I S--------- o 5 S 5 5 g 3 5 3 5 5 0 5 5 5 3 5 5 5 5 3 3 a Q =L >> 5 z w o w u z - - W w � c W W W — �e " - - - O w a a LU J F 9 QV) Q 45 N M _ c-I F � - � w aka \ ` ` ` ` ` _ _ _ ` ` - -- -_ _ _ -- --"- R � E a a e a � 3 > i 9LOZ/bl/£0:031VOdn isay a3ewnN wnl a3n3ls�3n 3ael zaroe rise Sa�iAJaS 6uuaau.'6u3 JO aUaw�Joda(3 NVId T00 4,e�'. s TTvxa xl'NnaNs snaaol l ozz3s's�ayss loses I�� "a 1 � SG"X31 s3mvn ano3s aIv zz-Et sa3nl3 € rn a M 'mil S I-LSRMD sncido� { Aio zs�`.• �ti��. O �tl71N tlH J3W � N 5o n�J err•. 3 LL S1N3w3Aoad Wl7llnV8(]AH A31SAS NOI1VKl IJ ro W mdY •.. 1• 1Ntnd 1N3W1v3a1831VM 3N3A31S N 0 W o IISINHJ sndN0J 30 Al1J ? _ NOIldl—G NOild'NM3D A9 31M 'ON N01-a 3NIl HJIM I 93 o0 z' �3 wpm 0No pz C a� gF oLLc I oNp ¢— �o� I �W— 4 _ A A p z 13-M-11 13-M-11 ¢�o v 44 ozl ., :.voNz I I I I I I I TT-W-£T H H o z o o z o d ry d \ I � I LL I 4 LL I I +„9 O? I _ I jaory I w LL Idol I +„9 a 3NIl HJ1VW iv 9LOZ/bl/f0:031VOdn & e , < sew, :w s qi __+o m ma am, f, 7 ) \ ) &»mJ s A0i g 20 mm� Amok k§ \, ofA t ~wmm R )/ gam 2 Ga « P , . /\ \ z ' \ \_ / ° \\\ !W. ] \ /<®>: _ [ \z - _ ± § ;0 IS / j - �' / cr : f : LU .1 �z § < 4 ` a ) \} \)) % /\ \ }z > 2 , :0 /\\) /§ / �� / § ( ) "q1111 1a 7c sse TIC sagrn�as 6uuaa w6u3 �o ;uaw;�odaQ 3:0, e xa mars wdea a�.:�znis m,d: .c'[Sam�uvrvnal=Tevaa�rwufoiiue/ry aurzrvo asoctvi wessZ rzoz�c/c m o s' z�y33ti!q a 1ea�xi uaH�s�dd� oz�3s s3,adssosEs SdX31 S31ON lb'a3N39 P Aid(INH X09 d"ns ISVDKId 43SOdOUd - I1STH0 snd2100 x .IlIO S1NAHAA0Nd W171l f1 tlil0AH W315A$NOIltlNlllj m c IMMY 1N11ld 1N3W1tl3N11A L11 $N3�31S'N'O r lSR1HJ Sf1dNOJ j0 AlIJ u o m om m r w ,� o „_ _ - ow¢ ° a>a_ - m¢ oU, az it to on. w° wrzdo o =� J ioz w� ���im w� _ w(_ 000w�mo xx� °ism o o a _ a �w HIM ioa w N _ 10 -arc mzoz"o.AH aow zF to; orw'3 n rcw o �¢ ORK �w wmwowo-mow ��l 9z�qaw¢x 3maaww1 a¢¢ oOzz " - oWw zo ow zwoomozlr m �H wmcmiwo oo.'o was II om moll., 0 o z� ww oR E oraa�"SM i �z� �owm womw wwrcwm�i -- �x�zrcw .moll. Sox W°�� W�vF,moo�zmm �° 'm oz jl. 'w �� ton F- 1 ma iRil o=o o LL �oowmom; a o� -w �� °joc�o'- °ww wLLo �w�°>m bw��zmo w LLnzooa a _a o w w z �� oJm � w moo �oaw� mm -m iw o mdo�o w ;�o za�',Sa�M, -0 04° _�� °o61oT - -o�oo-oar'nr.o - oamn rc __ ooQzr °N o om t �W O m � °gym - oam�aorcw ohm== zo7 z2syag a m JQ A�� omoo d° a aw wzw z°x"��omr - �w _oSzm�J� `rjO'A A M immo=- ° Jzo omao �= oz ozwo m�j000�mz� �mm�az�rOoo ao O f u11Jw- - m Gym mizo�� 5�. ww - wo�2 °° zi K6.17 0'.. Flog R =o�aoo W g - o Qrom �v 'W maw of w�mio�o woo zwo M MIA N?Ww3oo� _ _ z - Nxzmi �w� o� -F $, owz� oac°� a?irmnocri Y zy 1�°G R113 d r m m� m _ mw� zo�1� moymz oFF�ow�w �om vzai�>� KINK o = W�1 oj°'aF �N 3 �°z�� owwv,m A`��o �io��� wuz>m of m3 20 TO , willy 2010QW-M moo w _ wr'n-a Q°90 sysib z°z oow wm zoo o zizo ac�z�oi oo c�oNm� w�w�°zYz-w cmiJ��>ill LLo�io�J �a¢c rcm`-'�O� vsi o .is. azF- ��� aJ �r - wQ 0rmc7-i'mn _ J� oiloo�4M Y 8! m�'�z¢a �I owzQ o�rwmaa ~� oo�ozz . 0 0000 �wo~��IM 5>0 °w 30 - 3a ¢ mN� - � W�oLLo moo¢ Goo; -QLLzc�o m _o ma_v,w1 1 to o� mrmrr �mw�>`J'oo S o sww _so�A M i m s!WW o'r'-Soar m a m m mm a mmrcmmsomw3d ' m z_n m ISHI wcoiic°i r mmo-,�n_rc 1101i _.2020' mo � of I m¢ 0 o - oa m� ozI'T �w o o a �� ¢ co¢ mzw waY aFw i=a as mz �� aowao Nz wrc - t w - a �o mo . oi - o 'o� Aao - - o w ° LL m o 0 o�w aom zo ao LLo �� 3 xa oz 5o w o yg a o z oo w o oo� Wo i ° z o 3 rJz m �z m w mzz N aN w o op °a R i co oZ °Z. ° 0cwmi oa -aa z�o mz r woa -z �1 z�a zwrcr'oo Q>w o ao A m < N - a" om wcm°mwi 000mma°owhou��i-opnro°m 5Qm So a ° Y0 muox ski I Fm3 ga o o 12 w-w > jSo w_ = w o o z o0 z o P wozow- ox�ww,z w x aF m o ilk z1oof F a a 70 a .mgw o ?� - a ,2 ao w= mm �� Qo o a2m�oN �a�O m� aim 3'm oLL >m o a m o o w LL °d" Woa LLw 00 0 o KI 1 a � w��m Q ? Q11 z m m owmoA a a m tazo _J o 10 - a za x pall _ v LLo ATAT. NO 3 ozv owLL � o _- z mo�7o� Y— dj� oz ' WHO vyi XMIG oa wh, o ?A-iw - �a��rw o��omm 0T Qj ° w - o KlF gy% 10 Nzw m�-=aox o to m 1. 3imm y o$ 16 mWW zyI�Foo of "woo'Nit w gi _m<1 F o�i ��z a �aoi r�vo? mm Um jE z mf°o moo0oom 00 �_ o m'oomw w r aLL Jm so MY m-mm aoo A ioa yo p06TOO z - �yjo TO � - z o=rmm a Woo _ -Fa ow�rc° WF aoo 'o� zw oo _ Na- i m m� i�i°orc Q 8 z - - -zo�w �� n-o z� A. to 00 -�wo. IS Oaz a LL o iM9 °�z� ro WE; WE 102 Qo110 rci moo yo `-' its K a<o��, io 0 0 3m UZI , ¢w ¢wm oa o o�rcx �'�oVag o�oz3z1m �o -F� oa o� _� ya Mfg - - -ao r zmm 65±-I m oo�z to zo7U mO M. azWomwown za - �17; ° _ sit rM p- m- �g -a m'z - w3�A Quid o= - is, 5T_ z oYPT��w� pwpmfoz o�pivot oowa�w �c f3s ow rm w of .II1 pa ��nw o3 �LL�°° Ali SIMON--, wzSam�uvrvnal=Tevaa�rwufoiiue/ry aurzrvo asoctvi wessZ rzoz�c/c m "q sae aasi zcvassecse sagrn�as 6uuaaw6u3 �o ;uaw;�odaQ 3:0, e xa mars wdea nv.:aznis m,d: W o s' z�y33ti!q a —LX1—HDsnd oz�3s s3,adusosEs SVX31 5310N lb'a3N3�J P 3dld(INV X09 d"ns ISVDKId(13SOd021d - IlSIMD sn fy0O {o Aim 3e� m S1NAHAA08d I:)IlnWC]AH W31SAS NORM11A m c w3wwrnd 1Ntlld 1NA"IVAH1 N31tlM SNAAAiS'N'O lSINHJ Sf1dNOJ JO AID 0 z�ow a o a o o�°gmo2 oocw��xrc - w aoQ `" o YO GOOO Gz Qo O O?O w cxi a a O Q O daaxxx xmmmmm m mmm mmmmmmm ���������������»» 3 000 o�wac 3 33 daaxxxxxmmmmm m mmm mmmmmm �����m�m��m��m�»>33 33 0 Z zo Q m o _ o= uJ ° o� " Jz z=xo w x a m om�wW z> .z Fz oao� �wwNz�=rr>>�zo�ow000z� `�'z wow " >o m m,.. Q --aoQi �o of ��� r� wn LLLLLLLLLLLLLL LLLL LLLLoo 000 - --z 000 000 ���� ��`ooz°z000'000'oaa aaada LLw rca � LLLL wLLu.u.LL LL�����c���i�x xx xx__�wwww���=�=���zzzz0000000aw aaxxx t lw i o W.o w z o w< < w ma z�Q �ucxiz oo zoo mwoo lw oowoV oz �o o�,� ww?poo ion 0000 - ��� - mrco�z " _ xgo ¢aaaRaRa im mmmmm mm°°000°°°°°°°°°oo -0000 wwwwwwwwwwww www,� O B m 9 2 ¢aa¢aaaR am mmmmm m..0000............. 0000wwwwww.Q.Qww wwww u) w , 2 z U Z F o p U' wIZw Z u) _j o o Z a d < S CD Q U m ¢O Z w w wow z QZU om Fay �g0� m �r N m - �J o 000F w goo z mt�w w w m a1z az_ a >Rw» _ as _= M -w N � o Wt >�zorcwz i_ ww Ws o�o-mcv°op°aocaiaN W N a J°o°g= w °LLwwzU zo J w r U o rcaQp w W w c"iww 'W"w� m3a�=F oo�w- °mz�oo m 3 -N w oaz _ m w Wuxi - - m _ ago '~'rxx zwU= �owtrcm �� �N o m�maa waJ w� wFV� zaw¢Fa� x� w>> Q�� moo� Noo r t e, m 1 N w W. x w ��zo°oa°�ovF,F3 z o vxi° w w=- mazzww w w w w W rc �mjo_za owxwm w m F�� o - -xmm- �w�x�2N o wzzw�Fw awtu o° o� 6�"�� aQNwJ¢w� c�m5w�oo0 �Q z�ooaaj� oo aW� ��i rcwoQo ��m z2L ip v' owoEo �wx oow i �mai �'o o �3�uwrr{m �aa a. m�Wo -omo �O -'� aoosN� zoa N- owowor- - m 0 0p rc LLmr 7 _ mm = ai oa- r m m - _ a.¢w 3Qo zo wx O...... i¢ �.o ���ioo Wo`-'W"wa NG �v',v�i �rr rs�N 000 0�wo�c�i2>> a-caMwa___x _ _ _=> >>>°_x z mw x z? o w�a-Oz¢n ��ao m d MHz€dw mx w mo 1oow' m_ o�\#��\/\�, 00 :.: z=z :� sR2 ywe»m,wms a»� m� w es 7Ao G 20 . : , �]WW�d : I At \\ \ / \ \ ~ `a@m gam 2AID > ; < / } _ \ � e , \ . .1 7-- . = f 9»2y2«s«3 f - - ` �� ` ` _ y \ j , \ / } \ - F aws3io NIAan \ § � Lu \ \\�\�\ \, §: EI _ \\ / / ew.w a a. saavuoS 5uuaoui5ua jo auauwuedap 1. „* �>a�.��u�a��sndb� oz=�3,ddssos�s SVX_31 SNO VIAI3 J83V ONV SIOSNAS`SON3J3l v z • o `(= " LS/NHO Sndbo.9 _Jo AI/O OHAH Lf °' ✓'W = = S1N3W3AONd WI onnVKAH W 31SAS NOUVailIJ m o Tg�•' � .:',�"'9s -d3wwrnd �^ 1NVld 1N3W1V3Nl UII V/V1SN3/1315'N'0 h IlSI21HJ Sf1dOJ�O AlIJ N01177oS30 M MM "N01m321 NIL1111111 A93111 31V0 ON NOISI�321 9o9[VJ orvN 93(i lzI_Md oo�3L ns'nviV_Z S )svnvS_VC HMA % -o o -N - aQ N MUM U _ - _hn WHOM! aoV io?o oF�_po _S.awm�o� za-woz3o _0 w3 101 11 long Z HOUR pro -�So _ _ - �zoow arc - - H - - J - u� = oz o��vx. z aVo �000z - _ Q o - ��co�¢m -o- o rxc�ozw~ oowv:x� HaT - - WURL - -bx w o�z - _ ���`� - s189~_ RI=how �"¢--�N a_aIowl _ - _� - _ Qzar -_ _aNw-__ z�a _ -- ��� iQmo _ - = xoorcooi- - wo xraxzw_�rc�H11 - ¢�oaon zgQ.x aor LL.z - oh wg w 7 U1 W H Q Qo 0 0 0 o a 1 1 � � > � T a3> - J o W - J _ _CD - ❑ W 7 - 0o.�3s a= Ed ____ ������� ���r��«<EE zzzzzzz o0000o aaaanna rcttrcrcrc¢¢ viNovi vi vi'n vi vi vi rrr� HIM rrzr Fp¢ Q ____ .xxxxx� ___________ zzzzzzz Who as 01 rc�� K mm AM rrrr .OF »»> »> >dIH lilt Al m _ C w Wyy rc - j4 - Uo YEN - gs Z wson�z __ - �: MUI V;>_�� - pE E wa .s - New o4oa'Q 's W _ __ sI ooHIM F�za- °_ - djlwlw C CCCYi H ¢`d __ o�i3 w�"�qp pjox a a aaaaaaa Wind hIA 11 "huoo 1 0 on0 ox 3wwwww LLLL LLLL .. rcLL 1- = x s"ailuaS Buuaau/8u34o;uawpedap All ...... ssosfs SVX31 S3lna3HOS r,o 00 AVl1S/NHO Snd&oo -jo (1/i OHAH.='° �� _= S1N3w3noadwl JnnVaaAH MiSAS N0liVUllj g Yd` ` t �7YVV VI lU 1NVld1N3W1tl3Ni8]iVMSN3A31S N'O M o I1SIlJH3 sndUOJ JO AlIJ - N0ILADS30 A3 31VO ON NOISM32 NOI1dlUDS30 AS 31tl0 31tl0 ON NOISIiA3i 909G'3 ON Ng1Vtl1-EN IA-3d31 ESb IbLZ)'3NOHd 90I3Ln6'.�eN�ara Senva S9o�i M>I 0 X O 3 _ _ — > > o o < Jo _o s�� z zo >>>> a d aim TW ¢a z z z IL = _ - - - - F U �Oz ocl a� a Kx w arc �`�°xm N h a ox <I i w oo O ass z o �z K > °J rczX ooy�� ~ oar U` 4m p 3 �=m a ��_-met Q -- I. o0[�ZZ. -��111 co Z Z �moww oa m �mm w z J Q Q ��z wLLu o �3io w aa�a X a io�a¢¢�4 Ko - �' momma�rc W _ ____ U Z _ w'o'o ow>'o 6 LL ¢w __ aOo��oo a s a o_9 6z. - ra0�aa�r tt� Oom J mod m���F ? o hems y¢ ❑ 7 ❑ W w w w U z Z o ❑W = w z z z Q o OU a U - co x x x O Y 4 ~o p "' - - Q zOiz rc� ru�iKx ? J Q W rw _ _ W _ �LL� Jwo zw — N LU Z. LU Q mo o�>s !n N�a d z zt o0a W _ _ _ Oyu y ¢ OHO _t= Nittmp > _ _ o �`��[z9 ❑ �¢ ,o X a Z G_ory _ . ��Q� QwFz¢ _ wmw o No_ — zo O Z. — — — m� oo O oo so'4m 2s cF� H a a�_zz_<zz s 3a�a Z_t�F zozmV�i 00 LL a Vo>¢ aNaNaN >If �pw0 wg 0 _ �� r 2KJ�J F �tttt _ vai - - vaiF�t pFpxpx ao� 2n. ~ V l==Zw o tJ�O¢ m Wmo>a Q 3wozw�3m�o3¢ 2o �wiaa y� o¢yam w�t �ooQ o 0 o m�mm�Jr�- rct ax_° att� oomW ww__�mm �oop3 c9� om_ z4pz i�i��=-�Fu a x x 3p �J w w w w o�oa Q�Fo a �o -mmwz zz a- Nm a aoo a �3>aa�a gF ���- oo _QOQoo o whoa° �LLzm7¢�'� D���a �es�xi�u�HH�s�ad��ia??..... 11S/NHS SVX31 rsoatlueS 5uuaau/8u3/o;uawpedap 00 SOIW3HOS 10a1N00 ll Snd&oo -jo .(1/0 OVAH �- S1N3w3noadwl JnnVaaAH w1SAS NOUVU11HV " 7U - z v 1NVld1N3W1V3N1N31VMSN3A31S N'O M o I1SIIJH3 sndUOD JO AlIJ — NOILA0S30 A3 31VO ON NOISM32 NOI1dIiUS0 AS 31V0 31tl0 ON NOISIiA3i 1-111H 11Hamo3nss 909L'e ON N—i-EN IA-3— esro(r�zl arvoua ���3Ln6'.�eNwara Senva S9o�i aHMM 3G_ Q (LLI rc-w WLU Jao a U) _ - �� a O 1E - _ - - d w J W (il (=I 4f wo HM. LU LU 'n. " - -- - - o _ LU ¢ - a3O _J O O It, a \�� LLI z - a _ q arc Qua ? �o LL Q 4 wh,rc - W a ro uSO Saw 3LL 3°. ..rc ar .sw �w = u�o u �y o (�I , soatlueS 5uul9,qui5ug z m+_e Iqi�ge 00 !«V J s Aa= -jo J OVAH |/\ , , co \ \ } ! M""f -ld °\ / / , � § i { amp/am,ot/ ^ ^ m> :\ \} \\ � ( � , \\\\ \ � Lu \( \ \\ \ \ ° 9 ! : _ 2 / § ° \ r LLJ \\j ( : ( \ ` HE j\� \} � S = /f4 \! pE � °: g / � : u ) � ° \ 2 )( \ - Q \ § ; { `� .i a § }! 3 r / /: ) 3 §( i : ) }} � \ }( g ` co 71;}; / § < \] y\\} §l e w i�\ $ / \ � zfif ` \ \ § j ^` : ! }\ : \ } -D LU R : \ /[ \ \j < ])( \ /$ \ „ L . \ ( \ F t \ k« u , \ > » /) ::: }} ul _: saoilueS BuuaauOu3/o;uawpedap 00 SbX31 II slivi3a w «. s x saH s3do a 3ss3;ddssosfs 11S/NHS Snd&oo -jo 1(1/i OVAH rn 'AI S1N3W3AOUd WI:mnVVIAH MiSAS N0liVUllj 00 �3,Y���� 1N'dld1N3W1tl3Ni8]iVMSN3A31S N'O m o I1SIlJH3 sndUOJ JO AlIJ — NOILA0S30 A3 31VO ON NOIS321 N011dIU053O AS 3T 3T ON NOISIA3i Ndsin3e ovnH am o3nss 90-3 ON N—i-EN IA-3— esro(r:zl arvoud ��:3Lf16'.�eN�ara Senva S9o�i M>I x U - o - = W — , J Z --------------- LLJ s Q - _ a 7 x 00 W a a Z w z w LU W Z J Z O w LU z3 Oco J W W Q � O�J z ZLU 2 Z — z LU K s =mV oar �LLw psi �LL°�o saurlaas Buuaau/8u34o;uawpedap 0 p All ......d ssosfs SVX31 IIVb3A0 NVId 6'ONl]TnVJ Hlllld r`o 11S/NHO Snd&oo -jo (1/o OVAH NO _= S1N3w3noadwl JnnMIAH MiSAS NouVU11H � g Yd` ` t �7YVV VI lU 1NVld1N]HiV]8i8]iVMSN]AUS N'O M o I1SINH3 sndUOD J0 AlIJ - NOLADS30 A3 31VO ON NOISM321 N011dIa0530 AS 31tl0 31tl0 ON NOISIiA3a Ndsin3a Duna am o3nss sOse'e ON N—i-EN IA-3— esro(r�zl arvoua ���3Ln6'.�eN�nara Senva S9o�i HIMM 9 ------------------------------------------- —---—��\ I I I I I 1 NI C? I F- LU LU w LU J J w � � cr I I 0 I I a I 1 LL I` /) --------------------------------------- -------- �m i z- r 1 LU I I w I J J I I a I I � I w I F M ' I C I I F ' I Lu Lu 1 w - 1 LU LU or I I 1 � I 1 I I 1 s I I 4 ————————————————————————————————————————————————————— 9 No 65 4w go 74 Z K � drc ry mra soatlueS Buuaau/8u34o;uawpedap •All 3��3;dd��sosfs sex31 V V3?]V NVId 6'ON Aa]TnVJ H3AJ ° . OVAH rn N$ snd&oo �o ,csio NO N3w3noad _= S1wl JnnMIAH w31SAS NOI1VU1IJ o g Yd` ` U7Y MYVI lU 1NVld1N3W1V3ala31VMSN3A31S N'O o USI21H3 sndUOD J0 A11J - N011d1a0530 A3 31VO ON NOISM32 N011dIa0530 7717 3 31tl0 ON NOISIA3i udcn3a oanx am o3nss 31V0 -. 900e'3 ON N—i-EN IA-3— esro(r�zl arvoua ���3Ln6'.�en Tara Senva S9o�i HMM -o) - Z m= wa= � w � JI m �dx aaxa U 1 i dz .J 1 e) ° _) 1 IT - - - � 1m 1 a=) 1 I � � 1 � --—----- --- ---- ------ u � i } I = 4 wqz 1 a a � zws o 1 Q UUUU00G0 00IDuU cJ U 0 Q w 1 Q - Q w oLL o _ �p Ali w- Cal M of LLJ Oz o� o rc o?- op =3h 1 1 I R. pis I p� 4i So - maw Q ;3o I o arc ry rt rc nw r _ rcu w y 8 -� i , ms �zm+_e «V J egA- mSrONA§Td m : qw E / ! =_ ,� ea= s Aa= � J %m , _mazm_ aw \} ( \ �ww�,eam�� , amp/am,ot/ ^ , ^ H MM �/ \,\ : ) ¥ » \\ \\ 71 �l I \— ° | , | ` � � . | : . | | | | | » _ | . .. . . £ � . | . - <- :) \. j } | : _ $) «J! 4 } 2 z / -:- | | \ ) \ | ! E)G(a G(DG a\� � �— | - | _ � -- - - — - | \ \} ) — §! � � J s"ailuaS Buuaau/8u34o;uawpedap �hazz...... ,-s SVX31 I NOUCIS 6'ON l a3llVJ b3111� 00 � v ll f 11S/NH0 Snd&oo 30 (1/o OVAH �- S1N3w3noadwl JnnVaa AH MiSAS N011VUlIJ113" 7U - z 1NVld1N3W1V3N1N31VMSN]AUS N'O o I1SIlJH3 sndUOD J0 AlIJ - N011dR10530 A3 31VO ON NOISM32 N011dIi10530 77 31V0 ON NOISIi\3i 909G'3 ON Ng1Vtl1-EN IA-3d31 ESb IbLZ)'3NOHd 90I3Ln6'.�eN�ara Senva S9o�i Q QQo aHIMM QQ wl 61 I �I� of ~I°' Jln - -�I I a 0 wZ Alw s V) . o y LU w I I J J I I I I I I II I of zH 0-1 Fw OM Ua U III w � ss 00 J w a J (,7 a QQ WI I 6 e — _ U 0 a u . z L w 1V► .s.0 J I 2 J Q (J i _ I I I 1 saavu,9S Buuaoui5ua jo auaujpedap sons SVX31 II NOLOK 6'ON A J37VE)b31ll3 11S/NH,? S17db0.9 do A110 OVAH = �r Lf ° ✓' = = S1N3W3noad Wl 011nVd(]AH W3ISAS NOUVUl IJ t o Tg�•' � .:',�"'9s 113WWf17d �^ 1NVld1N3 W1V3Nlkl31V/Vl SN1A]IS'N'O h USIUHD sndHOJ JO AID N011AOSK AS 31V0 ONNOISIA32 NOILAOSK AS 31V0 31V0 ON NOISI�321 9o9[VJ orvN 93(ilz)I3NOHd bSZSL stlX31'9tnitla ool3Lns'nviv�rava sbitva sssol n Hi; �w J� h �b Ico Ol I 3a_ I I I , I I oo' I I I I I = I j 0 j I j u l ql s I I I I I I I I I I I N INN I I w I I 1 Q I �w � 4 I I I I I 1 mo I I I wN to o LU 1,3 J I =_ I saurnaaS Buuaau/8u34o;uawpedap 00 9 x lua= ads ll9a??......d�,-s SVX31 III NOU31S 6'ON AaJTIVJ H3AJ 0 o � 11S/6/HO Snd&oo -jo (1/o OVAH - z S1_= N3W3noad Wl Jnn w3 VaaAH 1SAS N011VUlIJ ?i3WWfYld 1NVld 1N3 W1tl3N1 i131tlM SN3A315'N'O �o I1SINH3 sndUOD J0 AlIJ - N011dR10530 A3 31VO ON NOISM32 N011dIi10530 7 7 31tl0 ON NOISIiA3i 909[I 3 ON Ng1Vtl1-EN IA-3d31 ESb IbLZ)'3NOHd 90I3Ln6'.�eN�ara Senva S9o�i FI� JI^ of N o� "o 5 of a ,o en o a I I I p wT2v: w N N s O o z O w w I I I J J i o olo Rio PAP I- �w Q o U o w a OI.I o Om Om VI0 V so V LLJ lw -_/7 `W _ Ln OZ Z h Z w LU LU w w w J J dl J Q Q Q z� uVt m o tls Z.o L.I i. saurn.raS Buuaau/8u34o;uawpedap 0 p A ......d ssosfs SVX31 3AI103dSd3d 6'0NAN31WE)a3AJ �l1S/NHO Snd&oo -jo (1/i OVAH L i ll°i ��g _ = s1N3w3noadwlznnvaanHw3lsnsN011valil3 Lo Yd` ` U7Y VV VI lU 1N'dld1N3w1tl3N1a31tlMSN3n31S N'O o I1SIIJH3 sndUOD JO AlIJ - N0ILADS30 A3 31VO ON NOISM32 N0ILADS30 AS 31tl0 31tl0 ON NOISIA3i Ss 909G'3 ON Ng1Vtl1-EN IA-3— ESbIbLZ)'3NOHd 90I3Ln6'.�eNHara Senva S9oHi HIMM al 0 0 0 O W 6 F- H V o w a o s w a o W V o >z 2 o � a O" z s w J J Q W H J LL saurnaaS Buuaau/8u34o;uawpedap ......d��sosfs SVX31 -nV2IIAO- NVId Z'ON l b3llVJ b3llld °r`° v 11S/6/HO Snd&oo 3o (1/o OVAH z �- _= S1N3w3noadwl JnnVaanH MiSAS NouVU11H (.0 g Yd` ` t �71Y VV VI lU 1NVld1N3W1tl3Ni8]iVMSN]AUS N'O o I1SIIJH3 sndUOJ JO AIIJ - NOILA0S30 A3 31VO ON NOISM32 N011ADSO AS 31tl0 31tl0 ON NOISIA3i 909G'3 ON Ng1Vtl1-EN IA-3d31 ESb IbLZ)'1111d 90I 3Ln6'.�eN�ara Shmva S9o�i —-—-—-—-—-—-—- HMM ' 7 -- 1 - I o I 1 - 1 I I 1 1 I I 1 1 I I N 1 1 o I o = 1 1 I I � 1 1 W I I W I I LLU .) U) 1 1 Q I I Q 1 1 "' I � I 1 i 1 aXt Q W QU i Q > I I �w J J I I 1 I N I I cc , , W I I 1 1 LL I I I I M I I I I 1 1 LU W 1 1 LU 1 1 w W 0 1 1 w I I I I I I o� Q H o4E ,a o Q - zIU I I soavuaS Buuaau/8u3 Jo;uawpedap 00 ad�ll9a??......d�,-s SVX31 HH321H Wd Z'0NAa3llHJb31lld 0o � 11S/6/HO Snd&oo -jo (1/o OVAH z S1N3w3noadwl JnnMIAH MiSAS NouVU11H r' ?i3WWfYld 1NVld1N]HiV3ala31VMSN]AUS N'O o US121H3 sndUOD JO AlIJ - N0ILADS30 A3 31VO ON NOISM32 N0ILADSO AS 31VO 31tl0 ON NOISIlA3a Ss 909[l 3 ON Ng1Vtl1-EN IA-3— BbESESb31'Stllltl0 9O13Ln6'-�en/wara Shmva 55901 HMM 0 I� Qow�= rr o a _ - o QLu 0 9 °3rrc�o /o Lu 4 t - �O rc �9o°wZ o f _ q U 0 N va, °�'�w o U U U D U U U 0 0 U w a U W O J LL _ LL3x HO 11 f r-----i--------- .11-,el I 00 -L41 I I d sw n Eli, .xz.- x, moj I Z z3J 00000 -mho �� IJ II au z o� y yam w r o CDoX L J I 3NIl HOlb'W , saoilueSeOugzm+_e «�J g3A- Ned EA ATPVO@glJ 0 ! it all =: = �ea= sAa= � �J mU\ \) ( / ® qms mao m` - \ C HMS --------- ----- ------�N yH�1/w . a a o.. K / � e , , , e o � � [ \ el «. I ® o I � e { \ t ` 5 : S \\ cr LU � e � } e A \ 3 ( saurnaaS Buuaau/8u34o;uawpedap 00 19a??......d sosfs SVX31 I N01103S Z'ON l a3llt/J 213111� 11S/NHo Snd&oo -jo .(1/o OHAH — z ° _= S1N3W3noad Wl JnnVaaAH w31SAS N011VUlIJ � -d3"tNf-l-7 J U�7Y VV VI�lU 1NVld 1N3 W1tl3N1 i131tlM 5N3A315'N'O � o I1S121H3 sndUOD J0 AllD - N01I AB 7 0 ON N0177 N011d1i10530 A931V0 31tl0 ON NOISIiA3il 999G'3 ON Ng1Vtl151 EN IAtl13 3— O� BbESESb(b31'Stllltl° 01. 99�3Ln6'.9eN�ara Shmva 5590� o�aHMA =�lo wo 1 Flo ozo 0 1 I I U a J 0 � H w " I w a V) N 0 V I LLJ C J J j Q „o n I Qo o m o" g> o H to LU o U ¢J N O � Z I I J J m o LLJ Ln I I N e O wi w J rc J Q 1 ry ozz3�s�3,dV sons gaol/as 5uu SVX31jo auawuedao II N01103S CON),2131]VE)2131ll� o z ^ ;F 11S/NH,? S17db0.9 d0 A110 OVAH o - Lf ° ✓' ~o�o� = = S1N3W3noad Wl 011nVd(]AH W3ISAS NOUVUl lj oN o = Z13WWf17d 1NVld1N3W1VIHIHIIVIV�SN3/s31S'N'O n.m o - IlSI21HJ Sf1dNOJ JO AlIJ N011AOSK A9 31V0 ONNOISIA32 NOILAOSK A931V0 31V0 ON NOIS17 9o9[VJ orvN 93(i lz)I3NOHd oo�3L ns'nviv�rava svnvasssro�i HMA �Im o wlry �z wlo I WI e m I I I L I I I NLl l l � LU I I V I I t LL o' oWo 0 Fm N�o I W I I I I I I Q o I I Om H a rr I V � w tN N Z � I } w J I Q I I I I I I soatluaS 5uuaau/8u34o;uawpedap p .• € SVX31 3AU33dSbAd Z'ON A213l]VE)d31lIJ � v 1, 11S/NHO Snd&oo 30 (1/o OdAH z ° :� �-g _= S1N3W3noad Wl JnnVaaAH w31SAS NouVU11H U�7YVV VI�lU 1NVld 1N3 W1tl3iI1 N31tlM 5N3A315'N'O �o I1SIlJH3 sndUOJ JO AlIJ - N0ILADS30 A3 31VO ON NOISM32 N011ADSO AS 31V0 31tl0 ON NOISIA3i Ss 90911 3 ON Nq 1Vtl1AIEN IA-3— ESbIbLZ)'3NOHd 99I3Ln6'.�enn�ara Shmva 559oNi M> LU u U LU N K a w cV o OLU r� LU _ J _ J LU W H J w saainaag 6uua2ur6u3 �o }uaw�odaO � bdi l o 1e-1311d11os11 SVX31 I GN3931 o � I1SI�JH�) Snadjno 10 Air) 117,AI,A7�Y7d S1NAiAA08d Wl OIln VHOAH"AISAS NOIIVUII] o H- �+ dg �r fn ��� 1NVld 1NA"IVAH1 HAIVM SNAAAiS'N'O rc �FrT'.r�l ISWHJ sn&IOD JO uIJ rt _ 3 0 o a 5 uo�ieu,oinyiv s`N�s 09� aat7v �3� _ >�WIIHM- a� - - - oz U _ a'w 10 m 1 z �N oz I 0 w - - o aW - - o\oza - �a s� -- - gp - a° 01 m dil p E O _ a = N - Np Np p N= =No a � o o - OD Mn ❑oo o r) o s w m w N six = - z�s , " 1 1 TI N 66 2 8 e saoa/Oa/e� aaivodn saainaag 6uua2 ur6 u3 �o }ua w�odaO la ViE— .U-HDI-- FITS S- SOSS SVX31 II QN3931 o � 11SI�JH�) Slldbno 10 Air) sJI _ v 117,AI,A7�Y7d S1NAViAA08d Wl 011n M21IAH W31SAS NOI1VU11j '� o H- �+ u.7r�r r1,. 1NVld 1NA"IVAH1 HAIVM SN3A31S'N'O rc FrT'r�l 1SWHD sn&1OD Jo uiD rt _ ZT uol� �d eN s w 3 3 -w 10 10 3 I I I I I I =a� �zJ o .. 3 - _ IT LL ��zo�WONw�� w�� 5oy' 'gap 's Fay=p�ppK - a °ad a� ozsp�a 'v ooayaoae.1a - g 0 o= T 0 Ci _ o _ - z 0 -- o115 o 0 a � oEl z< F. K �F saoa/Oa/e� a3ivadn saainaag 6uua2 ur6 u3 �o }ua w�odaQ � a� m�3us3,adusos�s SVX31 IIIQN3931 g I1SI�JH�) Snadjno �o Air) m�a dgwwmd SlN3W3A08d Wl 71lf1tlH0AH W31SAS NOIlVUllj 1NVld 1N3W1tl3F11 FI31tlM SN3A315'N'O rc ISWHD sn&JOD JO UD rt _ uol� �"I s aa�n�� 4 o - o o - a Kl o o Vo d a u a n d u U¢tt U rc rc rc¢ rc K �n w y m h w x ti yr u�x ti n0 rri n h ti y y y r r r r r r r Ti 'o - 0 k wol w p o l 4 _- rc f Is 2 F O F —_ — mz rc w _ —— q w F _ s - - 0 - � saoa/ea/e� ajivadn saainaag 6uua2 ur6 u3 �o }ua w�odaQ �� 1x.i HD sndem IEF ITS SlIdViss os&s 'j VX31 531(DN 1Vb3 N39 s x IlSI�IH�) Sndbno 10 Air)AML ma 3 oo HS1NAViAA08dWl OMIMAH Wj1SAS NOI1VU11jv7AArYd v 1NVld 1N3111VAH1 HAIVM SNAA31S'N'O rc �1SWHJ sn&1OD JO Ai1D rt _ wza pia o =03 - P, P. N==p Nos Q=N ¢op o � g as LL= TH. xN. xp a ozw 'rc s� �Uo -- 3u - -- oho oom3Qw w =zo wwJ _� w� rc2Nif z LLw°wa°d�,s wa°a<A r ., a d�_��oSop<sa�°opa 00 - &� � _ - - o - - _ - .o - - _ - gF - W�� ms It = _ - - oa« o - w a wa <xpk � P,y LL _ we _oso ohs 3� wm�o _ aTy - r5 o ° ��$w .�aa �sa ao _o :,I., °g' rcap8grIT o_ spo �pa ?'o wo83��0° °0000h�o - n'V-- _ Q°3a - _ 6 °- p-- Sop ys iN� 3o�3pf0o _- alp= ~_ o Hwu-T z � oaF¢g�wz. 62, -- aoy �o_ar,LL xs3°3wa_pOas��?°9°a_°rcpa°sos°pho3°pp°rcw°3°�.�'3�hp� Z-z4p p _ - - -_ - - m - zp. zgp om aO _ =�WWrW 2 6- rc2o - - QV a6rc rcp°NipWo _ _ ¢p.p s ap z2�poo o ° rg0 ou� M - - 6 K prcx c�$ - 'o ° LL a rcpi �a� wo Fqp az'o rwgw _ z o 1.w=,�° aaowowm 7HT - w ° Q�y o o °s - boa Z. = - _- Q3 €° - PV 1 oo°Gww popxo °JJ°��ro_ �rco�r���ooaQa°' °oiuhu�iAryt�uw� uuuoampo5aai� ou��zoigaSaziO�iria3�r0=aaou rd3 -W" saoa/ea/e� ajivadn -1 Ili�li■i;�ll. lii ii lii iii A I li ` mil IlII ill Illi l�l I!!� If Sim imiltil .III- -II - - ; - 11 IIILr 1I IIIIL111111111�11llllllr°II _ " -. -.-- .--.-: _ .............. _. -- I�I__ Huai; ;�Hmiu —ii l Mm-!I�i Jml lilll - I I�iiiiil' III�I I�II III,©� I_III III I�1111 II�IN■�■���■�NM1111�■■I III�� I_II II �• I I_III II©� I�tlllll - I!! I IlII iil IlIII iil I�l�ii'ill I� Iiii N II - Ili IIII IIIIII I —'.I� -- -uc Ill .� ... 1-w r__i■;:== _.. Iji�'lill _ IIIioI�_iii'll� ILII; II II Ilr III i Il�u�" IIIIII IIIIII I I I� :I�III � I III IIII lili I�1= IM I �I I Im I M I= I im liil I_iii l I�III l_ lili'i IIII ,J III®� IIIIII®� IIIIII®� I-IIII ii ICI a ii ICI iii ii Ili iii I..`�u■u�I„fin■u�-Lin■u�L li I I II saainaag 6uua2ur6u3 �o }uaw�odaQ cvecxi is au�sndam oa�3is s3iavLssosss AN31ltl9 H1nOSONtl HNNONOS-S SdX31 Si13111j MOM M3N(INtl NOIlIlOW30 iisi�iHn snd�jno 10 Air) �all3,3 117,AI,A7�Y7d S1N3W3A08d W1711IMIAH W31SAS NO11VU11j no H u.7r�r r1,. 1NVld 1N3 W1tl3FI1 F131tlM 5N3A315'N'O rc 1SWHJ sn&JOJ JO UD rt _ Ill N-1— uol� �d eN s �3 zGa o � f kj?3 3Fa ` J ogGo 0 - _ x3¢so3o3a r� Q Lu w S ay w w jolt r 1ay7: e .. / ^ E) �) e) •J • J : v O LU Lu w� Lo LU w � 1, ,r a LL � � % LL 30 .. ow \ z 0 Et \ w U 0 LLj cc �\ - w z z Lu a szoa/ez/eL ajivodn saainaag 6uua2ur6u3 �o }uaw�odaQ c am l m�ais ea�ayssosss SVX31 S31V933Inl5 ZL-L Si131l1d HOM NUN ONV NO 11lOW30 _ s ='� IlSI�JH_? Sndbno 10 Air) v^�,Ar,A7m� - - S1NA43A08dM 7llnVHOAH W31SAS N011VU11] o H- �+ dg �r rn ��� 1NVld 1N3NIVIH1 H3IVM SNAA3iS N'O rc FrT'r�l ISWHD sn&IOD JO uiD rt _ .1i-.il —N- _ o . 3 0 G 3 1 ;Ari ` c = o§ m „ ao�mu Lu o¢F3a = w p u J Ww Q a ariJjF - d u x xoaao • w w N 0 o Z o Lu Dam �o 1 = , Lu r I o a W o r z W o L LL W o IIIW�II Ya�,Vii" i1 a a � w .1i\ w _`.. n►� Lu W szDVDz/eL aaivodn szoUezi� // sa m-S j0 3ua 4—daQ 5N. ijs;�✓�WJ ie 1-sc xi U53 sndAOD l9 ozz—'-d—s osEs SVX31 I SlIVi34 N3MOd�tlAH 9Z*9L _ I1S/dHo Sndaoi jo Ailo `tl,90Ntll'3..53Wtl` �..... �f1�7� $1NINVId NAVYIVf1Va4AHW 315ASNOIltl0 o H f'•' 1Ntlld 1N3 W1tl3N1 N31tlM SN3A315'N'O kiteo3�� LLSIHHD SndHOD 30 AID 77,77 AB 31Yd ON Noi l— Nolldla— A8 3- ON NDISIA3d mzioz2� =3 o V o 0 o311 Noi-oin im io Gpw�o � uoliewoiny eN O F O Sz ti�a 1 •O tl ® 0 U LU o Z o d 8 O F _I J O z0 5 IF a a v -_=== 1 J O oox o op o w o w ® LL "77, J u xl Z J• { Q U - 9 > - - 1, z g N-Z --------------------- � - z a oQo� � aL a t» I o f az ��� x a wow 0 of ,z -o 1 3 i �lr� 4aliii �1 . . - - - w o 4-7 1 LU J J ^ W a 1 1J z 1 _= I ID53, m 1 a I � LOlu i .3a — 1 I Ip''�� 6 1 ill �I Ii �1 lCi llli I'i 1 � ilI i az '.I a w 1 a L 1 1 1 az _ a I _ z._ w _IL Ll z 11 czoz/9z/oL -a3ivadn zcbssse tse saainaag 6uua2ur6u3 �o }uaw�odaQ m I as F3is S-Viss asss r cvecxi is au�maa SdX31 SlIV134213lV�Od N3ZAltlNtl s iisi�Hn snd�nn 10 Air) �all3,3 = S1NAViAA08d W1711IMIAH W31SAS NOI1VU11j of H dgwwrnd 1NVld 1N3W1V3N1 N31VM SN3A31S'N'O rc �1SWHJ sndaOD JO Ai1D rt _ Y0�3eY103YyivNa sS[ arn�n�� v 6Lu - z Q �o ylyt, Lu GV cr Lu cd m O y Lu w Z cr �y Q N z_t.. � o W N ? J u Q � z Q * I oa z 000 "Lu cn LZ 000 < z o d L w — 0- Q —'e k11 < _ i1i Q oo -iIf yUo- 1 3 — 3 — � lu "- 3n � I W 6Z'9l'£bZOZ/6l/L'03l101d saoa/ea/e� ajLvadn szoUezn -q��7 SOO!AJag buuaaui6u3 jo ;uowpDdao w ����o stl ��60" iroacxi usiaNnsnaaonsl ozz 3is ls�avissosFs SVX-31 31n(13HDS13NVd 83MOd �z � szasL d 113I8Ho SndNOo jo Am 3tlN90Ntll 3 53WVP Saw— cr Q -ldS1N3W3AONd VY I llnVtl OAH MiSAS NOI1VUll3 I o H �U 1NV1d 1NIVU 3ii d31VM SN3A31S'N'0 ay.........,,:tiS x3ido3�° v IlSR1HJ Sf1d2i0J JO),lIJ _ uopewo�n� tO 91tq�ll�� 0 — J W N a -1 m J N aZ aZ � aZ o _ _ 3 - _ Q �ZN/9Z/OL MiVOdn say,,— 6uua-5,j to ;uaw;aodaQ ZT-T Sa3111d w irsc xi isarosnaaoa 11,eis s3savis s oses SVY31 b jO T S31n(13HJS 31OVD'R iICINOJ o s I1SIaHo S(ldyoo jo ,llo v h�o SNAMAO l JnVHUAH 3SS NOI tllj UgW d �H:, IlSRHJ Sfd10D J0I11D w _ uo�yewofny�tlN91S aaunr�q� 3t�t 3t�t 3r 3C 3C 3C 3t 3C 3t 3C t 3t 3�3�3�3�2t 3r 3t;r 3r 3t w _a n n n 6_ _ _ _ _ _ - i 3i 3i 3i 3i 3z�i 3z� i 3i�i 3i 3i 3z F°�o Fao Fo Fo�o�o r=� a boa °�o F°a;_:o Fo F° a�o Fo Fo t v v g 0�0________ oo,�o_ ___ H$ w a a a a - - - - - - C 4 5f` 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 4 4 S S 01 01 S 4 4 4 4 4 S 4 a 4 ; { m { t ; { ; { e { 4 { w m t 4 i i m V V V V V V V V V V V V V 6tt rc a rc ffi V6 T, F, p 8 4 $ p ffi p V _ Vj E�OZ/9Z/Ol �031VOdf1 _ sdoi�a5 6u�see U,bu, {u auep�(Je(j c>ecxi iSau�snaam ozz3Lc S3idvis ]3 TS3TIV ss jtf}(3l bj0 Z531n43H75318VJ B11nON07 0AML � _ � a b�wwma SiN3MAOUH1 DnnV804H waiSnS NoIUV nil ��o „ - qp NvieiNawivaaiaaivmsNanaisNo g o lSR1H3 snd410:)JO Ally t LA r uo�3euro�7nM"��vN��s 'J,ln/ytxvt� 5 3 5 3 3 5 3 5 5 3 5 3 3 3 5 3 3 5 3 5 3 3 w N w ti x ti ti x w x N y u w w y x n N w ti x ? 2 2 2 . 2 . 2 2 3 3 2 3 ? ? ? 2 2 2 2 2 -ti ti ti ff i 3 i 3 i 3 i i 3 i 3 i - 3 3 3 3 3 3 tili n ti ff ti ti ti 2t 2t 2t 2t;t 2t;t 2t 2t 3t 2t 2t 2t 2t 2t 2t 2t 2t 2t 2t 2t w�aw w�ww uw w J uw w ww uw ww ww aw aw ww ww ww ww aw ww ww uw rcLL rc�uLL ttw rcLL rc�Kw w rcw 0i w2 aoS.a�.i a�.i a�.i a�i.a�.0,2,a�.i ao�x owrx a�.xr ao.xr a�o wo.xr owrx wo x wo2r ao wo wo2r wo2r 34 34 4 4 w54 4 44 4 4 4 4 3 34 44 3 4 w54 usssz szss�z szss ss�z ..... 0 ... 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 z 4 4 4 4 z 4 3 u u u aw aw u - aw wa 3 aw - u w w w w w w w w w w w w -_ s3 3 w w _ 3 o a2 2 o o - �4 _ _ o o M a M r ry v ry v ry v ry v ry v ry v r ry v ry v ry v ry v ry v ry v r ry v ry v ry v ry v ry v ry v r n v ry v ry v ry v ry v ry v S S 8 h a 8 3 -ass; -poi - a o spa as $ s t M r o 1 4 1 v, m m vs y 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 a 4 w 4 4 4 w 4 a 4 a 4 ^ 4 ^ 4 a 4 w 4 w 4 a 4 saoa/3z/o� aaivadn sao n,iaZ 5au.—b,3 jo Huai. -dad }y tvs�xi isaro soda�519 ott 3es s3�dv$ssoscs j 13H S31OV w dX31 bdOfS3lf103HJ53l9tlJ B11f10N0J n iisrdHj snddOJ JO AlrJ a ...... c - - - S1N 3w3nOadwl Jnnvaa w3isns No uvanid bgwwmd iNv�diN3wiv3aia3ivmsN3n31s�N�o lSWHJ sn&IOD JO Ally UOI�BWO3A�/1tlN91s w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m 20 2Q 20;w 20 2w 2b So 2b 2b�b f2w a�b f2w`Sb;w Zb 2b;w 20 2b 2w 2Q;w to-2w`Sb�b^Sw`Sb�a`Sw Za;w - 20 `1 ua ua�4�a n n 5 n n`un n n a�a�4�a ua a ua`u5 n n n n`un n nun n n �o�o�o` o Zo Zo�o Zo Zo Zo Za Zo Zo�a Zo�o Zo�o� o Zo�o Zo Zo 3o Zo Za�o�o �a . 000. �. . . .. .. . . o oZ o�o�02 oZ oZ oZ z3 oz oZ oZ o2 a2 z2 zw z2 z2 z�02 z�o�oZ oz oZ zZ o2 oZ z2 02 02 02 z2 z�z2 z2 r . V _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . u _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ r tl 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V V 4 V V V V V - - - - - - - - - - - s - - - - - y h y ry ry ry ry ry n v v v v v v n n n n .n n ry Z o ry Z R 4 Z o ry Z N ry Z ry ry z ry w v Z R v Z R v Z o v Z N v Z ry v Z ry w 4 a 4 0 4 0 4 � 4 � 4 V V V V V S3 t0 V V V V V d d d �F4i I, I, , z Li CZOZ/OZ/OL :031H0d1 saai�aag 6uuaaurE�3 Jo J—pcda0 zt z sa311I3 w w Q,� c>acu isero snaamsl ozz 39ils s3 avessos9s 'VX31 VJ0VS31n03H75318VJ 31In4N07 � o g og iist Ho snj&oD Jn ,uJo ZI9WWmd S1N3W3AOad WI JllntlaOAH W3ISAS N011tla1113 0 a 1Nb'1d 1N3Wltl3a1 a31tl/VISN3A315'N'O IISIHHD sndKD Jo AlDDII = w ON N01—N IIIq uogewo;ny1tlN915 arrr�vu5rg� 3s 3q H 34 H 34 34 H H H q o o - - - d w 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 V V V V V V CZOZ/9Z/m a31'C7d1 sa�inaa5 6uuaaulnu3 �o }uauavodaQ of Ii o cIu ���� 's3,adu IIII SpX31 ZZ-El Sd3llld NOI1VJOl l3NVd Jld ONV 13NVd J3MOd � � ������ l.SlJH? smjdjoo 10 �lll� va3N3� O1 _ v 219WWmd 6 SINMAAONd W1711CIVHGAH AAISAS N011VU113 `� H Rs 1NVld 1N3W1V3H1 HUM SNIA]iS N 0 a IISIUHD snd'dOD JO AM V�V uo�te�uoiny�dNa est Hill - ti3 Illh m LL- Mz m � M a a� al I_0� pro V U. �oF Nod - �h m� LL f� >oc CD LL - - �F o w 4ri i - Lill a i moo _ o -;Boa f 4 V �nl 0 r -- II szoa/ez/e� a3i�adn saainaag 6uua2ur6u3 �o }uaw�odaQ Ai13llV'J ZZ-£T Sil3lllj zcss'ssc tsc m I as F3is S-Viss OSss cvecxi is au�maa SdX31 AL10/J�!✓13N 4NV NOI11lOW30 s iisi�Hn snd�nn 10 Air) �all3,3 = y' S1N3W3A08d W1 DMIMIAH W31SAS NOI1VU11j of H bgwwma 1NVld 1NANIVAHI N31VM SNAAAiS'N'O rc �1SWHJ sn&1OD JO Ai1D rt _ p o LL 3- p Y013¢1u03nyiv �oG�LL 9.mlv�� om - QaGz °= zaoG G�rc�3 Lu 08� o3G\ �y8 Iml�l akaG o xsow 8 cG>p <G>=wGoo„_ G � � o LWL O a W Lu �1 ZE .; W i1 P �\ O o \ \ O W 0 Lu d Lu 2' WLu a a W �a LL m> > ` ^ O �� F° IIQQI I zx \ O 30 z a Lu 3� u w o - Lu s V Lu " LL W Lu Lu L.L � a szoa/ez/cL ajivodn saainaag 6uua2ur6u3 �o }uaw�odaQ —1 x.i-HDI -I IEF 3u S-Vil S oscs Sj/UGH/ lj N(I N8 ZZ-£TSVA30j w 'j¢�X31 AL10/V�M3N 4NV NOI11lOW30 0 � s iisi�Hn snd�nn 10 Air) �all3,3 bgwwma S1NAViAA08d W1 DMIM21IAH W31SAS NOI1VU11j H 1NVld 1NANIVAHI N31VM SNAAAiS'N'O rc 1SWHJ sn&JOJ JO UD rt _ uoliewo;n"�eN�s a,[n7nIgl� G°G �f 1f1� w 2 G p &ko oSaCw ,� o ; H OLu \ IQIQI Lu o Lu 4,Y c `� O LL CL Lu Lu LL - 1 _ w r. o i o w vo w cc Lu Lu o �� ®® w r — z rs� \ X w Olt Lu Fly ������� O LU \ \ o z ` Z w �v\A* O Lu LL = Z ¢' \ W szoa/ez/eL ajivodn szozrezr�o �j saawas 6uuaaui6u3 j0 3uaw3—daa �\���SV if✓o"CA si-i a3ewnN waif°3a3isil9o-ISSIeviSsoSs .Sb'X31 NIMO OI HSVM�DV930NV 3IIN ISDVAHn Z-ET SU31lId TTeec xi'isiaua snaam� o iv�iun3is �z V rn c esrsc a a z m I1SI21HS Snd210i dO 1115 .eva aNm•....s3rivr z 11'71AT1Al(1'7� — — S1N3W3AONd WI 71lnnOAH LNUSAS NOI1VHlll3 C o H �• ., .,,�� U�l�Y3Y Yl11U 1NVld 1N3W1V3N1 MAIMSN3A31S'N'O `` IISIUH:)SndaOD JO AID oi-ainvi 3ado° p _ xwa w / w a \m`a'm 4SOV 3e0V W axo�w � co 1 1 ~ I I •) I I 1 1 L - e I) I I 1 1 co Al Az H oho of ` w I g�w I a Lu D o LU £zoz/9z/Ol 'a31VOdf1 szozlezrlo ..� saoyvag bUuJ—U!bu�dO ;—)-dab —L xiusiaHO snd— OZZ assS-ViiSSOsss SVX31 NIMI 01 HSVMNOV830NV 3llN I'OVAHZZ-£TSU31llJ o o � �fo � szsc _ IIS/dHo Sndaoi do Ailo �tll190Ntl1 I.53%tl+ �..... i 11!71A11Alfl'7� — — S1N3 W3A021d W1711f1tl214AH W315A5 N011VH1113 D a H s•.. :r (l�l�Il!'Yl ll(l 1Ntlld 1N3W1tl3N1 N31tlM SN3A31S N'0 x31,o31'° I151l1HJ Sf1d210J d0 AlIJ uollnu 'vNms" r 1 D z - 1 SSS pJ w g w Wn - - Q z w w oLL��. ;I;lilili � LL 0 m o wLL� N O Z C7 Z_ J m — W W 1¢ I LJ—L O O Lu — zLU J _ Z w I Q J = J Q LD ' N x O Z Z m Lu J o Jw O Lu s z z " ; cD Lu coa � � J J 7 Q L z — LuQ O t J�2 O � s dtimco =p a O 0 U J W TZOZ/9Z/01 '03ivoin szoUezn saoin�ag 6u,uaaui6u� �0 3uaw;aodaQ I ����o s'� �. �� ceacxi usiainsnaao��l ozz ais s�avisso... IIVX31 S31n(13HDS S13NVd 83MOd � scy adawnm ward ada � �i T•:o dmiunada z V m szast d I1SI21H� Snd210� �o ll� — "� `tlN90Ntl1.3..53WtlyP,90 ft �••••• z wwmd S1N3W3fOHd WI DrnVHOAH MiSAS NOI1tlHlll3 c� 1N'dld 1N3W1V3H1 H31VM SN3A315'N'O ay.........,,.yS �"iieo3d � 115121HJ Sf1d210J j0 AlIJ nd'didj_ou�wo'n. mmsT 11101�BW0f11y1tl o — z z i _ a LL z _ _ w F LL Y a a 2 2, M O ; g g ow ae3 ad3 a s3, ttai a '� LL ttai W N Y _ WIT I _ Z tta� J LU rv3 - o �� _ yo aZ aZol 4 4 4 4 w lo r17 w o - " zo5 5 o o 4 4 9 9 4 �m 3d 531 m m m m m m m m m n V #ai ED 1 2 3 P = LL - W s3, m m m m m M M M m Q LL LU aid N r N n r n N N h 7 a a— d aj3 aL - o L-L o 5 3aoa WDI -031VOdn samnlag 6u,r�aaw6u3 �o ;uawamda� Q;,a coac xc sld—soscs CIIHD iiavd $GX3j bjOTS3lf103H�5318VJ'S 11flONOJ Il$!dH? S ld J 7, do Aiio w iana�a _ v dgwyynd � S1NINVId Ild WI 71 AHI H AH W315A5 NOIlVblllj c 1�.7r rr r1,. 1Ntlld 1N3W1tl3F111131tlM SN3A31S'N'0 lSl8H3 sndU0J J0 AiD �t -1/1vN��s uo arnzti ,g� 3 . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w _ _ _ a m o o a o a o oMoMo o a�a� �3�a o a a -------- ------------ cgrgr3rgrgrgrgrgcgcgtgcgc tU rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc rc J rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz rcz 3 01 i a m m m W Y W $W 4 W $ W x W W 4 n 4 g Y Y 4 4 4 4 4 Q � r au a r e n a r a r a au a av a av v ry a r a r n a n a r a au a n a n a r a ri a r a N a y y a N Z m N Z m ry Z m N Z n 4 Z n 4 Z�N Z�N Z� ry z n 4 Z� 4 f 4 Zm 4 Zm 4 Zn 4 Zm 4 Zm 4 Zm 4 Zm 4 Zm 4 Z szoa/ez/o� aaivadn szoUezn -qi-�� sa !—S 6uuaaui6u� j0 3—a -dao S �t r o.S —i'll-H—dao I Ozz31s'S—VIssas£s sVX31 £jOZS3ln03HJS31OVD R11n4NOJ � o � gz>SL ilsibHO sndboi jo lllo ��a� 3 o O - `^�`" `tlN90Ntl1.3..53Wtly z V �y% 17�7iA77A1f1�7� S1N 3W3AONd WI Jn ntlil0AH W31SAS 0lllj ^ o H o 4•.. IJVC ++ U'Y\I�111��Cl 1Nt/1d 1N3W1tl3El a31tlM SN3/�3IS 1$'N'O �6�3iio3�+v5 ilsiaHJ snd'dOn JO AilD Noudiaos3a ,� 3iva ON No17 -idla— ne Siva oN NIISIAIa zozioz2� 11�Noi—oinn3aVnivrvOis w w w w w w w w w w _ - - - - - - - - _I El El El El El 5 5 -32- 3R r 3°a 3a 3a is 3a QO QO z a❑z a❑z QO Q❑z QO QO i0 z i0 z Fz Fz �z Fz Fz Fz Fz Fz Fz rzo FV FU FU FU �U FV FU FU �U �V - O 'w O¢'w O¢'w C rt- O 'w O R O O 'w O 2w O a 0¢a O rta O rta O rta G rtn O rtn O rta O Ra O R Iz 3 z00 0 0 0 0 03 ; o w - - - - - - - - - - - - a g a g a g a g `n `nnnm `n n V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V �ZN/WOI -OliVOdn szoUezi��y�7j iracu iisia�n snaa 3a 3a scs sa !—S 6uuaaui6u3 j0 3uauaaaodaQ Q _ aas l9 ozz 3is's3aavi...zc ZZ-£T S31OV 3 0 �,:p35 jj;✓o $�1X31 bj0£531f143HJ5319tlJ'81111ON0J f�o � UZ 9L IIS18HO sndaoo to .11lo Fall"' z v - 3tlN90Ntll 3 53Wtlf �_ o �y% f 17�7iA77A1f1�7� S1N 3W3AONd WI Jll fltlil0AN W31SAS 0lllj H o `4•.. IJVC ++ U'Y\I�111��Cl 1Nt/1d 1N3W1tl3El a31tlM SN3/�3IS 1$'N'O sd•...........:ys �"iieo3d � ilsiaH:)mdaoD Jo uiD Noilaia0s3a 7 31V4 ON Noi 1— NOI1dl-- AB 31. oN N-1— ozioz2 un3aVnivrvgis op 3 3 ? 3 3 3 32 - 3� - 3a - 3n - 3n - 3a - 3a - 3n - 3n - 3� - 3� - 3n - 3a - 3a - o _ a3 a3 a3 a3 ¢3 ¢3 ¢3 ai ai R3 a3 a3 ¢3 ¢3 ¢3 ai ai a3 a3 a3 i x a a a a 2a d2 a a If o e i2 M M T M m �ZN/WOI -031VOdn szoUezn s11!AJag 6uuaaui6u3 JO 3uau1}aodaa o0 wow 1 stl ��,_o� irosz xi usiaN�sn�aeaas l9ozz 3is s3iaysissosss z ss aas Q n JS 319V7 B 1If10N0J o$d�'s1 b j0 b 53111O3H7lnl,w3 _ }o szasc d IIS18HD sndNOo jo u/j v `tlN90Ntl1.3..53Wtly ICL jy% ! 11'71AT1ATIl'7� S1N3W3AOad WI DrnVNOAH AUSAS NOI V8711j ^ o INTd 1N3A1V3N1 N31VM SN3A31S'N'0 w ay.........,,:yS �'ii eo3�r FROM IlSINHJ Sf1d2JOJ j0 AlIJ NOlidl I— ON NDISI �uo��ewo7ny1�N915 w N w J p¢ p O ¢ ¢ ¢ a a s ? m m z a z �a., V o ❑ LL z z p p 0 > > z z a0 w ? O Q U w a i W a a ❑ ❑ w p a w 0 a w LL a ❑ ¢ J a W w o ¢ \ a z z z N o z w 0, z = z z w p z ww a f) O a O LL N N a Ja Z a m w LL N J ¢ O a a A w w z z ¢ ¢ z `" ? or w ¢ z z " r� ati a a C S o 0 0 o a a a a o z a a a s S Q a d r a w a m o a a ¢ LL M w ° ❑0 LL° ° o z Z o r ¢ r o w ¢ z , o a , z w \ a w a LL LL z z cs p a u a a LL z ❑ a a Qa Fo 0 0 d d 0 O p 0 d N O w r r w > > z z r > r > a r w z tt r > d 5: om 0a caia }} r QaLLLL LL � � LLc LL z❑ �� ❑� ❑� ° wwww = mx � mx LL � � o w w ° a s a w a w x a ¢ w a w ate¢ uLL aw 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ❑ p 0 0 r 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 r O 0 0 ❑r U Z F ❑F ❑ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x LL LL a x x x x - a - LL FF Fz LL° °0 00 w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w o m ❑m ( a a a ¢ ¢ a a a a a ¢ Q a a o ❑ o 0 0 0 0 ❑ ❑ o 0 o p o o ❑ o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ o ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ o ❑ ❑ ❑ wm wm o z z z z z z z z z z z z z z a z z z z z z z a z z z aw <0 ❑ z a a a ¢ ¢ a a a ¢ a ¢ a a a > a a ¢ a a a s > a a a Q O > > > > > > > > > > > > > > 'm o ❑ ❑ o 0 0 0 0 ❑ ❑ o o . o ❑ . o o ❑ o 0 0 0 o w z z z z z z z z z z z z z z ❑ Z Z Z Z Z Z Z a ❑ Z Z Z �ry 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o w o 0 0 0 0 0 0 o w o 0 0 ❑ o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 > o 0 0 0 0 0 0 ❑ 0 0 o LLa ❑ o \ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ > ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ > ❑ ❑ ❑ w� ❑z S( S c7 c7 c9 c7 c7 c7 c7 c7 c7 c7 c7 c7 c7 c7 c9 c9 c� c3 c9 c7 c7 c7 c7 c7 z o > wz ¢ x x � � � � � rc � � � m tt x x x tt x tt tt � � � Q❑ 'a z 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 m 3 3 � 3 3 m 3 3 3 0� z z z z z z z z z z z z z z 0 z z z z z z z p z z z J I J J J J J J J J J J J J J J r J J J J J J J r J J J Nw t ¢\) a a a a a a a a a a a ¢ ¢ W a a a ¢ a ¢ a W a a a r r r r r r r r r r r r r r _ UJ t/J to m N t� N N to N Ul tJ1 N N Q N UJ to N N Z jef J J J J J J J J J 0 J J 7 W w p p W W W ° w p w W O W W O W 0 0 iymj W O O O W W W W W ° W 3 z z w 3 z 0 z 3 3 z 0 0 3 z 0 0 z z 3 3 0 0 I ID 0 0 ° ° ° o w 0 ° ° 0 ° ° 0 ° 0 0 ° ° 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o N J ^ o o ^ o o o J o o o f o 0 o N o w S z J 5 z a a z z z z a J z a z r LU L } a a a 2 S U w a U w w w w w w w w a w w ❑ w m z w tt V r r r r r r r r N ` rc a ¢ a a a a a ¢x a x ❑ w a a o z❑ a _ F z r a r r r r ¢ a r a r ¢ LL a p r r ¢ Q w r U U K LL a m Q a N m m m m m a a m m a 3 ti cs x w z w LL LL LL ¢ �" LL z a LL ma LL p N a x a x x x x x m x a x x w Z a a J a a a a a Z rc w m m m Q 111 7 7 7 w z z o > > > x a < d d a a a a ¢ ¢ N m LL o m m a a a a a 1 x x x ¢ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ x x x x F ¢ x ❑ ❑ ❑ a d a ¢ ¢ X X �` U U O D U U r ¢ a ¢ m X y r U U U ¢ ¢ y y z w z w z x r r m w uY7 w m m ? 2 wm Ym Q 2 U' 2 O O C7 00 U U u u u at U U u _ u N N N N N N N t4 N ti ��>w 3 �' m N N N N � N N N 3 m N )# H H H r 2 r # r r x r N H eoi ?. ai it ? c N v N N U a 0 M a it a it ae U a Zp N N N n �((( v p p �n n N � N N ¢ a m N W V V 4 Q V 4 CL N V V V W V 4 W V Nj LL w w w o 0 0 o o a Q o w w o a o x z r m a a a a W W a a a a a a a a a a a a a s V a a a d ~ a 0 (\ U J a tt j00 a za m a 1 a a m m a ¢ d a a NN a z1 a a = C., z ¢ ¢ �� U' NN� ¢ - W a ❑ ❑ LL ❑U O ~x x x O K W ~ F S S �ZOZ WTI -O31VOdn � « a > m = < . + : _\< % » d zsi� � sodao93 «o ,«,m ,�_, \ 27 ® . . ' _ 8 �, /N� : �5 ° IS^liSlw@mam2Ra § onO _ _ �_ \ = j ! 2 - 2Q} 2Q G 2 . \ §Q /EO§Q 290 Ell, k 2 \ \ } \\\} \ \ §6 NO §d } ; z § ± ? \ 2 \ L L L LLAI - _ jz/ p L ; � \ ^ - - \ \ / � , \ , - -- -- / - - - $ LU �Z am, MiVOdn zaroe ssfrss sa�inaas buuaau�bu3 }o auaw�xodap � say a3swnN wan a3n31ns3a 3ae1 I ypeQ', ` s Tcvxz xl'unallosnaao� ozz 3ls's�aysssosrs tom: SVX31 I-SlIV134 CI MINVIS IIAID ICI �e'er € rn •' Sl Itl130 OiItlONV1S d ilsiaH� sndbo� �o ,�1i� � ., S 3 S1N3W3WONd �Wa '✓�y,��+�'� 1lr�l��llCC11 :)IlnV8(]AH A31SAS lllj 1N HiV]di 831VM SN3A3iS N0 IISIUH:)Sfdi0:)3OAIIy W o NO-1-30 31tl0 'DN NDi5N3a NOO 1-30 A9 31M 'ON N05N3a I - LU <11 wp G� LU - - O x o O �3 m z O H I D I I 10 o x w x� 9 z�w w -- o F- - z _ w W a o n %����������y V a p - p Q wLU IN N m LL! m1 wa w - - ` w w Lu m LL -z m -w� 82 a - 531av - LU LL �a Q O / F ? _ ry p� x - C Q LL a�� a� _�„ ��u C[ngut o O - OI Q F- a'ta°°s a 6a•/p ul , z _ „-• �, g LU \` Z, - o��a zzX LU __ z. �oGF w oFm LL = o mJ mo o2�� c LU .. QG m z + \o m oam » o ozm �am o oo J LL _ z om a LU z .'f`::; wQ �� x'. I- _ w In \ 'NIW 'NIIN \ zQz as a3 FpoG poi io r.nm� maw°u ?gau rw� 910Z/bl/£0:031VOd0 « _ a ,_ < ° :w sq£ Iwo}_,em s, aw 0 ) . a�, ,m_a k \ , ISlIw, a mam @ 20 : » / @« > b]W e w 3 t / ® ) «N 66^ ^wmm/am 2 Gad ` ! * > * w �§ \ `wJ _ . =§;a§:§!§ . - §;2,- - 0 ® ® §/\ _ } tI 2 §®H-Si : c , _ _ - _-, �� : § \ ( \\j \ `\ \ ^ a � - cL z [ _ - \ : Lo� �\ \ ) \ 0 . \a 0 / / \ / \ \ \ - � ' _ * ) ` a \ E \ ( ........... ` § < g .. ..... E§[ § c /\H2 § \ , @ : } } ` \ ) { : LLI§ § \ Lu 1 \ ( 12. \ mOZ/V.a ---------------------------------------------------------- .......... a .,o,ry U���. ,�n�.,,.,,�,u a, �� a.. ,,,n� ,�rn� �_o����. ...�aou� .........d. Ia3aw N wn a3a3 s 3d 3da a 9.E +os p o 0 � j� 6 icw�xi'linaH�snaao>Il ozz ais's�avis s os�s SV= II S]lVi3(1(IMINV1SlVDINVHAVA � US14VHD SMIOO JO .U1O SINE(]aavaNvis x Q $; !F agWWmd siN3w3noadwlonnvaanHw3isnsNouvaila � iNtnd iN3wiV3ai 831VM sN3n3is N o x+ IlSINHJ sndNOD dO AllD MOIIil000 A bO 9N M 7Y0 VI� I I I _ I ALL— G 3 m -�A m'NIW Q I 3oa= oLU a m o cWc a W C IV7 111J I - LU O \ ��maaamaFo��a�?3 I o o„m �gp a a Q°'_ — I I I Z I 3 a =o w o LL� 3 T - o - _ LU I Q z c a N a3 N I a z — wM O - o ol LU I LU 0 LU J (� I o T z G _ X LU I (] W? aka p3 Q�mFGw 3 W �>� _ �wam� I oLL o g g w- oaao —_ a I Na3 _ I I awa/fNco a'ipoan I I � V O vi psj o v ^ V Pq o R N N T N � R R W C ao N � �m � A a v ui � R E R W C OA N r � � O N N N e � W 3 R R W C V1 F O X �o uu ww o a 3 R .. E R W c ao 1%f